The Egyptian Book of the Dead 1898

8/14/2019 The Egyptian Book of the Dead 1898

http://slidepdf.com/reader/full/the-egyptian-book-of-the-dead-1898 1/572

LONra

oqlllz-+I

r

P

°r~~'?Fd~w y:

C"4

7i



THE SEKHET-HETEPU OR ELYSIAN FIELDS.

[From the Papyrus o f Ani (Brit. Mus . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 3 5 ) 1 .

son A M

.

W 5 1

OMNI

8~

~

~

/

'

Y `

'

/

` »v

`

Q }0~ oo" ;

`

'

'

D 2x v

|

\

/

(

«

{

(

zio s t

`

~~~-~. ~ ~

l i l t u < a1 0

/

Ani a n d a n d w o r s h i p p i ng g o d s i n t h e a b o d e o f t h e b l e s s e d



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD

THE CHAPTERSOF COMING FORTH BY DAY

THE EGYPTIAN TEXT ACCORDING TO THE THEBANRECENSION IN HIEROGLYPHIC EDITED FROMNUMEROUS PAPYRI, WITH A TRANSLATION,

VOCABULARY, ETC .

BY

E, A . WALLIS BUDGELITT. D ., D. LIT ., F . S . A .

KEEPER OF THE EGYPTIAN AND ASSYRIAN ANTIQUITIES

IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM

LONDONKEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO., LTD .

PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD1898 .

[ALL RIGHTS RESERVED . ]



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD

THE CHAPTERSOF COMING FORTH BY DAY

AN ENGLISH TRANSLATIONWITH INTRODUCTION, NOTES, ETC .

f l y

E . A . WALLIS BUDGELITT. D ., D. LIT ., F . S . A .

KEEPER OF T HE EGYPTIA N AND A SSYRIAN ANT IQUITIES

IN THE BRITISH MUSEUM

LONDONKEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TRUBNER & CO. , L TD .

PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD1888 .

[ALL RIGHTS RESERVED .





TOSIR EDWARD MAUNDE THOMPSON

K . C . B . , D . C . L . , L L . D .

PRINCIPAL LIBRARIAN OF THE BRITISH MUSEUM

DEAR SIR EDWARD,With great pleasure I avail myself of the oppor-

tunity of inscribing yo ur name at the head of this

work on the Theban Recension of the Book of theDead, for yo u have taken n o o rdina ry interes t in its

inception , and pro gress, and completion . I do it the

mor e gl adly because I kn ow that ev erythin g which

concerns the religious beliefs of the an cient Egyptians

and the won derful doctrine of the resurrection of the

spiritual body and of its ev erlasting existence, which

they ev olv ed thousan ds of years before o ur era, has

the greatest attraction for you . It is n ow many years

ago since you r friendship with our common friend the

late Prof. W. Wright began, and you r helpful sym-

pathy with his v arious Oriental works was n ev er want-

ing ; the like friendship and the like sympathy you

have e xtended to mysel f his pup il . F or bo th I thank

you, an d I subscribe myself,

G r a t e f u l l y y o u r s ,

E . A. WALLIS BUDGE .

LONDON, July 27th, X8 97 .



PREFACE .

The present volume forms part of a work on the

Theban Recension of the Book of the Dead, which I

have prepared for Messrs . Kegan Paul and Co . w i t h

a view of supplying an edition of the Egyptian text

in hieroglyphic, a full Vocabulary to the same with

c o p i o u s r e f e r e n c e s , a n d a c o m p l e t e t r a n s l a t i o n , w i t h

introductory chapters upon the history, object and

contents of the Book of the Dead, in a handy form

a n d a t a m o d e r a t e p r i c e . I t i s t h e m o s t c o m p l e t e e d i -

t i o n o f t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n h i t h e r t o p u b l i s h e d , b u t

future discov eries in Egypt may at any moment re-

s u l t i n t h e r e c o v e r y o f p a p y r i c o n t a i n i n g C h a p t e r s a t

present unknown to us .

T h e t e x t s o f t h e H e l i o p o l i t a n R e c e n s i o n o f t h e B o o k

o f t h e D e a d o f t h e f i f t h a n d s i x t h d y n a s t i e s , w h i c h a r e

inscribed upon the Pyramids of Unas, Teta, Pepi I . ,

M e r - e n - R d , a n d P e p i I I , a n d w h i c h m a y b e r e g a r d e d a s

the most ancient form of the work now known to us,

h a v e b e e n p u b l i s h e d , t o g e t h e r w i t h F r e n c h t r a n s l a t i o n s



V I I I PREFACEof them, by M. M aspero in the various v olumes ofR e c u e i l d e

Travaux, an d separ ately un der the title

of Les Inscriptions des Pyramides de Saggarah, Paris,

18 94 . The texts of the Recension in u se during the

ele v en th an d twelfth dyna sties, which are fo un d in-

scribed upo n the coffins o f the period, hav e been

published by Lepsius and Maspero , an d an excellent

idea of their contents may be gained from B irch's trans-

lation of the text on the coffin of A mamu, p ublished

with a complete facsimile by the Trustees of the British

M useu m under the title Egyptian T e x t s o f t h e e a r l i e s t

period from the coffin of Amamu, L o ndo n , 1 8 86 . The

texts o f the T heban Recen sion , which was in use from

the eighteenth to the twenty-second dynasty, i . e ., from

about B . C . i 6oo to B . C . go o, and which is found in-

scribed on sev eral papyri, both plain and illuminated,

have been p ublished by Birch, M ariette, Lee mans , De-

veria and others, and an eclectic edition of the Recen-

sion in use from the eighteenth to the twentieth dynasty

was pu blished with v arian ts and E i n l e i t u n g by M . N a -

ville in 1886 . Tran slation s o f single papyri belon ging

to this period have been published by Dev eria and

Pierret, Guieyesse, Lefebure, M assey, Pleyte, an d

others, a nd certain C hapters of this Recens ion hav e

been transl ated and discussed by v arious E gypto-

logists . T exts, both hieratic an d hiero glyp hic, which



PREFACE, . I X

w e r e c o p i e d a n d i l l u s t r a t e d f o r t h e p r i e s t s a n d p r i e s t -

esses of Amen during the twenty-first and twenty-

s e c o n d d y n a s t i e s , h a v e b e e n p u b l i s h e d b y B i r c h , L e e -

mans, Lepsius, M ariette, and Maspero, and a fine

example of the hieratic MS . o f t h e p e r i o d f o l l o w i n g ,

e n t i t l e d R i t u e l F u n c s r a i r e , w a s p u b l i s h e d b y E . d e R o u g e '

i n 18 61 . Of the texts which represent the Saite

Recension of the Book of the Dead, sev eral M SS .

have been printed and described . T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t

of these, however, is the famous papyrus preserv ed

at Turin, of which Lepsius published a good copy as

f a r b a c k a s 1842 e n t i t l e d D a s T o d t e n b u c h d e r A e g y p t e r .

The Book of the Dead which was in use through-

out the Graeco-Roman and Roman periods is well

i l l u s t r a t e d b y t h e h i e r a t i c t e x t s p u b l i s h e d a n d t r a n s -

lated by Birch in the P r o c e e d i n g s o f t h e S o c i e t y o f

B i b l i c a l A r c h a e o l o g y , v o l . V I I , p . 49 f f., and by Lieb-

l e i n i n h i s L e L i v r e E g y p t i e n Q u e m o l l 110M e l f r i ' s s e ,

L e i p z i g , 1895 .

T h e f i r s t t o p u b l i s h a c o m p l e t e t r a n s l a t i o n o f a n y

Recension of the Book of the Dead was Birch, who

i n 1867 g a v e a n E n g l i s h v e r s i o n o f t h e T u r i n p a p y r u s

i n t h e f i f t h v o l u m e o f B u n s e n , E g y p t ' s P l a c e i n U n i -

v e r s a l H i s t o r y , p p . 123-33 3 . N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e f a c t

that the Recension here translated is the Saite or

latest of all, and that the text of the Turin MS . i s



X PREFACEfaulty in many places, Birch's rendering gave a new

i m p u l s e t o t h e s t u d y o f t h e E g y p t i a n r e l i g i o n , a n d i t

has formed the groundwork of the translations made

b y E g y p t o l o g i s t s s u b s e q u e n t l y . The thing to wonder

at is not the mistakes which he made, but that he

was able, at that early date, to translate so much

c o r r e c t l y . I n 1 8 8 2 P i e r r e t p u b l i s h e d a F r e n c h t r a n s -

l a t i o n o f t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s e n t i t l e d Le Livre des Morts

d e s a n c i e n s J. o y p t i e n s , and in 1894 Davis published an

E n g l i s h v e r s i o n o f P i e r r e t ' s F r e n c h t r a n s l a t i o n a t N e w

York . U p t o t h e p r e s e n t , h o w e v e r , n o c o m p l e t e t r a n s -

lation of the Theban Recension has appeared . T r a n s -

l a t i o n s o f s i n g l e p a p y r i , e . g . , t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ,

t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , t h e P a p y r u s o f S u t i m e s , t h e P a p y r u s

of Neb-qed, etc., have been made by Deveria and

P i e r r e t , G u i e y e s s e , M a s s e y , m y s e l f , a n d o t h e r s ; and

a t r a n s l a t i o n o f t h e t e x t s p u b l i s h e d b y N a v i l l e i n h i s

7 o d t e n b n c h , and by others, was begun by Renouf in

t h e Proceedings of the Society of Biblical Archaeology,

Vol . X I V .

Since the appearance of Naville's great work in

188 6 several extremely important papyri have been

d i s c o v e r e d , a n d i t i s n o w p o s s i b l e t o a d d t o t h e t e x t s

of the Theban Recension which he published a con-

s i d e r a b l e n u m b e r o f C h a p t e r s , e t c . F rom the Papyrus

o f A n i w e o b t a i n I n t r o d u c t i o n s t o C h a p t e r s X V I I I a n d



PREFACE X I

CXXV, a hymn to Ra, a hymn to Osiris, texts re-

f e r r i n g t o t h e j u d g m e n t S c e n e , a l l o f w h i c h a r e n e w ;

besides these we gain from it a complete, though

short, version of Chapter CLXX V, and the Vignettes

a r e c o l o u r e d w i t h a c a r e a n d b e a u t y h i t h e r t o u n k n o w n

i n p a p y r i o f t h i s c l a s s . O f g r e a t e r i nt e r e s t t e x t u a l l y ,

however, is the Papyrus of Nu, which the Trustees

o f t h e B r i t i s h M u s e u m a c q u i r e d i n i 8 9 0 . I t i s , I b e -

l i e v e , t h e o l d e s t o f i l l u m i n a t e d p a p y r i k n o w n , a n d i t

c e r t a i n l y w a s w r i t t e n i n t h e f i r s t h a l f o f t h e p e r i o d o f

t h e r u l e o f t h e k i n g s o f t h e e i g h t e e n t h d y n a s t y ; i t i s

n e a r l y , i f n o t q u i t e , a s o l d a s t h e f a m o u s p a p y r u s o f

Nebseni . Unlike many of the papyri of that date it

was written throughout by one man, probably Nu

h i m s e l f . A s i n a l l p a p y r i l i n e s a r e o m i t t e d h e r e a n d

t h e r e , a n d o n e s h o r t C h a p t e r i s r e p e a t e d ; i n i t , h o w -

ever, are about twenty Chapters of the Theban Re-

cension which have not hitherto been found, and

several which have, up to the present, been only

k n o w n t o e x i s t i n s i n g l e m a n u s c r i p t s .

F r o m t h e a b o v e f a c t s i t i s c l e a r t h a t a n e d i t i o n o f

the texts of the Theban Recension which should con-

t a i n a l l s u c h n e w C h a p t e r s , e t c ., was needed. When

a few years ago Sir F . Maunde Thompson suggested

to me to make a translation of the Book of the Dead

for popular use I decided to do so, and to publish



X I I PREFACE .

a t the same time an edition of the Egyptian texts ;

f o rin these days the reader insists, and rightly, upon

the rep roduction o f the o riginal documents as far as

po ssible, so that he may be able to control the ren -

derings set forth by the translator . Since no papyrus

contains all the Chapters of the Theban Recension,

and n o two papyri agree either in respect of contents

or arran gement o f the C hapters, an d the critical

v alue o f every text in a papyrus is n ot always the

same, it follows that a complete edition of al l the

kno wn Chapters of the T heban Recens ion is imposs ible

unl ess recourse be had to sev eral papyri . I hav e

therefore made use o f severa l, an d as a result trans-

lation s of about 16o Chapters, no t including different

ve rsions , hymns a nd rubrics, are given in the prese nt

volume ; I hav e also added translation s of 16 Chapters

of the Saite Recension , both becaus e they form go od

specimens of the rel igiou s compo sitions of the la ter

period and illustrate some curious beliefs, and because,

having adopted the numbering o f the C hapters em-

ployed by Lepsius, they were needed to make thenu mbering of the Chapters in this edition con secutive .

My translation has been made as literal as po ssible,

my aim being to let the reader j udge fo r himsel f the

conten ts of the Theban B oo k of the Dead . As it is

intended for po pular use I have n ot encumbered the



PREFACE X I I I

pages with voluminous n otes, nor have I attempted

t o e x p l a i n t h e a l l u s i o n s a n d o b s c u r i t i e s w h i c h n o m a n ,

a t p r e s e n t , u n d e r s t a n d s . F o r r e f e r e n c e s t o t h e w o r k s

o f o t h e r w r i t e r s t h e r e a d e r i s r e f e r r e d t o t h e B i b l i o -

graphy at the end of my P a p y r u s o f A n i i n t h e B r i -

t i s h M u s e u m , London, 1895, and to the notes in the

I n t r o d u c t i o n t o t h a t w o r k. The source of each Chap-

t e r i s s e t f o r t h c l e a r l y a b o v e i t , t o g e t h e r w i t h a d e -

s c r i p t i o n o f t h e V i g n e t t e t o i t a s i t i s f o u n d i n t h e

best papyri of the eighteenth and nineteenth dynas-

t i e s . S i n c e t h e V i g n e t t e s f o r m e d o r i g i n a l l y n o p a r t o f

the B ook of the Dead, no attempt has been made

to reproduce them here ; a c o l l e c t i o n o f a l l t h e V i g -

nettes found in the Theban papyri, especially those

which are found in the B ooks of the Dead made for

the priests of Amen after B . C . iooo, would be of

g r e a t v a l u e , b u t , u n l e s s t h e y w e r e r e p r o d u c e d i n t h e i r

a c t u a l c o l o u r s , m u c h o f t h e i r i n t e r e s t w o u l d b e l o s t .

The whole j udgment Scene, and the Elysian Fields,

and a portion of the Vignette to the first Chapter

have, however, been beautifully reproduced in full

colours by Mr . W. Griggs from the Papyrus of Ani,

a n d t h e s e f o r m e x c e l l e n t e x a m p l e s o f t h e a r t i s t i c w o r k

e x e c u t e d u p o n p a p y r i i n t h e e i g h t e e n t h d y n a s t y ; t h o s e

w h o r e q u i r e o t h e r e x a m p l e s a r e r e f e r r e d t o t h e s e c o n d

e d i t i o n o f t h e c o l o u r e d f a c s i m i l e o f t h e Papyrus of



X IV PREFACEAni p u b l i s h e d b y t h e T r u s t e e s o f t h e B r i t i s h M u s e u m

in 1894 .

I n t h e I n t r o d u c t i o n a s k e t c h o f t h e h i s t o r y o f t h e

growth and development of the Book of the Dead

has been given, and to illustrate the palaeography

o f t h e d i f f e r e n t R e c e n s i o n s , f r o m a b o u t B . C . 3 5 0 0 t o

about A . D . Z o o , e i g h t e e n p l a t e s h a v e b e e n a p p e n d e d .

T h e r e m a i n i n g b r i e f a c c o u n t s o f s o m e o f t h e r e l i g i o u s

views of the Egyptians are necessary for the under-

standing of the aim and object of the Book of the

Dead ; they would have been fuller had space per-

m i t t e d , a n d I r e s e r v e a m o r e d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n o f

them for a future work on the Egyptian Religion .

W i t h t h e v i e w o f s h e w i n g h o w , i n t h e P t o l e m a i c p e r i o d

and later times, the Egyptians hoped to obtain for

t h e i r d e a d a l l t h e b e n e f i t s w h i c h w e r e b e l i e v e d t o b e

secured for them by the use of the numerous Chap-

ters of earlier periods, by means of a work which,

t h o u g h e x t r e m e l y s h o r t , p r e s e r v e d a l l t h e e s s e n t i a l b e -

l i e f s o f t h e o l d e n t i m e , a t r a n s l a t i o n h a s b e e n a d d e d

o f t h e " B o o k o f B r e a t h i n g s " f r o m t h e t e x t o f t h e P a -

p y r u s o f K e r a s h e r ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 9 9 9 5 ) .By means of

this and the extracts from the Pyramid Texts given

in my chapter on the Elysian Fields a comparison of

t h e b e l i e f s o f t h e E g y p t i a n s i n t h e e a r l i e s t a n d l a t e s t

times can be made .



PREFACE X V

I n a s m a l l v o l u m e a c c o m p a n y i n g t h e t e x t o f t h e T h e -

b a n R e c e n s i o n w i l l b e f o u n d a V o c a b u l a r y , c o n t a i n i n g

o v e r 35 ,000 r e f e r e n c e s , w h i c h h a s b e e n b o u n d u p s e -

parately in deference to the wishes of many . I n t h e

case of uncommon words every example of its use

which occurs in the boo k is noted ; for commoner

w o r d s c o p i o u s r e f e r e n c e s a r e g i v e n i n o r d e r t h a t t h e

reader may the more easily compare their meanings

i n s e v e r a l p a s s a g e s .

F i n a l l y i t i s m y d u t y t o e x p r e s s m y g r a t e f u l t h a n k s

t o t h e T r u s t e e s o f t h e B r i t i s h M u s e u m f o r p e r m i s s i o n

to print certain Chapters of the Papyrus of Nebseni

a n d o f t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i f r o m t h e p u b l i c a t i o n s i s s u e d

by them . My thanks are also due to M r . H o l z h a u s e n

of Vienna for the care which he has bestowed upon

t h e p r i n t i n g o f t h e t h r e e p a r t s o f t h i s w o r k , a n d t o

M r . Griggs for the coloured reproductions from the

Papyrus of Ani which he has executed with his usual

s k i l l .

E . A. WALLIS BUDGE .

LONDON, August 19th, 189 7 .



LIST OF ILL USTRAT IONS .

I . C o l o u r e d p l a t e s :-i . The Judgment Scene . . . . . . Frontispiece .

2 . S c e n e f r o m t h e V i g n e t t e o f C h a p t e r I . . . T o f a c e p a g e i g

3 . T h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s . . . . . . . . . T o f a c e p a g e1 7 0 -

1 1 . P l a t e s t o i l l u s t r a t e t h e h i s t o r y o f t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d :-

r . From the Sarcophagus of Amamu . . .

2 . From the Sarcophagus of Sebek-5a . . .

3 . From the Papyrus of Nebseni

4 . From the Papyrus of Nu . . .

6 , 7 . From the Papyrus of Ani

From the Papyrus of Hu-nefer

Papyrus

5 ,

8 .

9 .From the

r o . From the Papyrus

i i . From the Papyrus of Anhai

12 . From the Papyrus Brit . Mus . N o .

1 3 . From the Papyrus of

1 4 . From the Papyrus of

15 . From the Papyrus of

1 6 . From the Papyrus of Kerasher

17 . From the Papyrus

r 8 . From the Papyrus

T o f a c e p a g e LVT o f a c e p a g e LV I

T o f a c e p a g e LVIII

T o f a c e p a g e LIX

T o f a c e p a g e s LX, LX I, LXII

. . . T o f a c e p a g e

o f N e t c h e m e t ( h i e r o g l y p h i c )

T o f a c e p a g e LXIVo f N e t c h e m e t ( h i e r a t i c )

T o f a c e p a g e Lxv

. . . T o f a c e p a g e LXVI1 0 , 4 7 8

T o f a c e p a g e LxvII

Heru-em-heb T o f a c e p a g e L X V ' I I I

Heru . . . . . T o f a c e p a g e LXIXAuf-ankh . . T o f a c e p a g e LXX

( v i g n e t t e )

T o f a c e p a g e LXXIo f K e r a s h e r ( t e x t ) T o f a c e p a g e LXXII

B r i t . Mus. No . r o , r r r

T o f a c e p a g e LXX III

b

LXIII



CONTENTS .

PAGEPREFACE . . . . . . . . I

LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS . . . . . . XVII

LIST OF CHAPTE RS, HYMNS, ETC . . . . . . . XIX-XXXVINTRODUCT ION :-

THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD, WITH EIGHTEENPLATES . . . . . . . . . XXXVII

OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION . . . LXXIXTHE JUDGMENT . . . . . . . . . . . XCIII

THE ELYSIAN FIELDS . . . . . . CXCX I. V I I

CLXVIICLXX XIII

CXCVCCII

3-i5

. . . I c 3 - 3 5 4

THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . . . . . .

THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . .

A BOOK OF THE DEAD OF NESI-KHONSU . . .

BOOK OF BREATHINGS . . . . . .

A BOOK OF THE DEAD OF THE ROMAN PERIODINTRODUCTORY HYMNS , . . . , , , . ,

THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . . .



LIST OF CHAPTERS, HYMNS, ETC .

Hymns Introductory to the Book of the Dead :

A n i , s h e e t 2 . . . . . . . . . I I

T e x t s r e l a t i n g t o t h e w e i g h i n g o f t h e h e a r t 12

The Chapters of coming forth by day

Chap . I . HERE BEGIN THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTHBY DAY . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 5 . With

R u b r i c

Chap . V . THE CHAP'IER OF NOT LETTING WORK BE DONEbx

I9

Chap . IB. THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE SAHU TO ENTERTHE TUAT . From the Papyrus of Nekhtu-Amen . W i t h

R u b r i c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Chap . I I . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY, AND

OF LIVING AFTER DEATH . From the Papyrus of Ani,

s h e e t 1 8 . . . . . . 2 5

Chap . I I I . ANOTHER CHAPTER LIKE UNTO THE PRECEDING .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 13 . . . . . . . . . 2 5

Chap . I V . THE CHAPTER OF PASSING OVER THE CELES-TIAL ROAD OF RE-STAU . From the Papyrus of NU,s h e e t Ig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

PAGEr . A HYMN TO RA . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet i . . . 3

2 . A HYMN TO RA . From the Papyrus of Qenna 5

3 . A HYMN To RA . From the Papyrus of Qenna 7

4. A HYMN TO RA . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f H u - n e f e r , s h e e t i 8

5 . A HYMN TO RA . From the Papyrus of Nekht, sheet 21

6 . A HYMN TO OSIRIS UN-NEFER . From the Papyrus o f

10



XX LIST OF CHAPTERS . PAGEIN THE UNDERWORLD. F rom the Papyrus of Nebseni,

s h e e t i i . . . 26Chap . V I . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE SHABTI FIGURE

TO DO WORK FOR A MAN IN THE UNDERWORLD . From

the Papyrus o f Nebseni, sheet io . . . 2 7

Chap . V II . THE CHAPTER OF PASSING OVER THE ABO-MINABLE BACK OF Apepi . F rom the Papyrus of An i,

sheet 2 2 . . . . . . . . . 2 7

Chap . VIII . THE CHAPTER OF PASSING TI-TROUGH AI/ENTETAND COMING FORTH BY DAY. From the Papyrus of

Ani, sheet 18 . . . 2 8

Chap . IX . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY AFTERHAVING MADE THE PASSAGE THROUGH THE TOMB .

From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet i 8 . . . 2 8

Chap . X ANOTHER CHAPTER TO BE SAID BY A MAN WHOCOMETH FORTH BY DAY AGAINST HIS ENEMIES IN THEUNDERWORLD. From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet r8 2 9

Chap . X I . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH AGAINST ENE-MIES IN THE UNDERWORLD . F rom the Papyrus of Nu,sheet 2 1 . . . 3 0

Chap . X II . THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO AND OF COM-ING FORTH FROM THE UNDERWORLD. From the Pa-pyrus of Nu, sheet 9 3 0

Chap . XIII . THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO AND OFCOMING FORTH FROM AMENTET . F rom the Papyrus of

Nebseni, sheet 12 . With Rubric . . . 31

•

Chap . XIV THE CHAPTER OF PUTTING AN END TO SHAMEIN THE HEART OF THE GOD. From the Papyrus of

Mes-em-neter . . . 3 2

Chap . XV . i . A HYMN OF PRAISE TO R . A WHEN HE RISETH .

From the Papyrus of An i, sheets 1 8 and ig .. . 32

2 . HYMN AND LITANY TO OSIRIS. From the Papyrus of

An i, sheet ig 343 . A HYMN TO RA WHEN HE RISETH. From the Papy-

rus of An i, sheets 2o and 21 . . . . . . 3 6



LIST OF CHAPTERS XXIPAGE

4 .A HYMN TO THE SETTING SUN . From the Papyrus

o f M u t - h e t e p , s h e e t 5 . . . . . . . . .40

5 . A HYMN TO THE SETTING SUN. From the Papyrus

of Nekhtu-Amen . . . . . . 42

6 . A HYMN TO THE SETTING SUN From a Papyrus at

Dublin . . . . . . . . . 4 4

Chap . XV L Vignette only . . . . . . 45

Chap . X V I I . HERE BEGIN THE PRAISES AND GLORIFYINGSOF COMING OUT FROM AND OF GOING INTO THEGLORIOUS UNDERWORLD WHICH IS IN THE BEAUTI-FUL AMENTET . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheets 7

-io, and from the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 14, 1 .

1 6 . f f . . . . . . . 48Chap . X V I I I . W i t h o u t t i t l e . F rom the Papyrus of Ani,

s h e e t s 12 , 13 and 1 4 .With Rubric . . . . . . 59

Chap . XIX . THE CHAPTER OF THE CIIAPLET OF VICTORY .

From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . . . . 6 5

Chap . X X . W i t h o u t t i t l e . From the Papyrus of Nebseni,

s h e e t 12 . With Rubric . . . 6 7

Chap . XXI . THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A MOUTH TO Tin , :

DECEASED IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t 9 . . . . . . 68

Chap . XXIL THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A MOUTH TO THEDECEASED IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus

o f A n i , s h e e t 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 9

Chap . X X I I I . THE CHAPTER OF OPENING THE MOLT H OFTHE DECEASED . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet i5 70

Chap . XXIV . THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING CHARMS UNTOTHE DECEASED IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Pa-

p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 1 5 . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1

Chap . X X V . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING A MAN TO POS-SESS MEMORY I N THE UNDERWORLD . From the Pa-

p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 1

Chap . XXVI . THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A HEART TO THEDECEASED I N THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus

o f A n i , s h e e t 15 . . . 72



XXII LIST OF CHAPTERS .

Chap . XXXII . THE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CRO-

PAGE

Chap . XXVII . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEARTOF A MAN BE TAKEN FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Ani, sheets1 5 a n d 1 6 . . . 7 3

Chap . XXV III . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE IIEARTOF THE DECEASED BE CARRIED AWAY FROM HIM INTHE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 5 7 4

Chap . XXIX . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEARTOF A MAN BE TAKEN AWAY FROM HIM IN THE UN-DERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 15 . . . 7 5

Chap . X XIX A . THE CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THEHEART OF THE DECEASED TO BE CARRIED AWAYDEAD IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of

Amen-hetep . . . 7 6

Chap . X XIX B . THE CHAPTER OF A HEART OF CARNE-LIAN, From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 33 . . . . . .

Chap . X X X . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEARTOF A MAN BE DRIVEN AWAY FROM HIM IN THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . .

7 7

Chap . XXX A. A LIKE CHAPTER . From the Papyrus of Nu,

s h e e t 5 . . . . . . . . . . 7 8

Chap . X X X B. THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEARTOF THE DECEASED BE DRIVEN AWAY FROM HIM INTHE UNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 1 5 .

With Rubric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 9

Chap . XXXI. TILE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CRO-CODILE THAT COMETII TO CARRY AWAY THE CHARMFROM TIIE DECEASED . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 5 .

With Rubric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 1

CODILE THAT COMETH 'r0 CARRY AWAY THE \IAGICAI,WORDS FROM THE DECEASED . From the Turin Papyrus

8 2

Chap . XXX III . THE CHAPTER OF REPULSING SERPENTS .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 6 . . . 8 4

Chap . XXX IV . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE DE-CEASED BE BITTEN BY SNAKES IN THE UNDERWORLD .




LIST OF CIIAPTERS, XX III

PAGEChap . X X X V . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE DE-

CEASED BE DEVOURED BY SERPENTS IN THE UNDER-WORLD From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 6 . . . . . . 8 5

Chap . X X X V I . THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING AWAY A P S I I A I T .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 . . . . , . 86

Chap . XXX VII, THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE; TWOMERTI GODDESSES . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 86

Chap . XXX VIIIA . THE CHAPTER OF LIVING BY AIR IN THEUNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t 12 8 7

Chap . XXXV III B . THE CHAPTER OF LIVING BY AIR INTILE UNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 12 8 8

Chap . XXXIX . THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE SER-PEN'I' REREK IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papy-

rus of Mes-em-neter . . . . . . 8 8

Chap . XL . THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE EATEROF THE Ass . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 . . . g i

Chap . X L I . THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING AWAY THE SLAUGH-TERI NGS WHICH ARE PERFORMED I N THE UNDER-WORI. D . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 2 5 . . . 9 2

Chap . X L I I . THE CHAP'T'ER OF DRIVING BACK THE SLAUGH-TERINGS WIIICII ARE PERFORMED IN SUTEN-HENEN .


Chap . XL III. THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE IIEAI)OF A MAN BE C[TI' OFF IN THE UNDERWORLD . F r om

t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 1 7 . . . . . . . . . g8

Chap . XLIV . THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECONDTIME IN THE UNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ,

s h e e t 1 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . g 8

Cha p . X L V . THE CHAPTER OF NOT SUFFERING CORRUP-TION IN THE UNDERWORLD . F rom the Papyrus o f

A n i , s h e e t i 6 . With Rubric . . . . . . 9 9

Chap . XLVI . TILE CHAPTER OF NOT PERISHING AND OFBECOMING ALIVE IN THE UNDERWORLD . F rom the

P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t i 6 . . . . . . . . . 100

Chap . XLVII . THE; CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THESEAT AND THRONE OF THE DECEASED TO BE TAKEN



XXIV LIST OF CHAPTERSPAGEFROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t 8 . . . . . . . . .

Chap . XLVIII. See Chapter X

Chap . X LIX . See Chapter XI . . . . . .

Chap . LA. THE CHAPTER OF NOT ENTERING IN UNTO THEBLOCK OF THE GOD . From the Papyrus of Nebseni,

s h e e t 1 2 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chap . L B . THE CHAPTER OF NOT ENTERING IN UNTOTHE BLOCK . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet ig . . .

Chap . L T . THE CHAPTER OF NOT MARCHING TO BE OVER-THROWN IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t 8

OF HAVING DOMINION OVER THE WATER IN THEUNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 16 .

With Rubric . . . i o 8

Chap . LIX . THE CHAPTER OF SNUFFING THE AIR, AND OFHAVING DOMINION OVER THE WATER IN THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 16 . . . i o 8

Chap . LX . ANOTHER CHAPTER . From the Turin Papyrus . . . l o g

I00

2 9

3 0

I O I

1 0 2

1 0 2

Chap . L I I . THE CHAPTER OF NOT EATING FILTH IN THEUNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet I I . . .

Chap . L I I I . THE CHAPTER OF NOT EATING FILTH ANDOF NOT DRINKING DIRTY WATER I N THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet I I . . . . . .

Io3

104

Chap . LIV . THE CHAPTER OF GIVING AIR TO THE DE-CEASED IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of

N u , s h e e t 1 2 . . . . . . 1 0 5

Chap . LV . THE CHAPTER OF GIVING AIR IN THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1 2 . . . . . . i o 6

Chap . L V I . THE CHAPTER OF SNUFFING THE AIR AMONGTHE WATERS IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Pa-

p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 1 2 . . . i o 6

Chap . LVIL THE CHAPTER OF SNUFFING THE AIR, ANDOF HAVING THE MASTERY OVER THE WATER IN THEUNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1 2 . . . i o 6

Chap . L V I I I . THE CHAPTER OF BREATHING THE AIR, AND



LIST OF CHAPTERS XXVChap . LXI . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE SOUL

OF A MAN BE TAKEN FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 1 5 . . . . . . . . .

Chap . L X I I . THE CHAPTER OF DRINKING WATER IN THEUNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 4

Chap . L X I I I A. THE CHAPTER OF DRINKING WATER ANDOF NOT BEING BURNT BY FIRE IN THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 7 . . .

Chap . L X I I I B . THE CHAPTER OF NOT BEING SCALDEDWITH WATER . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1 2 . . .

Chap . LXIV . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAYIN THE UNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ,

s h e e t s 2 3 and 2 4 . With Rubric

Chap . LXIV . THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE "CHAP-TERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY" IN A SINGLECHAPTER . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1 3 . With

two Rubrics from sheets 1 3 and 2 1 r e s p e c t i v e l y . . .

Chap . L X V A. THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAYAND OF GAINING THE MASTERY OVER ENEMIES . F r o m

the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1 5 . . . . . .

Chap . L X V B . From the Turin Papyrus . . .

Chap . LXVI . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

From the Papyrus of Amen-em-heb . . .

Chap . LXVII . THE CHAPTER OF OPENING THE UNDER-WORLD From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet I 5

Chap . LX . V I I I . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 7 .With Rubric . . .

Chap . LXIX . ANOTHER CHAPTER . From the Papyrus of

Mes-em-neter . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chap . LXX . ANOTHER CHAPTER . From the Papyrus of

Mes-em-neter . With Rubric . . . . . . . . .

Chap . LXXI . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t 16 . With Rubric

Chap . LXXII . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAYAND OF OPENING UP A WAN' THROUGH ANIMEHET.

From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 3 . With Rubric

PAGE

l o g

I I O

I I O

I I I

1 1 2

1 1 6

1 1 9

1 2 1

1 2 1

1 2 2

1 2 3

1 2 4

1 2 5

1 2 6

1 2 8



X X V I LIST OF CHAPTERSPAGE28

13 o

13 1

13 1

Chap . LXX III . See Chapter IX . . . . . . . . .

Chap . LX X IV . THE CHAP'T'ER OF LIFTING UP THE FEETAND OF COMING FORTH UPON THE EARTH . From

the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 6 . . . . . .

Chap . L X X V . THE CHAPTER OF JOURNEYING TO ANNUAND OF' RECEIVING A THRONE THEREIN . F rom the

Papyrus of Nu, sheet 13 . . .

Chap . L X X V I . THE CHAPTER OF A MAN TRANSFORMINGHIMSELF INTO WHATEVER FORM HE PLEASETH . F r om

the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 9 . . . . . .

Chap . LXXV II . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A HAWK OF GOLD . From the Pa-

p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t i o . . 13 2

Chap . LXX XIII . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A DIVINE HAWK . F rom the Pa-

p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t s 13 a n d 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 3

Chap . LX XIX . THE CHAPTER OF BEING TRANSFORMEDINTO THE GOVERNOR OF THE SOVEREIGN PRINCES .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheets 8 and 9 . . . . . . 13 8

Chap . L X X X . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO THE GOD WHO GIVETH LIGHT INTHE DARKNESS . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 28 140

Chap . L X X X I A . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A LOTUS . From the Papyrus of Nu,

s h e e t 11 . . . 1 4 1

Chap . L X X X I 1 3 . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A LOTUS . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f P a q r e r

Chap . LXXXII . TF11; CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO PTAH, OF EATING CAKES, AND OFDRINKING ALE, AND OF UNFETTERING THE STEPS, ANDOF BECOMING A LIVING BEING IN ANNI' . From the

Papyrus of Nu, sheets g and 1o

Chap . LXX XIII . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A BENNU BIRD . From the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t 1o . With Rubric . . . . . .

Chap . L X X X I V . TIIE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-

141

142

1 4 . 3



LIST OF CHAPTERS XXVIIPAGEFORMATION INTO A HERON . From the Papyrus of

N u , s h e e t T o . . . 14 4

Chap . L X X X V . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A LIVING SOUL, AND OF NOT EN-TERING INTO THE CHAMBER OF TORTURE . F rom the

Papyrus of Nu, sheet 9 . . .. . . . . . 1 4 5

Chap . LX X X VI . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A SWALLOW . F rom the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t 1o . With Rubric . . . . . . 1 4 6

Chap . LXXXV II . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO THE SERPENT SATA . From the Pa-

p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t II . . . . . . . . . 1 4 8

Chap . LXXX VIII . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANS-FORMATION INTO A CROCODILE . From the Papyrus

o f N u , s h e e t IT . . . . . 1 4 8

Chap . L X X X IX . THE CHAPTER OF CAUSING THE SOUL TOBE UNITED TO THE BODY IN THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 17 . With Rubric . . . 1 4 9

Chap . XC . THE CFIAPTER OF DRIVING EVIL RECOLLEC-TIONS FROM THE MOUTH . From the Papyrus of Nu,

s h e e t 8 . . . . . . . . . . . 1 5 0

Chap . XCI . THE CIIAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE SOULOF THE DECEASED BE CAPTIVE IN THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 6 . With Rubric . . . 1 5 1

Chap . X C I I . THE CHAPTER OF OPENING THE TOMB TOTHE SOUL AND TO THE SHADE OF THE DECEASEDSC) THAT HE MAN" COME FORTII BY DAY AND HAVEDOMINION OVER HIS FEET . F rom the Papyrus of

N e b s e n i , s h e e t 6 . . .. . 15 2

Chap . XCIII . THE CHAPTER OF NOT SAILING TO THEEAST IN THE UNDERWORLD . F rom the Papyrus of

N u , s h e e t 6 . . . . . .. . . . . . 1 5 3

Chap . XCIV . THE CHAPTER OF PRAYING FOR AN INK-POTAND FOR A PALETTE . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 12 15 4

Chap . XCV . THE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTO THOTH .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 7 . . . . . . 15 5



XXVIII LIST OF CHAPTERSPAGETHE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTO

Chap . XCVI . THOTH AND OF GIVING GLORY UNTOChap . XCVII . I A MAN IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the

Papyrus of Nu, sheets ig and 20

Chap . X C V I I I . TIlE CHAPTER OF BRINGING ALONG A BOATIN HEAVEN . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 9 . . . 1 5 6

Chap . XCIX . THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING ALONG A BOATIN THE UNDERWORLD . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t s

2 1 a n d 2 2 . With Rubric . . . . . . . . . 1 5 7

Chap . C . THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU ANDOF CAUSING HIM TO GO FORTH INTO THE BOAT OFRA ALONG WITH THOSE WHO ARE IN HIS FOLLOW-ING . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t s 2 7 a n d 2 8 . With

R u b r i c . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 1

Chap . C I . TILE CHAPTER OF PROTECTING THE BOAT OFRA . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 2 7 . With Rubric 1 6 2

Chap . C I I . THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO THE BOAT OFRA . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 28 . . . . . . 1 6 4

Chap . C I I I . THE CHAPTER OF BEING WITH TILE GODDESSHATHOR . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 . . . . . . 1 6 4 .

Chap . C I V . THE CIIAPTER OF SITTING AMONG THE GREATGODS. From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 8 . . . 1 6 5

Chap . CV . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING OFFERINGS TO THEKA IN THE UNDERWORLD . From the Papyrus of Nu,

s h e e t7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6 5

Chap . CVI THE CHAPTER OF GIVING OFFERINGS TO THEDECEASED IN I;IET-PTAH-KA (Memphis) . F ro m the

Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 . . . 1 6 6

Chap . C V I I . See Chapter CIX . . . 1 6 g

Chap . C V I I I _ THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OFTHE WEST . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 8 . . . 1 6 7

Chap . CIX . THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OFTHE EAST . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 12 . . . 1 6 g

Chap . CX . HERE BEGIN THE CHAPTERS OF SEKHET-HETEP-ET AND THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY ;

OF GOING INTO AND OF COMING FORTH FROM THE

1 5 5



LIST OF CHAPTERS XXIXPAGE

UNDERWORLD ; OF COMING TO SEKHET-AARU ; OFBEING IN SEKHET-HETEPET, THE MIGHTY LAND, THELADY OF WINDS ; OF HAVING POWER THERE ; OF BE-

COMING A KI-IU THERE ; OF PLOUGHING THERE ; OF

REAPING THERE ; OF EATING THERE ; OF DRINKINGTHERE ; OF MAKING LOVE THERE ; AND OF DOINGEVERYTHING THERE EVEN AS A MAN DOETH UPONEARTH . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 17 170

Chap . CXI . See Chapter CVIII . . . 1 6 7

Chap . C X I I . THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OFPE . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 18 1 7 6

Chap . C X I I I . THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OFNEKIIEN. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 18 1 7 8

Chap . CXIV . THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OFKHEMENNU . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 7 1 7 9

Chap . C X V . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH INTOHEAVEN, AND OF MAKING A WAY THROUGH THE A1I-MEHET, AND OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF ANNU .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 18 . . . 1 8 o

Chap . CXVI . ANOTHER CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULSOF KHEMENNU From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet i8 .

With Rubric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 i

Chap, CX VII . THE CHAPTER OF FINDING (? ) PATHS WHERE-ON TO WALK 1N RE-STAU . From the Papyrus of Nu,

s h e e t 9 . . . 1 8 2

Chap . CXVIIf . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROMRE-STAU . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet g . . . 18 2

Chap . CXIX . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROMRE-STAU . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 9 . . . 1 8 3

Chap . CXX . See Chapter XII 3o

Chap . CXXI . See Chapter XIII . . . 3 1

Chap . CXXII . THE CHAPTER OF GOING IN AFTER COMINGFORTH [IN THE UNDERWORLD] . From the Papyrus of

N u , s h e e t 9 . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8 5

Chap . CXX III . THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO THEGREAT HOUSE . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 15 1 8 5



XXX LIST OF CHAPTERS.

PAGE

Chap . CX X X II . THE CHAPTER OF CAUSING A MAN TO

Chap . CX XIV . THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO THE PRE-

SENCE OF THE DIV INE SOVEREIGN PRINCES OF OSI-RIS . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 1o . . . 186

Chap . C X X V . i . THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO THEHALL OF MAATI . From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 3o 188

[A CHAPTER] TO 13E SAID WHEN THE DECEASEDCOMETH FORTH INTO THE HALT. OF MAATI, SO THATHE MAY BE SEPARATED FROM EVERY SIN WHICH HEHATH DONE, AND MAY BEHOLD THE FACES OF THEGODS . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 2 2 1 0

2 . THE NEGATIVE CONFESSION . From the Papyrus of

N e b s e n i , s h e e t 3 o . . . . . . 192

3 . [ A CHAPTER] TO BE SAID WHEN THE DECEASED COM-ETH FORTH TO THE GODS OF THE UNDERWORLD .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 24 . With Rubric . . . 196

Chap . CX X VI . [THE CHAPTER OF THE FOUR APES] . From

the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 2 4 . . . . . . 201

Chap . CX X VII A. THE BOOK OF THE PRAISE OF THEGODS OF THE QERTI . From the Tomb of Rameses IV 202

Chap . CXXVII 1 3 . A CHAPTER TO BE RECITED WHEN THEDECEASED COMETH BEFORE THE DIVINE SOVEREIGNCHIEFS OF OSIRIS TO OFFER PRAISE UNTO THE GODSWHO ARE THE GUIDES OF THE UNDERWORLD . F r om

the Papyrus of Ptah-mes . . . . . . 205

Chap . CXXV III . A HYMN OF PRAISE TO OSIRIS . From

the Turin Papyrus 206Chap . CXXIX . See Chapter C . . . 161

Chap . CXXX . ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECTTHE KIIU, WHICH I S T O BE RECITED ON THE BIRTH-DAY OF OSIRIS, AND OF MAKING THE SOUL TO LIVEFOR EVER. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 17 . With

R u b r i c . . . 208Chap . CX X XI . THE CHAPTER OF HAVING EXISTENCE NIGH

UNTO RA . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheets 17 and i8 212



CHAP . CXXXVI B. THE CHAPTER OF SAILING IN THEGREAT BOAT OF RA TO PASS OVER THE CIRCLE OFBRIGHT FLAME. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 28 221

Chap . CXXXVII A. THE CHAPTER OF THE FOUR BLAZINGFLAMES WHICH ARE MADE FOR THE KHU. From thePapyrus o f Nu, sheet 2 5 . With Rubric . . . . . . 2 2 3

Chap. CXXXVII B . THE CHAPTER OF KINDLING A FLAME .

From the Papyrus of Nebseni, s heet 6 . . . 228Chap . CXXXVIII. THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO ABTU

(ABYDOS) AND OF BEING IN THE FOLLOWING OFOSIRIS. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 19 . . . 229

Chap . CXXXIX . See Chapter C X X III 18 5

Chap . CXL . THE BOOK WHICH IS TO BE RECITED ON THELAST DAY OF THE SECOND MONTH OF THE SEASONPERT. From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . 230

LIST OF CHAPTERS . XXXIPAGECOME BACK TO SEE HIS HOUSE UPON EARTH. From

the Papyrus of An i, sheet 18 . . . . . . 2 13

Chap . CXXXIII THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU,WHICH IS TO BE RECITED ON THE DAY OF THEMONTH. F rom the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 16 . With Ru-bric . . . 214

Chap . .CXXXIV. ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECTTHE KHU . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 17 . WithRubric 2r6

Chap . CXXXV . ANOTHER CHAPTER TO BE RECITED WHENTHE MOON RENEWETH ITSELF ON TIIE; DAY OF THEMONTH. From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . 218

Chap . CXXXVI A . i . ANOTHER CHAPTER OF TRAVELLINGIN THE GREAT BOAT OF RA . From the Papyrus o f

Nu, sheet 2 8 2 19

Chap . CXXXVI A . 2 . ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PER-FECT THE KHU, WHICH SHALL BE RECITED ON THEFESTIVAL . OF Six . From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 16 .

With Rubric . . . . . . 219



XXXII LIST OF CHAPTERSPAGETHE BOOK WHICH A MAN SHALL RECITE

Chap . C X L I . FOR HIS FATHER OR FOR HIS SON DURINGChap . CXLI .

t

THE FESTIVALS OF AMENTET . F rom the

Papyrus o f N u , sheet 15 . . 232Chap . CXLIII . V ignette on ly . . . 2 40

Chap . CXLIV [THE CHAPTER OF THE ARITS OR MAN-SIONS . ] From the Papyrus o f N u , sheet 26 . WithRubric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Chap . CXLV [THE CHAPTERS OF] THE PYLONS OF SE-KIIET-AANRE OF THE HOUSE OF OSIRIS. From theTurin Papyrus . . . . . . 2 44

Chap . CXLVI . THE CHAPTERS OF ENTERING IN AT THEHIDDEN PYLONS OF THE HOUSE OF OSIRIS IN SE-KHET-A'1NRERU. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 2 5 2 5 3

Chap . CXLV II . [THE CHAPTER OF THE ARITS OR MAN-SIONS.] From the Papyrus o f An i, sheets r i and 12 2 5 8

Chap . CXL V III . THE CHAPTER OF PROVIDING THE DE-

CEASED WITH FOOD IN THE UNDERWORLD. From thePapyrus of Nu, sheet i r . With Rubric . . . . . . 2 6r

Chap . CXLIX . [THE CHAPTER OF THE AATS.] From thePapyrus o f N u , sheets 2 8 , 29, and 3o . . . . . . . . .

Chap . CL Vignettes on ly . F rom the Papyrus o f N u , sheet 3oChap . CLI . Texts and Vignette o f the fun eral chamber .

From the Papyrus o f Mu t-hetep, sheet 5 . . . . . .

Chap . CLI . Speech o f A n u b i s . From the Papyrus of Neb-seni, sheet 21 . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chap . CLIL THE CHAPTER OF BUILDING A HOUSE UPONTHE EARTH. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 13 . . .

Chap . CLIII A. THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROMTHE NET . From the Papyrus o f N u , sheet 20 . WithRubric

Chap . CLIII B. THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROMTHE CATCHER OF THE FISH. From the Papyrus o f

Nu, sheet 2 0 . . .

Chap . CLIV . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE BODYPERISH. From the Papyrus o f N u , sheet 18 . . . . . . 282

2642 7 2

2 7 3

2 7 5

276

2 7 7

2 8 1



LIST OF CHAPTERS XX XIII

PAGEChap . CLV. THE CHAPTER OF A TET OF GOLD. F rom the

Papyrus of Nu, sheet 27 . With Rubric . . . . . 284

Chap . CLVI. THE CHAPTER OF A BUCKLE OF CARNELIAN .

From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 27 . With Rubric . . . 2 8 5

Chap . CLVII . THE CHAPTER OF A VULTURE OF GOLD .

From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . . . . 2 8 6

Chap . CLVIII. THE CHAPTER OF A COLLAR OF GOLD .

From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . . . . 286

Chap . CLIX . THE CHAPTER OF THE UATCH AMULET .

From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . . . . . 287

Chap . CLX . THE CHAPTER OF GIVING AN UATCH AMULETTO THE DECEASED . From the Papyrus of Nebseni,

s h e e t i o . . .. . . 2 8 7

Chap . CLXI . THE CHAPTER OF FORCING AN ENTRANCEINTO HEAVEN . From the Papyrus of Nefer-uben - f .

With Rubric . . .

Chap . CLXII . THE CHAPTER OF MAKING HEAT TO BEUNDER THE HEAD OF THE DECEASED . From the Tu-

rin Papyrus . With Rubric

Chap . CLXIII . THE CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THEBODY OF A MAN TO MOULDER AWAY IN THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . .

Chap . CLXIV. ANOTHER CHAPTER . From the Turin Pa-

p y r u s . With Rubric . . . . . .

Chap . CLXV . THE CHAPTER OF ARRIVING IN PORT . From

the Turin Papyrus . With Rubric . . .

Chap . CLXV I . THE CHAPTER OF THE PILLOW. From the

P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t 2 1

Chap . CLXVII . TI-IE CHAPTER OF BRINGING THE UTCHAT .

From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 2 2

Chap . CLXV III . [THE BOOKS OF OFFERINGS TO THE GODSOF THE QERTI . ] From the Papyrus Brit . Mus . No .

1 0 . 4 7 8 , s h e e t s 2 - 7 . . .

Chap . C L X IX . THE CHAPTER OF SETTING UP THE FU-NERAI. BED . From the Papyrus of Nefer-uben-f . . . 3 1o

c

288

289

2 9 1

293

295

296

297

298



XXXIV LIST OF CHAPTERSPAGE

Chap . C L X X X . THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY,OF PRAISING RA IN AMENTET, OF ASCRIBING PRAISEUNTO THOSE WHO DWELL IN THE TUAT, OF OPEN-ING UP A PATH FOR THE PERFECT KHU IN THEUNDERWORLD, OF CAUSING HIM TO WALK, OF MAK-ING LONG HIS FOOTSTEPS, OF GOING INTO AND COM-ING FORTH FROM THE UNDERWORLD, AND OF PER-FORMING TRANSFORMATIONS LIKE A LIVING SOUL .

From a Papyrus at Paris . . . . . . 3 3 4

Chap . C L X X X I . THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN TO THEDIVINE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS OF OSIRIS, AND TO THE

Chap . CLXX . THE CHAPTER OF ARRANGING THE FUNERALBED From the Papyrus of Nefer-uben-f . . . . . . 313

Chap . C L X X I . THE CHAPTER OF TYING ON THE GAR-MENT OF PURITY . From the Papyrus of Amen-hetep 315

Chap . CLXX II . THE PRAISES WHICH ARE TO BE PER-FORMED IN THE UNDERWORLD . F rom the Papyrus

o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t s 3 2 and 3 3 . . . . . . 316Chap . CLXX III . THE SPEECHES OF HORUS TO HIS FA-

THER OS I R I S . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheets

g and 1o . . . . . 3 2 1

Chap . CLXXIV . THE CHAPTER OF CAUSING THE KHU TOCOME FORTH FROM THE GREAT DOOR . F rom the

Papyrus of Mut-hetep, sheet 3 . . . . . 3 2 3

Chap . C L X X V . THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECONDTIME. From the Papyrus of Ani, sheet 2 9 . . . . . . 3 2 5

Cha p . C LX X V I . THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECONDTIME, From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 2 2 . . . . . . 3 2 7

Chap . CLX X VII . THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THE KHU,AND OF MAKING THE SOUL. T O LIVE IN THE UNDER-WORLD. From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 18 . . . 328

Chap . CLXX VIII . THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THEDEAD BODY . From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 1g 3 2 9

Chap . CLX X IX . THE CHAPTER OF ADVANCING FROMYESTERDAY AND OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . From

the Papyrus of Nu, sheet 15 . . . . . . 3 3 3



LIST OF CHAPTERS XXXVPAGEGODS WHO ARE GUIDES IN THE TUAT, AND TO

THOSE WHO KEEP WARD OVER THEIR GATES, ANDTO THOSE WHO ARE HERALDS OF THEIR HALLS,AND TO THOSE WHO ARE THE PORTERS OF THEDOORS AND PYLONS OF AMENTET, AND OF MAKINGTHE TRANSFORMATIONS LIKE A LIVING SOUL ; ANDOF PRAISING OSIRIS AND OF BECOMING THE PRINCEOF THE DIVINE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS. From the Pa-pyrus o f Qenna. With Rubric . . . . . . 337

Chap . C L X X X I I THE BOOK OF STABLISHING OSIRISFIRMLY, OF GIVING AIR TO THE STILL-HEART,WHILST THOTH REPULSETH THE FOES OF HORUS .

From the Papyrus o f M ut-hetep, sheet 4 . . .

Chap . CLXX XIII . A HYMN OF PRAISE TO OSIRIS. Fromthe Papyrus o f Hu-nefer, sheet 3

Chap . CLXXXIV THE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTOOSIRIS. From the Papyrus o f Uaa . . .

Chap . CLXXXV THE [CHAPTER OF] GIVING PRAISES UNTOOSIRIS, AND PAYING HOMAGE UNTO THE LORD OFETERNITY, AND PROPITIATING THE GOD IN HIS WILL,AND DECLARING THE RIGHT AND TRUTH, THE LORDOF WHICH IS UNKNOWN . F rom the Papyrus o f Sutimes

Chap . CLXXXVI . Without title . From the Papyrus o f

An i, sheet 3 7

Chap . CLXXXVII . THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN UNTOTHE COMPANY OF THE GODS. From the Papyrus o f

Nu, sheet rg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Chap . CL X X X VIII . THE [CHAPTER OF] THE GOING INOF THE SOUL TO BUILD AN ABODE AND TO COMEFORTH BY DAY I N HUMAN FORM. From the Papyruso f N u , sheet ig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 4 9

Chap . CLXXXIX . THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING A MANMAKE A JOURNEY BEING HUNGRY, AND OF NOT EAT-ING FILTH. From the Papyrus of Nu, sheet i g . . . 350

Chap . CXC . THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHUWITHIN RA. From the Papyrus o f N u , sheet i6 . . . 353

c*

340

3 4 3

3 4 6

3 47

348



INTRODUCTION .

THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THEDEAD .

Lo ng ago, in the earliest period of Egyptian civili-

zation, the dwellers o n the Nile were in the habit

of pre serv ing the dead bodies of their relativ es an d

friends by means of salt, soda, resin, bitumen, and

other substances o f like nature, and, although the art

of mummifying an d swathing the body in line n ban-

dages did not attain to its highest pitch of perfection

until several hundreds of years later, the simple means

which were empl oyed in the ea rliest days were effec-

tual in keep ing bones , sine ws, and skin in existence

upo n ear th. The E gyptians embalmed their dead either

because they wished to keep their material bodies with

them upon earth, o r becaus e they believe d that the

future welfare o f the departed depended in some way

upo n the preserv ation of the bodies which they had

left behind them upon earth . Whatev er the motive ,

it is quite certain that it must have been a very power-

ful o ne, for the custom of embalming the dead lasted

in Egypt without a break for at least five thousand

years . It sur vived al l the influen ce which the Greeks



XXX VII I INTRODUCTIONand Romans brought to bear upon the habits andcustoms o f the Eg yptians, a nd on ly disapp eared from

the cou ntry abou t two hundred years before its con-

q uest by Muhammad's general Àmr ibn al-Àsi, A . D .

65 8 . T he writing s o f an cien t Egypt shew that it was

no t onl y the custom, but also the duty of a man to

prepare during his life-time a suitable tomb in which

his body might rest after death, and it is to the desire

of pr eser v ing the body on the part of the Egyptians ,

which foun d practical exp ression in the hewing oftombs an d the making o f elaborate fune ral furn iture,

that we o we the greater part of o ur kno wledge of their

religious beliefs. As time went on the embalming of

the dead was performed in a more el aborate mann er,

and at the same time the last resting place o f the

mummified body was chosen mo re carefully and

wrought with greater attention . At a very early period

the wealthy discarded the u se o f holes in ro cks an d

cav es as tombs, for in these the bodies were acces-

sible to the attacks of enemies, and wild animals, and

serpents ; and the same objection was, n aturally, made

to shallow hollo ws made in the limestone an d cov ered

ov er with slabs of the same material, an d also to the

v aulted, crude brick grav es which were commonly in

use in the ea rly dynasties . The pl ace of these was

taken by pyramids built of ston e, an d by many-cham-

bered tombs hewn in the living rock . Exp erience,

however, soon shewed the Egyptian that the most

carefully con structed tomb was incapable o f prev ent-



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . XXXIXing damp-rot or dry-rot and decay, and that someother power besides his own must be inv oked to pre-

v en t the destruction of the body, which, thou gh need-

ing lo nger time to accomplish, was as effectually per-

formed by these mea ns as by the tooth of the wild

animal o r serpent, or by the hand of the enemy . At this

stage the aid of the professional religious man or priest

was called in, and the task of finding means to pre-

v en t rot and decay was e ntrusted to him . There isJlittle doubt that when the body was laid to rest in

the tomb, the priest pro no un ced certain words o r for-

mulae or p rayers o v er it, an d it is probable that the

recital o f these words was accompanied by the per-

formance o f certain ceremon ies . Whatever these for-

mulae were they formed the foun dation of the Bo ok

of the Dead o f later E gyptian times . It is idle to

attempt to co ns ider what such wo rds were, but we

are within o ur r ight if we as su me that they were

address ed to the god o r go ds of the commun ity on

behalf of the dead, an d that they con tained petitions

for the welfare of the departed in the world beyond

the gra v e . Such petitions wou ld refer more to ma-

terial than to spiritual happiness . Indeed it is mo re

than doubtful if the Egyptian, at that time, had deve-

lo ped any spiritual con ceptions, in our se ns e of the

word ; for, although his ideas were very definite as to

the reality of a future existence, I think that he had

formulated few details about it, and that he had no

idea as to where o r how it was to be enj oyed .



XL INTRODUCTIONCertain portions of texts which hav e been incor-

porated into religious works of a l a t e r period shewthat the l i f e which the Egyptian hoped to l i v e after

death was o n e similar t o that which he led upon

earth, and it is clear that he thought the preservation

of his n atural o r material body to be, in so me way,

absol utely n ecessary for the a ttainment o f this l i f e .

He hoped to hav e power to exercise all the natural

function s o f his body, and to be able to j ourn ey about

at pleas ure ; un less the body and all its members

were preserv ed, such a life was impossible for him .

The earliest monuments in E gypt of the historic period

are tombs, and the un iversal testimony of these is to

the effect that the Egyptian endeav ou red to attain to

this life by the embal mmen t of the body, a nd by the

power which the texts inscribed upo n his tomb, coffin,

e t c ., could give him . A nd this was al ways so , fo r the

earliest tombs pr ov e that they were hewn o ut or built

according to a recogn ized system which had become

sanctified by antiq uity, an d that they were intended

to keep intact bodies which had been treated with

balms and balsams, un guents and drugs, and other

similar preserv ative compounds ; and the texts written

upo n them take the fact of the existence of a future

life for granted, and assume that its duration will be

i n f i n i t e . T he ol dest tombs o f this kind to which we

can ass ign a date belon g to the period of the second

dynasty, abou t B . C . 4200, but there are so me in

existence which are re markable fo r the extremely ar-



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD XLI

c h a i c g r o u p i n g o f t h e i n s c r i p t i o n s u p o n t h e w a l l s a n d

w h i c h m a y w e l l b e l o n g t o a v e r y m u c h e a r l i e r t i m e . I n

this connexion the evidence supplied by the curious

tombs which MM . A m e ' l i n e a u a n d J . d e M o r g a n h a v e r e -

c e n t l y e x c a v a t e d a t E l - ' A m r a h , a p l a c e s i t u a t e d a b o u t

f i v e m i l e s f r o m A b y d o s o n t h e w e s t b a n k o f t h e N i l e ,

i s o f p e c u l i a r i n t e r e s t . Here were found a number of

o v a l g r a v e s , s u n k i n t h e s t o n y s o i l t o a d e p t h v a r y -

i n g f r o m f i v e t o s i x f e e t , w h e r e i n w e r e t h e s k e l e t o n s

of human bodies lying upon their sides ; t h e i r h a n d s

w e r e c r o s s e d b e f o r e t h e i r f a c e s , a n d t h e i r k n e e s w e r e

b e n t a n d w e r e o n a l e v e l w i t h t h e i r c h e s t s . With them

w e r e b u r i e d f l i n t s , s m a l l b r o n z e i m p l e m e n t s , p o t t e r y

o r n a m e n t e d a n d p l a i n , s t o n e v a s e s , s h e l l o r n a m e n t s ,

e t c . , a n d , t h o u g h e x p e r t s a r e d i v i d e d i n t h e i r o p i n i o n

a s t h e e x a c t a n t i q u i t y o f t h e s e o b j e c t s , t h e r e s e e m s

little doubt that the oldest of them belong to the

p e r i o d o f t h e d a w n o f E g y p t i a n c i v i l i z a t i o n , a n d t h a t

i s s u f f i c i e n t f o r o u r p u r p o s e a t p r e s e n t . A number of

t h e s k e l e t o n s f r o m t h e t o m b s o f E l ' Amrah were sub-

mitted for examination to Dr . F o u q u e t o f C a i r o , w h o

h a s f o u n d r e a s o n f o r d e c l a r i n g t h a t t h e y s h e w t r a c e s o f

t h e b o d i e s t o w h i c h t h e y b e l o n g e d h a v i n g b e e n t r e a t -

ed with compounds or substances used in embalming

the dead . T h i s f a c t s h e e r s t h a t t h e f r i e n d s a n d r e l a -

tives of the departed who caused their bodies to be

so treated must have considered that it would be of

s o m e b e ne f i t t o t h e m i n t h e i r l i f e i n t h e w o r l d b e y o n d

t h e g r a v e , a n d i n s o d o i n g t h e y w e r e , p r o b a b l y , o n l y



X L I I INTRODUCTIONcon forming to a custom which was a lready o ld an d

well established in their day . It must not he forgotten

that the skel eton s in the cemetery of E l-Àmrah were

found lying on their sides, and this fact stron gly sup-

po rts the v iew that the tombs ar e n ot tombs of E gyp-

tians but of their immediate predecessors or of contem-

poraries of the early dynasties . In n o E gyptian tomb

hitherto opened has the mummy been deposited oni t s s i d e ; moreover, the Egyptian mummy is alwaysfoun d lying upo n its back, its arms are al ways laid

on the body, an d the hands rest on the tops of the

thighs . Though the burials at El-Amrah tell us n othing

about the ceremo nies, rel igiou s o r otherwise, which

were performed over the departed when they werecommitted to the earth, they prov e almost beyon d a

doubt that peo ple s o ther than the Egyptians pa rtially

embalmed their dead at that remo te per iod, a n d this

being so it is pro bable that the re ligiou s ideas an d

the belief in a fu ture life which the E gyptians po s-

ses sed were shared by the na tion s ro un d abou t them,

with whom they were perhaps connected by ties of

bloo d .

Passing from prehistoric times of which we kn ow

little, and that little imperfectly, we come to the tombs

of the first fo ur dynasties, which chew that a g reat

devel op ment in the religious ideas an d fune ral cere-

mon ies has taken place since the first of the grav es

at El-Àmrah was dug . We see that certain s ymbolic

ceremonies were regularly performed, that a number



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . XLIII

of priestly officials, with clearly defined duties in con-

ne xion with funeral s, had come into being, that a

large n umber of festivals were celebrated at or near

the tomb thro ughout the year, that the offering o f

meat and drink, of unguents and garments, and of

green herbs and flo wers at stated times had grown

into a system, that a number of gods were dulyhon o ured and wors hipp ed, that the priests of the

gods belonged to and probably formed the rulingclass of the districts in which they lived, that certain

gods had already obtained the position of national

deities who were known and honoured throughoutthe cou ntry, and that certain cities, such as Abydos,

Annu (On) , an d Memphis, had become centres of teach-

ing o f the views an d dogmas which their respective

priests had adopted and modified, o r had themselv es

evolved . It is quite certain that certain priestly offi-

cials liv ed and died, for the texts on their tombs

bear witness to this fact ; if the official lived, then

the o ffice to which he was appointed existed ; and

if religious boo ks, the r eading o f which during the

funeral was n ecessary for the welfare of the departed,

had no t existed, men would not have been ap pointed

to read them . At this time we find that certain priests

called "priests of the k a " were duly appo inted, and

that they p erfo rmed their ministration s in "chapels

of the ka" which were attached to the tombs of king s

and wealthy men ; this chews beyo nd a do ubt that

the doctrine of the existence of a "double" of a man



LIV INTRODUCTIONlad been evolv ed, and the making of offerings to it

at stated interv als at the tomb prov es that it was

believed to dwell therein, and that material meat and

drink were n ecessary for its well-being . T his is im-

portant also as indicating that the offerings were no t

con sumed by the deceased himself, however n eedful

the ceremo ny o f offerin g them might be fo r his g en -

eral welfare . Similarly, the sufferings, death, and re-

surrection o f Osiris were well kn own in the period

of the early dynasties, and it is probable that he

became the type o f the res urre ction of man in Eg ypt,

lo ng before the religious texts which ass ume it an d

which call him the go d and king an d j udge o f the

dead passed from ora l tradition to inscribed papyru s .

A study of the religious texts of all periods prov es

that the great fundamental religious ideas o f the Egyp-

tians remained unchanged from the earliest to the lat-

est historical times, and it seems that they must hav e

been received by the early Egyptian priests in much

the same form as that in which they handed themon . T he doctrine o f immortality and ev erla sting life

and the belief in the resurrection of a spiritual body

are the brightest and most pro minen t features of the

Egyptian rel igion ; they survived all the theological

theories and speculations o f the v arious schoo ls o f

rel igiou s thou ght in Egyp t, and to them gen era tion s

of men clu ng with a firmness a nd tenacity marv ell ou s

to con sider . A nd side by side with these beliefs there

flourished the religious texts to which the name BOOK



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . XLVOF THE DEAD h a s b e e n g i v e n , a n d t h e y a p p e a l e d m i g h t -

i l y t o a l l , f r o m h i g h e s t t o l o w e s t , f o r t h e y w e r e b e -

lieved to give man power in the world beyond the

grav e, and to enable him to attain to the abode of

t h e b l e s s e d a n d t o g a i n e v e r l a s t i n g l i f e .

No amount of research and no discovery have, as

yet, yielded any information about the home, and

origin, and early history of the Book of the Dead .

I t s e e m s p r e t t y c l e a r t h a t , a s s a i d a b o v e , t h e f i r s t

f o r m o f a l l o f t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d c o n s i s t e d o f t h e

w o r d s o r p e t i t i o n s a d d r e s s e d t o t h e " g o d o f t h e c i t y " ,

o r t o a c o l l e c t i o n o f s u p e r n a t u r a l p o w e r s , o n b e h a l f

of the deceased by relatives and friends, and that

s u c h p e t i t i o n s r e f e r r e d t o m a t e r i a l r a t h e r t h a n t o s p i r i -

t u a l t h i n g s . That they would increase in number and

in length as time went on is only what is to be ex-

pected, and the nature of their contents also would

vary according to the rank and position of the de-

c e a s e d . A t f i r s t t h e y w e r e r e c i t e d o n l y a n d n o t w r i t t e n

d o w n , a n d i t i s p r o b a b l e t h a t t h e y e x i s t e d i n t h i s f o r m

f o r a v e r y l o n g p e r i o d ; a t l e n g t h t h e y w e r e d o n e i n -

t o w r i t i n g , b u t t h i s , I b e l i e v e , o n l y t o o k p l a c e w h e n

t h e p r o f e s s i o n a l r e l i g i o u s m e n o r p r i e s t s b e g a n t o b e

doubtful about the meaning of some of them, and un-

certain about the way in which they should be writ-

t e n . The priests wrote them down to preserve them,

and thus endeavoured to keep without further cor-

ruption texts which already in their day had become

e x c e e d i n g l y o l d a n d d i f f i c u l t o f u n d e r s t a n d i n g . The





THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . X L V I I

customs i s to o well known t o need comment here .

That such texts should s u f f e r modification as time

went o n i s on ly to be expected, but we may be sure

that the original pu rpo se o f them remained unchanged,

and that all rea lly es sen tial ideas and beliefs of a

fundamental character fou nd expr ession always in the

same way. Wherev er its o riginal home may hav e been,

or whatever was its origin, o r whoev er were its au-

thors, it is q uite certain that the Bo ok of the Dead,

in a connected form, is as old as Egyptian civilization,

an d that its s ou rces belo ng to pr ehistoric times to

which it is impo ssible to as sign a date .

We first touch so lid grou nd in the history of the

Bo ok o f the Dead in the period of the early dynasties,

an d, if we accept o ne tradition which was curre nt in

Egypt as early as B . C . 2 5 0 0, we are right in believ-

ing that certain parts of it are, in their present form,

as old as the time o f the first dynasty. The LXIVthChapter, which is admitted on all hands to be ex-

ceedingly ol d, exists in two ve rsions . T he rubric to

on e of these declares that the Chapter is as old as

the time of Hesepti, the fifth king of the first dynasty,

about B . C . 4266, an d says that it was "found" beneath

the Hennu boat by the foreman of the builders ; and

the rubric to the other ( see pp . i 1 8 , 1 1 9 ) states that

it was "foun d" at Hermop ol is, inscribed upo n a block

of ironstone, by Herutataf (the son of Khufu or Cheops,

the second king of the IVth dynasty, about B. C .

3 7 3 3 ), when he was inspe cting the temples throughout



X L V I I I INTRODUCTIONthe country . These opinion s find expression uponcoffins of the elev enth and twelfth dynasties an d in

papyri of the best period, that is to say, fro m about

B . C . i 6oo to B . C . i o00 ; and though on e makes out

the Chapter to be so me six hundred years o lder than

the o ther, both agree in as signing to it a date which

is coaev al with the Ear ly E mpire . It is difficult to

know what is exactly meant by the word "found" .

It may, o f cou rse, mean that a ston e slab bearing the

text of the Chapter was discov ered whilst certain re-

pairs or alterations were being carried out in the

temple of the go d Thoth at Hermop ol is, or it may

mean that the Chapter was edited in some way byKhufu's son Herutataf. The latter explanation is cer-

tainl y the more pro bable, for we kno w fro m other

sources that Herutataf was a learned man, and that

he was the author of v arious literary works, which

enjoyed a considerable reputation . On the other hand,

the an cient custom o f ascribing the works of u nkn own

authors to famous men may have already been i n

vogue .

Of the B oo k of the Dea d of the se con d, third, and

fourth dynas ties we know nothing, a nd no copies of

any part of the Recension then in use have comedown to us ; the texts on the tombs of the priests of

that period spew that funeral ceremonies were per-

formed in accordance with the instruction s con tained

in the rubrics to the v arious Chapters of the Bo ok

of the Dead, and the existence of collection s of reli-



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . XL IX

g i o u s t e x t s s t a n d s a s s u r e d . D u r i n g t h e r e i g n o f M e n -

k a u - R a , t h e M y c e r i n u s o f t h e G r e e k s , t h e f o u r t h k i n g

o f t h e f o u r t h d y n a s t y , a b o u t B . C . 3 6 3 3 , c e r t a i n C h a p -

t e r s , i . e . , XXXB and CXLVIII, are said to have been

f o u n d b y H e r u t a t t f , a n d t h e r e a r e t r a d i t i o n s e x t a n t

that religious ceremonies were performed with re-

newed vigour during the reign of this king. On the

c o f f i n o f M e n - k a u - R a ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 6 6 4 . 7 ) a r e i n s c r i b -

e d t w o l i n e s ' o f t e x t w h i c h a r e a l s o f o u n d o n t h e w a l l s

i n s i d e t h e p y r a m i d s o f T e t a a n d P e p i I , k i n g s o f t h e

s i x t h d y n a s t y ; it would be absurd to suppose that

t h e s e l i n e s f o r m e d t h e o n l y p o r t i o n o f t h e t e x t k n o w n

in the fourth dynasty, and thus we are entitled to

assume that the same Recension of the Book of the

Dead which was known and copied in the sixth dy-

nasty was also known and copied in the fourth dy-

n a s t y . F rom the lines on the coffin of M en-kau-Ra

w e l e a r n s o m e i n t e r e s t i n g f a c t s : n a m e l y , t h a t t h e d e a d

k i n g w a s i d e n t i f i e d w i t h t h e g o d , t h a t t h e d i v i n e o r i -

gin of the god was ascribed also to the king, that

the life of the king in the world beyond . t h e g r a v e

was to be that of a god, that all his foes were to

be vanquished, and that he was to become a being

p o s s e s s e d o f l i f e e v e r l a s t i n g . Here, then, is a proof

o f t h e a c c e p t a n c e o f t h e O s i r i s s t o r y a n d o f t h e d o c -

i . T h e y r e a d : " [ H ai l , ] O s i r i s , k i ng o f t h e N o r t h a n d S o u t h , M e n- k a u -

" R a , l i v i n g f o r e v e r ! b o r n o f h e a v e n , co n c e i v e d o f N u t , h e i r o f S e b h i s

"beloved. Thy mother Nut spreadeth herself o ver thee in her name of

" ` m y s te r y o f h e a v e n' ; s h e g r a n t e t h t h a t th o u m a y e s t e xi s t a s a g o d w i t h -

" o u t t h y f o e s , O k i n g o f t h e N o r t h a n d S o u t h , M e n - k a u - R d , l i v i n g f o r e v e r . "

d



L INTRODUCTIONt r i n e o f i m m o r t a l i t y , o r e v e r l a s t i n g l i f e , a t a v e r y r e -

mote period in Egypt .

D u r i n g t h e p e r i o d o f t h e f i f t h a n d s i x t h d y n a s t i e s

a remarkable development took place in the funeral

ceremonies performed for Egyptian kings . The kings

of the fourth dynasty Khufu (Cheops), Kha - f - R a

( K h e p h r e n ) , a n d M e n - k a u - R a h a d b u i l t f o r t h e i r t o m b s

t h e s t o n e p y r a m i d s a t G i z e h , w h i c h t o t h i s d a y e x c i t e

t h e w o n d e r a n d a d m i r a t i o n o f t h e c i v i l i z e d w o r l d , b u t

the walls of the chambers and corridors are unin-

s c r i b e d , a n d t h e y t e l l u s n o t h i n g o f t h e t e x t s w h i c h

were recited during the funeral, and nothing of the

ceremonies by which they were accompanied . At the

close of the fifth dynasty, however, Unas the king

( B . C . 3333) built as his tomb a stone pyramid at a

place now called Sakkara, which is situated on the

west bank of the Nile, a few miles to the south of

t h e m o d e r n c i t y o f C a i r o , a n d h e c o v e r e d t h e g r e a t e r

parts of the walls of the chambers, corridors, etc . ,

with several hundred vertical lines of hieroglyphic

text which were deeply cut and filled up with green

p a i n t o r c o m p o s i t i o n . In the year 188 1 M . Maspero

e f f e c t e d a n e n t r a n c e i n t o t h i s p y r a m i d , a n d h e r e c o g -

n i z e d a t o n c e t h e f a c t t h a t t h e i n s c r i p t i o n s w h i c h h e

saw before him formed the text of the Bo ok of the

Dead which was in use in Egypt during the period of

t h e f i f t h d y n a s t y . C o n t i n u i n g h i s l a b o u r s i n t h i s " p y r a -

mid field" he opened the pyramids of Teta, Pepi I,

M e r - e n - R a , a nd P e p i I I , k i n g s o f t h e s i x t h d y n a s t y w h o



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LI

reigned from about B . C . 3 3 o o t o B . C . 3 i 6 6 , a n d h e

found that the texts which cov ered the walls inside

were duplicates, with additions, of those which he

had already found in the pyramid of Unas . ' W e t h u s

s e e , f o r t h e f i r s t t i m e , a c o l l e c t e d s e r i e s o f t e x t s o f

t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d i n t h e e a r l i e s t R e c e n s i o n k n o w n

t o u s ; t h i s R e c e n s i o n m a y f o r c o n v e n i e n c e b e c a l l e d

t h e ` H e l i o p o l i t a n ' , b e c a u s e i t b e a r s u n m i s t a k a b l e e v i -

dence that it was drawn up by the priests of Annu

( O n o r H e l i o p o l i s ) , a n d t h a t i t c o n t a i n s t h e p e c u l i a r

v i e w s h e l d b y t h e p r i e s t s o f t h e c o l l e g e s o f t h a t v e r y

a n c i e n t c i t y . T h o u g h f i v e s e t s o f e x t r a c t s f r o m i t h a v e

come down to us in a tolerably complete state of

p r e s e r v a t i o n , w e m u s t n o t a s s u m e t h a t t h e y r e p r e s e n t

a l l t h e t e x t s w h i c h b e l o n g e d t o i t , i n d e e d t h e v a r i o u s

sections of it which were copied upon funeral monu-

m e n t s a n d p a p y r i i n l a t e r t i m e s i n d i c a t e t h a t f o r a l l

p r a c t i c a l p u r p o s e s i t s e x t e n t w a s i l l i m i t a b l e . How much

" e d i t i n g " w a s d o n e t o t h e t e x t s o f t h i s R e c e n s i o n b y

t h e p r i e s t s o f A n n u c a n n o t b e s a i d , b u t t h e r e i s c o n -

s i d e r a b l e e v i d e n c e s c a t t e r e d t h r o u g h o u t i t w h i c h s h e w s

t h a t t h e y h a d b e e n e d i t e d t w o o r t h r e e t i m e s b e f o r e ,

and it is clear that we have preserved in it many

r e l i g i o u s i d e a s a n d b e l i e f s w h i c h b e l o n g t o w h a t m a y

be termed strata of religious thought of different

i . T h e s e t e x t s , t o g e t h e r w i t h F r e n c h t r a n s l a t i o n s , h a v e b e e n p u bl i s h e d

by M . M a s pe r o u n d e r t h e t i t l e o f L e s I n s c r i pt i o n s de s P y r a mi d e s de S a q -

g a r a h , P a r i s , 1 8 9 4 ; t h e v a r i o u s s e c t i o n s o f t h i s w o r k h a d b e f o r e a p pe a r e d

i n R e c u e i l d e T r a v a u x , to m . I I I . f f .

d *



L 1 1 INTRODUCTIONperiods and dates . Some of them certainly go back

to a p eriod in the history of the E gyptian s when they

celebrated their triumphs over their enemies in a brutal

an d sav age fashion, an d others belon g to a time when

their an cestors stoo d but little higher o n the ladder

of civilization than the barbarous tribes who lived o n

their western and so uthern fron tiers .

The Heliop ol itan Recension of the Bo ok o f the Dead

cons ists o f a series of pa ragra phs, e ach of which is

introduced by the word "r ecite";cattered through-ou t the text are direction s to the p riests who per -

formed the ceremonies when to make certain presen-

tations of meat, drink, and other objects . In later

days the rubrical direction s were written at the

ends of the section s, and titles were given to the

section s, which hen ceforth became sp ecial Chapters ,

intended to p roduce certain definite res ults . An ex-

cellent idea of the arrangement of the texts in the

pyramids will be o btained fro m the accomp an ying pag e

of hiero glyp hic extract which is taken fro m the text

written for Unas, 1 . 4 9 6 f f .

At the end of the sixth dynasty the walls o f the

chambers o f tombs built for great an d wealthy men

were p rofus ely o rna mented with texts and scenes ,

both col oured an d uncolo ured ; but in none do wefind religious texts belon ging to the collection which

the royal pyramids have rev ealed to us . I t i s d i f f i c u l t

to account for this except on the score of econ omy .

The wealthy man o r owner of lar ge estates caused



.~ 1 T::7 : : 7 - CASo~o~~CCCC ~~

01T-D+'41 . 4 ,

x1 N C L D

a

0 0~ ~~~ Q j r 3 ~ ~ U'-~CCQ ~

Co

C' E ~ Ao I ,

r B 0~U~q ) Qa - 1 `~~-1,1kAO[~- .1'7/Q_a a

^ ^ ^ ' • 0 C va ) 4 - ~ V0 -



L I V INTRODUCTIONthe scenes which shewed his greatness and affluence

to be v ividly depicted on the wall s o f his tomb, but

ev en in the East, where time has always been of little

v alue and labour cheap, the difference between the

cost of cutting sev eral hundred lines of hieroglyphics

in limeston e an d filling them up with paint, an d the

cost of painting a n umber o f agricultural an d other

scenes in t e i n j 5 e r a must hav e been v ery con siderable .

In the former case the texts had to be "set out" by

the artist, and then carefully cut by the skilled mason,

an d it must no t be forgo tten that the copy from which

the ar tist worked may hav e been in hieratic or cur-

sive characters, in which case the difficulties of the

work would be increased ; in the latter the artist's

work was l imited to bro ad o utline which co uld be

q uickly drawn, a nd the filling in o f the colo urs was

an easy matter .

During the interval between the end of the sixth dy-

nas ty and the beginning o f the elev enth we kno w no-

thing of the fortunes of the Book of the Dead, and it is

no t until we come to the middle or end of the elev enth

dynasty that we find other copies o f the work . Of the

history, too, of the period of the seventh, eighth, ninth,

and tenth dynasties v ery little is kno wn, an d though

in certain districts in Upper E gypt tombs of consider-

able size a nd beauty were built, yet no striking de-

v elo pment in the funeral texts seems to have taken

place, or, if it did, we have n o record of it. Belon g-

ing to the el ev en th an d twelfth dynas ties, howeve r,



,.

E

IFf ~ h * ~ a - ~ 1 ' J 1 t l G ~ I A 7 r ~ . = e ~ 1 1 1 1 1 V a

a n a ( y . . s h ~ a l l 3 bxttefl'~7 UJ M<<, Y

eala9!<~ t ' ' r o l ' r l ' - # ~ ° < e ~ t ~ O a 4 ~ ~ r l ~ :ly

}} 1 ~ 6 ~ ~ ~ , .̀ ' ~ ~ r Cb ~ r a i a ~ d t ;e Q-+art' z d

8 ~=nr3 ~ ' " } ~ ' c ~ +:r11Q1'$~dN«~J 11°, & r ~ B

~ ~ c s t f ~ c ar ~ I T B ~ d a h ~:. ~ l , + ~ i * 1 ~ ~ d ~ ~ ~ - I P A ; ~P=. ~ O a v ~

L L r r 4 l Y > - ~ I l l t ~ ? ~ 9 d : ~ ' ~ " ~ c ~ _ { + ~ ^ 1 f , i o ~ c . . e ~ ~ y ~ $ i r . ^ ® ' ~ 3

t k ∎ ' w - l a - ' 3 H t l r lt - t e ~ 4 i ~ e ~ r a l - : ( a ( ~ a ~ a

~ ~ ~ 1 g a ~ t e H ~ ' ~ 6 ~ d c 4 v a G P ~ ~ l 1 ~ - t o } ~ H 4 d t ~ ( g a > 3 l : . d l J ~

+ ' i ' ~U r djib' a f r o w j ' + q ' ~~y*" ' r ( }

t 1 d ~ t c 4 „ s ,. , h„

s l ~ d - 4 E l i t e 6 1 4

I -

V11



THE . HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LVwe hav e a number of c o f f i n s of co n siderable impor-

tance f o r the study of the B oo k of the Dead . Theymay be rou ghly div ided into three class es : (i) those

which are painted to represen t funeral chambers or

tombs, ( 2 ) those which are almost plain outside but

cov ered ins ide with texts in the hieratic or cursiv e

Egyptian character, a nd ( 3 ) those which are ins cribed

both inside and ou t . The texts are usu ally traced in

black upon the planed surface of the wood, the chief in-

scriptions which record the name and titles of the de-

ceased being p ainted in large hieroglyphics either in

a v ertical line down the len gth of the cov er, or in a

horizontal line ro und the upper part of the four sides

of the coffin . On the right hand side, at the fo ot, is

often p ainted or inla id the double u t c h ' n 0M or

so-called " symbol ic eyes" . Plates I and II illustrate

a s far as po ssible without the use o f colo urs the ar-

ran gement o f the text on such coffins . The scene in

Plate I is from on e en d (inside) of the famous coffin

of Amamu (B rit . p l u s . No . 6 , 6 5 4 ) . T he border with its

pattern of rectangles is painted in bright colours, red,

green, and yellow, and all roun d the upper part of

the sides are painted the principal obj ects which formed

the usual o fferings to the dead, and a prayer that the

deceased may hav e s uch thing s o ffered in his tomb

for ever . Here we see vases and jars of various

shape s an d sizes filled with un gu en ts and cosmetics,

the n ames o f which are given in the line o f hiero -

glyphics above them ; they are set upon a stand,



LVI INTRODUCTIONbro ken examples of which hav e been from time to

time found i n tombs . Each of the vertical l i n e s of

text begin s with the wo rd Ur

"recite", a fact which

shews that the text was usual ly inscribed upo n the

walls o f tombs . Plate II gives an extract from the

text inscribed upo n the coffin of Sebek-aa pres erv ed

at Berlin . It will be n oticed that the hiero glyphics

hav e begun to assume a conv ention al form, an d that

they do no t so readily su gges t the obj ects which they

represent . We no tice, too , that the var ious s ections

on such coffins have specific titles attached to them,

in other words they hav e become "Chapters" . As the

pyramids o f the fifth and sixth dyna sties do n ot al l

contain the same s election of extracts fro m the Bo ok

of the Dead, so the coffins of the elev enth and twelfth

dynasties do n ot all contain the same selection o f

Chapters ; this fact shews that the sel ection of the

extracts and Chapters did not follo w any general rule,

but whether it depe nded u po n the will a nd discretion

of the scribe or the deceased can no t be sa id . Downthe length of the bottom o f the coffin inside was fre-

q uen tly painted a band of white acros s which were

traced in blu e wavy lines to indicate water ; this pro-

bably represented the celestial Nile, or the stream

upon which the deceased hoped to flo at to the Ely-

sian Fields . We must note, in passing, that at the

period when these coffins were made no pyramidswere ins cribed with extracts or C hapters fro m the

Bo ok o f the Dead ; in other words, it was found both



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE Xlth and XIIthDYNASTY .

PLATE II .

F rom the Sarcophagus o f Sebek-Aa . (See Lepsius, Aelteste Texte,"

B I . 42 . )

:tq u u u u u u u

.~ - )NAs~

Ho~o~a1o10=10~0~010~0~of0 0~0~1

iU

Fam,! ' ' %

2T. .,-

c- o- j

I-~- l eic~

' ; ; ;

~F, , q.

-̀4FF~f

C

oF r i

5E

+LA5t F l~4~~

C - ) 44U„„~~-- 'F^ ~̀ .

c

MMcao1 6'QOdc . . , Q



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LVII

cheaper and easier to write the text with ink or co-

lours u po n plan ks which could be afterwards pegged

together to form coffins . T his custom resu lted in the

curtailment of the selection of texts, and in less than

a thou san d years after the rel igiou s texts in the py-

ramids o f the fifth and s ixth dyna sties were cut, we

find that certain portion s of them had fallen into dis-

use .

We hav e al ready seen that a period lies between

the s ixth and el ev enth dynasties ( luring which we

know nothing of the Book of the Dead, and againduring the p eriod which lies between the twelfth and

eighteenth dynasties we kno w no thing o f it . With the

beginning of the eighteenth dynas ty the Bo ok of the

Dead begins a new phase o f its existence, and a de-

v elo pment of its history as interesting as it is un -

expected is before us . F ro m pyramids the tran sition

was to coffins, and n ow the transition is fro m coffins

to papyri . A nd here again econo my probably played

an important part . Inscribed pyramids, an d sarcophagi,

and coffins would, necessarily, be on ly made for royal

perso nages and for great and wealthy folk, lo ut a roll

of pap yrus was, in compar ison with these, a v ery in-

expen sive thing, es pecially if the serv ices of an or-

dina ry scribe were employed in ins cribing it .

The greater number of the copies of the B oo k of

the Dead inscribed upo n papyri hav e been foun d at

Thebes, indeed those made in this city are o f such

importan ce, that to the Recen sion of the wor k which



L V I I I INTRODUCTIONw e c o m m o n l y f i n d i n u s e i n E g y p t f r o m t h e e i g h t e e n t h

to the twenty-second dynasty the name "Theban" has

been given . We owe them chiefly to the scribes and

p r i e s t s w h o w e r e a t t a c h e d t o t h e p o w e r f u l c o n f r a t e r -

n i t y o f t h e p r i e s t s o f " A me n - R a , t h e k i n g o f t h e g o d s " ,

a n d , s p e a k i n g g e n e r a l l y , t h e b e s t 1 - I S S . a r e f o u n d i n

t h e i r t o m b s a n d c o f f i n s . T h e o r i g i n a l h o m e o f t h e t e x t s

w h i c h t h e y c o p i e d , w a s , o f c o u r s e , M e m p h i s o r H e l i o -

p o l i s , a n d t h e r e i s r e a s o n f o r b e l i e v i n g t h a t d u r i n g

t h e e a r l i e r c e n t u r i e s o f t h e i r e x i s t e n c e t h e y d i d l i t t l e

m o r e t h a n a d o p t t h e r e l i g i o u s v i e w s a n d d o c t r i n e s o f

the sages of the North . As time went on, and the

w o r s h i p p e r s o f A m e n o b t a i n e d g r e a t e r p o w e r , t h i s g o d

was slowly but surely made to usurp the attributes

of the older cosmic gods of Egypt, and eventually,

as we see in Chapter CLXXI ( i n f r a , p . 3 1 5 ) , h i s n a m e

is included among those of the old gods of the Book

of the Dead .

The papyri inscribed with copies of the Theban

Recension of the Boo k of the Dead vary in length

from about 15 to go feet, and in width from 1 2 t o

18 i n c h e s ; in many cases the various pieces which

form the papyrus are so carefully put together that

it is almost impossible to see where one piece ends

and the other begins . I n t h e e a r l y p a r t o f t h e e i g h -

t e e n t h d y n a s t y t h e t e x t i s a l w a y s w r i t t e n w i t h b l a c k

i n k i n v e r t i c a l c o l u m n s o f h i e r o g l y p h i c s , w h i c h a r e

separated from each other by black lines ; t h e t i t l e s

of the Chapters, and the initial word or words of



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XVIIIth DYNASTY.

F rom the Papyrus of Nebseni, Br it . Mus . No . 9,000, sheet 6 .

PLATE III

i

m

B i

I

1 1 1

L-

c

I

0

W) a



PLATE IVTHE BOOK OF THE DEAD I N THE XVIIIth DYNASTY .

Fr om the Papyrus of Nu, B rit Mu s . No, 10,477 , sheet 28 .



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LIX

certain parts of the Chapters, an d "catch-words", and

rubrics are written with red in k . In the eightee nth

dynasty, or perhaps a little earlier, the scribes be-

gan to o rn amen t the papyri with designs in black

ou tline, referring to the s ubject matter of the text

near which they were placed ; such designs , o r "v ig-

nettes", as they are usu ally called, o ccupy q uite a

subordinate po sition , and they were drawn most pro -

bably by the scribe . Little by little, however, they

increased in nu mber, an d it became the fashion to

illuminate them with bright colo urs, greens, reds, yel-

lows . In the n ineteenth dynasty the unilluminated

papyrus became the exception, and the Vignettesflourished at the expense of the text . A n idea of the

beauty of a ful ly colo ured papyrus of the best period

may be gained from the frontispiece to this vol ume

and from the plates which face pp . i 9 and 170, and

Plates III -VIII will illustrate the characteristics of good

MSS. of the eighteenth and nineteenth dynasties, ex-

cept as to colo ur . Plate III illustrates the writing

an d Vignettes of the famou s Papyrus o f Nebsen i (B rit .

Mus . No . 9 ,9 00) which was fo un d at Memphis ; it mea-

sures 77 feet 7'/ , in ., by i ft . i ' / , i n ., an d contains

sev enty-sev en Chapters, no t including duplicates a nd

t r i p l i c a t e s. The V ignettes are traced in outline and

are remar kably well drawn ; and both Vignettes an d

text appear to be the work o f on e scribe, probably

Nebsen i himself. T he Papyrus o f Nebsen i was appa-

rently written early in the eighteenth dynasty . Plate IV



LX INTRODUCTIONcontains a V ignette and a piece o f text from the Pa-

pyrus of Nu (B rit . Mus . No . 10,477 ), which was found

at Thebes ; it measures 65 ft . 3 ' / 2 i n . , by i ft . 1 '

/ 2i n . ,

and con tains on e hundred and thirty-on e Chapters .

Thou gh shorter than the Papyrus of Nebsen i, the texts

inscribed on it are more n umero us, for the writing is

smalle r an d the lines are clos er together . Some ofthe Chapters have V ignettes, but they occupy an en -

tirely su bordinate po sition , and the colo uring is n ot

as fine as that found in documents of a later date .

The date of this papyrus cann ot be much later than

that of Nebsen i . On Plate V we hav e an ex ample of

the v ery fine , bo ld writing which is fou nd in the Pa-

pyrus of Ani (B rit. M us . No . 10,470), which was fou nd

at Thebes ; this document measures 7 8 feet by i ft .

3 i n ., and contains sixty-six Chapters . It is the finest

of a ll the illu minated papyri o f the e ighteenth dy-

nasty, and from an artistic point of view its v alue is

greater than that of any other papyrus . It is made

up o f six distinct len gths o f papyrus which hav e been

neatly joined ; the text was written by several scribes,

and the V ignettes are the work o f more than on e ar-

t i s t . An examination o f the document shews that the

artist's work was don e befo re the text was written ;

at times the sp ace needed for the text was miscal-

culated, an d the scribe was comp ell ed to reduce the

size of his writing, an d ev en to write words o n the

colo ure d border within which text an d V ignettes are

enclosed . T he first sixteen feet o f the pa pyrus were



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XVIIIth DYNASTY .

F rom the Papyrus of Ani, B rit. M u s . No . 10,470, sheet 26 .

PLATE V



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XV IIIth DYNASTY.

e

C- +hn D-n . . . , f Aril R . d + RA- AI- 1f A17f c.hnn+ V)

PLATE VI

7y

` i ' Z1111-.1

it

iI ~' 7I~~ IoILE / ' /

2 I 1 \ ~

~ - C

I I / ~ I I II .11111112,1 _v' I

'

0II W W

_ - I I I I I I U I~ I,~~ ~a

vw



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LX I

inscribed pro bably by An i himself, the other s ections

were written by scribes o f the same schoo l, pro bably

after his death . T he Hymn to Osiris o n Plate V I is

probably in A ni's own handwriting, and the charac-

ters are formed with an attention to detail n ot often

foun d elsewhere . The V ignettes an d text on p late VII

shew the work o f two scribes a nd two artists, and

als o s hew that the ins cribed portion o f on e se ction

was don e on a larger s cale than was con templated

in the earlier sections ; here we s ee that the bo rders

had to be enlarged to make the j oin . F rom this we

see, too, that the pla nn ing of a p apyrus was a mat-

ter which was left to the discretion of the artist and

scribe ; and when we consider that the Papyrus of

Nebseni contains duplicates and ev en triplicates of

some Chapters, an d that the Papyrus o f An i con tains

two copies of Chapter X V III (one with an introduc-

tion an d on e withou t), s lightly differing fro m each

other and having the section s of the Vignette arranged

differently, it is clear that ev en the best scribes did

no t tie themselv es to an y one plan or method in p re-

paring a copy of the Book of the Dead . We mayno te too that in the Papyru s o f An i a lar ge se ction

of the text of C hapter X V II has been omitted by the

scribe, probably because the artist had not left suffi-

cient space fo r the whole C hapter . In the text, more-

ov er, sev eral palpable errors occur, but, on the other

hand, we have in the Vign ettes description s o f mytho-

logical scenes, names of gods, etc ., which occur in



L X I I INTRODUCTIONn o o t h e r t e x t ; • a mong these worthy of special men-

tion are the judgment Scene and the accompanying

t e x t s , a n d t h e V i g n e t t e t o t h e X V I I t h C h a p t e r .

Plate VIII gives us a Vignette and a few lines of

t e x t f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f H u - n e f e r , a s c r i b e a n d s u p e r -

intendent of cattle who flourished in the reign of

S e t i I , a b o u t B . C . 1 3 7 0 ; the cartouche of the king

a f f o r d s c o n c l u s i v e p r o o f a s t o i t s d a t e . This document

is remarkable from many points of view . I t i s t h e

shortest perfect MS . of its class known, measuring

i 8 f e e t b y i f t . 3 3 / 8 i n . The V ignettes are beautiful

s p e c i m e n s o f t h e a r t i s t ' s w o r k , a n d t h e s c e n e i n w h i c h

the performance of the ceremony of "Opening the

Mouth" is depicted is the most perfect known ; b u t

the Vignette to Chapter XVII is imperfect when com-

pared with that of the Papyrus of Ani . The copy of

Chapter I is so good that M . N a v i l l e e m p l o y e d i t a s

t h e s t a n d a r d t e x t i n h i s T o d t e n b u c h , but the copy of

Chapter XVII is so incomplete and incorrect that he

found it useless even for purpo ses of comparison .

Here again we see that the Vignettes were executed

a t t h e e x p e n s e o f t h e t e x t ; i n s p i t e o f t h i s , h o w e v e r ,

the papyrus is v aluable, for it contains a Hymn to

O s i r i s b y t h e g o d T h o t h w h i c h i s n o t f o u n d e l s e w h e r e

in the same form . The text is written in a good,

b o l d h a n d , b u t w i t h l i t t l e a t t e n t i o n t o t h e d e t a i l s o f

t h e c h a r a c t e r s ; a n d t h e j u d g m e n t S c e n e e x h i b i t s m a n y

p e c u l i a r i t i e s , b o t h i n r e s p e c t o f t e x t a n d a r r a n g e m e n t .

Plates IX and X illustrate the Vignettes and the



IC Daz0sxwrzOQw0

l

Lip 1 7rA lIt ~~pb ~ 4 ' ~ f d p i _ 0~3 ~oPd®pubo~: p

F IN

\ 1 \ \ y,~FI

V ' Q : ~ I : Q I C I ij;~

oc = = " i so ~ ~ : O 1 w 1 4 ) 3 ~ _ 1 $ I ~ I D o © 0 ~

1 ~ w C = n 1 ( I I ~

Ivil Wig

~( : F

_CIOf ~ , ~ 7 i

~ d ' ~ ~ O L O i

I I~ } d l ~ ~

'L( d~~I:~ l ( ~ f l ~M



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XIX th DYNASTY .

From the Papyrus of Hu-nefer, Brit . Mus . No . 9,9 01, sheet 2 .

PLATE V I!!



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . L X I I I

h i e r a t i c a n d h i e r o g l y p h i c t e x t s w h i c h a r e f o u n d i n B o o k s

o f t h e D e a d o f t h e t w e n t i e t h d y n a s t y . I n P l a t e I X w e

see the "royal mother Netchemet" standing behind

her son Her-Heru ; the dress and ornaments of these

royal personages shew the change which has taken

p l a c e i n s u c h m a t t e r s s i n c e t h e e i g h t e e n t h a n d n i n e -

t e e n t h d y n a s t i e s , a n d i n t h e m a n n e r o f d e p i c t i n g t h e m .

The colours of the Vignettes are more crude, the

delicacy of design and of execution alike has de-

p a r t e d , a n d a c o m p a r i s o n o f t h e t e x t w i t h t h a t o f t h e

P a p y r u s o f N u s h e w s t h a t t h e s k i l l o f t h e s c r i b e h a d

d e t e r i o r a t e d . The hieratic text on Plate X gives an

excellent idea of the writing of the period . In the

twentieth dynasty Books of the Dead inscribed for

the priests of Amen began with a Vignette, either

plain or colo ured, in which the deceased was seen

m a k i n g o f f e r i n g s t o O s i r i s o r t o t h e g o d s o f T h e b e s .

This was followed by a selection of Chapters from

t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d i n u s e i n t h e e i g h t e e n t h d y n a s t y ,

o r b y a s e r i e s o f t e x t s p e c u l i a r t o t h e p e r i o d a c c o m -

panied by Vignettes taken from other funeral works .

S o m e t i m e s , a s i n t h e c a s e o f t h e P r i n c e s s N e s i - K h o n s u ,

t h e d o c u m e n t b e g i n s w i t h a l o n g , d e t a i l e d l i s t o f t h e

titles of Amen-Ra, who by this time had usurped the

a t t r i b u t e s o f t h e o l d g o ds o f E g y p t , w h i c h i s f o l l o w e d

by a series of statements in which the god, in ap-

p a r e n t l y l e g a l l a n g u a g e , s w e a r s t o c o n f e r e v e r y f a v o u r

p o s s i b l e u p o n t h e d e c e a s e d l a d y . Such documents are

not very long, and they are usually much narrower



LXIV INTROD UCTIONthan Books of the Dead of the earlier period . Themytholo gical figures and scenes characteristic of the

later documents of the priests of Amen are n ot yet

well understood, fo r on ly a few have been published

in entirety .

Of papyri of the twenty-first dynasty which pre-

serv e man y characteristics of the earlier p eriod may

be mentioned that of Anhai, a priestess of Amen( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,472) , a section o f which is shewn

on Plate X I . Here we have, however, a work s u i

generzs which is v ery instructive from man y points

of v iew . The artist's work is the most valu able part

of the papyrus, and the use of gold for purposes of

illumination appears for the first time . In addition to

the V ignettes o f the older period we find here the

scene o f the Creation given much as it is found on

the Sarcophagus of Seti I, a nd a rare V ignette which

seems to refer to Khemenn u, the city of T hoth . The

texts are fragmentary and often . have n o conn exion

with the V ignettes which accompa ny them, but many

of the V igne ttes are o f considerable interest . Thehandwriting is, in so me places, v ery goo d, but it

lacks the bold firmness which is characteristic of the

older scribes . In pap yri of the eighteenth dyna sty we

find many mistakes , but most of them may be attri-

buted to mo mentary careles sn ess o n the part of a

weary scribe ; whereas in those of the twenty-first and

succeeding dynasties the writers of the texts seem

to be altogether reckless . Te xts are copied beginning



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE X X th DYNASTY .

F rom the Papyrus o f Queen Netchemet, in the po sses sion o f H . R . H

the Prince of Wales .

PLATE IX .



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XXth DYNASTY .

4Rj ~ ~ a .ii ~ ? r ~ r c

CnI, - D--. a t-f__Liuann NAtnhamAt Rnit Miic_ Nn_ 1(L4ACL shppt 4 .

PLATE X .



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LXVat the end instead of at the beginn ing, o mission s of

whole sections are freq uent, texts that hav e pro per

V ignettes ar e cop ied without the le ast re gard to the

correct V ignettes, a nd what is intended to be a Chap-

ter frequently consists of nothing but a series of frag-

ments o f sen tences cop ied without break merely to

fill up the space which the artist had spared fo r the

purpose . It see ms a s if the ar tist both painted the

V ignettes a nd wrote the text, an d as if his sol e aim

was to produce a handsome, but no t accurate, docu-

ment . T he con tents of the pap yri reflect, no doubt,

the rel igious v iews common ly held at that period,

and, if this be so, it is clear that the priests of Amen

held the texts, which they inser ted alo ng side of the

Chapters o f the older period, to be of eq ual v alue

an d author ity . Some o f them went so far as fill their

papyri with religious compositions which are n ev er

to be foun d in the old works . In Plate XII we hav e a

V ignette with a few lines o f text from the papyru s

Brit. M us . No . 10, 47 8 , which I believ e was written in

the twen ty-secon d dynas ty . The artist's work is a copy,

or rather a v ery po or imitation , of the illuminating

of the nineteen th dynasty, and the text con sists of a

series of compositions referring to the offerings which

were to be made to the go ds o f the Q e r t i , or divi-

sions o f the un derworl d . Strictly speaking, these have

no thing whatev er to do with the B oo k of the Dead,

but in the o pinion of the scribe they were eq ually

efficacious . In the same dynasty a large number of

e



LXV I INTRODUCTIONcopies of sel ections o f Chapters fro m the Boo k of the

Dea d were written in hieratic, with Vignettes traced

in outline in black ink . In so me of these the papy-

rus measures about 40 ft . by i f t . 6 i n ., and in others

the dimensions are considerably less . A n idea o f the

appearan ce of such papyri may be gained from Plate

XIII, which illustrates both the fine drawing and small

but clear hieratic writing of the period . It is probable

that the Bo oks o f the Dead written in hieratic during

the twentieth, twenty-first, and twenty-second dynasties

belon g to a Recension different in man y respects from

the Theban, but that such Recension is akin to the

Theban there is no doubt whatev er . In both the Chap-

ters have n o fixed order, and in both the Chapters

have special titles, a characteristic which distinguishes

them from the section s o f the Bo oks of the Dead of

the fifth, sixth, elev enth and twelfth dynasties . It is

tole rably e asy to identify the p apyri which were in-

scribed before B . C . goo , in fact, as long as the power

of the p riests o f Amen was paramou nt at Thebes, the

copies of the B oo ks o f the De ad which were inscrib-

ed for them reflect the pro spe rity of the con fratern-

i t y . B ut when it became n ecessary fo r the priests

to hide at Der el-bahari the mummies of the kings and

queens who had been their greatest benefactors,and troublou s times came upon them, ev erything re-

lating to the rites and ceremon ies con nected with the

dead suffered, a nd the rel ativ es an d friends o f the

dead were obliged to do for them not what they



PLATE XTTHE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XX Ist DYNASTY

Fro m the Papyrus of An hai, B rit . Mus . No . 10,472, sheet 5 .



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XXIInd DYNASTY .

From Papyrus, Brit . Mus . No . 10,478, sheet 7 .

PLATE XII .



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . L X V I I

w o u l d , b u t w h a t t h e y c o u l d . E v e n t u a l l y , i t w o u l d s e e m ,

a time came when no Books of the Dead were writ-

ten, and this period corresponds, I believe, to the

f i n a l f a i l u r e o f t h e d o m i n a t i o n o f t h e p r i e s t s o f A m e n .

This is n ot the place to lament the mistake which

the priests of Amen made when they tried to rule

E g y p t t e m p o r a l l y a s w e l l a s s p i r i t u a l l y , o r t o r e g r e t t h e

policy which made them exalt their god Amen above

the older gods of the country whom the people had

known and worshipped from time immemorial ; i t i s

sufficient to know that in each matter they failed .

They lost their own temporal power as the result of

their intrigues, and at best they only succeeded in

o b t a i n i n g f o r t h e i r g o d a p l a c e s i d e b y s i d e w i t h t h e

old gods . I t m u s t , h o w e v e r , n o t b e f o r g o t t e n t h a t w e

owe some of the best and finest copies of the Book

of the Dead to scribes who had married priestesses

of Amen, and who were themselves attached to the

brotherhood .

W i t h t h e r i s e o f t h e k i n g s o f t h e t w e n t y - s i x t h d y -

nasty to power the Book of the Dead enters upon a

new lease of life, and a general revival of ancient

religious customs took place ; the temples were re-

p a i r e d , a n c i e n t a n d l o n g f o r g o t t e n t e x t s w e r e r e - c o -

p i e d , a n d a r t i s t s a n d s c u l p t o r s t o o k t h e i r m o d e l s f r o m

the best works of the masters of the Early Empire .

E a r l y i n t h i s d y n a s t y , i t a p p e a r s , t h e p r i e s t h o o d w h i c h

succeeded the priests of Amen awoke to the con-

s c i o u s n e s s o f t h e f a c t t h a t t h e t e x t s o f t h e B o o k o f

e *



L X V I I I INTRODUCTIONthe Dead needed re-editing and re-arranging, and

t h e y s e t t o w o r k t o t r y t o p u t s o m e s y s t e m i n t o t h e m .

How and when exactly the work was done we know

n o t , b u t i t i s p r o b a b l e t h a t i t w a s c a r r i e d o u t b y a n

a s s e m b l y o r c o l l e g e of p r i e s t s . We have seen abov e

t h a t s c r i b e s t i e d t h e m s e l v e s t o n o o n e p l a n i n m a k i n g

their copies of the Bo ok of the Dead and that the

w o r k o f t h e a r t i s t o n t h e V i g n e t t e s ( w h i c h w e r e s u b -

o r d i n a t e m a t t e r s o r i g i n a l l y ) w a s a t t i m e s a l l o w e d t o

d r i v e t h e t e x t f r o m t h e p a p y r u s ; i n t h e b e s t p a p y r i ,

t o o , t h e s e l e c t i o n o f t e x t s c o p i e d i s n e v e r t h e s a m e ,

a n d t h e o r d e r o f t h e m i s n e v e r t h e s a m e . I n f a c t e a c h

papyrus had a plan of its own . These things the

p r i e s t s o f t h e t w e n t y - s i x t h d y n a s t y t r i e d t o c o r r e c t ,

and the result of their labours was a Recension of

the Book of the Dead which is usually called the

" S a i t e " . A number of papyri are extant which are

i n s c r i b e d t h e r e w i t h , a n d a n e x a m i n a t i o n o f t h e m s h e w s

t h a t t h e C h a p t e r s f o l l o w a c e r t a i n o r d e r , a n d t h a t a l -

though the papyri vary in length, the selection of

C h a p t e r s b e i n g n o t a s f u l l i n s o m e o f t h e m a s i n o t h e r s ,

t h i s o r d e r h a s f e w e x c e p t i o n s . E a c h o f t h e e a r l y R e -

censions of the Book of the Dead known to us ex-

h i b i t s p e c u l i a r i t i e s w h i c h r e f l e c t t h e r e l i g i o u s v i e w s o f

the time when it was written, and the Saite Recen-

s i o n i s n o t a n e x c e p t i o n t o t h e r u l e , f o r i n c l u d e d i n

it are four Chapters (CLXII-CLX V) which have no

c o u n t e r p a r t s i n t h e p a p y r i o f t h e o l d e r p e r i o d ; t h e y

are remarkable also for containing a number of for-



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE XXIInd DYNASTY

r

L +~ ~ q#q t t ! .

ti 91 3 l o t t - ;rt V).*aa I ftI. t

R J

a

F rom the Papyrus of Heru-em-heb, B rit . Mus . No . 10,257 , sheet 14 .

PLATE MIT .



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD AFTER THE XXVIth DYNASTY .

Fr om the Papyrus of Heru, B rit . Mus . No . 10,479 , sheet 4 .

PLATE XIV



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LXIX

e i g n w o r d s . I t h a s b e e n s u g g e s t e d t h a t t h e s e C h a p t e r s

a r e o f N u b i a n o r i g i n , a n d i f s o i t w o u l d b e i n t e r e s t -

ing to know the circumstances under which they were

inserted in the Book of the Dead . I t i s d i f f i c u l t t o

i d e n t i f y w i t h c e r t a i n t y t h e p a p y r i w h i c h w e r e a c t u a l l y

written during the twenty-sixth dynasty, but MSS .

w r i t t e n i n t h e p e r i o d i m m e d i a t e l y p r e c e d i n g t h e P t o l e -

m a i c a r e n o t d i f f i c u l t t o r e c o g n i z e . Plate XIV gives

f o u r t e e n l i n e s o f t e x t a n d p a r t o f a V i g n e t t e f r o m a

document of this class (Brit . M u s . N o . 10 , 4 7 9 ) , a n d

shews what a well defined class it is . The text is

w r i t t e n w i t h b l a c k i n k i n v e r t i c a l c o l u m n s o f s p i d e r y

h i e r o g l y p h i c s s e p a r a t e d b y b l a c k l i n e s , a n d t h e V i g -

nettes occupy small spaces above it ; t h e V i g n e t t e s

o f t h e S u n r i s e o r S u n s e t , t h e J u d g m e n t S c e n e , a n d t h e

E l y s i a n F i e l d s o c c u p y t h e w h o l e l e n g t h o f t h e p a p y r u s .

S o m e t i m e s t h e V i g n e t t e s a r e a l l m i x e d t o g e t h e r , b u t ,

e v e n w h e n c o l o u r e d , t h e y l a c k t h e a r t i s t i c a p p e a r a n c e

and good work of the illuminated papyri of the

e i g h t e e n t h , n i n e t e e n t h , a n d t w e n t i e t h d y n a s t i e s .

The Recension in use in the Ptolemaic period is

well illustrated by Plate X V, which is reproduced

f r o m L e p s i u s ' e d i t i o n o f t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ; t h i s p a -

pyrus is probably the best and longest MS . o f t h e

class known . T h e s e l e c t i o n o f C h a p t e r s i s r e m a r k a b l y

f u l l ; the number of Chapters, howev er, is not 165

but 153, for three of them (Chaps . X V I , C X L I I I , a n d

C L ) a r e i n r e a l i t y V i g n e t t e s , a n d n i n e o t h e r s ( C h a p s .

X L V I I I , XLIX, LXX III, CV1I, CXI, C X X , C X X I,



L X X INTRODUCTIONC X X I X , and CXXXIX) a r e d u p l i c a t e s o f Chapters

f o u n d i n o t h e r p a r t s o f t h e p a p y r u s . T h e t i t l e s o f t h e

Chapters, catch-words, parts of Rubrics, etc . , a r e

w r i t t e n i n r e d .

Meanwhile, however, a number of short religious

works for funeral use had been composed, presumably

b y t h e p r i e s t s , a n d i t s e e m s t h a t t o w a r d s t h e e n d o f

the PtolemaIc period it was more usual to inscribe

these upon papyri than the Chapters of the old Re-

censions of the Book of the Dead . I t s e e m s a s i f a n

attempt was made to extract only the essential por-

t i o n s o f t h e o l d w o r k s a n d t o o m i t f r o m t h e s h o r t e n e d

n e w t e x t s t h e C h a p t e r s w h i c h r e f e r r e d t o f a i t h s w h i c h

w e r e d e a d a n d t o b e l i e f s w h i c h h a d l i t t l e o r n o i n f l u e n c e

i n t h o s e m o d e r n t i m e s . Added to this, the knowledge

of such matters must have disappeared from the com-

m u n i t y l o n g b e f o r e t h e P t o l e m i e s r u l e d t h e l a n d , a n d ,

t h o u g h t h e b e l i e f i n t h e r e s u r r e c t i o n o f t h e s p i r i t u a l

body and in life everlasting beyond the grav e re-

tained its power over the people as firmly as ever,

most men had no knowledge whatever of the texts

which their forefathers who were dead and gone

imagined to be necessary for the attainment of the

same . The sepulchral stelae and coffins shew that

neither the employer nor the employed had an exact

idea of the import of the texts and symbols which

were cut or painted upon them, and to ignorance

as much as to haste must be attributed the blunders

w h i c h o c c u r i n f u n e r a l t e x t s o f t h i s p e r i o d . Here and



E3=~41~X0 4 - % cQ

%00 aa~-Qa °~

4 1a--fig4~O'-j IIII=ZY-1 -

-:LaRa~~'~~~laQRL



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD IN THE GR&CO-ROMAN PERIOD .

PLATE XVL



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LXXI

t h e r e we f i n d a n attempt to preserve Vignettes and

texts of the old period along with the modern work,

and a good example of this class of document is the

P a p y r u s o f K e r a s h e r ( B r i t . M u s . N o .9 , 9 9 5 ) , a p o r t i o n

of which is reproduced on Plate XV I . Here we have

a representation of the judgment Scene, crude alike

in colour and detail, a part of the Vignette of the

first Chapter of the old Bo ok of the Dead, a num-

ber of the Pylons discussed in Chapters CXLV and

CXL VI, etc . , a n d t w o h o r i z o n t a l l i n e s o f h i e r o g l y p h i c s

w h i c h c o n t a i n p r a y e r s r e f l e c t i n g t h o s e o f a n e a r l i e r

p e r i o d . No M S . c o u l d m o r e c l e a r l y s h e w h o w l i t t l e

knowledge of the old Bo ok of the Dead remained in

the hands of the scribes at that time ; a r t i s t i c s k i l l ,

moreover, had sunk very low, for it will be noticed

t h a t t h e c e n s e r w h i c h t h e w h i t e - s k i r t e d p r i e s t i s c a r r y -

ing before the bier, and which he was supposed to

carry in his hand, is almost as long as he is high !

The coloured portion of this papyrus is followed by

t h r e e c o l u m n s o f t e x t i n h i e r a t i c w h i c h f o r m t h e w o r k

e n t i t l e d SHAI EN SENSEN, or "Book of Breathings" (see

Plate XV II), wherein we find no hymns, and no ad-

dresses to the gods, and in fact no words which do

n o t d i r e c t l y r e f e r t o t h e f u t u r e l i f e o f t h e d e c e a s e d

in the world beyond the grave . Here we hav e an

epitome of all that the Egyptian hoped to obtain in

t h e " l a n d o f e t e r n i t y " .

We have n ow reached the end of the Graeco-Roman

period, but the end of the Book of the Dead is not



LXXII INTRODUCTIONyet, for belo ng ing to the Roman period we find a

number of small ro lls o f papyri ins cribed in v ery

cursive hieratic with a series o f statements or asser-

tion s referring to the happiness o f the deceased in the

next world . Such papyri hav e no V ignettes, and as for

the texts, both hymns and Chapters o f the old Bo ok

of the Dead in any Recension are as absent fro m them

as if they had nev er e xisted . The aim of the writer

of such documents was no t to glo rify the gods, but

to secure the go ods o f the next wor ld by means o f

the smallest amount of writing possible, and at the

least expense . On Plate X V III is repro duced a portion

of a papyrus of this class ( Brit . Mus . No . i o , i i i ) , a n d

a comparison of it with the earlier Plates in this book

will shew at on ce the change which had come o v er

the Book of the Dead . What form the Book of theDead took in the early centuries o f the Christian era

cann ot be said, but it seems n ot to have died out

utterly, for se lections from it are fou nd copied upo n

the outer and inn er swathings o f mummies an d upo n

coffins of the Roman Period ; on a coffin in Paris,

which was pro bably made abou t the en d of the se-

cond century of our era, are written a number of

texts which are as old as the time of the Pyramids at

Sakkara, and this fact pro v es that when such documents

were n eeded or igina ls from which to cop y them coul d

always be foun d . There is goo d reason for ass uming

that the art of making mummies was practised until

the en d of the fifth century of o ur era, and there is



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD (OR BOOK OF BREATHINGS)IN THE GR/ECO-ROMAN PERIOD.

PLATE X V11 .

Fro m the Fapyrus o f Kerasher, Brit . Mus . No . 9,9 95, sheet 2 .



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD I N THE ROMAN PERIOD.

Fro m Papyrus Brit . Mus . No . 10,111 .

PLATE XVIII



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . LXX 11I

no doubt that i n certain places the belief that the

preserv ation of the natural body was absolutely ne-

cessary f o r the gro wth, develo pment, and existence

of the s p i r i t u a l body, existed i n f u l l force u n t i l a

much later date . I t i s not possible t o assign a date

to the period when the decay of the Book of the

Dea d began , but it is pro bably con tempor ary with

the adv en t of the Greeks in E gypt . Up to that per iod

Egypt may be described as the home of a nation that

was given up e ntirely to the care o f the dead and

to the con sideration of the future life ; a few o f its

kings were so ldiers in the true s ense o f the word,

but it is a striking fact that the templ es an d tombs

of E gypt are the chief monu ments of o ne of the o ldest

and greatest civ ilizations of the world . A tottering

religion would be rudely shaken by the inv asions of

the country by Assyrians, Persians, Greeks, andothers, an d the perman en t occupation of E gypt by

Greeks and Romans would continue the work whichfreq uen t disturban ces thro ugho ut the cou ntry had be-

gun . T he final blow, however, was no t inflicted until

the Egyptians began to r eno unce their own an cient

religion and to become conv erts of the preaching of

Saint M ark and his followers ; when they were onceable to believe that Christ had the po wer to raise u p

their bodies in a s piritual fo rm they felt that there

was no need to have them mummified, an d simultane-

ously the need for the Chapters o f the Bo ok o f the

Dead disapp eared .



LXXIV INTRODUCTIONWe are now able t o summarize the v ario us fo rms

of the Bo ok o f the Dead as follo ws:t f i r s t e x i s t -

ed in o ral tradition o nl y, an d was n ext written down

to preserv e it ; of these forms n othing whatever is

known . T he first historical Recension was that made

by the priests o f Heliop ol is, an d the oldest copies

of it known are cut in hieroglyphics upo n the walls

of the chambers a nd p ass age s ins ide the Pyramids

of Sakkara of the fifth and sixth dynasties . Thesecond Recension was written or painted upo n sar-

cophagi an d coffins of the elev en th an d twelfth dy-

nas ties in cursive hiero glyphics . The third Recen-sion was written in hiero glyphics upo n p apyri from

the eighteen th to the twen tieth dyna sty, the v ario us

Chapters having n o fixed order ; this Recension was

illustrated by a large n umber o f Vignettes . T he fourth

Recens ion was written in hieratic upo n papyri during

the twenty-first and twenty-seco nd dynas ties, and in-

cluded extracts from v arious fun eral books which were

illustrated by Vignettes o f an un usual character . The

fifth or Saite Recension was made, probably, in the

twenty-sixth dynasty ; the Chapters hav e a fixed order

and were written o n papyri both in hieratic and hiero-

glyphics . T he sixth Recens ion which was in use in

Ptolemaic times much resembled the Saite, an d may

be regarded as the last form of the Bo ok o f the Dead,

for the extracts from it written for the benefit of the

dead upon small pieces of Papyri in the Graeco-Roman an d Roman periods need hardly be con sidered .



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . L X X V

T h u s t h e g r e a t r e l i g i o u s w o r k o f t h e E g y p t i a n s , w h i c h

h a d l a s t e d f o r t h o u s a n d s o f y e a r s a n d w h i c h i n e a r l y

t i m e s , c u t i n f i n e , b o l d h i e r o g l y p h i c s , c o v e r e d t h e w a l l s

a n d p a s s a g e s o f t h e t o m b s o f k i n g s , e n d e d i t s e x i s t e n c e

i n a l m o s t i l l e g i b l e s c r a w l s h a s t i l y t r a c e d u p o n s c r a p s

of papyrus only a few inches sq uare .

F r o m f i r s t t o l a s t t h r o u g h o u t t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d ,

w i t h t h e s i n g l e e x c e p t i o n o f H e r u t a t a f , t h e s e c o n d s o n

of Cheops, no man is mentioned as the author or

r e v i s e r o f a n y C h a p t e r o r o f a n y p a r t o f i t ; c e r t a i n

C h a p t e r s m a y s h e w t h e i n f l u e n c e o f t h e c u l t o f a c e r -

t a i n c i t y o r c i t i e s , b u t t h e T h e b a n B o o k o f t h e D e a d ,

at all events, cannot be regarded as the work of

any one man or body of men, and it does not re-

p r e s e n t t h e r e l i g i o u s v i e w s a n d b e l i e f s o f a n y o n e p a r t

o n l y o f E g y p t . F rom time immemorial the god Thoth,

who was both the divine intelligence which at crea-

t i o n u t t e r e d t h e w o r d s t h a t w e r e c a r r i e d i n t o e f f e c t

by Ptah and Khnemu, and the scribe of the gods,

was associated with the production of the Boo k of

the Dead, and, though he was primarily the god of

time and chronologer of heaven and earth, he ap-

pears frequently as the advocate and helper of the

deceased . In the CL X XXIInd Chapter (see p . 3 4 1 )

h e i s c a l l e d t h e ` s c r i b e o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h w h o a b o -

" m i n a t e t h s i n " , a n d a g a i n , " B e h o l d , h e i s t h e w r i t i n g

" r e e d o f t h e g o d N e b - e r - t c h e r , t h e l o r d o f l a w s , w h o

"giveth forth the speech of wisdom and understand-

i n g , w h o s e w o r d s h a v e d o m i n i o n o v e r t h e t w o l a n d s " .



LXXVI INTRODUCTIONOf himself the god says, "I am Thoth, the lord of

" r i g h t a n d t r u t h , w h o t r i e t h t h e r i g h t a n d t h e t r u t h

" f o r t h e g o d s , t h e j u d g e o f w o r d s i n t h e i r e s s e n c e ,

"whose words triumph ov er violence . . . . I have

"made R d t o s e t a s O s i r i s , a n d O s i r i s s e t t e t h a s R i .

" s e t t e t h " . The deeds which Thoth claims to have

done on behalf of Osiris are set forth at length in

the two hymns to Osiris which form the CLXXXIInd

and CLX XXIIIrd Chapters (see p . 3 4 o f f . ) . I n s e v e r a l

places in the Book of the Dead the deceased is made

t o r e f e r t o t h e " m i g h t o f t h e w o r d s o f t h e u t t e r a n c e s

"of the god Thoth", and much of what this god did

f o r " h i s b r o t h e r " O s i r i s w a s e f f e c t e d b y t h i s p o w e r .

T h e b e l i e f i n t h e e f f i c a c y o f t h e w o r d s o f T h o t h c o n t i n u -

e d t i l l t h e l a t e s t p e r i o d , f o r i n t h e Bo ok o f Breathings

( s e e p . C X C V I I ) w e r e a d , " T h o t h , t h e m o s t m i g h t y g o d ,

" t h e l o r d o f K h e m e n n u , c o m e t h t o t h e e , a n d h e w r i t e t h

" f o r t h e e t h e Bo ok o f Breathings w i t h h i s o w n f i n g e r s " .

F i n a l l y , m e n t i o n m u s t b e m a d e o f t h e v a r i o u s p l a c e s

i n t h e t o m b w h e r e t h e p a p y r i i n s c r i b e d w i t h t h e C h a p -

ters of the Book of the Dead were placed . When the

Egyptians ceased to cut the Chapters on the walls

o f t h e c h a m b e r s a n d p a s s a g e s o f p y r a m i d s , t h e y w r o t e

or painted them upon the sides, inner and outer, of

wooden coffins, and this custom obtained until the

end of the rule of the native kings of Egypt, about

B . C . 3 5 0 ; t h e V i g n e t t e s w e r e c o p i e d u p o n c o f f i n s ,

long after all knowledge of their meaning had been

f o r g o t t e n , u n t i l a s l a t e a s t h e t h i r d c e n t u r y o f o u r



THE HISTORY OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . L X X VII

era . The inscribed papyrus was s ometimes placed i n

a separatebo x beside the c o f f i n , an d so metimes a

niche i n the wall was specially cut f o r i t ; the most

perfect of the papyri known have been foun d in niches .

F req uently the papyrus was laid by the side o f the

mummy in the coffin, and in this case it is usually

found broken by the movements of the mummy whenthe coffin was carried alon g . M ore frequently the

pap yrus was l aid un der the hands an d between the

thighs befo re the fina l swathing too k pl ace ; it was

also placed between the legs j ust abov e the ankles .

Such pap yri are u sually much broken , an d they are

often much discoloured by the moisture of the sub-

stances, bitumen, cedar o il, etc ., used in the pro cess

of embalmment . In the time of the gre atest power o f

the priests of Amen, in the twenty-first dynasty, large

woo den figures of Osiris standing upo n a pedestal

were made to serve as cases for the papyri,which were tightly rolled up and tied, and pushedup in side the figur es throu gh hol es in the bottom of

the pedestals . ' In la ter times, abou t B . C . 3o o, the

figur es were made so lid, and v ertical cav ities were

cut in the backs o f them to hold the pa pyri ; s t i l l

later, i . c ., in the Roman period, when the papyri

became ve ry smal l, they were laid in cav ities in the

sides of the pedestals, which also contained mummi-

fied portions wrapped in linen of the bodies of the

i . A g o o d e x a mp l e o f t h i s c l a s s o f f i g u r e , t h a t o f A n h a i , a p r i e s t e s s

o f A m e n , i s f i g u r e d i n my Mummy, p . 2 16 .



L X X V I I I INTRODUCTIONpers on s fo r whom they were made . Over the mummi-

fied remain s, which are p laced in the uppe r par ts of

the pedestals, we often find small models of sepulchral

chests or coffins surmo unted by figures of A nubis an d

hawks . The figure o f the god abov e is no lon ger that

of Osiris simply, but it represents the triune god Ptah-

Seker-Ausa r, the go d of the resu rrection, and has all

the a ttributes which belo ng to the an cien t go ds Ptah

and Seker . In this trinity the creator o f the world,

the sun, and Osiris as god of the dead were repre-

sented . Some think that Ptah in this trinity represents

the p erson ification of the p eriod o f incubation which

follows death and precedes the entry into eternal life .

The exa ct po sition of Seker can no t be definitely de-

scribed ; he is u su all y depicted as a mummied body

with the head of a hawk, and he sometimes holds in

his hands the emblems o f po wer, ru le, and sov e-

reignty which belo ng to Osiris ; he is sa id to be the

incarna tion of the Ap is bull at Memphis .



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION .

I t w i l l b e n o t i c e d i n r e a d i n g t h e t r a n s l a t i o n o f t h e

Book of the Dead given in this volume that the de-

c e a s e d i s a l w a y s i d e n t i f i e d w i t h t h e g o d O s i r i s , a n d

t h a t h e i s f r e q u e n t l y c a l l e d b y t h e g o d ' s n a m e. And

i f t h e r e l i g i o u s t e x t s w r i t t e n f o r t h e b e n e f i t o f t h e

d e a d i n a l l p e r i o d s b e e x a m i n e d i t w i l l b e f o u n d t h a t

f r o m t h e f i f t h d y n a s t y t o t h e l a t e s t t i m e s O s i r i s i s

always regarded as the king and god of the dead,

a n d t h a t E g y p t i a n w r i t e r s a l w a y s a s s u m e t h e i d e n t i t y

o f t h e b l e s s e d d e a d w i t h t h e i r g o d . T h u s i n t h e t e x t

inscribed on the Pyramid of Unas ` t h e w r i t e r i d e n t i -

f i e s t h e k i n g w i t h t h e g o d O s i r i s a n d s a y s t o t h e g o d

T e m , " 0 T e m , b e h o l d t h y s o n , t h i s m o t i o n l e s s O s i r i s ,

"thou hast given him that whereon he may live . I f

" h e l i v e t h t h i s U n a s l i v e t h ; i f h e d i e t h n o t , t h i s U n a s

" d i e t h n o t ; i f h e p e r i s h e t h n o t , t h i s U n a s p e r i s h e t h n o t ;

" i f h e b e g e t t e t h n o t , t h i s U n a s b e g e t t e t h n o t ; i f h e b e -

" g e t t e t h , t h i s U n a s b e g e t t e t h . " A n d t h r o u g h o u t t h e r e -

i . Lines2 4 0 ,

2 41 .



LXXX INTRODUCTIONligious literature the deceased always claims that what-

ev er was done by the gods for Osiris s hou ld also be

don e fo r him by them . The hymns addressed to Rdand other great gods dwell more o n the majesty and

po wer which they exhibit in heav en and upo n earth

than upon their goodness to man ; but with Osiris

the cas e is differen t, an d it is ev iden t that in the

earliest period he was regarded more in the light of a

god who could be known, and who was known moreor less personally if we may use the word-and hewas of all the gods the one singled out to receive the

petitions o f mankind for ev erlasting life .

It is impossible to s ay when Osiris began to be

regarded as the god o f the dead, an d it is o nl y from

brief all usions that any history of him can be formed .

Thro ughout the E gyptian texts it is ass umed that the

god suffered death and mutilation at the hands of his

enemies ; that the v ariou s members of his body were

scattered about the lan d of Egypt ; that his sister-

wife Isis sought him sorrowing and at len gth foun d

him ; that she fan ned him with her wings and gav e

him air ; that she raised u p his body and was u nited

un to him ; that she con ceiv ed and brought forth a

child (Horus) ; and that he (Osiris) became the god

and king o f the underworld . In the legend of Osiris

as given by Plutarch ( D e I s i d e e t O s i r i d e ) it is said

that he was murdered at the ins tigation of Typhon

or Set, who tore the body into fou rteen pieces, which

he scattered throu ghout the land ; Isis collected these



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION . LXXXI

p i e c e s , a n d w h e r e v e r s h e f o u n d o n e s h e b u i l t a t o m b .

After the death of Osiris, his son Horus did battle

w i t h T y p h o n h i s f a t h e r ' s m u r d e r e r , a n d , i n t h e w o r d s

o f t h e E g y p t i a n s , " a v e n g e d h i s f a t h e r " . N o t w i t h s t a n d -

ing the death and mutilation which the god suf-

f e r e d t h e E g y p t i a n s f i r m l y b e l i e v e d t h a t h e r o s e f r o m

t h e d e a d w i t h a b o d y p e r f e c t i n a l l i t s m e m b e r s , a n d

that corruption and decay had no power over him .

This fact may be deduced from a large number of

p a s s a g e s i n t e x t s o f a l l p e r i o d s , b u t i n o n e i n p a r t i -

cular which forms part of Chapter CLIV of the Book

o f t h e D e a d ' a d e f i n i t e s t a t e m e n t o f i t o c c u r s . The

deceased says to Osiris, "Do thou embalm these my

"members, for I would not perish and come to an

" e n d , [ b u t w o u l d b e ] e v e n l i k e u n t o m y d i v i n e f a t h e r

"Khepera, who is the divine type of him that never

"saw corruptionet no t my body become"worms but deliver me as thou didst deliver thyself

Homage to thee, 0 my divine father Osiris,

"thou hast thy being with thy members . Thou didst

"not decay, thou didst not become worms, thou didst

"not waste away, thou didst not become corruption,

" t h o u d i d s t n o t p u t r e f y , a n d t h o u d i d s t n o t t u r n i n t o

"worms . I am the go d Khepera, and my members

" s h a l l h a v e a n e v e r l a s t i n g e x i s t e n c e . I s h a l l n o t d e c a y ,

" I s h a l l n o t r o t , I s h a l l n o t pu t r e f y , I s h a l l n o t t u r n

"into worms, and I shall not see corruption beneath

i . S e e i n f r a , p . e82 f .

f



L X X X I I INTRODUCTION"the eye of the god Shu . I shall have my being, I

"shall have my being . I s h a l l l i v e , I s h a l l l i v e . I s h a l l

" g e r m i n a t e , I s h a l l g e r m i n a t e , I s h a l l g e r m i n a t e . I s h a l l

"wake up in peace ; I s h a l l n o t p u t r e f y ; m y i n t e s t i n e s

" s h a l l n o t p e r i s h ; I s h a l l n o t s u f f e r f r o m a n y d e f e c t ;

"mine eye shall not decay ; the form of my visage

" s h a l l n o t d i s a p p e a r ; m i n e e a r s h a l l n o t b e c o m e d e a f ;

"my head shall n ot be separated from my neck ; my"tongue shall not be carried away ; my hair shall

" n o t b e c u t o f f ; mine eyebrows shall not be shaved

" o f f ; and no baleful inj ury shall come upon me . My

" b o d y s h a l l b e s t a b l i s h e d , a n d i t s h a l l n e i t h e r f a l l

"into decay nor be destroyed upon this earth" . T h e

o l d e s t c o p y o f t h i s C h a p t e r i s i n s c r i b e d u p o n o n e o f

the wrappings of the mummy of Thothmes III, who

reigned about B . C . i 5 5 o , a n d t h e l a t e s t i s f o u n d i n

t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( e d i t e d b y L e p s i u s i n 1 8 4 2 ) , w h i c h

d a t e s f r o m t h e P t o l e m a i c p e r i o d . F r o m t h e s e e x t r a c t s

we see that the deceased bases his certainty of an

everlasting life, which was to be lived in a body

which was perfect in all its members, upon the as-

surance that Osiris died, and rose again, and lived

in a body which was perfect in all its members ;

and it followed for the Egyptian that if Osiris did

not die and rise again his belief in a resurrection

was v ain . I t i s d i f f i c u l t t o s a y w i t h c e r t a i n t y w h e t h e r

the ancient Egyptian believed that Osiris endured

p a i n a n d s u f f e r e d d e a t h o n h i s b e h a l f o r n o t ; b u t i t

is quite clear that he believed there was some very



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION . LX X XIII

definite con ne xion between the resurrection of Osiris

and of himself, and also that the god was able to raise

him up and to give him everlasting life, because he

himself had con quered death and risen , and had be-

come the master of ev erlasting life . If the legend of

Plutarch, which states that Osiris was once a man

who lived upon earth, real ly represe nts an E gyptian

belief we may, p erhaps, con clude that the manhood

which was co mmon to the go d and to the su pp liant

sup plied the reaso n why the pr ayers which are pu t

into the mouth of the dead are always addressed to

Osiris . At all events, closer personal relations existed

between man and Osiris than between man and anyother go d ; moreov er, for coun tless generation s he

was the type an d emblem o f the resurrection, and,

relying up on his po wer to giv e immortality to man ,

untold generation s lived and died . The ceremoniesconnected with the celebration of the sufferings, death,

and re surr ection of Osiris were per formed with great

solemnity, an d it has been thought that a represen-

tation o f them took place an nu ally in certain o f his

shrines .

The fo rms in which Osiris is depicted on the mo nu -

ments and in p apyri are v ery numerou s, but we need

on ly refer here to those which concern him in his

character as king , g od, a nd judge o f the dead . In

papyri he is s eated on a thro ne within a cov ered

shrine ; his form is that of a bearded mummy wear-

ing the atef crown , a nd he holds in his han ds the

f*



LXXXIV INTRODUCTIONc r o o k a n d f l a i l ( o r w h i p ) , e m b l e m s o f s o v e r e i g n t y a n d

dominion . On the side of the throne (which rests

upo n a pedestal made in the form of . the sym-

b o l o f t h a t w h i c h i s s t r a i g h t o r r i g h t , ) i s t h e e m b l e m

of the union of Southern and Northern Egypt, which

typifies the sovereignty of the god over the whole

l a n d ; the throne is sometimes placed upon water,

wherein we may probably see the origin-of the tra-

dition of certain Eastern peoples which makes the

t h r o n e o f t h e D e i t y t o r e s t a b o v e r u n n i n g w a t e r . B e -

hind him frequently stand the goddesses Isis and

Nephthys, and facing him, standing upon a lotus

flower, are the four children of Horus (see p . 14 ) .

Thus seated praise was offered to him in these

words : "Glory be to thee, Osiris Un-nefer, the

"great god within Abydos, king of eternity, lord of

"the everlasting, who passeth through millions of

" y e a r s i n h i s e x i s t e n c e " ( p . i i ) . " P r a i s e b e u n t o t h e e ,

"0 Osiris, lord of eternity, Un-nefer, Harmachis,

"whose forms are manifold, and whose attributes are

" m a je s t i c . . . . Those who have lain down (i . c . , t h e

" d e a d ) r i s e u p t o s e e t h e e , t h e y b r e a t h e t h e a i r a n d

" t h e y l o o k u p o n t h y f a c e w h e n t h e d i s k r i s e t h o n i t s

" h o r i z o n ; t h e i r h e a r t s a r e a t p e a c e i n a s m u c h a s t h e y

"behold thee, 0 thou who art Eternity and Everlast-

" i n g n e s s " ( p . 3 4 ) . In an address to Osiris by Thoth

which forms the CLXXXIInd Chapter of the Book of

. t h e D e a d ( s e e p . 3 4 0 ) h e i s s a i d t o b e t h e " G o v e r n o r

of those who are in the underworld", and "to make



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION . LXXXV

men and women to be born again", the new birth

being th e birth intoth e

l i f e whichi s

beyondth e

grave ; and being himself everlasting h e had power

t o bestow eternal exist ence upon h i s follo wers .

Concerning th e form i n which Osiris rose from th e

dead th e tex ts are silent, and noth ing is said as to t h e

nature o f h is bo dy in th e underworld ; th at h e dwelt

in th e material body wh ich was his upon earth th ere

is no reason wh atever to suppose, fo r th ere are in-

dications in th e text s which point to a definite belief

in the resurrection of a spiritual body, bot h in th e

case of the god and of men . Before, ho wever, th is

point is to uch ed upon reference must be made to th e

ideas which th e Egyptians h eld concerning th e com-

ponent parts o f man's entity, material, spirit ual, and

mental . The physical or material body, called hh at,

was l iable t o decay, and could o nly be preserved by

mummifying ; bot h go ds and man poss essed bodies of

th is nature . When th e material bo dy h ad been brough t

to th e to mb fo r burial, provided th at t h e prescribed

prayers h ad been said over it and th e proper cere-

mo nies h ad been duly perfo rmed by th e priests, it

acquired the power of sending forth from itself a body,

called salnr, whi ch was able t o ascend to h eaven and

to dwell with t he go ds th ere . The o nly suitable ren-

dering fo r th e word s h r h u is "spirit ual body", and th is

meaning fit s very well into t h e translation of t he text s

where the word is found. The educated Egyptian

never believed th at t h e material body would rise



LXXXV I INTRODUCTION .

again and take up a new life, fo r h e well underst oo d

th at fl esh and bloo d could not inherit immo rtality . I t

h as been urged by some th at t h e custo m of m ummi-

fying t h e dead, which obt ained th rougho ut Egypt for

so many t h ous ands of years, was m aintained because

th e Egypti an believed in th e resurrecti on of t h e ma-

terial body, but it i s not so ; th ey mummified th eir

dead simply because th ey believed th at spiritual bodies

would "germinate" in them . In several places it is

dist inctl y said th at t h e "so ul is in h eaven, and th e

bo dy upon earth ",' and even t h e dead body of Osi ris

h imself rest ed upon earth in Helio polis (see p . 290) ;

elsewh ere' it is said to th e deceased, "Th y soul is

"in h eaven before Ra, t h y KA h at h w hat s h ould be

"given to it with th e gods, th y saxu bath power ( o r

"is glorious) with th e KHUS, and thy body ( k h a t ) i s

"st ablish ed in th e underworld It is possible

th at certain simple fo lk may have been led to believe

th at because meat o fferings and drink offerings i n

abundance were taken to the tombs the deceased

must naturally partake of t h em, and it is mo re th an

probable th at th e Egyptians in a semi -savage state

made such o fferings because th ey believed th em ne-

cessary fo r th eir dead .

The o fferings taken to th e to mb were intended fo r

the k a of t h e deceased . The word ka h as formed th e

subject of several learned dissertatio ns by various scho -

i . Among oth ers see Recueil de Travaux, t . I V. P . 7 1 ( 1 . 5 8 2 ) .

2 . L i e b l e i n , Que mon nom eurisse, p . 2 , 1 . z f f . a n d p .1 7 ,

1 . z f f .



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION LXXXVII

l a r s , and it is now generally rendered by "doubl e" ; i t

h as its equivalent i n th e Copti c nw and in th e Greek

E t ~ c o X ' , and in certain pl aces may be re ndered by

all th e meanings o f th ese equivalents . Th is abst ract

individuality or personality posses sed all t he attributes

of t h e man h imself , and, th ough its normal dwelling-

place was in th e to mb along with th e body, it could

wander about at wil l ; it was independent o f t h e man

to whom it belonged and could even go and dwell

in the statue of a man . The ka could bot h eat and

drink, and at a very early perio d a sm all ch amber

was specially prepared for it in th e hall o f t h e to mb ;

th is was provided with an opening th rough which it

migh t snuff th e smell of th e incense and oth er offer-

ings made t h erein, and it was th e duty of certain

members of t h e priesth oo d to mi nist er duly and re-

gularly t o its needs . When actual offerings failed it

would seem that th e k a fed upon those which were

painted o r sculptured upon t h e walls and alt ars i n

th e to mb, and wh en th ese were wanti ng it appears

th at it migh t even be reduced to eating of fal and

drinking filt hy water .

Connected in so me inexplicable way with th e ka

was th e 6 a , or so ul, which according t o s ome t exts

is said to eat o f th e funeral off erings along with th e

k a , in wh om o r with who m it was supposed to dwell,

but according t o ot h ers it ascended into h eaven where

it lived wit h Rd and th e beatifi ed (lead . From one

point o f view it i s not a material th ing, and from



L X X X V I I I INTRODUCTION.

anoth er it is a tangible t h ing ; it is depicted as a

h uman-h eaded hawk, and in a Vignet t e in t h e Papyrus

of Nebqet (ed . Deveria and Pierret , pl . 3) it is seen

flyi ng down th e funeral pit bearing air and fo od to

the mummified body, lying in the mummy chamber,

to wh ich it belongs . Th e 6a could leave its place in

h eaven and visit th e bo dy wh enever it pleased, and

it h ad power to assume any form wh ich it pleased .

Certain of t he ch aracteristics of t h e ba were sh ared

by the h eart, r i b , which was believed to be th e source

bot h of life and of go od and evil in man . Th e pre-

servatio n of th e h eart was o f t h e first im portance,

and several Ch apters of th e Boo k of th e Dead were

composed with th e object o f keeping it out o f th e

clutches o f th e "stealers of hearts" . In th e Judgment

Scene it is the one member of the body which is

singled out fo r special examinati on, and th e large

numbers o f h eart amulets which are preserved in th e

national collections of Egyptian antiquities test ify to

th e anxiet y wh ich th e Egyptians felt as to it s se-

curity .

With the b a , or soul, th e k h a i b i t , or sh adow, is

of ten menti oned, and it seems to h ave been nourish ed

by the o fferings which were made in th e to mb of t he

man to who m it belo nged . It h ad an exist ence apart

from t h e body, and like th e k a , or double, it could

wander wh erever it pleased . A n interest ing passage

concerning t h e sh adow is fo und in th e XCIInd Ch apte r

of t h e Boo k of t h e Dead where th e deceased prays :-



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION. LXXXIX

"0 keep not captive my soul, 0 keep not ward over

"my sh adow, but let a way be opened for my soul

"and for my sh adow, and let t h em see t h e Great

"God in th e shrine on the day of t he judgment of

" s o u l s , a n d l e t t h e m r e c i t e t h e u t t e r a n c e s o f O s i r i s ,

"whose habitations are hidden, to t hose who guard

"the members of Osiris, and who keep ward over th e

" N i t s , and who hold captive th e shadows of th e dead

"who would work evil against me" (see p . 152) .

Anoth er integral part of a man was the khu, o r

" s h i n i n g " , t r a n s l u c e n t c o v e r i n g ( ? ) o f t h e s p i r i t u a l b o d y ,

which dwelt in heaven with th e gods . I t i s d i f f i c u l t

t o e x p l a i n i t s e x a c t r e l a t i o n s h i p t o t h e d o u b l e , a n d

t h e s o u l , a n d t h e h e a r t , a n d t h e s h a d o w , b u t i n c e r -

tain passages in which t he word occurs it seems as

i f i t h a d s o m e c l o s e c o n n e x i o n w i t h t h e s o u l , f o r i t

i s m e n t i o n e d a l o n g w i t h i t .

I n s e v e r a l p a s s a g e s , b o t h i n e a r l y a n d l a t e t e x t s ,

t h e sekhem of a man is mentioned with th e 6 a , o r

s o u l , a n d s o m e t i m e s w i t h b o t h t h e k a , o r d o u b l e , a n d

t h e b a . One of t he meanings of sekhem i s " f o r m " o r

"statue", but another meaning is "power", and it

seems as if th e Egyptians conceived th e idea of t he

power or vital force of a man living, with him in

heaven . The gods were supposed to possess doubles,

and souls, and shadows, and hearts, and khus, • b u t

it is doubtful if th ey were endowed with sek hemu ;

it is probable th at th ey were not ; many of th em

were th emselves sekh emnu or "Powers" .



XC INTRODUCTION .

There remains now but o ne attribute o f a man to

mentio n, and that is th e r e n or name ; in Egypt a

man to ok t h e mos t ext raordinary precauti ons to pre-

vent h is name from being blott ed out, for it was t he

commo n belief t h at unless t h e name o f a person were

preserved h e ceased to exis t . A lready in th e Pyramid

texts , as Dr . Wiedemann has pointed out' we find

th e deceased making supplicati on th at h is name may

flourish (li terally, germinate) along with th e names of

Tem, Sh u, Seb, and ot h er gods, and th e same desire

is expressed in texts f rom t h e sixt h dynast y down to

the Roman period, when we find that a number of

papyri were inscribed wit h invocatio ns to one or m ore

gods with th e sole object of making to flourish 2 th e

names of t h ose fo r wh om t h ey were copied . The r e n ,

or name, h ad so me close connexio n with th e k a , or

double, as may be seen from t h e passage in th e tex t

of Pepi L j

Thus we see that th e s a h l t , or spiritual body, th e

k a , or double, th e b a , or soul, the a b , or heart, th e

N i t , or shining form, th e s e k h e m , or vital force, and

th e r e n , or name, and th e k h a i b i t , or sh ade, were all

believed to co me into exist ence after death , and it

seems t h at th e various parts wh ich we h ave enumer-

i . R e c u e i l t i e T r a v a u x , t o m . X V I I , p . 17 .

a . A n i n t e r e s t i n g c o l l e c t i o n o f s u c h d o c u m e n t s w a s p u b l i s h e d b y L i e b -

l e i n i n 1 8 9 5 e n t i t l e d L e & r e Q u e m o n n o n z f l e u r i s s e .

3 . " P e p i p a s s e t h o n w i t h h i s f l e s h , P e p i i s h a p p y w i t h h i s n a m e , P e p i

l i v e t h w i t h h i s k a " ( 1 . 1 6 9 ) .



OSIRIS AND THE RESURRECTION . XCI

ated to geth er made up th e spiritual body which "ger-

minated" in th e khal or material bo dy . There is little

doubt t hat t h e beliefs in th e existence of t hese various

members o f th e spiritual body are not all o f t he same

age, and th ey probably represent several stages of intel-

lectual development on th e part of th e Egyptian ; t h e i r

orig in and develo pment i t is now impossible to trace,

for already in th e fift h and sixt h dynasties t h eir exis-

te nce i s accepted as an accompl ish ed fact .

A q uesti on naturally arises at th is point, as to

when th is spiritual body began its exi stence ; but

unfort unat ely no sati sfacto ry answer can at present

be given to it , fo r no t ext yet discovered supplies

th e necessary information . It is natural t o suppose

that th e s d h - i t , or spirit ual bo dy, came into being as

a result o f th e prayers wh ich were recited on th e

day of th e burial o f t he mummified body, and of th e

ceremonies whi ch were performed at th e same time .

On th e ot h er hand, th ere exist distinct proofs th at

th e Egyptians believed in a judgment wh ich was t o

be h eld in th e domain of Osiris, and we sh ould h ardly

expect th e spiritual body to begin its career unti l

after the trial of th e heart in the Balance, and until

th e verdict o f t h e go ds at th is Judgment was favour-

able t o t h e deceased . The whole questio n is full of

difficulty, ch iefly because th e Egyptians th emselves

did not , I i magine, fo rm definite ideas o n such sub-

jects, o r if th ey did, th ey did not put t h em in writ-

ing . It is, h owever, perfectly certain th at th ey be-



XCII INTRODUCTION

lieved th at Osiris h ad th e power to make men to

be born a f t e r deat h into a new l i f e , and that such

l i f e was everlasting ; and they ascribed t o h im t h i s

power because h e h ad himself suffered deat h and

mutilation and had r i s e n from th e dead .



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD .

An examinat io n o f th e papyri inscribed wi t h t h e

Theban Recension of th e Book of th e Dead s hews

th at they may be divided into t wo classes, v i z . , ( 1 )

those in which t h e Ch apters of Coming forth by Day

are preceded by Intro duct o ry Hymns t o Rd and Osi ris,

and by a Judgm ent Scene, and ( 2 ) th ose in which t hey

are preceded by a sim ple Vignett e in wh ich t h e go d

Osiris is seen seated wit h in a sh rine . The o ldest pa-

pyri of t h e eigh teenth dynasty' lack such Introductory

Hymns and the Judgment Scene, which appear most

oft en in the illuminated papyri of t h e last half of th e

eigh teenth dynasty ; th ey conti nue in th e nineteenth

dynasty, but frequently in a less full f orm . In th e

older Recensio ns of th e Boo k of t h e Dead th ere is no

attempt to describe th e judgment pictorially, and al-

th ough it is prett y certain th at every Egyptian believed

th at h e would be judged after death , t h ere is no de-

finite statement o f th e fact . It will be not iced th at a

i . E. g . , t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i a n d t h e P a p y r u s o f N u .



X C I V INTRODUCTION .

section of Chapter XXX B contains the words, "My

"heart, my mother ; my heart, my mo th er! M y heart

"whereby I came into being! May naugh t stand up to

"oppose me at my judgment ; may there be no oppo-

s i t i o n t o m e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s

" [ o f O s i r i s ] ; may th ere be no parting of th ee from

" m e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f h i m t h a t k e e p e t h t h e B a l a n c e "

( s e e p . 7 9 ) . " L e t t h e r e b e j o y o f h e a r t u n t o u s a t t h e

"weighing of words . L e t n o t t h a t w h i c h i s f a l s e b e

"uttered against me before th e great god, th e lord

"of A mentet" (see p . 80) . Here clearly we have sug-

g e s t e d t h e i d e a o f w e i g h i n g t h e h e a r t , a s t h e s y m b o l

of t he seat of life and th e source of good and evil

a c t i o n s , a n d a s a m a t t e r o f f a c t t h e V i g n e t t e o f t h e

Chapter, which first appears in th e eighteenth dy-

n a s t y , r e p r e s e n t s t h e d e c e a s e d s i t t i n g i n o n e p a n o f

t h e s c a l e s a n d b e i n g w e i g h e d a g a i n s t h i s h e a r t w h i c h

i s p l a c e d i n t h e o t h e r . I t i s n o t e a s y t o s a y e x a c t l y

w h a t b e l i e f u n d e r l i e s t h i s V i g n e t t e , b u t i t s e e m s t o

indicate that th e guardian of th e scale weighed th e

b o d y t o s e e i f i t h a d c a r r i e d o u t p r o p e r l y t h e h e a r t ' s

d i r e c t i o n s , a n d t h a t i f i t h a d d o n e s o i t w o u l d c o u n t e r -

b a l a n c e e x a c t l y t h e h e a r t , a n d t h e b e a m o f t h e s c a l e s

w o u l d b e s t r a i g h t . T h i s t e s t i n g o f t h e b o d y o r h e a r t ,

o r b o t h , t o o k p l a c e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f O s i r i s o n t h e

day when "words were weigh ed" .

I n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( s h e e t 3 i ) f o u r s m a l l V i g -

nettes accompany th e Negative Confession, wh ich

forms part of th e CXXVth Chapter, and in one of



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . XCV

th ese we see the heart of th e deceased in one pan

of th e balance, and a feather, emblematic of Right

a n d T r u t h , i . e . , " w h a t i s s t r a i g h t " , i n t h e o t h e r . T h e

g o d A n u b i s i s t e s t i n g t h e t o n g u e o f t h e b a l a n c e , a n d

close by stands th e monster Am-met or "eater of t he

dead" . H e r e w e h a v e a p r o o f t h a t i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e

w e i g h i n g o f a m a n ' s b o d y a g a i n s t h i s h e a r t , t h e h e a r t

i t s e l f w a s w e i g h e d a g a i n s t R i g h t a n d T r u t h , a n d t h a t

th is stage of th e judgment also took place in th e

presence of t he god Osiris, th e judge of th e dead .

I n t h e e i g h t e e n t h d y n a s t y , i f n o t e a r l i e r , t h e i d e a o f

th e judgment too k great h old upon th e minds of th e

Egyptians, and it found expression in th e large and

e l a b o r a t e V i g n e t t e w h i c h i s p r e f i x e d t o t h e c o p i e s o f

th e Chapters of Coming Forth by Day wh ich were

made at t h is period ; i t i s , h o w e v e r , i m p o s s i b l e t o

say whet her th e large Vignette is a development o f

th at wh ich accompanies th e CXXVth Ch apter, or

whether each had a distinct origin . When once th e

i d e a o f t h e g r e a t j u d g m e n t S c e n e h a d d e v e l o p e d i t s e l f

it seems to h ave been felt t hat t he deceased ough t

n o t t o e n t e r i n t o t h e H a l l o f j u d g m e n t w i t h o u t h a v i n g

f i r s t u t t e r e d w o r d s o f p r a y e r a n d p r a i s e t o t h e g r e a t

g o d s R a t a n d O s i r i s , t o t h e f o r m e r a s t h e g r e a t e s t o f

th e cosmic gods, and to th e latter as the judge and

god of t h e dead ; hence were composed the Intro-

ductory Hymns to Ra and Osiris, of which several

examples are known .

In th e h ymns t o Ra th e deceased apostroph izes



X C V I INTRODUCTION .

th e glory and majesty of the One god, th e creator

of th e world and all that th erein is, who manifests

himself to his creatures under the form of th e sun,

by who se h eat and light men and women, beasts and

feathered fowl, fish and creeping things, trees and

herbs have their being . The darkness o f night into

which th e sun disappeared when he set was personi-

fied as an enemy of t he sun, and the daily victory

of ligh t over darkness was hymned with gladness by

h i s w o r s h i p p e r s . From one point of view th e Egyp-

t i a n r e g a r d e d t h e c o u r s e o f t h e s u n a s a t y p e o f h i s

own life, and day symbolized life and night death ;

t h e c o n f l i c t i n w h i c h t h e s u n e n g a g e d w i t h t h e p o w e r s

o f d a r k n e s s t y p i f i e d t h e s t r u g g l e o f t h e d e c e a s e d w i t h

his enemies in th e underworld, and man hoped that

he would overcome th em even as the sun vanquished

a l l w h o o p p o s e d h i s c o u r s e . I n a f i n e h y m n ( s e e p . i o )

the deceased says :- "O tho u beautiful Being, th ou

" d o s t r e n e w t h y s e l f i n t h y s e a s o n i n t h e f o r m o f t h e

"Disk within thy mother Hath or ; t h e r e f o r e i n e v e r y

"place every heart swelleth with j oy at th y rising

" e t e r n a l l yR a , t h e d i v i n e m a n - c h i l d , t h e h e i r

" o f e t e r n i t y , s e l f - b e g o t t e n a n d s e l f - b o r n , p r i n c e o f t h e

"Tuat, governor of th e regions of Aukert, . . . thou

"god of life, th ou lord of love, all men live when

" t h o u s h i n e s t ; th ou art crowned king of the gods .

"Those who are in th y following sing unto th ee with

"j oy and bow down th eir foreh eads t o t h e earth

" w h e n t h e y m e e t t h e e , t h o u l o r d o f h e a v e n , t h o u l o r d



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . X C \ ' I I

"of earth , th ou king of Right and Truth, th ou lord

" o f e t e r n i t y , t h o u p r i n c e o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , t h o u s o -

v e r e i g n o f a l l t h e g o d s , t h o u g o d o f l i f e , t h o u c r e a -

tor of eternity, thou maker of heaven wherein th ou

" a r t f i r m l y e s t a b l i s h e d . The company of t h e gods

" r e j o i c e a t t h y r i s i n g , t h e e a r t h i s g l a d w h e n i t b e -

"holdeth th y rays, the peoples th at h ave been long

"dead come forth with cries of joy to see th y beau-

" t i e s d a i l y . . . . T h e S e r p e n t - f i e n d ( i . e . , D a r k n e s s )

"hath fallen, his arms are hewn off, t he knife hath

" c u t a s u n d e r h i s j o i n t s . Ra liveth in unchanging and

"eternal law and order." A gain, in anot h er hymn

( s e e p . 8 ) w e r e a d : - " T h o u r i s e s t , t h o u r i s e s t , t h o u

" s h i n e s t , t h o u s h i n e s t , t h o u a r t c r o w n e d k i n g o f t h e

"gods . T h o u a r t t h e l o r d o f h e a v e n , t h o u a r t t h e l o r d

" o f e a r t h ; t h o u a r t t h e c r e a t o r o f b e i n g s c e l e s t i a l a n d

" o f b e i n g s t e r r e s t r i a l . Tho u art the One god who came

" i n t o b e i n g i n t h e b e g i n n i n g o f t i m e . T h o u d i d s t c r e a t e

"th e earth, th ou didst fashion man, th ou didst make

"th e watery abyss of the sky, thou didst form Hapi

" ( i . e . , t h e N i l e ) , t h o u d i d s t c r e a t e t h e w a t e r y a b y s s a n d

" d i d s t g i v e l i f e t o a l l t h a t t h e r e i n i s . T h o u h a l t k n i t

"together th e mountains, th ou hast made mankind and

" t h e b e a s t s o f t h e f i e l d t o c o m e i n t o b e i n g , t h o u h a l t

"made th e heavens and the earth . Thou art crowned

"Prince of h eaven, thou art th e One dowered [with

" a l l s o v e r e i g n t y ] w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e s k y . Rd

" i s v i c t o ri o u s ! 0 t h o u d i v i n e y o u t h , t h o u h e i r ( l i t e r -

" a l l y , f l e s h a n d b o n e ) o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , t h o u s e l f -

'



X C V I I I INTRODUCTION .

"begot ten one, 0 th ou who didst give th yself birth !

"O One, migh ty [ one], of m yriad fo rms and aspects ,

"king of t h e world, Prince of A nnu, lo rd of eternity

"and ruler of everlast ingness, t h e company of t h e

"go ds rejo ice wh en th ou risest and when th ou sailest

"across th e sky . . . . Th o u art unknown, and no t ongue

"is worth y (?) to declare th y likeness ; only th ou thy-

self [canst do th is] . Tho u hearest with th ine ears,

"and th ou seest - with t h ine eyes . Milli ons of years

"have gone over the world ; I cannot tell th e num-

ber of t ho se th rough which th ou hast passed ." From

th ese passages it is clear th at t h e Egyptians believed

th at t h e god who was typified by th e sun was eter-

nal, i mm o rtal, and unknown (i . invisible), t hat h e

created h ims elf, and th e world, and th e beings and

th ings in it ; h e was also One and A lo ne, and th ere

was none like unto h im, fo r th e gods, of who m h e

was king, o nly possessed certain of h is att ributes and

characteristics . It h as been denied by som e th at h is

oneness or unity is th e same as t h e unity o f God

A l mig h ty, t h oug h I believe t h ere is no g o od reason

for th is view ; but wheth er it be or not it is per-

fectl y certain th at when th e Egyptians declared th at

th eir god was One th ey meant exactl y what th e He-

brews meant when they declared that Jehovah was

One,' and what t h e A rabs m eant, and stil l m ean when

i . "Hear, 0 Israel, A donai o ur God is Go d One" („ ; . ) D e u t e r o -

nomy VI . 4 .



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . XCIX

th ey cry out t hat A llah is One .' At all events the

O n e g o d o f t h e E g y p t i a n s p o s s e s s e d a l l t h e e s s e n t i a l

a t t r i b u t e s o f t h e C h r i s t i a n ' s G o d .

In the h ymns t o Osiris the deceased enumerates

th e various titles of th e god and mentions his most

a n c i e n t s h r i n e s . Osiris is declared to be th e son of

S e b , t h e e a r t h - g o d , a n d o f N u t , t h e s k y - g o d d e s s , a n d

"as prince of gods and men" to have "received the

croo k, and the whip, and the dignity of his divine

f a t h e r s " ; h e i s t h e k i n g o f e t e r n i t y a n d l o r d o f e v e r -

l a s t i n g n e s s , a n d h i s e x i s t e n c e i s f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s .

I n h i s n a m e " O s i r i s " h e i s m o s t t e r r i b l e , a n d h e e n -

dureth for ever in his name "U n-nefer" . Th ough

p o s s e s s i n g t h e a t t r i b u t e o f e t e r n a l w h i c h i s a s c r i b e d

t o Rd h e i s n o t " s e l f - b e g o t t e n a n d s e l f - b o r n " l i k e t h a t

god ; Ra h a s n o o f f s p r i n g i n t h e h u m a n s e n s e o f t h e

w o r d , b u t O s i r i s b e g o t a s o n ( a f t e r h i s d e a t h , a c c o r d -

ing to one legend), who succeeded to his fath er's

th rone upon earth and "avenged" him o n Set h is

murderer . From Ra th e deceased asks only th at he

may beho ld him "at dawn each day" (see p . 9 ) , b u t

f r o m O s i r i s h e a s k s ( s e e p . I2) t h a t h i s k a , o r d o u b l e ,

may have "splendour in heaven, and migh t upon

earth , and triumph in th e underworld" . A n d h e a d d s ,

"May I sail down to Tatt u (Mendes or Busiris) like

" a l i v i n g s o u l a n d u p t o A b t u ( A b y d o s ) l i k e a B c i r i r u

i . "He God is One ( a w l d , 1 J l . n ) ; t h e e t e r n a l G o d ; h e b e g e t t e t h n o t ,

n e i t h e r i s h e b e g o t t e n ; a n d t h e r e i s n o t a n y o n e l i k e u n t o h i m " . K o r a n ,

Chap . C X I I .

9M



C IN TROD UY : NON .

"bird ; may I go in and com e out with out repulse at

"th e pylons of th e lords o f t he underworld ; may th ere

"be given unto me lo aves of bread in th e h ouse o f

"coo lness, and offerings of f oo d in Annu (Heliopolis),

"and a h o mest ead fo r ever in Sekh et-A ru wit h wh eat

"and barley th erefo r . "

Judging by th e arrangement o f t h e Papyrus o f A ni,

t h e Papyrus of Hu-nefer, t h e Papyrus of Qenna, and

ot h er documents o f th e period, it seems pretty clear

th at th e Introductory Hymns and th e Vignette of th e

Judgment Scene t og eth er formed a special sectio n of

th e fine papyri of t h e Theban Recension . Th e Vignett e

of th e Judgment Scene varies in detail g reatl y in th e

various papyri, th ough th e essential parts o f it are al-

ways pres erved ; th e fullest fo rm known of it is given

in th e Papyrus of A ni and may be th us described :-

In one portio n of a ch amber in th e domain of Osiris,

which we may assume to be th e Hall of t h e Double

Maat, o r Righ t and Truth , a balance is set wherein

th e heart o f th e deceased is t o be weighed ; th e beam

of th e balance is suspended upon a projection from th e

st andard made in th e form o f t h e feath er wh ich sym -

boli zes Righ t and Truth . Upon th e beam of t h e ba-

lance sits th e dog-h eaded ape which was asso ciated

with Thoth , th e scribe of th e gods . The weighing of

th e h eart is carried out in th e presence of t h e com-

pany of t h e go ds, whi ch is h ere represented by th e

fol lowing members of it :-

i . Ra-Heru-Khuti , o r Ra-I-Iarmachis, th e great go d



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . Cl

within h i s boat . This boat was called th e "Bark of

millions of years", and th ere sat i n it along with Ra

the gods Khepera and Tem, his own forms in the

mo rning and evening respectively .

2 . Temu or Tem, the form of Ra at eventide . He

was th e head of t h e company of go ds at Heliopol is,

and is always represented in h uman form . This fact

indicates th at already in th e earliest ti mes known to

us he h ad gone th rough all th e various stages th rough

which gods pass and had assumed a final and de-

finite form .

3 . Shu, t h e son of Ra and IIath or, who lift ed up

th e goddess Nut, or th e sky, from th e embrace of Seb

th e earth-god ; he typified th e light .

4 . Tefnut, t h e twin-sister of Sh u ; sh e is depicted

as a woman with th e h ead of a lio ness ; she typified

moist ure .

5 . Seb, th e earth -god, t he so n of Shu, h usband of

Nut, and by h er fath er of Os iris and Isis , Set and

Nephth y s .

6 . Nut, th e female counterpart of Nu, or th e watery

mass from which all th e go ds were evol ved, and upon

which t h e "Bark of m illions of years floated" .

7. Isis, th e sister-wife of Osi ris and mot h er of

"Horns son of Isis" ; sh e probably typified th e dawn .

8 . Neph th ys, daugh ter o f Seb and Nut, sist er of

Osiris and Isis, and th e sist er-wife of Set ; she is also

said to be th e mot h er of Anubis by Osiris ; she pro-

bably typified eventide or twiligh t .



C11 INTRODUCTION

9 . Horus, th e sun-god, who i s to be distinguished

from Horusth e so n of

I s i s . Hei s

represented i n

human f orm but with th e head of a hawk ; the hawk

was th e symbol of Horns, and th e worship of t h at

bird is probably th e oldest in Egypt .

io . Hath or, th e goddess of t hat portion of th e sky

wherein Horns t h e sun-go d ros e and set .

i i . Hu and Sa, two g ods wh o h ad th eir places in

th e boat of t he sun at creatio n .

It will be not iced th at several o f th e gods, e .g . ,

Nu, Ptah, Khnemu, Khepera, Set, Anpu, Ap-uat,

A msu, Hapi, and several go ddesses , c . r . , Madt, Nit ,

Sekhet , Bast , Serq, Uatch it ,' are not h ere represent-

ed ; th e explanatio n of t h is fact is t hat only th e gods

and t h e goddesses of t h e funeral company of Osi ris

are considered to be interest ed in th e judgment o f

th e dead .

On one side of th e scale we see th e go d Anubis

test ing th e to ngue of t h e balance, and beh ind h im

stand Th ot h , t h e scribe of t h e gods, writing down

th e result o f th e weighi ng, and th e tri-formed 2 beast

A m- mi t, t h e "Eater of t h e Dead", w h o is waiting t o

devour th e heart o f A ni sh ould it be found ligh t in

th e balance . On th e ot h er side of th e balance are

A ni's " luck" or "dest iny"; an obj ect called z z z e s k / z e n

which has been described as a "cubit with human

i . F o r d e s c r i p t i o n s o f t h e s e d e i t i e s s e e m y Papyrus of Am, p . C V I I f .

2 . O n e - t h i r d c r o c o d i l e , o n e - t h i r d l i o n , a n d o n e - t h i r d h i p p o p o t a m u s .



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . C I I I

h ead", i t either t y p i f i e s th e embryo, or has some

connexion with th e birth of Ani; his so ul in th e form

of a h uman-h eaded bird perched upo n a pylo n ; and

behind these are the goddesses Renenet and Mes-

kh enet wh o presided over A ni's birt h -ch amber and

rearing . Behi nd th ese st and Ani h imself and his wife

Thuth u with h eads reverently bent . A ni is h ere de-

picted in human form, and wearing garments and

ornaments s imilar to t h ose wh ich h e wore upon earth .

It is quite clear that t he body which h e has in th is

Hall o f j udgment cannot be th e body with which h e

h ad been endo wed upon eart h , and we are probably

to understand that it is h is spirit ual body, wearing th e

whit e robes o f t h e beati fied dead in th e world beyond

the grave, which we see . He is perfect in all h is

members, wh ich are endowed with th e st rength and

power th at belo ng t o t h ose wh o have risen in a spi-

ritual or glo rified body from t h e dead . Though he

st ands at t h e entrance of th e Hall and th e weigh ing

of t h e heart h as not yet t aken place, th e artist de-

picted him in th e fo rm in wh ich i t was always assumed

th e just would appear before Osiris . The h eart h aving

been placed in one pan of t h e scales and th e feath er,

symbolic of truth , in th e oth er, Ani utters th e words

which fo rm Ch apter XXX ii of th e Book of t h e Dead

(see p . i9) wherei n h e prays th at th ere may be no

parting o f h is h eart from h im in th e presence of th e

guardian o f t h e Balance . Th is done, Anubis tests t h e

to ngue of th e balance, and finds th at t h e beam is



C I V INTRODUCTION

exactly st raigh t and th at th e h eart balances th e fea-

th er exactly ; th e dog-h eaded ape seated on th e st and-

ard reports t h is to Tho th , who, st anding with h is

writ ing-reed in hand, is ready t o note th e result and

to declare it to th e gods . It is interesting to o bserve

th at th e h eart was o nly required to balance th e fea-

th er and not t o o utweigh it , a fact wh ich i ndicates

th at t h e pious Egyptian was supposed to be able to

satis fy t h e demands and requirement s o f t h e law, and

th at h e to ok h is st and in th e judgment and h oped

for acquit tal by virtue of t h e goo d deeds which h e

h ad done in th e body .

The go d Th ot h next addressed th e company of th e

gods as fo llows : "Hear ye th is j udgment . The heart

"o f Osiris h ath i n very truth been weigh ed, and h is

"so ul bath sto od as a witness for h im ; it bath been

"fo und true by t rial in th e Great Balance . There hath

"not been found any wickedness in h im ; he bath not

"wasted th e offerings in th e temples ; he hath not

"done harm by his deeds ; and he spread no evil

`report s [ about men] wh ile h e was upon earth ." To

th is speech t he go ds reply : "That which cometh fo rth

"from t h y mouth [0 Thot h , dwelling in Khemennu,]

"is confirmed . Osiris, th e scribe A ni, is h ol y and

`°righteous . He hath not sinned, neith er bath h e done

"evil against us . Th e devo urer A .memet sh all not be

"allo wed to prevail over h im, and meat-o fferings and

"entrance into t h e presence of t h e god Osiris sh all

"be granted unto hi m, t oget her with a h omest ead for



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . CV

" e v e r i n S e k h e t - h e t e p u , a s u n t o t h e f o l l o w e r s o f

"Horus. "

'

Th e gods confirm th e report o f Tho th , and Ani,

having been found just, is led into t he presence of

O s i r i s b y " H o r u s t h e s o n o f I s i s " . The words "found

just" represent in a measure the words ntaa khef-u

( m a s c . ) o r uncut k h c r t t ( f e m .) which are always added

a f t e r t h e n a m e o f t h e d e c e a s e d i n f u n e r a l t e x t s ; t h e r e

i s n o e x a m p l e o f t h e i r a p p l i c a t i o n t o a l i v i n g p e r s o n .

Much h as been written about t hem, and many ren-

derings have been suggested for them, such as "true

o f v o i c e " , " j u s t i f i e d " , " t r i u m p h a n t " , " v i c t o r i o u s " ; t h e y

a c t u a l l y m e a n " r i g h t " ( i t a a ) and "wo rd" (cheru), and

seem to be meant t o express the belief on the part

o f t h e w r i t e r t h a t t h e d e c e a s e d h a s s a t i s f a c t o r i l y p a s s e d

th e ordeal of judgment, and th at he has attained to

th e state in which h is commands, whatever th ey may

b e , w i l l b e c a r r i e d o u t d u l y a n d e f f e c t u a l l y .

While Horus is leading Ani into the presence of

h i s f a t h e r h e a d d r e s s e s O s i r i s , s a y i n g , " I h a v e c o m e

" u n t o t h e e , 0 U n - n e f e r , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t t h e O s i r i s

"Ani unto thee . His heart hath been [found] right-

e o u s c o m i n g f o r t h f r o m t h e b a l a n c e , a n d i t h a t h n o t

"sinned against any go d or go ddess . Tho th h ath

"weighed it according to th e decree uttered unto

i . T h e H e r u - s h e s u , o r f o l l o w e r s o f H o r u s , a r e a c l a s s o f m y t h o l o g i c a l

beings or demi-gods who already in the Pyramid Texts are supposed to

r e c i t e p r a y e r s o n b e h a l f o f t h e d e c e a s e d , a n d t o a s s i s t H o ru s a n d S e t i n

"opening his mouth " . F o r a d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h i s c e r e m o n y , s e e my Papyrus

of A n i , p . 26, f .



C V I INTRODUCTION

"him by the company of th e gods ; a n d i t i s v e r y t ru e

" a n d r i g h t e o u s . Grant unto him cakes and ale ; and

" l e t h i m e n t e r i n t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f O s i r i s ( 1 . e . , i n t o

" t h y p r e s e n c e ) ; and may he be like unto th e fol-

"lowers of Horns for ever . " I n t h e l a s t d i v i s i o n o f

th e Judgment Scene we see Ani kneeling by a table

o f o f f e r i n g s p l a c e d b e f o r e t h e s h r i n e o f t h e g o d O s i r i s ,

to whom he says, "0 lord of A mentet, I am in thy

" p r e s e n c e . There is no sin in me, I have not lied

" w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I ( l o n e a u - h t w i t h a f a l s e h e a r t .

"Grant th at I may be like unto th ose favoured ones

"who are round about t h ee, and that I may be an

" O s i r i s g r e a t l y f a v o u r e d o f t h e b e a u t i f u l g o d a n d b e -

" l o v e d o f t h e l o r d o f t h e w o r l d , [ I ] t h e r o y a l s c r i b e

"indeed, who loveth him, Ani, triumphant before the

"god Osiris ." It will be noticed th at Ani now has

his hair whitened, and th at he wears upon his h ead

t h e o b j e c t w h i c h i s c a l l e d a c o n e , t h e s i g n i f i c a t i o n o f

which is unknown . He has at length penetrated to

t h e t h r o n e o f " O s i r i s , t h e l o r d o f e t e r n i t y ' ' - a s t h e

words written above h im read and Ani's petition to

th e god is th at h e may become "an Osiris", that is

to say, a being endowed with a spiritual body which

c a n n e v e r a g a i n s e e d e a t h o r s u f f e r c o r r u p t i o n . The

a n s w e r o f O s i r i s i s n o t g i v e n i n t h e p a p y r u s , n o r i s

it, as far as I have seen, in any papyrus where a

s i m i l a r p e t i t i o n i s m a d e ; b u t j u s t a s i t i s a l w a y s a s -

s u m e d t h a t t h e h e a r t o f t h e d e c e a s e d w i l l a l w a y s b a -

l a n c e t h e f e a t h e r o f l a w o r r i g h t a n d t r u t h , so is i t a l s o



THE JUDGMENT OF THE DEAD . CVII

assumed th at t h e petition of th e deceased will always

be favourably received, and th at h e will h encefo rth

be free to go about in th e god's domains with out

let or hindrance, and to participate in all t h e occu-

patio ns of t h e great go d h imself . Thus t h e Judgment

Scene ends, and t h is s ecti on of th e papyrus in whi ch

it i s fo und is fo llo wed by th e "Chapters of Coming

Forth by Day" .

The question naturally arises h ere : When did th e

judgment in th e Hall of Osiris t ake place ? To th is

no definite answer can be given, fo r th e reaso n t h at

no text supplies th e info rmati on needed . Th ere are

no g rounds, so far as I see, for assuming t h at t h e

Egypt ians belie ved in a great g eneral day of j udg-

ment w hen all t he w orld s hal l be judged, and t he

wicked sh all be punish ed, and th e righ teo us sh all be

rewarded, or fo r th inking, as so me h ave done, t h at

th e mummifi ed bodies were laid in th e to mb to await

a general resurrecti on . On th e contrary, all t h e evi-

dence seems to point to t h e conclusion th at t h e judg-

ment of each i ndividual was t h ough t t o t ake place

immediately after death , and if th is was th e belief it

fo llo ws th at punish ment or reward was allott ed to

th e dead at once . The evil heart, . or the heart which

had failed to balance th e feather symbolic o f t h e law,

was given to the monster Am-mit to devour ; thus

punish ment consisted of instant annihilation, unless we

imagine th at th e destruction of t h e heart was extended

over an indefinite perio d . The difficulty of t he sub-



C V I I I INTRODUCTION .

ject is f urther complicated when we come to consider

th e use and object of th e funeral ceremonies and

prayers . If at h is death th e soul o f a man passed

to immediate j udgment, what could th e ceremo nies

and prayers of th e priest s avail it ? We know that

th e embalming of a body in th e best and most ex-

pensive way o ccupied a perio d varying fro m s eventy

to about o ne hundred days, and th at several m ore

days were necessary before t h e bo dy was co ffined

and laid wit h th e proper ceremonies in th e to mb . If

th e prayers wh ich t h e priests recited and th e cere-

monies which th ey performed over it at th e grave

were abso lutel y necessary fo r th e fut ure well-being

of its soul, and if the soul could not begin its beati-

fi ed exist ence until such prayers h ad been said and

such ceremonies h ad been performed, it is difficult to

underst and wh y such a lengt h y process o f embalm-

ment was resort ed to, f or during th e perio d wh ich

elapsed between death and burial th e so ul must h ave

t arried in so me inte rmediate place . In th e absence

of exact knowledge we can only assum e th at certain

prayers were said for t h e benefit o f t h e deceased im-

mediately aft er death , and th at such prayers assured

h is acquit tal in th e Hall o f Osiris, and procured fo r

h im entrance into th e abode of t h e blessed . This done,

the embalmment of the body might be carried out

at t h e convenience of all co ncerned, and t h e elabo-

rate and form al ceremonies connected wit h th e se-

pulture of t h e great wo uld fo llo w in due course . The



THE JUDGMENT F THE DEAD . CIX

beliefs which are connected with th e judgment o f th e

dead are so numerous and so confli cting, and belo ng

to so many various periods of development o f reli-

gious th ought in Egypt th at it is impossible to h ar-

monize t h em ; as new next s are discovered th e diffi-

cult ies wil l probably disappear one by one, and t h e

future labours of Egypto lo gist s will clear up many

obscure passages which up to th e present h ave been

misunderstoo d .



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN .

At a very early period i n t h e i r histo ry th e Egyp-

t i a n s believed i n th e exist ence of a place wherein

th e blessed dead led a lif e of h appiness, t h e charac-

teristics of wh ich much resemble tho se of th e life

whi ch h e h ad led upon earth ; th ese characteristics

are so similar that it is h ard to believe th at in th e

early times t h e one life was not h eld to be a mere

c ontinuati o n of t h e o t h er . At all events the de-

ligh ts and pleasures o f t h is world were believed to

be fort h coming in th e next , and a life t h ere in a

st ate of h appiness wh ich depended absol utely upon

material th ings was contemplated . Such ideas date

from t h e tim e when th e Egyptians were in a semi-

savage st ate, and th e preservatio n of t h em is pro-

bably due to th eir extreme conservati sm in all mat-

ters connected with religion ; th e remarkable po int

ab o ut t h e m i s t h e i r pe rs i s t ence , f o r t h e y occur in

text s which belong t o periods when it was impossible

for t h e Egyptians t o h ave att ached any serious im -

portance to th em, and some o f t h e coarsest ideas



THE EL YSIA N FIELDS OR HEAVEN CXI

are i n places mingled with th e expression of l o f t y

s p i r i t u a l conceptio ns . I n a passage i n th e texto f

Unas it i s said of t h is king (1 . 623), "Unas h ath come

"to his pools which are on both sides of t he st ream

"of th e goddess Meh t-urt, and to t h e place of ver-

dant o fferings, and to th e fields which are on th e

`horizon ; h e hath made h is fields on both sides of

"th e ho rizo n to be verdant. He hath brought the

"crystal to th e Great Eye wh ich is i n th e field, h e

"h ath taken hi s seat in the h orizo n, he riseth like

"Sebek t h e s on of Neit h , h e eate t h wi t h h is m ou t h ,

"h e voideth water, h e enjo yeth th e pleasures of love,

"and he is the begetter who carrieth away women

"from t h eir husbands whenever it pleaseth h im so to

"do" . A nd in th e text of Teta (1 . 286f .) we read,

"Hail, Osiris Teta, Horus h ath granted th at Tho th

"sh all bring t h ine enemy unto th ee . He h ath placed

"thee behind him that he may riot harm thee and

"th at t h ou mayest make th y seat upon him, and th at

"when coming forth th ou mayest sit upon h im so t h at

"h e may not be able to force intercourse upon th ee" .

The se passages g ive a very clear idea of th e st ate

of Egyptian mo rals wh en th ey were writt en, and th ey

indicate th e indignities t o which th ose vanquish ed in

war, both male and female, were exposed at th e

h ands of th e conquerors .

The t exts of th e early period, as will be seen from

th e ext racts gi ven furth er on, give a large amo unt

of i nformation about th e pleasures of t h e deceased in



C X I I INTRODUCTION .

th e world beyond the grave, but no attempt to illu-

s t r a t e t h e e m p l o y m e n t s o f t h e b l e s s e d d e a d i s g i v e n

until t he eight eenth dynasty, when the Vignette to

th e CXth Chapter of the Book of th e Dead was in-

s e r t e d i n p a p y r i . Here we have an idea given of the

conception which the Egyptian formed of the place

, , , herein he was to dwell after death . A h omestead

or farm, or country, intersected with canals is at

o n c e h i s p a r a d i s e a n d t h e h o m e o f t h e b l e s s e d d e a d ,

and the abode of th e god of h is city . T h i s p l a c e i s

called Sekhet -Aaru or "Field of Reeds", and this

name seems t o indicate t hat the Egyptian placed his

p a r a d i s e i n t h e n o r t h o f E g y p t , p r o b a b l y i n s o m e p a r t

o f t h e D e l t a o r i n t h e i s l a n d s o f t h e s e a s t i l l f u r t h e r

n o r t h . C e r t a i n i t i s t h a t t h e d e c e a s e d p r a y s s e v e r a l

times that t he "sweet breath of the north wind" may

be given unto him, and th ose who have experienced

th e discomfo rt of a south wind on a h ot day in

Egypt will sympath ize with him . T h e F i e l d o f R e e d s ,

however, was but a portion of th e district called

"Sekhet-Hetep" or "Sekhet-Hetepet", or "Fields of

Peace", over which th ere presided a number of gods,

a n d h e r e t h e d e c e a s e d l e d a l i f e w h i c h s u g g e s t s t h a t

t h e i d e a o f t h e w h o l e p l a c e o r i g i n a t e d w i t h a n a t i o n

o f a g r i c u l t u r i s t s . I n t h e c o l o u r e d V i g n e t t e w h i c h f a c e s

Chapter CX (see p .1 7 0 )

t h e s c r i b e A n i i s s e e n b e i n g

introduced to th e gods of Sekhet-hetep by Thot h,

who accompanies h im to smoo th his way and to do

f o r h i m a l l t h a t h e d i d f o r O s i r i s . Next we see him



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEA VEN . CXIII

sailing i n a boat laden with offerings which h e i s

bearing to th e hawk-god . Lower down we see h im

reaping wheat and driving th e oxen which t read out th e

corn, and beyond th at h e is kneeling befo re two h eaps

o f grain, one red and one wh it e . In th e next division

h e is plough ing th e land of Sekh et-A nru or Sekhet -

A aru by th e side of a stream o f vast length and un-

known breadth , wh ich contains neith er worm nor fi sh .

In th e fourth division is th e abode of th e god Osiris,

and here are t h e places where dwell t h os e who are

nourish ed upon divine foo d, and t h e spirit ual bo dies

of t h e dead . In one sectio n of th is divisio n the de-

ceased placed th e god of h is city, s o t h at even in

respect of h is religious o bservances h is life migh t be

as perfect as it was upo n earth . His wishes in th e

matter of th e future life are well expressed in th e

fo llo wing prayer (see p . 172) :--"Let me be reward-

ed with thy fields, 0 god Hetep ; t h at w h ic h is

" t h y wis h s ha lt t h o u do, 0 l ord of t h e winds . May

"I become a Khu t h erein, may I eat t h erein, may I

"drink th erein, may I plough th erein, may I reap

"th erein, may I figh t th erein, may I make love th erein,

"may my words be mighty therein, may I never be

""in a state o f servitude th erein, but may I have au-

th ority therein ." Elsewhere in th e same Chapter th e

deceased addresses th e go ds of th e various lakes and

sections of t h e Elysian Fields, and he states t h at h e

h as bath ed in th e h ol y lake, t h at all uncleanness h as

departed from h im, and th at h e h as arrayed h imsel f

h



CXIV INTRODUCTION .

i n th e apparel of Ra ; i n h i s new life even amuse-

ments are provi ded (but th ey are th e amusements o f

eart h ), for h e snares feath ered fo wl and sails about

in hi s bo at catch ing worms and serpents . A remark-

able passage in th e text of Unas (1 . 4 9 6 f f .) describes

th e deceased king as a so ul in th e fo rm of a god

who devours h is f ath ers and mot h ers, and -mankind

generally, and go ds . He h unt s and entraps th e go ds

in th e plains of t h e next wo rld, and having tied th em

securely he sl ays and disembowels t h em . The choice

portions of th eir bodies h e boils and consumes at h is

meals at dawn, eventide, and midnig h t ; th e remainder

h e burns t o h eat t h e cauldrons . He eats t h e hearts

carefully so t h at h e may absorb t h e vital powers of

th e gods, and by eating o th er porti ons also h e ac-

quires all th e att ributes of th e god . Inasmuch as he

h as eaten th e bodies of t h e gods he becomes indeed

a god, and since th ey possessed th e attribute o f ever-

lasting life and could not die again, t h e king becomes

straigh tway possessed of t h eir att ributes. Here again

we have a trace of a savage custo m, namely t h at of

cutting out a portio n of s om e intest ine of a fo e and

eating it in order to acquire h is mental and physical

powers ; such a custo m must h ave disappeared fro m

Egypt long befo re th e monuments known to us were

made, and it is h ard to understand th e retenti on o f such

a notio n in a text filled with sublime th ough ts and ideas .

In th e text s of all periods we read of ten th at t h e

deceas ed l ive s wi t h Ra, that he stands among the



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXV

company of the gods, and th at he is one like unto

th e divine beings who dwell with th em ; b u t l i t t l e i s

to ld us concerning h is intercourse with th ose whom

h e h a s k n o w n u p o n e a r t h , a n d i f i t w e r e n o t f o r s o m e

two or three passages in th e Theban Recension of

th e Book of th e Dead we should be obliged to as-

s u m e t h a t t h e p o w e r t o r e c o g n i z e t h e f r i e n d s o f e a r t h

in th e next world was not enjo yed by th e deceased .

B u t t h a t h e r e a l l y p o s s e s s e d t h i s p o w e r , a t l e a s t s o

f a r a s h i s p a r e n t s w e r e c o n c e r n e d , w e l e a r n f r o m t h e

CXth Chapter, where th e deceased, addressing a pool

o r l a k e s i t u a t e d i n t h e f i r s t s e c t i o n o f t h e E l y s i a n

F i e l d s , s a y s ( s e e p . 175), "0 Qenqentet , I h ave en-

"tered into th ee, and I have seen th e Osiris [my

" f a t h e r ] , a n d I h a v e i d e n t i f i e d m y m o t h e r , " a d e l i g h t ,

h o w e v e r , w h i c h h e b r a c k e t s w i t h t h e p l e a s u r e s o f m a k -

ing love and of catching worms and serpents! In the

p a p y r u s o f t h e p r i e s t e s s A n h a i ( B r i t . M u s . No . r o; 4 7 2 )

we actually see t he deceased lady in converse with

two figures, one of whom is probably her father and

t h e o t h e r c e r t a i n l y h e r m o t h e r , f o r a b o v e t h e h e a d o f

t h e l a t t e r a r e w r i t t e n t h e w o r d s " h e r m o t h e r " ( i m a u t - s )

followed by th e name . A s u p p l e m e n t a r y p r o o f o f t h i s

i s a f f o r d e d b y a p a s s a g e i n t h e L I I n d C h a p t e r , w h e r e

the deceased says (see p . i o 3) :- "The gods shall

"say unto me : `What manner of food wouldst t hou

"'have given unto th ee ? ' [ A n d I r e p l y : ] ' L e t m e e a t

" `my food under th e sycamore tree of my lady, th e

"'goddess Hathor, and let my times be among the

h *



CXV I INTRODUCTION .

`divine beings who h ave aligh ted th ereon . Let me

-h ave th e power to order my own f i e l d s i n Tatt u

" ànd my own gro wing crops i n Annu . Let me l i v e

"ùpon bread made of whit e barley, and let my ale

-be [m ade] from red grain, and may t h e persons o f

"`my father and my mother be given unto me as

" `guardians of my doo r and fo r th e ordering of my

"'territory .'" Th e same idea is also expressed in th e

CLXXXIXth Chapter (1 .7 )

. Thus t h e deceased ho ped

t o h ave in th e next world an abundance of t h e ma-

terial comforts whi ch h e enjo yed in th is world, and to

meet again hi s o wn go d, and h is f ath er and mo th er ;

as we see h im freq uently accompanied by his wife in

several Vignett es to ot h er Ch apters we may assume

th at h e would meet h er again along with th e children

whom she bore him .

It will be noticed that little is said throughout th e

Book of th e Dead about th e spiritual o ccupatio ns o f

th e blessed dead, and we are to ld not h ing of t h e

cho irs of angels who h ymn th e Deity everlastingly in

th e religious works o f later Western natio ns . The

dead wh o att ained to everlasting life became in every

respect like t he divine inhabitants of heaven, and they

ate t h e same m eat, and drank th e same drink, and

wore t h e same apparel, and lived as t h ey lived . No

classi ficatio n of angels is m entio ned, and grades of

th em li ke Cherubim, and Seraphim, Thrones, Powers,

Dominions, et c ., such as are found in the celestial hier-

archy o f Semi ti c natio ns are unknown ; a celestial city



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . C X V I I

c o n s t r u c t e d o n t h e m o d e l d e s c r i b e d i n t h e A p o c a l y p s e

is also unknown .

W e h a v e s e e n t h a t t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s m u c h r e s e m b l e d

t h e f l a t , f e r t i l e l a n d s i n t e r s e c t e d b y l a r g e c a n a l s a n d

streams of running water such as must always have

e x i s t e d , a n d m a y s t i l l b e s e e n i n c e r t a i n p a r t s o f t h e

D e l t a ; o f t h e d i s t a n c e t o b e t r a v e r s e d b y t h e d e a d b e -

fore they were reached not hing whatever is said. A s

th e Egyptian made his future world a counterpart of

th e Egypt which he knew and loved, and gave to it

h e a v e n l y c o u n t e r p a r t s o f a l l t h e s a c r e d c i t i e s t h e r e o f ,

he must have conceived th e existence of a water way

l i k e t h e N i l e , w i t h t r i b u t a r i e s a n d b r a n c h e s , w h e r e o n

h e m i g h t s a i l a n d p e r f o r m h i s j o u r n e y s . A c c o r d i n g t o

some texts th e abode of th e dead was away beyond

E g y p t t o t h e n o r t h , b u t a c c o r d i n g t o o t h e r s i t m i g h t b e

e i t h e r a b o v e o r b e l o w t h e e a r t h . T h e o l d e s t t r a d i t i o n

o f a l l p l a c e d i t a b o v e t h e e a r t h , a n d t h e s k y w a s t h e

l a r g e f l a t o r v a u l t e d i r o n s u r f a c e w h i c h f o r m e d i t s f l o o r ;

t h i s i r o n s u r f a c e w a s s u p p o r t e d u p o n f o u r p i l l a r s , o n e

a t e a c h o f t h e c a r d i n a l p o i n t s , a n d i t s e d g e s w e r e s o m e

h e i g h t a b o v e t h e e a r t h . T o r e a c h t h i s i r o n c e i l i n g o f

t h e e a r t h a n d f l o o r o f h e a v e n a l a d d e r w a s t h o u g h t t o

be necessary, as we may see from t he following pas-

sage in which Pepi th e king says, "Homage to th ee,

" O l a d d e r ' o f t h e g o d , h o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 l a d d e r o f S e t .

" S e t t h y s e l f u p , 0 l a d d e r o f t h e g o d , s e t t h y s e l f u p ,

i . J ~4

magel (Pepi I, 1 . 192) .



C X V I I I INTRODUCTION.

" 0 l a d d e r o f S e t , s e t t h y s e l f u p , 0 l a d d e r o f H o r u s ,

"whereby Osiris appeared in heaven when he wrough t

" p r o t e c t i o n f o r R ao r i t i s t h y s o n P e p i , a n d

" t h i s P e p i i s H o r u s , a n d t h o u h a s t g i v e n b i r t h t o t h i s

" P e p i e v e n a s t h o u h a l t g i v e n b i r t h t o t h e g o d w h o i s

" t h e l o r d o f t h e l a d d e r . T h o u h a s t g i v e n u n t o h i m t h e

" l a d d e r o f t h e g o d , a n d t h o u h a s t g i v e n u n t o h i m t h e

"ladder of Set, whereby this Pepi hath appeared in

"heaven, when he wrough t protection for Ra ." A nd

i n a n o t h e r p l a c e ( 1 . 182) w e r e a d , " P e p i g o e t h t o h i s

"moth er Nut th ere (i . c . , i n h e a v e n ) , a n d h e e n t e r e t h

" t h e r e i n i n h i s n a m e o f ` L a d d e r ' ." Elsewhere we are

t o l d t h a t ( 1 . 16q) :- " P e p i i s h o l y . He hath received

" h i s s t a f f , h e i s p r o v i d e d w i t h h i s t h r o n e , a n d h e h a t h

" t a k e n h i s s e a t i n t h e b o a t o f t h e d o u b l e c o m p a n y o f

"th e gods . R a a c t e t h a s h i s p i l o t i n h i s j o u r n e y t o

"the West, and he stablisheth his th rone for him at

" t h e h e a d o f t h e l o r d s o f K a s , a n d h e h a t h i n s c r i b e d

"[h is name] at t he head of th e living . The Peh-ka

" w h i c h i s i n t h e w a t e r s o p e n e t h i t s d o o r s t o t h i s P e p i ,

" a n d t h e i r o n [ w h i c h f o r m e t h ] t h e c e i l i n g o f t h e h e a v e n s

" u n b o l t e t h i t s g a t e s t o t h i s P e p i ; P e p i p a s s e t h t h r o u g h

" t h e m h a v i n g h i s p a n t h e r s k i n u p o n h i m , a n d h i s w h i p

" i n h i s h a n d . "

A l a t e r b e l i e f p l a c e d t h e a b o d e o f t h e d e p a r t e d a w a y

t o t h e w e s t o r n o r t h - w e s t o f E g y p t , a n d t h e s o u l s o f

t h e d e a d m a d e t h e i r w a y t h i t h e r t h r o u g h a g a p i n t h e

mountains on th e western bank of the Nile near Aby-

dos . A s t i l l l a t e r b e l i e f m a d e o u t t h a t t h e a b o d e o f t h e



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEA VEN . CXIX

d e p a r t e d w a s a l o n g , m o u n t a i n o u s , n a r r o w v a l l e y w i t h

a r i v e r r u n n i n g a l o n g i t ; s t a r t i n g f r o m t h e e a s t i t m a d e

i t s w a y t o t h e n o r t h , a n d t h e n t a k i n g a c i r c u l a r d i r e c -

t i o n i t c a m e b a c k t o t h e e a s t . I n t h i s v a l l e y t h e r e l i v e d

all manner of fearful monsters and beasts, and here

was the country th rough which th e sun passed during

t h e t w e l v e h o u r s o f n i g h t . ' I t i s i m p o s s i b l e t o r e c o n -

c i l e a l l t h e c o n f l i c t i n g s t a t e m e n t s c o n c e r n i n g t h e a b o d e

o f t h e d e a d , a n d t h e E g y p t i a n s t h e m s e l v e s h e l d d i f f e r -

e n t v i e w s a b o u t i t a t d i f f e r e n t p e r i o d s . T h e f o l l o w i n g

e x t r a c t s , h o w e v e r , f r o m t h e P y r a m i d T e x t s 2 w i l l s h e w

th e reader what views were held by th em concerning

th e h ome o f the blessed dead in th e next world, and

c o n c e r n i n g t h e i r t r e a t m e n t t h e r e i n b y t h e g o d s .

( L . 4 6 8 ) " B e h o l d U n a s , c o m e t h , b e h o l d , U n a s c o m e t h ,

" b e h o l d , U n a s c o m e t h f o r t h ! A n d i f U n a s c o m e t h n o t o f

" h i s o w n a c c o r d t h y m e s s a g e h a v i n g c o m e t o h i m s h a l l

" b r i n g h i m . Unas maketh his way to his abode, and

"th e cow-goddess of th e Great Lake boweth down be-

" f o r e h i m ; none shall ever take away his fo od from

" t h e G r e a t B o a t , a n d h e s h a l l n o t b e r e p u l s e d a t t h e

"White House of th e great ones by the region Mes-

"khent on th e border of t he sky . Beho ld, Unas hath

" a r r i v e d a t t h e h e i g h t o f h e a v e n a n d h e s e e t h h i s b o d y

"in the Semketet boat,' and Unas laboureth th erein ;

" h e h a t h s a t i s f i e d t h e u r a e u s i n t h e M a t b o a t 4 and hath

i . S e e m y Papyrus of Am , p . C I V .

a . M a s p e r o , Les I n s c r i p t i o n s des Pyramides de Saggarah, P a r i s , 1 89 4 -

3 . I . e . , t h e b o a t o f t h e s e t t i n g s u n .

4 . 1 e . , t h e b o a t o f t h e r i s i n g s u n .



CXX INTRODUCTION .

"wash ed i t , and th e henincmet b e i n g s h a v e t e s t i f i e d

" c o n c e r n i n g h i m , t h e w i n d s a n d s t o r m s o f h e a v e n h a v e

" s t r e n g t h e n e d h i m , a n d t h e y i n t r o d u c e h i m t o Ra . 0

"make th e two h orizons of heaven to embrace Rd s o

" t h a t h e m a y g o f o r t h t o w a r d s t h e h o r i z o n . 0 m a k e t h e

"two horizons of h eaven to embrace Heru-khuti (Har-

" m a c h i s ) , s o t h a t h e m a y g o f o r t h t o w a r d s t h e h o r i z o n

" w i t h R a t . 0 make the two horizons of h eaven to em-

" b r a c e U n a s s o t h a t h e m a y g o f o r t h t o w a r d s t h e h o r i -

z o n w i t h Ra . 0 make the two horizons of h eaven to

"embrace Unas so th at h e may go forth towards the

" h o r i z o n a l o n g w i t h H e r u - k h u t i a n d Ra . T h i s U n a s i s

" h a p p i l y u n i t e d t o h i s k a , his panth er skin and his

" g r a i n b a g a r e u p o n h i m , h i s w h i p i s i n h i s h a n d , h i s

" s c e p t r e i s i n h i s g r a s p . T h e y b r i n g t o h i m t h e f o u r

" K r - i u s w h o d w e l l i n t h e h a i r o f H o r u s , w h o s t a n d o n

" t h e e a s t s i d e o f h e a v e n a n d a r e g l o r i o u s b y r e a s o n o f

" t h e i r s c e p t r e s , a n d t h e y d e c l a r e t h e f a i r n a m e o f U n a s

" t o Ra, and they make him t o escape from Neheb-kau,

" a n d t h e s o u l o f t h i s U n a s l i v e t h i n t h e n o r t h o f t h e

"Sekhet-Aaru, and he saileth about in th e Lake of

"Kha . W h i l s t t h i s U n a s s a i l e t h t o w a r d s t h e e a s t s i d e

" o f t h e h o r i z o n , w h i l s t h e s a i l e t h , s a i l e t h t o w a r d s t h e

" e a s t s i d e o f h e a v e n , h i s s i s t e r t h e s t a r S e p t e t g i v e t h

" h i m b i r t h i n t h e T u a t . "

( L . 4 7 6 ) " T h o u h a s t t h y h e a r t , O s i r i s , t h o u h a s t t h y

" l e g s , O s i r i s , t h o u h a s t t h i n e a r m s , O s i r i s ; and Unas

" h i m s e l f h a t h h i s h e a r t , a n d U n a s h i m s e l f h a t h h i s l e g s ,

"and Units h imself hath his arms . He bath walked



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN CXXI

" w i t h h i s l e g s towards h eaven, h e h a t h come f o r t h

"with th em into h eaven, and his mouth declareth it-

"self by th e great dew . U n a s f l i e t h l i k e a f e a t h e r e d

" f o w l , h e h o v e r e t h a n d a l i g h t e t h l i k e a b e e t l e , h e f l i e t h

" l i k e a f e a t h e r e d f o w l a n d a l i g h t e t h l i k e a b e e t l e u p o n

"th e empty seat which is in thy boat, 0 Ra . "

( 4 8 4 ) " K i n d l e t h e f i r e i n o r d e r t h a t t h e f l a m e m a y

" r i s e u p , a n d t h r o w i n c e n s e u p o n i t i n o r d e r t h a t t h e

" [ s m e l l o f ] i n c e n s e m a y r i s e u p . T h y s c e n t c o m e t h t o -

w a r d s U n a s , i n c e n s e ; th y scent cometh t oward Unas,

" i n c e n s e . Your scent cometh towards this Units, and

"the scent of Unas cometh towards you, 0 ye gods .

"Unas is with you, and you are wit h Unas, 0 ye

"gods . U n a s l i v e t h w i t h y o u , a n d y o u l i v e w i t h U n a s ,

"0 ye gods . Love ye Unas, 0 ye gods, love him, 0

"ye gods . C o m e , 0 p a r t o f Rd, come, 0 matter which

" c o m e t h f o r t h f r o m t h e t h i g h s o f H o r u s . Come, 0 ye

"who have come forth . Come, 0 ye who h ave come

" f o r t h . Come, 0 ye who are feeble . Come, 0 ye wh o

" a r e f e e b l e . Come, Shu . Come, Shu . Come, Shu . F o r

" U n a s c o m e t h f o r t h u p o n t h e t h i g h s o f I s i s , f o r U n a s

"is feeble, 0 ve gods, upon the th ighs of Nephth ys,

"and he hath been ejected [from th e womb] . "

(579) "He who setteth up the ladder for Osiris is

"Ra, and he who setteth up th e ladder is Horus for

" h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s w h e n h e g o e t h f o r t h t o h i s s o u l ; Rd

"is on one side and Horus is on the oth er, and Unas

"is between th em, being indeed th e god of h oly

"dwelling-places coming forth from th e sanctuary .



C X X I I INTRODUCTION .

"Unas standeth up and is Horns . Unas sitt eth down

"and is Set ; Ra receiveth him, soul in heaven and

"body in earth . "

(584) "Those who are happy and who see [Unas],

"those who are content and who contemplate [Unas]

" a r e t h e g o d s . I f t h i s g o d c o m e f o r t h t o w a r d s h e a v e n ,

"Unas also shall come forth to wards heaven ; and he

" s h a l l h a v e h i s s o u l s u p o n h i m , a n d h i s b o o k s s h a l l b e

"upon both sides of h im, and his inscribed amulets

"shall be upon his feet, and th e god Seb shall do

" f o r h i m w h a t h a t h b e e n d o n e f o r h i m s e l f . T h e d i v i n e

` s o u l s o f t h e c i t y o f P e a n d t h e d i v i n e s o u l s o f t h e

"city of Nekhen shall come unto him, along with th e

"gods of heaven and the gods of th e earth, and they

" s h a l l l i f t U n a s u p u p o n t h e i r h a n d s . C o m e f o r t h , t h e n ,

"Unas, to heaven, and enter th erein in th y name of

"'Ladder' . Heaven hath been given unto Unas and

"earth hath been given unto him ; t h i s i s t h e d e c r e e

"which Tem hath issued to Seb, and the domains of

"Horus, and th e domains of Set, and th e Sekhet-Aaru

" w i t h t h e i r h a r v e s t s a d o r e t h e e i n t h y n a m e o f K h o n s u -

" S e p l "

( 5 9 ) " T e t a h a t h n o t h u n g e r l i k e S h u , T e t i h a t h n o t

" t h i r s t l i k e T e f n u t , f o r H a p i , T u a m a u t e f , Q e b h s e n n u f ,

"and A mset ( 1 . e . , t h e f o u r c h i l d r e n o f H o r u s ) d e s t r o y

"th e hunger which is in th e belly of Teta, and this

" t h i r s t w h i c h i s u p o n t h e l i p s o f T e t a . The h unger

" [ o f T e t i ] i s w i t h S h u , t h e t h i r s t o f T e t a i s w i t h T e f -

" n u t ; Teta liveth upon the daily bread which cometh



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . C X X I I I

"in its season, he liveth upon th at upon which Shu

" l i v e t h , a n d h e e a t e t h t h a t w h i c h S h u e a t e t h" F i l t h i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n t o T e t a , a n d h e r e j e c t e t h f i l -

th y watere have taken Teta to you, 0 ye"gods, and he eateth what ye eat, he drinketh th at

"which ye drink, he liveth upon th at upon which ye

"live, he sitteth down as ye sit, he is migh ty with

"th e might which is yours, he saileth about even as

"ye sail about ; th e ho use of Teta is a net in the

"Sekhet-Aaru, he hath streams of running water in

" S e k h e t - h e t e p , t h e o f f e r i n g s o f T e t a a r e w i t h y o u . 0

"ye gods, the water of Tet i is as wine even as [is

" w a t e r t o ] R a , T e t a r e v o l v e t h i n h e a v e n l i k e Ra, and

"he go eth round about t he sky like Tho th . "

(156) "The two doors of h eaven are opened for

"th ee, 0 Teta, for th ou bast raised up thy head for

-thy bones, and th ou bast raised up th y bones for

"th y head . Thou bast opened th e two doors of hea-

v e n , t h o u b a s t d r a w n b a c k t h e g r e a t b o l t s , t h o u b a s t

" r e m o v e d t h e s e a l o f t h e g r e a t d o o r , a n d , w i t h a f a c e

" l i k e t h a t o f a j a c k a l a n d a b o d y l i k e t h a t o f a f i e r c e

" l i o n , t h o u b a s t t a k e n t h y s e a t u p o n t h y t h r o n e , a n d

"th ou criest to th e Khus, `Come to me . Come to me .

" `Come t o Ho rus, who hath avenged his fath er, for

" i t i s T e t a w h o w i l l l e a d t h e e i n . ' T h o u p u t t e s t t h y

"hand upon the earth, and with th ine arm thou doest

" b a t t l e i n t h e G r e a t D o m a i n , a n d t h o u r e v o l v e s t t h e r e

"among the Khus, and th ou standest up like Osiris . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s T e t a , H o r u s h a t h c o m e t o e m b r a c e t h e e



C X X I V INTRODUCTION .

"with h is arms, and h e h ath made Tho th to drive away

"for t h ee in defeat t h e follo wers of Set, and he hath

"t aken th em captive on th y behalf, and he h ath re-

"pulsed th e heart of Set, fo r he is stronger th an Set ;

"and now, t h ou art come fo rth before h im, and Seb

"h ath watch ed th y journey, and h e bath set t h ee in

"t hy place and hath led unto th ee th y two sist ers Isis

"and Nepht h ys . Horns h ath united th ee unto th e gods,

"and th ey shew th emselves as broth ers unto th ee in

"t h y name Sent, and th ey do not repulse t h ee in th y

"name Atert . He hath granted th at t h e gods shall

"guard th ee, and Seb h ath set h is sandal upon th e

"head of thine enemy . Tho u hast driven back [th e

"enemy], th y son Horus bath smit ten him , and h e hath

"t orn out h is o wn eye and given it unto th ee in order

"t h at t h o u mayest be s trong t h ereby, and t ha t t h ou

"mayest gain the mastery thereby among the Khus .

"IIorus hath permit ted th ee to h ack th ine enemy in

"pieces with th is [ eye], he smit eth down th ine enemy

"with it, f or Horus is stro nger th an h e is, and h e

"passeth judgment upon his fath er wh o is in thee in

"th y name `He wh ose f ath er is stro nger th an hea-

"ven' . The go ddess Nut bath made th ee to be a go d

"unto Set in th y name of God, and th y mot h er Nut

""h ath spread out h er two arms over th ee in her name

"o f 'Coverer of h eaven' . Horus hath smit ten Set and

"h e h ath cast h im down beneath th ee, and Set beareth

"t h ee up and is a migh ty o ne beneath th ee, inasmuch

"as h e is th e great o ne of t h e earth which h e ordereth



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXXV

" i n t h y n a m e o f T a - t c h e s e r - t a . H o r u s h a t h g r a n t e d t h a t

"Set shall be judged in his h eart in his h ouse with

" t h e e , a n d h e h a t h g r a n t e d t h a t t h o u s h a l t s m i t e h i m

" w i t h t h y h a n d w h e n s o e v e r h e d o e t h b a t t l e w i t h t h e e .

"Hail, Osiris Teta, Horus hath avenged th ee, and he

" h a t h c a u s e d h i s ku w h i c h i s i n t h e e [ t o m a k e ] t h e e

"to rest in th y name of Ka-hetep . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s T e t a , S e b h a t h g i v e n t o t h e e t h y t w o

"eyes that t ho u mayest rest in the two eyes of t his

" G r e a t O n e ( i . O s i r i s ) w h o i s i n t h e e . Seb hath made

"th em to be given unto th ee by Horus that thou may-

"est rest upon th em, th at Isis and Nephthys may see

" t h e e , a n d t h a t t h e y m a y f i n d t h e e . Horus hath made

" a n o f f e r i n g u n t o t h e e , I T o r u s h a t h g r a n t e d t h a t I s i s a n d

"Neph th ys may protect t h ee and th ey have handed

" t h e e o v e r t o H o r u s t h a t h e m a y r e s t u p o n t h e e . H o r u s

" h a t h g l o r i f i e d t h e e i n t h y n a m e o f ` H o r i z o n ' w h e r e R a t

" s h e v v e t h h i m s e l f i n t h y a r m s i n t h y n a m e o f ` D w e l l e r

" i n t h e p a l a c e ' . Thou hast made th y hand to be like

" a w a l l b e h i n d h i m , b e h i n d h i m , t o g i v e s t a b i l i t y t o

"his bones and to magnify his heart . "

(198) "The right side of Teta belongeth to Ho-

r u s w h o s m i t e t h t h e T c h e n t r u i n h i s t w o s c e p t r e s ( ? )

"and Nephth ys in th e two eyes ; t h e l e f t s i d e o f T e t i

"belongeth to Set who judgeth Teti . "

" H a i l , b o l t w h i c h c l o s e t h t h e d o o r o f N u t , i t i s T e t a

"Shu who cometh forth from Tem . H a i l , N u , g r a n t t h a t

"th e door may be opened to Teta, for he cometh as

" a d i v i n e s o u l . "



C X X V I INTRODUCTION .

"Nu bath adjudged Teti to Tem, and Peka bath ad-

" j u d g e d T e t i t o S h u . H e g r a n t e t h t h a t t h e t w o d o o r s

" o f h e a v e n s h a l l b e o p e n e d , a n d h e b a t h d e c r e e d t h a t

"Teta shall be among men with out name ; b u t b e h o l d ,

"thou bast grasped TetA by the hand and th ou bast

"drawn him to heaven so th at he may never die upon

"earth among men . 0 Fath er of Tet i, 0 Father of

"Teta in the darkness, 0 Father of Tet i, Tem in

" t h e d a r k n e s s , t h o u b a s t b r o u g h t T e t a n e a r t h e e , b e -

c a u s e h e b a t h p e r f o r m e d t h e s h o o t i n g f o r t h o f f l a m e ,

" a n d t h e m a k i n g p r o t e c t i o n , e v e n a s t h e f o u r g o d d e s s e s

"Isis, Nephth ys, Neith, and Serget-Hetu did for th e

" f a t h e r o f N u o n t h e d a y o f p r o t e c t i n g t h e t h r o n e . 0

" r o a d o f H o r u s , e x t e n d t h y s a i l f o r T e t a , g i v e t h y h a n d

" t o T e t a . H a i l , Ra, c o m e , f o r T e t a p a s s e t h t o t h e s h o r e

" e v e n a s t h y f o l l o w e r s t h e U n k a , w h o l o v e t h e e , h a v e

" p a s s e d t h e e ; s t r e t c h o u t t h y h a n d t o t h e W e s t , s t r e t c h

"out t hy hand to Teta, stretch out t hy h and to t he

" E a s t , s t r e t c h o u t t h y h a n d t o T e t a , e v e n a s t h o u b a s t

"done to th e place where is thy eldest son . "

(256) "This Teta is Osiris and he bath motion ;

" t h i s T e t a b a t h d e t e s t a t i o n o f t h e e a r t h a n d h e w i l l

" n o t e n t e r i n t o S e b . This Teta bath broken for ever

" h i s s l e e p i n h i s d w e l l i n g w h i c h i s u p o n e a r t h . The

" b o n e s o f T e t a f l o u r i s h a n d o b s t a c l e s t o h i m a r e d e -

stroyed, for he is purified with th e Eye of Horns .

" T h e o b s t a c l e s w h i c h h e e n c o u n t e r e d a r e b e a t e n d o w n

"by the two T c h e r t goddesses ( a . c . , Isis and Neph-

" t h y s ) , a n d T e t a b a t h c a s t t o t h e e a r t h h i s s e e d i n



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXXVII

"Kes . Th e s i s t e r o f t h i s T e t a , t h e l a d y o f t h e c i t y

" o f P e , b e w a i l e t h h i m , a n d t h e t w o n u r s e s w h o c r e a t -

ed Osiris also create him ; T e t a i s i n h e a v e n , t h i s

"Teta is in heaven like Shu and Ra . This TetA pe-

" r i s h e t h n o t , a n d n o t h i n g i n h i m p e r i s h e t h , n a y t h i s

"Teta is th e `Governor of h is leg' of th e firstborn

"gods . T h i s T e t a s i t t e t h n o t a s t h e g u a r d i a n o f G o d .

"The offerings of this Teta are for Horus and Rd,

" a n d t h e s e p u l c h r a l o f f e r i n g s o f t h i s T e t a a r e i n N u .

" T h i s i s T e t and he goeth with Ra . T h i s T e t A

"cometh with Ra, he hath embraced his habitations,

" h e g i v e t h o p p o s i t i o n a n d d e s t r o y e t h i t , h e g a t h e r e t h

"th e KAs and delivereth th em ; th is Teta watchet h

" a n d l i e t h d o w n , a n d h e h a t h d e s t r o y e d t h e t w o A n u t i

"in Unnu . T h e f o o t o f t h i s T e t i d e p a r t e t h n o t , a n d

" t h e h e a r t o f t h i s T e t a i s n o t r e p u l s e d . "

(271) " R i s e u p , T e t a , a n d l i f t u p t h y l e g s , 0 m o s t

"mighty one, to go and seat t hyself among th e gods,

" a n d d o t h o u t h a t w h i c h O s i r i s h a t h d o n e i n t h e H o u s e

" o f t h e P r i n c e w h i c h i s i n A n n u ; t h o u h a s t r e c e i v e d

" t h y s p i r i t u a l b o d y and none shall set bounds

"to t hy foot in heaven and none shall repulse thee

" o n e a r t h . The Kxus who are th e children of Nut

"whom Nephth ys hath suckled have gath ered to geth er

"to th ee, th ou standest up upon thy strength , and

"th ou doest th at which th ou must do for thy Kim

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f a l l t h e K i i u s . Thou goest to t he

" c i t y. o f P e , t h o u a r t g l o r i f i e d a n d r e t u r n e s t ; t h o u

" g o e s t t o t h e c i t y o f N e k h e n , t h o u a r t g l o r i f i e d a n d



C X X V I I I INTRODUCTION .

" r e t u r n e s t . T h o u d o e s t t h a t w h i c h O s i r i s d i d , a n d b e -

"hold, th is most mighty KHu Teta is upon his th rone

" a n d s t a n d e t h u p , b e i n g p r o v i d e d [ w i t h a l l t h i n g s ] l i k e

"th e goddess Sam-ur . N o n e s h a l l r e p u l s e t h e e i n a n y

"place wherein th ou wouldst enter, and none shall

" s e t b o u n d s t o t h y f o o t c o n c e r n i n g a n y p l a c e w h e r e i n

" " i t p l e a s e t h t h e e t o b e . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s T e t a , s t a n d u p , r i s e u p , f o r t h y m o -

th er Nut bath brought th ee forth , and Seb bath

"placed th y mouth for th ee . The Great Co mpany of

"the gods have defended th ee, and th ey have set

"tbine enemy beneath th ee . Th ou bast borne t hat

"which is greater than thou art th rough th em in th y

"name A tef-Mehurh i c h i s g r e a t e r t h a n t h o u

"art in thy name of Ta-Abtu . T h y t w o s i s t e r s I s i s

"and Nepht h ys come to th ee, and they make th ee

"to pass by Qemt-urt in th y name of Qem-ur, and

"Aneb-uatchet-urt in thy name of Uatch-mu . . . . T h y

" s i s t e r I s i s c a m e t o t h e e w i t h t h y m e m b e r s , a n d t h o u

"wert united unto her, and th ou didst give her seed

" a n d d i d s t p r o v i d e h e r w i t h o f f s p r i n g l i k e S e p t e t . "

( _ 2 8 7 ) " H a i l , h a i l , r i s e u p , T e t a ! T h o u b a s t r e c e i v e d

"th v head, thou bast embraced thy bones, thou bast

"gathered togeth er th y flesh and blood, and th ou

" g o e s t r o u n d a b o u t t h e e a r t h s e e k i n g f o r f o o d ; t h o u

"bast received thy bread which decayeth never, and

"thy beer which goeth bad never . Tho u standest at

"th e gates which drive back th e Rekhit . Kh ent-Men-

"tef cometh forth unto th ee, he graspeth th ee by





CXXX INTRODUCTION .

"whereon TetA liveth , and [power] to hearken to t he

"gods who speak ( ? ) th roughout th e day, and to rest

"with th em during th e night, and to partake of th e

"offerings which are made unto th em . Teta looketh

"upon thee when th ou goest fo rth in th e form of

"Thoth leading th e boat of Ra to th e fields which

"are in Aasu, and when th ou goest in among those

"who bear him up . "

(384) "Homage to t hee, 0 Teti, o n th is th y day

"whereon th ou st andest up before Ra wh o cometh

"forth from t he East, and who cloth eth th ee in th y

" s p i r i t u a l b o d y ( s a h ) among the soulsn u b i s ,

" G o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i , g i v e t h t h e e t h o u s a n d s o f c a k e s ,

" t h o u s a n d s o f v e s s e l s o f b e e r , t h o u s a n d s o f v a s e s o f

" o i l , t h o u s a n d s o f o x e n , t h o u s a n d s o f c h a n g e s o f a p -

p a r e l , a n d t h o u s a n d s o f b u l l s . F o r t h e e i s t h e S i n e n

" g o o s e s l a i n , f o r t h e e i s t h e Therp goose shot with

"an arrow . Horus hath destroyed all the evil which

" i s i n T e t a A b y h i s f o u r c h i l d r e n , a n d S e t f o r g e t t e t h

"what he wrough t against Teta by means of h is eigh t

" [ f i e n d s ] , a n d t h o s e w h o s e h a b i t a t i o n s a r e h i d d e n t h r o w

"open th e doors to him . R i s e t h o u , g o t o t h e e a r t h

"and seek the th ings which have issued from th ee .

" R i s e t h o u u p a n d p a s s t h o u o n o p p o s i t e t o t h e KHus ;

" t h y t w o w i n g s a r e l i k e t h o s e o f a h a w k a n d t h y h a i r

" i s l i k e ( t h e r a y s o f ) a s t a r . Cast ye nothing evil

` u p o n T e t A , n e i t h e r d o y e c a r r y o f f t h e h e a r t o f T e t a ,

" n o r s t e a l a w a y t h e p l a c e w h e r e i n i t a b i d e t h . "

( i ) " H a i l , t h o u P e p i , ( 2 ) th ou journeyest on, thou



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN CXXXI

"art glorious, th ou hast gott en power like the God

" ( 3 ) w h o i s o n h i s t h r o n e , t h a t i s , O s i r i s . Thou hast

"th y soul within thy body, (4) tho u hast thy power

" b e h i n d t h e e , t h y u y e r e t crown is upon th y head, (5)

" t h y h e a d - d r e s s i s u p o n t h y s h o u l d e r [ s ] , t h y f a c e i s

" i n f r o n t o f t h e e , t h o s e w h o a c c l a i m t h e e ( 6 ) a r e u p o n

" b o t h s i d e s o f t h e e , t h e f o l l o w e r s o f t h e G o d a r e f o l -

" l o w i n g a f t e r t h e e , t h e s p i r i t u a l b o d i e s ( s a d a u ) o f t h e

"God are upon bot h sides of thee, and th ey (7) make

"th e God to come ; th e God com eth and Pepi com-

"eth upon the th rone of Osiris . The Khu which (8)

" d w e l l e t h i n t h e c i t y o f N e t a t c o m e t h , t h e F o r m w h i c h

"dwelleth in the nome of Teni . I s i s s p e a k e t h w i t h

"th ee, and Nephthys holdeth converse with th ee ; t h e

" ( 9 ) Khus come unto th ee paying h omage [unto th ee],

"and they bow down, even to th e ground, at th y feet

" b y r e a s o n o f t h y b o o k , 0 P e p i , ( r o ) i n t h e c i t i e s o f

" S a a . Thou comest forth before thy moth er Nut, and

° s h e s t r e n g t h e n e t h t h i n e a r m a n d s h e g i v e t h u n t o t h e e

"a path (i i) in th e h orizon to th e place where Rd

" i s . The doors of heaven are opened for thee, th e

"gates o f Qebhu are unbolted for thee, th ou findest

" ( 1 2 ) Rd, who guardeth th ee, and he strengtheneth

"for th ee thy hand, and he guideth th ee into th e

" n o r t h e r n . a n d s o u t h e r n h e a v e n s , ( 1 3 ) a n d h e s e t t e t h

" t h e e u p o n t h e t h r o n e o f O s i r i s . H a i l , t h o u P e p i , t h e

Èye of Horus comet h unto th ee and holdeth con-

v e r s e w i t h t h e e , t h y s o u l( 1 4 )

which dwelleth with

"th e gods cometh unto th ee, and th y form ( s e k h e n z )

lX



C X X X I I INTRODUCTION.

"which dwelleth among the Khus cometh unto th ee .

"In th e same way that the son avenged his father,

"in th e same way that Horus avenged Osiris, ( 1 , 5 )

"even so shall Horus avenge Pepi upon his enemies .

"And th ou sh alt stand [there], 0 Pepi, avenged, and

"armed, and provided with th e ( 1 6 ) f o r m s o f O s i r i s

"who is upon th e th rone of th e Governor of A menti,

"and thou shalt h ave th y being as he bath his among

" t h e i n d e s t r u c t i b l e K h u s ,( 1 7 )

A n d t h y s o u l s h a l l s t a n d

" u p u p o n t h y t h r o n e p r o v i d e d w i t h t h y a t t r i b u t e [ s ] ,

- a n d i t s h a l l h a v e i t s b e i n g a s t h o u h a s t t h i n e i n t h e

" p r e s e n c e o f h i m w h o i s t h e G o v e r n o r o f t h e L i v i n g ,

"according to th e decree of Ra, t h e g r e a t g o d , (18)

"who shall plough th e wheat and th e barley and give

" i t u n t o t h e e a s a g i f t t h e r e i n . H a i l , t h o u P e p i , i t i s

"Ra who bath given unto th ee all life and strength

"for ever, along with (ig) thy speech and thy body .

" A n d t h o u h a s t r e c e i v e d t h e a t t r i b u t e [ s ] o f t h e G o d ,

"and thou hast become great t herein before th e gods

"who dwell on the Lake . H a i l , t h o u P e p i , t h y s o u l

" s t a n d e t h (20) among the gods and among the Khus,

" a n d t h e f e a r o f t h e e c o n s t r a i n e t h t h e i r h e a r t s . H a i l ,

"Pepi, inasmuch as th ou hast set th yself upon thy

" t h r o n e ( 2 1 ) o f t h e G o v e r n o r o f t h e L i v i n g , t h y b o o k

" i t i s w h i c h w o r k e t h u p o n t h e i r h e a r t s , a n d t h y n a m e

" l i v e t h u p o n e a r t h , a n d g r o w e t h o l d u p o n e a r t h , a n d

"thou sh alt neither perish nor decay for ever and

" e v e r . " (22)

"Rise thou up, 0 Pepi, stand thou up, 0 th ou of



THE_ ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN CXXXIII

"great strength, and take thy seat at the head of

"th e gods ; and do t hou the th ings which Osiris did

"in the House of the Prince in Annu (Heliopolis) .

" T h o u h a s t r e c e i v e d t h y ( 2 3 ) s p i r i t u a l b o d y ( s h z h ) , and

" t h y f o o t s h a l l n o t b e r e s t r a i n e d i n h e a v e n , a n d t h o u

"shalt not be repulsed upon earth . And behold, the

"Khus, who are the children of Nut t o whom Neph-

"th ys hath given suck, have gath ered themselves to-

gether unto thee ; and th ou st andest up on th y

"strength, and thou doest th at which it is th ine to

"do in th e presence of th y Khu ( 2 4 ) f o r a l l t h e K h u s .

"Thou journeyest to th e city of Pe, and tho u doest

"what must be done th erein and th ou returnest ; thou

"goest to th e city of Nekhen and th ou doest what

" m u s t b e d o n e t h e r e i n a n d t h o u r e t u r n e s t . Thou doest

" t h a t w h i c h O s i r i s d i d a n d t h o u a r t u p o n h i s t h r o n e ;

" ( 2 5 ) and th is Khu, the one most migh ty, standeth

"up armed like Sma-ur, and wherever th ou goest

" n o n e s h a l l r e p u l s e t h e e , a n d n o n e s h a l l s e t a l i m i t

" t o t h y f e e t w h e r e v e r i t p l e a s e t h t h e e t o g o . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s P e p i , ( 2 6 ) a r i s e , s t a n d u p , f o r t h y m o -

th er Nut hath given birth unto th ee, and Seb hath

"arranged ( ? ) thy mouth for thee . The Great Com-

pany of th e go ds h ave avenged th ee, and th ey

"have put thine enemies beneath th ee . Thou h ast

" c a r r i e d t h a t w h i c h i s g r e a t e r t h a n t h y s e l f , t h r o u g h

"them, ( 2 7 ) in th y name of Àtef-meh -ur' ; and th ou

" h a s t n e t t e d t h a t w h i c h i s g r e a t e r t h a n t h y s e l f , t h r o u g h

"th em, in th y name of 'Ta -Teni' . Thy two sisters



CXXXI V INTRODUCTION .

"Isis and Nepht hys come unto th ee and th ey make

" t h e e t o t r a v e r s e Q e m t - u r t i n t h y n a m e o f ' Q e m - u r ' ,

"and Aneb-uatchet-urt in thy name of ( 2 8 ) ` U a t c h - u r ' ;

" a n d v e r i l y , t h o u a r t ' U r t - s h e n t ' i n S h e n - u r , a n d ' T e b e n -

" s h e n t ' i n T e b e n - p e s h - r e r - H a - n e b u , a n d ` S h e n t - t a t ' i n

"Shen-ta-sek-mu . A nd Isis and ( 2 9 ) Nephth ys have

" p r o t e c t e d t h e e i n t h e c i t y o f S a u t f r o m t h e i r m a s t e r

" w h o i s i n t h e e i n t h y n a m e o f ' M a s t e r o f S a u t ' , a n d

" f r o m t h e i r g o d w h o i s i n t h e e i n t h y n a m e o f ' G o d ' .

"They adore th ee so t hat t h ou mayest not depart

"from t hem in thy name of `Morning Star' ; ( 3 o ) and

" t h e y b r i n g [ o f f e r i n g s ] b e f o r e t h e e s o t h a t t h o u m a y e s t

" n o t s u f f e r p a i n i n t h y n a m e o f " T c h e n t r u " . T h y s i s t e r

" I s i s h a t h c o m e u n t o t h e e r e j o i c i n g i n t h y l o v e; and

"thou hast had intercourse with her, and hast made

"her to conceive, and she is heavy with Septet . ( 3 t )

"And Heru-Sept cometh forth from th ee as Heru the

"dweller in Septet, and th ou doest what must be

" d o n e i n h i m i n t h y n a m e o f ' K h u , d w e l l e r i n T c h e n t -

" r u ' ; and he avengeth th ee in his name of 'Horus,

" t h e s o n w h o a v e n g e t h h i s f a t h e r ' . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s P e p i , t h o u h a s t o f f e r e d ( 3 2 ) t h y l i b a -

tion, and thou hast made th y libation before Horus

"in thy name of `Comer forth from Qebh' ; t h o u h a s t

" o f f e r e d t h i n e i n c e n s e w h i c h m a k e t h t h e e d i v i n e , a n d

"th y moth er Nut h ath made th ee to be as a god

"to t hine enemy in thy name of `God' . Thou h ast

" o f f e r e d t h e e m a n a t i o n s w h i c h c o m e f o r t h f r o m t h e e ,

"and Horus bath granted ( 3 3 ) th at t he gods . . . .



THE EL YSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN CXXXV

" w h i t h e r s o e v e r t h o u g o e s t ; thou h a s t o f f e r e d t h e

"emanations which come forth from thee, and Horus

"bath granted that th ou sh alt judge h is children

"wheresoever tho u takest th em, and he decreeth for

"th ee th e renewals of youth (34 ) in thy name of

" ' W a t e r o f y o u t h ' . H o r u s h a t h s t r e n g t h , t h e n , a n d h e

"judgeth his father in th ee in his name of `Heru-

` B a t ' "

"Hail, Pepi, th y journeying and the jo urneying of

" t h y m o t h e r s a l o n g w i t h t h e e ( 4 1 ) a r e t h e j o u r n e y i n g

"of Horus when he journeyeth forth and the j our-

neying of his mot hers who j ourney with him ; t h o s e

"who are with him urge him on, (42) and th ey lead

"him to th e East . Hail, th ou Pepi, th ine arms are

" U a p a u , a n d t h y f a c e i s A p - u a t . ( 4 3 ) H a i l , t h o u P e p i ,

" a r o y a l o b l a t i o n ! t h o u s e a t e s t t h y s e l f i n t h e r e g i o n s

" o f H o r u s , a n d t h o u g o e s t a b o u t t h r o u g h t h e r e g i o n s

" o f S e t ; t h o u s e a t e s t t h y s e l f u p o n t h e i r o n t h r o n e ,

" ( 4 4 ) and thou art judge at th e head of the Great

"Company of the gods who dwell in Annu . H a i l , t h o u

" P e p i , K h e n t - a n - m e r t i ( o r m a a t i ) g u a r d e t h t h e e w h i l s t

" t h o u g u a r d e s t t h y ( 4 5 ) c a l v e s ; h a i l , P e p i , A r g u a r d -

"eth th ee against t he Khus . Hail, Pepi, know th ou

" t h a t t h o u s h a l t r e c e i v e ( 4 6 ) f o r t h i n e h o l y o b l a t i o n

"which t hou offerest each day, th ousands of cakes,

" t h o u s a n d s o f v e s s e l s o f a l e , t h o u s a n d s o f o x e n , t h o u -

s a n d s o f f e a t h e r e d f o w l , t h o u s a n d s o f s w e e t t h i n g s ,

"and thousands of linen garments . H a i l , P e p i , ( 4 7 )

" t h o u h a s t t h y w a t e r , t h o u h a s t t h i n e a b u n d a n c e , t h o u



C X X X V I INTRODUCTION .

"hast t hy purifying gums which are brought to th ee

"before thy brot her Nekhekh . "

"0 Osiris Pepi, thou risest as king of t he South

"and of th e North by reason of t hy power over th e

"gods and th eir K a s ( i . e . , d o u b l e s ) , a n d , b e h o l d , d o

"th ou, 0 Nut, spread th yself over thy son Osiris

"Pepi, and protect h im, and deliver (62) him from

"Set . Come, 0 Nut, and protect th y son, for th ou

"must protect th is mighty one . 0 N u t , c a s t t h y s e l f

" o v e r t h y s o n O s i r i s P e p i , a n d p r o t e c t h i m , 0 g r e a t

" w i f e o f t h i s m i g h t y o n e w h o i s a m o n g t h y c h i l d r e n !

"The god Seb hath come unto th ee, 0 Nut, and th ou

"didst possess strength, and thou didst gain power

"in th e womb of t hy moth er Tefnut when as yet th ou

" o v e r t n o t b o r n ; 0 do th ou unite life and strength

"unto Pepi so t hat h e may not die . Tho u didst make

"strong th y heart and didst spring forth from the

"womb of t hy moth er in th y name of Nut ; 0 th ou

" . . . . d a u g h t e r ( 6 3 ) w h o d i d s t g a i n t h e m a s t e r y o v e r

" t h y m o t h e r , a n d d i d s t m a k e h e r s e l f t o r i s e a s Q u e e n

"of th e North, protect tho u this Pepi who is within

"th y womb t hat h e may not die . "

`For me, 0 Nut, t o wh om t h ou h ast given birth

`r o c l a i m t h e n a m e o f O s i r i s P e p i , ( 6 5 ) t h r o u g h

"Horus, beloved of th e two lands, Pepi, the king of

"th e North and of the South , Pepi, th e lord of t he

"diadems of t he Vulture and of th e Uraeus, beloved

" [ f r o m ] t h e w o m b , P e p ] , t h e t r i p l e h a w k o f g o l d , P e p i

"th e flesh and bone of Seb by whom he is beloved,



THE_ ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN. CXXXVII

" P e p i , t h e f r i e n d o f a l l t h e g o d s , P e p i , t h e g i v e r o f

" a l l l i f e , a n d s t a b i l i t y , a n d p o w e r , a n d h e a l t h , a n d

" j o y o f h e a r t , l i k e t h e S u n , l i v i n g f o r e v e r . ( 6 6 ) T h y

" w a t e r i s t h i n e , t h y f l o o d i s t h i n e , t h a t i s t o s a y , t h e

"emanations which come forth from th e God, the ex-

cretions which come forth from Osiris ; th y hands

"are washed, th ine ears are opened, and this Form

" ( s e k h e m )d o e t h w h a t h a t h t o b e d o n e f o r h i s s o n . T h o u

"art washed and (67) and thy ka ( d o u b l e ) i s w a s h -

ed ; and thy ka hath sat down, and he eateth bread

"with thee for ever and ever . I n a s m u c h a s t h o u h a s t

"gone and hast taken th y seat, 0 Osiris, th y mouth

" i s o p e n b e f o r e t h e e , a c c l a m a t i o n s a r e u p o n t h y h a n d ,

" t h y n o s t r i l s a r e ( 6 8 ) g r a t i f i e d w i t h t h e o d o u r o f t h e

"uraeus, thy legs walk to keep th e feast, t hy teeth

" a r en d t h y f i n g e r s r e c k o n u p t h e l a k e s o v e r

" w h i c h t h o u p a s s e s t l i k e t h e g r e a t B u l l o f A n n u [ a n d

" o f ] t h e n o m e o f U a t c h e t , ' t o g o t o t h e f i e l d s o f Ra

" ( 6 9 ) which h e loveth . Rise up, then, 0 Pepi, and

" d i e n o t . "

" H a i l , P e p i , a r i s e , s t a n d u p ! (112) Tho u art pure,

"thy ka i s p u r e , t h y s o u l i s p u r e , t h y sekhem i s p u r e !

"Thy moth er cometh to t hee, th y moth er Nut, the

"migh ty creatress, cometh to th ee, and she maketh

" t h e e p u r e , 0 P e p i . S h e f a s h i o n e t h t h e e , ( r i 3 ) 0 P e p ] ,

"and th ou hast mot ion, 0 Pepi ; t h o u a r t p u r e , t h v

" k a i s p u r e , t h y sekhem is pure among th e Khus, and

r . I . e . , th e tenth nome of Upper Egypt .



C X X X V I I I INTRODUCTION .

" t h y s o u l i s p u r e a m o n g t h e g o d s , 0 P e p i . H a i l , (1 1 4 )

" P e p i , t h y b o n e s h a v e b e e n p r e s e n t e d u n t o t h e e , t h o u

" h a s t r e c e i v e d t h y h e a d b e f o r e S e b , a n d h e h a t h d e s -

t r o y e d t h e e v i l w h i c h b e l o n g e t h t o t h e e , 0 P e p i , b e -

"fore Tem . "

"Thou hast opened th e gates of heaven, th ou hast

"unbolted the doors of (154) Oebhu, which repulse

" t h e b e i n g s o f u n d e r s t a n d i n g ( Y e k h i t , . (155) And Ment

"acclaimeth th ee, mankind (henmemet' g r e e t e t h t h e e ,

" a n d t h e s t a r s w h i c h n e v e r f a i l s t a n d u p b e f o r e t h e e .

"(156) Thy winds are incense and th y north wind is

"a flame, for thou art he who hath become migh ty

"in the nome Teni, (157) and th ou art th e star that

"exist eth by thyself and which appeareth in th e

"eastern half of h eaven, (158) which never groweth

"old, and to which Horus of th e city of Tat h ath

"given his body . "

" H a i l , t h o u s t a b l i s h e d o n e , t h o u m o s t e x a l t e d o n e

"(159) among the stars which never fail, thou shalt

" n e v e r p e r i s h(16o) "The heavens speak and the earth quaketh

"by reason of t hy book, 0 Osiris, when th ou makest

" t h i n e a p p e a r a n c e . Hail, ye cows of A mutenen, who

"h ave suckled Amutenen, go ye round about beh ind

"h im, and weep before him, and acclaim him by word

" a n d d e e d , f o r P e p i , w h o g o e t h f o r t h , g o e t h i n t o h e a -

ven among his breth ren th e gods . "

( 1 6 9 ) " P e p i i s p u r e . P e p i h a t h t a k e n h i s s t a f f , h e

" h a t h p r o v i d e d h i m s e l f w i t h h i s t h r o n e , a n d h e h a t h



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXXXIX

"taken his seat in the boat of th e Great and Little

"Companies of t he gods ; R a t r a n s p o r t e t h P e p i t o t h e

"West, and he stablisheth th e th rone of Pepi above

" t h e l o r d s o f k a s , and he writeth down Pepi at t he

"head of th e living . The Peh-ka which dwelleth in

"Qebh is opened unto th is Pepi, and th e iron which

"formeth th e ceiling of the sky is opened unto th is

"Pepi, and he passeth th rough onwards ; h i s p a n t h e r

" s k i n i s u p o n h i m , a n d h i s s c e p t r e a n d f l a i l a r e i n h i s

"hand . A n d P e p i i s s o u n d w i t h h i s f l e s h , h e i s h a p p y

" w i t h h i s n a m e , h e l i v e t h w i t h ( r 7 0 ) h i s k a . A nd he

" ( i . e ., Ra) destroyeth th e evil which is upon bot h

" s i d e s o f P e p i , h e d r i v e t h a w a y t h e e v i l w h i c h f o l -

"loweth him, even as M to u t u ( ? ) who dwelleth in Se-

" k h e m d r i v e t h a w a y t h e e v i l w h i c h i s u p o n b o t h s i d e s

"of him and doeth away with th e evil which follow-

"eth him . "

"Let Rd be embraced in the two h orizo ns of hea-

ven, so th at h e may go forth th erein before Heru-

" k h u t i ( H a r m a c h i s ) . "

"Let Heru-khuti be embraced in th e two h orizo ns

"of h eaven, so t hat h e may go forth before Ra . "

"Let Pepi be embraced in th e two h oriz ons of

"heaven, (I7I) s o t h a t h e h i m s e l f m a y g o f o r t h b e f o r e

"Ra and before Heru-khuti . "

"0 enter into th e verdant stream of th e Lake of

"Kha, 0 fill with water the Fields of A aru, and let

" P e p i s e t s a i l f o r t h e e a s t e r n h a l f o f h e a v e n t o w a r d s

" t h a t p l a c e w h e r e t h e g o d s a r e b r o u g h t f o r t h , w h e r e -



C X L INTRODUCTION.

"in Pepi himself may be born along with th em as

"Heru-khuti, for Pepi is triumphant, and Pepi ac-

"claimeth and th e ka o f P e p i a c c l a i m e t h t h e [ g o d s ] .

"And they invoke Pepi and they bring to him these

"four [gods] who make th eir ways over the tresses

" o f H o r u s , a n d w h o s t a n d w i t h t h e i r s c e p t r e s i n t h e

"eastern half of heaven ; (172) and th ey declare to

"Ra th e excellent name of Pepi, and they exalt th e

"excellent name of Pepi before Neheb-kau, for Pepi

"is triumphant, and Pepi acclaimeth and his ka a c -

"claimeth th e gods . The sister of Pepi is Septet

, , ( S o t h i s ) , a n d t h e b i r t h o f P e p i i s t h e m o r n i n g s t a r ,

"and it is h e who is under the body of heaven be-

" f o r e Ra . Pepi is triumphant, and he acclaimeth and

" h i s ka a c c l a i m e t h [ t h e g o d s ] . "

"Pepi knoweth his moth er, and he is not unmind-

f u l o f h e r , t h e W h i t e C r o w n , w h o b e g e t t e t h a n d w h o

" d w e l l e t h i n t h e c i t y o f N e k h e b . She is the lady of

" t h e g r e a t h o u s e , t h e l a d y o f t h e l a n d o f u n i o n , t h e

" l a d y o f t h e h i d d e n l a n d , t h e l a d y o f t h e f i e l d o f t h e

" b o a t , t h e l a d y o f t h e l a k e w h i c h b r i n g e t h o f f e r i n g s ,

"sh e decreeth (173) th e Red Crown and she is the

"lady of t he domains of the city of Tep . 0 moth er

" o f t h i s P e p i , c r y o u t , a n d p r e s e n t t h e b r e a s t t o h i m

"and suckle h im . 0 t h o u h e r s o n , P e p i , 0 f a t h e r , t h e

"breast hath been presented unto th ee and it hath

" s u c k l e d t h e e . 0 f a t h e r , t h o u l i v e s t , 0 f a t h e r ; t h o u

" a r t l i t t l e , 0 f a t h e r ; th ou comest forth into h eaven

"like th e hawks having feath ers like unto th ose of



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXLI

"geese . 0 f a t h e r , i t i s t h e g o d H e t c h - h e t c h w h o b r i n g -

" e t h t h e s e t h i n g s t o P e p i . 0 Sema-ur, thou bull of

" o f f e r i n g s , r e m o v e t h y h o r n a n d l e t t h i s P e p i p a s s b y .

" I n a s m u c h a s P e p i p a s s e t h t h r o u g h t h e . . . . a n d i n a s -

much as he goeth to h eaven in full life and power,

" t h i s P e p i s e e t h h i s f a t h e r , t h i s P e p i s e e t h Ra . "

"Th is Pepi is indeed god and the envoy ( o r a n g e l )

"of god . P e p i c o m e t h , a n d h e i s p u r e i n S e k h e t - A a r u .

`This Pepi goeth down to th e Field of Kenset and

" t h e f o l l o w e r s o f H o r u s p u r i f y h i m . They guard care-

" f u l l y t h i s P e p i , a n d t h e y r e c i t e f o r h i m t h e ` C h a p t e r

"of Mau', and they also recite for him the `Chapter

"of coming forth in life and in power' . This Pepi

"cometh forth to heaven in life and in power in the

"boat o f Ra, h e p i l o t e t h f o r Ra t h e g o d s [ t h e r e o f ] ,

" a n d [ t h e y r e j o i c e ] i n t h i s P e p i a s t h e y r e j o i c e w h e n

" [ R a ] goeth forth from t he eastern part of the sky

" i n p e a c e , i n p e a c e . "

079) "This Pepi cometh forth to th e eastern part

"of heaven where th e gods are born, and where he

"himself is born as Heru-khuti . Pepi is triumphant

" ( m a i n Xeru) and the ka of Pepi is triumphant ; Pepi

"maketh adoration and the ka of Pepi maketh adora-

t i o n . T h e s i s t e r o f t h i s P e p i i s S e p t e t , h e i s b o r n a s t h e

"M orning Star ; h e g o e t h w i t h y o u , a n d h e j o u r n e y e t h

"with you in Sekhet-Aaru, and he draweth nigh as do

" y o u u n t o t h e F i e l d o f T u r q u o i s e . H e e a t e t h o f t h a t o f

" w h i c h y e e a t , h e l i v e t h u p o n t h a t u p o n w h i c h y e l i v e , h e

" " p u t t e t h o n a p p a r e l l i k e u n t o t h e a p p a r e l w h i c h y e p u t



C X L I I INTRODUCTION .

" o n , h e a n o i n t e t h h i m s e l f w i t h t h e s w e e t - s m e l l i n g s u b -

" s t a n c e s w i t h w h i c h y e a n o i n t y o u r s e l v e s , h e r e c e i v e t h

" h i s w a t e r w i t h y o u a t t h e l a k e o f M e n a o f t h i s P e p i ,

" a n d h e d r i n k e t h i t o u t o f t h e v e s s e l s o f t h e K H u s . "

( 1 8 5 ) " R a t hath purified heaven and Horus hath

"purified th e earth, and every god who is with th em

"purifieth th is Pepi, for Pepi adoreth th e god . 0

" t h o u p a t h o f P e p i w h i c h l e a d e t h t o t h e G r e a t H a l l s ,

"testify ye concerning Pepi before these two great

" g o d s , f o r P e p i i s U n k a , t h e s o n o f Rd, who beareth

"th e h eavens upon his sh oulders and who guideth

" t h e e a r t h . H a i l , y e g o d s , l e t P e p i t a k e h i s s e a t a m o n g

"you . H a i l , y e s t a r s , b e a r y e P e p i u p o n y o u r s h o u l -

ders as ye bear Rd, f o l l o w y e t h i s P e p i a s y e f o l -

low Ap-uat, and love ye him as ye love . . . . "

( 1 8 8 ) " T h i s P e p i h a t h c o m e t o t h e e , 0 L o r d o f h e a -

v e n , t h i s P e p i h a t h c o m e t o t h e e , O s i r i s , h e s t r e n g t h e n -

" e t h t h y f a c e , a n d h e a r r a y e t h t h e e i n t h e g a r m e n t o f a

"god ; . . . h e h a t h p u r i f i e d t h e e i n A a t a , h e h a t h d e s -

t r o y e d t h e m e m b e r s o f t h i n e e n e m i e s , h e h a t h h a c k e d

" t h e m i n p i e c e s , a n d h e h a t h c h a n g e d h i m s e l f i n t o t h e

"being who is among those who have been hacked in

" p i e c e s . . . . For Horus, the son to whom tho u hast

"given birth , hath not placed this Pepi among th e

"dead, but among th e divine gods ; t h e i r w a t e r i s

" t h e w a t e r o f t h i s P e p i , t h e i r b r e a d i s t h e b r e a d o f

` t h i s P e p i , t h e i r p u r i f i c a t i o n s a r e t h e p u r i f i c a t i o n s o f

" t h i s P e p i , a n d t h a t w h i c h H o r u s h a t h d o n e f o r O s i r i s

"he hath also done for th is Pepi . "



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . C X L I I I

(304) "Heaven uttereth words, t he earth quaketh ,

"Seb advanceth, the two divine nomes part asunder,

"the ceremony of plough ing the earth is ended, and

" t h e o f f e r i n g i s s e t b e f o r e P e p i , t h e l i v i n g o n e , t h e

" s t a b l i s h e d o n e . He go eth fort h from h eaven and

" g o e t h a b o u t o v e r t h e i r o n s k y i n l i f e a n d s t a b i l i t y ,

"he saileth over it and overthroweth in his course

" t h e f o r t i f i c a t i o n s o f S h u . He goeth forth t o h eaven

" u p o n h i s w i n g s l i k e a m i g h t y d u c k w h i c h h a t h b r o k e n

" i t s b o n d s , a n d A n u b i s l e a d e t h t h e p r o c e s s i o n ( ? ) which

"Horus made in Aby dos wh en Osiris was interred .

"He goeth forth into heaven among the stars which

" n e v e r p e r i s h ( o r d i m i n i s h ) , h i s s i s t e r i s S e p t e t , a n d

"his guide th e Morning Star leadeth him to Sekhet-

"Hetep, and he seateth himself th ere upon his iron

" t h r o n e w h i c h h a t h l i o n s ' h e a d s a n d f e e t i n t h e f o r m

"of t he h oofs of t he bull Sema-ur . He standeth up

"there in his vacant place between th e two great

"gods, and his sceptre, which is in the form of a

"papyrus, he hath with h im . He stretcheth out his

"hand over the h enmemet beings, and the gods come

" t o h i m , b e n d i n g t h e i r b a c k s i n h o m a g e . T h e t w o g r e a t

"gods watch one on each side of him and th ey find

"Pepi, like th e Great and Little Companies of th e

" g o d s a c t i n g a s t h e j u d g e o f w o r d s , b e i n g t h e p r i n c e

" [ o v e r ] e v e r y p r i n c e . They bow down before Pepi,

"and they make offerings unto h im as unto t he Great

"and Litt le Companies of th e gods . "

( 3 1 5 ) " H a i l , O s i r i s , i t i s n o t P e p i w h o e n t r e a t e t h t o



C X L I V INTRODUCTION .

" s e e t h e e i n t h e f o r m i n w h i c h t h o u a r t , w h o e n t r e a t -

" e t h t o s e e t h e e i n t h e f o r m i n w h i c h t h o u a r t , i t i s

"th y son who entreateth to see thee in the form in

"which th ou art, it is Horus who entreateth t o see

" t h e e i n t h e f o r m i n w h i c h t h o u a r t . "

(426) "Pepi bath gone down into th e Great Green

"Sea, and th ou, 0 Great Green Sea, hast drooped

"thy head and bent t hy back, and the children of

"Nut, who come down upon th ee putting their gar-

l a n d s u p o n t h e i r h e a d s a n d r o u n d t h e i r n e c k s , o f f e r

"th e flowers which are the crowns of the pools of

" S e k h e t - h e t e p t o I s i s , t h e g r e a t l a d y ; and the god-

dess who beareth th e pike in Akhet bringeth th em

"and spreadeth th em out as a gift before her son

"Horus, who m she suckleth at t he breast, so th at h e

" m a y t r a v e r s e t h e e a r t h i n h i s t w o w h i t e s a n d a l s a n d

" m a y g o t o h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s . Pepi bath opened out

" h i s w a y a m o n g t h e b i r d s , h e b a t h t r a v e l l e d w i t h t h e

" l o r d s o f f o o d , h e b a t h g o n e t o t h e g r e a t l a k e w h i c h

" i s i n S e k h e t - H e t e p o n w h i c h t h e g r e a t g o d s a l i g h t , a n d

" t h e s e g r e a t a n d i m p e r i s h a b l e b e i n g s g i v e t o h i m t h e

" t r e e o f l i f e , w h e r e o n t h e y t h e m s e l v e s d o l i v e , t h a t h e

" a l s o m a y [ e a t a n d ] l i v e t h e r e o n . T a k e , t h e n , t h i s P e p i

"with th ee to t his great country which bath become

"subject unto thee by th e will of the gods, wherein

" t h o u e a t e s t d u r i n g t h e n i g h t e v e n [ u n t i l ] d a w n , a n d

" w h e r e t h o u b e c o m e s t m a s t e r o f d i v i n e f o o d , i n s u c h

" w i s e t h a t P e p i m a y e a t o f t h a t o f w h i c h t h o u e a t e s t ,

"th at h e may drink of t hat of which thou drinkest . "



THE ELYSIAN FIELDS OR HEAVEN . CXLV

T h e f o l l o w i n g p r a y e r , w h i c h i s f o u n d i n s h o r t e n e d

forms in Graeco-Roman and Roman periods, o ccurs

i n t h e t e x t o f P e p i I I . 1 . 6 6 9 , f f .

" H a i l , G r e a t C o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o a r e i n A n n u ,

" g r a n t t h a t P e p i N e f e r - k a - R a m a y f l o u r i s h , a n d g r a n t

" t h a t h i s p y r a m i d , h i s e v e r l a s t i n g b u i l d i n g , m a y f l o u -

rish, even as the name of Temu, th e Governor of

"th e Great Company of the gods, flourisheth . I f t h e

" n a m e o f S h u , t h e l o r d o f t h e u p p e r s h r i n e i n A n n u ,

" f l o u r i s h e t h P e p i N e f e r - k a - R a s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s

" p y r a m i d , h i s e v e r l a s t i n g b u i l d i n g , s h a l l f l o u r i s h . I f t h e

" n a m e o f T e f n u t , t h e l a d y o f t h e l o w e r s h r i n e i n A n n u ,

"is stablish ed, the name of this Pepi Nefer-ka-Ra

" s h a l l b e s t a b l i s h e d , a n d t h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l b e s t a -

" b l i s h e d f o r e v e r . If the name of Seb, the soul of

" t h e e a r t h ( ? ) , f l o u r i s h e t h , t h e n a m e o f P e p i N e f e r - k a - R a

" s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d

" h i s e v e r l a s t i n g b u i l d i n g s h a l l f l o u r i s h . If th e name

" o f N u t f l o u r i s h e t h i n H e t - S h e n t h i n A n n u , t h e n a m e o f

" t h i s P e p i - N e f e r - k a - R d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s

" p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l

" f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . I f t h e n a m e o f O s i r i s f l o u r i s h e t h i n

"the nome Teni, the name of th is Pepi Nefer-ka-Ra

" s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d

" t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . I f t h e n a m e o f

" O s i r i s , G o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i , f l o u r i s h e t h , t h e n a m e o f

" t h i s P e p i N e f e r - k a - R d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s p y r a -

m i d s h a l l f l o u ri s h , a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l f l o ur i s h f o r

" e v e r . I f t h e n a m e o f S e t i n N u b t ( O m b o s ) f l o u r i s h e t h ,

i



C X L V I INTRODUCTION

" t h e n a m e o f P e p i N e f e r - k a - R a s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s

" h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l

" f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . If the name of Horus of Behutet

" f l o u r i s h e t h , t h e n a m e o f t h i s P e p i N e f e r - k a - R a s h a l l

" f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s

" h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . If th e name of

" R a f l o u r i s h e t h i n t h e h o r i z o n , t h e n a m e o f t h i s P e p i

" N e f e r - k a - R a s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l

" f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . I f t h e n a m e o f K h e n t - m e r t i i n S e -

" k h e m i s s t a b l i s h e d , t h e n a m e o f t h i s P e p i N e f e r - k a -

" R a s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s P y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h ,

" a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g s h a l l f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . I f t h e

" n a m e o f U a t c h i t w h o d w e l l e t h i n T e p f l o u r i s h e t h , t h e

"name of t his Pepi Nefer-ka-Rd shall flourish , and

" t h i s h i s p y r a m i d s h a l l f l o u r i s h , a n d t h i s h i s b u i l d i n g

" s h a l l f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r . "



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THEDEAD

The Egyptians, from the earliest to th e latest period

of t h eir hist ory, were addicted to th e use of formulae

which were th ough t t o be able to effect results usu-

ally beyond th e po wer of man, and th ey accompanied

such f ormulae with th e performance of certain cere-

mo nies . The fo rmulae consisted of th e repetit ion of

th e names of go ds and supernatural bei ngs, bene-

volent or ho sti le to man as th e case migh t be, and

of entreaties o r curses ; th e ceremonies were of various

kinds, and the o bject o f t h e present ch apter is t o de-

scribe briefly tho se which relate t o th e various sec-

tio ns of th e Boo k of th e Dead .

Th e Egyptian believed th at every word spoken

under certain circumstances mus t be f ol lo wed by so me

effect, go od or bad ; a prayer ut t ered by a pro perly

qualif ied person, o r by a man ceremo niall y pure, i n

th e proper place, and in th e proper manner, must

necessaril y be answered favourably ; and sim ilarly

the curses which were pronounced upon a man, or

beast, or th ing, in th e name of a hostile supernatural

i *



C X L V I I I INTRODUCTION

being were bound to result in harm to t he object

c u r s e d . I t s e e m s t h a t t h i s i d e a h a d i t s o r i g i n i n t h e

belief that th e world and all that th erein is came

i n t o b e i n g i m m e d i a t e l y a f t e r T h o t h h a d i n t e r p r e t e d i n

w o r d s t h e w i l l o f t h e d e i t y , i n r e s p e c t o f t h e c r e a t i o n

o f t h e w o r l d , a n d t h a t c r e a t i o n w a s t h e r e s u l t o f t h e

god's command . In very early times the Egyptian

c a l l e d i n t h e p r o f e s s i o n a l r e l i g i o u s m a n t o u t t e r w o r d s

of go od omen over the dead body of h is relative or

friend, and later the same words written upon some

substance and buried with him were believed to be

e f f e c t u a l i n p r o c u r i n g f o r h i m t h e g o o d t h i n g s o f t h e

life beyond th e grave . In th e text on the pyramid

o f U n a s ( 1 . 5 8 3 ) i s a r e f e r e n c e t o s o m e t h i n g w r i t t e n

which t he deceased was supposed to possess, in th e

f o l l o w i n g w o r d s :- "The bone and flesh wh ich h ave

"no writing' are wretched, but, beh old, the writing

"of Unas is under th e great seal, and behold, it is

" n o t u n d e r t h e l i t t l e s e a l ." And in th e text on th e

pyramid of Pepi I we find the words, "The uraeus of

"th is Pepi is upon his head, there is a writing on

"each side of h im, and he h ath words of magical

" p o w e r a t h i s t w o f e e t " ; t h u s e q u i p p e d t h e k i n g e n t e r s

heaven .

I n t h e r e i g n o f C h e o p s , h o w e v e r , w e a r e t o l d 2 t h a t

his second son Herutataf brought t o t he court a man

r .® oesh .

z . Wcst car Papyrus, ed . Erman, pl . i i .



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . CXLIX

who poss essed magical po wers, and wh o was able t o

jo in th e h ead to a decapitated body and to make th e

complete body live again as befo re . When Cheops

ordered the head to be s truck off from a prisoner th at

th e sage migh t fasten it on again, t h e sage excused

hi mself from performing th is difficult task ; but wh en a

go o se was broug h t , and it s h ead was cut o ff and laid

on one side of th e room and th e body on th e ot h er,

h e spake certain magical words, whereupon th e go os e

st o o d up and begun to waddle, and th e h ead began

to mo ve to wards it . When th e head h ad jo ined it self

again to th e body th e bird sto od up and cackled. Thus,

in th at remot e period a man claimed to be able to re-

st ore li fe t o decapitated creatures by m eans of words

of magical power, and it seems t hat t h e belief in th e

efficacy of t h e words o f Tho th was already well esta-

blished ; in th e late period th e mo urner consoled him-

self by asserting th at t h e Boo k of th e Dead prepared

fo r hi s dead relati ve or friend h ad been writ t en by

th e fingers of th e god Thot h h imself .

A commo n way to eff ect certain results, go od or

evil, was t o em ploy fi gures made of various s ub-

st ances, chi efly wax, or amulets made o f precious

st ones and metals in various fo rms ; bot h figures and

amulets were inscribed with words wh ich g ave th em

th e power to carry out t h e work assigned to th em

by those who caused them to be made. It is well

known th at t h e Egyptians believed th at t h e qualit ies

and much else, including t h e ka , of a living o riginal



C L INTRODUCTION .

c o u l d b e t r a n s f e r r e d t o a n i m a g e t h e r e o f b y m e a n s o f

t h e r e p e t i t i o n o v e r i t o f c e r t a i n f o r m u l a e , a n d a g o o d

o r e v i l a c t d o n e t o a s t a t u e o r f i g u r e r e s u l t e d i n g o o d

or evil to th e person whom it represented .

In th e Westcar Papyrus we are also told that th e

w i f e o f a h i g h E g y p t i a n o f f i c i a l c a l l e d A b a - a n e r f e l l

i n l o v e w i t h o n e o f t h e k i n g ' s f o l l o w e r s , a n d t h a t s h e

s e n t t o h i m a n d t o l d h i m o f h e r d e s i r e; s u b s e q u e n t l y

th e pair met in th e woman's garden, and th ey passed

t h e d a y i n d r i n k i n g a n d i n p l e a s u r e . On th e morrow

th e husband was told of h is wife's conduct, and he

d e t e r m i n e d t o p u n i s h b o t h w i t h d e a t h . H a v i n g s e n t f o r

h i s e b o n y b o x b o u n d w i t h f i n e m e t a l , h e m a d e a w a x e n

crocodile a few inches long, and having recited ma-

g i c a l f o r m u l a e o v e r i t h e g a v e i t t o h i s c h i e f s e r v a n t ,

and told him to t hrow it into th e water when he saw

his wife's paramour going to bathe in th e evening .

When th e guilt y pair had passed anoth er day to -

geth er and th e young man went down to th e river

i n t h e e v e n i n g , t h e c h i e f s e r v a n t c a s t t h e w a x e n c r o -

c o d i l e i n t o t h e w a t e r ; a n d a s i t w a s f a l l i n g i t t u r n e d

i n t o a h u g e l i v i n g c r o c o d i l e a b o u t t w e l v e f e e t l o n g ,

which swallowed th e young man . Seven days later

Aba - aner and th e king Neb - ka went t o t he water

where the crocodile was, and Aba-aner ordered it t o

give up the young man ; a n d i t c a m e o u t o f t h e w a t e r

and straigh tway brought up th e young man . When

th e king had made some remark, Aba-aner picked up

th e crocodile, which at once turned into t he small



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . CLI

waxen crocodile that i t was o r i g i n a l l y , and when

h e again o rdered i t to devour th e young man,i t

once more became a living r e p t i l e , and, seizing th e

young man, made i t s way to th e water, and disap-

peared with h im . The f a i t h l e s s wife was burnt . The

principal actors i n t h i s story are said t o h ave f l o u -

rished during the rule of t h e th ird dynasty o f Egypt,

nearly fo ur th ousand years befo re Christ , and it i s a

not eworth y fact th at th e narrative mentio ns t he ebony

and metal bo x and th e making of a waxen croco dile

in a way wh ich s eems to sh ew th at t h eir owner was

in the h abit o f using th e box and the wax frequently . '

Abo ut th e time o f th e eight eenth dynasty, we learn

fro m a papyrus 2 th at a man was pros ecuted in Egypt

fo r h aving made fi gures o f men and wom en in wax,

by which he caused sundry and divers pains and

sicknesses to th e living beings who m th ey represent-

ed . And, according to Ps eudo-Calli st h enes, j Nectane-

bus wrought magic by means of a bowl of water,

so me waxen figures , and an ebo ny rod . The waxen

figures were made in th e forms o f th e soldiers of th e

enemy who were coming against him by sea or by

land, and were placed upon th e water in th e basin

by him. Nectanebus t h en arrayed him self in suit able

apparel, and, h aving t aken th e rod in h is h and, be-

i . I have reproduced this paragraph from my Lafe and Exploits of

A l e x a n d e r t h e G r e a t , p . X I I I .

z . C h a b a s , Le Papyrus Magiq ue Harris, p . 17 0 f f .

3 . E d . M i i l l e r , l i b . i . c a p . f f .



C L I I INTRODUCTION .

gan to recit e certain formulae and th e names of di-

vine powers known unto him, whereupon the waxen

fig ures became animat ed, and st raigh tway sank to t h e

b o t t o m of t h e b owl ; at t h e same m oment t h e h os ts of

th e enemy were destroyed . If th e foe was coming by

sea h e placed th e waxen so ldiers in waxen sh ips, and

at t h e sound of th e words o f power bot h sh ips and

men sank into th e waves as th e waxen mo dels sank

t o t h e bo t t om of t h e sea . The same informant t ells us

th at when Nectanebus wish ed Olympias, t h e mo th er

of A lexander the Great, t o believe that t he go d Am-

mon h ad visited her during t h e nigh t, h e went fo rth

from her presence into th e plain and gath ered a number

of h erbs which h ad th e power of causing dreams, and

pressed out t he j uice from th em . He th en fashio ned

a female figure in th e form of Olympias, and inscribed

th e Queen's name upo n it , and h aving made t h e mo del

of a bed h e laid th e figure th ereon . Nectanebus next

lit a lamp, and, reciting t h e words o f power which

would compel t h e demo ns to send Olympi as a dream,

he poured out t he j uice of t he h erbs o ver th e waxen

figure ; and at the moment of the performance of

these acts Olympias dreamed that she was in th e

arms of the god Ammon .

A t raditio n also exists t o th e effect that A ristot le

gave to Alexander the Great a number of waxen

fig ures nailed down in a box whi ch was f astened by

a ch ain, and wh ich h e ordered him never to l et g o

out o f h is own hand, or at least out o f th at o f one



THE .IIAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD C L I I I

o f h i s c o n f i d e n t i a l s e r v a n t s . T h e b o x w a s t o g o w h e r e v -

er Alexander went, and Aristo tle taught him to re-

c i t e c e r t a i n f o r m u l a e o v e r i t w h e n e v e r h e t o o k i t u p

o r p u t i t d o w n . T h e f i g u r e s i n t h e b o x w e r e i n t e n d e d

to represent the various kinds of armed forces that

Alexander was likely to find opposed to h im . Some

o f t h e m o d e l s h e l d i n t h e i r h a n d s l e a d e n s w o r d s w h i c h

were curved backwards, and some h ad spears in their

hands pointed head downwards, and some h ad bows

w i t h c u t s t r i n g s ; all these were laid face downwards

i n t h e b o x . When Alexander was engaged in war with

a n y n a t i o n a r m e d w i t h s w o r d s , o r s p e a r s , o r b o w s , i f

h e recited th e formulae which A ristotle had taught

h im, t h e swords of th e foe would become as lead

and bend backwards, the spears would become im-

p o t e n t i n t h e h a n d s o f t h o s e w h o h e l d t h e m a n d t h e i r

h eads would turn to th e ground, and the strings of

th e bows would snap .

R e t u r n i n g t o p u r e l y E g y p t i a n s o u r c e s f o r i n f o r m a -

tion concerning th e use of wax figures we come to

an important work,' consisting of several Chapters

which were to be recited to keep away sto rm-clouds

a n d t h u n d e r f r o m t h e s k y . One Chapter reads : " F i r e

"upon th ee, 0 Apep, thou enemy of Ra ! The Eye of

"Horus prevailet h over th e accursed soul and shade

" o f A p e p , t h e f l a m e o f t h e E y e o f H o r u s g n a w e t h i n t o

"th at enemy of Rd, the flame of th e Eye of Horus

" e a t e t h i n t o a l l t h e e n e m i e s o f P - a a i n d e a t h a n d i n

i . F o r t h e t e x t a n d t ra n s l a t i o n o f i t s e e A r ch a e o l o a i a , V o l . 5 2 .



C L I V INTRODUCTION .

" l i f e ." The Rubric belonging to th e Chapters orders

t h a t i t s h a l l b e " r e c i t e d o v e r A p e p w r i t t e n i n g r e e n

"ink upon a piece of new papyrus, and over a wax

"figure of Apep on which his name is inscribed in

"green ink ; t h i s f i g u r e s h a l l t h e n b e p u t i n t h e f i r e

"th at the enemy of Rd may be devoured . When Apep

" i s p u t i n t h e f i r e s p e a k y e w o r d s o f p o w e r a n d s a y ,

" ` T a s t e t h o u , ' d e a t h t o t h e e , A p e p . G e t t h e e b a c k , r e -

"treat, thou enemy of Rd, fall down, wriggle away,

" d e p a r t , r e t r e a t . I have driven thee back, I h ave

"hacked thee in pieces ; . . . . Back, t hou fiend, an

"end to th ee ! Therefore have I cast fire at thee,

" t h e r e f o r e h a v e I c a u s e d t h e e t o b e d e s t r o y e d , t h e r e -

"fore have I judged and condemned thee to an evil

"doo m . An end to t hee, an end to t hee ; t a s t e t h o u ,

"an end to th ee, mayest thou never rise up again !

" A n e n d , a n e n d t o t h e e , a n e n d t o t h e e , t a s t e t h o u ,

"and come to an end. I have destroyed th e enemy

° " o f R a .' This figure of A pep shall be burnt in a

" g r a s s f i r e , a n d w h e n b u r n t , i t s a s h e s a r e t o b e m i x e d

"with excrement and thrown into a fire . A f t e r w a r d s ,

"when thou hast thrown Apep into the fire at day-

" b r e a k o f t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e s i x , s p i t u p o n h i m a n d

, , d e f i l e h i m w i t h t h y l e f t f o o t ; t h u s s h a l l b e r e p u l s e d

"the roarings of th e Backward of Face . Thou shalt

"do th e like of t his at daybreak on th e festival of

" t h e f i f t e e n t h d a y , f o r b y m e a n s o f i t A p e p s h a l l b e

" r e p u l s e d a n d s l a i n b e f o r e t h e S e k t e t boat . T h o u s h a l t

i . I. e . , f e e l t h e f l a m e .



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . CLV

" d o t h e l i k e o f t h i s w h e n t e m p e s t s r a g e i n t h e e a s t -

""ern parts of t he sky when Rd sets in th e land of

" l i f e , t o p r e v e n t t h e a r r i v a l o f r e d t h r e a t e n i n g c l o u d s

" i n t h e e a s t e r n q u a r t e r o f t h e s k y . T h o u s h a l t d o t h e

" l i k e o f t h i s m a n y t i m e s a s a p r e v e n t i v e a g a i n s t t h e

" s h o w e r , t h e s u n ' s d i s k s h a l l s h i n e , a n d A p e p s h a l l b e

"overth rown in very truth . " Elsewhere we are told

t h a t i f i t b e w i s h e d t o d e s t r o y t h e f i e n d s w h i c h a c -

company A pep we must "write th e names o f t h eir

" f a t h e r s , a n d m o t h e r s , a n d o f f s p r i n g w i t h g r e e n p a i n t

"upon new papyrus, and also inscribe th eir names

"upon wax figures of t hem which shall be tied round

" w i t h d a r k h a i r . T h e s e f i g u r e s s h a l l b e s p i t u p o n , a n d

" s h a l l b e s p u r n e d w i t h t h e l e f t f o o t a n d s t a b b e d w i t h

" a s t o n e k n i f e . "

T h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t m e n t i o n o f f i g u r e s i n t h e B o o k

of th e Dead occurs in th e Vlth Chapter which, pro-

perly speaking, forms one of th e text s that accom-

pany th e scene of t he Funeral Chamber as exhibited

in Chapter CLI . When the Egyptian, in very early

d a y s , c o n c e i v e d t h e e x i s t e n c e o f t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s

i t o c c u r r e d t o h i m t h a t t h e a g r i c u l t u r a l l a b o u r s w h i c h

w o u l d h a v e t o b e c a r r i e d o u t t h e r e m i g h t e n t a i l u p o n

h i m s e l f t o i l a n d f a t i g u e . T o a v o i d t h i s a s h o r t C h a p t e r

( V ) w a s d r a w n u p , t h e r e c i t a l o f w h i c h w a s b e l i e v e d t o

free the deceased from doing any work in th e under-

world. But it was felt that the work must be done

by some person or th ing, and eventually it became

th e custom to bury a figure or figures of th e de-



C L V I INTRODUCTION

c e a s e d w i t h h i m i n h i s t o m b s o t h a t i t o r t h e y m i g h t

perform whatever work fell to h is share . I t i s p r o -

bable th at in semi-savage times the wealthy Egyp-

tian's burial was accompanied by th e slaugh ter of

several slaves, who were supposed to follow him to

th e next, world and to minister to his wants th ere ;

th e figures which were buried with th e dead in the

later times seem to have taken th e place of t he

s l a u g h t e r e d s l a v e s . To th ese figures th e Egyptian

gave t h e name u s h a b f i u , a word wh ich is commonly

rendered by "respondents" or "answerers", and they

are often described in modern times as the "working

f i g u r e s o f H a d e s " . T h e y a r e m a d e o f s t o n e o f v a r i o u s

k i n d s , w o o d , f a i e n c e , e t c . ; I k n o w o f n o n e e a r l i e r t h a n

th e XIth dynasty . T h e y a r e i n s c r i b e d w i t h a t e x t i n

w h i c h t h e d e c e a s e d s a y s , " I f I b e c a l l e d , o r i f I b e

"adjudged to do any work whatsoever of th e labours

"which are to be done in th e underworld by a man

" i n h i s t u r n , l e t t h e j u d g m e n t f a l l u p o n t h e e i n s t e a d

"of upon me always, in th e matter of so wing t he

" f i e l d s , o f f i l l i n g t h e w a t e r - c o u r s e s w i t h w a t e r , a n d

" o f b r i n g i n g t h e s a n d s o f t h e e a s t t o t h e w e s t ." To

t h i s t h e s h a b f i f i g u r e m a k e s r e p l y , " V e r i l y I a m h e r e ,

"[and will come whithersoever thou biddest me . "

Several of the Chapters of the Book of t he Dead

a r e f o l l o w e d b y R u b r i c s _ w h i c h g i v e d i r e c t i o n s f o r t h e

p e r f o r m a n c e o f c e r t a i n m a g i c a l c e r e m o n i e s , a n d a m o n g

th em may be specially mentioned th e following : -

Chap . X I I I . This Chapter was to be recited over



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . C L V I I

two rings made o f dnkh am f l o w e r s ; one was t o be

l a i d o n t h e r i g h t e a r o f t h e d e c e a s e d , a n d t h e o t h e r

was to be wrapped up in a piece of byssus whereon

the name of the deceased was inscribed .

Chap . XIX . This Chapter was to be recited over

th e divine chaplet which was laid upon th e face of

th e deceased while incense was burnt on his beh alf .

Chap. C . This Chapter was to be recited over a

p i c t u r e o f t h e b o a t o f t h e S u n p a i n t e d w i t h a s p e c i a l

ink upon a piece of new papyrus, wh ich was to be

laid on th e breast o f th e deceased, who would th en

h ave power to e mbark in th e boat o f Rd and t o

jo urney with t he god .

Chap . CXXV . T h e J u d g m e n t S c e n e w a s t o b e p a i n t -

ed upon a tile made of earth upon which neither the

pig nor any ot her animal had trodden ; a n d i f t h e

t e x t o f t h e C h a p t e r w a s a l s o w r i t t e n u p o n i t , t h e d e -

c e a s e d a n d h i s c h i l d r e n w o u l d f l o u r i s h f o r e v e r , h i s

name would never be forgot ten, and his place would

h e n c e f o r t h b e w i t h t h e f o l l o w e r s o f O s i r i s .

Chap . CXXX . T h i s C h a p t e r w a s t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r

a p i c t u r e o f t h e g o d R d w h e r e i n a f i g u r e o f t h e d e -

ceased sitting in th e bows was drawn ; t h i s d o n e t h e

s o u l o f t h e d e c e a s e d w o u l d l i v e f o r e v e r .

Chap . CXXXIII . T h i s C h a p t e r w a s t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r

a f a i e n c e m o d e l o f t h e b o a t o f R d , f o u r c u b i t s i n l e n g t h ,

w h e r e o n t h e f i g u r e s o f t h e d i v i n e c h i e f s w e r e p a i n t e d ;

p a i n t e d f i g u r e s o f R d a n d o f t h e Khu o f t h e d e c e a s e d

w e r e t o b e p l a c e d i n t h e b o a t . A m o d e l o f t h e s t a r r y



C L V I I I INTRODUCTION.

heavens was also to be made and upon it th e model

o f t h e b o a t o f Rd w a s t o b e m o v e d a b o u t , i n i m i t a t i o n

o f t h e m o t i o n o f t h e b o a t o f t h e g o d i n h e a v e n ; t h i s

ceremony would cause th e deceased to be received

by th e gods in heaven as one of t hemselves .

Chap . CXXXIV . This Chapter was to be recited

over figures of a hawk ( R d ) , Tem, Shu, Tefnut, Seb,

Nut, Osiris, Isis, Suti, and Nepht hys painted on a

plaque which was to be placed in a model of th e

boat of Ra wherein the deceased was seated ; t h i s

ceremony would cause the deceased to travel with

Rd i n t h e s k y .

Chap . CXXXVI A . This Chapter was to be recited

o v e r a f i g u r e o f t h e d e c e a s e d s e a t e d i n t h e b o a t o f Ra .

Chap . CXXXVII A . This Chapter was to be recited

o v e r f o u r f i r e s , f e d b y a s p e c i a l k i n d o f c l o t h a n o i n t -

e d w i t h u n g u e n t , w h i c h w e r e t o b e p l a c e d i n t h e h a n d s

of four men who h ad the names of t he pillars of Ho-

r u s w r i t t e n u p o n t h e i r s h o u l d e r s . Four clay troughs,

w h e r e o n i n c e n s e h a d b e e n s p r i n k l e d , w e r e t o b e f i l l e d

with th e milk of a white cow, and th e milk was to

be employed in extinguishing th e four fires . I f t h i s

Chapter were recited daily ( ? ) for th e deceased he

would become like unto Osiris in every respect . T h e

Rubric supplies a series of texts which were to be

r e c i t e d:i ) o v e r a T e t o f c r y s t a l s e t i n a p l i n t h ,

w h i c h w a s t o b e p l a c e d i n t h e w e s t w a l l o f t h e t o m b ;

( 2 ) o v e r a f i g u r e o f A n u b i s s e t i n a p l i n t h , w h i c h w a s

t o b e p l a c e d i n t h e e a s t w a l l ; ( 3 ) o v e r a b r i c k s m e a r e d



THE MAGIC OF THE ROOK OF THE DEAD . CLIX

w i t h p i t c h w h i c h w a s s e t o n f i r e , a n d t h e n p l a c e d i n

t h e s o u t h w a l l ; and (q) over a brick inscribed with

t h e f i g u r e o f a p a l m t r e e , w h i c h w a s s e t i n t h e n o r t h

w a l l .

Chap . CXL . This Chapter was to be recited over

a n u t c h a t , o r f i g u r e o f t h e E y e o f H o r n s , m a d e e i t h e r

o f l a p i s - l a z ul i o r Mak stone, and over another made

o f j a s p e r . D u r i n g t h e r e c i t a l o f t h e C h a p t e r f o u r a l -

t a r s w e r e t o b e l i g h t e d f o r R a - T e m , a n d f o u r f o r t h e

U t c h a t , and four for th e gods who were mentioned

t h e r e i n .

Chap . CXLIV . T h e s e v e n s e c t i o n s o f t h i s C h a p t e r

were t o be recited over a drawing o f t h e Seven

Arits, at each of which t hree gods were seated ; by

th ese means th e deceased was prevented from being

turned back at th e doo r of any one of t h e seven

m a n s i o n s o f O s i r i s .

Chap . C L X I I . This Chapter was to be recited over

th e figure of a cow made of fine gold which was to

be placed at th e neck of the deceased ; d u r i n g t h e

performance of th is ceremony th e priest is o rdered

to say, "O A men, 0 Amen, wh o art in ' h e a v e n , t u r n

"thy face upon th e dead body of thy son and make

"h im so und and strong in th e underworld . "

Chap . C L X I I I . T h i s C h a p t e r w a s t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r

a serpent h aving legs and wearing a disk and two

h orns, and over two u t c h a t s h aving both eyes and

w i n g s .

Chap . CLXIV . T h i s C h a p t e r w a s t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r



C L X INTRODUCTION.

a t h r e e - h e a d e d , i t h y p h a l l i c f i g u r e o f M u t p a i n t e d u p o n

a p i e c e o f l i n e n , a n d o v e r t h e f i g u r e s o f t w o d w a r f s

painted one on each side of t he goddess .

Chap . CLXV . T h i s C h a p t e r w a s t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r

th e figure of th e "god of th e lifted hand", who had

a b o d y i n t h e f o r m o f t h a t o f a b e e t l e .

Besides th ese a number of Chapters have Rubrics,

varying in length from two to twenty lines, which

d e c l a r e t h a t i f t h e d e c e a s e d b e a c q u a i n t e d w i t h t h e i r

c o n t e n t s o r i f t h e y b e i n s c r i b e d u p o n h i s c o f f i n , t h e y

will enable h im t o attain great happiness and free-

dom in th e world beyond th e grave . Seven oth er

Chapters consist of texts which were written upon

th e amulets that were usually laid upon the mummy,

namely Nos . XXX B , LXXXIX, CLV, CLVI, CLVII,

CLVIII, and CLIX . Chapter XXX B i s f o u n d i n s c r i b e d

upon th ousands of large green basalt scarabs, which

were usually set in a banded frame of gold and laid

i n s i d e o r u p o n t h e b r e a s t , j u s t o v e r t h e h e a r t ; i t i s

also found inscribed upon green basalt amulets made

i n t h e f o r m o f t h e h e a r t . ' T h e o b j e c t o f t h i s a m u l e t

w a s t o p r e s e r v e t h e h e a r t o f t h e d e c e a s e d a n d t o p r o -

t e c t i t f r o m t h e a t t a c k s o f t h o s e w h o w e r e t h o u g h t t o

steal away th e hearts of the dead ; i t s u s e i s a s o l d

as the IV th dynasty, in which period th e text was

n o t c u t b u t p a i n t e d u p o n i t . Chapter LXXXIX, which

w a s w r i t t e n t o e n s u r e t h e u n i o n o f t h e s o u l w i t h t h e

i . I h a v e d e s c r i b e d t h e c h i e f e x a m p l e s o f t h i s a m u l e t i n my Papyrus

o f A m ' , p . z 6 z .



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . CLXI

body in th e underworld, was recited over the human-

headed hawk made of gold and inlaid with precious

stones which was laid upon th e neck of the mummy ;

examples of t his amulet have been found with a few

words of the Chapter inscribed upon th em . Chapter

CLV is found inscribed upon Tets made of gold and

precious stones which h ave been found attached to

th e neck of t he mummy ; t h i s a m u l e t r e p r e s e n t s t h e

tree-trunk, with four branches pointing to th e four

cardinal points, which contained th e dead body of

O s i r i s , a n d i t b e s t o w e d u p o n i t s p o s s e s s o r s t a b i l i t y

a n d l a s t i n g p r e s e r v a t i o n . Chapter CLVI is found in-

scribed upon several carnelian "buckles" which have

been found attached to the neck of th e mummy ; t h i s

amulet gave to th e deceased the powers which were

enshrined in th e blood and power and enchantments

o f t h e g o d d e s s I s i s . C h a p t e r C L V I I i s f o u n d i n s c r i b e d

upon gold vultures which h ave been found attached

to th e neck of t he mummy ; th is amulet gave th e

deceased the protection of t he goddess Isis such as

she exercised on behalf of her own son Horus . C h a p -

t e r C L V I I I w a s i n s c r i b e d u p o n t h e c o l l a r o f g o l d w h i c h

was placed on th e neck of t he mummy ; t h i s a m u l e t

gave the deceased freedom from the bandages with

which h e was swath ed . Chapter CL IX is found in-

s c r i b e d u p o n s e v e r a l m o t h e r - o f - e m e r a l d s c e p t r e s w h i c h

were attached to t he neck of th e mummy ; t h i s a m u -

l e t g a v e " p r o t e c t i o n " o r " s t r e n g t h " t o t h e d e c e a s e d .

C h a p t e r C L X I I i s f o u n d i n s c r i b e d u p o n c i r c u l a r p i e c e s

k



C L X I I INTRODUCTION .

of papyri laid down upon c a r t o n n a zi e backs, commonly

known as "h ypocephali" ; t h e y w e r e p l a c e d u n d e r t h e

back of th e head of th e mummy and by this warmth,

similar to th at which h e possessed upon earth, was

imparted . Chapter CLXVI is fo und inscribed upon

small pillows made of haematite and other substan-

c e s ; as the ordinary pillow raised the head of th e

mummy from t he bed of t he coffin, so th is amulet

raised th e head of th e deceased in th e horizon and

p r e v e n t e d i t f r o m b e i n g l a i d l o w . F i n a l l y , f i g u r e s o f

th e gods in metal, stone, f a i e n ce , wood, wax, etc . ,

were att ach ed to th e mummy in order to place it

u n d e r t h e s p e c i a l p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e d e i t i e s w h o m t h e y

r e p r e s e n t e d . T h e f o l l o w i n g a r e t h e a m u l e t s w h i c h a r e

c o m m o n l y f o u n d i n E g y p t i a n t o m b s , a n d t h e i r s i g n i f i -

c a t i o n s :-

i .

° a

t h e t Buckle . T h e P r o t e c t i o n o f t h e b l o o d ,

p o w e r , a n d i n c a n t a t i o n o f I s i s .

t e t T r e e - t r u n k . S t a b i l i t y , f i r m n e s s , l a s t i n g -

n e s s .

m i t t Mother . T h e P r o t e c t i o n o f t h e g o d d e s s

Isis, who in the form of a vulture

protected h er son Ho rus and be-

wailed her husband Osiris .

4 . u s e k h C o l l a r . Freedom from the fetters of

the bandages .

5 .

Tc a t c h S c e p t r e . G r e e n y o u t h , v i g o u r , t o f l o u r -

ish and to renew youth .

2 .



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE. DEAD . C L X I I I

6 . u r s P i l l o w . T h e l i f t i n g u p o f t h e h e a d a n d

body .

7 . ab Heart . T h e s e a t o f l i f e a n d s o u r c e o f

good and evil th ough ts . The h eart

o f g r e e n b a s a l to~ was con-

n e c t e dected with Chap . XXX B ; t h e h e a r t

o f l a p i s - l a z u l i - *

J `with Ch ap .

0 1 1 1

XXVI ; t h e h e a r t o f m o t h e r - o f - e m e -

r a l d® 0ith Chap . XXVII ; a n dI I I

t h e h e a r t o f c a r n e l i a n I . o I I I w i t h

Chap . XXIX B8 . ~ a u l e hh e o b j e c t w h i c h t h i s h i e r o -

g l y p h i c r e p r e s e n t s i s n o t k n o w n , b u t

i t m e a n s " l i f e " , a n d s y m b o l i z e s t h e

l i f e w h i c h t h e g o d s l i v e .

9 . ?t c h a t Eye of Ra or Horus . Good health,

s a f e , s o u n d , p r o t e c t i o n . Two u t c h a t s

0 ? ~ j , t typify the t wo eyes of Ra

and th e Sun and Mo on .

i o . o n e f c r A m u s i c a l i n s t r u m e n t . G o o d l u c k , h a p p i -

n e s s , j o y .

1 1 . s a g a A t o o l . U n i o n , u n i t y .

12 . r0i k h i i t The sun on the h orizon . The coming

forth with th e rising sun, and the

abode of t he blessed dead with RAi n t h e w e s t .

r 3 . h e t c h White crown . S o u t h e r n o r U p p e r E g y p t .

r 4 . t e s h e r Red crown . North ern or Lower Egypt .

Q. s h e n T h e s u n ' s o r b i t . E t e r n i t y .



CLXIV INTRODUCTION .

1 6 . 1 ,1

u s e r Sceptre . Power .

1 7 . c _ - ) i r e " A rope which enclosed the name of

kings and ro yal perso ns ; t his sign

is commonly known as c a r t o u c h e .

Name . The preservation of the

name was considered to be of th e

high est importance, for th e blott ing

out of a man's name brough t wit h

it eternal death .

18 . ( S mendt A n inst rument . Joy, pleasure, sex ual

pleasure, h appiness .

19 . [ ~ neha An angle. Protectio n .

20 . hefnu Frog . New life, resurrecti on .

21 . s e k h e k h Level ( ? ) . Equilibrium, straigh tness .

22 . / k h e t Staircase, st eps . The steps whereon

Ra rest ed in Kh emennu, and wh ere-

on Osiris stands in th e underworld .

23 . maget Ladder. The l adder by wh ich th e de-

ceased ascended into h eaven .

24.i t c h e b a u i Two fingers . The fingers wh ich th e

god extended to the deceased to

enable h im t o enter h eaven .

malt Feat h er . What is straight , right, truth,

law .

2 kheper Beetle . The type of t he self-begot ten

god, th e creato r of t h e gods and

of h eaven, and earth , and all t h at

th erein is ; and th e symbol of th e

resurrectio n .

25 .



THE MAGIC OF THE BOOK OF THE DEAD . CLXV

Finally, ment io n must be made here of t he great

import ance att ached by th e Egypti ans t o t h e know-

ledge of t h e names of go ds, supernatural beings, etc . ,

and it seems t h at th e deceased wh o was ignorant of

th em must h ave fared badly in th e underworld . Thus

in Chapter I B (see p . 24) it is said that th e deceased

knowet h Osiris and h is names ; in Chapter XCIX (see

p . 158) th e deceased is obliged to tell th e names o f

every portio n of t h e boat wherein h e wish es to cross

th e great river in th e underworld ; in Chapter CXXV

( p . 19o) A nubis makes h im declare th e names of t h e

two leaves of t h e doo r of t he Hall of Osiris before he

will let h im in, and even th e bolt s, and bol t-so ckets,

and linte ls, and planks will not allo w him to enter

unti l th e deceased h as satisfi ed th em th at h e knows

th eir names . Entrance into th e seven A rit s o r man-

sions (see p . 240) could not be obt ained with out a

knowledge of t h e names o f t h e doorkeeper, watch er,

and herald wh o belo nged to each ; and similarly, th e

pylons of th e domains o f Osiris (see p . 243 f .) could

not be passed through by the deceased without a

declarati on by h im o f t h e name of each . The i dea

underlying all such s tatements is th at th e man who

knows th e name o f a god could invo ke and obtain h elp

from h im by calling upon h im, and that th e ho stilit y

of a fiend coul d be successfully o pposed by th e re-

petiti on of hi s name . The knowledge of the names

of fiends and demons constit uted th e chief power of

th e magicians o f o lden times, and th e amulets o f



C LXV I INTRODUCTION .

th e Gnost ics which were inscribed with numbers of

names of supernatural powers are th e practical ex-

pression of th e b e l i e f i n th e efficacy of th e know-

ledge of names which existed i n Egypt from time

immemo rial .



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS OF THE

BOOK OF THE DEAD .

Though the Chapters of the Book of th e Dead re-

present beliefs belonging to various periods of the

long life of the Egyptian nation, and opinions held

by several schools of though t in Egypt, t he object

o f t h e m a l l w a s t o b e n e f i t t h e d e c e a s e d . They were

intended to give him the power to have and to en-

j o y l i f e e v e r l a s t i n g , t o g i v e h i m e v e r y t h i n g w h i c h h e

r e q u i r e d i n t h e l i f e b e y o n d t h e g r a v e , t o e n s u r e - h i s

v i c t o r y o v e r h i s f o e s , t o p r o c u r e f o r h i m t h e p o w e r o f

going whithersoever he pleased and when and how h e

p l e a s e d , t o p r e s e r v e t h e m u m m y i n t a c t , a n d f i n a l l y t o

e n a b l e h i s s o u l t o e n t e r i n t o t h e b a r k o f Ra o r i n t o

whatever abode of the blessed had been conceived of

by him . A p e r u s a l o f t h e t r a n s l a t i o n s o f t h e C h a p t e r s

w i l l s h e w t h e r e a d e r w h a t t h e i r c o n t e n t s a r e , b u t i t

w i l l n o t b e o u t o f p l a c e h e r e t o g r o u p c e r t a i n C h a p -

t e r s w h i c h h a v e a c o m m o n o b j e c t , f o r t h e v a r i o u s b e -

liefs which th ey represent then become more clear .

A certain number of the Chapters of the Book of

th e Dead are hymns which are addressed eith er to



C L X V I I I INTRODUCTION.

R d o r t o O s i r i s . I n t h e p r e s e n t w o r k t h e s e a r e r e p r e -

sented by th e hymns from t he papyri of Ani, Qenna,

Hu-nefer, and Nekht (see pp . 3-I2), which I have

called "Hymns Introductory", and to t hese we should

add Chapters CLXXXII and CLXXXIII, which are re-

ally hymns to Osiris by Thot h . A n o t h e r c o l l e c t i o n o f

fine hymns is found in Chapter XV, where we have

hymns to Rd and Osiris, and a Litany to Osiris ; t h e

P a p y r u s o f A n i , f r o m w h i c h t h e s e a r e t r a n s l a t e d , g i v e s

th e oldest and most complete form of th e Chapter .

T h e y a r e m o s t i m p o r t a n t , f o r t h e y e n a b l e u s t o u n d e r -

stand what attributes were ascribed to Ra, and it

s e e m s a s i f m a n y o f t h e m w e r e , i n l a t e r t i m e s , t r a n s -

f e r r e d t o O s i r i s , w h o w a s o r i g i n a l l y n o t h i n g b u t a g o d

of t he dead .

With th ese hymns sh ould be mentioned th e texts

which accompany th e judgment Scene, but th ese have

a l r e a d y b e e n d e s c r i b e d i n t h e c h a p t e r o n t h a t s u b j e c t

g i v e n a b o v e , a n d t h e y a r e f u l l y t r a n s l a t e d o n p p . 12

-15 . The Judgment Scene also leads us to th e con-

s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e C X X V t h C h a p t e r , w h i c h i s c e r t a i n l y

o n e o f t h e m o s t i m p o r t a n t a n d i n t e r e s t i n g i n t h e w h o l e

book . I t c o n s i s t s o f t h r e e p a r t s : - - I n t r o d u c t i o n , N e -

gative Confession, and Concluding Text . T h e I n t r o -

duction was said by the deceased at t he entrance to

th e Hall of double Maati, th e Negative Confession

was recited by him before th e forty-two gods who

sat in judgment upon him in this Hall, and the Con-

cluding Text was uttered by him when he h ad passed



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC . CLXIX

th e ordeal of judgment and was beginning his new

l i f e . It is probable th at t hese th ree texts were origin-

al l y m e re l y ve rs i ons each o f t h e o t h e r, b ut in t h e

eigh teenth dynast y th ey are all copied to geth er into

papyri . The deceased first asserted th at h e h ad not

commi tt ed certain sins ; h e next addressed fo rty-two

go ds by th eir names and declared befo re each th at

h e h ad not committ ed th e special sin which it was

t h e duty of t h e g od t o punis h ; and last ly h e makes

a th ird confession, th e first part of which is practically

in th e same words as a port ion of th e Intro duction .

Th e Intro ductio n provided th e passwo rds whi ch en-

abled h im t o enter t h e Hall, and th e Concluding Text

provided th ose which enabled h im to go fo rth from

i t . It is imposs ible to say when or h ow th is beautiful

Chapter with it s lof ty conceptio ns of mo ralit y grew,

but, alth ough th e form in which th ese are set fo rth

is not o lder th an th e eigh teenth dynasty, th e ideas

th emselves belong to a perio d which is as ol d as

th e rule of t h e kings of t h e th ird dynasty . From t h e

Negative Confession we see that t h e pious Egyptian

abh orred fraud, t h eft , deceit , robbery with violence,

iniqui ty o f every kind, adult ery, unchasti ty and sins

of wanto nness, manslaugh ter, murder, incitem ent t o

murder, and that he delighted in shewing he had

wronged none in any way . He neith er purloined th e

th ings which belonged to h is go d, nor did he slay

t h e sacred animals ; he th ought not light ly of th e god

of h is city, and he never cursed hi m . He honoured



C LXX INTRODUCTION.

his king, and he neith er wasted h is neighbo ur's plough-

ed lands nor defiled his running st ream . He spake not

haughtily, h e behaved not insolently, h e multiplied not

h is speech overmuch , h e abused no man, h e attacked

no man, h e swore not at all, h e stirred not up strife, h e

terrified no man, h e was not a man of wrath , h e spake

evil o f none, and he never pried into matt ers to make

mischief. He judged not h astily, h e defrauded not h is

neighbo ur in th e market, h e shut not hi s ears to t h e

words of righ t and truth , he so ught not ho nours, he

never gave way t o anger except fo r a proper cause,

and h e sough t not t o enrich h imself at th e expense

of h is neighbo urs . It is difficult to give th e exact

sh ades of meaning of many of th e words in th is Con-

fessio n, but t h e general sense is th orough ly well made

out ; th e Egyptian code of mo rals, as may be seen

from th e CXXVth Chapter, was th e grandest and most

comprehensive of th ose now known to h ave exist ed

among th e natio ns of antiq uity .

The CXth Chapter, which describes th e employments

and enjo yments of th e deceased in th e Sekhet -het ep

and Sekh et -Aaru, or Elysian Fi elds, contains ideas of

th e greatest antiquity, wh ich date, probably, from t h e

tim e when the syst em of village communiti es was in

vogue in Egypt. Th e de ce as ed pl o ug h s , s o ws , and

reaps, and lives exactl y t h e same kind of life as a

farmer would live in th e fertil e lands of t h e Delt a,

and it would seem th at h e enjoys all t h e pleasures

whi ch a h uman being enjo ys upon earth . In th e Vth



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC CLXXI

Chapter of th e Boo k of t h e Dead th e deceased fo und

a text which would free him from certain agricultural

labours wh ich h ad to be done in th e Elysian fields,

but i nasmuch as th e work of watering and to p-dress-

ing th e fields and so wing th e cro ps had to be done

by some o ne, figures, made in th e form o f t h e de-

ceased and inscribed with h is name, were buried wit h

th e dead to to il for him . Such figures h ave oft en in

th eir hands mo dels of th e basket in whi ch th e field

labourer carried eart h and th e h oe with which he

f i l l e d i t ; and the t ext o f th e VI th Chapter, which

was also inscribed upon th em, pro vided th e deceased

with substitutes to to il for him in th e farms of the

gods .

Th e reader will s eek, and seek in . vain, f or many

of t h e att ributes of t h e prayers of Christian nati ons,

and it is a not iceable fact t h at th e Egyptian had no

conception of repentance ; at th e judgment which t oo k

place in th e Hall o f Osiris h e based his claim fo r ad-

missi on into th e kingdom of t h at go d upon th e fact

th at he h ad not comm it ted certain sins, and th at h e

h ad feared God and ho noured th e king, and had given

bread to th e hungry, drink to t he t h irsty, cloth es to

th e naked, and a boat t o h im t h at h ad suffered ship-

wreck on th e Nile . His belief in th e efficacy of works

was great, and, wh en h e h ad any do ubt about t h eir

power to deliver h im finally from t h e ho st s of dark-

ness, h e prot ected h imself by means of amulets , in-

scribed or plain, and fig ures o f g ods painted upon



C L X X I I INTR OD UCTION .

his coffin and papyrus, or cut in woo d or on stones

which possessed magical powers . The Chapters which

refer to such amulets are Nos . XIII, XIX, XXX B,

LXXXIX, C, CXXV, CXXX, CXXXIII, CXXXIV,

CXXXVIA , CXXXVIIA , CXL, CXLIV, CLVI, CLVII,

CLVIII, CLIX, CLXII, CLXIII, CLXIV, CLXV, and

CLXVI .

O n e o f t h e m o s t i n t e r e s t i n g C h a p t e r s i n t h e w h o l e

b o o k i s t h e X V I I t h , w h i c h c o n t a i n s a s e r i e s o f s t a t e -

m e n t s c o n c e r n i n g t h e o r i g i n o f t h e g o d s a n d t h e t h i n g s

o f t h e n e x t w o r l d . To many of th ese statements more

t h a n o n e e x p l a n a t i o n o f t h e i r m e a n i n g i s a p p e n d e d , a n d

as these occur in copies of th e Chapter which are

f o u n d i n s c r i b e d u p o n c o f f i n s o f t h e e l e v e n t h d y n a s t y ,

it is clear that already at th at early date several

opinions on th ese matt ers existed . The views ex-

p r e s s e d i n t h e C h a p t e r a p p e a r t o b e t h o s e o f t h e a n -

cient College of Priests at Heliopolis which became

gradually adopted throughout Egypt . The Vignettes

which accompany the Chapter in th e best illuminated

papyri are most elaborate, and they shew by their

attention to detail that it formed one of th e most

important of th e texts of this class which were co-

p i e d f o r g e n e r a l u s e .

The LXIVth Chapter was very high ly esteemed,

a n d i t w a s b e l i e v e d t o b e o n e o f t h e o l d e s t p a r t s o f

th e Book of th e Dead. Already in th e eleventh dy-

nasty it existed in two versions, one of which was

t h o u g h t t o h a v e b e e n c o m p o s e d o r e d i t e d i n t h e f i r s t



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC . C L X X I I I

d y n a s t y , and th e other in the fourth dynasty . Th e

longer version is entitled simply "The Chapter of

Coming Forth by Day in the underworld", but th e

sh orter is described as "The Chapter of knowing th e

`Chapters of Coming Forth by Day' in a single Chap-

t e r " . W h e t h e r w e a r e t o u n d e r s t a n d b y t h e l a t t e r t i t l e

that th e Chapter contained the essence of all th e

Chapters of the Book of th e Dead and that the de-

ceased who was provided with it was as well pro-

t e c t e d a s i f h e h a d c o p i e s o f t h e m a l l , i s n o t q u i t e

c l e a r , b u t i t s e e m s p r o b a b l e . I t w i l l b e n o t i c e d t h a t

several Ch apters are called "Chapters of Coming

Fo rth by Day", and among th em may be specially

n o t i c e d : - C h a p t e r s I I a n d I I I , w h i c h p r o v i d e t h a t t h e

deceased may come forth in th e underworld and "live

after he h ath died, even as dot h Ra day by day" ;

Chapter LXV, wh ich provides th at th e Khu of th e

d e c e a s e d s h a l l l i v e a n d s h a l l i n f l i c t b l o w s u p o n h i s

enemy ; Chapter LXVI, which gives t h e deceased

power to "alight upon the forehead of Ra" ; Chapter

LXVIII, wh ich gives h im mastery over everyth ing

w h i c h i s i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d , a n d e n a b l e s h i m t o j o u r -

ney about among the living ; Chapters LXIX, LXX,

a n d L X X I , w h e r e i n h e i d e n t i f i e s h i m s e l f w i t h O s i r i s ,

Sah (Orion), A nubis, Horus, and Tem, and declares

his power over the winds of heaven ; Chapter LXXII,

which enables him to "come forth by day in all th e

forms which h e pleaseth to take" and to enter into

an abode in the Elysian Fields, where he shall be



C L X X I V INTRODUCTION

amply provided with wheat and barley ; and Chapter

CLXXX, which enables him to go about in the under-

world with freedom of movement and to perform all

t h e t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s o f a " l i v i n g s o u l " .

An important group of Chapters referring to the

transfo rmati ons which a man may undergo , if h e

p l e a s e s , i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d , i s i n t r o d u c e d b y C h a p t e r

LXXVI, wherein th e deceased declares that he has

been led unto th e "House of th e King" by the man-

t e s , o r s o - c a l l e d " p r a y i n g i n s e c t " . T h e s e C h a p t e r s e n -

able him to transform himself into a hawk of gold

(Chap . L X X V I I ) , i n t o a d i v i n e h a w k ( C h a p . L X X V I I I ) ,

into th e Governor of the divine sovereign princes

(Chap . L X X I X ) , i n t o t h e g o d w h o g i v e t h l i g h t i n t h e

d a r k n e s s ( C h a p . L X X X ) , i n t o a l o t u s ( C h a p s . LXXXI A

and LXXXI B ) , into th e god Ptah and into a living

being in Annu (Chap . L X X X I I ) , i n t o a Bennu ( p h o e -

n i x ? ) ( C h a p . L X X X I I I ) , i n t o a h e r o n ( C h a p . LXXXIV),

i n t o a l i v i n g s o u l ( C h a p . L X X X V ) , i n t o a s w a l l o w ( C h a p .

L X X X V I ) , i n t o t h e s e r p e n t S a t a ( C h a p . LXXXVII), and

i n t o a c r o c o d i l e ( C h a p . LXXXVIII) .

A considerable number of Ch apters refer, as we

should naturally expect, to th e preservation of the

body of th e deceased in th e tomb, and several were

e x p r e s s l y w r i t t e n t o g i v e h i m p o w e r t o r e s i s t t h e a t -

t a c k s o f e n e m i e s , a n d t o o b t a i n m e a t , a n d d r i n k , a n d

th e power of motion in the underworld. Thus Chap-

ter I, which is proved by its title and Vignette to

refer to th e ceremonies which took place on the day



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC . CLXXV

o f t h e f u n e r a l , p r o v i d e s f o r t h e b u r i a l o f t h e b o d y i n

t h e p r o p e r w a y s o t h a t " t h e d e c e a s e d m a y g o i n a f t e r

c o m i n g f o r t h " ; a n d C h a p t e r s V I I I , I X , X I , X I I , X I I I ,

XLVIII, LXVII, CVII, CXVIII, CXIX, CXXII, CLXI,

and CLXXX enable h im t o make his way in th eay

underworld without let or h indrance and to overcome

h i s e n e m i e s . The deceased wished to prot ect himself

b y m e a n s o f m a g i c a l f o r m u l a e;Chapter XXIV provides

th ese formulae for him, and Chapter XXXII gives him

the power to keep hold of them . Chapters XXI and

XXII give th e deceased a mouth , and Chapter XXIII

provides him with th e power of opening it ; Chapter

XXV gave him th e faculty o f remembering h is

name . Seven Ch apters (XXVI-XXX B) gave h im a

heart, and provided him with prayers and formulae,

which prevented th ose who sto le hearts from snatch-

ing it away from h im and from driving it away from

h im when it was weighed in th e judgment Hall of

O s i r i s . The crocodile, which came to steal away th e

words of power and protection which t he deceased

had with him, was repulsed by the words of Chapter

XXXI. Chapt ers XXXIII, XXXIV, XXXV, XXXVI,

XXXVII, and XXXIX prevented him from being st ung

or bitten by snakes and serpents, and did away with

t h e p o w e r o f t h e b e e t l e ( ? ) aj5shait to gnaw his body

t o p i e c e s . Chapters XXXVIII A and XXXVI II B e n -

abled him to escape from th e deadly cobra, and

Chapter XL delivered h im from th e power of th e

serpent who, t hough he is here acting as th e friend



C L X X V I INTRODUCTION .

of Horus by devouring th e Ass which t ypifies th e

f i e n d S e t , i s , n e v e r t h e l e s s , t o b e f e a r e d . I n t h e u n d e r -

w o r l d a n d t h e c i t i e s t h e r e o f p u n i s h m e n t w a s i n f l i c t e d

on the dead, and to provide the favoured of Osiris

with power to escape from stripes, and wounds, and

d e c a p i t a t i o n a t t h e d e a d l y b l o c k C h a p t e r s X L I , X L I I ,

XLIII, and L were composed . The deceased wish ed

f o r a s e a t i n t h e c e l e s t i a l A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , a n d t h i s

was given him by Chapter LXXV, and Chapter XLVII

prevented his t hrone and his habitation from being

removed by any hostile being . He sighed to have

power over running water and to snuff t h e sweet

breath of t he north wind, and th ese comforts were

secured for him by Chapters LIV, LV, LVI, LVII,

LVIII, LIX, LX, LXI, and LXII ; th e large number

of Chapters written for th is purpose will shew how

g r e a t w a s t h e a n x i e t y o f t h e E g y p t i a n i n t h i s m a t t e r .

As fire and boiling water existed in th e underworld

he hastened to protect himself from burns or scalds

by th e use of Chapters LXIII A and LXIII B . Proper

f o o d w a s a s n e c e s s a r y t o t h e k a o r d o u b l e o f t h e d e -

c e a s e d a s f r e s h a i r a n d w a t e r , a n d t o e n s u r e i t a g a i n s t

t h e n e e d t o e a t f i l t h a n d t o d r i n k d i r t y w a t e r C h a p -

ters LII, LIII, CV, CX, CXLVIII and CLXXXIX were

composed ; t h e i d e a o f t h e ka being obliged to wan-

der about starving and in search of food was so ab-

horrent to t he pious Egyptian th at every text which

c o u l d i n a n y w i s e h e l p t o s e c u r e s u f f i c i e n t m e a t a n d

drink for it was gladly copied over and over again .





C L X X V I I I INTRODUCTION.

posed . T h e t y p e o f t h i s c h a m b e r w a s , o f c o u r s e , t h e

t o m b o f O s i r i s . The Hall of Osiris wherein the go d

dwelt with his princes could only be reached after

c e r t a i n d o o r s , a n d m a n s i o n s , a n d d o m a i n s , w h i c h w e r e

g u a r d e d b y p o r t e r s i n t h e f o r m o f m o n s t e r s , h a d b e e n

s u c c e s s f u l l y . p a s s e d t h r o u g h b y t h e d e c e a s e d ; t o e n -

able th e deceased to go th rough t he seven mansions,

and the twenty-one pylons, and th e fifteen domains,

Ch apters CXLIV-CXLVII, CXLIX, and CL were

w r i t t e n . These provided the deceased with th e names

of t he beings who were in charge of t he doo rs, and

supplied him with th e speeches which it was neces-

sary that h e sh ould make . D u r i n g h i s j o u r n e y i n t h e

underworld th e deceased came to a huge river which

h e w a s o b l i g e d t o c r o s s ; t o e n a b l e h i m t o e m b a r k i n

th e mystical boat, every portion of which possessed

a name which h e was bound to know and be able to

r e p e a t , h e p r o v i d e d h i m s e l f w i t h C h a p t e r s X C V I I I a n d

XCIX. B u t t h i s b o a t o n l y s e r v e d t o t a k e h i m a c r o s s

t h e r i v e r , a n d h e l o n g e d t o b e a b l e t o e m b a r k i n t h e

B o a t o f R d , a n d t o s i t i n i t s b o w s a n d t o s a i l a b o u t

with t he god for ever ; t h i s d e l i g h t , h o w e v e r , c o u l d

only be secured for him by means of Chapters C, CI,

CII, CXXXIV, CXXXVIA , and CXXXVI B , and, as a

r e s u l t , c o p i e s o f m o s t o f t h e s e C h a p t e r s e x i s t i n n e a r -

l y a l l l a r g e p a p y r i . The Egyptian believed th at h e

would encounter th e foes who attacked Osiris in the

underworld, and th at th e calamities which befel th e

go d would come upon hi m also ; he who delivered



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC . CLXXIX

O s i r i s o u t o f a l l h i s t r o u b l e s w a s T h o t h , t h e s c r i b e

of th e gods, and to h im were addressed Chapters

XVIII and XX, wh ich secured for th e deceased

th e protection and triumph which this god had se-

c u r e d f o r " h i s b r o t h e r O s i r i s " . The favour of Thoth

was so necessary th at four Chapters (XCIV, XCV,

XCVI, XCVII) were written to instruct the deceased

to make an offering of a palette and an ink-jar to

th e god, and how to become nigh unto h im . B e f o r e

th e deceased could roam at will in the underworld

it was necessary that he should know the deities of

t h e c h i e f c i t i e s o f t h e f o u r q u a r t e r s o f t h e l a n d w h e r e -

in he was ; Chapters CVII and CVIII enabled him to

k n o w t h e " s o u l s o f A m e n t e t " , ( 1 . e . , o f t h e W e s t ) , C h a p -

t e r C I X e n a b l e d h i m t o k n o w t h e " s o u l s o f t h e E a s t " ,

Chapter CXII enabled him to know th e "souls of the

c i t y o f P e " [ i n t h e n o r t h ] , C h a p t e r C X I I I e n a b l e d h i m

to know the "souls of th e city of Nekhen" [in the

south ], Chapter CXV enabled him to know the "souls

of A nnu", and Chapters CXIV and CXVI enabled him

to know the "souls of the city of Kh emennu" (Hermo-

p o l i s ) . I n t h e u n d e r w o r l d t h e d e c e a s e d w a s t h r e a t e n e d

by th e danger of t he snarer or fowler and his net,

and Chapters CLIIIA and CLIMB were written to en-

able him t o escape from t hem . Two Chapters, CLXIX

and CLXX, provided for th e stablishing of t he fune-

ral bed of t he deceased ; two Chapters, CLXVIII A

and CLXVIII B, s e t o u t a t l e n g t h t h e l i b a t i o n s w h i c h

i t w a s n e c e s s a r y f o r h i m t o p o u r o u t ; Chapter CXXIII

1 *



C LXXX INTRODUCTION . .

gave him power to enter the "Great House" ; Chap-

t ers CXXVI, CXXVII, CXXVIII, CLXXXV, and

CLXXXVI supplied him with th e prayers which had

to be said to the holy apes, and to the gods who

were th e leaders and guides in th e underworld, and

to Osiris and Hathor ; Chapter CXXXII enabled h im

to go back to see his house ; Chapter CLII gave h im

power to build a house upon earth ; Chapter CLXXI

p r o v i d e d h i m w i t h t h e g i r d l e o f p u r i t y ; C h a p t e r s C I I I ,

CXXIV, CXXXI, and CLXXXI gave h im po wer to

g o i n b e f o r e t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s o f O s i r i s a n d

to be nigh unto Ra ; Chapter CIV gave h im a seat

among th e "great gods" ; and Ch apter CLXXXIV

b r o u g h t h i m " n i g h u n t o O s i r i s " . Chapter CXXX, which

"made perfect th e Khu", was ordered to be recited

on th e birthday of Osiris ; Chapter CXXXIII made

th e Khu perfect before the Great Company of th e

gods ; Chapter CXXXV, which was to be recited on

th e day of th e new moon, gave th e deceased power

to become like unto Thot h ; Chapter CXL, which was

to be recited on th e last day of the sixth month of

t h ; Egyptian year, enabled him to appear in glory

before all th e gods when th e u t c h a t , or Eye of Rd,

w a s f u l l ; and Chapter CLXVII conferred upon h im

th e power which th e utchat possessed and enabled

h i m t o i d e n t i f y h i m s e l f w i t h i t . Ch apters CXLI and

CXLII provided th e texts which a man was directed

to recite "for his father or for his son during the

festival of A mentet", t hey made the deceased to be



THE OBJECT AND CONTENTS, ETC . CLXXXI

p e r f e c t w i t h Rd and w i t h t h e gods ; and Chapter

CLXXIII contained th e addresses which Horus made

t o h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s , a n d w h i c h w e r e a l s o a s s u m e d t o

be made to t he deceased by Horus . Chapter CLXXII

i s a r e m a r k a b l e a n d b e a u t i f u l c o m p o s i t i o n i n n i n e s e c -

tions, th e contents o f which were first made known

in detail by M . N a v i l l e ; i n i t t h e l i m b s o f t h e d e -

c e a s e d a r e d e s c r i b e d i n h i g h l y p o e t i c a l l a n g u a g e , a n d

t h e c o m p a r i s o n s a t t i m e s r e s e m b l e t h e d e s c r i p t i o n s o f

th e limbs of the beloved one in th e Song of Solo-

mon . Fo ur Chapters, CLXII, CLXIII, CLXIV, and

CLXV, have no equivalents in th e Recensions of t he

Book of the Dead older th an th e twenty-sixt h dy-

n a s t y , a n d a s t h e y c o n t a i n f o r e i g n w o r d s a n d f o r e i g n

ideas they are probably th e work of non-Egyptian

a u t h o r s ; each of t hem is followed by a long Rubric

which orders certain curious amulets to be made and

th e performance of ceremonies . In Chapters CLXXIV,

CLXXVII, and CLXXVIII we h ave ext racts from th e

old Heliopolitan Recension of t he Book of t he Dead

w h i c h w a s i n u s e i n t h e f i f t h a n d s i x t h d y n a s t i e s , a n d

t h e c o m p a r i s o n o f t h e t e x t s , w h i c h , t h a n k s t o M . M a s -

pero, we are now able to make, is very instructive .

We can see how misunderstandings o f t he meaning

of certain passages arose t hrough th e want of ade-

quate determinatives, and we can note how later co-

p y i s t s m o d i f i e d a n d a d a p t e d o l d t e x t s t o s u i t m o d e r n

views . Thus in the passage from the text of Un is

( 1 . 1 6 6 f f . , s e e i s f r a , p. 329 we have a reference to



C LXXXI I INTRODUCTION .

th e lo ve-making ` of th e deceased wh ich i s entirely

omi tt ed from t h e later copy of it g iven in the Papy-

rus of Nebseni ; and it seems as if t h e ideas express-

ed in it fo und no f avour with th e cultured mind of

Nebseni, t h e great desig ner, draugh ts man, and ar-

tist, who was attached to the Temple of Ptah at

Memphis . In a similar manner it will be not iced th at

mos t of th e coarse expressions and ideas wh ich are

found in the religio us books o f th e old period have

no co unterparts in th e Theban Recensio n of th e Boo k

of t h e Dead .

It will be seen from t h e above brief summary th at,

alth ough th e contents of t h e papyri containing th e

Theban Recensio n are mis cellaneous , t h ere are refer-

ences to o th er works connected with th e burial of

th e dead from wh ich no ex tracts are given . Among

such may be specially menti oned th e text s whi ch are

connected with th e performance of t h e ceremony of

"Opening the mouth" (see i ) f r a , p . 7 0 ) , but as it is

impos sible t o g ive any adequate descriptio n of t h em

in th e space now left to me, I refer th e reader to

my Papyrus o f A i l * , p . 2 6 5 f f .

i . M . M a s p e r o ' s r e n d e r i n g o f t h e p a s s a g e ( s e e L e s I n s c r i p t i o n s d e s

P y r a n i d e s d e S a g g a r a h , p . z i ) runs :- "0 Ra, sois bon pour lui en ce

j o u r d e s h i e r ; c a r O u n a s a c o n n u l a d e e s s e M a o u i t , O u n a s a r e s p i r e l a

f l a m m e d ' I s i . O u n a s s ' e s t u n i a u l o t u s , O u n a s a c o n n u u n e j e u n e f e m m e ,

m a i s s a f o r c e m a n q u a i t d e g r a i n s e t d e l i q u e u r s r e c o n f o r t a n t e s : l o r s q u e

l a f o r c e d ' O u n a s a a t t a q u e l a j e u n e f e m m e , e l l e a d o n n e d u p a i n a Ou-

n a s , p u i s e l l e l u i a s e r v i d e f e m m e e n c e j o u r . "



THE BOOK OF THE DEAL) OF NESI-

KHONSU, A PRIESTESS OF AMEN,

ABOUT B . C . iooo . 1

" T h i s h o l y g o d , t h e l o r d o f a l l t h e g o d s , A m e n - R d ,

"the lord of the throne of the two lands, th e go-

vernor of Apt ; th e ho ly soul who came into being

" i n t h e b e g i n n i n g ; th e great god who liveth by ( o r

"upon) Maat ; t h e f i r s t d i v i n e m a t t e r w h i c h g a v e b i r t h

"unto subsequent divine matt er ; 2 th e being th rough

"whom every [o th er] god hath existence ; th e One

"One who h ath made everyth ing which h ath come

"into existence since primeval times when th e world

" w a s c r e a t e d ; t h e b e i n g w h o s e b i r t h s a r e h i d d e n , w h o s e

"evolutions are manifold, and whose growths are un-

known ; t h e h o l y F o r m , b e l o v e d , t e r r i b l e , a n d m i g h t y

" i n h i s r i s i n g s ; th e lord of wealth , th e power, Khe-

" p e r a w h o c r e a t e t h e v e r y e v o l u t i o n o f h i s e x i s t e n c e ,

r . A h i e r o g l y p h i c t r a n s c r i p t o f t h e h i e r a t i c t e x t o f t h i s r e m a r k a b l e

document, t ogeth er with a French translatio n, has been publish ed by

Maspero in Les A fomz 'es Royales de Ddir-el-bahari, p . 594 f .

z . Or, "th e primeval Paul which gave birth unto th e [ot her] two

paul/i . "



C L X X X I V INTRODUCTION

"except whom at the beginning none ot her existed ;

"who at t he dawn in the primeval time was A tennu,

" t h e p r i n c e o f r a y s a n d b e a m s o f l i g h t ; who having

"made himself [to be seen caused] all men to live ;

" w h o s a i l e t h o v e r t h e c e l e s t i a l r e g i o n s a n d f a i l e t h n o t ,

"for at dawn on th e morrow his ordinances are made

"permanent ; who t hough an old man shineth in th e

"form of one that is young, and having brough t ( o r

" l e d ) t h e u t t e r m o s t p a r t s o f e t e r n i t y g o e t h r o u n d a b o u t

" t h e c e l e s t i a l r e g i o n s a n d j o u r n e y e t h t h r o u g h t h e T u a t

" t o i l l u m i n e t h e t w o l a n d s w h i c h h e h a t h c r e a t e d ; t h e

"God who acteth as God, wh o mo ulded himself, who

" m a d e t h e h e a v e n s a n d t h e e a r t h b y h i s w i l l ( o r h e a r t ) ;

" t h e g r e a t e s t o f t h e g r e a t , t h e m i g h t i e s t o f t h e m i g h t y ,

" t h e p r i n c e w h o i s m i g h t i e r t h a n t h e g o d s , t h e y o u n g

" B u l l w i t h s h a r p h o r n s , t h e p r o t e c t o r o f t h e t w o l a n d s

"in his migh ty name of `The everlasting one wh o

"cometh and hath his might, who bringeth th e re-

motest limit of eternity', th e god-prince who h ath

" b e e n p r i n c e f r o m t h e t i m e t h a t h e c a m e i n t o b e i n g ,

"th e conqueror of th e two lands by reason of h is

" m i g h t , t h e t e r r i b l e o n e o f t h e d o u b l e d i v i n e f a c e ,

"th e divine aged one, the divine form who dwelleth

"in th e forms of all the gods, the Lion-god with

"awesome eye, the sovereign who casteth forth th e

" t w o E y e s , t h e l o r d o f f l a m e [ w h i c h g o e t h ] a g a i n s t h i s

° e n e m i e s ; th e god Nu, the prince who advanceth at

" h i s h o u r t o v i v i f y t h a t w h i c h c o m e t h f o r t h u p o n h i s

" p o t t e r ' s w h e e l , t h e d i s k o f t h e M o o n - g o d w h o o p e n e t h



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD OF NESI-KHONSU . CLXXXV

`"a way both in heaven and upon earth for th y beau-

t i f u l f o r m ; t h e b e n e f i c e n t ( o r operative) god, who

"is untiring, and who is vigorous of heart both in

`rising and in setting, from whose divine eyes come

"fo rth men and women ; a t w h o s e u t t e r a n c e t h e g o d s

"come into being, and food is created, and t c l z e f a u

"food is made, and all things which are come into

"being ; th e traverser of eternity, the old man who

" m a k e t h h i m s e l f y o u n g [ a g a i n ] , w i t h m y r i a d s o f p a i r s

"of eyes and numberless pairs of ears, who se ligh t

"is th e guide of t he god of millions of years ; t h e

"lord of life, who giveth unto whom he pleaseth

" t h e c i r c u i t o f t h e e a r t h a l o n g w i t h t h e s e a t o f h i s

"divine face, who set tet h out upon his journey and

"suffereth no mishap by th e way, who se work none

" c a n d e s t r o y ; t h e l o r d o f d e l i g h t w h o s e n a m e i s s w e e t

"and belo ved, at dawn mankind make supplication

"unto him t he Mighty one of victory, the Mighty one

" o f t w o f o l d s t r e n g t h , t h e P o s s e s s o r o f f e a r , t h e y o u n g

"Bull who maketh an end of t he ho stile ones, th e

"Mighty one who doeth battle with his foes, through

"who se divine plans the earth came into being ; t h e

" S o u l w h o g i v e t h l i g h t f r o m h i s t w o U t c h a t s ( E y e s ) ;

"the god Baiti who created the divine transforma-

t i o n s ; th e ho ly one who is unknown ; th e king who

"maketh kings to rule, and who girdeth up the earth

C ' i n i t s c o u r s e s , a n d t o w h o s e s o u l s t h e g o d s a n d t h e

"goddesses pay ho mage by reason of t h e migh t o f

" h i s t e r r o r ; since he h ath gone before th at which



C L X X X V I INTRODUCTION

" " f o l l o w e t h e n d u r e t h ; t h e c r e a t o r o f t h e w o r l d b y h i s

" s e c r e t c o u n s e l s; th e god Khepera who is unknown

"and wh o i s mo re hidden th an the [o th er] gods,

" w h o s e s u b s t i t u t e i s t h e d i v i n e D i s k ; th e unknown

" o n e w h o h i d e t h h i m s e l f f r o m t h a t w h i c h c o m e t h f o r t h

"from him ; h e i s t h e f l a m e w h i c h s e n d e t h f o r t h r a y s

"of ligh t with migh ty splendour, but th ough h e can

"be seen in form and observation can be made of h im

"at h is appearance yet h e cannot be understood, and

"at dawn mankind make supplication unto him ; h i s

"risings are of crystal among th e company of th e

"gods, and he is th e beloved object of every god ;

"th e god Nu cometh forward with th e north wind in

" t h i s g o d w h o i s h i d d e n ; w h o m a k e t h d e c r e e s f o r m i l -

" l i o n s o f d o u b l e m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s , w h o s e o r d i n a n c e s

"are fixed and are not destroyed, whose utterances

" a r e g r a c i o u s , a n d w h o s e s t a t u t e s f a i l n o t i n h i s a p -

p o i n t e d t i m e ; w h o g i v e t h d u r a t i o n o f l i f e a n d d o u b l e t h

" t h e y e a r s o f t h o s e u n t o w h o m h e b a t h a f a v o u r ; wh o

"graciously protecteth h im whom h e bath set in his

" h e a r t ; w h o b a t h f o r m e d e t e r n i t y a n d e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s ,

" t h e k i n g o f t h e S o u t h a n d o f t h e N o r t h , A m e n - R a , t h e

" k i n g o f t h e g o d s , t h e l o r d o f h e a v e n a n d o f e a r t h ,

" a n d o f t h e d e e p , a n d o f t h e t w o m o u n t a i n s , i n w h o s e

"form the earth began to exist, h e th e mighty one,

"who is more distinguished th an all th e gods of th e

"first and foremost company . "

A m e n - R a , t h e k i n g o f t h e g o d s , t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e

beginning of what bath come into being, bath sent



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD OF NF_SI-KHONSU . CLXXXVII

f o r t h h i s g r e a t a n d h o l y e d i c t f o r t h e d e i f i c a t i o n o f

Nesi-Khonsu, the daugh ter of Ta-hennu-Tehuti, both

i n A m e n t e t a n d i n N e t e r - k h e r tn d h e s a i t h : -

"I deify Nesi-Khonsu, the daughter of Ta-hennu-

"Tehuti in Amentet, and I deify her in Neter-khert ;

" I h a v e g r a n t e d t h a t s h e s h a l l r e c e i v e w a t e r i n A m e n -

" t e t a n d f u n e r a l o f f e r i n g s i n N e t e r - k h e r t . I d e i f y h e r

" s o u l a n d h e r b o d y i n N e t e r - k h e r t , a n d I w i l l n o t l e t

" h e r s o u l b e d e s t r o y e d t h e r e i n ; n a y , I d e i f y h e r s o u l

" i n N e t e r - k h e r t , [ a n d I m a k e i t ] l i k e u n t o t h a t o f e v e r y

" g o d a n d o f e v e r y g o d d e s s w h o h a v e b e e n d e i f i e d t h e r e -

" i n , a n d l i k e u n t o t h a t o f e v e r y t h i n g w h a t s o e v e r w h i c h

" h a t h b e e n d e i f i e d i n N e t e r - k h e r t . I h a v e g r a n t e d t h a t

"every god, and every goddess, and every divine

" b e i n g , a n d e v e r y t h i n g w h i c h h a t h b e e n d e i f i e d s h a l l

° r e c e i v e h e r i n N e t e r - k h e r t ; a n d I h a v e g r a n t e d t h a t

" a l l h e r k i n s f o l k ( ? ) s h a l l r e c e i v e h e r t h e r e i n w i t h a

" g r a c i o u s r e c e p t i o n ; and I have granted that every

"good th ing, which cometh into being with a man

"when he assumeth th is form, wheth er he be carried

"off into th e underworld, or whet h er he become

`deified, or wheth er every good thing be wrought

"for h im where he is, o r wheth er he made to re-

ceive water and offerings, or whether he be made

"to receive his cakes from t h ose which t hose who

" h a v e b e e n d e i f i e d r e c e i v e , o r w h e t h e r h e b e m a d e t o

` ° r e c e i v e h i s d i v i n e o f f e r i n g s f r o m t h o s e w h i c h t h o s e

" w h o h a v e b e e n d e i f i e d r e c e i v e , s h a l l b e d o n e f o r h e r

" s o t h a t i t s h a l l b e w i t h h e r . "



C L X X X V I I I INTRODUCTION .


prince of t hat which hath come into being from th e

b e g i n n i n g , s a i t h :-

"I cause Nesi -Khonsu, th e daughter of Ta - h e n -

" T e h u t i - a , t o m a k e e v e r y k i n d o f f o o d a n d e v e r y k i n d

"of drink which every god and every goddess who

"have been deified in th e underworld make ; a n d I

"cause her to make every good th ing which is with

"every god and every go ddess who have been dei-

f i e d i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d ; and by means th ereof I have

"delivered my servant Pa - netchem from every evil

" t h i n g , a n d I w i l l n o t l e t a n y o f t h e c a l a m i t i e s w h i c h

"occur in the underworld fall upon Nesi-Khonsu to

"do her harm ; and I grant that her soul may come

" f o r t h , a n d t h a t i t m a y e n t e r i n a c c o r d i n g t o i t s d e -

"sire and never be repulsed . "




"I h ave go ne round (z . e . , I have examined) th e

"heart of Nesi-Khonsu, th e daugh ter of Ta -hen-Te-

" h u t i - a , a n d s h e h a t h d o n e n o e v i l t h i n g a g a i n s t P a -

""netchem, th e son of Auset-em-khebit . I h a v e c a r e -

" f u l l y e x a m i n e d h e r h e a r t , a n d I h a v e n o t l e t h e r a t -

" t a c k h i s l i f e , a n d I h a v e n o t a l l o w e d h e r t o a t t a c k

` h i s l i f e t h r o u g h o t h e r f o l k . I h a v e c a r e f u l l y e x a m i n -

ed her heart, and I have not let h er do any evil

"th ing unto him such as is done against a living

"man . I h a v e c a r e f u l l y e x a m i n e d h e r h e a r t , a n d I h a v e





CXC INTRODUCTION .

"the son of A uset-em-khebit . I have caused her not

"to seek any evil th ing, or any noxious th ing which

"would induce death, or any harmful th ing like unto

" t h o s e t h i n g s w h i c h m a k e t h e h e a r t o f m a n t o t r e m b l e ,

"or th ose wh ich do h arm unto th e men and women

"who were beloved by Pa-netchem, nor unto him by

"making his h eart terrified at th em by means of the

"evil words which have been directed against th em

"(t h e men and women) . I h ave caused all t hat con-

"cerneth th e heart and soul of Nesi-Khonsu to be in

"good case, that is to say, her heart hath not been

"driven away from her soul ; h e r s o u l h a t h n o t b e e n

"driven away from h er heart ; her heart hath not

"been driven away from h erself ; Nesi-Khonsu her-

self h ath not been in any way driven back with th e

`repulse with which a being in her form-th at is to

"say a being who hath been deified in th e under-

world, whatever its nature may be-is sometimes

" r e p u l s e d ; and no evil th ing whatsoever, such as

"may be done unto th e h uman being wh o i s in a

" s t a t e l i k e u n t o h e r s , h a t h b e e n d o n e u n t o h e r . N a y ,

" b u t [ I h a v e g i v e n ] a l l t h a t c o u l d d e l i g h t N e s i - K h o n s u ,

" n a m e l y , t h a t P a - n e t c h e m m i g h t e n j o y a v e r y l o n g l i f e

" a l o n g w i t h m i g h t , a n d s t r e n g t h , a n d p o w e r ; t h a t h i s

" l i f e m i g h t n o t b e c u t s h o r t ; t h a t n o e v i l t h i n g o f a n y

"kind whatsoever, and none of the th ings which do

"harm unto a man and strike terror into his h eart

" m i g h t c o m e n i g h h i m , o r h i s w i v e s , o r h i s c h i l d r e n ,

" o r h i s b r e t h r e n , o r A t a u i , o r N e s t a - neb - A s h e r , o r



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD OF NESI-KHONSU . CXCI

" M a s a h a i r t h a , o r T c h a u i - n e f e r , t h e c h i l d r e n o f N e s i -

"Kho nsu, or th e breth ren of Nesi -Kho nsu . A nd I

"have caused that everyth ing which would be of ad-

vantage to Pa-netch em, and all t hat would be of

"benefit to him in any way whatsoever and which

"could happen to a man in his condition, and an ex-

c e e d i n g l y l o n g l i f e f o r h i m s e l f , a n d h i s w i v e s , a n d h i s

"children, and his breth ren, may also come to Nesi-

" K h o n s u , a n d t o h e r c h i l d r e n , a n d t o h e r s i s t e r s . "


prince of t hat which h ath come into being from th e

b e g i n n i n g , s a i t h"I grant t hat all th ings, of whatever kinds th ey

"may be, which a man hath when he is in the state

"in which Nesi-Khonsu i s , a n d b y w h i c h h e i s d e i f i e d ,

" s h a l l b e p o s s e s s e d b y h e r , a n d I g r a n t t h a t t h e s e v e n -

ty addresses to Ra may be recited in my name, so

"that her soul may not be destroyed in the under-

"world . "

Amen-Rd, th e king of the gods, the great god, th e


b e g i n n i n g , s a i t h : -

"Every good word which can deify Nesi-Khonsu,

" w h i c h w i l l g i v e h e r p o w e r t o r e c e i v e w a t e r a n d o f f e r -

i n g s , a n d w h i c h s h a l l b e u t t e r e d o r s a i d b e f o r e m e b y

" a n y p e r s o n w h a t s o e v e r I w i l l f u l f i l t o t h e u t t e r m o s t ,

" o m i t t i n g n o t h i n g . Every go od word. w h i c h s h a l l b e

"uttered before me on behalf of Nesi-Khonsu I will

"fulfil at every season of t h e h eavens wh en Sh u



C X C I I INTRODUCTION

"cometh forth , in such wise that none of th e evil

"things which can reach a person who is in the con-

d i t i o n i n w h i c h s h e i s s h a l l t o u c h h e r a t a n y s e a s o n o f

"th e heavens, when Shu cometh forth from th e waters

" w i t h h i s w e a p o n s a n d w h e n d a y b e g i n n e t h i n t h e s k y .

"And I will utterly do away with th e evil effect of

"every word whi ch may be spoken by any person

"whatsoever of a being who is in th e state in which

" i s N e s i - K h o n s u , o m i t t i n g n o t h i n g , a t e v e r y s e a s o n o f

"th e heavens when Shu cometh forth from th e waters

" w i t h h i s w e a p o n s a n d w h e n d a y b e g i n n e t h i n t h e s k y . "

A m e n - R d , t h e k i n g o f t h e g o d s , t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e

prince of that which h ath come, into being from th e


"I have caused the seventy addresses t o Rd to be

"recited in my name, and I have not allowed any

"single benefit which belongeth to a man who is in

" t h e c o n d i t i o n i n w h i c h i s N e s i - K h o n s u t o e s c a p e h e r .

"And I have caused her to receive offerings, bread,

"and ale, and unguents, and wine, and pomade, and

" m i l k , a n d r a i s i n s ( ? ) ; and I have caused her to re-

c e i v e a l l t h e b e n e f i t s a n d a l l t h e g o o d t h i n g s w h i c h

" " a b e i n g w h o i s i n h e r c o n d i t i o n a n d w h o i s f a v o u r -

ed by me and who hath been deified can receive ;

"and I have caused her to share equally with every

"god and every goddess every goo d th ing whatsoever

" w h i c h t h o s e w h o h a v e b e e n d e i f i e d i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d

" r e c e i v e ; a n d I h a v e c a u s e d h e r t o r e c e i v e h e r d i v i n e

" o f f e r i n g s a l o n g w i t h t h e g o d s . "





CXCIV INTRODUCTION .

"A s c o n c e r n i n g a l l good t h i n g s which have been

" s p o k e n i n m y p r e s e n c e , t h a t i s t o s a y , ` P e r f o r m t h e m

" f o r P a - n e t c h e m , t h e s o n o f A u s e t - e m - k h e b i t , m y s e r -

vant, and for his wives, and his children, and his

"breth ren, and his friends, and for th ose for whom

" h i s h e a r t i s a f r a i d l e s t e v i l c o m e u p o n t h e m ' : b e -

" h o l d , I w i l l s e n d f o r t h m y g r e a t a n d m i g h t y a n d h o l y

"word into every place that it may cause every good

" t h i n g t o b e w i t h P a - n e t c h e m , a n d h i s w i v e s , a n d h i s

" c h i l d r e n , a n d h i s b r e t h r e n , a n d a l l h i s f r i e n d s , i n s u c h

" w i s e t h a t i f a n y m a n s h a l l o m i t t o s a y , ` L e t t h e d e -

cree of A men-Ra, the king of the gods, th e great

"god, the prince of that which hath come into be-

i n g f r o m t h e b e g i n n i n g , b e p e r f o r m e d , ' I m y s e l f w i l l

"make that which t he great god hath spoken to come

" t o p a s s . "





C X C V I INTRODUCTION .

" H a i l , [ O s i r i s ] K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , t h o u

" e n t e r e s t t h e T u a t ( a . e . , underworld) ( 7 ) a s o n e m i g h t y

" i n p u r i t y . Thou art purified by th e two Maat god-

d e s s e s i n t h e G r e a t H a l l . A libation hath been made

" f o r t h e e i n t h e H a l l o f S e b , a n d t h y b o d y h a t h b e e n

"made pure (8) in th e Hall o f Shu . Thou lookest

°upon Ra when he settet h as Tem at eventide . Amen

" i s n i g h u n t o t h e e t o g i v e t h e e a i r , ( q ) a n d P t a h l i k e -

wise to mould into form th y members, thou enterest

"th e horizon along with Ra . T h e y r e c e i v e t h y s o u l i n

"th e Neshem boat of Osiris, (io) they make thy soul

"divine in the House of Seb, and th ey make th ee to

"be triumphant for ever and for ever . "

"[Hail] Osiris Kerasher, th e son of Tash enatit,

"(i i) th y name is made to endure, th - v m a t e r i a l

"body is stablish ed, and th y spiritual body is made

" t o g e r m i n a t e ; t h o u a r t t u r n e d b a c k n e i t h e r i n h e a -

ven nor upon earth . Thy face shineth before ( I 2 )

"Ra, th y soul liveth before A men, and th y material

"body is renewed before Osiris . T h o u b r e a t h e s t f o r

"ever and for ever, th y soul maketh offerings unto

" t h e e ( i 3 ) o f c a k e s , a n d a l e , a n d b e a s t s , a n d f e a t h e r e d

"fo wl, and cool water in th e course of each day ;

" t h o u c o m e s t , a n d i t i s t r i u m p h a n t . T h e f l e s h i s u p o n

" t h y b o n e s , ( 1 4 ) a n d t h y f o r m i s e v e n a s i t w a s u p o n

" e a r t h . T h o u t a k e s t d r i n k i n t o t h y b o d y , t h o u e a t e s t

" w i t h t h y m o u t h , a n d t h o u r e c e i v e s t b r e a d a l o n g w i t h

"th e souls (i5) of th e gods . The go d Anubis pro-

"tecteth th ee, and he maketh himself th y protector ;





C X C V I I I INTRODUCTION

" t h y t o n g u e . H o r u s t h e a v e n g e r o f h i s f a t h e r p r o t e c t e t h

" t h y b o d y , h e m a k e t h t h y s o u l t o b e d i v i n e l i k e t h o s e

" o f a l l t h e g o d s . I I . (1) T h e g o d R a v i v i f i e t h t h y s o u l ,

"and th e soul of Shu uniteth th e passages of t hy

" n o s t ri l s . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , (2) t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t ,

" t h y s o u l d r a w e t h i t s b r e a t h i n t h e p l a c e w h i c h t h o u

" l o v e s t. T h o u a r t e v e n a s O s i r i s . O s i r i s t h e G o v e r n o r

" o f t h o s e i n A m e n t e t i s t h y n a m e . ( 3 ) T h e w a t e r f l o o d

< " o f t h e p r i n c e c o m e t h u n t o t h e e f r o m A b u ( E l e p h a n -

" t i n e ) , a n d i t f i l l e t h t h y t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s w i t h t c h u f a u

" f o o d . "

" [ H a i l ] O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , ( 4 ) t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t ,

"the gods of th e South and of the North come unto

"th ee, and th ou art led by th em to th e ends of t he

" c o u n t r i e s o f ( 5 ) m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s . T h v s o u l l i v e t h ,

" t h o u a r t i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f O s i r i s , a n d t h o u d r a w -

" e s t t h y b r e a t h i n R e - s t a u ; t h e s t r e n g t h w h i c h p r o -

" t e c t e t h t h e e ( 6 ) i s h i d d e n i n t h e l o r d o f S e t e t a n d

" [ i n ] th e great god . Thy material body liveth in

" T a t t u [ a n d i n ] N i f - u r t e t , a n d t h y s o u l l i v e t h i n h e a -

ven (7) each day . "

" [ H a i l ] O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , t h e

"goddess Sekhet hath gained th e mastery over what

" i s b a l e f u l t o t h e e , H e r u - a a - ( 8 ) a b u p r o t e c t e t h t h e e ,

"Heru-sesh et-hra maketh th y heart, and Heru-maati

" p r o t e c t e t h t h y b o d y " , o r a s o t h e r s s a y , ( 9 ) " t h y t o n g u e .

" T h o u a r t s t a b l i s h e d w i t h l i f e , a n d s t r e n g t h , a n d h e a l t h ,

"and thou art firmly seated upon thy th rone in Ta-



THE BOOK OF BREATHINGS . CXCIX

" t c h e s e r t e t . Come then, Osiris Kerasher ( i o ) , t h e s o n

" o f T a s h e n a t i t , t h o u r i s e s t i n t h y f o r m , t h o u a r t a r -

rayed in th ine ornaments, th ou hast firm ho ld upon

" l i f e , t h o u p a s s e s t t h y d a y s ( i i ) i n h e a l t h , t h o u j o u r -

"neyest h ither and th ither, and th ou drawest t hy

"breath in every place whatsoever . Ra riseth upon

" t h i n e a b o d e e v e n a s O s i r i s ; t h o u d r a w e s t t h y b r e a t h ,

" ( 1 2 ) and th ou livest t hrough h is rays . A men-Ra-

" H e r u - k h u t i v i v i f i e t h t h y ka ( 1 . e . , double), and he

"maketh thee to flourish by means of the Boox, OF

"BREATHINGS . Tho u (13) a r t i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f O s i r i s -

"Horus, th e lord of t he I l e n n u Boat ; t h o u a r t l i k e

"th e great god at t he head of t he gods . Thy face

"liveth , 0 th ou whose birth s are lovely ; th y name

" ( 1 4 ) b l o s s o m e t h e a c h d a y . Tho u goest into t he most

"migh ty and divine Hall in Tattu ; tho u seest h im

"th at is head of th ose in Amentet during th e Uka

" f e s t i v a l . T h e o d o u r o f t h e e ( r 5 ) i s s w e e t a s t h a t o f

"the venerable ones [t herein], and thy name is mag-

n i f i e d l i k e t h o s e o f t h e d i v i n e s p i r i t u a l b o d i e s . "

" H a i l , O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f ( i 6 ) T a s h e n a t i t ,

" t h y s o u l l i v e t h t h r o u g h t h e B o o x OF BREATHINGS, t h o u

" a r t u n i t e d t h r o u g h t h e B o o x OF BREATHINGS, ( 1 7 ) t h o u

"enterest into th e Tuat and hast no enemy th erein .

"Thou art as a living soul in Tattu and th ou h ast

"th ine heart, which h ath not departed from th ee .

"Thou hast (18) th ine eyes, and they open daily . "

T h e g o d s w h o a r e i n t h e t r a i n o f O s i r i s s p e a k u n t o

O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , ( i g ) s a y i n g :-



C C INTRODU CTION .

"Thou followest Ra and thou followest Osiris, and

" t h y s o u l d o t h l i v e f o r e v e r a n d e v e r . "

The go ds who dwell in th e Tuat ( 2 0 ) o f O s i r i s , t h e

G o v e r n o r o f t h o s e i n A m e n t e t , s p e a k u n t o O s i r i s K e r -

a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , s a y i n g :-

"Th e gates of t h e Tuat are opened unto h im,

" ( 2 1 ) l e t h i m s h e w h i m s e l f i n N e t e r - k h e r t e t . V e r i l y ,

" h i s s o u l s h a l l l i v e f o r e v e r , h e s h a l l b u i l d h a b i t a t i o n s

" f o r h i m s e l f i n (22) Neter-khertet, th e god th ereof

" s h a l l s h e w f a v o u r u n t o h i s k a , a n d h e s h a l l r e c e i v e

" t h e BooK of BREATHINGS, a n d v e r i l y h e s h a l l ( 2 3 )

"draw his breath . "

"May Osiris, the Governor of th ose in Amentet,

"the great god, the lord of A bydos, grant a royal

" o b l a t i o n ; m a y h e g i v e o f f e r i n g s o f c a k e s , ( 2 4 ) and

"ale, and oxen, and wine, and I z g e t d r i n k , a n d b r e a d ,

"and I c l e e f a i t f o o d , a n d a l l b e a u t i f u l t h i n g s t o t h e ka

" o f O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , ( 2 .5 ) t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t . Th y

"soul dot h live, and th y material body doth germi-

nate by t h e command of Ra h imself ; t h o u s h a l t

" n e v e r p e r i s h a n d t h o u s h a l t n e v e r s u f f e r d i m i n u t i o n ,

" I I I . ( I ) [ b u t s h a l t b e ] l i k e R d f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . "

"Hail, Usekh-nemtet, who comest forth from Annu,

" t h e O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f ( 2 ) T a s h e n a t i t , h a t h

"not committed sin . "

" H a i l , U r - a t , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m K h e r - a b a , t h e

" O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , ( 3 ) h a t h n o t

"done deeds of violence . "



THE BOOK OF BREATHINGS . CCI

" H a i l , F e n t i , ( q ) w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m K h e m e n n u ,

" t h e O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , ( 5 ) b a t h

"not committed slaughter ( ? ) .

"Hail, Amam-maat, who comest forth from the two

" Q e r t i , t h e O s i r i s K e r a s h e r ( 6 ) , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t ,

"bath not plundered th e possessions of the dead .

"Hail, Neha - hra, (7) who comest forth from Re-

" s t a u , t h e O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , ( 8 )

" b a t h n o t i n f l i c t e d i n j u r y .

"Hail, Rereti, who comest forth from heaven, th e

" O s i r i s ( 9 ) K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t , b a t h n o t

"committed sins of . . . . o f t h e h e a r t .

" H a i l , i \ - I a a t i - e m - k h e t , ( i o ) w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m

" S e k h e m , t h e O s i r i s K e r a s h e r , t h e s o n o f T a s h e n a t i t ,

" ( i i ) b a t h n o t m a d e r e v o l t .

"Hail, ye gods who are in the Tuat, hearken ye

"unto th e voice of Osiris Kerasher, th e (112) son of

"Tashenatit , and let him come before you, for there

"is neither any evil whatsoever, nor any sin what-

soever (13) with him, and no accuser can stand [be-

" f o r e h i m ] . He liveth upon Maat, h e feedeth upon

I'Maat, and he bath satisfied (i4) the heart o f th e

"gods by all th at h e bath done . He bath given food

" t o t h e h u n g r y , a n d w a t e r t o t h e t h i r s t y , a n d c l o t h e s

1 1 (15) to th e naked. He bath made offerings to t he

"gods, and to th e E l z z t s , and no (16) report what-

soever bath been made against h im before th e gods .

"O come, let him enter th e Tuat and not be repuls-

m**



C C I I INTRODUCTION .

"ed ; ( 1 7 ) c o m e , l e t h i m f o l l o w O s i r i s w i t h t h e g o d s

" o f t h e Q e r l i . Let h im be a favoured being among

" t h e f a v o u r e d o n e s , ( 1 8 ) and let h im be divine among

" t h e p e r f e c t o n e s . C o m e , l e t h i m l i v e , c o m e , l e t h i s

" s o u l l i v e . L e t h i s s o u l ( 1 g ) be received in whatever

" p l a c e i t p l e a s e t h , a n d l e t h i m r e c e i v e t h e BooK of

"BREATHINGS. (20) Come, let him draw breath with

" h i s s o u l i n t h e T u a t , a n d l e t h i m p e r f o r m ( 2 1 ) w h a t -

s o e v e r t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s h e w i l l a l o n g w i t h t h o s e w h o

"are in Amentet . Come, let his soul go into every

" p l a c e w h e r e i t w o u l d b e , a n d l e t i t l i v e u p o n e a r t h

" f o r e v e r , a n d f o r e v e r , a n d f o r e v e r . "



A BOOK OF THE DEAD OF THE

ROMAN PERIOD . '

(From British Museum Papyrus No . 1 0 , 1 1 2 ) .

" H a i l , Hathor Takhert-p-uru-abt, triumphant, born

" o f T h e n t - n u b t , t r i u m p h a n t . T h y s o u l l i v e t h i n h e a v e n

"before Rd, gifts are made unto th y ka b e f o r e t h e

" g o d s , t h y s p i r i t u a l b o d y i s g l o r i o u s a m o n g t h e K h u s ,

"th y name is stablished upon earth before Seb, and

"thy body shall endure permanently in the Neter-

"khert (underworld oY g r a v e ) . Thy house is in the

"possessio n of t h y children and th y h usband who

"weep as t h ey follow th ee wh en th ou goest about

" t h e r e i n w i t h t h y c h i l d r e n ; and th ey are rewarded

"for what th ey have done for thy ka . [Th ey have

"given th ee] good and perfect burial, and th ey make

" o f f e r i n g s t o t h y ka at the west of Thebes in th e

" s i g h t o f t h e f o l k o f t h y c i t y a n d o f t h e L a d y o f t h e

"Temples . The beautiful A mentet stretchet h out h er

"hands to receive thee according to t he decree of

i . See Birch, P. S. B. A . , Vol . V I I . , p. 4 9 ; and Lieblein, Que man

n o n z f d e u r z s s e , p . i .



C C I V INTRODUCTION.

"th e Lady of A bydos . T h y t o m b s h a l l n e v e r b e o v e r -

" t h r o w n , t h y s w a t h i n g s s h a l l n e v e r b e t o r n i n p i e c e s ,

"and thy body shall never be mutilated . Th e god

"Anubis hath received thee in the land of t he Hall

"of Double Maat, and he hath made th ee to be one

" o f t h o s e f a v o u r e d a n d p e r f e c t b e i n g s w h o a r e i n t h e

"following of Seker. Thy soul flieth up on high to

" m e e t t h e s o u l o f t h e g o d s , a n d i t h o v e r e t h a l s o o v e r

"thy dead body which is in Akert . Thou journeyest

" a b o u t u p o n t h e e a r t h , t h o u s e e s t a l l t h a t a r e t h e r e -

i n , t h o u o b s e r v e s t a l l t h e a f f a i r s o f t h y h o u s e , a n d

"th ou eatest bread, there having been performed by

"th ee transformations which are like unto th ose o f

"Baba . Thou goest t o t he city of Nif-urtet at t he

" f e s t i v a l o f t h e a l t a r s o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e f e s t i v a l o f

"six, and at th e festival of A nep . Thou goest into

" t h e c i t y o f N i f - u r t e t a t t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e l i t t l e h e a t ,

" a n d t h e f e s t i v a l o f l i f t i n g u p t h e s k y . Th ou goest

" i n t o t h e c i t y o f T a t t u o n t h e f e s t i v a l o f K a - h r a - k a ,

"on th e day when th e Tet is set up . The breath of

" t h e w i n d h a t h m a d e t h y t h r o a t t o b r e a t h e w i t h K h e n s u

"and Shu, th e migh ty one, in Thebes ; a n d t h o u h a s t

" a b u n d a n t o f f e r i n g s f o r t h y ka every tenth day with

"the living image of Rd in Thebes . T h y l i f e i s f o r

" e v e r a n d e v e r , a n d t h y s o v e r e i g n t y i s f o r e v e r , a n d

"thou shalt endure for an endless number of periods

" o f t w i c e s i x t y y e a r s . "



THE BOOK OF THE DEAD .

TRANSLATION .



HYMNS INTRODUCTORY TO THE BOOK OFTHE DEAD, THE JUDGMENT, ETC .

Hymn to Ra when he riseth .

[ F r o m t h e Papyrus of A n i (Brit. Mus . No . 10,470, s h e e t t ) . ]

Vignett e : The scribe Ani standing, with hands raised in adoration,

b e f o r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s c o n s i s t i n g o f h a u n c h e s o f b e e f , l o a v e s o f b r e a d ,

a n d c a k e s , v a s e s o f w i n e a n d o i l , f r u i t s , a n d f l o w e r s . H e w e a r s a f r i n g e d

l i n e n g a r m e n t a n d h a s a w i g , n e c k l a c e , b r a c e l e t s , e t c . B e h i n d h i m s t a n d s

his wife Thuth u, a member of the College of A men-Ra at Thebes ; s h e i s

s i m i l a r l y r o b e d a n d h o l d s a s i s t r u m , a v i n e b r a n c h , a n d a m e n d t , or em-

b l e m o f p l e a s u r e , i n h e r h a n d s .

Text : ( r ) A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA WHEN HE RISETH IN

THE EASTERN PART OF' HEAVEN . Behold Osiris, Ani the scribe

of th e holy offerings of all the gods, (2)who saith :-

"Homage to t hee, 0 th ou who halt come as Khepera, Khepera

"th e creator of the gods . Thou risest, tho u shinest, (3) th ou mak-

"est light [ in] th y moth er [th e goddess Nut] ; th ou art crowned

`king of t he go ds . [Th v] mot her Nut doeth an act of h o-

mage unto th ee with both her h ands . (4) The land of Mann r

"receiveth th ee with satisfaction, and th e goddess M aat cm-

"braceth t hee bot h at mo rn and at eve . May he (i . e . Ra) give

"glo ry, and power, and triumph , (5) and a comi ng fort h as a

"living soul to see Heru-khuti (i . e ., Horns of th e two ho rizons)

"to t he double ( k a ) of Osiris, th e scribe A ni, victorious before

"Osiris, (6) who saith : Hail, all ye gods of th e Temple of

t . M anu ryas t h e n a m e of t h e m o u nt a i n w h e r e t h e s u n s e t i n t h e - , v e s t .

t x



4INTRODUCTORY HYMNS

"th e Soul, wh o weigh h eaven and earth in th e balance, and

"who provide sepulchral meals I in abundance . Hail, Tatunen,

"th ou One, (7) th ou Creato r of mankind and Maker of t h e

"substance of th e gods of th e south and of th e north , of th e

`west and of t h e east . 0 come and acclaim ye Ra, t h e lo rd

"of heaven, (8) th e Prince (Life, Health , Strength !), th e Creator

"of th e gods, and adore ye hi m in his beautiful form at h is

"rising in th e Atet boat . (g) They who dwell in th e heigh ts

"and th ey who dwell in th e depth s 2 worship t hee . The god

"Tho th and th e goddess M aat have writt en down [th y course] for

"th ee daily and every day. Thine enemy t h e serpent h ath been

"given over to (io ) th e fire, t he serpent-fiend Sebau hath fallen

"down h eadlong ; his arms h ave been bound in chains, and his

"legs hath Ra hacked off from h im . The children of (i i) impotent

"revolt s hall nevermore rise up . The Temple of th e Aged One 3

"keepeth festival, and the voice of th ose who rejoice is in th e

"migh ty dwelling . (12) The go ds exult when th ey see Rd as he

"riseth , and when his beams flood th e world with ligh t . The

"Majesty (13) of t h e ho ly god goeth fort h and advanceth even

"unto th e land of Manu ; he maketh brilliant the earth at h is

"birth each day : h e jo urneyeth o n to th e place wh ere he was

"yest erday . (14) 0 be th ou at peace with me, and let me beh old

"th y beauties ; 4 may I journey forth upon earth , may I smite t he

"Ass; may I crush (i5) th e serpent-fiend Sebdu ; may I destroy

"Apep in his h our ; may I see t h e A btu fish at his season, and

"the A nt f i s h [ p i l o t i n g ] ( z 6 ) t h e A nt b o a t i n i t s l a k e . May I see

"Horns acting as steersman, with th e god Thot h and the goddess

"Maat, o ne on each side of him ; may I grasp the bows of the

"(i7) S e k t e t boat, and th e stern of t he Atet boat. May he ( i . e . ,

"Ra) grant unto th e double ( I r a ) of Osiris Ani to beho ld th e disk

"of th e Sun and to see th e Mo on-god with out ceasing, each and

i . Tchefau vas th e name given to th e food upon which the gods lived .

2 . I . e . , t h e g o d s w h o l i v e i n t h e h e i g h t s a n d d e p t h s o f h e a v e n , o r c e l e s t i a l

a n d t e r r e s t r i a l b e i n g s .

3 . I. e . , th e Temple of Rd at lnnu (i . e . , O n o r H e l i o p o l i s ) .

4 . O r , " t h y b e a u t i f u l f o r m . "



TO THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY5

"every day ; and (t8) may my soul come forth and walk hit her

" a n d t h i t h e r ( r g ) a n d w h i t h e r s o e v e r i t p l e a s e t h . ( 2 0 ) May my

"name be proclaimed (21), and may it be found upon th e board

" ( 2 2 ) o f t h e t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s ; m a y o f f e r i n g s ( 2 3 ) be made unto

C l i n e i n m y p r e s e n c e , e v e n a s [ t h e y a r e m a d e u n t o ] t h e f o l l o w e r s

" ( 2 4 ) of Ho rus ; may th ere be made ready for me ( 2 5 ) a s e a t

"in the bo at o f th e Sun on th e day when ( 2 6 ) th e god goeth

" f o r t h ; and may I be received (27) i n t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f O s i r i s

" i n t h e l a n d o f v i c t o r y . "

Hymn to Ra when h e riseth .

[ F r o m t h e p a p y r u s o f Q e n na ( s e e L e e m a ns , Papyrus Egypti en, T . 2 , P l a t e 2 ) . ]

Vignette : Q e n n a a n d h i s w i f e s t a n d i n g w i t h h a nd s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n .

Text :( t )

A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA WHEN HE RISETH IN THE

EASTERN PART OF HEAVEN . B e h o l d O s i r i s , Q e n n a t h e m e r c h a n t ,

( 2 ) who saith : -

"Homage to t h ee, 0 Rd, when th ou risest [ and to t hee], 0

" " T e m u , i n t h y r i s i n g s o f b e a u t y . T h o u r i s e s t , t h o u r i s e s t , t h o u

" s h i n e s t , ( 3 ) th ou sh inest, at dawn of day . Th ou art crowned

"king of th e gods, and the goddess Shuti performeth an act of

"ho mage unto th ee . The company ( 4 ) o f t h e g o d s p r a i s e t h e e

`from th e places of sunrise and sunset . Thou passest over the

"height of heaven and thy heart is filled with gladness . The

" S e k t e t b o a t d r a w e t h o n , a n d [ R d ] a d v a n c e t h ( 5 ) i n t h e A t e t b o a t

" w i t h f a i r w i n d s . R d r e j o i c e t h , R d r e j o i c e t h . T h y f a t h e r i s N u ,

"th y mot her is Nut, 0 (6) th ou who art crowned as Ra-Heru-

" k h u t i ( R a - H a r m a c h i s ) , t h y d i v i n e b o a t a d v a n c e t h i n p e a c e . [ T h i n e

" e n e m y ] b a t h b e e n g i v e n o v e r [ t o t h e f l a m e , a n d h e ] b a t h f a l l e n ;

`his h ead bath been cut off . ( 7 ) T h e h e a r t o f t h e L a d y o f L i f e

" ( i . e . , I s i s ) i s glad [because] the foe of h er lord bath fallen

"h eadlong. The mariners of Rd have content of heart and Annu

" ( H e l i o p o l i s ) e x u l t e t h . " ( 8 )

The merchant Qenna, victorious, saith : -



6 INTRODUCTORY HYMNS

" Ihave come to t hee, 0 Lord of t he go ds, Temu-Heru-khuti

"(Temu-Harmachis) who m Maat directet h (9)know"that whereupon th ou dost live . G r a n t t h o u t h a t I m a y b e l i k e

"unto one of th ose who are thy favoured ones (io) [among] th e

" f o l l o w e r s o f t h e g r e a t g o d; may my name be proclaimed, may

" i t b e f o u n d , m a y i t b e s e t ( i i ) w i t h t h e i r [ n a m e s ? ] . T h e o a r [ s ]

"have been taken into the S e k t e t b o a t , a n d t h e b o a t o f t h e S u n

"advanceth in peace . ( I 2 ) May I see Ra when he appeareth in

"the sky at dawn and when his Enemy hath fallen at the block .

" ( 1 3 ) May I see Ho rus working th e rudder on each s ide and

" b r i n g i n g a l o n g t h e b o a t . M a y I s e e t h e Abuf i s h a t [ i t s ] t i m e o f

" ( 1 4 ) c o m i n g i n t o b e i n g ( ? ) ; m a y I s e e t h e A n t f i s h a s i t b e c o m e t h

" t h e p i l o t o f t h e A nt b o a t i n i t s w a t e r s . 0 th ou only One, 0

"th ou Perfect One, 0 th ou ( 1 5 ) w h o d o s t e n d u r e , w h o s u f f e r e s t

"never an evil mo ment, wh o cannot be smit ten down by h im

"th at doeth deeds of migh t, none oth er shall have power and

"might o ver the th ings which belong to t hee . ( r 6 ) None shall

"obtain by fraud possession of the things which belong to the

"divine fath er, who bath need of abundance, th e tongue ( ? ) o f

" v e n e r a t i o n , ( i 7 ) t h e l o r d o f A b t u ( A b y d o s ) . "

The merchant Qenna, victorious, saith : "Homage to t hee, 0

"Heru-khuti-Temu Heru (i8) Khepera, I th ou might y hawk, who

" m a k e s t g l a d t h e b o d y [ o f m a n ] , t h o u b e a u t i f u l o f f a c e b y r e a s o n

"of th y two great plumes! A wake, (ig) 0 lord of beauty, at

"dawn when th e company of t h e gods and mortals say unto

" t h e e , ` H a i l ! ' T h e y (20) s i n g h y m n s o f p r a i s e u n t o t h e e a t e v e n -

" t i d e , a n d t h e s t a r r y d e i t i e s a l s o a d o r e t h e e . 0 t h o u f i r s t b o r n ,

" w h o d o s t l i e m o t i o n l e s s . . . . ( 2 1 ) ; t h y m o t h e r s h e w e t h l o v i n g -

" k i n d n e s s u n t o t h e e d a i l y . R a l i v e t h a n d t h e s e r p e n t - f i e n d N a k

" i s d e a d ; t h o u a r t i n g o o d c a s e , f o r t h i n e e n e m y (22) h a t h f a l l e n

"h eadlong . T h o u s a i l e s t o v e r h e a v e n w i t h l i f e a n d s t r e n g t h . The

"goddess Nehebka is in th e A t e t b o a t , a n d t h y b o a t r e j o i c e t h ;

" ( 2 3 ) t h y h e a r t i s g l a d , a n d t h e t w o u r a e i g o d d e s s e s r i s e u p o n

"th y brow"

i . I . e ., Harmachis-Tem-Horus-Khepera .



TO THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 7

Hymn to Ra when h e riseth .

[From t he Papyrus of Qenna (sec Leemans, Papyrus E g y p t i e n , T . 2 , P l a t e 4 ) . ]

Vignett e : Q e n n a a n d h i s w i f e s t a n d i n g with h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n .

Text : (t) A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA WHEN HE RISETH IN THE

EASTERN PART OF HEAVEN . Behold Osiris, Qenna the merchant,

triumphant, (2) who saith :-

"Homage to t hee, 0 th ou who risest in Nu, and who at t hy mani-

festation dost make the world bright with ligh t ; t he whole com-

pany of g ods sing hymns of praise unto th ee after th ou h ast come

" f o r t h . (3) The divine Merti r who minister unto t hee cherish th ee

"as King of th e North and South , th ou beautiful and beloved

"Man-child . When t h ou risest , men and women live . ( q . ) The

"natio ns rejo ice in thee, and the Souls of Annu (Heliopolis) sing

"unto th ee songs o f jo y . (5) The souls of the cities of Pe and

"Nekhen exalt t hee, th e apes of dawn adore th ee, and (6) all beasts

"and cattle praise t h ee with one accord . The goddess Seba over-

"th roweth th ine enemies, therefore rejoice th ou within (7) th y

"boat ; th y mariners are content t hereat . Tho u hast attained unto

"th e At et boat, and th y heart swelleth with j oy . 0 lord of th e

"gods, when th ou didst create (8) them t hey ascribed unto th ee

" p r a i s e s . The azure go ddess Nut doth compass th ee on every side,

"and the god Nu (g) floodeth th ee with h is rays of ligh t . 0 cast

"th ou th y light upon me and let me see th y beauties, me th e Osiris

" ( t o ) Qenna the m erchant, victorious, and when th ou go est fo rth

"over the earth I will sing praises unto th y fair face . Thou risest

"in heaven's h orizon, (i i) and [th y] disk is adored [when] it

"resteth upon th e mountain to give life unto th e world . "

Saith Qenna th e merchant, victorious : ( 1 2 ) "Thou risest, tho u

"risest, and tho u comest forth from th e god Nu . Tho u dost re-

"new th y youth and th ou dost set th yself in th e place where th ou

"wart yesterday . 0 divine youth who h ast created th yself, (i3 ) I

` ' a m n o t a b l e [ t o d e s c r i b e ] t h e e . Thou h ast come with th y diadems, 2

i . See Chapter XXXVII .

2 . O r , " i n t h y r i s i n g " .



8 INTRODUCTORY HYMNS

"and thou hast made heaven and earth bright with th y rays of

" p u r e e m e r a l d l i g h t . ( i ¢ ) T h e l a n d o f P u n t i s s t a b l i s h e d [ t o g i v e ]

" t h e p e r f u m e s w h i c h t h o u s m e l l e s t w i t h t h y n o s t r i l s . T h o u r i s e s t ,

" O m a r v e l l o u s B e i n g , ' ( 1 5 ) i n h e a v e n , t h e t w o s e r p e n t - g o d d e s s e s

" M e r t i a r e s t a b l i s h e d u p o n t h y b r o w , a n d t h o u a r t t h e g i v e r o f

" l a w s , 0 l o r d o f t h e w o r l d a n d o f t h e i n h a b i t a n t s t h e r e o f ; ( 1 6 ) a l l

"the gods and Qenna th e merchant, victorious, adore thee . "

Hymn to Ra when he riset h .

[F rom th e papyrus of Hu-nefer (Brit . Mus. No . 9 , 9 o t , s h e e t i ) . ]

Text : ( e A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA WHEN HE RISETH IN

THE ( 2 ) EASTERN PART OF HEAVEN . B e h o l d O s i r i s , H u - n e f e r , ( 3 )

v i c t o r i o u s , w h o s a i t h : -

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u w h o a r t R a w h e n t h o u r i s e s t ( 4 ) a n d

"Temu when thou settest. T h o u r i s e s t , t h o u r i s e s t , t h o u s h i n e s t ,

" t h o u s h i n e s t , ( 5 ) t h o u w h o a r t c r o w n e d k i n g o f t h e g o d s . Tho u

" a r t th e l o r d o f h e a v e n , [ t h o u a rt ] t h e l o r d o f e a r t h ; [ t h o u a r t ] t h e

" c r e a t o r o f t h o s e w h o d w e l l ( 6 ) i n t h e h e i g h t s a n d o f t h o s e w h o

" d w e l l i n t h e d e p t h s . 2 [ T h o u a r t ] t h e G o d O n e w h o c a m e i n t o b e i n g

" ( 7 ) i n t h e b e g i n n i n g o f t i m e . T h o u d i d s t c r e a t e t h e e a r t h , t h o u

" d i d s t f a s h i o n m a n , ( 8 ) t h o u d i d s t m a k e t h e w a t e r y a b y s s o f t h e

" s k y , t h o u d i d s t f o r m Ha p i ( i . e . , t h e N i l e , t h o u d i d s t c r e a t e t h e w a t e r y

" a b y s s , ( g ) a n d t h ou do s t g i v e l i f e u n t o a l l t h a t t h e r e i n i s . T h o u h a s t

" k n i t t o g e t h e r t h e m o u n t a i n s , t h o u h a s t m a d e ( r o ) m a n k i n d a n d t h e

" b e a s t s o f t h e f i e l d t o c o m e i n t o b e i n g , t h o u h a s t m a d e t h e h e a v e n s

"and the earth . Worshipped be th ou who m th e goddess Maat

"embraceth at morn and at eve . T h o u d o l t t r a v e l a c r o s s t h e s k y

"with heart swelling with joy ; t h e L a k e o f T e s t e s ( ? ) ( t e b e -

" c o m e t h c o n t e n t e d t h e r e a t . T h e s e r p e n t - f i e n d N A b a t h f a l l e n a n d

" h i s t w o a r m s a r e c u t o f f . The S e k t e t b o a t r e c e i v e t h f a i r w i n d s ,

" a n d t h e h e a r t o f h i m t h a t i s i n t h e s h r i n e t h e r e o f r e j o i c e t h . Tho u

t . O r , " B e i n g o f i r o n . "

2 . O r , " c r e a t o r o f t h e s t a r r y g o d s i n h e a v e n a b o v e a n d o f t h e d w e l l e r s u p o n

earth belo w . "



TO THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY9

"art crowned (12) Prince of h eaven, t h ou art th e One dowered

"[with all sovereignty] who comest forth from th e sky . R a i s v i c t o -

rious! 0 thou divine youth, th ou h eir of everlastingness, th ou

"self-begott en one, 0 th ou who didst give thyself birth ! 0 One

" ( 1 3 ) , migh ty [one], of myriad forms and aspects, king of th e world,

"Prince of A nnu (Heliopoli s), lord of eternity and ruler of ever-

"lastingness,i t he company of th e gods rejoice when th ou risest and

"when tho u sailest (i4 ) across t he sky, 0 th ou who art exalted

"in the S e k t e t boat . "

"Homage to th ee, 0 Amen-Rd, who dost rest upon Maat, 2 and

"who passest over the heaven, every face seeth th ee. Tho u dost

"wax great ( 1 5 ) as th y Majesty doth advance, and th y rays are

"upon all faces . Th ou art unknown and no to ngue is worth y ( )

" t o d e c l a r e t h y l i k e n e s s ; o n l y t h o u t h y s e l f [ c a n s t d o t h i s ] . Tho u art

One, even as is he (i6) that bringeth t he tens basket. Men praise

"th ee in thy name [ R a ] , and th ey swear by th ee, for th ou art

"lo rd over th em . Thou h earest with t h ine ears and th ou seest

"wit h th ine eyes . (i7) Millions of years have gone over th e world ;

"I cannot t ell th e number of th ose th rough which th ou hast

"passed . Thy h eart h ath decreed a day of happiness in thy name

" o f ` T r a v e l l e r ' . Tho u dost pass o ver (i8) and dost t ravel th rough

"unto ld spaces [requi ring] milli ons and h undreds of t h ousands of

"years [to pass over] ; th ou passest t hrough th em in peace, and

"th ou steerest t hy way across th e watery abyss to th e place which

"th ou lovest ; this th ou doest in one (ig) little moment o f time,

"and th en th ou dost sink down and dos t m ake an end of t h e

"ho urs . "

Behold Osiris, th e governor of t he palace of th e lord of the two

lands (i . e . , S e t i I ) , H u - n e f e r , v i c t o r i o u s , s a i t h : ( 20) "Hail, my

"lord, tho u who passest th rough eternity, who se being is ever-

" l a s t i n g . Hail, th ou Disk, lord of beams of light , th ou risest and

"th ou makest all mankind to live . Grant t hou th at I may behold

"t h ee at dawn each day . "

j . Or, "who endurest th rough everlastingness . "

2 . IL e ., "t ho u who se exist ence and whose risings and settings are ordered

a n d d e f i n e d b y f i x e d , u n c h a n g i n g , a n d u n a l t e r a b l e l a w s . "



To INTRODUCTORY HYMNS

Hymn to Ra when he riseth .

[From th e Papyrus of Nekht (Brit . Mus . No .1 0 , 4 7 1 ,

s h e e t 2 1 ) . ]

Text : A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA b y N e k h t , t h e r o y a l s c r i b e ,

t h e c a p t a i n o f s o l d i e r s , w h o s a i t h : -

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u g l o r i o u s B e i n g , t h o u w h o a r t d o w e r e d

" [ wi t h a l l s o v e r e i g n t y ] . 0 Tem-Heru-khuti (Tem-Harmachis), when

" t h o u r i s e s t i n t h e h o r i z o n o f h e a v e n , a c r y o f j o y c o m e t h f o r t h

" t o t h e e f r o m t h e m o u t h o f a l l p e o p l e s . 0 t h o u b e a u t i f u l B e i n g ,

" t h o u d o s t r e n e w t h y s e l f i n t h y s e a s o n i n t h e f o r m o f t h e D i s k

"within thy mother Hathor ; t h e r e f o r e i n e v e r y p l a c e e v e r y h e a r t

" s w e l l e t h w i t h j o y a t t h y r i s i n g , f o r e v e r . The regions of the

"North and South come to th ee with h omage, and send fort h

" a c c l a m a t i o n s a t t h y r i s i n g i n t h e h o r i z o n o f h e a v e n ; t h o u i l l u -

" m i n e s t t h e t w o l a n d s w i t h r a y s o f t u r q u o i s e l i g h t . 0 Ra, th ou

" w h o a r t H e r u - k h u t i ( H a r m a c h i s ) , t h e d i v i n e m a n - c h i l d , t h e h e i r

" o f e t e r n i t y , s e l f - b e g o t t e n a n d s e l f - b o rn , k i n g o f e a r t h , p r i n c e o f

"th e Tuat,r governor of th e regions of A ukert ; 2 th ou comest

"forth from th e water, th ou hast sprung from th e god Nu, who

"cherisheth thee and ordereth thy members . 0 t h o u g o d o f l i f e ,

"th ou lord of love, all men live when thou shinest ; t h o u a r t

" c r o w n e d k i n g o f t h e g o d s . The goddess Nut doeth homage unto

" t h e e , a n d t h e g o d d e s s M a a t e m b r a c e t h t h e e a t a l l t i m e s . Tho se

"who are in th y follo wing sing unto th ee with j oy and bow

" d o w n t h e i r f o r e h e a d s t o t h e e a r t h w h e n t h e y m e e t t h e e , t h o u l o r d

"of h eaven, th ou lord of earth, th ou king of Right and Truth ,

" t h o u l o r d o f e t e r n i t y , t h o u p r i n c e o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , t h o u s o v e -

r e i g n o f a l l t h e g o d s , t h o u g o d o f l i f e , t h o u c r e a t o r o f e t e r n i t y ,

" t h o u m a k e r o f h e a v e n w h e r e i n t h o u a r t f i r m l y e s t a b l i s h e d ! Th e

"company of the gods rejoice at th y rising, th e earth is glad

"when it beholdeth th y rays ; th e peoples that have been long

"dead O c o m e f o r t h w i t h c r i e s o f j o y t o s e e t h y b e a u t i e s e v e r y

t . T h e n a m e o f a d i s t r i c t o r r e g i o n , n e i t h e r i n h e a v e n n o r u p o n e a r t h , w h e r e

th e dead dwelt, and th rough which th e sun passed during the nigh t .

2 . A name of th e underworld .



TO THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 1 1

"day . Tho u goes t f ort h each day over h eaven and earth and

"art m ade st rong each day by th y mot h er Nut . Tho u passest

"th rough the heigh ts of h eaven, thy heart swelleth with joy ; and

"th e Lake of Testes O is content th ereat . Th e Serpent-fi end

"bath f allen, his arms are hewn off , th e knife h ath cut asunder

"his jo ints . Rd liveth in Maat I th e beautiful . The S e k t e t boat

"draweth on and comet h into port ; th e South and th e North ,

"th e West and the East turn to praise t hee, 0 th ou primeval

"subst ance of th e earth wh o didst come into bei ng of th ine own

"accord . Isis and Nephth vs salute th ee, th ey sing unto th ee songs

"of jo y at th y rising in the boat, they protect th ee with th eir

"h ands . The souls of the East follow th ee, the souls of th e

"West praise th ee, Tho u art th e ruler of all th e gods and th ou

"h ast jo y of heart with in th y shrine ; fo r th e serpent-fi end NA

"bath been condemned to th e fire, and th y heart sh all be joyful

"for ever . Thy mo th er Nut is adjudged to th y fath er Nu . "

Hymn to Osiris Un-nefer .

[From th e Papyrus o f A n i ( B r i t . Mus. No .1 0 , 4 7 0 ,

s h e e t 2 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e s c r i b e A n i s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n ,

b e f o r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s c o n s i s t i n g o f h a u n c h e s o f b e e f , l o a v e s o f b r e a d

and cakes, vases of wine and oil, fruit s and flowers, etc . He wears a

fringed linen garment and a wig, bracelet s, et c . Behind him stands his

wife Thuth u, a member of th e College of A men-Ra at Th ebes ; s h e i s

similarly robed and ho lds a sistrum, a vine branch, and a mendt i n

her hands .

Text : (i) "Glory be to Osiris U n-nefer, th e great go d with in

"A btu (Abydos), king of eternity, lo rd of t he everlasti ng, who

"passeth th rough mil lio ns of years in hi s existence . Eldest so n

"of the ( 2 ) womb o f Nut, engendered by Seb th e Erpat, 2 lord

"of t he crowns of t he North and South , lord of the lo fty white

"crown : as prince of g ods and of men (3) h e h ath received th e

"crook, and the wh ip, and the dignity o f h is divine fathers . Let

i . I . e . , " R a l i v e t h i n u n c h a n g i n g a n d e t e r n a l l a w a n d o r d e r . "

2 . 1 . e . , t h e g r e a t a n c e s t o r o f t h e t r i b e o f t h e g o d s .



1 2 THE JUDGMENT

"th y heart, which is in the mountain of A ment, be content, for

"th y son Horus is established upon th y throne . (4) Tho u art crowned

"lord of Tattu r and ruler in Abt u (A bvdos) . Thr oug h t hee t h e

"world waxet h green in (5) triumph before th e migh t o f Neb-

" e r - t c h e r . He leadeth in his t rain that wh ich is , and that whi ch

"is not yet, in his name of `Ta-her-(6)sta-nef' ; he t oweth along

"th e earth in his name of 'Seker' ; he is exceedingly mighty (7)

"and most terrible in his name 'Osiris' ; h e endureth for ever

"and for ever in his name of 'Un-nefer' . "

(8) "Homage to th ee, King of kings, Lord of lo rds, Prince of

"princes, who from th e womb of Nut h ast ruled (g) th e world

"and A kert . 2 Thy body is of brigh t and shining metal, th y head

" i s o f a z u r e b l u e , a n d t h e b r i l l i a n c e o f t h e t u r q u o i s e e n c i r c l e t h t h e e .

"0 god An of milli ons of years, (to ) all-pervading with th y body

"and beautiful in countenance in Ta-tch esert, grant thou to the

"Ka (i . e . , double) of Osiris, th e scribe Ani, splendour in heaven,

"and migh t upo n earth , and triumph i n th e underworld ; and

"grant t h at I may sail down (ii) to Tatt u like a (12) l i v i n g s o u l

"and up to (I3) A btu (Abydos) like a Bennu 3 b i r d ; and th at I

"may go in and come Out (I4 ) wit h out repulse at t h e pylons 4

"(15) of t he lo rds of t he underworld . May th ere be given unto me

"(I6) loaves of bread in th e h ouse o f coo lness, and (I7) offerings

"o f fo od in Annu (Heliopolis), and a ho mest ead (i8) for ever

"in Sekhet -Aru5 with wheat and barley th erefor . "

The Scene of t h e Weighing of th e Heart of

the Dead .

[From t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10,470, p l a t e s 3 a n d 4 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e s c r i b e A n i a n d h i s w i f e T h u t h u e n t e r t h e H a l l o f D o u b l e

M a a t , w h e r e i n t h e h e a r t , s y m b o l i c o f t h e c o n s c i e n c e , i s t o b e w e i g h e d i n

i . Two c i t i e s i n E g y p t b o r e t h e n a m e " T a t t u " , v i z . , B u s i r i s a n d M e n d e s .

2 . A name of t h e u n d e r w o r l d .

3 . Th e Bennu is c o m m o n l y i d e n t i f i e d w i t h t h e p h o e n i x .

4 . F o r t h e t w e n t y - o n e p y l o n s of t h e H o u s e of O s i r i s s e e C h a p t e r CXLV.

5 . A d i v i s i o n of t h e S e k h e t - H e t e p u o r " E l y s i a n F i e l d s " , f o r w h i c h s e e C h a p t e r C X .



THE JUDGMENT . 1 3

t h e b a l a n c e a g a i n s t t h e f e a t h e r , e m b l e m a t i c o f R i g h t a n d T r u t h . I n t h e

u p p e r r e g i s t e r a r e t h e g o d s w h o s i t i n j u d g m e n t , w h o s e n a m e s a r e " H a r -

m a c h i s , t h e g r e a t g o d i n h i s b o a t , T e m u , S h u , T e f n u t t h e l a d y o f h e a v e n ,

S e b , N u t t h e l a d y o f h e a v e n , I s i s , N e p h t h y s , H o r n s t h e g r e a t g o d , H a t h o r

th e lady of A menta, Hu and Sa" . O n t h e s t a n d a r d o f t h e s c a l e s s i t s t h e

d o g - h e a d e d a p e , t h e c o m p a n i o n o f T h o t h , t h e s c r i b e o f t h e g o d s ; a n d t h e

g o d A n u b i s , j a c k a l - h e a d e d , t e s t s t h e t o n g u e o f t h e b a l a n c e . O n t h e l e f t

o f t h e b a l a n c e , f a c i n g A n u b i s a r e :- ( t ) Ani's "Luck" ; ( 2) t h e Veskhen

or "cubit with h uman head", th ough t by some to be connected with th e

p l a c e o f b i r t h ; (3) th e goddesses Meskh enet and Renenet who presided

o v e r t h e b i r t h , b i r t h - p l a c e , a n d e a r l y e d u c a t i o n o f c h i l d r e n ; and ( . } ) t h e

s o u l o f A n i i n t h e f o r m o f a h u m a n - h e a d e d b i r d s t a n d i n g o n a p y l o n . On

t h e r i g h t o f t h e b a l a n c e , b e h i n d A n u b i s , s t a n d s T h o t h , t h e s c r i b e o f t h e

gods, who ho lds in his hands his reed-pen and palette with which to

r e c o r d t h e r e s u l t o f t h e t r i a l . Behind Tho th stands the monster called

eith er Amam, the "Devourer", or Am-mit , th e "Eater of th e Dead" .

Text : Osiris, th e scribe Ani, saith --

"My" h eart my moth er, my heart my moth er, my heart my

"coming into being . May th ere be nothing to resist me at [ my]

"j udgment ; may there be no oppositio n to me from the Tchatcha ; 2

"may th ere be no parting of th ee from me in th e presence of

"him t hat keepeth th e scales . Tho u art myKa (i . e . , double)

"with in my body [which] knitt eth to geth er and strengtheneth

"my limbs . Mayest t ho u come forth to th e place of h appiness

"t o wh ich I am advancing . May th e Shenit 3 not cause my name

"to st ink, and may no lies be spoken against me in th e presence

"of the god . Good, good is it for thee to hear"ho th , th e judge of Right and Truth of t he great company

of t he gods who are in th e presence of Osiris, saith :- "Hear

"ye th is judgment . The heart of Osiris hath in very truth been

"weighed, and his soul hath sto od as a witness for him ; it hath

"been found true by trial in the Great Balance . There hath not

"been fo und any wickedness in h im ; he bath not wasted th e

i . T h i s s p e e c h o f A n i i s a c t u a l l y C h a p t e r X XX B (q . v . ) , b u t th e l a s t l i n e h a s

b e e n o m i t t e d b y t h e s c r i b e f o r w a n t o f r o o m .

2 . 1. e . , t h e " H e a d s " o r " C h i e f s " . The Tchatcha o f O s i r i s w e re A l e s t h a ,

H a p i , T u a m a u t e f a n d Q e b h s e n n u f .

3. IL e . , d i v i n e o f f i c i a l s .



1 4THE DECEASED IS LED IN BEF ORE OSIRIS .

"offerings in th e temples ; h e h ath not done h arm by his deeds ;

"and he h ath uttered no evil reports while h e was upon earth . "

The great company of th e gods reply to Thot h who dwelleth

in Kh emennu (Hermo polis ) :- "That which cometh forth from

"th y mouth shall be declared true . O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i v i c t o r i o u s ,

"is h oly and right eous . He hath not sinned, neith er hath h e done

" e v i l a g a i n s t u s . It shall not be allowed to t he devourer Amemet

"to prevail over him . Meat-o fferings and entrance into t h e pre-

sence of t he go d Osiris sh all be granted unto him , to geth er with

"a homestead for ever in Sekhet-h etepu,r as unto t he follo wers

"of Ho rus . "

Vignett e : T h e s c r i b e A n i i s l e d b y H o r u s , t h e s o n o f I s i s , i n t o t h e p r e -

s e n c e o f O s i r i s w h o i s e n t h ro n e d w i t h i n a s h r i n e i n t h e f o r m o f a f u n e r a l

c h e s t . O s i r i s h a s u p o n h i s h e a d t h e A t e f c r o w n , a n d h e h o l d s i n h i s h a n d s

t h e c r o o k , t h e s c e p t r e a n d t h e w h i p , e m b l e m a t i c o f a u t h o r i t y , d o m i n i o n ,

a n d s o v e r e i g n t y ; f r o m h i s n e c k h a n g s t h e meni t . H i s t i t l e h e r e i s " O s i r i s ,

t h e l o r d o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s " . B e h i n d h i m s t a n d N e p h t h v s , h i s s i s t e r , o n h i s

r i g h t h a n d a n d I s i s , h i s s i s t e r a n d wi f e , o n h i s l e f t . B e f o r e h i m , s t a n d i n g

o n a l o t u s f l o w e r , a r e t h e g o d s o f t h e c a r d i n a l p o i n t s o r , a s t h e y a r e

s o m e t i m e s c a l l e d , " t h e C h i l d r e n o f E l o r u s " a n d " C h i l d r e n o f O s i r i s " . T h e

f i r s t , A l e s t h a , h a s t h e h e a d o f a m a n ; t h e s e c o n d , H a p i , t h e h e a d o f a n

ape ; t h e t h i r d , T u a m a u t e f , t h e h e a d o f a j a c k a l ; a n d t h e f o u r t h , Q e b h -

s e n n u f , t h e h e a d o f a h a w k . N e a r t h e l o t u s h a n g s t h e s k i n o f a n a n i m a l .

T h e s i d e o f t h e t h r o n e o f O s i r i s i s p a i n t e d t o r e m e m b l e t h a t o f a f u n e r a l

c h e s t . T h e r o o f o f t h e s h r i n e i s s u p p o r t e d o n p i l l a r s w i t h l o t u s c a p i t a l s ,

a n d i s s u r m o u n t e d b y a f i g u r e o f H o r u s - S e p t o r H o r u s - S e k e r , a n d b y r o w s

o f u r a c i . T h e p e d e s t a l o n w h i c h t h e s h r i n e r e s t s i s i n t h e f o r m o f t h e

h i e r o g l y p h i c w h i c h i s e m b l e m a t i c o f Maat or "Right and Truth " . B e f o r e

t h e s h r i n e i s a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s b y w h i c h , o n a r e e d m a t , k n e e l s A n i w i t h

h i s r i g h t h a n d r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n ; i n t h e l e f t h a n d l i e h o l d s t h e K h erp

s c e p t r e . H e w e a r s o n h i s h e a d a w h i t e n e d w i g a n d t h e s o - c a l l e d " c o n e " ,

t h e s i g n i f i c a t i o n o f w h i c h i s u n k n o w n .

Text : ( t ) Saith Horus the so n of Isis : "I have come to th ee,

"0 Un-nefer, and I have brought unto t hee th e Osiris A ni . His

"heart is [ found] righteous . ( 2 ) and it bath come fo rth from t he

"balance ; it bath not sinned against any god or any goddess .

"Tho th hath weighed it according t o t h e decree pronounced (3)

t . S e e C h a p t e r C X .



THE DECEA SED IN LED IS BEFORE OSIRIS .1 5

"unto hi m by th e company of t he go ds ; and it is most true

"and righ teous . Grant th at cakes and ale m ay be given unto

"him, and let h im appear in the presence of t he god Osiris ; ( 4 )

"and let h im be like unto th e fo llowers of Horns for ever and

"fo r ever . "

( I ) And Osiris A ni ( 2 ) s a i t h : "Behold, I am in th y presence,

"0 lord of (3) Amentet . There is no sin in my (4) body . I

"have not spoken that which is not true (5) knowingly, nor have

"I done aught with a false h eart . Grant th ou t h at I may be

"like unto t ho se favoured ones who are in th y foll owing, (6) and

"th at I may be an Osiris greatly favoured of t he beautiful god,

"and beloved of t h e lord of th e world . [ I] who am, indeed, a

"royal scribe who lo veth t hee, A ni, victorious before the god

"Osiris . "





CHA PTER 1 .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n t ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 10,470, s h e e t s y a n d 6 ) . ]

Vignettes : T h e f u n e r a l p r o c e s s i o n t o t h e t o m b , a n d t h e c e r e m o n y t h e r e -

a t , a r e h e r e d e p i c t e d . The mummy of the deceased, lying in a funeral

c h e s t p l a c e d i n a b o a t , i s b e i n g d r a w n a l o n g b y o x e n : f i g u r e s o f t h e g o d -

d e s s e s N e p h t h y s a n d I s i s s t a n d a t t h e h e a d a n d f o o t r e s p e c t i v e l y . By th e

s i d e k n e e l s t h e w i f e o f t h e d e c e a s e d . I n t h e f r o n t o f t h e b o a t s t a n d s t h e

Sent p r i e s t , d r e s s e d i n a p a n t h e r ' s s k i n , b u r n i n g i n c e n s e a n d s p r i n k l i n g

water, and behind follow eight male mourners ; i n t h e r e a r a r e s e r v a n t s

d r a w i n g a s m a l l f u n e r a l c h e s t s u r m o u n t e d b y a f i g u r e o f A n u b i s , a n d c a r -

r y i n g v a s e s o f u n g u e n t s a l o n g w i t h t h e c o u ch , s t a f f , c h a i r , p a l e t t e , e t c . ,

o f t h e d e c e a s e d . Preceding the oxen drawing th e funeral boat are men

c a r r y i n g o n y o k e s b o x e s o f f l o w e r s , v a s e s o f u n g u e n t s , e t c . , a n d a g r o u p

of wailing women with uncovered heads and breasts, who smite th eir

h e a d s a n d f a c e s i n t o k e n o f g r i e f . C l o s e b y s t a n d a c o w a n d h e r c a l f ,

i n t e n d e d t o b e s l a u g h t e r e d f o r t h e f u n e r a l f e a s t , a n d t a b l e s l o a d e d w i t h

o f f e r i n g s o f h e r b s , f r u i t s , e t c . At t he door of the tomb stands the god

o f t h e d e a d , A n u b i s , c l a s p i n g t h e m u m m y o f t h e d e c e a s e d , b e f o r e w h i c h

k n e e l s t h e w e e p i n g w i f e . A t a t a b l e o f f u n e r a l o f f e r i n g s s t a n d t w o p r i e s t s .

One, th e Sens p r i e s t , w e a r s a p a n t h e r ' s s k i n a n d h o l d s i n h i s h a n d a l i b a -

t i o n v a s e a n d c e n s e r ; t h e o t h e r h o l d s i n h i s r i g h t h a n d t h e i n s t r u m e n t

UR HEKA I i n t h e f o r m o f a r a m - h e a d e d s e r p e n t , t h e h e a d o f w h i c h i s

s u r m o u n t e d b y a n u r a e u s , a n d i n h i s l e f t h a n d a n i n s t r u m e n t i n t h e s h a p e

of an adze F~ . With th e former he is about to touch th e mouth and

eyes of th e mummy, and with th e latter the mouth . On th e ground, by

t h e i r s i d e , l i e t h e i n s t r um e n t s w h i c h a r e t o b e e m p l o y e d i n t h e c e r e m o n y

o f " o p e n i n g t h e m o u t h " , i . e . , t h e c e r e m o n y w h i c h w i l l g i v e t h e d e c e a s e d

t h e p o w e r t o e a t , a n d t o d r i n k , a n d t o t a l k i n t h e n e x t w o rl d , n a m e l y t h e

Meskhet u ,th e group of instruments in the form of adzes t', t he

1 . 1 . e . , t h e " m i g h t ) - o n e o f e n c h a n t m e n t s " .

2 N





THE, CIIAPTER OE ENTERING NETE'R-KHERT I_V A_VE 1'Th'T . 2 1

" h e a r t moveth not, (2o) and of the drawing the bolt of the

"door of the concealed th ings in Re-stau .2 1 am with Horns

" w h o [ a c t e t h ] ( 2 i ) a s t h e g u a r d i a n o f t h e l e f t s h o u l d e r o f O s i r i s

" i n S e k h e r n ( L e t o p o l i s ) , ( 2 2 ) a n d I g o i n a n d I c o m e f o r t h f r o m

"among th e divine flames on the day of t he destruction of the

" ( 2 3 ) Sebau fiends in Sekh em . I am with Horns on th e days

" ( 2 4 ) o f t h e f e s t i v a l s o f O s i r i s , a n d o f t h e m a k i n g o f o f f e r i n g s

" o n t h e S i x t h d a y f e s t i v a l , 3 a n d o n t h e T e n a t f e s t i v a l 4 [ w h i c h i s

" c e l e b r a t e d ] i n ( 2 5 ) A n n u . I am th e ab p r i e s t w h o p o u r e t h o u t

" l i b a t i o n s i n T a t t u [ f o r ] R e r e (?) the dweller in the Temple of

" O s i r i ss ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , [ o n t h e d a y o f ] ( 2 6 ) c a s t i n g u p t h e e a r t h .

" I s e e t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e c o n c e a l e d i n R e - s t a u , ( 2 7 ) 1 r e a d f r o m

" t h e b o o k o f t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e d i v i n e R a m 6 [ w h i c h i s ] i n T a t t u .

"I am th e S e r n p r i e s t ( 2 8 ) [ a n d I p e r f o r m ] h i s c o u r s e . I [ p e r -

"form the duties of] the Great Chief of th e Work 7 on th e day

" o f p l a c i n g t h e Hennu 8 boat (29) of th e god Seker upon its

" s l e d g e . I have grasped th e spade (3o) on th e day of digging

"the ground in Suten-henen (Heracleopolis Magna) . "

" O y e w h o m a k e p e r f e c t e d s o u l s ( 3 r ) t o e n t e r i n t o t h e T e m p l e

" o f O s i r i s , m a y y e c a u s e t h e p e r f e c t e d s o u l o f O s i r i s , t h e ( 3 2 )

" s c r i b e A n i , t o b e v i c t o r i o u s w i t h y o u i n t h e T e m p l e o f O s i r i s .

"May he hear as ye h ear ; may he see (33) as ye see ; may he

" s t a n d a s y e s t a n d ; m a y h e s i t a s y e ( 3 4 ) s i t [ t h e r e i n ] . "

" O y e w h o g i v e c a k e s a n d a l e t o p e r f e c t e d s o u l s i n t h e T e m p l e

" ( 3 5 ) o f O s i r i s , g i v e y e c a k e s a n d a l e a t t h e t w o s e a s o n s ( i . e . ,

" a t m o r n a n d a t e v e , o r s u n r i s e a n d s u n s e t ) t o t h e s o u l o f O s i r i s

" A n i , w h o i s ( 3 6 ) v i c t o r i o u s b e f o r e a l l t h e g o d s o f A b t u ( A b y d o s ) ,

"and who is victorious with you . "

1 . U r t -a b , i . e . , " S t i l l - H e a r t " , a n a m e o f O s i r i s .

2 . I L e . , th e "door of th e passages" of th e tomb .

3 . 1 . e . , t h e d a y o f t h e f e s t i v a l o f O s i r i s .

4 . I. e, the fest ival which t ook place on the seventh day of th e month .

5 . P e r - A us a r , i . e . , " H o u s e o f O s i r i s " = t h e G r e e k B u s i r i s , o r c a p i t a l o f t h e

ninth nome of Lower Egypt .

6 . I . e . , O s i r i s .

7 . T h e o f f i c i a l t i t l e o f t h e c h i e f p r i e s t o f P t a h , t h e g r e a t g o d o f M e m p h i s .

8 . The Hennu boat was placed upon its sledge and drawn round th e sanc-

tuary at dawn .



2 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

"O ye who open the way (37) and lay open th e path s to per-

"fected souls in the Temple (38) of Osiris, open ye the way

" a n d l a y o p e n t h e p a t h s ( 3 9 ) t o t h e s o u l o f O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e

" a n d s t e w a r d o f a l l t h e d i v i n e o f f e r i n g s , A n i [ w h o i s v i c t o r i o u s ]

" ( 4 0 ) with you . May he enter in confidence, and may he come

"forth in peace from the Temple of Osiris . May he not (4r)

"be rejected, may he not be turned back, may he enter in [as

" h e ] p l e a s e t h , m a y h e c o m e f o r t h [ a s h e ] ( 4 2 ) d e s i r e t h , a n d m a y

" h e b e v i c t o r i o u s . May the t h ings which h e commandeth be

"performed in th e Temple of Osiris ; may he walk (4 3) and

"may he t alk with you, and may h e become a glorious being

" a l o n g w i t h y o u . H e h a t h n o t b e e n f o u n d t o r i s e u p ( 4 4 ) t h e r e , '

"and the Balance [having weighed h im] is now empty . "

In th e Turin papyrus th is Chapter ends with th e following

l i n e s f o r w h i c h n o e q u i v a l e n t o c c u r s i n t h e e a r l i e r t e x t s : - ( i 6 )

" L e t n o t t h e d e c r e e o f j u d g m e n t p a s s e d u p o n m e b e p l a c e d , " o r ,

according to anot h er reading, "made known in th e mouth s of

" t h e m u l t i t u d e . M a y m y s o u l l i f t i t s e l f u p b e f o r e ( i 7 ) [ O s i r i s ] ,

"h aving been found to have been pure when on earth . M ay I

" c o m e b e f o r e t h e e , 0 l o r d o f t h e g o d s ; m a y I a r r i v e a t t h e n o m e

"of Double Righ t and Truth ; may I be crowned 2 l i k e a g o d

"endowed with life ; may I give forth light like th e company

"of t he gods who dwell in heaven ; may I become (i8) like

" o n e o f y o u , l i f t i n g u p [ m y ] f e e t i n t h e c i t y o f K h e r - a b a u t ; may

" I s e e t h e Sektet boat of the sacred Sahu ( i . e . , O r i o n ) p a s s i n g

" f o r t h o v e r t h e s k y ; may I not be driven away from th e sigh t

"of th e lords of the Tuat (underworld)" (zg) or, according to

anot her reading, "t he company of the gods ; may I smell the

"sweet savour of th e food of th e company of t he gods, and may

"I sit down with t hem . May the Kh er-heb (i . e . , t h e R e a d e r ) 3

"make invocation at [ my] coffin, and may I h ear the prayers

" w h i c h a r e r e c i t e d [ w h e n ] t h e o f f e r i n g s [ a r e m a d e ] . May I draw

i . I . e . , i n t h e B a l a n c e . The meaning is th at th e h eart, or conscience, of

th e deceased has not been outweigh ed by th e emblem of righ t and truth .

2 . Or, "may I rise . "

3 . L i t e r a l l y , " h e t h a t b a t h t h e b o o k . "





24 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY D, 11 .

"Homage t o t h e e , 0 thou t h a t d w e l l e s t i n S e t - T c h e s e r t o f

"A mentet : ( 3 ) O s i r i s , t h e r o y a l s c r i b e N e k h t u - A m e n , v i c t o r i o u s ,

"knoweth th ee, (4) and he knoweth th y name . D e l i v e r t h o u

"h im from th e worms (5) whi ch are in Re-stau, whi ch live

"upon the bodies of men and women and (5) which feed upon

" t h e i r b l o o d , f o r O s i r i s , t h e f a v o u r e d o n e o f t h e g o d o f h i s c i t y ,

"(7) the royal scribe, Nekhtu-Amen, victorious, knoweth you,

"and he knoweth your names . [ L e t t h i s b e ] t h e f i r s t b i d d i n g

" o f O s i r i s N e b - e r - t c h e r ( 8 ) w h o k e e p e t h h i d d e n h i s b o d y . M ay

"he give air [and escape] from t he Terrible One who dwelleth

"in th e Bigh t o f th e Stream of A mentet, and may h e decree

1 1 ( g ) t h e a c t i o n s o f h i m t h a t i s r i s i n g u p . Let h im pass on unto

"him whose throne is within the darkness, who giveth glory in

" R e - s t a u . (io) 0 lord of light , come tho u and swallow up the

"worms which are in Amentet . The great god who dwelleth

" i n T a t t u , ( i i ) a n d w h o i s u n s e e n , h e a r e t h h i s p r a y e r s , b u t t h o s e

"who are in affliction fear him as he cometh forth (I2) w i t h

"th e sentence to t he divine block . I O s i r i s , t h e r o y a l s c r i b e ,

" N e k h t u - A m e n , h a v e c o m e b e a r i n g t h e d e c r e e o f ( I 3 ) N e b - e r - t c h e r ,

"and Horus hath taken possession of h is th rone for him . H i s

"father, the lord of those who are (14) in the boat of father

" H o r u s , h a t h a s c r i b e d p r a i s e u n t o h i m . H e c o m e t h w i t h t i d i n g s . . .

" a n d m a y h e s e e ( 1 5 ) A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) . T h e i r c h i e f s t a n d e t h u p o n

" t h e e a r t h b e f o r e h i m , a n d t h e s c r i b e s m a g n i f y h i m a t t h e d o o r

" o f t h e i r a s s e m b l i e s , (16) and they bind his swath ings in Annu .

"He bath led captive h eaven, and he bath seized the earth in

" [ h i s ] g r a s p . Neither t he h eavens nor th e earth (17) can be

"taken away from h im, for behold, he is Rd, th e first-born of

"th e gods . His moth er suckleth him and she giveth [ to h im]

" h e r b r e a s t ( I 8 ) i n t h e h o r i z o n . "

Rubric : THE WORDS OF THIS CHAPTER ARE TO BE RECITED AFTER

[THE DECEASED] IS LAID TO REST IN AMENTET, WHEREBY THE REGION

TANENET IS MADE TO BE CONTENT WITH HER LORI). THEN SHALL OSIRIS,

THE ROYAL SCRIBE, NEKHTU-AMEN, TRIUMPHANT, COME FORTH, ( i g ) ANDHE SHALL EMBARK IN THE BOAT OF RA, AND [HIS] BODY UPON ITS BIER

SHALL BE COUNTED [WITH THOSE THEREIN], AND HE SHALL BE STABLISHED

IN THE TUAT (UNDERWORLD) .



TH' CIL PTERS OF LIVING FIFTI R DEATII . 2 5

CHAPTER 1 1 .

[From th e Papyrus of A ni (Brit . Mus . No . 10 i 470, sheet IS)]Vignette : A m a n , s t a n d i n g u p ri g h t , h o l d i n g a s t a f f .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF' COMING FORTH BY DAY, AND OF

LIVING AFTER DEATH . S a i t h O s i r i s A n i , v i c t o r i o u s : -

"Hail, One, shining from t he Mo on ! ( 2 ) H a i l , O n e , s h i n i n g

"from th e Moon! Grant that this Osiris Ani may come forth

" a m o n g t h o s e m u l t i t u d e s w h i c h a r e ( 3 ) o u t s i d e ; and let him be

" e s t a b l i s h e d a s a d w e l l e r ( o r l e t h i m g o a b o u t ) a m o n g t h e d e n -

" i z e n s o f h e a v e n ; and let the underworld be opened unto h im .

" A n d b e h o l d , O s i r i s , ( 4 ) O s i r i s A n i , s h a l l c o m e f o r t h b y d a y t o

"do wh atso ever he pleaseth upon th e earth among th e living

"ones . "

CI-IAPTER 111 .

[From th e Papyrus of No (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , + 7 7 , s h e e t j 3 ) . ]

Vignette : T h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o V i g n e t t e .

Text : ( t ) ANOTHER CHAPTER LIKE UNTO THE PRECEDING .

T h e C h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"Hail, th ou god Tem, who comest forth from th e Great Deep,

" a n d w h o s h i n e s t w i t h g l o r y u n d e r t h e f o r m o f t h e d o u b l e L i o n -

"god, send out with might th y words unto t ho se who are in thy

" p r e s e n c e , ( 3 ) a n d l e t t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

" e n t e r i n t o t h e i r a s s e m b l y . H e h a t h p e r f o r m e d t h e d e c r e e w h i c h

"bath been spoken to th e mariners of Ra at eventide, (4) and

" t h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , l i v e t h a f t e r h e b a t h d i e d , e v e n a s

"lo t h Rd day by days R a i s b o r n f r o m ( 5 ) y e s t e r d a y

" e v e n s o s h a l l t h e O s i r i s N u b e b o r n [ f r o m y e s t e r d a y ] , a n d e v e r y

t . A copy of t he t ext of t his Ch apter from th e Papyrus of Nu is given in

the accompanying volume of texts .



2 6 THE CHAPTERS OF CO_ EV(; FORTH BY DA 1' .

"god s h a l l r e j o i c e a t t h e l i f e o f t h e O s i r i s N u , e v e n a s t h e y r e -

j o i c e a t ( 6 ) t h e l i f e o f P t a h w h e n h e m a k e t h h i s a p p e a r a n c e f r o m

"th e great Temple I of t h e A ged One which is in Annu . "

CHAPTER IV.

[From the P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t 9 ) . ]

Vignette : This Chapter has no Vignette .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF' PASSING OVER THE CELESTIAL .

ROAD OF RE-STAt1 . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e C h a n c e l l o r -

i n - c h i e f , t h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h : -

"I open out a way over th e watery abyss which formet h a

"path between th e two Combatants ( i . e . , Horus and Set), and

"I h ave come ; m a y t h e f i e l d s o f O s i r i s b e g i v e n o v e r i n t o m y

"power . "

CHAPTER V .

[From th e Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . M u s . No . 9,900, sh eet it) . ]

Vignette : A s e a t e d m a n (s e e N a v i l l e op . c i t . , Bd . I . Dl . 7 ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING WORK BE DONE IN

THE UNDERWORLD by Nebseni, the scribe and draugh tsman in

th e Temple of Ptah, who saith : -

" I l i f t u p t h e h a n d o f t h e m a n w h o i s i n a c t i v e . I h ave come

"from th e city of Unnu (Hermopolis) . I am th e divine Soul

"which liveth, and I lead with me th e hearts of t he apes . "

CHAPTER VI .

[From th e Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . Mus . No . 9,900, sh eet i o ) . ]

Vignette : A s t a n d i n g , b e a r d e d m a l e f i g u r e .

t . 1 . e . , th e temple of Ra at Heliopolis .



TILE CHAIPTER OF THE TOILING SHABTI FIGURE. 2 7

Text : f i t ) THE CHAPTER OF' MAKING THE SHABTI FIGURE TO

DO WORK FOR A MAN IN THE UNDERWORLD . T h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i ,

th e draugh tsman in th e Temples ( 2 ) of t he North and South ,

th e man highly venerated in th e Temple of Ptah, saith : -

"0 th ou s h a b t i f i g u r e ( 3 ) o f t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e s o n o f

"th e scribe Thena, victorious, and of th e lady of t he ho use

" M u t r e s t h a , v i c t o r i o u s , ( q . ) i f I b e c a l l e d , o r i f I b e a d j u d g e d t o

"do any work whatsoever of th e labours which are to be done

"in th e underworld b e h o l d , [ f o r t h e e ] o p p o s i t i o n w i l l t h e r e b e

" ( 5 ) s e t a s i d e - b y a m a n i n h i s t u r n , l e t t h e j u d g m e n t f a l l u p o n

"th ee instead of upon me always, in th e matter of sowing the

" f i e l d s , o f f i l l i n g ( 6 ) t h e w a t e r - c o u r s e s w i t h w a t e r , a n d o f b r i n g -

i n g t h e s a n d s o f t h i s e a s t [ t o ] t h e w e s t . "

[The s h a b t i figure answereth], "Verily I am here [and will

"come] whit hersoever thou biddest me . "

CHA PTER VII .

[Fro m th e Papyrus of A ni (Brit . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 2 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased spearing a serpent (se e Pap . Funeraire de

Nebset, ed . Pierret and Devcria, pl . 5 ) . 1

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF PASSING OVER THE ABOMINABLE

BACK OF ( 2 ) APEP . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r -

i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h : -

" H a i l , t h o u c r e a t u r e o f w a x , w h o l e w d e s t a w a y [ v i c t i m s ] a n d

"destroyest th em, and who livest upon th e weak and helpless,

"may I never become weak and helpless (3) [before] thee, may

" I n e v e r s u f f e r c o l l a p s e [ b e f o r e ] t h e e . A n d t h y p o i s o n s h a l l n e v e r

"enter into my members, for my members are [as] the members

"of t he god Tem ; a n d s i n c e t h o u t h y s e l f d o s t n o t s u f f e r c o l -

l a p s e [ I s h a l l n o t s u f f e r c o l l a p s e ] . 0 l e t n o t t h e p a i n s o f d e a t h

"(¢) which come upon thee enter into my members . I am th e

1 . In a Papyrus at Paris (Naville, Todtenbuch, Bd . I . BL 9 ; P i e r r e t a n d

D e v e r i a , Pap . Funeraire de Nebset , p l a t e S ) t h e d e c e a s e d i s s h e w n s p e a r i n g a

s e r p e n t ; t h e o t h e r N I S S . l a c k t h i s v i g n e t t e .



THE CHAPTERS Oh' COMING 1-7)RTI£ RY DAY

"god Tem and I am in th e foremost part of Nu lr•

e . , t h e s k y ) ,

"and the power which protecteth me is th at which is with all

" t h e g o d s f o r e v e r . I am he who se name is hidden, and who se

" h a b i t a t i o n i s h o l y f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s . I am he who dwelleth

" t h e r e i n ( ? ) and I come fort h along with th e god Tem . I am

"he who shall not be condemned ( ? ) ; I a m s t r o n g , I a m s t r o n g . "

CHAPTER VIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 8 ) . ]

Vignette :The emblem o f A menta, towards which A ni, clad in whi te

and holding a staff in his left h and and a bandlet in the rig ht, is walking .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF PASSING THROUGH AMENfET

[AND COMING FORTH] BY DAY . S a i t h O s i r i s A n i : -

"The city of Unnu (Hermopolis) is opened. My h ead (2) i s

"sealed up, 0 Thoth , and strong is the Eye of Horus . I have

"delivered the Eye of Horus which sh ineth with splendours on

" t h e f o r e h e a d o f R a , ( 3 ) t h e f a t h e r o f t h e g o d s. I am th e same

" O s i r i s , t h e d w e l l e r i n A m e n t e t. Osiris knoweth his day, and

" t h a t h e s h a l l l i v e t h r o u g h h i s p e r i o d o f l i f e ; a n d s h a l l n o t I

" d o l i k e w i s e : (4 ) I am th e Mo on-god, wh o dwelleth among th e

" g o d s , I s h a l l n o t p e r i s h . Stand up, therefore, 0 Horns, for

"[Osiris] hath reckoned th ee among th e gods . "

CHAPTER IX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A ni ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t t 8 ) . ]

Vignette : A ram h aving upon his head the Atef crown st anding upon a

pylon-shaped pedest al, which rests on a green reed mat ; b e f o r e h i m i s

an altar upon which stand a libatio n vase and a lotus flo wer . The scribe

Ani, cloth ed in white, st ands with bot h h ands raised in adoration .

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY AFTER

HAVING MADE THE PASSAGE THROUGH THE TOMB . S a i t h O s i r i s

A ni : -



THE CHAPTER OF ATTACKING ENEMIES . 29

"Hail Soul, tho u might y one of strength ! ( 2 ) Verily I am

"here, I have come, I beho ld th ee . I have passed through th e

"Tuat (underworld), I have seen (3) [my] divine fath er Osiris,

"I have scatt ered th e gloo m of night . I am h is belo ved one .

"I h ave come ; I have seen my divine fath er Osiris . I h ave

"stabbed the heart o f Suti . [I] have performed [all] th e cere-

monies for my divine fath er Osiris, (5) I h ave opened every

"way in h eaven and in earth . I am th e son who loveth h is

" f a t h e r O s i r i s . (6) I have become a sahu,r I h ave become a khu,2

"I am furnish ed [with what I need] . Hail, every god, hail every

"khu! I have made a path [fo r myself, 1] Osiris, t he scribe Ani,

" v i c t o r i o u s . "

CHAPTER X . 3

[From th e Pap - r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0, 47 0 , s he e t1 8 ) - l

Vignett e : A n i , c l a d i n w h i t e , s p e a r i n g a s e r p e n t.

Text : ( x ) ANOTHER CHAPTER [TO BE SAID] BY A MAN WHO

COMETH FORTH BY DAY AGAINST HIS ENEMIES IN THE UNDER-

WORLD . [Saith Osiris Ani : -]

"I h ave divided th e h eavens, ( 2 ) 1 h a v e c l e f t t h e h o r i z o n , I h a v e

"traversed th e earth, [following] upon his foo tst eps . The Might y

"Kill t aketh posses sio n of me and carrieth me away, because,

"beh old, (3) I am provided with his magical words for millions

"of years . I cat with my mouth , I crush my fo od with my

"jawbones . (4) Beho ld, I am th e god who is t he lo rd of th e

"Teat (underworld) ; may there be given unto me, Osiris Ani,

"th ese th ings in perpetuity with out fail or lessening . "

i . I . e . , th e spiritual form of a man which h as come into being th rough

th e prayers which have been said and th e ceremonies which h ave been per-

formed over his dead body ; s e e t h e I n t r o d u c t i o n .

2 . A sh ining o r translucent, intangible casing or covering wh ich t he de-

ceased possesses in th e underworld ; s e e t h e I n t r o d u c t i o n .

3 . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s f o u n d t w i c e , v i z ., as Chapters X

and XLVIII ; as there is no good reason why it sho uld he Chapter XLVIII, it

has been placed here .



3 o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

CHAPTER XI'[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 t ) . ]

Vignett e : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n b o t h t h e T h e b a n a n d

S a l t e R e c e n s i o n s .

Text : ( i) THE CHA PTER OF [ A MA N] COMING FORTH A GAINST

HIS ENEMIES IN THE UNDERWORLD . The overseer of t h e p a l a c e ,

t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , Nu, triumph ant, saith :- ( 2 )

"0 th ou god who eatest t hine arm, I have departed from t hy

"road . I am Rd, and I have come forth from th e horiz on against

"my enemies and he h ath granted to me th at th ey shall not

"escape from me . I h ave made an off ering, and my h and is

"like that o f t h e l o r d o f the [ beret crown . I have lift ed up my

"feet even as the uraei goddesses rise up . My overthrow shall

"not be accomplish ed, ( 4 ) and as fo r mine enemy h e h ath been

"given over into my power and he s hall not be delivered from

"me. I sh all stand up like Ho rus, and I s h a l l s i t d o w n l i k e P t a h ,

"and I sh all be migh ty like Tho th , (5) and I shall be strong

"like Tem . I shall, therefore, walk with my legs, I shall speak

"with my mou th, I sh all go round about in quest o f mine enemy,

"and [as] he h ath been delivered over to me he sh all not escape

"from me . "

CHAPTER XII 2

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M us. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n b o t h T h e b a n a n d S a ' f t e

R e c e n s i o n s .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO AND OF COMING

FORTH FROM [THE UNDERWORLD]. The Osiris Nu, triufiiph ant,

s a i t h :-

i . I n t h e S a I t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s f o u n d t wi c e , v i z . , a s C h a p t e r s X I

and XLIX ; a s t h e r e i s n o g o o d r e a s o n w h y i t s h o u l d b e C h a p t e r X L I X , i t h a s

b e e n p l a c e d h e r e .

2 . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s f o u n d t wi c e , v i z . , a s C h a p t e r s X I I

and CXX ; a s t h e r e i s n o g o o d r e a s o n w h y i t s h o u l d b e C h a p t e r C X X , i t h a s

b e e n p l a c e d h e r e .



CHAPTERS OF JOURNEYING IN A_IIENTET . 3 1

"Hymns of praise to th ee, 0 Ra ! t h o u k e e p e r ( ? ) o f s e c r e t (2)

"gates which are on the brow of t he go d Seb, by th e side of

" t h e B a l a n c e o f R a , w h e r e i n h e l i f t e t h u p R i g h t a n d T r u t h ( M a l t )

" ( 3 ) d a y by day . I n v e r y t r u t h I h a v e b u r s t t h r o u g h t h e e a r t h ,

"grant [ th ou] unto me th at I may go forward and arrive at the

" s t a t e o f o l d a g e . "

CHAPTER X111 OR CXXI . '

[Fro m th e Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . Mus. No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vignette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o ut a v i g n e t t e i n b o t h t h e T h e b a n a n d

S a I t e R e c e n s i o n s .

Text : [THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO AND OF COMING

FORTH FROM AMENTET] .

[ O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , v i c t o r i o u s , s a i t h :-]o r t a l sgo in like th e Hawk and" I c o m e f o r t h l i k e t h e Bennu b i r d , t h e m o r n i n g s t a r ( ' ) o f R d .

"May a path be made for me whereby I may enter in peace into

" t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t e t ; and may I be by t h e Lake of Ho rus ;

"[and may I lead th e greyhounds of Ho rns] ; and may a path

"be made for me whereby I may enter in and adore [Osiris, the

" l o r d o f L i f e ] . "

I n t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r a p p e a r s w i t h o u t a r u b r i c ,

b u t i n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n a s g i v e n i n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s ,

T o d t e n b u c h , B l l . 4 and 45) we have th e following : - -

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] IS TO BE RECITED OVER A RING [MADE] OF

A N KH A h 7 FLOWERS, WHICH SHALL BE LAID ON THE RIGHT EAR OF THE

KHU, TOGETHER WITH ANOTHER RING WRAPPED UP IN A STRIP OF BYSSUS

CLOTH, WHEREON THE NAME OF OSIRIS, AUF-ANKH, VICTORIOUS, BORN

OF THE LADY SHERT-AMSU, VICTORIOUS, SHALL BE DONE [IN WRITING]

ON THE DAY OF SEPULTURE .

I . I n t h e S a l t e R e c e n s i o n th i s C h a p t e r i s f o un d t - , N i c e , v i z . , a s C h a p t e r s X I I I

and CXXI ; as there is no goo d reason why it sh ould be Chapter CXXI, it has

been placed here .



32 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

CHAPTER XIV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M e s -e m - n e t e r ( N a v i l l e , T o d t e n b u c h Bd . I . B l . t 3) . ]

Vignett e : This Chapter h a s n o v i g n e t t e e i t h e r i n t h e T h e b a n o r i n

t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF PUTTING AN END TO ANY

SHAME THAT MAY BE IN THE HEART OF THE GOD for the chief

deputy of A men, [t h e scribe] Mes-em-neter, victo rious, [wh o

s a i t h : - - ]

"Hymns of praise to th ee, 0 tho u god who makest t he mo ment

"t o advance, ( 2 ) th ou dweller among mysteries o f every kind,

"th ou guardian of th e word which I speak . Beh old, th e god

"bath sh ame of me, but let my faults be washed away and let

"th em fall ( 3 ) upon bot h hands o f t he god of Righ t and Truth .

"Do away utterly with th e transgressio n which i s in me, toget her

"with [my] wickedness and sinfulness, 0 god of Right and Truth .

"May th is god be at peace with m e! Do away utterly with th e

" ( 4 ) obstacles which are between th ee and me. 0 t h ou t o w h o m

"offerings are made in th e divine [city] of Kenur,' grant th ou

"th at I may bring to t hee th e offerings which will make peace

"[ between th ee and men] wh ereon th ou livest , and th at I also

"may live th ereon . Be t h ou at peace (5) with me and do away

"utterly with all th e shame of me which t ho u hast in thy h eart

"because of me . "

CHAPTER XV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . Mos . No t o , 47 o , s h e e t s i 8 a n d i 9 ) . ]

Vignett e : A n i s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n , b e f o r e

Ra, hawk-headed, and seated in a boat flo ating upon th e sky. On a

p l a t f o r m i n t h e b o w s s i t s t h e g o d H e r u - p a - k h r a t ( H a r p o c r a t e s ) w i t h h i s

r i g h t h a n d r a i s e d t o h i s m o u t h , w h i c h h e t o u c h e s w i t h o n e f i n g e r ; t h e

s i d e o f t h e b o a t i s o r n a m e n t e d w i t h f e a t h e r s o f M a a t a n d w i t h a n Utchat .

The handles of th e oars and the tops of th e rowlocks are in th e form

o f h a w k s ' h e a d s , a n d o n t h e b l a d e s o f t h e o a r s a r e Utchats .

t . T h e v a r i a n t s o f t h i s n a m e a r c " K e m u r " a n d " K e r - u r " ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p c i t . ,

Bd . I I . p . 21) .



Text : ( i ) A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RN WHEN HE RISETH UPON

THE HORIZON, AND WHEN HE SETTETH IN THE LAND OF LIFE .

O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , s a i t h : -

"Homage to th ee, ( 2 ) 0 Ra, when thou risest [ as] Tem-Heru-

"kh uti (Tem-Harmach is) . Thou art adored [by me when] thy

"beauties are befo re mine eyes, and [when th y] (3) radiance

" [ f a l l e t h ] u p o n [ m y ] b o d y . T h o u g o e s t f o r t h t o t h y s e t t i n g i n

" t h e S e k t e t b o a t w i t h [ f a i r ] w i n d s , a n d t h y h e a r t i s g l a d ; t h e

" ( 4 ) h e a r t o f t h e Matet b o a t r e j o i c e t h . T h o u s t r i d e s t o v e r t h e

"h eavens in peace, and all th y foes are cast down ; t h e n e v e r

" r e s t i n g s t a r s ( 5 ) s i n g h y m n s o f p r a i s e u n t o t h e e , a n d t h e s t a r s

" w h i c h r e s t , a n d t h e s t a r s w h i c h n e v e r f a i l g l o r i f y t h e e a s t h o u

" ( 6 ) sinkest to rest in the h orizon of Manu,T 0 th ou who art

"beautiful at morn and at eve, 0 thou lord who livest and art

" e s t a b l i s h e d , 0 m y l o r d !

"Homage to t hee, 0 th ou who art Rd when th ou risest, and

" ( 7 ) T e m w h e n t h o u s e t t e s t [ i n ] b e a u t y . T h o u r i s e s t a n d s h i n e s t

"on the back of th y mother [Nut], 0 th ou who art crowned king

"(8) of th e gods! Nut doeth homage unto th ee, and everlasting

"and never-changing order 2 embraceth th ee at morn and at eve .

"Thou stridest over th e heaven, being glad of h eart, and the

" L a k e o f T e s t e s ( g ) i s c o n t e n t [ t h e r e a t ] . The Sebau Fiend hath

" f a l l e n t o t h e g r o u n d ; h i s a r m s a n d h i s h a n d s h a v e b e e n h a c k e d

" o f f , a n d t h e k n i f e h a t h s e v e r e d t h e j o i n t s o f h i s b o d y . Ra hath

" a f a i r w i n d ( i o ) ; t h e S e k t e t b o a t g o e t h f o r t h a n d s a i l i n g a l o n g

" i t c o m e t h i n t o p o r t . The gods of the south and of the north,

"of th e west and of th e east, praise (ii) thee, 0 thou divine

" s u b s t a n c e , f r o m w h o m a l l f o r m s o f l i f e c o m e i n t o b e i n g . Th o u

" s e n d e s t f o r t h t h e w o r d , a n d t h e e a r t h i s f l o o d e d w i t h s i l e n c e ,

"O thou o nly One, who didst dwell in heaven before ever the

"earth and the mountains came into existence . ( 1 2 ) 0 Runner,

"O Lord, 0 only One, th ou maker of t h ings wh ich are, tho u

"hast fashio ned the to ngue of th e company of t he gods, thou

"hast produced whatsoever cometh forth from t he waters, and

t . I . e . , th e mountain of sunset .

2 . 1 . C . , Mait .

A H I JIN TO THE SETTING S(JV 3 3

3



3 .4 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH I31' DA 1' .

" t h o u s p r i n g e s t u p f r o m t h e m o v e r t h e f l o o d e d l a n d o f t h e L a k e

"of Ho rns . (i3) Let me snuff the air which cometh forth from

"th y nostrils, and th e north wind which cometh forth from thy

"moth er [Nut] . 0 make th ou t o be glo rious my shining form

" ( k h u ) , 0 Osiris, (t4) make th ou to be divine my soul ( b a ) !

" T h o u a r t w o r s h i p p e d [ i n ] p e a c e ( o r [ i n ] s e t t i n g ) , 0 l o r d o f t h e

" g o d s , t h o u a r t e x a l t e d b y r e a s o n o f t h y w o n d r o u s w o r k s . Shine

"th ou with th y rays of ligh t upon my body day by day, (t5)

" [ u p o n m e ] , O s i r i s t h e s c r i b e , t h e t e l l e r o f t h e d i v i n e o f f e r i n g s

"of all the gods, the overseer of the granary of th e lords of

" A b t u ( A b v d o s ) , t h e r o y a l s c r i b e i n t r u t h w h o l o v e t h t h e e ; A n i ,

" v i c t o r i o u s i n p e a c e .

CHAPTER XV.

Hymn and Litany to Osiris .

[From th e Papyrus of A ni (Brit . Mus . No . 10,470, s h e e t 1 9 ) . ]

Vignette : " O s i r i s A n i , t h e r o y a l s c r i b e i n t r u t h , w h o l o v e t h R a , t h e

" s cr i b e a n d t e l l e r of t h e d i v i n e o f f e r i n g s o f a l l t h e g o d s " , a n d " O s i r i s

" T h u t h u , t h e l a d y o f t h e h o u s e , t h e s i n g i n g w o m a n o f A m e n " , s t a n d i n g

i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e t h e g o d O s i r i s w h o , a c c om p a ni e d b y t h e g o d d e s s I s i s ,

s t a n d s i n a s h r i n e m a d e i n t h e f o rm o f a f u n e r a l c h e s t .

Text : " P r a i s e b e u n t o t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , l o r d o f e t e r n i t y , U n -

"nefer, Heru-Khuti (Harmachis), whose forms are manifold, and

" w h o s e a t t r i b u t e s a r e m a j e s t i c , ( 2 ) Ptah-Seker-Tern in A nnu

" ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , t h e l o r d o f t h e h i d d e n p l a c e , a n d t h e c r e a t o r o f

" H e t - k a - P t a h ( M e m p h i s ) a n d o f t h e g o d s [ t h e r e i n ] , t h e g u i d e o f

" t h e u n d e r w o r l d , ( 3 ) w h o m [ t h e g o d s ] g l o r i f y w h e n t h o u s e t t e s t

"in Nut . Isis embraceth th ee in peace, and she driveth away

"th e fiends from the (4) mouth o f th y path s . Tho u turnest

"th y face upon Amentet, and th ou makest th e earth to shine as

"with refined copper. Tho se who h ave lain down ( i . e . , t h e

"dead) rise up to see th ee, th ey (5) breath e th e air and they

" l o o k u p o n t h y f a c e w h e n t h e d i s k r i s e t h o n i t s h o r i z o n ; t h e i r

"hearts are at peace inasmuch as they behold thee, 0 thou who

" a r t E t e r n i t y a n d E v e r l a s t i n g n e s s ! "



LITANY OF THE NINE GODS . 3 5

LITANY .

( i ) " H o m a g e t o t h e e , [ 0 l o r d o f ] s t a r r y d e i t i e s i n A n n u , a n d

" o f h e a v e n l y b e i n g s i n K h e r - a b a ; th ou god Unti, who art more

"glorious th an the gods who are hidden in Annu ; (to ) 0 grant

"th ou unto me a path whereon I may pass in peace, fo r I am

" j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e

" a u g h t w i t h d e c e i t . "

( 2 ) " H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 A n i n A n t e s , ( ? ) H e r u - k h u t i ( H a r m a c h i s ) ,

" w i t h l o n g s t r i d e s t h o u s t r i d e n t o v e r h e a v e n , 0 H e r u - k h u t i . ( i o )

"0 grant th ou unto me a path whereo n I may pass in peace,

"for I am just and true ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r

"have I done aught with deceit . "

(3) "Homage to th ee, 0 Soul of everlastingness, th ou Soul

"who dwellest in Tatt u, Un-nefer, son of Nut ; t h o u a r t l o r d

"of Alert . (to ) 0 grant t ho u unto me a path wherein I may

" p a s s i n p e a c e , f o r I a m j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s

"wittingly, nor have I done aught with deceit . "

(4) "Homage to t hee in thy dominion over Tattu ; t h e U r e r e t

"crown is established upon th y h ead ; th ou art t he One who

" m a k e t h t h e s t r e n g t h w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h h i m s e l f , a n d t h o u d w e l l e s t

"in peace in Tattu . (to) 0 grant t ho u unto me a path where-

on I may pass in peace, for I am just and true ; I have not

" s p o k e n l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e a u g h t w i t h d e c e i t . "

(5) "Homage to th ee, 0 lord of t he Acacia tree, th e Seker

" b o a t i s s e t u p o n i t s s l e d g e ; t h o u t u r n e s t b a c k t h e F i e n d , t h e

"worker of evil, and thou causest the Utchat t o r e s t u p o n i t s

" s e a t . (to ) 0 grant th ou unto me a path whereon I may pass

" i n p e a c e , f o r I a m j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s w i t -

"tingly, nor have I done aught with deceit . "

i . The fo llowing petitio n, "O grant tho u unto me a path", et c . , i s w r i t t e n

o n c e o n l y , a n d a t t h e e n d o f t h e L i t a n y , b u t I t h i n k i t i s c l e a r t h a t i t w a s i n -

t e n d e d t o b e r e p e a t e d a f t e r e a c h o f t h e n i n e a d d r e s s e s . This is proved by the

S a I t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B I . 5) where th e words, "Grant th ou th e

s w e e t b r e a t h o f t h e n o r t h w i n d t o t h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h " , a r e w r i t t e n i n t w o p l a c e s

a n d a r e i n t e n d e d t o b e s a i d a f t e r e a c h o f t h e t e n a d d r e s s e s a b o v e t h e m .

3*

6



3 6 TILE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

( 6 ) "Homage to th ee, 0 th ou who art mighty in th ine ho ur,

"th ou great and migh ty Prince, dweller in An-rut-f, r lord of

" e t e r n i t y a n d c r e a t o r o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , t h o u a r t t h e l o r d o f

"Suten-henen (Heracleopolis Magna) . (to ) 0 grant t h ou unto

"me a path whereon I may pass in peace, for I am just and

" t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e a u g h t

" w i t h d e c e i t . "

(7) "Homage to th ee, 0 th ou who restest upon Right and

"Truth , th ou art t he lord of A btu (A bvdos), and thy limbs

" a r e j o i n e d u n t o T a - t c h e s e r t e t ; th ou art he t o whom fraud and

" g u i l e a r e h a t e f u l . (to) 0 grant th ou unto me a path whereon

" I m a y p a s s i n p e a c e , f o r I a m j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n

" l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e a u g h t w i t h d e c e i t . "

(8) "Homage to t hee, 0 thou who art within thy boat, th ou

" b r i n g e s t H a p i ( i . e . , t h e N i l e ) f o r t h f r o m h i s s o u r c e ; t h e l i g h t

"shineth upon th y body and tho u art t he dweller in Nekhen . 2

" ( t o ) 0 g r a n t t h o u u n t o m e a p a t h w h e r e o n I m a y p a s s i n p e a c e ,

" f o r I a m j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s w i t t i n g l y , n o r

"have I done aught with deceit . "

( g ) " H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 c r e a t o r o f t h e g o d s , t h o u K i n g o f t h e

" N o r t h a n d o f t h e S o u t h , 0 O s i r i s , v i c t o r i o u s o n e , r u l e r o f t h e

" w o r l d i n t h y g r a c i o u s s e a s o n s ; t h o u a r t t h e l o r d o f t h e c e l e s -

t i a l w o r l d . 3 (to) 0 grant th ou unto me a path whereon I may

" p a s s i n p e a c e , f o r I a m j u s t a n d t r u e ; I h a v e n o t s p o k e n l i e s

" w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e a u g h t w i t h d e c e i t . "

Hymn to Ra .

[From th e papyrus of A ni (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 2 0 ) . ]

Text : (i) A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA WHEN HE RISF : TH IN

i . I. e . , "th e place where noth ing groweth ", th e name of a district in the

underworld .

2 . The name of t he s anctuary of th e goddess Nekhebet in Upper Egypt, t he

E i l e i t h y i a p o l i s o f t h e G r e e k s .

3 . 1 e . , t h e t w o l a n d s At ebui which were situated one on each side of th e

c e l e s t i a l N i l e .



A HSaIV TO THE RISING SUB 3 7

THE EASTERN PART OE HEAVEN . Those who are in his train

( 2 ) r e j o i c e , a n d l o ! O s i r i s A n i , v i c t o r i o u s , s a i t h : -

"Hail, th ou Disk, th ou lord of rays, (4) who risest on the

"horizon day by day! Shine th ou with th y beams of light upon

" t h e f a c e o f O s i r i s A n i , w h o i s v i c t o r i o u s ; f o r h e s i n g e t h h y m n s

" o f p r a i s e u n t o t h e e a t ( 4 ) d a w n , a n d h e m a k e t h t h e e t o s e t a t

" e v e n t i d e w i t h w o r d s o f a d o r a t i o n . M a y t h e s o u l o f O s i r i s A n i ,

" t h e t r i u m p h a n t o n e , c o m e f o r t h ( 5 ) w i t h t h e e i n t o h e a v e n , m a y

" h e g o f o r t h i n t h e Matet b o a t . May he come into port in the

"Sektet boat, and may he cleave h is path among t he never (6)

" r e s t i n g s t a r s i n t h e h e a v e n s . "

O s i r i s A n i , b e i n g i n p e a c e a n d i n t r i u m p h , a d o r e t h h i s l o r d ,

( 7 ) t h e l o r d o f e t e r n i t y , s a v i n g : "Homage to thee, 0 Heru-khuti

" ( H a r m a c h i s ) , w h o a r t t h e g o d K h e p e r a , t h e s e l f - c r e a t e d ; when

" t h o u r i s e s t o n t h e ( 8 ) h o r i z o n a n d s h e d d e s t t h y b e a m s o f l i g h t

" u p o n t h e l a n d s o f t h e N o r t h a n d o f t h e S o u t h , t h o u a r t b e a u t i -

f u l , y e a b e a u t i f u l , a n d a l l t h e g o d s r e j o i c e w h e n t h e y b e h o l d

"th ee, (g) th e King of h eaven . The go ddess Nebt-Unnut is

"stablished upon thy head ; and her uraei of th e South and of

"th e North are upon thy brow ; (io) she taketh up her place

" b e f o r e t h e e . The god Thoth is stablished in the bows of th y

" b o a t t o d e s t r o y u t t e r l y a l l t h y f o e s . (ii) Th ose wh o are in

"th e Tuat (underworld) come forth to meet thee, and they bow

"in h omage as th ey come t owards th ee, to beh old [th y] (iz)

" b e a u t i f u l I m a g e . And I have come before thee th at I may be

" w i t h t h e e t o b e h o l d t h v D i s k e v e r y d a y . May I not be shut up

"in [th e tomb], may I not be ( 1 3 ; turned back, may th e limbs

"of my body be made new again when I view thy beauties,

" e v e n a s [ a r e t h o s e o f ] a l l t h y f a v o u r e d o n e s , ( 1 4 ) b e c a u s e I a m

" o n e o f t h o s e w h o w o r s h i p p e d t h e e [ w h i l s t I l i v e d ] u p o n e a r t h .

"May I come in unto th e land of et ernity, may I come even

" ( i 5 ) u n t o t h e e v e r l a s t i n g l a n d , f o r b e h o l d , 0 m y l o r d , t h i s h a s t

"th ou ordained for me . "

And lo, Osiris Ani triumphant in peace, the triumphant one,

s a i t h : (i6) "Homage to t hee, 0 thou who risest in thy h orizon

" a s R a , t h o u r e p o s e s t u p o n l a w [ w h i c h c h a n g e t h n o t n o r c a n i t b e




" a l t e r e d ] . Thou passest over th e sky, and every face watcheth

" t h e e ( r 7 ) a n d t h y c o u r s e , f o r t h o u h a s t b e e n h i d d e n f r o m t h e i r

" g a z e . Thou dos t s h ew th yself at dawn and at eventide day

"by day . (i8) Th e S e k t e t b o a t , w h e r e i n i s t h y _ M a j e s t y , g o e t h

" f o r t h w i t h m i g h t ; t h y b e a m s [ s h i n e ] u p o n [ a l l ] f a c e s ; [ t h e n u m -

ber] of th y red and yellow rays cannot be known, nor can thy

"bright (ig) beams be told . The lands of t h e gods, and th e

" e a s t e r n l a n d s o f P u n t I m u s t b e s e e n , e r e t h a t w h i c h i s h i d d e n

" ( 2 0 ) [in th ee] may be measured . Alo ne and by th yself th ou

"dost manifest thyself [when] th ou comest into being above Nu

" ( i . e . , t h e s k y ) . May Ani (21) advance, even as thou dost ad-

v a n c e ; m a y h e n e v e r c e a s e [ t o g o f o r w a r d ] , e v e n a s t h y M a j e s t y

"ceaseth not [to go forward], even th ough it be for a moment ;

" f o r w i t h s t r i d e s d o s t t h o u ( 2 2 ) i n o n e l i t t l e m o m e n t p a s s o v e r

" t h e s p a c e s w h i c h w o u l d n e e d h u n d r e d s o f t h o u s a n d s a n d m i l l i o n s

"of years [fo r man to pass over ; t h i s ] t h o u d o e s t , a n d t h e n

" d o l t t h o u s i n k t o r e s t . T h o u ( z 3 ) p u t t e s t a n e n d t o t h e h o u r s

" o f t h e n i g h t , a n d t h o u d o s t c o u n t t h e m , e v e n t h o u ; t h o u e n d e s t

"th em in th ine own appointed season, and th e earth becometh

" l i g h t . ( 2 4 ) Thou settest th yself before th y handiwork in th e

" l i k e n e s s o f R a ; t h o u r i s e s t i n t h e h o r i z o n . "

O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , d e c l a r e t h ( 2 5 ) h i s p r a i s e o f

t h e e w h e n t h o u s h i n e s t , a n d w h e n t h o u r i s e s t a t d a w n h e c r i e t h

i n h i s j o y a t t h y b i r t h: ( 2 6 ) "Tho u art crowned with th e ma-

" j e s t y o f t h y b e a u t i e s ; th ou mouldest th y limbs as th ou dost

"advance, and th ou bringest th em forth without birth -pangs in

"the form of ( 2 7 ) R a , a s t h o u d o s t r i s e u p i n t o t h e u p p e r a i r .

"Grant th ou t hat I may come unto th e h eaven which i s ever-

" l a s t i n g , a n d u n t o t h e m o u n t a i n w h e r e d w e l l t h y f a v o u r e d o n e s .

"May I be joined (z8) u n t o t h o s e s h i n i n g b e i n g s , h o l y a n d p e r -

fect, who are in th e underworld ; and may I come forth with

"th em to behold thy beauties when tho u shinest ( 2 9 ) a t e v e n -

"tide and goest to th y moth er Nu . T h o u d o s t p l a c e t h y s e l f i n

" t h e w e s t , a n d m y t w o h a n d s a r e [ r a i s e d ] i n a d o r a t i o n [ o f t h e e ]

" ( 3 0 ) w h e n t h o u s e t t e s t a s a l i v i n g b e i n g . B e h o l d , t h o u a r t t h e

i . I . e . , th e land on each side of th e Red Sea, and on th e coast o f Africa .



A HYJIN TO THE RISING SUB'. 3 9

" m a k e r o f e t e r n i t y , a n d t h o u a r t a d o r e d [ w h e n ] t h o u s e t t e s t i n t h e

" h e a v e n s . I h a v e g i v e n m y h e a r t u n t o t h e e ( 3 o ) w i t h o u t w a v e r i n g ,

"0 thou who art might ier than th e gods . "

O s i r i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h : "A h ymn of praise to t hee, 0

"th ou who risest like unto gold, and who dost flood th e world

"with light on the day of th y birth . Thy mother giveth thee

" b i r t h u p o n [ h e r ] h a n d , a n d t h o u d o s t g i v e l i g h t u n t o t h e c o u r s e

" o f t h e D i s k ( 3 3 ) . 0 t h o u g r e a t L i g h t , w h o s h i n e s t i n t h e h e a v e n s ,

" t h o u d o s t s t r e n g t h e n t h e g e n e r a t i o n s o f m e n w i t h t h e N i l e - f l o o d ,

" a n d t h o u d o s t c a u s e g l a d n e s s i n a l l l a n d s , a n d i n a l l c i t i e s ( 3 4 ) ,

"and in all th e temples . Tho u art glorious by reason of t hy

"splendours, and thou makest strong thy k a ( i . e . , D o u b l e ) w i t h

" h i t a n d tchefau f o o d s . 0 th ou who art the migh ty one of vic-

t o r i e s , ( 3 5 ) t h o u w h o a r t t h e P o w e r o f [ a l l ] P o w e r s , w h o d o s t

" m a k e s t r o n g t h v t h r o n e a g a i n s t e v i l f i e n d s ; who art glorious

" i n m a j e s t y i n t h e Sektet boat, and who art exceeding migh ty

" ( 3 6 ) i n t h e Atetb o a t , m a k e t h o u g l o r i o u s O s i r i s A n i w i t h v i c -

t o r y i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d ; g r a n t t h o u t h a t i n t h e n e t h e r w o r l d h e

" m a y b e ( 3 7 ) w i t h o u t e v i l . I p r a y t h e e t o p u t a w a y [ h i s ] f a u l t s

" b e h i n d t h e e : grant thou th at h e may be one of th y venerable

" s e r v a n t s ( 3 8 ) w h o a r e w i t h t h e s h i n i n g o n e s ; may he be joined

` u n t o t h e s o u l s w h i c h a r e i n T a - t c h e s e r t e t ; and may h e journey

"into th e Sekhet-Aaru (3g) by a prosperous and happy decree,

" h e t h e O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e , A n i , t r i u m p h a n t . "

And th e god saith : -

( 4 0 ) " T h o u s h a l t c o m e f o r t h i n t o h e a v e n , t h o u s h a l t p a s s o v e r

" t h e s k y , t h o u s h a l t b e j o i n e d i n t o t h e s t a r r y d e i t i e s . P r a i s e s

" s h a l l b e o f f e r e d ( 4 i ) u n t o t h e e i n t h y b o a t , t h o u s h a l t b e h y m n e d

" i n t h e Atet b o a t ,( 4 2 )

t h o u s h a l t b e h o l d R a w i t h i n h i s s h r i n e ,

" t h o u s h a l t s e t t o g e t h e r w i t h h i s D i s k d a y b y d a y , t h o u s h a l t s e e

" ( 4 3 ) t h e Ant f i s h w h e n i t s p r i n g e t h i n t o b e i n g i n t h e w a t e r s o f

" t u r q u o i s e , a n d t h o u s h a l t s e e ( 4 4 ) t h e A b t u f i s h i n h i s h o u r .

" I t s h a l l c o m e t o p a s s t h a t t h e E v i l O n e s h a l l f a l l w h e n h e l a v e t h

" a s n a r e t o d e s t r o y t h e e , ( 4 5 ) a n d t h e j o i n t s o f h i s n e c k a n d o f

" h i s b a c k s h a l l b e h a c k e d a s u n d e r . R a [ s a i l e t h ] w i t h a f a i r w i n d ,

"and th e Sektet boat draweth on (46) and cometh into port . The



40 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY

" m a r i n e r s o f R a r e j o i c e , a n d t h e h e a r t o f N e b t - a n k h t i s g l a d , ( 4 7 )

"for th e enemy of h er lord bath fallen to th e ground . Thou

"shalt beh old Horus on the st anding-place of th e pilot of th e

"bo at, and Th ot h and Maat s h all stand one upon each s ide of

" h i m . ( 4 8 ) Al l th e gods shall rejoice when they beho ld Ra coming

"in peace (49) to make th e h earts of th e sh ining ones to live,

"and Osiris A ni, victorious, t he scribe of t he divine offerings of

"th e lords of Th ebes, shall be along with th em!"

A Hymn to th e Setting Sun .

[From the Papyrus of Mat-hetep (Brit. Mus . No . i o , o t o , s h e e t 5 ) . ]

Vignett e : I n t h i s p a p y r u s t h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e .

Text : I . (t) [ANOTHER CHAPTER OF] THE MYSTERY OF THE

TUAT (UNDERWORLD) AND OF PASSING THROUGH THE UNSEEN

NETHERWORLD,and of seeing th e Disk when he sett eth in Amen-

tet , [ when] he is adored by th e go ds and by th e Khus in the

underworld, and [wh en] th e Soul ( 2 ) which dwellet h in Ra is

made perfect. He is made mig h ty bef ore Tern ; he is made great

before Osiris ; he sett eth his t error before th e company of th e

gods who are the guides of th e neth erworld ; he maketh long(?)

his steps and he maketh his face to enter ( ? ) [with th at of] the

great god . Now every K / u , for whom t h ese words sh all h ave

been said, shall conic forth by day in any form wh ich h e is

pleased to take ; ( 4 ) he shall gain power among th e gods of t he

Tuat (underworld), and they shall recognize h im as one of t hem-

s e l v e s ; and he sh all enter in at t h e h idden gate wit h power .

The lady (5) Mut-het ep, victo rious, singeth hymns of praise

to thee, [saying] : "0 Ra-Tem, in th y splendid prog ress t h ou

"risest, and tho u settest as a living being in the glo ries (6) of

"th e western ho rizon, ; th ou settest in thy territory which is in

"Manu 2 Thy uraeus is beh ind th ee, th y uraeus is beh ind th ee .

"Homage to th ee, 0 th ou who art in peace, homage to t hee, 0

i . I . e . , " L a d y o f l i f e " , a n a m e o f I s i s .

2 . 1 . e . , t h e m o u n t a i n o f t h e s u n s e t .



A HYMN TO THFSFTTLV(; SUN. 4 1

"th ou who art in peace . Thou art joined unto th e Eve of Tem,

" a n d i t c h o o s e t h ( 7 ) i t s p o w e r s o f p r o t e c t i o n [ t o p l a c e ] b e h i n d

"th y members . T h o u g o e s t f o r t h t h r o u g h h e a v e n , t h o u t r a v e l l e s t

"over th e earth , and th ou j ourncyest o nward . 0 Luminary,

"th e northern and south ern halves of h eaven come to thee and

" t h e y b o w l o w i n a d o r a t i o n , ( 8 ) a n d t h e y p a y h o m a g e u n t o t h e e ,

"day by day . The gods of Amentet rejoice in thy beauties and

" t h e u n s e e n p l a c e s s i n g h y m n s o f p r a i s e u n t o t h e e . Those who

"dwell in the S e k t e t boat (9) go round about t h ee, and th e

"Souls of the East pay ho mage to th ee, and when they meet thy

"Majesty th ey cry : `Come, come in peace!' There is a sh out

"of welcome to th ee ( i o ) , 0 lord of h eaven and governor of

"A mentet! Th ou art acknowledged by Isis wh o seet h h er son

" i n t h e e , t h e l o r d o f f e a r , t h e m i g h t y o n e o f t e r r o r . T h o u s e t t e s t

" a s a l i v i n g b e i n g ( i i ) i n t h e h i d d e n p l a c e . Thy father [ T a - ]

"tunen raiseth th ee up and he placeth both his h ands beh ind

" t h e e ;th ou becomest endowed with divine attributes in [thy]

"members of earth ; t h o u w a k e s t i n p e a c e a n d t h o u s e t t e s t ( i z )

"in Manu.r Grant t ho u th at I may become a being h onoured

"before Osiris, and th at I may come to th ee, 0 Ra-Tem! I have

" a d o r e d t h e e , t h e r e f o r e d o t h o u f o r m e t h a t w h i c h I w i s h . Grant

" t h o u ( i 3 ) t h a t I m a y b e v i c t o r i o u s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e c o m p a n y

" o f t h e g o d s . T h o u a r t b e a u t i f u l , 0 R a , i n t h y w e s t e r n h o r i z o n

"of Amentet, th ou lord of Maat, th ou mighty one of fear, thou

" w h o s e a t t r i b u t e s a r e m a j e s t i c , 0 t h o u w h o a r t g r e a t l y ( i , f ) b e -

l o v e d b y t h o s e w h o d w e l l i n t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) ; t h o u s h i n e s t

"with th y beams upon the beings that are therein perpetually,

" a n d t h o u s e n d e s t f o r t h t h y l i g h t u p o n t h e p a t h o f R e - s t a u . Tho u

"openest up the path of the double Lion-god, thou settest t he

" ( i 5 ) g o d s u p o n [ t h e i r ] t h r o n e s , a n d t h e Klutz i n t h e i r a b i d i n g

" p l a c e s . The h eart of Naarerf 2i s g l a d [ w h e n ] R a s e t t e t h , t h e

" h e a r t o f N a a r e r f i s g l a d w h e n R a s e t t e t h . "

"Hail, 0 ye gods of th e land of A mentet who make offerings

"and oblations unto (i6) Ra-Tem, ascribe ye glory [unto h im

t . L e, th e mountain of th e sunset .

2 . I . e, A n-rut-f, th e place where noth ing groweth .



4 2THE CHAPTERS OF COILING FORTH BY DAY .

"wh en] ye meet h im . Grasp ye your weapons and overth row ye

"t h e fiend Sebd on behalf o f Ra, and ( 1 7 ) repulse th e fiend Nebt

"on behalf of Osiris . The gods of t h e land of A mentet rejoice

"and lay hold upon the cords of t he S e k t e t boat, and th ey come

"in peace ; (r8) th e gods of th e h idden place who dwell in

"A mentet triumph . "

"Hail, Tho th , who didst make Osiris to t riumph o ver h is

"enemies, make th ou Mut-h etep, victorious, to triumph o ver her

"enemies (r9) in the presence of th e great divine sovereign chiefs

" w h o l i v e w i t h O s i r i s , t h e l o r d o f l i f e . The great god who dwell-

"eth i n his Dis k cometh fo rth, t hat is, Horns th e avenger of his

"fath er, Unnefer-Ra . ( 2 0 ) Osiris setteth, and th e Khu[s] who are

"in th e Tuat (underworld) say : Homage to t hee, 0 thou who

"comest as Tem, and who comest into being as th e creato r of

"the go ds . Homage to t hee, 0 thou who comest as th e holy

"Soul of souls, who dwellest in the h orizon . H o mag e t o t h ee

"who art mo re glorious than [all] th e gods and who illuminest

"th e Tuat with th ine Eve . Homage to th ee who sailest in thy

"glory and who goest round about in th y Disk . "

I I . The foll owing variant of th e above hymn is t ranslated from

th e t ext in th e Papyrus o f Nekht u-Amen (Naville, Todtenbuch,

Bd . i i . P . 23) .

ANOTHER CHAPTER OF THE MYSTERY OF THE TUAT (UNDER-

WORLD) AND OF TRAVERSING THE UNSEEN PLACES OF THE

UNDERWORLD, of seeing th e Disk when he sett eth in Amentet,

[wh en] h e is adored by th e go ds and by th e K l n t s of t he Tuat

(underworld), and [wh en] th e divine Khu which dwelleth within

Rd is made perfect . He setteth his migh t before Ra, he settet h

his power before Tem, [h e settet h his strength] before Khenti-

Amentet, and he set teth his terror before th e company of th e

gods . The Osiris of th e gods goeth as leader through th e Tuat

(underworld), he crasheth th rough mo untains, he bursteth th rough

rocks, he maketh glad (?) th e heart o f everv Kh u . This com-

positi on shall be recited by the deceased when he cometh forth

and when he goet h in with t he go ds, among whom h e findeth

no opposition ; th en sh all h e come forth by day in all th e



H1 _MIN TO RA -TE-11 .. f 3

m a n i f o l d and exceedingly numerous forms which h e may be

p l e a s e d t o t a k e . [ T h e O s i r i sa i t h : - ]

"A hymn of praise to Ra at eventide [when] he setteth as a

"living being in Baakha .r The great go d who dwelleth in his

"Disk riseth in his two eyesa and all the Khus of th e under-

" w o r l d r e c e i v e h i m i n h i s h o r i z o n o f A m e n t e t ; t h e y s h o u t p r a i s e s

" u n t o H e r u - k h u t i ( H a r m a c h i s ) i n h i s f o r m o f T e m , a n d t h e y s i n g

"hymns of j oy to Ra when th ey have received him at th e head

"of h is beautiful path of A mentet"

He (i . e . , t h e d e c e a s e d ) s a i t h : "Praise be unto th ee, 0 Ra,

"praise be unto t hee, 0 Tem, in th y splendid progress . Th o u

" h a s t r i s e n a n d t h o u h a s t p u t o n s t r e n g t h , a n d t h o u s e t t e s t l i k e

" a l i v i n g b e i n g a m i d t h y g l o r i e s i n t h e h o r i z o n o f A m e n t e t , i n

"th y domain wh ich is in Manu . Thy uraeus-goddess is behind

" t h e e ; t h y u r a e u s - g o d d e s s i s b e h i n d t h e e . H a i l t o t h e e , i n p e a c e ;

" h a i l t o t h e e , i n p e a c e . Thou jo inest th yself unto t he Eye of

" H o r n s , a n d t h o u h i d e s t t h y s e l f w i t h i n i t s s e c r e t p l a c e ; i t d e s -

" t r o v e t h f o r t h e e a l l t h e c o n v u l s i o n s o f t h y f a c e , i t m a k e t h t h e e

" s t r o n g w i t h l i f e , a n d t h ou l i v e s t . I t b i n d e t h i t s p r o t e c t i n g a m u l e t s

"beh ind th y members . T h o u s a i l e s t f o r t h o v e r h e a v e n , a n d t h o u

" m a k e s t t h e e a r t h t o b e s t a b l i s h e d ; t h o u j o i n e s t t h y s e l f u n t o t h e

"upper h eaven, 0 Luminary . The two regions of the East and

"West make adoratio n unto th ee, bo wing lo w and paying ho -

mage unto th ee and they praise t hee day by day ; t h e g o d s o f

"Amentet rejoice in thy splendid beauties . The h idden places

"adore thee, th e aged ones make offerings unto t hee, and th ey

" c r e a t e f o r t h e e p r o t e c t i n g p o w e r s . The divine beings who dwell

" i n t h e e a s t e r n a n d w e s t e r n h o r i z o n s t r a n s p o r t t h e e , a n d t h o s e

"who are in th e S e k t e t boat convey th ee round and about . The

"Souls of A mentet cry out unto t hee and say unto th ee when

" t h e y m e e t t h y m a j e s t y ( L i f e , H e a l t h , S t r e n g t h ! ) ` A l l h a i l , a l l

"hail!' When thou comest forth in peace th ere arise shouts of

" d e l i g h t t o t h e e , 0 t h o u l o r d o f h e a v e n , t h o u P r i n c e o f A m e n t e t .

i . I . e . , th e mountain of sunrise, but th e scribe appears to have written

Baakha instead of Manu .

2 . I. e ., th e Sun and the Moon .



4 4 THE CHAPTERS OF COJJIVG FORTH BY DAY .

"Thy moth er Isis embraceth th ee, and in th ee she recognizeth

" h e r s o n , t h e l o r d o f f e a r , t h e m i g h t y o n e o f t e r r o r . T h o u s e t t e s t

" a s a l i v i n g b e i n g w i t h i n t h e d a r k p o r t a l . Thv fath er Tatunen

" l i f t e t h t h e e u p a n d h e s t r e t c h e t h o u t h i s t w o h a n d s b e h i n d t h e e ;

"th ou becomest a divine being in th e earth . Tho u wakest as

" t h o u s e t t e s t , a n d t h y h a b i t a t i o n i s i n M a n u . Grant thou th at

"1 may be venerated before Osiris, and come th ou [ to me], 0

"Ra-Tem . Since th ou h ast been adored [by me] th at which I

"wish th ou sh alt do for me day by day . Grant th ou victory

"[unto me] before th e great company of t h e gods, 0 Ra who

"art doubly beautiful in th y horizon of Amentet, thou lord of

"Maat who dwellest in the h orizon . T h e f e a r o f t h e e i s g r e a t ,

"th y forms are majestic, and the love of th ee is great among

"th ose wh o dwell in the underworld . "

A Hymn to t he Setting Sun .

[ F r o m a P a p y r u s of th e XlXth d y n a s t y p re s e r v e d a t D u b l i n ( s e e N a v i l l e ,

Todtenbuch, B d . I . B l . t 9 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d a n d h i s w i f e s t a n d i n g w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d

i n a d o r a ti o n b e f o r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s , u p on w h i c h a r e a l i b a t i o n v a s e

a n d l o t u s f l o w e r s .

Text : ( t ) A HYMN OF PRAISE TO RA-HERU-(2)KIIUTt (RA -

HAR,MACIIIS) WHEN HE SETTETH IN (3) THE WESTERN PART

OF HEAVEN . He ( i . e . , t h e d e c e a s e d ) s a i t h : -

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , ( 4 ) 0 R a [ w h o ] i n t h y s e t t i n g a r t ( 5 ) T e m -

" H e r u - k h u t i ( T e m - H a r m a c h i s ) , t h o u d i v i n e g o d , t h o u s e l f - c r e a t e d

"(7) being, thou primeval matter [ from which all things were

"made] . When [th ou] appearest (8) in th e bows of [th y] bark

" m e n s h o u t f o r j o y a t ( g ) t h e e , 0 m a k e r o f t h e g o d s ! ( i o ) T h o u

" d i d s t s t r e t c h o u t t h e h e a v e n s w h e r e i n t h y t w o e y e s r m i g h t t r a v e l ,

" t h o u d i d s t m a k e t h e e a r t h t o b e a v a s t c h a m b e r f o r t h y Khus,

" s o t h a t ( i i ) e v e r y m a n m i g h t k n o w h i s f e l l o w . Th e S e k t e t b o a t

" i s g l a d , a n d t h e Matet b o a t r e j o i c e t h ; ( i 2 ) a n d t h e y g r e e t t h e e

1 . 1 . c . , th e Sun and Moo n .



IfYiLV TO RA-HiR_IACHI . S4 5

" w i t h e x a l t a t i o n a s t h o u j o u r n e v e s t a l o n g . T h e g o d N u i s c o n t e n t ,

" a n d t h y ( t 3 ) m a r i n e r s a r e s a t i s f i e d ; t h e u r a e u s - g o d d e s s h a t h o v e r -

" t h r o w n t h i n e e n e m i e s , a n d t h o u h a s t c a r r i e d o f f t h e l e g s o f A p e p .

" T h o u a r t b e a u t i f u l , (14) 0 Ra, each day, and thy mother Nut

" e m b r a c e t h t h e e ; t h o u s e t t e s t i n b e a u t y , a n d t h y h e a r t i s g l a d

" ( 1 5 ) in the horizon of Manu, and the h oly b eings therein re-

j o i c e . ( r 6 ) T h o u s h i n e s t t h e r e w i t h t h y b e a m s , 0 t h o u g r e a t g o d ,

" O s i r i s , t h e e v e r l a s t i n g P r i n c e . The lords of (r7) the zones of

" t h e T u a t i n t h e i r c a v e r n s s t r e t c h o u t t h e i r h a n d s i n a d o r a t i o n

" b e f o r e ( r 8 ) t h y Ka ( d o u b l e ) , a n d t h e y c r y o u t t o t h e e , a n d t h e y

" a l l c o m e f o r t h i n t h e t r a i n o f t h y f o r m s h i n i n g b r i l l i a n t l y . ( i y )

"The hearts of the lords of the Tuat (underworld) are gl ad

"when thou (20) s e n d e s t f o r t h t h y g l o r i o u s l i g h t i n A m e n t e t ;

" t h e i r t w o e y e s a r e d i r e c t e d t o w a r d s t h e e , ( 2 1 ) a n d t h e y p r e s s

" f o r w a r d t o s e e t h e e , a n d t h e i r h e a r t s r e j o i c e w h e n t h e y d o s e e

" t h e e . Thou hearkenest unto (22) t h e a c c l a m a t i o n s o f t h o s e t h a t

" a r e i n t h e f u n e r a l c h e s t , ' t h o u d o e s t a w a y w i t h t h e i r h e l p l e s s -

ness and drivest away the evils which are about (23) them .

" T h o u g i v e s t b r e a t h t o t h e i r n o s t r i l s a n d t h e y t a k e h o l d o f t h e

" b o w s o f t h y h a r k (24) i n t h e h o r i z o n o f M a n n . T h o u a r t b e a u t i -

ful each day, 0 Ra, and may thy mother Nut emb race Osiris

"2

v i c t o r i o u s . "

CHAPTER XVI .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M us . No . t o , , 1 7 o , s h e e t 2 ) . ]

The scene to which Lepsius inadvertently g ave the numb er

XVI and which he rega rded as a Chapter of the Book of the

D e a d i s , s t r i c t l y s p e a k i n g , o n l y a v i g n e t t e i n t e n d e d t o a c c o m -

pany the hymn to the rising S un that forms part of the intro-

ductory matter to th e Chapters of the Book of the Dead which

we find in some of the oldes t papyr i of the Theban pe riod .

r . I . e , t h e d e a d .

2 . The name of the deceased iswanting.



46 THE CJLIPTTRS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

I n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i w e s e e t h e S u n ' s d i s k s u p p o r t e d b y a p a i r

of arms which emer ge from the s ign of life ; t h i s , i n i t s t u r n ,

i s s u p p o r t e d b y t h e p i l l a r w h i c h s y m b o l i z e s t h e t r e e - t r u n k w h i c h

contained the dead body of Osiris . T h i s p i l l a r r e s t s u p o n t h e

h o r i z o n . O n e a c h s i d e o f i t a r e t h r e e a p e s t y p i c a l o f t h e S p i r i t s

of the Dawn, adoring the disk ; on the right is the goddes s

Nephthys and on the left is the g oddess Isis, Nephthys kneels

u p o n t h e s y m b o l o f t h e s u n s e t , a n d I s i s u p o n t h e s y m b o l o f t h e

d a w n . A b o v e t h e w h o l e s c e n e i s t h e v a u l t e d s k y . In the Papyrus

o f H u - n e f e rthe pillar is endowed with human arms and hands ,

w h i c h g r a s p t h e c r o o k a n d f l a i l , e m b l e m a t i c o f O s i r i s ' r e i g n a n d

rule, and the two g oddesses are standing upright ; o n e s a y s

"I am thy sister Nephthys", and the other : " I a m t h y s i s t e r

I s i s , t h e d i v i n e m o t h e r ." The sun is typ ified by a hawk ha ving

a disk, encircled by an uraeus, upon his head . The apes are

here sev en in number, four stand in front and three b ehind ;

a b o v e t h e w h o l e s c e n e i s t h e v a u l t e d s k y .

C e r t a i n p a p y r i h a v e a l s o v i g n e t t e s w h i c h i l l u s t r a t e t h e h y m n s t o

t h e s e t t i n g s u n . 2 I n t h i s c a s e t h e h a w k u s u a l l y s t a n d s u p o n t h e

em bl em of the West while ape s and god s adore him . In the

Papyrus o f Qenna on the right three hawk-headed gods k neel

i n a d o r a t i o n w i t h t h e i r l e f t a r m s r a i s e d , a n d o n t h e l e f t t h r e e

j a c k a l - h e a d e d g o d s , w i t h t h e i r r i g h t a r m s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n .

B e l o w , t w o l i o n - h e a d e d g o d s , w i t h d i s k s o n t h e i r h e a d s , a r e s e a t e d

b a c k t o b a c k i n a c l u s t e r o f l o t u s f l o w e r s ; t h e s e t y p i f y d a w n

a n d e v e n t i d e . T h e g o d d e s s I s i s k n e e l s i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e t h e

lion of the dawn, and the godde ss Ne phthys b efore the lion of

e v e n t i d e .

CHAPTER XV11 .

[ F r o m the Papyrus ofA n i

( B r i t . M u s . N o .7 0, 4 ; 0, s h e e t s

7 - 7 0 ). ]

Vign ette : P l a t e 7 . I . A n i a n d his w i f e s e a t e d in a h a l l ; l i e i s m o v i n g

a p i e c e o n a d r a u g h t - b o a r d ( s e e l i n e s 3 a n d 4 o f t h e t e x t ) .

i . B r i t . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 7 .

z . S e e N a v i l l e , Todtenbucl,, B d . I . B l . 2 2 .



THE VIA>A'ETTF,S OF THE SEVENTEENTH CHAPTER .

I I . T h e s o u l s o f A n i a n d h i s w i f e , i n t h e f o r m o f h u m a n - h e a d e d h a w k s ,

s t a n d i n g u p o n a p y l o n - s h a p e d b u i l d i n g ; t h e b e a r d e d s o u l i s d e s c r i b e d a s

" t h e s o u l o f O s i r i s " .

I I I . A table of offerings u pon which are lotu s flowers , a libation

v a s e , e t c .

IV . Two lions seated back to back and s upporting the horizon with

t h e s u n ' s d i s k , o v e r w h i c h e x t e n d s t h es k y;

h e l i o n o n t h e r i g h t i s c a l l e d

S c f , i . e . , " Y e s t e r d a y " , a n d t h a t o n t h e l e f t T u a u , i . e . , "To-morr ow"

( s e e l i n e s r 3 - r 6 o f t h e t e x t ) .

V. T h e B ennu b i r d a n d a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s ( s e e l i n e s z 6 - 3 o o f t h e t e x t ) .

VI . T h e m u m m y o f A n i o n a b i e r w i t h i n a f u n e r a l s h r i n e ; a t t h e h e a d

a n d f o o t a r e N e p h t h v s a n d I s i s i n t h e f o r m o f h a w k s . B e n e a t h t h e b i e r

a r e A n i ' s p a l e t t e , v a r i e g a t e d m a r b l e o r g l a s s v e s s e l s , e t c .

P l a t e 8 . I . T h e g o d o f " M i l l i o n o f y e a r s " ; o n h i s h e a d a n d i n h i s r i g h t

hand is the emblem of "years" . H i s l e f t h a n d i s s t r e t c h e d o u t o v e r a

p o o l c o n t a i n i n g t h e E v e o f H o r u s ( s e e l i n e 4 6 o f t h e t e x t ) .

I I . T h e g o d U a t c h e t - u r a ( i . e . , "Great Green Water"), with each hand

extended over a pool ; that under his right hand is called "Lake of

N a t r o n " , a n d t h a t u n d e r h i s l e f t h a n d , " L a k e o f N i t r e " ( s e e l i n e s 4 7 -5 0

o f t h e t e x t ) .

I I I . A p y l o n w i t h d o o r s , c a l l e d R e - s t a u , i . e . , t h e " G a t e o f t h e p a s s a g e s

o f t h e t o m b " ( s e e l i n e s 5 6 - 5 8 o f t h e t e x t ) .

IV . T h e U t c h a t , f a c i n g t o t h e l e f t , a b o v e a p y l o n ( s e e l i n e 7 3 o f t h e

t e x t ) .

V. T h e c o w " M e h - u r t t h e e v e o f R a " , w i t h d i s k a n d h o r n s , c o l l a r a n d

, n e n k t a n d w h i p ( s e e l i n e s 75-7g o f t h e t e x t ) .

VI . A funeral chest from which emerg e the head of Ra and his two

arms and hands , each holding the emb lem of life. T h e c h e s t , w h i c h i s

c a l l e d " t h e d i s t r i c t o f A b t u ( A b y d o s ) " , o r " t h e b u r i a l - p l a c e o f t h e E a s t " ,

h a s u p o n i t s s i d e s f i g u r e s o f t h e f o u r c h i l d r e n o f H o r n s , w h o p r o t e c t t h e

i n t e s t i n e s o f O s i r i s o r t h e d e c e a s e d . On the right stan d Tuamautef and

Qebhsennuf, and on the left Mestha and Hapi (see lines 8z and 8 3 of

t h e t e x t ) .

P l a t e g . I . F i g u r e s o f t h r e e g o d s w h o , t o g e t h e r w i t h A l e s t h a , H a p i ,

Tuamautef and Qebhs ennuf are the "seven T h u s " r e f e r r e d t o i n l i n e g g

o f t h e t e x t . Their names ar e : - M a a - a t e f - f , ' R h e r i - h e q - f , 2 and Heru-

k h e n t i - [ a n - ] m a a t i ( o r m e r t i ) . 3

I I . The god Anpu (Anubis) jackal -headed .

i . I e . , " H e w h o l o o k e t h u p o n h i s f a t h e r . "

2 . I L e . , " H e w h o i s u n d e r h i s o l i v e t r e e . "

3 . I L e . , " H o r u s i n b l i n d n e s s . "

4 7



TILE CHAPTERS OF CO.IIING FORTH BY DAY

I I I . Figures of seven gods, whose names are : N e t c h e h n e t c h e h , A a g e t-

qet, Kh enti-hch-fl Ami-unnu t-f, 2 Testier-maa, 3 B es-maa-em-k erh, 4 a n d

An-em-hr u s( s e e l i n e s 9 9 - i o ( J o f t h e t e x t ) .

IV . The soul of Rd, in the form of a hawk with a disk on his head ,

conversing in Tattu with the soul of Osiris in the form of a human-headed

bird wearing the white crown ; this scene is of the rarest occurrence (see

lines iii and zit o f t h e t e x t ) .

Plate to . I . The Cat, emblema tic of the Su n, cutting off the head of

the serpent Apep or Apepi, typical of darkness .

I I . Three seated deities, each holding a k nife .

I I I . Ani and his wife Thuthu, kne eling in adorat ion before the go d

Rhepera, beetle-headed, who is seat ed in the boat of the rising sun ( see

l i n e s 1 1 6 f f . o f t h e t e x t ) .

1 V . T w o a p e s , e m b l e m a ti c of t h e g o d d e s s e s I si s a n d N e p h t h y s ( s e e

l i n e s 1 2 4 a n d 1 2 5 o f t h e t e x t ) .

V . The god Tern, sea ted within the Sun-disk in the b oat of the set-

ting sun .

VI . The god Rchu, in the form of a lion (see l ine 133 of the text) .

VII . The serpent Uatchet, the l ady of flame, a s ymbol of the Eye of

Pa, coiled round a lotus flower . Above is the emb lem of fire .

CHAPTER XVII .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . N o .1 0 , 4 7 0 ,

sheets 7 -to), and from the

Papyrus of Nebs eni (Brit. Mus . No . 9 , g o o , s h e e t 1 4 , 1 . 1 6 f f. ) . ]

Text : ( i) HERE BEGIN THE PRAISES AND GLORIFYINGS OF

COMING OUT FROM AND OF GOING INTO THE GLORIOUS UNDER-

WORLD WHICH IS IN THE BEAUTIFUL AMENTET, OF COMING

OUT (2) BY DAY IN ALL THE FORMS OF EXISTENCE WHICH

PLEA S E_ HIM ( i . e . , THE DECEASED), OF PLAYING AT DRAUGHTS

AND SITTING IN THE HALL, AND OF COMING FORTH (3) AS A

LIVING SOUL . Saith Osiris, the s cribe Ani, (4 ) after he hath

c o m e t o h i s h a v e n o f r e s t - it i s g o o d f o r [ a m a n ] t o r e c i t e [ t h i s

1 . 1 e , "He dwelleth in his flame . "

2 . I L e ., "He who is in his hour . "

3 . L e ., "Red of both eyes . "

- I . I . c . , " F l a m e s e e i n g i n t h e n i g h t . "

~ . 1 c . . " B r i n g i n g b } - d a y . "



THE CHAPTER OF PRAISING AND GLORIFYING . 4 9

work whilst he is] upon earth, for [then] all the word s of (5)

T em c o m e t o p a s s :-

" I a m t h e g o d T e m i n ri s in g ; I a m t h e o n l y On e . I c a m e

"into existence in (6) Nu . I am Ra who ros e in the beginning,

"the ruler of . . . . t h i s . " ' ( 7 )

Who then is this?

I t is R d w hen at the b e gi nnin g he ro s e i n ( 8 ) the ci ty of

Suten-henen (Heracleopol is Mag na) crowned l ike a king in [his]

r i s i n g . The pillar s 2 o f t h e g o d S h u w e r e n o t a s y e t c r e a t e d ,

w h e n h e w a s ( 9 ) u p o n t h e h ig h g r o u n d 3 of him that dwel leth

in K h e m e n n u (He r m o p o li s M a g n a ) .

" I a m t h e g r e a t g o d w h o g a v e b i r t h t o h im s e l f , e v e n N u ,

"(io) w ho made hi s name [ s to b ecome] the company of the g od s

" a s g o d . "

Who then ( i t) is this?

It is Rd, the creato r of the name[s ] of his l imbs, which came

into being (t 2) in the form of the gods who are in the train of Ra .

" I a m h e w h o is n o t d r i v e n b a c k a m o n g t h e g o d s . " ( t 3 )

Who then is this?

It is Tem the dwell er in his disk, or ( as others say) , (i4) It

is Rd in his rising in the easte rn hor izon of heaven .

"I am Y es terda y ; I k n o w ( t 5 ) To-m o r r o w . "

Who then is this?

Y e s terday i s O si ris , ( t6 ) a nd T o-morrow i s R d on the day

when he s hall destroy the enemies of Neb-er-tcher, ( 1 7 ) a n d w h e n

he shal l estab lish as prince and ruler his son (t8) Horns, or

(as others say), on the day when we commem orate the festival

(ig) of the meeting of the dead Osiris with his father Rd, a n d

when the battl e of the ( 2 0 ) god s was foug ht in which Osiris,

the lord of Amentet, was the leade r .

What then is this? ( 2 1 )

It is Amentet, [that is to say] the creation of the soul s of the

god s when Osiris was l eader in Set-Amentet ; o r (22) ( a s o t h e r s

i . Var. "the ruler of what he bath made" (P apyrus of Nebseni) .

2 . IL e . , t h e c a r d i n a l p o i n t s .

3 . O r , " s t a i r - c a s e . "

}




s a y ) , i t is Amentet which Rd hath g iven unto me ; w hen any

g o d c o m e t h , h e d o t h a r i s e a n d ( 2 3 ) d o e t h b a t t l e f o r i t .

"I know the god who dwel leth therein . " ( 2 4 )

Who then is this?

I t i s O s i r i s ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , R d i s h i s n a m e , ( o r ) I t i s t h e

(25) phall us of Ra wherewith he was united to himsel f .

"I am the Bennu b i r d ( 2 6 ) w h i c h " i s i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , a n d

" I a m t h e k e e p e r o f t h e v o l u m e o f t h e b o o k o f t h i n g s w h i c h a r e

"and of things which shal l b e . "

Who then (27) is this?

I t i s O s i r i s ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s h i s d e a d b o d y , o r ( a s

o t h e r s s a y ) , ( 2 8 ) I t i s h i s f i l t h . The things which are and the

things which shall be are his dead body ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ,

( 2 9 ) T h e y a r e e t e r n i t y a n d e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s . E t e r n i t y i s t h e d a y ,

a n d e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s i s t h e ( 3 o ) n i g h t .

" I a m t h e g o d A m s u i n h i s c o m i n g f o r t h ; may his two p lumes

" ( 3 i ) be s et upon my head for me . "

Who then is this?

A m s u i s H o r n s , t h e a v e n g e r ( 3 2 ) o f h i s f a t h e r , a n d h i s c o m i n g

f o r t h i s h i s b i r t h . The plumes ( 33) upon his head are Isis and

N e p h t h v s w h e n t h e y g o f o r t h t o s e t t h e m s e l v e s ( 3 4 ) t h e r e , e v e n

as his protectors , and they provide that which his head ( 35)

l a c k e t h , o r ( a s . o t h e r s s a y ) , t h e y a r e t h e t w o e x c e e d i n g g r e a t

u r a e i w h i c h a r e u p o n t h e h e a d o f t h e i r f a t h e r ( 3 6 ) T e m , o r ( a s

others say) , his two eyes are the two plumes which are upon

h i s h e a d .

" O s i r i s A n i , ( 3 7 ) t h e s c r i b e o f a l l t h e h o l y o f f e r i n g s , r i s e t h

" u p i n h i s p l a c e i n t r i u m p h , h e c o m e t h i n t o ( 3 8 ) h i s c i t y . "

W h a t t h e n i s t h i s ?

I t i s t h e h o r i z o n o f h i s f a t h e r T e m . ( 3 g )

"I have made an end of my short-comings , and I have put

"away my faults . "

W h a t t h e n ( 4 0 ) i s t h i s ?

" I t i s t h e c u t t i n g o f f o f t h e c o r r u p t i b l e i n t h e b o d y o f O s i r i s ,

" t h e s c r i b e A n i , ( 4 i ) v i c t o r i o u s b e f o r e a l l t h e g o d s ; a n d a l l h i s

" f a u l t s a r e d r i v e n o u t .



THE CHAPTER OF PRAISING AND GLORIFYING

W h a t(42)

t h e n i s t h i s ?

I t i s t h e p u r i f i c a t i o n [ o f O s i r i s ] o n t h e d a y o f h i s b i r t h . ( 4 3 )

"I am purified in my grea t doub le nes t which is in Suten-

" h e n e n ( H e r a c l e o p o l i s M a g n a ) , ( 4 4 ) o n t h e d a y o f t h e o f f e r i n g s

" o f t h e f o l l o w e r s o f t h e g r e a t g o d w h o i s ( 4 5 ) t h e r e i n . "

What then is this?

" M i l l i o n s o f y e a r s " i s t h e n a m e o f t h e o n e [ n e s t ] , " G r e a t G r e e n

Lake" (46 ) is the name of the other ; a pool of natron, and a

p o o l o f n i t r e ( 4 7 ) ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , " T h e T r a v e r s e r o f m i l l i o n s

of years" is the name of one, "Great G reen Lake"( 4 8 ) i s t h e

n a m e o f t h e o t h e r ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , " T h e B e g e t t e r o f m i l l i o n s

of years" is the name of one, "Great Green Lake" (4 9) is the

n a m e o f t h e o t h e r . Now as concerning the great god who dwell -

e t h t h e r e i n , i t i s R d ( 5 o ) h i m s e l f .

" I p a s s o v e r t h e w a y , I k n o w t h e h e a d o f t h e P o o l o f M a a a t . "( 5 1 )

What then is this?

I t i s R e - s t a u ; t h a t i s t o s a y , i t i s t h e u n d e r w o r l d o n t h e ( 5 a )

s o u t h o f N a - a r u t - f , s a n d i t i s t h e n o r t h e r n d o o r o f t h e t o m b .

N o w a s c o n c e r n i n g ( 5 3 ) t h e P o o l o f M a a a t , i t i s A b t u ( A b v d o s ) ;

o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e b o a t b y w h i c h h i s f a t h e r (54) T e r n t r a -

v e l l e t h w h e n h e g o e t h f o r t h t o S e k h e t - A a r u , ( 5 5 ) w h i c h b r i n g e t h

forth the food and nourishment of the gods w ho are b ehind

[ t h e i r ] s h r i n e s . ( 5 6 ) N o w t h e g a t e o f T c h e s e r t i s t h e g a t e o f t h e

p i l l a r s o f S h u , ( 5 7 ) t h e n o r t h e r n g a t e o f t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) ;

o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e t w o l e a v e s o f t h e d o o r ( 5 8 ) t h r o u g h

which the god Tern pass eth when he goeth forth to the eastern

horizon of heaven . ( 5 9 )

"0 ye go ds who are in the pres ence [of Osiris], grant me

"your arms, for I am the god who ( 6o) s hall come into being

" among you . "

Who then are these?

They are the drops of blood which (6t) came forth from the

phall us of Ra when he wen t forth to perform mutilation (62 )

upon himself. They sprang into being as the gods Hu and S a,

i . Or An-rut-f, the "pl ace where nothing g rows" .

4 *

5 I



5 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAYY

who are in the follow ing (63) of Rd, and who accompany (64)

the god Tern daily and every day .

" I , O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , ( 6 5 ) h a v e f i l l e d f o r t h e e

" t h e U t c h a t a f t e r i t h a d s u f f e r e d f a i l u r e ( 6 6 ) o n t h e d a y o f t h e

"combat of the two Fighters " ( i . e . , Horus and Set) .

What then (67) is this?

I t i s t h e d a y o n w h i c h H o r u s f o u g h t w i t h S e t , ( 6 8 ) w h o c a s t

filth in the face of Horus, and when Horus d estroye d the mem-

b e r s ( 6 9 ) o f S e t . Now this Thoth did with his o wn fingers .

"I lift up the (70) hair[-cloud] when there are storms and

"quakings in the sk y . "

What then is this? (7 i)

I t i s t h e r i g h t E y e o f R d , w h i c h r a g e d a g a i n s t [ S e t ] w h e n ( 7 2 )

h e s e n t i t f o r t h .

Thoth raised up the hair[-cloud], and broug ht the Eye ( 73)

a l i v e , a n d w h o l e , a n d s o u n d , a n d w i t h o u t d e f e c t t o [ i t s ] l o r d ;

o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e E y e o f R d w h e n i t i s s i c k a n d w h e n

i t ( 7 4 ) w e e p e t h f o r i t s f e l l o w - e y e ; then Thoth standeth up to

c l e a n s e i t . ( 7 5 )

"I behol d Rd who was born yes terday from the buttocks of

" ( 7 6 ) t h e g o d d e s s M e h - u r t ; h i s s t r e n g t h i s m y s t r e n g t h , a n d m y

" s t r e n g t h i s h i s s t r e n g t h . "

W h a t t h e n i s t h i s ? ( 7 7 )

I t i s t h e w a t e r y a b y s s o f h e a v e n , o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e

i m a g e ( 7 8 ) o f t h e E v e o f R a i n t h e m o r n i n g a t h i s d a i l y b i r t h .

(79) Meh-urt is the Eye ( U t c h a t ) of Rd . T h e r e f o r e O s i r i s , ( 8 o )

the scribe Ani, triumphant, is a grea t one among the god s who

a r e i n t h e t r a i n o f ( 8 1 ) H o r u s . The words are spok en for him

t h a t l o v e t h h i s l o r d .

W h a t ( 8 2 ) t h e n i s t h i s ?

[ T h e g o d s w h o a r e i n t h e t r a i n o f H o r u s a r e ] M e s t h z i , H a p i ,

Tuamautef, and Qebhs ennuf .

(83) "Homage to you, 0 ye lords of right and truth, ye so-

v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o [ s t a n d ] b e h i n d O s i r i s , w h o u t t e r l y d o a w a y

"with (84) sins and crimes and who are in the foll owing of

" t h e g o d d e s s H e t e p - s e k h u s , ( 8 5 ) g r a n t [ y e ] t h a t I m a y c o m e u n t o




" y o u . D e s t roy ye [a l l] the f au l t s w hich ( 8 6 ) are wi thin me,

" e ven a s ye di d for the s e ven Khus ( 8 7 ) w h o a r e a m o n g t h e

"followers of their lord Sep a . Anubis app ointed (8 8) their pl ace

"on the d ay [when was s aid], `Come therefore thither' . "

When then (89) is this?

These l ords of right and truth are Thoth and (g o) Astes, the

lord of Amentet . The sover eign princes [who stand] behind Osiris,

even M estha, (gi) I-Iapi, Tuamautef, and Qebhs ennuf, are they

w ho are ( 92 ) b ehi nd the Thig h i n the northern s k y .

N o w t h o s e w h o d o u t t e r l y a w a y w i t h ( 9 3 ) s i n s a n d c r im e s

and who are in the following of Hetep-sekhus (9a ) are the god

S e b e k w h o d w e l l e t h i n t h e w a t e r .

The godd ess Hetep-sekh us is the Eye of (95 ) Rd ; o r ( a s o t h e r s

say) , it is the flame which followeth after Osiris to burn up ( 96)

the soul s of his enemies .

As concerning all the faults which are in (97) Osiris, the scribe

of the offerings of all the g ods, Ani, triumphant, [this is all

that he hath done aga inst the lords of eternity I ] since he came

forth f rom ( g 8 ) his mother' s w om b .

As concerni n g the S e ven Khu s ( g g ) , even M estha, Hapi, Tua-

maute f, Qebhs ennuf, (ioo) Maa-atef-f, Kheri-beq-f, and Heru-

khen ti-[an]maati, (ioi) Anubis appointed them to b e protec tors

of the dead body of Osiris or (as others say) , [set them] (102)

be hind the p la ce of purification of Osiris ; or (as others say),

t h o s e S e v e n Khus are ( io3) Netcheh-netchch, Aatqetqet, An-

ert a-nef-be s-f-kh ent i-heh -(io4) f, Aq-her -ami-unn ut-f, Teshe r-

maati-ami-(so 5)het -Anes, Ubes-hra-per-em-khet-khet, and (io6)

Maa -em-kerb -an-nef-cm-hru . The chief of the sove reign princes

(10 7) w ho are in Na-arut-f is Horus, the a veng er of his father .

As c o n c e r n i n g ( z o 8 ) t h e d a y [ u p o n w h i c h w a s s a id], " C o m e

therefore thither," it referreth to the words , "Come (iog) t hen

thither," which Ra spake unto Osiris . Lo, may this be s aid unto

m e i n Am e n t e t !

" I a m t h e d i v in e S o u l w h i c h d w e l l e t h i n t h e t w o d i v i n e

Tchafz" . ( i i o )

i . The N e b s e n i P a p y r u s i s the authority f o r t h e s e w o r d s .



5 4 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY

What then is this?

I t i s O s i r i s [ w h e n ] h e g o e t h i n t o T a t t u ( i i i ) a n d f i n d e t h t h e r e

the Soul of Rd ; there the one god embraceth ( 1 1 2 ) t h e o t h e r ,

a n d d i v i n e s o u l s s p r i n g i n t o b e i n g w i t h i n t h e t w o d i v i n e T c h a f i .

[The f o l l o w i n g l i n e s a r e from the Papyrus of Nebs eni (Brit. Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 ,

s h e e t1 4 ,

1 . i 6 f f . ) . ]

( 1 6 ) A s c o n c e r n i n g t h e t w o d i v i n e Te h a f i t h e y a r e I; I e r u - n e t e h -

h r a - t e f - f(17)

and Heru-khent-an-maati ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , t h e

doubl e divine Soul which dwell eth in the two divine T c h a f i i s

t h e S o u l o f R d a n d t h e S o u l o f O s i r i s ; [ o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , ] I t i s

the Soul ( i8) which dwell eth in Shu, [and] the Soul which

d w e l l e t h i n T e f n u t , a n d t h e s e a r e t h e d o u b l e d i v i n e S o u l w h i c h

d w e l l e t h i n T a t t u .

"I am the Cat which fought( ?) hard by the P ersea tree ( ig)

" i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , o n t h e n i g h t w h e n t h e f o e s o f N e b - e r - t c h e r

"were destroyed . "

Who then is this?

The male Cat is Rd ( 2 0 ) h i m s e l f , a n d h e i s c a l l e d ' M a u ' b y

r e a s o n o f t h e s p e e c h o f t h e g o d S a , [ w h o s a i d ] c o n c e r n i n g h i m

" H e i s l i k e ( m d u ) unto that which he hath made" ; t h u s h i s n a m e

became 'Maau' ; I o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , i t i s t h e g o d (21) S h u w h o

m a k e t h o v e r t h e p o s s e s s i o n s o f S e b t o O s i r i s .

As concerning the fight ( ? ) hard by th e Perse a tree in Annu,

i t c o n c e r n e t h t h e c h i l d r e n o f i m p o t e n t r e v o l t w h e n ( 2 2 ) j u s t i c e

is wrought on them for what they have do ne .

A s c o n c e r n i n g t h e n i g h t o f t h e b a t t l e [ t h e s e w o r d s r e f e r t o ] t h e

i n r o a d [ o f t h e c h i l d r e n o f i m p o t e n t r e v o l t ] i n t o t h e e a s t e r n p a r t

o f h e a v e n , w h e r e u p o n t h e r e a r o s e a b a t t l e i n h e a v e n a n d i n a l l

t h e e a r t h .

"0 thou who art in thine egg ( 2 3 ) ( i . e . , R d ) , w h o s h i n e s t

"from thy Disk and risest in thy horizon, and dos t shine like

"gold above the sk y, like unto whom there is none among the

" g o d s , w h o s a i l e s t o v e r t h e p i l l a r s (24) o f S h u ( i . e . , i n t h e e t h e r ) ,

" w h o g i v e s t b l a s t s o f f i r e f r o m t h y m o u t h , [ w h o m a k e s t t h e t w o

" l a n d s b r i g h t w i t h t h y r a d i a n c e , d e l i v e r ] t h o u t h e p i o u s N e b s e n i

i . This is a very ancient pun on the words man "cat" and mdu " l i k e " .



THE_ CHAPTER OF PRAISING AND GLORIFYING .5 5

"from the god ( 25) whos e form is hidden, whose eyebrows are

" l i k e u n t o t h e t w o a r m s o f t h e B a l a n c e o n t h e n i g h t o f r e c k o n i n g

" d e s t r u c t i o n . "

Who then is this?

I t i s A n - a - f ( i . e . , the god w ho bringeth his arm) . (26)

A s c o n c e r n i n g " t h e n i g h t o f r e c k o n i n g d e s t r u c t i o n " , i t i s t h e

night of the burning of the damned, and of the overthrow of

w i c k e d a t t h e b l o c k , ( 2 7 ) a n d o f t h e s l a u g h t e r o f s o u l s .

Who then is this?

I t i s N e m u , t h e h e a d s m a n o f O s i r i s , o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s

Apep when he riseth up with one head bearing M aat ( i . e . , r i g h t

a n d t r u t h ) [ u p o n i t ] ; ( 2 8 ) o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s H o r u s w h e n

h e r i s e t h u p w i t h a d o u b l e h e a d , w h e r e o f t h e o n e b e a r e t h r i g h t

a n d t r u t h a n d t h e o t h e r w i c k e d n e s s . ( 2 9 ) He bes toweth wicked-

ness on him that worketh wickedness, and right and truth upon

h i m t h a t f o l l o w e t h r i g h t e o u s n e s s a n d t r u t h ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y s ) ,

I t i s H o r u s t h e G r e a t w h o ( 3 o ) d w e l l e t h i n S e k h e m ( L e t o p o l i s ) ;

o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s T h o t h ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s N e f e r -

Tern ; [ o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , ] I t i s S e p t w h o d o t h t h w a r t t h e a c t s

o f t h e f o e s o f N e b - e r - t c h e r .

" D e l i v e r t h o u t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , v i c t o r i o u s , f r o m t h e W a t c h e r s

" w h o b e a r s l a u g h t e r i n g k n i v e s , a n d w h o h a v e c r u e l f i n g e r s , a n d

"who s lay thos e who are in the foll owing of Osiris . ( 3 r ) M a y

"they never g ain the mastery= over me, may I never fall under

" t h e i r k n i v e s . "

What then is this :

I t i s A n u b i s , a n d i t i s H o r u s i n t h e f o r m o f K h e n t - ( 3 2 ) , i n -

m a a t i ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o t h w a r t

the works of their weapons ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , I t i s t h e c h i e f s

o f t h e S h e n i u chamber .

"May ( 33) their knives never g ain the mastery over me, may

" I n e v e r f a l l u n d e r t h e i r i n s t r u m e n t s o f c r u e l t y , f o r ( 3 4 ) I k n o w

"their names, and I know the being M atchet who is among them

" i n t h e H o u s e o f O s i r i s , s h o o t i n g r a y s o f l i g h t f r o m [ h i s ] e y e , b u t

" w h o h i m s e l f i s u n s e e n . ( 3 5 ) H e g o e t h r o u n d a b o u t h e a v e n r o b e d

"in the flame of his mouth, commanding Hapi, b ut remaining




" h i m s e l f u n s e e n . M ay I be strong upon earth before Rd, may

"I come happily into haven (36 ) in the presen ce of Osiris .

"Let not your offerings be wanting to me, 0 v e who pres ide

"over your altars, for I am among those who follow after Neb-

" e r - t c h e r a c c o r d i n g t o t h e w r i t i n g s ( 3 7 ) o f K h e p e r a . I f l y a s a

" h a w k , I c a c k l e a s a g o o s e ; I e v e r s l a y , e v e n a s t h e s e r p e n t - g o d -

"dess Neheb-ka . "

What then is this? (38)

T h o s e w h o p r e s i d e o v e r t h e i r a l t a r s a r e t h e s i m i l i t u d e o f t h e

Eye of Rd and the s imilitude of the Eye of Horns .

" O R a - ( 3 9 ) T e r n , t h o u l o r d o f t h e G r e a t H o u s e , ' t h o u S o v e -

r e i g n ( L i f e , S t r e n g t h a n d H e a l t h ! ) o f a l l t h e g o d s , d e l i v e r t h o u

" t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , v i c t o r i o u s , f r o m t h e g o d w h o s e f a c e ( 4 0 ) i s

"like unto that of a greyhound, whose brows are as those of a

"man and who feedeth upon the dead, who watcheth at the

"Bight of the Lake (4 1) of Fire, and who devoureth the bodies

"of the dead and swal loweth hearts , and who shooteth forth

" f i l t h , b u t h e h i m s e l f r e m a i n e t h u n s e e n . "

Who then is (4 2) this?

" D e v o u r e r f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s " i s h i s n a m e , a n d h e l i v e t h

i n t h e A a t . 2 A s c o n c e r n i n g t h e A a t , i t i s t h a t w h i c h i s i n A n -

r u t - f , h a r d b y ( 4 3 ) t h e Shen iu c h a m b e r . The unclean man who

would wal k thereover doth fall dow n among the knives ; o r ( a s

o t h e r s s a y ) , H i s n a m e i s " M a t e s " , 3( 4 4 )

and he is the Watcher

of the door of Amentet ; o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , H i s n a m e i s " B e b a "

and it is he who watcheth the Bight of Amentet ;

s a y ) , " H e r i - s e p - f " i s h i s n a m e .

" H a i l , L o r d o f t e r r o r , c h i e f o f t h e l a n d s

"South, thou lord of the red glow (or red

" p r e p a r e s t t h e s l a u g h t e r - b l o c k , a n d w h o d o s t

" w a r d p a r t s ! "

Who then is this?

The guardian of the Bight of Amentet . ( 4 6 )

t . I . e . , t h e g r e a t t e m p l e o f R a i n H e l i o p o l i s .

2 . Va r . "and he dwelleth in the Lake of Unt . "

3 . 1 . e . , "he who ha th the knife . "

o r ( a s o t h e r s

of the North and

lands), (45) who

feed upon t h e i n -




What then is this?

I t i s t h e h e a r t o f O s i r i s , w h i c h i s t h e d e v o u r e r o f a l l s l a u g h t e r e d

things. The Ureret crown hath been given unto him with glad-

ness of heart as l ord of Suten-henen (Heracleopolis Magna) .

What then (47 ) is this?

He t o w h o m h a t h b e e n g iv e n t h e Ureret crown with gl adnes s

of heart as lord of Suten-henen is Osiris . He was bidden to rule

amon g the g od s on the day of the uni on of earth ( 4 8 ) i n the

presence of Neb-er-tcher .

What then is this?

He t h a t w a s b i d d e n t o r u l e a m o n g t h e g o d s is [H o r u s ] t h e

son of Isis, who was ap pointed to rule in the place of his father

( 4 9 ) O s i r i s . As concern ing the "day of the union of earth with

earth", it is the mingling of earth with earth in the coffin of

Osiris, the Soul that l iveth in Suten-henen, the g iver of meat

and drink, the destroyer of wrong, and the g uide of the ever-

lasting paths .

Who then is this?

It is Rd himsel f .

"Del iver thou the Osiris Nebsen i, victorious,"

[The following l ines are from the Papyr us of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 i 4 7 0 ,

s h e e t 1 0, 1 . 7 f f . ) . ]

"(i 13) from the great god who carrieth away the soul, who eateth

"hearts, and who feedeth upon 0 4 ) offal, th e guard ian of the

" da rk ne ss , th e d we ll er in th e S e k er boat ; thos e who live in

"crime [115 1 fear him . "

Who then is this?

It is Sut i, or (as others say) , It is Sma m-ur, ( 1 1 6 ) the soul

of Seb .

"Hail, Khepera in thy b oat, the two-fold com pany of the go ds

"is thy bo dy! Deliver tho u Osiris( I

17 ) Ani, victorious, from the

" Watcher s w ho gi ve j ud g ment, w ho have b een ap poi nted b y the

"god Neb -er-tcher 01 8) t o protect him and to fasten the fet-

ters on his foes, and who sl aughter in the (r i9) shamb les ;

"there is no escape from their gras p . M a y t h e y n e v e r s t a b m e

"with their knives, ( i 2 o ) may I never fall he lpl ess into their





ADORATION OF' THE GODS OF' CITIES .

" a r e g i v e n t o t h e e f o r t h y d e l i g h t . ( 1 3 9 ) T h o u h a s t c r e a t e d t h a t

"which is in Kher-ab a and that which is in Annu (Heliopolis) .

" E v e r y g o d f e a r e t h t h e e , f o r t h o u a r t e x c e e d i n g g r e a t a n d t e r r i b l e

" t h o u [ a v e n g e s t ] e v e r y ( 1 4 o ) god on the man that curs eth him,

"and thou shootest out arrowsh o u l i v e s t a c c o r d i n g t o

" t h y w i l l ; thou art Uatchet, the Lady of Flame . Evil cometh

"(141 ) among those who s et themselves up against thee . "

What then is this?

"Hidden in form, gran ted of ( 1 4 2 ) Menhu", is the name of

the tomb . " H e s e e t h w h a t i s o n h i s h a n d " i s t h e n a m e o f Q e r a u ;

o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , ( 1 4 3 ) t h e n a m e o f t h e b l o c k .

Now he whos e mouth shineth and whose head moveth is the

m e m b e r o f O s i r i s , o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ( 1 4 4 ) o f R d . "Thou spreadest

t h y h a i r a n d I s h a k e i t o u t o v e r h i s b r o w " i s s p o k e n c o n c e r n i n g

Isis, who hideth in her hair (14 5) and draweth her hair over

h e r . Uatchet, th e Lady of Fl ames , is the Eye of Ra .

CHAPTER XVIII. - INTRODUCTION .

[ F rom t h e Papyrus of Ani (Brit. Mus . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vigne tte : ( U p p e r r e g i s t e r ) : T h e p r i e s t A n - m a u t - f , w h o w e a r s a l e o -

p a r d ' s s k i n , a n d h a s o n t h e r i g h t s i d e o f h i s h e a d t h e l o c k o f h a i r o f

H e r u - p a - k h ra t ( H a r p o c r a t e s ) , i n t r o d u c i n g A n i a n d h i s w i f e t o t h e g o d s .

I . Text : [The Sp eech of S a-mer-f] (1 ) "I have come unto

" y o u , 0 g r e a t a n d g o d l i k e s o v e r e i g n r u l e r s w h o d w e l l i n h e a v e n ,

"and in earth, and (2) in the underworld, and I have broug ht

"unt o you Osiris Ani . He hath not sinned against any of the

"gods . Grant ye t hat he may be with you for all time . "

I I . ANI'S SPEECH :-

( 1 ) THE ADORATION OF OSIRIS, THE LORD OF RE-STAU, AND

OF THE GREAT COMPANY OF THE GODS WHO DWELL IN THE

UNDERWORLD, By OSIRIS THE SCRIBE ANI (2) who s aith :-

"Homage to thee, 0 thou ru ler of Amentet, Un-nefer in Abtu

"(Abydos )! I have come unto thee, and my heart hol deth right

5 9




"and truth . There is no ( 3) s in in my body ; n o r h a v e I l i e d

" w i t t i n g l y , n o r h a v e I d o n e a u g h t w i t h a f a l s e h e a r t . G r a n t t h o u

"to me food in the tomb , (4 ) and tha t I may come forth into

" [ t h y ] p r e s e n c e a t t h e a l t a r o f t h e l o r d s o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h , a n d

"that I may enter into and come forth from the underworld,

"and that my soul be not turned back, and that I may behold

"the face of the Sun, and that I may behol d the (5) Moon for

" e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . "

Vign ette : ( L o w e r r e g i s t e r : T h e p r i e s t S a - m e r - f , w h o w e a r s a l e o p a r d ' s

s k i n , a n d h a s o n t h e r i g h t s i d e o f h i s h e a d t h e l o c k o f h a i r o f H e r u - p a -

k h r a t ( H a r p o c r a t e s ) , i n t r o d u c i n g A n i a n d h i s w i f e t o t h e g o d s .

I I I . Text : [The Speech of Sa-mer-f] "I have come unto you,

"0 sov ereign princes who dwel l in Re-stau, and I have brou ght

" u n t o y o u O s i r i s ( 2 ) Ani . G r a n t y e [ t o h i m ] , a s t o t h e f o l l o w e r s

" o f H o r u s , c a k e s , a n d w a t e r , a n d a i r , a n d a h o m e s t e a d i n S e k h e t -

" b e t e p . "

AN I'S S PEECH

IV . ( I ) THE ADORATION OF OSIRIS, LORD OF EVERLASTING-

NESS, AND OF THE SOVEREIGN PRINCES, THE LORDS OF RE-

STAU, BY OSIRIS, [THE SCRIBE ANI], ( 2 ) who saith :-

"Homage to thee, 0 king of the underworld, thou g overnor

"of Akert, I have come un to thee . I know thy ways, (3) and

" I a m f u r n i s h e d w i t h t h e f o r m s w h i c h t h o u t a k e s t i n t h e u n d e r -

world . Grant thou to me a pl ace in the underworld near unto

" t h e l o r d s o f ( 4 ) r i g h t a n d t r u t h . M ay my homestead be ab iding

" i n S e k h e t - h e t e p , a n d m a y I r e c e i v e c a k e s i n t h y p r e s e n c e . "

CHAPTER XV l I I .

[ F r o m the Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t t 3 ) ; and from the

Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 10,470, s heets t3-t4) . ]

Vignett es : A p y l o n s u r m o u n t e d b y f e a t h e r s t y p i c a l o f M a a t a n d b y

u r a e i w e a r i n g d i s k s , a n d a p y l o n s u r m o u n t e d b y A n p u ( A n u b i s ) o r

A p - u a t , a n d b y a n Utchat .



ADORATION OF THE GODS OF CITIES . 6 1

Text : (i) "Hail, Thoth, who made st Osiris victorious ( 2 ) o v e r

"his enemies, make thou the scribe Neb s eni to be victorious over

" hi s enemi e s , a s t hou di d s t ma k e O siri s vi ctoriou s o ver hi s

"enemies in the pres ence of the (3) sove reign princes who ar e

"with Ra and Osiris in Annu ( Heliopolis), on the night of the

"'things of the night', and on th e night of the batt le, ( 4) an d

"on the night of the shack ling of the S e b d u fiends, and on th e

"day of the des truction of Neb-er-tcher . "

A . Vigne tte : The gods Tem, S hu, Tefnut, Osiris, and Thoth .

Te x t : (i) The great so vereign princes in Annu are Tem, Shu ,

Tefnut, [Osiris, and Thoth], ( 2 ) and the `shackl ing of the S e b d u

fiends ' signifieth the des truc tion of the fiends of Set when a

second time (3) he worketh evil .

"Hail, Thoth, who mad est Osiris victorious over his enemies,

"make t hou the Osiris (4 ) Ani to be v ictorious ov er his enemies

"in the presence of the great an d sover eign princes who are in

"Tattu, on the night of making the 7e , to stand up in Tattu .

B . Vignette : T h e g o d s O s i r i s , I s i s , N e p h t h y s , a n d H o r u s .

Text : (r) The great so vere ign princes in Tattu are Osiris,

Isis, Nephthys, and Heru-netch-hra-tef .r Now the [night of] of

ma ki n g the T et to s tand up ( 2 ) in Tattu signifieth [the lifting

u p of] the arm and s hou l der of Horn s w ho dw e l l e th i n S e k hem

( L e t o p o l i s ) ; and these g ods stand behind Osiris [to prote ct him]

e ven a s do the s w athi n g s w hi ch c l othe hi m ( 3 ) .

"Hail, Thoth, who made st Osiris victorious over his enemies,

"make thou Osiris Ani triumphant over his enemies in the pre-

sence of (4) th e sovereign princes who are in Sekhem ( Leto-

"pol is), on t he night of the `things of the night [ festival] in

" S e k h e m ' . "

C . Vigne tte : T h e g o d s O s i r i s a n d H o r u s , t h e t w o U t c h a t s u p o n p y l o n s ,

and the g od Thoth .

Text : (i) The great s overeign princes who are in Sekhem are

Heru-khenti-an-maati, 2 and Thoth who is with the sover eign

i . I. e . , "Horn s, the av en g er of his father . "

2 . I , e . , " H o r n s d w e l l i n g w i t h o u t e y e s . "




p r i n c e s i n N a r e r u t - f I (2) . Now the night of the "things o f the

n i g h t [ f e s t i v a l ] i n S e k h e m " s i g n i f i e t h t h e l i g h t o f t h e r i s i n g s u n

o n t h e c o f f i n o f O s i r i s .

"Hail, Thoth, who made st Osiris victorious ( 3) ove r his

" e n e m i e s , m a k e t h o u t h e O s i r i s A n i t r i u m p h a n t o v e r h i s e n e m i e s

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o a r e i n P e t

"and in Tept,- on the (4) night of setting up the col umns of

"Horus, and of making him to be es tabl ished as heir of the

" t h i n g s w h i c h b e l o n g e d t o h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s . "

D . Vign ette : T h e g o d s H o r u s , I s i s , N I e s t h d , a n d N e p h t h y s .

Text : (i) The great sovereign princes who are in Pet and

Tept are Horus, Isis, Mes tha, and H a p i . Now "setting up the

co lumn s of ( 2 )Horus" signifieth the command given b y Set

u n t o h i s f o l l o w e r s : "Set up columns upon it . "

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s v i c t o r i o u s o v e r ( 3 ) h i s e n e -

m i e s , m a k e t h o u t h e O s i r i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t i n p e a c e , v i c t o r i o u s

" o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s

" w h o a r e i n t h e l a n d s o f R e k h t i , ( ? ) o n t h e ( 4 ) n i g h t w h e n I s i s

"lay dow n to keep w atch in order to make lamentation for her

" b r o t h e r O s i r i s . "

E . Vign ette : T h e g o d s I s i s , H o r u s , A n p u ( A n u b i s ) , M e s t h a , a n d T h o t h .

Text : (i) The great sovereign princes who are in the lands

o f R e k h t i ( ? ) a r c I s i s , H o r u s [ , A n u b i s ] , M e s t h a , [ a n d T h o t h ] .

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s v i c t o r i o u s ( 2 ) o v e r h i s e n e -

mies, make t hou Osiris, th e scribe Ani, triumphant in peace,

" t o b e v i c t o r i o u s o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t

"sovereign princes ( 3) who are in Abtu ( Abydos) , on the night

" o f t h e g o d H a k e r , a t t h e s e p a r a t i o n o f t h e w i c k e d d e a d , a t t h e

"judgment (4 ) of the Khu s , a n d a t t h e r i s i n g u p o f j o y i n T e n i

" ( T h i s ) .

F . Vign ette : T h e g o d s O s i r i s , I s i s , a n d A p - u a t , a n d t h e T e t .

Text : (i) The great sovereign princes who are in Abtu are

O s i r i s , I s i s , a n d A p - u a t .

1 . I . e . , A n - r u t - f .

2. P e t a n d T e p t w e r e t h e t w o h a l v e s o f t h e c i t y P e r - U a t c h e t , o r t h e m e t r o -

polis of the XIXth nome of Lower Egypt .



ADORATION OF THE GODS OF CITIES . 6 3

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s v i c t o r i o u s ( 2 ) o v e r h i s e n e -

m i e s , m a k e t h o u O s i r i s A n i , t h e s c r i b e a n d t e l l e r o f t h e s a c r e d

" o f f e r i n g s o f a l l t h e g o d s , ( 3 ) t o b e v i c t o r i o u s o v e r h i s e n e m i e s

"in the pres ence of the sovereign princes who judge the dead,

" o n t h e n i g h t ( 4 ) o f t h e c a r r y i n g o u t o f t h e s e n t e n c e u p o n t h o s e

"who are to die . "

G . Vign ette : T h e g o d s T h o t h , O s i r i s , A n p u ( A n u b i s ) , a n d A s t e n n u .

Text : ( t ) T h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s i n t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e

d e a d a r e T h o t h , O s i r i s , A n u b i s , a n d A s t e n n u. ( 2 ) N o w t h e " c a r r y -

i n g o u t o f t h e s e n t e n c e u p o n t h o s e w h o a r e t o d i e " i s t h e w i t h -

h o l d i n g o f t h a t w h i c h i s s o n e e d f u l t o t h e s o u l s o f t h e c h i l d r e n

o f i m p o t e n t r e v o l t .

" H a i l , ( 3 ) T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s v i c t o r i o u s o v e r h i s e n e -

m i e s , m a k e t h o u O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , t o b e v i c t o r i o u s o v e r

" h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t ( 4 ) s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s ,

" o n t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e b r e a k i n g a n d t u r n i n g u p o f t h e e a r t h i n

"Tattu, on the night of the break ing and turning up of the

"earth in their blood, and of making Osiris to be v ictorious

" o v e r h i s e n e m i e s . "

H . Vignett e : T h e t h r e e g o d s o f t h e f e s t i v a l o f b r e a k i n g up t h e e a r t h

i n T a t t u .

Text : (i) When the fiends of Set come and chang e them-

s e l v e s i n t o b e a s t s , t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s , o n t h e f e s t i v a l o f

t h e b r e a k i n g a n d t u r n i n g u p o f t h e e a r t h i n T a t t u , ( 2 ) s l a y t h e m

in the presence of the gods therein, and their blood floweth

among them as they are smitten down . ( 3) These things are

allowed to b e done by them by the judgment of those who are

i n T a t t u .

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s ,

" m a k e t h o u t h e O s i r i s A n i ( 4 ) t o b e v i c t o r i o u s o v e r h i s e n e m i e s

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o a r e i n N a -

" a r e r u t - f , r o n t h e n i g h t o f h i m w h o c o n c e a l e t h h i m s e l f i n d i v e r s

" f o r m s , e v e n O s i r i s . "

i . I . e . , An-rut-f .




I . Vignett e : T h e g o d s R d , O s i r i s , S h u , a n d B e b i , w h o i s d o g - h e a d e d .

Text : ( I ) T h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o a r e i n N a - a r e r u t - f

are Rd, Osiris, Shu, and Be bi . Now the "night of him who

( 2 ) c o n c e a l e t h h i m s e l f i n d i v e r s f o r m s , e v e n O s i r i s " , i s w h e n t h e

t h e t h i g h , [ a n d t h e h e a d ] a n d t h e h e e l , a n d t h e l e g , a r e b r o u g h t

n i g h u n t o t h e c o f f i n o f O s i r i s U n - n e f e r .

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s ( 3 ) t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e -

mies, make thou Osiris Ani to be v ictorious over his e nemies

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s i n ( 4 ) R e - s t a u ,

" o n t h e n i g h t w h e n A n u b i s l a y w i t h h i s a r m s a n d h i s h a n d s o v e r

"the things b ehind Osiris, and when Horus was made to triumph

" o v e r h i s e n e m i e s . "

J . Vign ette : T h e g o d s H o r u s , O s i r i s , I s i s , a n dText : ( I) T h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s i n R e - s t a u a r e H o r u s ,

O s i r i s , a n d I s i s . T h e h e a r t o f O s i r i s r e j o i c e t h , a n d t h e h e a r t o f

( 2 ) Horus ; and therefore are the northern and southern part s

of heaven at peace .

" H a i l , T h o t h , w h o m a d e s t O s i r i s v i c t o r i o u s o v e r h i s e n e m i e s ,

" m a k e t h o u ( 3 ) O s i r i s A n i , t h e s c r i b e a n d t e l l e r o f t h e d i v i n e

" o f f e r i n g s o f a l l t h e g o d s , t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e

"presence of the ten companies of great (4 ) sovereign princes

"who ar e with Rd, and with Osiris, and w ith every go d and

"goddes s in the presence of Neb-er-tcher . He hath destroyed

"his enemies, and (5 ) he hath destroye d every evil thing b e-

"long ing unto him . "

Rubr ic : THIS CHAPTER BEING RECITED, THE DECEASED SHALL COME

FORTH BY DAY, PURIFIED AFTER DEATH, (6) AND IHE SHALL MAKE ALL]

THE TRANSFORMATIONS WHICH HIS HEART SHALL DICTATE . NOW, IF

THIS CHAPTER BE RECITED OVER HIM, HE SHALL COME FORTH UPON

EARTH, HE SHALL ESCAPE FROM EVERY FIRE ; AND NONE OF THE FOUL

THINGS WHICH APPERTAIN UNTO HIM SHALL ENCOMPASS HIM FOR ETER-

NITY OR FOR EVER ANT) EVER .

t . T h e a r t i s t s e e m s t o h a v e p a i n t e d o n e g o d t o o m a n y .



THE CHAPTER OF THE CHAPLET OF VICTORY . 6 5

CHAPTER XIX .

[ F r o m L e p s i u s , Todtenbuch, BI . 1 3 . ]

Vign ette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e .

Text : THE CHAPTER OF THE CHAPLET OF VICTORY . ( z )

Osiris Auf-ankh, victorious, b orn of S heret-Amsu, victorious,

s a i t h :-

"Thy father Tern hath wove n for thee a beautiful chapl et of

" v i c t o r y [ t o b e p l a c e d ] o n [ t h y ] l i v i n g b r o w , 0 t h o u w h o l o v e s t

" t h e g o d s , ( 2 ) a n d t h o u s h a l t l i v e f o r e v e r . O s i r i s - k h e n t - A m e n t e t '

"hath made thee to triumph over thine enemies, and th y father

" S e b b a t h d e c r e e d f o r t h e e a l l h i s i n h e r i t a n c e . C o m e , t h e r e f o r e ,

" O H o r u s , s o n o f I s i s , f o r t h o u , 0 s o n o f O s i r i s , s i t t e s t u p o n

"the throne of thy (3) father Rd to overthrow thine enemies,

"for he hath ordained for thee the tw o lands to their utmost

" l i m i t s . A t e m b a t h [ a l s o ] o r d a i n e d t h i s , a n d t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e

" g o d s b a t h c o n f i r m e d t h e s p l e n d i d p o w e r o f t h e v i c t o r y o f H o r u s

" t h e s o n o f I s i s a n d t h e s o n o f O s i r i s f o r e v e r a n d ( 4 ) f o r e v e r .

" A n d O s i r i s A u f - a n k h s h a l l b e v i c t o r i o u s f o r e v e r a n d e v e r . 0

"Osiris-khent-Amentet, the who le of the northern and s outhern

" p a r t s o f t h e h e a v e n s , a n d e v e r y g o d a n d e v e r y g o d d e s s , w h o a r e

" i n h e a v e n a n d w h o a r e u p o n e a r t h [ w i l l ] t h e v i c t o r y o f H o r u s ,

" t h e s o n o f I s i s a n d t h e s o n o f O s i r i s , o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e

"pres ence of (5) Osiris-khent-Amentet who will mak e Osiris

" A u f - a n k h , v i c t o r i o u s , t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e p r e -

se nce of Osiris-khent-Amentet, Un-nefer, the so n of Nut, on

"the day of making him to triumph over S et and his fiends ( 6)

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s w h o a r e i n A n n u

" ( H e l i o p o l i s ); o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e b a t t l e a n d o v e r t h r o w o f t h e

" S e b a - f i e n d i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o

" a r e i n . A b t u ; on the night of making Osiris to triumph over

"his enemies ( 7) make thou Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, to

i . 1 L e . , "Osiris, Governor of Arnente t . "

J



66 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY Dd Y .

" t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n

" p r i n c e s , w h o a r e i n t h e h o r i z o n o f A i n e n t e t ; o n t h e d a y o f t h e

" f e s t i v a l o f H a k e r i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s

"who ar e in Tattu ; o n t h e n i g h t ( 8 ) o f t h e s e t t i n g u p o f t h e

"Tet in Tattu in the presence of the great sovereign p rinces

"who are in the ways of the damned ; on the night of the

" j u d g m e n t o f t h o s e w h o s h a l l b e a n n i h i l a t e d i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f

"the great s overeign princes who are in Sekhem ( Letopolis) ;

" ( g ) o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e ` t h i n g s o f t h e a l t a r s i n S e k h e m ' i n t h e

" p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o a r e i n P e a n d T e p t ;

" o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e s t a b l i s h i n g o f t h e i n h e r i t i n g b y H o r u s o f

"the things of his father Osiris in the pres ence of the great

"sov ereign princes (io) who are at the g reat festival of the

" p l o u g h i n g a n d t u r n i n g u p o f t h e e a r t h i n T a t t u , o r ( a s o t h e r s

" s a v ) , [ i n ] A b t u ; on the night of the weighing of words," or

( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , " w e i g h i n g o f l o c k s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t

"sovere ign princes who a re in An-rut-f on its place ; on the

" n i g h t w h e n H o r u s r e c e i v e t h t h e b i r t h - c h a m b e r o f t h e g o d s ( i i )

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s w h o a r e i n t h e

"lands of Rekhti ( ? ) ; on the night when Isis lieth down to

"watch [and] to make lamentation for her brother in the pre-

sence of the great s overeign princes wh o are in Re-stau ; on

" t h e n i g h t o f m a k i n g O s i r i s t o t r i u m p h o v e r a l l h i s e n e m i e s " ( 1 2 ) .

" H o r u s r e p e a t e d [ t h e s e ] w o r d s f o u r t i m e s , a n d a l l h i s e n e m i e s

" f e l l h e a d l o n g a n d w e r e o v e r t h r o w n a n d w e r e c u t t o p i e c e s ; and

" O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , r e p e a t e d [ t h e s e ] w o r d s f o u r t i m e s ,

" t h e r e f o r e l e t a l l h i s e n e m i e s f a l l h e a d l o n g , a n d b e (13) o v e r -

"thrown and cut to pieces . Horus the s on of Isis and s on of

" O s i r i s c e l e b r a t e d i n t u r n m i l l i o n s o f f e s t i v a l s , a n d a l l h i s e n e -

mies fell headlong, and were overthrown and cut to pieces .

" T h e i r h a b i t a t i o n h a t h g o n e f o r t h t o t h e b l o c k o f t h e E a s t , t h e i r

" h e a d s h a v e b e e n c u t o f f ; ( 1 4 ) t h e i r n e c k s h a v e b e e n d e s t r o y e d ;

" t h e i r t h i g h s h a v e b e e n c u t o f f ; they have been g iven over to

"the Great Destroyer who dwell eth in the vall ey of the grave ;

"and they sh all never come forth from under the restra int of

"the god Se b . "



THE CHAPTER OF THE VICTORY OVER ENEMIES . 6 7

Rubric : THIS CHAPTER SHALL BE RECITED OVER THE DIVINE CHAPLET

( ) 5 ) WHICH IS LAID UPON THE FACE OF THE DECEASED, AND THOU SHALT

CAST INCENSE INTO THE FIRE ON BEHALF OF OSIRIS AUF-ANKH, TRIUM-

PHANT, BORN OF SHERET-AMSU, TRIUMPHANT ; THUS SHALT THOU CAUSE

HIM TO TRIUMPH OVER HIS ENEMIES, (16) DEAD OR ALIVE, AND HE SHALL

BE AMONG THE FOLLOWERS OF OSIRIS ; AND A HAND SHALL BE STRETCHED

OUT TO HIM WITH MEAT AND DRINK IN THE PRESENCE OF THE GOD . [ THIS

CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID BY I HEE TWICE AT DAWN-NOW IT IS A NEVER-

FAILING CHARM-REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY .

CHAPTER XX.

[ F r o m t h e p a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mus . N o . 9 , g o o , s h e e t I 2 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r , i n t h e T h e b a n V e r s i o n , h a s n e i t h e r v i g n e t t e

n o r t i t l e .

Text : ( I) " H a i l , T h o t h , w h o d i d s t m a k e O s i r i s (2) t o t r i u m p h

" o v e r h i s e n e m i e s , s n a r e t h o u t h e e n e m i e s o f O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e

" N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f p i e t y , i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e r e i g n

" p r i n c e s o f e v e r y g o d a n d o f e v e r y g o d d e s s ; ( 3 ) i n t h e p r e s e n c e

"of the great s overeign princes who are in Annu (Heliopolis)

" o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e b a t t l e a n d o f t h e o v e r t h r o w o f t h e S e b a u -

" f i e n d i n T a t t u ; on (q) the night of making to s tand up the

" d o u b l e T e t i n S e k h e m ( L e t o p o l i s ) ; o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e t h i n g s

" o f t h e n i g h t i n S e k h e m , i n P e , ( 5 ) a n d i n T e p u ; t o n t h e n i g h t

" o f t h e s t a b l i s h i n g o f H o r u s i n t h e h e r i t a g e o f t h e t h i n g s o f h i s

" f a t h e r i n t h e d o u b l e l a n d o f R e k h t i ( % ) ; (6) on the night when

"Isis maketh l amentation at the side of her br other Osiris in

"Abtu (Abydos ) ; o n t h e n i g h t o f t h e H a k e r f e s t i v a l ( 7 ) o f t h e

" d i s t i n g u i s h i n g [ b e t w e e n ] t h e d e a d ( i . e . , the damned) and the

" K l u . s o n t h e p a t h o f t h e d e a d ( i . e . , the damned) ; o n t h e n i g h t

" o f t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h o s e w h o a r e t o b e a n n i h i l a t e d a t t h e g r e a t

" [ f e s t i v a l o f ] t h e p l o u g h i n g a n d t h e t u r n i n g u p o f t h e e a r t h ( 8 )

" i n N a a r e r u t - f 2 i n R e - s t a u ; and on th e night of making Horus

I . P e a n d T e p u w e r e t w o f a m o u s s a n c t u a r i e s o f N o r t h e r n E g y p t .

2 . I L e . , A n - r u t - f .

5 *




" t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s . H o r u s i s m i g h t y , t h e n o r t h e r n a n d

" s o u t h e r n h a l v e s o f h e a v e n r e j o i c e , ( g ) O s i r i s i s c o n t e n t t h e r e a t

" a n d h i s h e a r t i s g l a d . H a i l , T h o t h , m a k e t h o u t o t r i u m p h O s i r i s ,

" t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , o v e r h i s e n e m i e s ( i o ) i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e

"sovereign princes of every god and every goddess, and in the

"presence of you, ye sovereign princes who pas sed j udgment on

" O s i r i s b e h i n d t h e s h r i n e . "

In the Saite Recension this Chapter has no vignette, b ut it

h a s t h e t i t l e , " A n o t h e r C h a p t e r o f t h e C h a p l e t o f v i c t o r y " , a n d

is arranged in tabular form . The words, " Hail, Thoth, make

" O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s e v e n

" a s t h o u d i d s t m a k e O s i r i s t o t r i u m p h o v e r h i s e n e m i e s , " w h i c h

a r e w r i t t e n i n t w o h o r i z o n t a l l i n e s , a r e t o b e r e p e a t e d b e f o r e e a c h

c o l u m n o f t e x t . T h e " g r e a t s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s " i n v o k e d a r e t h o s e

o f :- (I) . A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , ( 2 ) . T a t t u , ( 3 ) . S e k h e m ( L e t o p o l i s ) ,

( 4 ) . Pe and Tep, ( 5 ) . A n - a r u t - f , ( 6 ) . the doub le l and of Rekhti,

( 7 ) . R e - s t a u , ( 8 ) . A b t u , ( g ) . t h e p a t h s o f t h e d e a d , ( i o ) . t h e p l o u g h -

i n g f e s t i v a l i n T a t t u , ( i i ) . K h e r - a b a , ( 1 2 ) . O s i r i s , ( I 3 ) . heaven

a n d e a r t h , ( 1 4 ) . e v e r y g o d a n d e v e r y g o d d e s s . T h e r u b r i c r e a d s :-

IF THIS CHAPTER BE RECITED REGULARLY AND ALWAYS BY A MAN

WHO HATH PURIFIED HIMSELF IN WATER OF NATRON, HE SHALL COME

FORTH BY DAY AFTER HE HATH COME INTO PORT (I . E . , I S D E A D ) , A N D H E

SHALL PERFORM ALL THE TRANSFORMATIONS WHICH HIS HEART SHALL

DICTATE, AND HE SHALL, COME FORTH FROM EVERY FIRE

CHAPTER XXI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

I n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i t h e X X I s t C h a p t e r f o l l o w s t h e X X I I n d ,

b u t i t i s t h e r e g i v e n w i t h o u t t i t l e a n d w i t h o u t v i g n e t t e ; i n t h e

Turin papyrus pu bl ished by Lepsius (Todtenbuch, B l .14 ) t h e

XXls t and XXIInd Chapters are quite distinct, and each h as

i t s o w n t i t l e , w h i l e a s i n g l e v i g n e t t e s t a n d s o v e r b o t h . I n t h e

V i g n e t t e a p r i e s t i s s h e w n h o l d i n g a v a s e i n t h e l e f t h a n d , a n d



THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A MOUTH TO THE DECEASED. 69

t h e r a m - h e a d e d s e r p e n t -l i k e i n s t r u m e n t c a l l e d " U r -h e k a u " ( i . e . ,

" g r e a t o f e n c h a n t m e n t s " ) i n t h e r i g h t ; with the latter he is

a b o u t t o t o u c h t h e m o u t h o f t h e d e c e a s e d w h o i s s t a n d i n g b e -

fore him . B e h i n d t h e d e c e a s e d i s a m a n s e a t e d o n a c h a i r a n d

h o l di n g a s t aff i n his l e f t h a n d .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A MOUTH TO THE OVER-

SEER OF THE HOUSE, N u , TRIUMPHANT, ( 2 ) IN THE UNDERWORLD .

H e s a i t h :-

"H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u l o r d o f b r i g h t n e s s , t h o u w h o a r t a t

"t h e he a d of the Gr e a t Hou s e , princ e of the ni g h t an d of thic k

"darkness! I have come unto thee being a pure ( 3 ) k h u . Thy

" t w o h a n d s a r e b e h i n d t h e e , a n d t h o u h a l t t h y l o t w i t h [ t h y ]

" a n c e s t o r s . 0 grant thou unto me my mouth that I may speak

" t h e r e w i t h ; a n d g u i d e t h o u t o m e m y h e a r t a t t h e s e a s o n w h e n

"t h e r e is ( 4 ) c l o u d an d da r k n e s s . "

CHAPTER XXII .

[From the Papy rus of Ani ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : In the Papyrus of Nebseni (she et 5), the "Gu ardian of the

Balance " is seen with his right hand str etched out to touch the mouth of

the deceased who sta nds before him . In other papyri (Naville, Todten-

buch, Bd. i . 1 3 1 . 33) the deceased himself is seen standing with either his

right or his left hand raised to his mouth .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A MOUTH ( 2 ) TO OSIRIS

ANI, THE SCRIBE AND TELLER OF THE HOLY OFFERINGS OF ALL

THE GODS, TRIUMPHANT, IN THE UNDERWORLD . H e s a i t h :-

" I r is e ( 3 ) o u t o f t h e e g g i n t h e h i d d e n l a n d . May my mouth

" b e g i v e n ( 4 ) u n t o m e t h a t I m a y s p e a k t h e r e w i t h i n t h e p r e -

s e n c e of the g r e a t g o d , th e l o r d of the ( 5 ) Tuat ( u n d e r wo r l d ) .

"May my hand and my arm not be forced back in the presence

"of the sovereign princes of any god . I am Osiris, the lord

"of Re-stau, ( 6) ; may I, Osiris the scribe Ani, triumphant,

"have a portion with him who is (7) on the top of the steps



7 0THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" ( i . e . , Osiris) . According to the desire of my heart, I have come

"f r o m t h e P o o l o f F ir e , a n d I h a v e q u e n c h e d t h e f ir e . "

CHAPTER XXIII .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0, 4 7 0 , s h ee t 1 5 ) . ]

Vignette : The statue of Ani, the scribe, seated upon a pedestal in the

form of the emb l em of Maat (i . e . , right and truth) . B e f o r e i t s t a n d s t h e

Sem priest clad in a panther's skin and holding in his right hand the

ram-headed, serp ent-like instrume nt "Ur-hekau", with which he is about

to touch the lips of the statue and so perform the ceremony of "Opening

t h e M o u t h " . At his feet are a sepulchr al box for holding unguent s, etc . ;

three instruments cal led res pectively "Seb-ur", "Tun-tet" and "Temanu" ;

and the object cal led "Pesh -en-kef" . In the Papyrus of Nebseni the scene

is described as "the S e r priest performing [the ce remony ] of the 'Open-

ing of the Mouth "' (sheet 5) .

Text : ( t) THE CHAPTER OF OPENING THE MOUTH OF OSIRIS .

THE SCRIBE ANI, TRIUMPHANT, saith :-

"May the god Ptah open my mouth, and may the god of my

" c i t y l o o s e t h e s w a t h i n g s , e v e n t h e s w a t h i n g s w h i c h a r e o v e r

"my mouth . M o r e o v e r , m a y T h o t h , b e i n g fi l l e d a n d f u r n i s h e d

" w i th c h a r m s , c o m e a n d l o o s e t h e b a n d a g e s , e v e n t h e b a n d a g e s

"of S e t which fett e r my mo u t h ( 3 ) ; and may the god Tern hurl

"them at those who would fetter [me] with them, and drive

"them back. May my mouth be opened, may my mouth be un-

c l o s e d b y S h u ( 4 ) w ith his iron knife wh e r e with he o p e n e d th e

"mouth of the gods . I a m t h e g o d d e s s S e k h e t , a n d I s i t u p o n

"[my] p l a c e in the g r e a t ( 5 ) wind ( ? ) o f h e a v e n . I am th e g r e a t

"goddess Sah who dwelleth among the Souls of Annu (Helio-

"polis) . N o w a s c o n c e r n i n g e v e r y c h a r m a n d a l l t h e w o r d s w h i c h

" m a y b e s p o k e n a g a in s t m e , ( 6 ) m a y t h e g o d s r e s i s t t h e m , a n d

"may each and every one of the company of the gods with-

"stand them . "



THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING CHARMS TO THE DECEASED .7 1

CHAPTER XXIV .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . N o. 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 5 )

. ]

Vig n e t t e : This Chapter has no vignette in the Theban pap yri .

Text : ( t) THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING CHARMS UNTO OSIRIS

AN I [IN THE UNDERWORLD] ; h e s ai t h :- (2)

"I am Tem-Khepera, who brought himself into being upon

"t h e th i g h of hi s divine mo t h e r . Those who are in Nu (i. e . ,

"the sky) are made wolves, (3) and those who are among the

" s o v e r e i g n p r i n c es a r e b e c o m e h y e n a s . B e h o l d , I g a t h e r t o g e t h e r

" t h e c h a r m [ f r o m e v e r y p l a c e w h e r e ] it i s , a n d fr o m e v e r y m a n

"with whom it is, swifter than greyhounds and quicker than

"light . (4) Hail, thou who towest along the M a k h e n t b o a t o f

"R a , t h e s t a y s o f t h y s a i l s a n d o f t h y r u d d e r a r e t a u t i n t h e

"wind as thou sailest up the Pool of Fire in the underworld .

"B e h o l d , th o u g a t h e r e s t to g e t h e r th e ch a r m ( 5 ) from e v e r y p l a c e

"wh e r e it is , an d from e v e r y ma n with wh o m it i s , s wifter th a n

" g r e y h o u n d s a n d q u i c k e r t h a n l i g h t , [ t h e c h a r m ] w h ic h c r e a t e d

" t h e f o r m s o f b e i n g f r o m t h e . . . . (6) m other, and which either

" c r e a t e t h t h e g o d s o r m a k e t h t h e m s il e n t , a n d w h i c h g i v e t h t h e

"heat of fire unto the gods . Behold, the charm is given unto

" m e , f r o m w h e r e v e r i t i s [ a n d f r o m h i m w i t h w h o m i t i s ] , ( 7 )

"swifter than greyhounds and quicker than light," or (as others

s a y ) , " q u i c k e r t h a n a s h a d o w . "

CHAPTER XXV .

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 i 4 7 7 , s h e e t 5 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e :In the greater number of the Theban papyri this Chapter is

without vignette . In the B rock lehurst p ap yrus, howev er, (s ee Naville,

7 odtenbuch, B d . 1 . B l . 3 6 ) t h e Sent priest, wearing a panther's s kin, is

seen hold ing up before the face of the deceased, who stands before him,

a small bearded figure like an ushabti . In the Turin papyrus ( Lepsius,

Todtenbueh, 131 . 1 5 ) , the priest and the deceas ed are standing facing each

other, and no cerem ony is being performed .



7 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DAY

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING A MAN TO POSSESS

MEMORY IN THE UNDERWORLD . The chancel lor-in-chief, Nu ,

t r i u m p h a n t , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e s o n o f t h e c h i e f

ch a n c e l l o r Amen-he t e p , s aith :-

(2) "May my name be given t o me in the Great House, and

"may I remember my name in the House of Fire on the night

" ( 3 ) of counting the years and of telling the number of the

"mouths. I am with the Divine One, and I sit on the eastern

" s i d e o f h e a v e n . If any god whatsoever should advance unto

"me ( 4 ) , l e t m e b e a b l e t o p r o c l a i m h is n a m e fo r t h w i th . "

CHAPTER XX V I .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . N o .1 0 , 4 7 0 ,

s h e e t 1 5 ) . ]

Vignette : The scribe Ani, clothe d in white, and with his hear t in his

right hand, addressing the god Anpu (Anuhis), jackal -headed . I n h i s l e f t

hand, which is outs tretched, Ani holds a neckl ace of several rows of co-

loured heads ; the clas p is made in the form of a pylon or gat eway, and

on the s ide of the pendant, which is in the same form, is a representation

of a scarab o r beet le in a boat t o typify the Sun-god Ra-Khepera in his

boat . From the p endant han g lo tus flowers . In other Theban papyri the

vignettes are different . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( s h e e t 5 ) t h e g o d

"Anubis who dwelle th in the city of embalmment " gives a heart to the

deceased ; and in others (s ee Naville, Todtenbuch, Bd. I . B l . 3 7 ) t h e d e -

ceased is seen either being embra ced by Anubis or address ing his heart

which res ts up on a s tanda rd b efore him . In the Turin papyrus (Lepsius,

Todtenbuch, 131 . 1 5 ) the deceased is seen kneeling before his own soul,

which is in the form of a human-headed hawk, a nd clas ping his heart to

his breast with his left hand .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING A HEART TO OSIRIS

ANI (2) IN THE UNDERWORLD . He saith :--

"May my heart ( d b ) r b e w i t h m e i n t h e H o u s e o f He a r t s ! M a y

"my heart ( h a t ) be with me in the House of Hearts! May my

" h e a r t b e w i th m e , a n d m a y it r e s t t h e r e , [ o r ] I s h a l l n o t e a t

t . A b i s u n d o u b t e d l y t h e " h e a r t " , a n d h a t i s t h e r e g i o n w h e r e i n i s t h e h e a r t ;

the word may be fairly well rendered by "bre ast", thoug h the pericard ium is

p r o b a b l y i n t e n d e d .



THE CHAPTERS OF PRESERVING THE HEART .7 3

" o f t h e c a k e s o f O s i r i s o n t h e e a s t e r n s i d e o f t h e L a k e ( 3 ) o f

"Flow ers, neither shall I have a boat wherein to go down the

" N i l e , n o r a n o t h e r w h e r e i n t o g o u p , n o r s h a l l I b e a b l e t o s a i l

"down the Nile with thee . M ay my mouth [b e given] to me

" t h a t I m a y ( 4 ) s p e a k t h e r e w i t h , a n d m y t w o l e g s t o w a l k t h e r e -

"with, and my two hands and arms to overthrow my foe . M a y

"the door s of heaven be opened unto me (5 ) ; may Seb, the

" P r i n c e I of the gods, open wide his two jaws unto me ; m a y

"he open my two eyes which are bl indfolded ; may he cause

" m e t o s t r e t c h a p a r t ( 6 ) m y t w o l e g s w h i c h a r e b o u n d t o g e t h e r ;

"and may Anpu (Anubis) mak e my thigh s firm so that I may

"stand upon them . May the godde ss S ekhet make me to rise

" ( 7 ) so that I may ascend unto heaven, and may that be done

"which I command in the House of the k a (doubl e) of Ptah

" ( i . e ., Memphis) . I understand with my heart . I have gained

" t h e m a s t e r y o v e r m y ( 8 ) h e a r t , I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r

"my two hands, I have gained the mastery over my l egs, I have

"gained the power to do whatsoever m y k a ( d o u b l e ) p l e a s e t h .

" ( g ) My soul shall not b e fettered to my body at the gates of

"the underworld ; but I shall enter in peace and I shall come

" f o r t h i n p e a c e . "

CHAPTER XXVII .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , sheets 15 and t 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : The scribe Ani, with hands r aised in adoration, and his heart ,

which is set upo n a pedestal , in the presenc e of four gods who arc seated

upon a pedestal in the form of the emblem of Madt . In the Turin Papyrus

(Lepsius, Todtenbuch, BI . 25) the deceased is shewn kneel ing before the

four children o f Horns .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEART (HATI)

OF A MAN BE TAKEN FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . 2 S a i t h

O s i r i s A n i :-

I . E r p a t , i . e . , " t r i b a l c h i e f " .

2 . T h e P a p y r u s o f M e s - e m - n e t e r ( N a v i l l e , Todtenbuch, B d . I I . p . 9 2 ) a d d s :-

" H i s h e a r t g o e t h f o r t h t o t a k e u p i t s a b o d e i n h i s b o d y , h i s h e a r t i s r e n e w e d

before the gods, and he hath gained the mastery over it . "



7 4 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B P DA I'.

"Hail, ye who carry aw ay hearts! [Hail,] ye who steal [he arts,

" a n d w h o m a k e t h e h e a r t o f a m a n t o g o t h r o u g h i t s t r a n s -

"formations according to his deeds, let not what he hath done

"harm him before you] . ' ( 2 ) Homage to you, 0 ye lord s of eternity,

"ye poss essors of everlastingness, take ye not this heart of Osiris

"Ani into (3) your g rasp, this heart of Osiris, and cause ye no t

"words of evil to spring up ag ainst it ; because this is the heart

"of (4) Osiris Ani, triumphant, and it bel ongeth unto him of

" m a n y n a m e s ( i . e . , T hoth ) , the mig hty one w ho s e w ord s are

"his limbs, and who s endeth forth his heart to dwell (5) in his

" b o d y . The hear t of Osiris Ani is triumpha nt, it is made new

" b ef ore the g od s , he hath g ai ned pow er over i t, he hath not

" b e e n s p o k e n t o [ a c c o r d i n g t o ] w h a t h e h a t h d o n e . H e b a t h

" g o t t e n p o w e r o v e r ( 6 ) hi s o w n m e m b e r s . His heart obeyeth

"him, he is the lord t hereof, it is in his body, and it shal l nev er

"fall away the refrom . I, Osiris, t he s cribe Ani, victorious in

" p e a c e , a n d t r i u m p h a n t in t h e b e a u t i fu l A m e n t a a n d o n t h e

"moun tain of eternity, bid thee to b e obed ient unto me in the

" underw or l d . "

CIIAPTEIZ XXVIII .

[From t h e Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 5 ) . ]

Vigne tte :I n s o m e p a p y r i c o n t a i n i n g t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n o f t h e B o o k

o f t h e D e a d ( e . y . , t h o s e o f N u a n d A m e n - n e b ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 9 , 9 6 4 ) , t h i s

C h a p t e r h a s n o v i g n e t t e . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e f e r - u h c n - f t h e d e c e a s e d i s

s e e n h o l d i n g h i s h e a r t u p o n h i s b r e a s t w i t h h i s l e f t h a n d , a n d k n e e l i n g

before a tailed monster in human form who holds a knife in his right

h a n d , a n d g r a s p s h i s t a i l w i t h t h e l e f t . Another papyrus shows the de-

c e a s e d o f f e r i n g i n c e n s e t o O s i r i s , w h o , s t a n d i n g o n a p e d e s t a l i n t h e f o r m

o f Alaat, h o l d s t h e f l a i l a n d s c e p t r e i n h i s h a n d s ; i n t h e B r o c k l e h u r s t

p a p y r u s t h e d e c e a s e d i s k n e e l i n g a n d h o l d i n g h i s h e a r t i n h i s l e f t h a n d ,

w h i c h i s o u t s t r e t c h e d ( s e e N a v i l l e , Todtenbuch, B d . i . BL 3 9 ) . I n t h e

T u r i n P a p y r u s t h e d e c e a s e d i s a d o r i n g h i s h e a r t , w h i c h i s p l a c e d o n a

p e d e s t a l , b e f o r e a s e a t e d d e i t y ( L e p s i u s , Todtenbuch, B l . 1 5 ) .

1 . T h e w o r d s w i t h i n b r a c k e t s a r e f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M e s - e m - n e t e r .



THE CHAPTERS OF PRESERVING THE HEART . 7 5

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEART OF

THE OVERSEER OF THE PALACE, THE CHANCELLOR-IN-CHIEF,

NU, TRIUMPHANT, BE CARRIED AWAY ( 2 ) FROM HIM IN THE

UNDERWORLD . H e s a i t h :-

"Hail, tho u Lion-god! I am the Fl ower Bus h (U n b) . That

"which is an abomination unto me is the divine block . L e t n o t

" t h i s m y h e a r t ( h d t i ) b e c a r r i e d a w a y f r o m m e b y ( 3 ) t h e f i g h t -

ing gods in Annu . Hail, thou who dost wind bandages round

"Osiris and who ha st s een Set! Hail, thou w ho returnes t after

"smiting and destroying him before the mighty ones! (4 ) This

"my heart ( a b ; [ s i t t e t h ] a n d w e e p e t h f o r i t s e l f b e f o r e O s i r i s ; i t

"bath made supplication for me . I have given unto him and I

"have decreed unto him the thoughts (5 ) of the heart in the

"House of the god Usek h-hra,' and I have b rough t to him

"sand ( sic) at the entry to Khemennu (Hermopolis Magna) . L e t

"not this my heart ( I z a t i ) be car ried away from me! I mak e

" t h e e t o ( 6 ) d w e l l ( :) upon his thron e, 0 thou who j oinest to-

g e t h e r h e a r t s ( l z a t u ) [ i n S e k h e t - h e t e p ( w i t h ) y e a r s ] o f s t r e n g t h

" a g a i n s t a l l t h i n g s t h a t , are an ab omination unto thee, and to

" c a r r y o f f ( 7 ) f o o d f r o m a m o n g t h e t h i n g s w h i c h b e l o n g u n t o t h e e ,

" a n d a r e i n t h y g r a s p b y r e a s o n o f t h y t w o - f o l d s t r e n g t h . A n d

" t h i s m y h e a r t ( h a t i ) i s d e v o t e d t o t h e d e c r e e s o f t h e g o d T e r n

" w h o l e a d e t h m e i n t o t h e ( 8 ) d e n s o f S u t i , b u t l e t n o t t h i s m y

" h e a r t w h i c h h a t h d o n e i t s d e s i r e b e f o r e t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s

"who are in the underwor ld b e given unto him . W hen they

"find the leg and the s wathings (9) they bury them . "

CHAPTER XXIX .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 5 ) . ]

Vignette : Ani standing, with a s taff in his hand . In the Turin Papyr us

(Lepsius, T o d t e n b a u c h , 1 3 1 . 1 5 ) this Chapter has no vignette .

i . I . e . , t h e g o d o f t h e " L a r g e Face" .




Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEART OF

A MAN BE TAKEN AWAY FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . Osiris

Ani, triumphant, saith :-

"Turn thou back, 0 m e s s e n g e r o f e v e r y g o d ! ( z ) I s it t h a t

"t h o u ar t co m e [ t o ca r r y a wa y] thi s my he a r t which li ve t h? Bu t

" m y h e a r t w h i c h l iv e t h s h a l l n o t b e g i v e n u n t o t h e e . (3) [As I]

"advance , the gods hearke n unto my offerings, and they all fall

" d o w n u p o n t h e i r fa c e s i n t h e i r o w n p l a c e s . "

CHAPTER XXIX A .

[From the Papyrus o f Amen-hetep (Naville, T o d t e o :buch, Bd . i . B I . 4 0 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : This Chapter has no vignette .

Text : (r) THE CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THE HEART OF

AMEN-HETEP, TRIUMPHANT, TO BE CARRIED AWAY DEAD IN THE

UNDERWORLD . T h e d e c e a s e d s a i t h :-

"My heart is with me, ( 2 ) and it shall never come to pass

" t h a t i t s h a l l b e c a r r i e d a w a y . I am the lord of hearts, the

" s l a y e r of the he a r t . ( 3 ) I l iv e i n r ig h t a n d t r u t h ( M a a t ) and

"I ha v e my b ein g th e r ein . I a m H o r u s , t h e d w e l l e r i n h e a r t s , ( q )

" w h o i s wi t h in t h e d w e l l e r i n t h e b o d y . I live in my word, and

" m y h e a r t h a t h b e i n g . L e t n o t m y h e a r t b e t a k e n a w a y ( 5 ) f r o m

" m e , l e t i t n o t b e w o u n d e d , a n d m a y n e it h e r w o u n d s n o r g a s h e s

"be dealt upon me because it hath been taken away from me .

"Let me have my being in the body of [my] father Seb, [and

"in the body of my] mother Nut. I have not done that which

" i s h e l d i n a b o m i n a t i o n b y t h e g o d s ; l e t m e n o t s u f f e r d e fe a t

" t h e r e , [ b u t l e t m e b e ] t r i u m p h a n t . "

CHAPTER XXIX B .

[From the Papyrus of Ani ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 3 3 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e . A heart .



THE CHAPTERS OF PRESER VING THE HEART .

CHAPTER XXX .

[ F r o m L e p s i u s , Todtenbuch, BI I6 . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d , w i t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n , s t a n d i n g b e -

f o r e a b e e t l e p l a c e d o n a p e d e s t a l .

Text : THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEART OF' A

MAN BE DRIVEN AWAY FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . ( I)

Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, b orn of She ret-Amsu, triumphant,

s a i t h :-

"My heart, my mother ; my heart, my mother! My heart of

"my existence upon earth . May naught stand up to oppo se me

"in judgment ; m a y t h e r e b e n o o p p o s i t i o n t o m e i n t h e p r e s e n c e

" o f t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s ; ( z ) m a y [ n o e v i l ] b e w r o u g h t a g a i n s t

"me in the presence of the gods ; may there be no parting [of

"thee] from me in the presence of the great god, t he lord of

"Amentet . H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u h e a r t o f O s i r i s - k h e n t - A m e n t e t !

"Homage to you, 0 my reins! Homage to y ou, 0 ye god s (3 )

" w h o d w e l l i n t h e d i v i n e c l o u d s , a n d w h o a r e e x a l t e d ( o r h o l y )

" b y r e a s o n o f y o u r s c e p t r e s ! S p e a k y e f a i r w o r d s f o r t h e O s i r i s

"Auf-ankh, and mak e ye him to prosper before Nehebka . And

"behold, though I be joined unto the ( q . ) earth, and am in the

"mighty innermost part of heaven, l et me remain on the earth

"and not die in Amentet, and let me b e a kl zu t h e r e i n f o r e v e r

"and ever . "

7 7

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF A HEART OF CARNELIAN . O s i r i s

A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" I a m t he B en uu , the soul of Rd, and the g uide of the gods

" ( 2 ) in the Tuat (underwo rld) . Their divine sou ls come forth

" u p o n e a r t h t o d o t h e w i l l o f t h e i r k a s , l e t t h e r e f o r e , t h e s o u l

" o f O s i r i s A n i c o m e f o r t h t o d o t h e w i l l o f h i s k a . "

Rubric : THIS [CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER A BASALT SCARAB,

WHICH SHALL BE SET IN A GOLD SETTING, AND IT SHALL BE PLACED IN-




SIDE THE HEART OF THE MAN' FOR WHOM THE CEREMONIES OF-OPENING

THE 11IOUTH" AND OF ANOINTING WITH UNGUENT HAVE BEEN PERFORMED .

AND THERE SHALL BE RECITED BY WAY OF A MAGICAL CHARM THE

WORDS :- "MY HEART, MY MOTHER ; MY HEART, MY MOTHER! MY HEART

OF TRANSFORMATIONS . "

CHAPTER XXX A .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M us . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 5 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : I n m a n y of t h e p a p y r i c o n t ai ni n g t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n

this Chapter has no vignette ; in one, however, the vignette is a heart

standing abov e a vase, in another the deceased is seen ad oring his heart,

and in another the deceased is standing before four gods , one of whom

is offering a heart to him (se e Naville, Todtenbuch, Bd . I . B ! . 4 2 ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEART OF

THE OVERSEER OF THE PALACE, THE CHANCELLOR-IN-CHIEF,

Nu, TRIUMPHANT, BE DRIVEN AWAY FROM HIM IN THE UNDER-

WORI .D . H e s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"0 my heart, my mother ; 0 my heart, my mother! 0 my

"heart of my existence upon earth . May naught stand up to

" o p p o s e m e i n j u d g m e n t i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e l o r d s o f t h e t r i a l

"(3) ; l e t it not b e s aid of me an d of tha t which I ha v e do n e ,

"'He hath done deeds against that which is right and true' ;

"m a y na u g h t b e a g ains t me in the pr e s e n c e of the g r e a t g o d , th e

"lord of Amentet. Homage to thee, 0 my heart! (4) Homage

"to thee, 0 my heart! Homage to you, 0 my reins! Homage

"to you, 0 ye gods who dwell in the divine clouds, and who

" a r e ( 5 ) e x a l t e d ( o r h o l y ) b y r e a s o n o f y o u r s c e p t r e s ! S p e a k y e

" [ f o r m e ] fa i r t h in g s t o R d , a n d m a k e y e m e t o p r o s p e r b e f o r e

"Nehebka. And behold me, even though I be joined to the

" e a r t h i n t h e m i g h t y in n e r m o s t p a r t s t h e r e o f, l e t m e r e m a i n u p o n

"the earth and let me not die in Amentet, but become a Khu

"ther ein . "

I . I. e . , t h e d e c e a s e d .



THE CHAPTERS OF PRF,'SERVING THE HEART 79

CIIAP'1'ER XXXB .

[ F r o m the Papyrus of A n i ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 5 ) . ]

Vign ette : ( i ) S o m e p a p y r i c o n t a i n i n g t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n g i v e t h i s

C h a p t e r w i t h o u t a n y v i g n e t t e , a n d i t i s p r o b a b l e t h a t t h i s a r i s e s f r o m t h e

f a c t t h a t i t o f t e n a p p e a r s a s o n e o f t h e t e x t s w h i c h o c c u r i n t h e g r e a t

J u d g m e n t S c e n e , w h e r e i t f o r m s t h e p r a y e r p u t i n t o t h e m o u t h o f t h e d e -

c e a s e d ; s e e t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 3 , a n d t h e P a p y r u s o f H u - n e f e r ,

s h e e t 3 . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t q , t h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l s i n o n e

p a n o f t h e B a l a n c e a n d h e i s b e i n g w e i g h e d a g a i n s t h i s h e a r t w h i c h r e s t s

i n t h e o t h e r i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f " O s i r i s , t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e G o v e r n o r o f

E v e r l a s t i n g n e s s " . The support of the beam is surmounted by a human

h e a d , a n d t h e t o n g u e o f t h e B a l a n c e i s b e i n g s c r u t i n i z e d b y a d o g - h e a d e d

a p e , s e a t e d o n a p e d e s t a l , w h o i s c a l l e d " T h o t h , t h e l o r d o f t h e B a l a n c e " .

E l s e w h e r e t h i s a p e i s s e a t e d o n a p e d e s t a l w i t h s t e p s , a n d i s c a l l e d " T h e

lord of Khemcnnu (Hermopolis Magna) , the righteous weigher" (see Na-

v i l l e , Todtenbuch, Bd. I . B I 4 3 ) . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f A m e n - n e b ( B r i t . M u s .

No. 9 , 9 6 4 ) , t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d s b y t h e B a l a n c e w h i l e a f i g u r e o f h i m -

s e l f i s b e i n g w e i g h e d a g a i n s t h i s h e a r t ; i n t h i s e x a m p l e o f t h e s c e n e t h e

s u p p o r t o f t h e b e a m i s s u r m o u n t e d b y t h e h e a d o f a j a c k a l . E l s e w h e r e t h e

v i g n e t t e i s s i m p l y a h e a r t , o r a s c a r a b , o r t h e d e c e a s e d s e a t e d a d o r i n g

h i s h e a r t , o r t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e a b e e t l e , w h i c h

i s t h e s y m b o l o f t h e g o d K h e p e r d , t h e s e l f - c r e a t e d g o d a n d t h e t y p e o f

t h e R e s u r r e c t i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , T od t e n b u c h , Bl . r 6 ) .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT (2) LETTING THE HEART OF

OSIRIS, THE SCRIBE OF THE HOLY OFFERINGS OF ALL THE

G O D S , A NT, T RI U M P H A NT, BE DRIVEN FROM HIM IN THE UND ER-

WORLD . He saith :-

" M y h e a r t , m y m o t h e r ; ( 3 ) m y h e a r t , m y m o t h e r ! M y h e a r t

" w h e r e b y I c a m e in t o b e i n g ! M a y n a u g h t s t a n d u p t o o p p o s e

" m e a t [ m y ] j u d g m e n t ; m a y t h e r e b e n o o p p o s i tio n t o m e in

"the pres ence of the sovere ign princes ( T c h a t c h a ) ; may there be

"no part ing of thee from me in the pres ence of him that k eep-

"eth the Bal ance! Thou art my k a , the dweller in (4) my body ;

" t h e g o d K h n e m u w h o k nit t et h a n d s t r e n g t h e n e t h m y lim b s .

"Mayes t thou come forth into the place of happiness whither we

" g o . M a y t h e Shenit (i . e . , the divine officers of the cour t of

"Osiris), who form the conditions of the l ives of men, not caus e




"my name to stink . [ L e t i t b e s a t i s f a c t o r y u n t o u s , a n d l e t t h e

" l i s t e n i n g b e s a t i s f a c t o r y u n t o u s , a n d l e t t h e r e b e j o y o f h e a r t

"unto us at the weighing of words . L e t n o t t h a t w h i c h i s f a l s e

" b e u t t e r e d a g a i n s t m e b e f o r e t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e l o r d o f A m e n t e t .

" V e r i l y h o w g r e a t s h a l t t h o u b e w h e n t h o u r i s e s t i n t r i u m p h ! ] '

Rubric .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f Am e n - h e t e p ( s e e N a v i l l e , T o d t e n b u c h , Bd. I I. p . 99) . ]

( 9 ) THESE WORDS ARE TO BE SAID OVER A SCARAB OF GREEN STONE

ENCIRCLED WITH A BAND OF REFINED COPPER AND [HAVING] A RING OF

SILVER, ( 2 ) WHICH SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NECK OF THE KHU.

THIS CHAPTER WAS FOUND IN THE CITY OF KHEMENNU (HERMOPOLIS

MAGNA) UNDER THE FEET OF [THE STATUE OF] (3) THIS GOD . [IT WAS IN-

SCRIBED] UPON A SLAB OF IRON OF THE SOUTH, IN THE WRITING OF THE

GO)) HIMSELF, IN THE TIME OF ( 4 ) THE MAJESTY OF THE KING OF THE

NORTH AND OF THE SOUTH, (MEN-KAU-RA \ ,~ TRIUMPHANT, BY THE ROYAL

SON HERU-TA-TA-F, WHO DISCOVERED IT WHILST HE WAS ON HIS JOURNEY

(5) TO MAKE AN INSPECTION OF THE TEMPLES AND OF THEIR ESTATES .

In some ancient papyri the text of this Chapter is made to

follow the Rubric of Chapter LXIV, with which it had s ome

c l o s e c o n n e x i o n , a n d i n o t h e r s i t f o l l o w s t h e R u b r i c o f C h a p t e r

CXVIII . The Rubr ical direction conc erning Chapt er LXIV

r e a d s :- `Behold, mak e a s carab of green s tone, wash it with

"gol d and pla ce it in the heart of a man (i . e . , t h e d e c e a s e d ) ,

"and it will perform for him the òpening of the mouth' ; a n -

o i n t i t w i t h a n t uunguent , and recite over it as a charm the

"following words :- ` My he a rt , m y m o th e r ; m y he a r t, m y

" m o t h e r ! " e t c . I n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s , T o d t e n b u c h , B I . 1 6 )

it foll ows Chapter XXX w hich contains p arts of Chapters XXXA

and XXXB .

CHAPTER XXXI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 10,477, sheet 5 ) . ]

Vign ette : I n s o m e a n c i e n t p a p y r i t h e V i g n e t t e o f t h i s Ch a p t e r r e p r e s e n t s

I . T h e w o r d s w it h i n b r a c k e t s a r e t r a n s l a t e d f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i

( s h e e t 4 ) .

2 . I L e . , M y c e r i n u s , a k i n g o f t h e l V t h d y n a s t y .



THE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CROCODILE . 8 1

t h e d e c e a s e d s p e a r i n g a c r o c o d i l e , b u t i n t h e S a t e R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d

i s a t t a c k i n g f o u r c r o c o d i l e s ( s e e L e p s i u s , T o d t e n b u c h , 1 3 1 . i 6 ) .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CROCODILE

THAT COMETH TO CARRY AWAY THE CHARM FROM Nu, THE

OVERSEER OF THE PALACE, THE CHANCELLOR-IN-CHIEF, TRIUM-

PHANT, THE SON OF THE OVERSEER OF THE PALACE, AMEN-

HETEP, TRIUMPHANT, IN THE: UNDERWORLD . He saith :-(2)

" G e t t h e e b a c k , r e t u r n , g e t t h e e b a c k , t h o u c r o c o d i l e -f ie n d

"Sui ; t h o u s h a l t no t ad v a n c e to me , for I live by reasono f the

"magical words which I h a v e b y m e . I d o n o t u t t e r t h a t n a m e

"of t h in e t o t h e g r e a t g o d ( 3 ) w h o w il l c a u s e t h e e t o c o m e t o

" t h e t w o d i v in e e n v o y s ; the name of the one is Betti,' and the

"name o f the othe r is `Hra-k-en-Maat' . 2 He a v e n h a t h p o w e r o v e r

" i t s s e a s o n s ,( 4 )

a n d th e ma gi ca l wo r d ha t h po we r o v e r th a t w hich

"is in its possess ion, let therefore my mouth have power ov er the

"mag ical word which is therein . My front teeth are like unto flint

" k n i v e s , a n d m y j a w - t e e t h a r e l ik e u n t o t h e N o m e of Tu t e f . 3

"Hail thou that s ittest with thine eyebal l upon th ese my mag ical

" w o r d s ! Th o u s h a l t n o t c a r r y t h e m a w a y , 0 thou crocodile that

"livest by mean s of magical words !"

In the Turin Pa p y r u s ( Le p si u s , o p . c i t . , B I . t6) the following

l i ne s ar e ad d e d to thi s Cha p t e r : 4

"I am the Prince in the field . I, even I , am Osiris, w ho hath

" s h u t in hi s fath e r S e b to g e t h e r with hi s mo t h e r Nu t ( 5 ) on th e

"d a y of the g r e a t s l a u g h t e r . My father is Seb and my mother

"i s N u t . I am Horns, the first-born of Ra, who is crowned . I

" a m A n p u ( A n u b i s ) o n t h e d a y o f r e c k o n i n g . I, even I, am Osiris,

"(6) t h e princ e wh o g o e t h in and de c l a r e t h th e offerin g s which

"are written down, I am the guard ian of the door of Osiris,

i . I . e . , "He o f t w o t e e t h " (or two h o r n s ) ; t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( L e p s i u s ,

op . c i t . , B I . 1 6 ) r e a d s B e n t , i . e . , " a p e " .

2 . IL e . , " T h y f a c e i s o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h . "

3 . We should probably add the word t e p and read T e p t o f , " H e t h a t i s

u p o n h i s h i l l " , i . e . , Anubis .

4 . T h e h i e r o g l y p h i c t e x t i s n o t g i v e n i n t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g v o l u m e b e c a u s e

i t r e p r e s e n t s a l a t e v e r s i o n o f t h e g r e a t e r p a r t o f C h a p t e r L X I X , q . v .

6




" e v e n I . I h a v e c o m e , I h a v e b e c o m e g l o r i o u s (or a Khu), I h a v e

"been rec koned up, I am strong, I have come and I aveng e mine

"own self . ( 7 ) I h a v e s a t i n t h e b i r t h c h a m b e r o f O s i r i s , a n d I

"was b orn with him, and I renew my youth al ong with him .

"I have laid hold upon the Thigh which was by Osiris, (8) and

"I have opened the mouth of the gods therewith . I s i t u p o n t h e

"place w here he sitteth, and I write down the numb er [of the

"things] which make s trong ( ? ) t h e h e a r t , t h o u s a n d s o f l o a v e s o f

"bread, thousands of vases of beer, which are upon the altars

" o f h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s , [ n u m b e r s o f ] j a c k a l s , w o l v e s , ( g ) o x e n , r e d

"fowl, g eese and ducks . Horus hath done aw ay with the sacri-

" f i c e s o f T h o t h . I f i l l t h e o f f i c e o f p r i e s t i n t h e r e g i o n s a b o v e ,

"and I write down there [the things ] which make s trong the

" h e a r t . I m a k e o f f e r i n g s ( o r o f f e r i n g s a r e m a d e t o m e ) ( t o ) a t

" t h e a l t a r s o f t h e P r i n c e o f T a t t u , a n d I h a v e m y b e i n g t h r o u g h

"the obl ations [made to] him . I s n u f f t h e w i n d o f t h e E a s t b y

" h i s h e a d , a n d I l a y h o l d u p o n t h e b r e e z e s o f t h e W e s t t h e r e b y ,

"(I I)g o r o u n d a b o u t h e a v e n i n t h e f o u r q u a r t e r s t h e r e o f ,

" I s t r e t c h o u t m y h a n d a n d g r a s p t h e b r e e z e s o f t h e s o u t h [ w h i c h ]

" a r e u p o n i t s h a i r . G r a n t u n t o m e a i r a m o n g t h e v e n e r a b l e b e i n g s

"and among those who eat bread . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER RE KNOWN BY ITHE DECEASED] HE SHALL

COME FORTH BY DAY, HE SHALL, RISE UP TO WALK UPON THE EARTH

AMONG THE LIVING, AND HE SHALL NEVER FAIL AND COME TO AN END,

NEVER, NEVER, NEVER.

CIIA1'TER XXXII .

[From Lepsius, Todtenbueh, 1311 . 16 a n d 1 ; . ]

Vig n e t t e : F o u r c r o c o d i l e s a d v a n c i n g a g a i n s t t h e d e c e a s e d w h o i s

spearing one of them .

Text : r THE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CROCODILE

THAT CO\IE'IH TO CARRY AWAY THE MAGICAL WORDS FROM THE

t . From no Papyrus containing the Theban Recension can a connected trans-

lation of this Chapter b e made ; i t h a s , t h e r e f o r e , b e e n t h o u g h t b e s t t o g i v e

a r e n d e r i n g o f i t f r o m t h e t e x t a s f o u n d i n t h e S a l t e R e c e n s i o n .



THE CHAPTER OF BEATING BACK THE CROCODILE . 8 3

KHU IN THE UNDERWORLD. ( r ) O s i r i s , Auf-ankh, t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a i t h :-

"The Mighty One fell down upon the p lace where he is, or

"(as others s ay), upon his belly, b ut the company of the gods

"cau ght him and set him up again . [M y] soul cometh and it

" s p e a k e t h w i t h i t s f a t h e r , a n d t h e M i g h t y O n e d e l i v e r e t h i t (2)

" f r o m t h e s e e i g h t I c r o c o d i l e s . I know them by their names and

"[what] they live upon, and I am he who hath delivered his

"father from them . "

"Get thee b ack, 0 Crocodile that dwel lest in the West, thou

" t h a t l i v e s t u p o n t h e s t a r s w h i c h n e v e r r e s t , ( 3 ) f o r t h a t w h i c h

"is an abomination unto thee is in my bel ly, 0 thou tha t hast

" e a t e n t h e f o r e h e a d o f O s i r i s . I am Set . "

"Get thee b ack, 0 Crocodile that dwel les t in the West, for

" t h e s e r p e n t - f i e n d N a a u i s i n m y b e l l y , a n d I w i l l g i v e h i m u n t o

" t h e e ; l e t n o t t h y f l a m e b e a g a i n s t m e . "

"Get thee back, 0 ( 4 ) C r o c o d i l e t h a t d w e l l e s t i n t h e E a s t ,

" w h o f e e d e s t u p o n t h o s e w h o e a t t h e i r o w n f i l t h , f o r t h a t w h i c h

"is an abomination unto thee is in my bell y ; I advance , I am

" O s i r i s _ _ .

"Get thee b ack, 0 Crocodile that dwel les t in the East, the

"ser pent-fiend Naau is in (5) my bel ly, and I will give [him]

"unto thee ; l e t n o t t h y f l a m e b e a g a i n s t m e . "

"Get thee b ack, 0 Crocodile that dwel lest in the South, who

" f e e d e s t u p o n f i l t h , a n d w a s t e , a n d d i r t , f o r t h a t w h i c h i s a n

"ab omination unto thee is in my bell y ; s h a l l n o t t h e f l a m e b e

"on thy hand ? I am Se pt . " ( 6 )

"Get thee ba ck, 0 Crocodile that dwell est in the South, for

"I am safe by reas on of my charm ; m y f i s t i s a m o n g t h e f l o w e r s

" a n d I w i l l n o t g i v e i t u n t o t h e e . "

" G e t t h e e b a c k , 0 C r o c o d i l e t h a t d w e l l e s t i n t h e N o r t h , w h o

" f e e d c s t u p o n w h a t i s o f f e r e d ( ? ) w i t h i n t h e h o u r s , ( 7 ) f o r t h a t

"which thou abominatest is in my bell y ; let [not] thy venom

"be up on my hea d, for I am Tem . "

i . The Theban t e x t s m e n t i o n f o u r crocodiles only .

6*




"Get thee b ack, 0 Crocodile that dwel les t in the North, for

"the goddess Serqet is in my bell y and I have not yet brought

" h e r f o r t h ( 8 ) . I am Uapch-Maat i (or Merti) . "

"The things which are created are in the holl ow of my hand,

"and thos e which have not yet come into being are in my body .

"I am clothed and wholl y provided with thy magical words,

"0 Ra, the which are in heaven abo ve me and in the earth

"beneath me . (g ) I have gained power, and exaltation, and a

"full-breathing throat in the ab ode of my father Ur ( i . e . , t h e

"Mighty One), and he hath delivered unto me the b eautiful

"Amentet which destroyeth living men and women ; b u t s t r o n g

" i s i t s d i v i n e l o r d , w h o s u f f e r e t h f r o m w e a k n e s s , " ( i o ) o r ( a s

o t h e r s s a y ) " e x h a u s t i o n t w o - f o l d , t h e r e i n d a y b y d a y . M y face

"is open, my heart is upon its seat, and the crow n with the

"serpent is upon me day by day . I am Ra, who is his own

" p r o t e c t o r , a n d n o t h i n g s h a l l e v e r c a s t m e t o t h e g r o u n d . "

CHAPTER. XXXIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Ni t ( B r i t . Mus . No. 10,477, sheet 6) . ]

Vign ette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , b u t

in one MS. t h e d e c e a s e d , w i t h a k n i f e i n e a c h h a n d , i s s e e n a t t a c k i n g

f o u r s e r p e n t s , a n d i n a n o t h e r f o u r s e r p e n t s o n l y a r c g i v e n ; s e e N a v i l l e ,

o p . c i t . , Bd . I . 131 . 4 6 . I n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , 1 3 1 .1 7 )

t h e

d e c e a s e d i s s p e a r i n g a s i n g l e s e r p e n t .

Text : ( r ) TIIE CHAPTER OF REPULSING SERPENTS ( o r WORMS)

N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m -

p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

"Hail, thou serpent Rerek, advance not hither . B e h o l d S o b

"and Shu . S t a n d s t i l l n o w , a n d t h o u s h a l t e a t t h e r a t w h i c h i s

"an abominable thing unto Rd, and (3) thou s halt crunch the

" b o n e s o f t h e f i l t h y c a t . "



THE CHAPTER OF NOT BEING BITTEN BY SNAKES 8 5

CHAPTER XXXIV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10 i 4 7 7 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n t h e T h e b a n a n d S a i t e

R e c e n s i o n s .

Te x t : (r) THE CHAPTER OF NOT [LETTING] OsiRis Nu,

TRIUM PHANT, BE B I T TE N BY S N A K E S ( o r WO R M S ) I N TH E U N D E R -

WORLD . (2) He saith :-

"O Serp ent! I am the flame which shineth upon the Opener( ?)

" of hundred s of thou s and s of year s , and the s tandard of the

"god Tenpu," or (as others say) , "the standard of young plants

"and flowe rs . D e p a r t y e ( 3 ) fr o m m e , fo r I a m t h e divin e

Maftet . " t

CHAPTER XXXV.

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M us . No . 1 0 , 4 7 i , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , b u t

i n t h e B r o c k l e h u r s t P a p y r u s t h r e e s e r p e n t s f o r m t h e v i g n e t t e ( s e e N a v i l l e ,

o p . c i t . , B d . I . B I . 4 8 ) ; in the Turin Papyrus (Lepsius, o p . c i t . , B 1 .1 7 )

t h e v i g n e t t e c h e w s t h e d e c e a s e d i n t h e a c t o f s p e a r i n g a s e r p e n t .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT [LETTING ] N U, THE CHAN-

CELLOR-IN-CHIEF, TRIUMP HANT, B E D EVOURED B Y S ERPENTS IN

THE UNDERWORLD . He saith :-

"Hail , thou g od S hu! ( 2 ) B e h o l d T a t t u ! B e h o l d S h u ! Ha i l

"Tattu! [Shu] hath the head-dress of the g oddess Hathor . T h e y

"nurs e Osiris . Beho l d the tw o-fol d b ei n g w ho i s a b out to eat

"me! Alighting from the bo at I depa rt ( ? ) , (3) and the serpent-

" fie n d S e k s e k p a s s e t h m e b y . B e h o l d s a m a n d aaqet flowers

"are kept under guard ( ? ) . This b eing is Osiris, an d he mak eth

"entreaty for his tomb . (4 ) The eyes of the divine prince are

1 . So f a r b a c k a s 1 8 6 7 t h e l a t e D r . B i r c h i d e n t i f i e d t h e a n i m a l m a f t e t w i t h

t h e l y n x .



8 6 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DA 1 .

"dropped, and he performeth the reparation which is to be done

"for thee ; [he] giveth [unto the e thy] portion of right and truth

"accord ing to the decision concern ing the states and conditions

"[of men] . "

CHAPTER XXXVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : This Chapter is without a vignette in the Papyrus of Nu,

b u t i n o t h e r s c o n t a i n i n g t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I .

B l . 4 9 ) t h e v i g n e t t e s e i t h e r s h e w t h e d e c e a s e d s p e a r i n g a b e e t l e , o r s t a n d -

i n g , w i t h a k n i f e i n o n e h a n d a n d a s t a f f i n t h e o t h e r , b e f o r e a p e d e s t a l

u p o n w h i c h s t a n d s t h e i n s e c t A p s h a i t , w h i c h h a s b e e n i d e n t i f i e d w i t h t h e

cockroach . T h e a p s h a i t is probabl y the beetl e which is often found

crushed between the bandages of poorly made mummies, or even inside

t h e b o d y i t s e l f , w h e r e i t h a s f o r c e d i t s w a v i n s e a r c h o f f o o d .

Text : (t ) THE CHAPTER OF D RIVING AWAY APSHAIT . O s i r i s

Nu, the chanc ell or-in-chief, triumpha nt, saith : ( 2 )

"Depart from me, 0 thou that has t lips which gnaw, for I am

" K h n e m u , t h e l o r d of P e s h e n n u , r a n d [I ] b r i n g t h e w o r d s of

" t h e g o d s t o R a , a n d I r e p o r t ( 3 ) [ m y ] m e s s a g e t o t h e l o r d

"thereof. "2

CHAPTER XXXVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 ,4 7 7 , sh e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : Two uraei, with tails ent wined, upon the embl em of gold

( N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . B l . 5 0 ) ; i n t h e v i g n e t t e o f t h i s C h a p t e r i n t h e

T u r i n P a p y r u s t h e d e c e a s e d i s s e e n s p e a r i n g a s e r p e n t ( L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . ,

B l . i 7 ) .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE TWO MERTI

G O D D E S S E S . Nu, the chan cell or-in-chief, triumpha nt, saith :-

i . R e a d : " t h e l o r d o f t h e c i t y o f S h e n n u " , i . e . , of Kom Ombos .

2 . O r , " I r e p o r t [ m y ] m e s s a g e t o N e b e s " ( o r N e b s e s ) .



THE CHAPTER OF LIVING BY AIR . 8 7

" Ho m a g e t o y o u , y e t w o Rekht goddes ses,' ve two Sisters, ve

" t w o M e r t ( 2 ) goddes s es, I bring a mes s age to you concerning my

" ma gi ca l w ord s . I s hine from the S e k t e t boat , I am Horus the

"son of Osiris, a nd I have co me to s ee ( 3) my father Osiris . "

CHAPTER XXXVIII A .

[ F r o m the Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . Mus . N o . q ,g oo , s he e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d h o l d i n g a s a i l , s y m b o l i c o f a i r .

Te x t : ( t) THE CHAPTER OF LIVING BY AIR IN THE UNDER-

WORLD. The s cri b e Ne b s e ni , the l ord t o w hom ven erati on is

p a i d , s a i t h :-

" [ I a m t h e g o d T e m ], w h o c o m e t h fo r t h o u t o f ( 2 ) Nu into

"the watery abyss . I have received [my habitation of Amentet,

" and have g i ven command s] with my w ord s to t he [ K l u i s ] w h o s e

"abiding p laces are hidden ( 3 ) , to the K h u s and to the dou b l e

"Lion-god . I have made j ourney s round a b out and I have s un g

" h y m n s of j o y in t h e b o a t of K h e p e r a . I have eaten therein,

"I have gained power (4 ) therein, and I live therein through

"the breezes [ which are there] . I am the g ui de i n the b oat of

"R d, and he openeth out f or me a path ; h e m a k e t h a p a s s a g e

" fo r m e t h r o u g h t h e g a t e s ( 5 ) of t he g o d S e b . I have seized

" a n d c a r r i e d a w a y t h o s e w h o l iv e i n t h e e m b r a c e of t h e g o d

"Ur (i . e . , M i g h t y O n e ) ; I am the gu ide of those who l ive in

"t h eir s h rine s , th e t wo b r o t h e r- g o ds Horus an d S e t ; an d I b rin g

"the (6) nobl e ones with me . I enter in and I come forth, and

"my throat is not slit ; I go into the bo at of Maat, and I pass

"in among ( 7) thos e who live in the Atet boat, and who ar e in

" the f ol l o wi n g o f Rd, and are ni g h unt o hi m i n his ho ri z on .

"I live after my death day by b y, and I am strong even as is

"the doub le Lion-god . ( 8) I live, and I am delivered after my

i . The two opponent goddesses, or Isis and N e p h t h y s ( % ) .



88 THE CHAPTERS OF COATING FORTH BY DAY .

" d e a t h , I , t h e scribe N e b se n i, t h e l o r d o f p ie t y , w h o f il l t h e

" e a r t h a n d c o m e f o r t h l i k e t h e l i l y o f m o t h e r - o f- e m e r a l d , o f t h e

"god Hetep of the two lands . "

CHAPTER XXXVIII B.

[Froth the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No. ro,4i7, s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceas ed holding i n h i s l e f t h a n d a s a i l , s y m b o l i c o f a i r ,

and attacking three serpents with a knife which he holds in his right hand

(see Naville, o p . cit . , Bd . I . 1 3 1 . 5 2 ) . I n t h e Tu ri n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s ,

Todtenbuch, BI 1 7 ) the deceased hol ds a s ail in the left hand, and the

s y m b o l o f l i f e i n t h e r i g h t .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF LIVING BY AIR IN THE UNDER-

WORLD . N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - in - c h ie f ,

t ri u m p h a n t , t h e s o n of t h e o v e r s e e r of t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r -

in-chief, Amen-hetep, triumphant, saith :- (2 )

"I a m t h e d o u b l e L io n - g o d , t h e f i r s t - b o r n o f R a a n d T e m o f

" H a -k h e b t i ( ) ) , [ t h e g o d s ] w h o d w e l l i n t h e i r d iv i n e c h a m b e r s .

"Those who dwell (3) in their divine abodes have become my

"guides, and they make paths for me as they revolve in the

"wa t e r y a b y s s of the s k y b y th e s ide of the pa t h of the b o a t of

"Tern. ( 4 ) I s t a n d u p o n t h e t im b e r s ( ? ) of the b o a t of Rd, an d

"I r e c it e h i s o r d in a n c e s t o t h e b e in g s w h o h a v e k n o w l e d g e , a n d

"I am the herald of his words to him whose throat stinketh .

" ( 5 ) I s e t f r e e m y di v in e f a t h e r s a t e v e n ti d e . I c l o s e t h e l i p s of

" m y m o u t h , a n d I e a t l i k e u n t o a l i v i n g b e i n g . I h a v e lif e ( 6 )

"in Tatt u , an d I li ve a g ain afte r de a t h li k e Rd day b y da y . "

CHAPTER XXXIX .

[From the Papyrus of M e s - e m - n e t e r ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . BI . 53) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased sp earing a serpent .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE SERPENT

REREK IN THE UNDERWORLD . O s i r is M e s - e m - n e t e r s a i t h



THE CHAPTER OF REPULSING THE SERPENT 8 9

( 2 ) "G et t h e e b a c k , d e p a r t , r e t r e a t ( ? ) from [ m e ] , 0 Aaapef,

"withdraw, or thou shalt b e drowned at the Pool of Nu, at

" t h e p l a c e w h e r e t h y f a t h e r ( 3 ) b a t h o r d e r e d t h a t t h y s l a u g h t e r

"shal l be performed . Depar t thou from the divine place of

" b i r t h o f R d w h e r e i n i s t h y t e r r o r . I am'Ra who dwe ll eth in

" h i s t e r r o r . ( 4) Get thee b ack, Fiend, before the darts of his

"beams . Ra bath overthrown thy words, the gods have turned

"thy face backwards, the Lynx bath (5) torn open thy breast,

" t h e S c o r p i o n b a t h c a s t f e t t e r s u p o n t h e e ; and Maat bath sent

" f o r t h t h y d e s t r u c t i o n . Those who are in (6) the ways have

"overthrown thee ; fall down and dep art, 0 Apep, thou Enemy

" o f R d ! 0 t h o u t h a t p a s s e s t o v e r t h e r e g i o n i n t h e e a s t e r n p a r t

" o f h e a v e n w i t h t h e s o u n d o f t h e r o a r i n g t h u n d e r - c l o u d , ( q ) 0"Ra who openest the gates of the horizon st raightway on thv

" a p p e a r a n c e , [ A p e p ] b a t h s u n k h e l p l e s s u n d e r [ t h y ] g a s h i n g s . I

"have performed thy will , 0 Rd, I have performed thy will ;

" I h a v e d o n e t h a t w h i c h i s f a i r , I h a v e d o n e t h a t w h i c h i s f a i r ,

" I h a v e l a b o u r e d f o r t h e p e a c e o f ( 8 ) R d . [I] have made to ad-

vance thy fetters, 0 Rd, and Apep b ath fallen throug h thy

"drawing them tight . The gods of the south and of the north,

" o f t h e w e s t a n d o f t h e ( g ) e a s t h a v e f a s t e n e d c h a i n s u p o n h i m ,

" a n d t h e y h a v e f e t t e r e d h i m w i t h f e t t e r s ; the god Rekes bath

òverthr own him and the go d Hertit bath p ut him in chains .

" R a s e t t e t h , R a s e t t e t h ; R a i s s t r o n g a t [ h i s ] ( i o ) s e t t i n g . Apep

" b a t h f a l l e n , A p e p , t h e e n e m y o f R d , d e p a r t e t h . G r e a t e r i s t h e

" p u n i s h m e n t [ w h i c h b a t h b e e n i n f l i c t e d o n ] t h e e t h a n t h e s t i n g ( ? )

"which i s i n t h e S c o r p i o n g o d d e s s , a n d m i g h t i l y h a t h s h e , w h o s e

" c o u r s e i s e v e r l a s t i n g , w o r k e d i t u p o n t h e e a n d w i t h d e a d l y e f f e c t .

"(it) Thou shalt never enjoy the delights of love, thou shalt

"never fulfil thy desire, 0 Apep, t hou Enemy of Rd! He maketh

"thee to go b ack, 0 thou who art hateful to Rd ; h e l o o k e t h

"upon thee, ( 1 2 ) g e t t h e e b a c k ! [ H e ] p i e r c e t h [ t h y ] h e a d , [ h e ]

" c u t t e t h t h r o u g h t h y f a c e , [ h e ] d i v i d e t h [ t h y ] h e a d a t t h e t w o

"sides of the ways , and it is crus hed in his l and ; thy bones

"are smas hed in pieces, thy memb ers are hack ed off thee, and

"the god [A]ker bath condemned (13) thee, 0 Apep, thou enemy



go THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DA 1' .

"of Rd! Thy mariners a re thos e who ke ep the reck oning for

" t h e e , [ 0 R d , a s t h o u ] a d v a n c e s t , a n d t h o u r e s t e s t t h e r e w h e r e i n

" a r e t h e o f f e r i n g s m a d e t o t h e e . [ A s t h o u ] a d v a n c e s t , [ a s t h o u ]

"advances t towards the House ( 1 4 ) t h e a d v a n c e w h i c h t h o u h a s t

"made towards the House is a prosp erous advance ; l e t n o t a n y

"baleful obs tacle proceed from thy mouth against me when thou

"workest on my behalf . I a m S e t w h o l e t l o o s e t h e s t o r m - c l o u d s

"and the ( 1 5 ) thunder in the horizon of heaven eve n as [dot h]

"the god Netcheb -ab-f. "

" ' H a i l ' , s a i t h t h e g o d T e m , ` M a k e s t r o n g y o u r f a c e s , 0 s o l d i e r s

" o f R d , f o r I h a v e d r i v e n b a c k t h e g o d ( i 6 ) N e n t c h a i n t h e p r e -

s e n c e o f t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s . ' ` H a i l ' , s a i t h t h e g o d S e b ,

" ` M a k e y e f i r m t h o s e w h o a r e u p o n t h e i r s e a t s w h i c h a r e i n t h e

"boat of Khepera, (i7) tak e ye your ways, [gras ping] your

"weapons of war in your hands .: ' H a i l ' , s a i t h H a t h o r , ` T a k e v e

"your armour . ' ` H a i l ' , s a i t h N u t , ` C o m e a n d r e p u l s e t h e g o d ( r 8 )

"Tcha who pursueth him that dwel leth in his shrine and who

"set teth out on his way alone , namely, Neb-er-tcher, who can-

" n o t b e r e p u l s e d . ' ` H a i l ' , s a y t h o s e g o d s w h o d w e l l i n t h e i r ( i g )

"companies and who g o round about the Turquoise Pool , `Come,

"0 mighty One, we praise and we will deliver the M ighty One

"[who dw ell eth in] the divine Shrine, from whom proceeds the

"company of the god s, ( 2 0 ) let commemorations b e made for

" h i m , l e t p r a i s e b e g i v e n t o h i m , l e t w o r d s [ o f p r a i s e ] b e r e c i t e d

"before him by you and by me' . ` H a i l ' , s a i t h N u t t o t h y S w e e t

" O n e . `Hail', say those who dwell among the gods, ( 2 1 ) `He

"cometh forth, he findeth [his] way, he maketh cap tives among

" t h e g o d s , h e h a t h t a k e n p o s s e s s i o n o f t h e g o d d e s s N u t , a n d S e b

"standeth up . ' H a i l , t h o u t e r r i b l e o n e , t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s

" i s o n ( 2 2 ) the march . H a t h o r q u a k e t h w i t h t e r r o r , a n d R d h a t h

"triumphed over Apep . "



THE CHAPTER OF REPULS ING THE EATER OF THE ASS .

CHAPTER X L .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f Ra ( s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . I . B I . 5 4 ) a n d f r o m t h e

P a p y r u s o f Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 i , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d s p e a r i n g a s e r p e n t w h i c h h a s s p r u n g u p o n a n

a s s a n d i s b i t i n g i n t o h i s n e c k ; s e e B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 r , s h e e t 2 1 ; a n d

N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . I . B I. 5 4 .

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE EATER OF

THE ASS . O s i r i s R a , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

I . " G e t t h e e b a c k , ( 2 ) Hai, thou impure one, th ou abo mina-

t i o n o f O s i r i s ! Thoth hath cut off thy head, and I have per-

" f o r m e d u p o n t h e e a l l t h e t h i n g s w h i c h t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s

"(3) ordered concerning thee in the matter of the work of thy

" s l a u g h t e r . G e t t h e e b a c k , t h o u a b o m i n a t i o n o f O s i r i s , f r o m t h e

"N e s h n t e t b o a t . . . . which (4 ) adv anceth with a fair wind . Ye

"are holy, 0 all ve gods, and [ye] have cast down headlong

" t h e e n e m i e s ( 5 ) o f O s i r i s ; t h e g o d s o f T a - u r s h o u t f o r j o y . G e t

"thee back , 0 thou Eater of the (6) Ass, thou abomination of

"the god Haas who dwell eth in the underworld . I know thee,

"I know thee, I know thee, I know thee . Who art thou? (7 )

"I amI I . ( 2 ) "On thy face, [0 fiend], and devour me not, for I am

"pure, and I am with the time which cometh o f itsel f. T h o u

"shal t not come to me, 0 thou that comes t' without being in-

"yoked, and whose [time of coming] is unknown . I am the lord

" o f t h y m o u t h , g e t t h e e b a c k ( 3 ) , t h o u a n d t h y d e s i r e s ( ? ) H a i l ,

" l - a a s , w i t h h i s s t o n e [ k n i f e ] H o r u s h a t h c u t a s u n d e r t h y m e m b e r s ,

"and thou art des troyed within thy company, and thy b end (or

" d w e l l i n g - p l a c e ) i s d e s t r o y e d f o r t h e e b y t h e c o m p a n y o f t h y g o d s

"who dwel l in the cities of Pe and ( 4) Tep . He that slayeth

"[th ee] there is in the form of the Eye of Horus , and I have

" d r i v e n t h e e a w a y a s t h o u w a s t a d v a n c i n g , a n d I h a v e v a n q u i s h e d

"thee by the winds of my mouth . 0 thou Eater (5) of those

"who commit sins, who dolt pl under and spoil, I have [com-

i . T h e s e w o r d s a r e f r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Ra .

9 1




" m i t t e d ] n o s i n ; t h e r e f o r e , l e t m y p a l e t t e a n d t h e w r i t i n g s w i t h

"hostile charges [ against me upon them] be given unto me . I

" h a v e d o n e n o w r o n g i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f ( 6 ) t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s ,

"therefore shoot not thy [venom] at me . I give, do thou take

"according to what I order ; snatch me not away, and eat me

" n o t , f o r I a m t h e l o r d o f l i f e , t h e P r i n c e ( L i f e , H e a l t h , S t r e n g t h ! )

" o f t h e h o r i z o n . "

CHAPTER XLI .

[From the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 25 . ]

Vignett e : T h e d e c e a s e d a r m e d w i t h a k n i f e a n d a s h o r t s t a f f ; s e e

N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , Bd . I . B i. 5 5 . I n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s t h e d e c e a s e d i s

p i e r c i n g a s e r p e n t w h i c h l i e s w r i t h i n g o n a b a r r e d i n s t r u m e n t ( s e e L e p s i u s ,

o p . c i t . , B I . z g ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING AWAY THE SLAUGH-

TERINGS WHICH ARE PERFORMED IN THE UNDERWORLD . N e b s e n i ,

the scribe and des igner in the Temples of Upper and Lower

Egypt, he to whom fair veneration is paid, ( 2 ) t h e s o n o f t h e

s c r i b e a n d a r t i s t T h e n a , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hail, Tem, I have b ecome g lorious ( o r a K k u ) i n t h e p r e -

s e n c e o f t h e d o u b l e L i o n - g o d , t h e g r e a t ( 3 ) g o d , t h e r e f o r e o p e n

"thou unto me the gate of the god Seb . I smell the earth

" ( i . e ., I bow down so that my nose toucheth the ground) of

"the great g od who dwell eth in the underworld, and I advance

"(4) into the presence of the company of the gods w ho dwell

" w i t h t h e b e i n g s w h o a r e i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d . H a i l , t h o u g u a r d i a n

" o f t h e d i v i n e d o o r o f t h e c i t y o f B e t a , t h o u [ g o d ] N e t i O w h o

"dwel les t in Amentet, ( 5) I eat food, and I have life throug h

"the air, and the g od Atch-ur leadeth me with [him] to the

"mighty b oat of (6) Khepera . I h o l d c o n v e r s e w i t h t h e d i v i n e

" m a r i n e r s a t e v e n t i d e , I e n t e r i n , I g o f o r t h , ( 7 ) a n d I s e e t h e

" b e i n g w h o i s t h e r e ; I l i f t h i m u p , a n d I s a y t h a t w h i c h I h a v e

" t o s a y u n t o h i m , w h o s e t h r o a t s t i n k e t h [ f o r l a c k o f a i r ] . I h a v e



THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK SLAI7GHTERINGS . 9 3

" l i f e , ( 8 ) a n d I a m d e l i v e r e d , h a v i n g l a i n d o w n i n d e a t h . H a i l ,

" t h o u t h a t b r i n g e s t o f f e r i n g s a n d o b l a t i o n s , b r i n g f o r w a r d t h y

"mouth and mak e to draw nigh the writings ( 9 ) ( o r l i s t s ) o f

" o f f e r i n g s a n d o b l a t i o n s . S et thou Right an d Truth firmly upon

"their throne, make thou the writings to draw nigh, and set

" t h o u u p t h e g o d d e s s e s ( t o ) i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f O s i r i s , t h e m i g h t y

" g o d , t h e P r i n c e o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , w h o c o u n t e t h h i s y e a r s , w h o

"hearkeneth unto those who are in the islands (or pool s), who

" r a i s e t h h i s ( i i ) r i g h t s h o u l d e r , w h o j u d g e t h t h e d i v i n e p r i n c e s ,

" a n d w h o s e n d e t h [ O s i r i s ] i n t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t s o v e -

reign princes who live in the underworl d .

CHAPTER XLII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b e f o r e O s i r i s w i t h h i s l e f t h a n d r a i s e d

t o h i s m o u t h ; o r t h e d e c e a s e d h o l d i n g a s e r p e n t i n h i s h a n d s ; o r t h e

d e c e a s e d a d d r e s s i n g a s e r p e n t w h i c h h a s i t s h e a d t u r n e d a w a y ; o r t h e

d e c e a s e d d r a w i n g a c o r d f r o m r o u n d t h e t o p o f a t e t ( ? ) , emblem of

s t a b i l i t y . I

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK THE ( 2 ) SLAUGH-

TERINGS WHICH ARE PERFORMED IN SUTEN-HENEN . O s i r i s N u ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" O t h o u l a n d o f t h e s c e p t r e ! ( literal br, wood) 0 thou white

"crown of the divine form ! 0 t h o u r e s t i n g - p l a c e o f t h e b o a t !

"I am the Child, ( 3) I am the Child, I am the Child, I am

" t h e C h i l d . H a i l , A b u - u r , t h o u s a y e s t d a y b y d a y : ` T h e s l a u g h t e r -

"block is made ready as thou knowest, and thou bast come to

"decay . ' I a m ( 4 . ) R a , t h e s t a b l i s h e r o f t h o s e w h o p r a i s e [ h i m ] .

" I a m t h e k n o t o f t h e g o d w i t h i n t h e Aser t r e e , t h e d o u b l y b e a u t i -

f u l o n e , w h o i s m o r e s p l e n d i d t h a n y e s t e r d a y ( s a y f o u r t i m e s ) .

"I am Rd, the s tabl isher of those who praise [him] . (5) I am

"the knot of the god within the Aser t r e e , a n d m y g o i n g f o r t h

" i s t h e g o i n g f o r t h [ o f R a ] o n t h i s d a y . "

1 . F o r t h e s e s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . BI . 5 7 .




"My hair is t he hair of Nu . M y f a c e i s t h e f a c e o f t h e D i s k .

"My eyes are the eyes of (6) Hathor . My ears are the ears of

"Ap-uat . M y nose is the nose of Khenti-khas . My l ips are the

"lips of Anpu . M y t e e t h a r e t h e t e e t h o f ( 7 ) S e r q e t . M y neck

" i s t h e n e c k o f t h e d i v i n e g o d d e s s I s i s . My hands are the hands

"of Ba-neb-Tattu . M y f o r e - a r m s a r e t h e f o r e - a r m s o f N e i t h , t h e

"Lady of Sais . My backb one is (8 ) the backbone of Suti . M y

" p h a l l u s i s t h e p h a l l u s o f O s i r i s . M y r e i n s a r e t h e r e i n s o f t h e

"Lords of Kher-aba . My chest is the chest of the Mighty one

"of Terror . (9) My b elly and back are the belly and back of

"Sekhet . M y buttocks are the buttocks of the Eye of Horus .

" M y h i p s a n d l e g s a r e t h e h i p s a n d l e g s o f N u t . M y f e e t a r e t h e

" f e e t o f ( r o ) Ptah . [ M y f i n g e r s ] a n d m y l e g - b o n e s a r e t h e [ f i n g e r s

" a n d ] l e g - h o n e s o f t h e L i v i n g G o d s . There is no member of my

"body which is not the member of some god . The god Thoth

"sh ieldeth my body ( ii) al togeth er, and I am Ra day by day .

"I shall not be dragged back b y my arms, and none shall l ay

"violent hold upon my hand s . And shall d o me hurt neither

"men, nor gods, ( 1 2 ) nor the sainted dead, nor those who have

" p e r i s h e d , n o r a n y o n e o f t h o s e o f a n c i e n t t i m e s , n o r a n y m o r t a l ,

"nor any human b eing . I (r3) am he w ho cometh forth, ad-

vancing, who se name is unknown . I am Yesterday, and See r

"of mill ions of years is my name . I p a s s a l o n g , I p a s s a l o n g

" t h e p a t h s o f t h e d i v i n e c e l e s t i a l j u d g e s . (r4) 1 am the lord of

" e t e r n i t y , a n d I d e c r e e a n d I j u d g e l i k e t h e g o d K h e p e r a . I a m

" t h e l o r d o f t h e U r e r e t crown . I am he who dwelleth in the

"Utchat [and in the E gg, in the U t c h a t and in the Egg, and

" i t i s g i v e n u n t o m e t o l i v e [ w i t h ] t h e m . I am he that dwell -

" e t h i n t h e U t c h a t w h e n i t c l o s e t h , a n d I e x i s t b y t h e s t r e n g t h

" t h e r e o f . I come forth an d I shine ; I enter in and I come to

" l i f e . I am in the Utchat]j my s e a t i s (15) upon my throne,

" a n d I s i t i n t h e a b o d e o f s p l e n d o u r ( : ) b e f o r e i t . I am Horus

" a n d ( I ) t r a v e r s e m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s . I have given the decree

" [ f o r t h e s t a b l i s h i n g o f ] m y t h r o n e a n d I a m t h e r u l e r t h e r e o f ;

"and in very truth, my mouth keepeth an even balance b oth in

i . T h e w o r d s w i t h i n b r a c k e t s a r e s u p p l i e d f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M e s - e m - n e t e r .



THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING BACK SLAUGHTERINGS . 95

" s p e e c h ( r 6 ) and i n s i l e n c e . In very truth, my forms are in-

v e r t e d . I am Un-nefer, from one seas on even unto another,

"and what I have is within me ; [I am] (i7) th e only One, who

"proceed eth from an only One who go eth round abo ut in his

" c o u r s e . I a m h e w h o d w e l l e t h i n t h e U t c h a t , n o e v i l t h i n g o f a n y

" f o r m o r k i n d s h a l l s p r i n g u p a g a i n s t m e , a n d n o b a l e f u l o b j e c t ,

" a n d n o h a r m f u l t h i n g , a n d n o d i s a s t r o u s t h i n g s h a l l h a p p e n u n t o

" ( t 8 ) m e . I o p e n t h e d o o r i n h e a v e n , I g o v e r n m y t h r o n e , a n d I

` o p e n u p [ t h e w a y ] f o r t h e b i r t h s [ w h i c h t a k e p l a c e ] o n t h i s d a y .

" I am(?) t h e c h i l d w h o m a r c h e t h a l o n g t h e r o a d o f Y e s t e r d a y . [ I

"am] To-day for untol d nations and pe oples . (i9) I am he who

" p r o t e c t e t h y o u f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s , a n d w h e t h e r y e b e d e n i z e n s

" o f t h e h e a v e n s , o r o f t h e e a r t h , o r o f t h e s o u t h , o r o f t h e ( 2 0 )

" n o r t h , o r o f t h e e a s t , o r o f t h e w e s t , t h e f e a r o f m e i s i n y o u r

" b o d i e s . I am he whose b eing has been moulded in his eye,

" a n d I s h a l l n o t d i e a g a i n . M y moment is in your bodies, b ut

" m y ( 2 1 ) forms are in my pl ace of habitation . I am he who

"cannot b e known, but the Red Ones hav e their faces directed

"towards me . I am the unveiled one . The season w herein [the

" g o d ] c r e a t e d t h e h e a v e n s f o r m e ( 2 2 ) and enlarged the bounds

"of the earth and made great the progeny thereof cannot be

"found out ; b u t t h e y f a i l a n d a r e n o t u n i t e d [ a g a i n ] . M y name

" s e t t e t h i t s e l f a p a r t f r o m a l l t h i n g s [ a n d f r o m ] t h e g r e a t e v i l

"[which is in] the mouths [of men] by reas on of the speech

" w h i c h I a d d r e s s ( 2 3 ) unto you . I a m h e w h o r i s e t h a n d s h i n e t h ,

"the wal l which cometh out of a wall , an only One who pro-

"ceedeth from an onl y One . T h e r e i s n e v e r a d a y t h a t p a s s e t h

" w i t h o u t ( 2 + ) t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a p p e r t a i n u n t o h i m b e i n g t h e r e i n ;

" p a s s i n g , p a s s i n g , p a s s i n g , p a s s i n g . V e r i l y I s a y u n t o t h e e , I a m

"the Sp rout which cometh forth from Nu, and my M other is

"Nut . Hail, 0 ( 2 5 ) my Creator, I am he who hath n o power

"to wal k, the gr eat Knot who is within yesterday . The might

"of my streng th is within my hand . I myse lf am not known,

"but I am he who knoweth thee . ( 2 6 ) I c a n n o t b e h e l d w i t h t h e

" h a n d , b u t I a m h e w h o c a n h o l d t h e e i n h i s h a n d . H a i l , 0 E g g !

" H a i l , 0 E g g ! I a m H o r u s w h o l i v e f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s , w h o s e




"flame shineth upon you (27) and b ringeth your hearts to me .

" I h a v e t h e c o m m a n d o f m y t h r o n e a n d I a d v a n c e a t t h i s s e a s o n ,

"I have opened a path, an d I have delivered mysel f from all

" e v i l t h i n g s . ( 2 8 ) I a m t h e d o g - h e a d e d a p e o f g o l d t h r e e p a l m s

"and two fingers [high], which hath neither arms nor leg s and

"dwel leth in Het-ka-Ptah (Memp his), and I go forth as g oeth

"forth the dog-headed ape that dwel leth in Het-ka-Ptah . "

I n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 3 2 , o n l y a p o r t i o n o f t h i s C h a p t e r

i s g i v e n , i . e . , t h e s e c t i o n w h i c h g i v e s t h e n a m e s o f t h e d e i t i e s

with whom the various memb ers of the body of the deceased

a r e i d e n t i f i e d . This s ection is arranged in tabular form, and

c a r e f u l l y d r a w n v i g n e t t e s g i v i n g p i c t u r e s o f t h e g o d s m e n t i o n e d

are added ; t h e f o l l o w i n g i s t h e t r a n s l a t i o n :-

Vigne tte : The god Nu .

Text : (i) The hair of Osiris Ani, triumphant , is the h air

of Nu .

Vigne tte : R d , h a w k - h e a d e d , a n d w e a r i n g a d i s k .

Text :( 2 ) T h e f a c e o f O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , i s

t h e f a c e o f R d .

Vign ette : T h e g o d d e s s H a t h o r , w i t h h o r n s a n d a d i s k o n h e r h e a d .

Text : (3) The eyes of Osiris Ani, triumphant, are the e yes

of Hatho r .

Vign ette : T h e g o d A p - u a t , j a c k a l - h e a d e d , o n a s t a n d a r d .

Text : (4 ) The ears of Osiris Ani, triumphant, ar e the ears

of Ap-uat .

Vign ette : T h e g o d A n p u , j a c k a l - h e a d e d .

Text : ( 5 ) T h e l i p s o f O s i r i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , a r e t h e l i p s

of Anpu .

Vign ette : T h e s c o r p i o n - g o d d e s s S e r q e t h o l d i n g t h e e m b l e m s o f l i f e

a n d e t e r n i t y .

Text : ( 6 ) T h e t e e t h o f O s i r i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , a r e t h e t e e t h

o f S e r q e t .

Vigne tte : T h e g o d d e s s I s i s .

Text : (7) The neck of Osiris Ani, triumphant, is t he neck

o f I s i s .



THE CHAPTER OF THE IDEN TIFICATION OF , 1 1 E _ 1 7 1 3 ER . S 9 7

Vig n e t t e : A r a m-h e a d e d g o d , h a v i n g a s e r p e n t b e t w e e n hi s h o r n s .

Text : ( 8) The hands of Osiris Ani, triumphant, a re the hand s

of Ba-ne b -Tatt u .

Vignette : T h e g o d d e s s U a t c h e t .

Text : (g) The shoulder of Osiris Ani, triumphant, is the

s h o u l d e r of Uat c h e t .

Vig n e t t e : T h e g o d d e s s M e r t s t a n d i n g o n t h e s y m b o l o f g o l d ; her

hands are outstretched, and she has on her head a cl uster of plants .

Text : ( 10) The throat of Osiris Ani, triump h ant, is the th roat

o f M e r t .

Vig n e t t e : T h e g o d d e s s N ei t h .

Text : ( t r) The fore-arms o f Osiris Ani, triumpha nt, are the

fore-arms of the lady o f SaYs .

Vignette : T h e g o d S e t .

Text : (12) The backbone of Osiris Ani, triumphant, is the

b a c k b o n e o f S e t .

Vig n e t t e : A god .

Text : (i3) The chest of Osiris Ani, triumphant, is the che st

of the lords of Kher-aba .

Vignette : A god .

Text : ( r ¢ ) T h e f l e s h o f O s i r is A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , i s t h e f l e s h

of the Mighty One of Terror .

Vignette : A god .

Text : (i5) The reins and back of Osiris Ani, triumphant,

a r e t h e r e i n s a n d b a c k o f S e k h e t .

Vignette : An Ut ch at u p on a p yl o n .

Text : ( t 6 ) T h e b u t t o c k s o f Os i r is A n i , t r iu m p h a n t , a r e t h e

b u t t o c k s o f t h e E y e o f Ho r n s .

Vignette : Osiris, wearing the A t ef crown and hold ing the flail and

c r o o k .

Text : (r7) The phallus of Osiris Ani, triumphant, is the

p h a l l u s of O siri s .

Vignette : The g o d d e s s N u t .

Text : ( t 8 ) T h e l e g s o f O s ir i s ' An i , t r iu m p h a n t , a r e t h e l e g s

of Nut .

Vignette : The god Ptah, standing on the pedestal o f Maat .

7




Te x t : ( r9) The feet of Osiris Ani, triump hant , are th e feet

of Ptah .

Vigne tte : T h e s t a r O r i o n

Te x t : ( 2o) The finge rs o f Osiris Ani, triumphan t, ar e the

finge rs of Orion .

Vigne tte : T h r e e u r a e i .

Text : ( 2 1 ) The leg-hones of Osiris Ani, triumphant, a re the

leg-bones of the living uraei .

CHAPTER X 1 , I 1 1 .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . Mu s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 7 ) . ]

Vigne tte : I n t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e ;

in the Turin Papyrus (Lepsius, o p . c i t . , B I . 2 0 ) t h e d e c e a s e d i s s e e n

a d o r i n g t h r e e g o d s , e a c h o f w h o m h o l d s t h e e m b l e m o f l i f e i n h i s r i g h t

h a n d a n d a s c e p t r e i n h i s l e f t .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE HEAD OF A

MAN BE CUT OFF FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . Osiris Ani,

triumphant, saith :- (2)

"I am the Great One, son of the Great One ; [I am] Fire, the

"son of Fire, to whom was g iven (3 ) his head after it had bee n

"cut off. T h e h e a d o f Os i r is w a s n o t t a k e n a w a y f r o m h im ,

"let no t the he ad of Osiris ( 4 ) Ani be taken away from him . I

" ha ve kni t my s e lf to g ether ; I h a v e m a d e m y s e l f w h o l e a n d

" com p l ete ; I h a v e r e n e w e d m y y o u t h ; I am Osiris, th e lor d

"of eternity .

CHAPTER XLIV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t1 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e s c r i b e A n i , c l o t h e d i n w h i t e a n d s e a t e d i n a c h a i r ; h e

h o l d s i n t h e r i g h t h a n d t h e k herp s c e p t r e , a n d i n t h e l e f t a l o n g s t a f f .

B e f o r e h i m i s a t a b l e . I n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l . 2 0 ) t h e

d e c e a s e d i s s e e n s t a n d i n g b e f o r e a f u n e r a l c o f f e r o r s h r i n e .



THE CHAPTER OF NOT SUFFERING CORRUPTION .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECOND TIME IN

THE UNDERWORLD . O s i r is A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" M y p l a c e o f h id i n g is o p e n e d , m y p l a c e o f h i d in g i s r e v e a l e d .

"The Khus h a v e ( 2) f a l l e n in t o t h e d a r k n e s s , b u t t h e E y e o f

"Horns bath made me mighty and the god Ap-uat hath nursed

" m e l i k e a b a b e . I ha v e hidd e n ( 3 ) my s e l f with yo u , 0 ye s t a r s

"that never diminish! My brow is like unto that of Ra ; my"face is open ; ( 4 ) m y h e a r t is u p o n i t s t h r o n e ; I have power

"over the speech of my mouth ; I have knowledge ; in very truth

"I am Rd himself. I a m n o t h e l d t o b e a p e r s o n o f n o a c c o u n t ;

" ( 5 ) a n d v i o l e n c e s h a l l n o t b e d o n e u n t o m e . T h y fa t h e r l i v e t h

"for thee, 0 son of Nut ; I am thy son, 0 Great One, and I

" h a v e s e e n t h e h i d d e n t h i ng s ( 6 ) w h i c h b e l o n g u n t o t h e e . I am

"crowned king of the gods, I shall not die a second time in

"the underworld . "

CHAPTER XLV[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit. M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 6 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : T h e m u m m y o f t h e s c r i b e An i b e i n g e m b r a c e d b y A n u b i s ,

jackal -headed, the god of the dead .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF NOT SUFFERING CORRUPTION

IN THE UNDERWORLD . O s ir i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" 0 t h o u w h o c a n s t n o t m o v e , l i k e u n t o O s i r is ; 0 thou who

" c a n s t n o t m o v e , li k e u n t o O si ris! ( 2 ) 0 t h o u w h o s e l i m b s c a n n o t

"m o v e , li k e un t o [ t h o s e of] Osiri s! Let no t th y lim b s b e with-

out movement ; let them no t suffer corruption ; l e t t h e m n o t

"pass away ; l e t t h e m n o t d e c a y ; and let them b e fashioned (3)

"for me as if I mysel f were Osiris,"

Rubric : IF [THE DECEASED] KNOW THIS CHAPTER, HE SHALL NEVER

SUFFER CORRUPTION IN THE UNDERWORLD .

7 V

99



1 0 0 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

CHAPTER XLVI .

[From the Papyrus o f A n i ( B r i t . Mus . No. 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t i 6 ) . ]

Vign ette : The do o r wa y of the to m b . By one post stands the soul of

the scribe Ani in the form of a human-headed haw k , and by the other

t h e Bernnt bird .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF NOT PERISHING AN]) OF BE-

COMING ALIVE IN THE UNDERWORLD . O si ri s A ni s ai t h :-

"Hail, ( 2 ) ye children o f t h e g o d S h u ! H a il , y e c h i l d r e n o f

"the god Shu! The Tuat (underworld) bath gained the mastery

"over his diadem . ' L i k e t h e Hamtnemet 2 beings may I a r i s e ,

"even as Osiris doth arise and fare forth . "

CHAPTER XLVII .

[From the Papyrus o f No (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : In the Theban Recension this Chapter has no vignette ; but

in the Turin Papyrus ( Lepsius, op . c i t . , BI . 2 0 ) a f u n e r a l s h r i n e i s d e p i c t e d

with the soul of the deceased on one side of it, and the B e n n u bird on

the other .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THE SEAT AND

THRONE OF NQ, THE OVERSEER OF THE PALACE AND CHANCEL-

LOR-IN-CHIEF, TO BE TAKEN AWAY ( 2 ) FROM HIM IN THE UNDER-

\VORLD. He s aith :-

" O m y S e a t , 0 my Throne, come y e to me, and go ye round

"about me . I am your Lord, 0 ye gods, come ye and take up

"your pl aces in my train . ( 3 ) 1 am the son o f y o u r l o r d , an d ye

"belong to me through my divine father who bath made you . "

i . The Papyrus o f Nebseni reads :- "Each dawn gaineth the mastery over

[his] diadem with rays o f l i g h t ; [ y o u r ] h a n d s r i s e t i p , [ y o u r ] h e a d s r i s e u p

each day . "

2 . A c l a s s o f celestial beings who were once men and women .



THE CHAPTER OF NOT GOING TO THE BLOCK OF SLAUGHTER 10I

CHAPTER XLVII .

[From the P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M us . N o . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

"0 my Seat, 0 my Throne, come yc to me, and go ye round

"about me, 0 ye gods . I a m a s p i r i t u a l b o d y ( s a h ) , therefore

"let me rise up among those who follow the great god . I am

"t h e s o n of M a d ti, an d th a t which he a b o mina t e t h i s th e s p e e c h

" o f fa l s e h o o d . I am in triumph!"

CHAPTER XLVIII .

This Cha p t e r i s gi ve n t w ice in the S aite Rece n si on , on c e a s

Chapter X and once as Chapter XLVIII ; for the trans lation of

i t a s f o u n d in t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i, s h e e t 1 8 , s e e a b o v e , p . 29 .

CHAPTER XLIX .

T h is C h a p t e r i s g i v e n t wi c e i n t h e S a l t e R e c e n s i o n , o n c e a s

Chapter XI and once as Chapter XLIX ; for the trans lation of

i t a s fo u n d i n t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 2 1 , s e e a b o v e , p . 3o .

CHAPTER L A .

[From the P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mus . No. 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : In the Papyrus of Ani, sheet i 6 , and in the Turin P ap yrus

(Lepsius, o p . c i t . , B! . zi) the deceased is represent ed standing with his

back to a g ory knife which rests on its block .

Text : (I) THE CHAPTER OF (2) NOT ENTERING IN UNTO THE

BLOCK OF THE GOD . N e b s e ni s aith :-

"The four bones (or knots) of my neck and back have been

"joined together for me by the (3) Guardian of heaven, who

" s t a b l i s h e d t h e k n o t fo r h im w h o l a y h e l p l e s s a t t h e b r e a s t s [ o f

"his moth er] on the day of cutting off the hair . The bones of

" m y n e c k a n d b a c k ( q ) h a v e b e e n k n i t t o g e t h e r b y t h e g o d S e t



1 0 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DA Y

" a n d b y t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s a s s t r o n g l y a s t h e y w e r e i n t h e

" t i m e t h a t i s p a s t ; may nothing happen to break them apart!

"Mak e ye me strong! The goddes s Nut hath joined together the

"bones of my (5) neck and back, [and t h e y a r c ] e v e n a s t h e y

" w e r e i n t h e t i m e t h a t i s p a s t , w h e n I s a w t h e t r u e b i r t h o f t h e

" g o d s i n v i s i b l e f o r m s t a k e p l a c e i n i t s t r u e a n d r i g h t o r d e r . I

"am Peti, and I am in the pres ence of the great g od . "

CHAPTER L B .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o .1 0 . 4 7 7 ,

s h e e t i 9 ) . ]

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT ENTERING IN UNTO THE

BLOCK . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u ,


" I h a v e j o i n e d u p m y h e a d a n d n e c k i n h e a v e n [ a n d ] i n e a r t h .

" ( 2 ) B e h o l d i t i s R d w h o , d a y b y d a y , s t a b l i s h e t h t h e k n o t f o r

"him who stood helples s upon his legs on the day of cutting

` o f f t h e h a i r . The god Suti and the company of the gods have

"joined together my (3) neck and my back strongl y, and they

" a r e e v e n a s t h e y w e r e i n t h e t i m e t h a t i s p a s t ; may nothing

"happen to break them apart! Make ye me strong against the

" s l a u g h t e r e r o f m y d i v i n e f a t h e r . ( q ) I h a v e g o t t e n p o w e r o v e r

"my two lands. T h e g o d d e s s N u t h a t h j o i n e d t o g e t h e r t h e b o n e s

"of my neck and back, and I behold them as they were in the

"time that is pas t, when as yet I had not seen Madt, and when

" t h e g o d s w e r e n o t b o r n ( 5 ) i n v i s i b l e f o r m s . I am Penti, and

"I am in the form of the destroyer of the g reat go ds . "

CHAPTER LI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n ;

i n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B I . 2 1 ) a n u p r i g h t f i g u r e of t h e

d e c e a s e d f o r m s t h e v i g n e t t e .



THE CHAPTER OF NOT EATING FILTH io 3

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT MARCHING TO BE OVER-

THROWN IN THE UNDERWORLD . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , N u ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"That which is an abomination unto me, that which is an

" a b o m i n a t io n u n t o m e , l e t m e n o t e a t . T h a t w h i c h is a n a b o m i -

nation unto me, that which is an abomination unto me is filth ;

"let me not eat it [in the place of] the sepul chral cak es which

" a r e o f f e r e d u n t o t h e Kas. I ( 3 ) L e t m e n o t b e d e s t r o y e d t h e r e -

by ; let me not be compelled to take it into my hands ; and

"let me not be compelled to walk thereon in my sandals . "

CHAPTER LII .

[From the Papyrus o f N o ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t > 1).]

Vignette : This Chapter is without a vignet te in the Theban Recension ;

in the Turin Papyrus ( Lepsius, op . c i t . , Bl . z r) the deceased is seated on

a chair and his left hand is stretched out over a tabl e .

Text : (z) THE CHAPTER OF' NOT EATING FILTH IN THE

UNDERWORLD . Th e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - in -

c h i e f, N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"That which is an abomination unto me, that which is an

"abomination unto me, let me not eat . That which is an abo-

mination unto me, ( 2 ) that which is an abomination unto me

" i s f i l t h ; l e t m e n o t e a t i t [ in t h e p l a c e of] t h e s e p u l c h r a l c a k e s

" [ which are offered unto] the Kas . L e t it n o t l i g h t u p o n m y b o d y ;

"let me not be obliged to take it into my hands ; and let me

" n o t b e o b l i g e d t o ( 3 ) w a l k t h e r e o n in m y s a n d a l s . What, now,

" w i l t t h o u l i v e u p o n i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g o d s ? [ L e t f o o d ]

" c o m e u n t o m e f r o m t h e p l a c e w h i t h e r t h o u w i l t b r i n g f o o d ( ? ) ,

" a n d l e t m e l i v e u p o n t h e s e v e n l o a v e s o f b r e a d ( 4 ) w h ic h s h a l l b e

" b r o u g h t a s f o o d b ef o r e Ho r n s , a n d u p o n t h e b r e a d w hi c h is b r o u g h t

" b e f o r e T h o t h . The gods shall say unto me: `What manner of

i . Or, "Let me not be compelled to eat i t [ i n t h e a b s e n c e of] t h e s e p u l c h r a l

cakes and provisions which shall be offered unto me . "



1 0 4 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY D A Y

"food woulds t thou have given unto thee ?' [ A n d I r e p l y : ] L e t

"me eat my food under the sycamore tree (5 ) of my lady, the

"goddes s Hathor, and let my times be among the divine beings

"who have al ighted thereon . Let me have the power to order

"my own fields in Tattu (6) and m y own gr owing crops in

"Ann u . Let me live upon bread made of white barley, and l et

"my beer b e [made] from red grain, and may the per son s of

" ( 7 ) my father and mother be g iven unto me as g uardians of

" m y d o o r a n d f o r t h e o r d e r i n g o f m y t e r r i t o r y . Let me be sound

"and strong, let me have a large room, and let me be able to

" s i t w h e r e s o e v e r I p l e a s e . "

CHAPTER LIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i i ) . ]

Vignett e : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e i n t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n ;

i n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , D l . 2 2 ) t h e d e c e a s e d i s s e a t e d o n

a c h a i r w i t h a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s b e f o r e h i m , a n d h i s l e f t h a n d , w i t h a b o w l

t h e r e i n , i s s t r e t c h e d o u t o v e r i t .

Text : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT EATING FILTH AND OF NOT

DRINKING FOUL WATER IN THE UNDERWORLD . The overseer of

t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"I am the Bull with two horns, and [ I] lead ( 2 ) a l o n g t h e

"heavens . [I am] the lord of the risings of the heavens, the

"Great Ill uminer who cometh forth out of flame, the b estower

"of years, the far extending One, the doub le Lion-god, and

"there hath been g iven to me (3) the journey of the god of

"splendour (Khu) . I That which is an ab omination unto me, that

"which is an abomination unto me, l et me not eat . [ L e t m e n o t

" c a t ] f i l t h , a n d l e t m e n o t d r i n k f o u l w a t e r , a n d l e t m e n o t b e

" t r i p p e d u p a n d f a l l [ i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d ] . ( 4 ) I a m t h e l o r d o f

"cake s in Annu, and my b read is in heaven with Ra , a n d m y

"cakes are on the earth with the god Seb , for the S e k t e t b o a t

I . Va r . , S h u .



THE CHAPTERS OF GIVING AIR TO THE DECF . t . S E D . 105

" a n d t h e Alet b o a t h a v e ( 5 ) b r o u g h t t h e m t o m e f r o m t h e h o us e

"of the great god who is in Annu. I have put away from me

"m y a s s o ciat e s , an d I ha v e unite d my s e l f to th e b o a t of hea v e n .

"I eat of wha t th e y (i . e . , t h e g o d s , or th e divine b o a t m e n ) ea t

" t h e r e ; I l iv e u p o n w h a t ( 6 ) t h e y l i v e u p o n t h e r e ; and I cat

" o f t h e c a k e s w h ic h a r e i n t h e h a l l o f t h e l o r d o f s e p u l c h r a l

" offe ri n g s , I t h e o v e r s e e r of t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r-in- c hief ,

"Nu, triumphant . " I

CHAPTER LIV .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . M u s . No. 1 0 , 47 7 , s h e e t i 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased arrayed in white and holding a sail, sym bol ic

of air, in his left hand ( see Pap yrus of Ani, sheet 1 5 ) .

Text : (r) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING AIR ( 2 ) TO THE OVER-

SEER OF THE PALACE, THE CHANCELLOR-IN-CHIEF, N U, TRIUM-

PHANT, IN THE UNDERWORLD . H e s a i t h :--

" H a il , t h o u g o d T e m u , g r a n t u n t o m e t h e s w e e t b r e a t h w h i c h

"dwel leth in thy nostrils! I am the Egg (3) which is in Kenkcn-

"ur (i . e . , t h e G r e a t Cac k l e r ) , an d I wat c h an d g u a r d th a t mi g h t y

" t h i n g w h i c h b a t h c o m e i n t o b e i n g a n d w i t h w h ic h t h e g o d S e b

" b a t h o p e n e d t h e e a r t h . I live ; and it liveth ; ( 4 ) I b e c o m e o l d ,

"I live, and I snuff the air . I am the god Utcha-aabet ( i . e . , the

" g o d w h o t r i e t h h o s ti li t y ) , a n d I r e v o l v e b e hi n d [ t o p r o t e c t] hi s

"egg . I s hine at th e mo m e n t ( 5 ) of Horu s , th e mi g h t y g o d S u ti,

"wh o s e s t r e n g t h i s two-fo l d . Hail, thou who makest sweet the

"seasons of the two earths, thou dweller among tchefatu food,

" t h o u d w e l l e r i n t h e c e r u l e a n h e i g h t s o f h e a v e n , 2 keep watch

"over the Babe that dwelleth in his (6) cot when he cometh

"for t h to yo u . "

i . In the Leyden Papyrus of Rd the Chapter ends :- " t r i u m p h a n t b e f o r e t h e

g r e a t g o d , t h e l o r d o f A m e n t e t , a n d b e f o r e A n p u " ; i n t h e T u r i n P a p y r u s ( L e p s i u s ,

op . c i t . , 1 3 1 . 22) it ends with the words :- " F i l t h i s an abomination unto me,

and I w i l l n o t e a t i t . "

2 . L i t e r a l l y : "Dweller i n l a p i s - l a z u l i . "



i o 6 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

CHAPTER LV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 10 ,4 i7 , s he et 1 2 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d h o l d i n g a s a i l i n e a c h h a n d ( s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . ,

B d . I . B l . 6 7 ) .

Te x t : (i) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING AIR IN THE UNDER-

WORLD . S ai th Nu, tri umphant :- (2 )

"I am the Jackal of jackals , I am Shu, a nd [I] draw air from

"the pres ence of the god of Light ( K h i i ) to the boundso f

heaven,

"and to the bounds o f ( 3 ) earth, and to the bounds o f t h e u t t e r -

most limits of the flight (literally f e a t h e r ) o f t h e N e b e h bird .

"May air be given unto thes e young divine beings . " r

CHAPTER LVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0, 47 7 , s he et 1 2 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d h o l d i n g i n h i s h a n d a s a i l s y m b o l i c o f a i r .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF' SNUFFING THE AIR AMONG THE

WATERS IN THE UNDERWORLD . The overseer of the palace, ( 2 )

the chance ll or-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, s aith :-

" H ail , t h o u g o d T e m , g r a n t t h o u u n t o m e t h e s w e e t b r e a t h

"which dwel let h in thy nostrils . I embrace that great throne ( 3 )

"which is in the city of Hermopol is, and I keep watch o ver the

"eg g of Kenlien-ur (i . e . , Great Cackle r) ; I germinate as it

"germinateth ; ( a ) I l i v e a s i t l i v e t h ; and [my] breath is [its]

"breath . "

CHAPTER LVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mu s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t 2 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g i n a s t r e a m o f w a t e r , a n d h o l d i n g a

s a i l i n h i s l e f t h a n d ( s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . I .1 3 1 . 7 0 ) -

i . A P a p y r u s a t L e y d e n ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I I . p . 1 2 5 ) a d d s : " M y m o u t h

i s o p e n , a n d I s e e w i t h m y t w o e y e s . "



THE CHAPTERS OF GIVING AIR TO THE DECEASED . 1 0 7

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF SNUFFING THE AIR AND OF

HAVING THE MASTERY OVER THE WATER IN THE UNDERWORLD .

The overseer o f the pal ace, the c hancel lor-in-chief, Nu, trium-

phant, saith :- (2)

"H ail , H ap- ur, g o d of heaven, i n thy name o f `Di vi der of

" h e a v e n ' , g r a n t t h o u u n t o m e t h a t I m a y h a v e d o m i nio n o v e r

" ( 3 ) t h e w a t e r , e v e n a s t h e g o d d e s s S e k h e t h a d p o w e r o v e r

"Osiris on the night of the storms and floods . Grant thou that

"I may have power ov er the divine princes who have their ha-

bitations in the pl ace of (4) the go d of the inundation, even

" a s t h e y h a v e p o w e r o v e r t h e i r o w n h o l y g o d o f w h o s e n a m e

"they are ignorant ; a n d m a y t h e y l e t m e h a v e p o w e r e v e n a s

" [ h e h a t h l e t t h e m h a v e p o w e r ] . "

"My nostrils arc (5) opened in Tattu," or (as others say), "M y

" m o u t h a n d m y n o s t r i l s a r e o p e n e d i n Ta t a u , a n d I h a v e m y

" p l ac e of peace i n Annu, w hi ch i s my hou s e ; it was built for

" me b y the ( 6 ) g odde s s S e s heta, and the g od Khnemu s et i t up

"for me upon its wal ls . If to this heaven it cometh by the north,

"I sit at the south ; if to this heaven (7) it cometh by the s outh,

"I sit at the no rth ; if to this heav en it cometh by the west ,

"I sit at the cast ; and if to this heaven it cometh by the east,

"(S) I sit at the wes t. I draw the hair of my nostrils, and I

" ma k e my w ay into eve ry p l ace i n w hi ch I wi s h to si t . "

In the Papyrus of Nefer-uben-f (s ee Navill e, o p . c i t . , Bd. I .

1 3 1. 70) this Chapter end s quite differentl y, and reads :-

" I a m s t r o n g i n m y m o u t h a n d i n m y n o s t r i l s , f o r b e h o l d

"Tem ha s s ta b li s hed them ; b e h o l d , 0 y e g o d s a n d Khus . Rest

" t h o u , t h e n , 0 Te m . Beho l d the s taff w hich b l o s s o meth, and

"which cometh forth when a man cr ieth out in your name s .

"Behol d, I am Tem, the tr ee(?) of the g ods in [their] visible

"forms . L e t m e n o t b e t u r n e d b a c k . . . . I a m t h e Am-khe nt,

"Nefer-uben-f, triumpha nt . Let neither my flesh nor my memb ers

" b e g a s h e d w it h k n i v e s , l e t m e n o t b e w o u n d e d b y k n i v e s b y

" y o u . I have come, I have been j udged, I have come forth therein,



108 THE CHAPTERS OF COATING FORTH BY DAY .

" [ I ] have power with my father, the Old man, Nu . He bath

" g r a n t e d t h a t I m a y l i v e , h e b a t h g i v e n s t r e n g t h u n t o m e , a n d

"he hath provided me with the inheritance of my father therein . "

CHAPTER LVIII .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 10,470, s h e e t t 6 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : Ani and his wife Thuthu s tanding in a pool of running water ;

e a c h h o l d s a s a i l , t h e s y m b o l o f a i r , i n t h e l e f t h a n d , a n d s c o o p s u p w a t e r

to the mouth with the right hand . On the edges of the pool are pal m

t r e e s , f r o m t h e l a r g e s t o f w h i c h h a n g g r e a t c l u s t e r s o f d a t e s .

Text : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF BREATHING THE AIR AND OF'

HAVING DOMINION OVER THE WATER IN THE UNDERWORLD .

Osiris Ani saith :-

" Op e n t o m e . " W h o a r t t h o u ? W h i t h e r g o e s t t h o u ? ( 2 ) What

is thy name? "I am one of you . " W h o a r e t h o s e w i t h t h e e ?

" Th e t w o s e r p e n t g o d d e s s e s M e r t i . S e p a r a t e t h o u f r o m hi m ,

"h e a d from he a d , wh e n ( 3 ) [ t h o u] g o e s t into th e divine Mes gen

"chamber . H e l e t t e t h m e s e t o u t f o r t h e t e m p l e of t h e g o d s

" w ho hav e f ound thei r f ace s . ` A s s e m b l e r o f S o u l s ' ( 4 ) is t h e

"name of my boat ; ` M a k i n g t h e h a i r t o s t a n d o n e n d ' i s t h e

" n a m e o f t h e o a r s ; ` G o a d ' is t h e n a m e of t h e ( 5 ) h o l d ( ? ) ;

" ` M a k i n g s t r a i g h t f o r t h e m i d d l e ' i s t h e n a m e o f t h e r u d d e r ;

" l i k e wi s e [t h e b o a t] is a ty p e of my b ein g b o r n e on wa r d ( 6 ) in

"the pool . Let there be given unto me vessels of milk, together with

"cakes, and l oaves of bread, and cups of drink, and flesh (7 ) in

"the Temple of Anpu . "

Rub ri c : I F H E ( I . E ., THE DECEASED) KNOWETlt THIS CHAPTER, HE

SHALL GO INTO, AFTER COMING FORTH FROM, THE UNDERWORLD OF THE

[IIEAUrIF'UL AMENTET] .

CHAPTER LIX .

[From the P apyrus of Ani (Brit. M u s . No . 10,470, s h e e t 1 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : Ani kneel ing beside a pool of water, wherein grows a syca-

more tree ; i n t h e t r e e a p p e a r s t h e g o d d e s s N u t p o u r i n g o u t w a t e r f o r h i m

from a vessel with the right hand , and giving him cakes with the left .



THE CHAPTERS OF GIVING AIR TO THE DECEASED .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF SNUFFING THE AIR, AND OF

HAVING DOMINION OVER THE WATERS IN THE UNDERWORLD .

Osiris Ani saith :-

"Hail, t h o u s y c a m o r e tree o f t h e g o d d e s s Nut! G r a n t t h o u

" t o me o f [ t h e w a t e r a n d o f ] t h e (2) air which dwe l l in th e e .

"I embrace the throne which is in Unnu (Hermopolis), and I

"watch and guard (3) the egg of Nekek-ur (i. e . , t h e G r e a t

" C a c k l e r ) . It g r o we t h , I g r o w ; it liveth, I l ive ; (4) it snuffeth

"the a ir, I snuff the air, I the - Osiris Ani, in triump h . "

CHAPTER LX .

[ F r o m Lepsius, Todtenbuch, BI . 2 3 . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased hol ding in his left hand a sail, sym bol ic of air .

Text : ( 1 ) ANOTHER CHAPTER . Osiris Auf-dnkh, tr iumphant,

saith :-

"L e t t h e g a t e s o f h e a v e n b e o p e n e d f o r m e b y t h e g o d [ T h o t h ]

"and by Hapi, and let me pass through the doors of Ta-gebhI

"int o th e g r e a t he a v e n , " or ( a s ot h e r s s a y ) , "a t th e time , " (2)

" [ o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ] , " w it h t h e s t r e n g t h ( ? ) o f Rd . G r a n t y e , [ 0

" T h o t h a n d H a p i, ] t h a t I m a y h a v e p o w e r o v e r t h e w a t e r , e v e n

" a s S e t h a d p o w e r o v e r ( 3 ) h i s e n e m ie s o n t h e d a y w h e n t h e r e

" w e r e s t o r m s a n d r a i n u p o n t h e e a r t h . Let me have power over

"the divine beings who hav e (4 ) m ighty arms in their shoul ders,

"even as the god who is apparelled in splendour and whose

"name is unknown had power over them ; and may I have power

"over the beings whose arms are mighty . "

109

CHAPTER LXI .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0, 4 7 0, s h e e t 1 5 ) . ]

Vignette : The scribe Ani, clot hed in white, clasping to h is breas t his

soul , which i s i n t h e f o r m of a h u m a n- h e a d e d h a w k .

i . I . e . , The "land of cold and refreshing water . "



I to THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE SOUL OF A

MAN BE TAKEN FROM HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD . Osiris, th e

scr ibe Ani, saith :-

"I , even I , am he ( 2) w ho came forth f rom the w ater-fl ood

" w hi ch I ma ke to ov erf l ow , and w hi ch b ecometh mi g hty a s the

"river [Nile] . "

CHAPTER LXII .

[From the Papyrus of N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 4 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased scooping up running water out of a stream

into his mouth with both hands .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF DRINKING WATER IN THE UNDER-

WORt . D . T h e s c r ib e N e b s e n iaith :- ( 3 )

"May be opened [to me] the mighty flood by Osiris, and

" m a y t h e a b y s s o f w a t e r b e o p e n e d [ t o m e ] b y Te h u t i - Ha p i ,

"(k)t h e l o r d of the ho ri z o n, in my na m e of Òpe n e r' . M a y th e r e

" b e g r a n t e d [ t o m e ] m as t e r y o v e r t h e w a t e r - c o ur s e s a s o v e r t h e

" m e m b e r s ( 5 ) of S e t . I g o fort h into he a v e n . I am the Lion-

" g o d R d . I am th e Bul l . (6) [1] have eaten the Thigh, and I have

"divided the carcase . I h a v e g o n e r o u n d a b o u t a m o n g t h e i s l a n d s

" ( o ) - lakes ) of Sekhet-(7) Aaru . Indefinite time, without b eginning

"a n d with o u t en d , ha t h b e e n gi ve n to me ; I inherit ete rnity, and

" e v e r l a s t in g n e s s h a t h b e e n b e s t o w e d u p o n m e . "

The l a s t th r e e Cha p t e r s , with a sin g l e vi g n e t t e , ar e g r o u p e d

in one in the P apyrus of Nefer-uben-f (s ee Naville , o p . c i t . ,

Bd. I .B I .

72) ; b u t th e or d e r o f the m a s th e r e g i ve n is 61 , 6o ,

62 . In th e Turin Pa p y r u s (Le p si u s , op. c i t . , B l . 23) the vignette

o f e a c h is t h e s a m e , i . e . , th e de c e a s e d ho l din g a s ai l in his

left hand .

CHAPTER LXIII A .

[From the Papyrus o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,4i7, s h e e t v ) . ]

Vigne tte : The deceased drinking water from a running s tream, or the

d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g b y t h e s i d e o f a p o o l o f w a t e r a n d r e c e i v i n g w a t e r i n a



THE CHAPTER OF NOT BEING .SCALDED . III

bowl, which he holds in his left hand, from a vessel which the goddess of

the sycamore tree (Nut) is emptying into it . In the Turin Papyrus (Lepsius,

op . c i t . , B l . z3) the deceased is pouring out water from two vessels b e-

fore the symbol of flame .

Text : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF DRINKING WATER AND OF NOT

BEING BURNT ( 2 ) BY FIRE [IN THE UNDERWORLD] . The over-

seer of the palac e, the chancel lor-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, sa ith :-

"Hail, Bull of Amentet ! I am brought unto thee, I am the

"o a r of Rd ( 3 ) wh e r e w ith he ferried o v e r th e divine a g e d on e s ;

" l e t m e n e i t h e r b e b u r n t u p n o r d e s t r o y e d b y f ir e . I am Bet,

" t h e fir s t- b o r n s o n of Osi ri s , w h o d o t h m e e t e v e r y g o d ( 4 ) w i t hi n

"his Eye in Annu . I a m t h e d i v in e H e ir , t h e e x a l t e d o n e ( ? ) ,

"the Mighty One, the Resting One . I have made my name to

" g e r m i n a t e , ( 5 ) I h a v e d e l i v er e d [ i t ] , a n d t h o u s h a l t l i v e t h r o u g h

"me day by day . "

CHAPTER LXIII Ti* .

[ Fr om th e P ap yr us of N u ( B r i t . M u s . No .1 0 , 4 7 7 ,

s h e e t i 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased standing before two symbol s of fire, or the de-

ceased s itting at a tabl e of offerings and smel ling a flower (Naville,

o p . c i t . , Bd. I . 1 3 1. 7 4 ) .

Text : (I) THE CHAPTER OF NOT BEING SCALDED WITH

WATER . T h e o v e r s e e r of t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r-i n-c hi ef , N u ,


"I a m t h e o a r m a d e r e a d y f o r r o win g , (2) wh e r e with Ra tra n s-

ported the b oat containing the divine ancest ors, and l ifted up

"t h e moi s t em a n a tion s of O siri s from th e La k e of Fire , ( 3 ) an d

"he was not burned . I lie do wn l i k e a divine K h z z , [ a n d li k e]

"Khnemu who dwelleth among lions . Come, break away (4)

"the res traints from him that pas seth b y the side of this path,

"and let me come forth by it. "



1 1 2 THE CHAPTERS OF CO-III-W ; FORTH BY DAY.

CHAPTER LXIV .

T h e L X I V t h C h a p t e r i s p r o b a b l y o n e o f t h e o l d e s t o f a l l , a n d

t w o v e r s i o n s o f i t s e e m t o h a v e e x i s t e d i n t h e e a r l i e s t t i m e s .

The longer ve rsion is cal led the "Chapter of coming forth by

day in the underworl d", and the shorte r the "Chapter of know-

i n g t h e ` C h a p t e r s o f c o m i n g f o r t h b y d a y ' i n a s i n g l e C h a p t e r " .

O n a c o f f i n o f t h e X l t h d y n a s t y b o t h v e r s i o n s o c c u r . T h e r u b r i c

o f o n e v e r s i o n s a y s t h a t i t w a s d i s c o v e r e d i n t h e r e i g n o f H e s e p - t i ,

i . e . , a b o u t B . C . 4 2 6 6 , w h i l e t h e r u b r i c o f t h e o t h e r a t t r i b u t e s

its discovery to the time of Menthu-betep , which is cl early a

mistake for Men-kau-Ra (Mycerinus) . Thus in the Xlth dynasty

i t w a s b e l i e v e d t h a t t h e C h a p t e r m i g h t e v e n b e a s a n c i e n t a s t h e

t i m e o f t h e I s t d y n a s t y . T h e r e i s l i t t l e d o u b t t h a t t h e C h a p t e r w a s

looked upon as an ab ridgment of all the "Chapters of coming

forth by day", and that it had a val ue which was equivalent

t o t h e m a l l .

CHAPTER LXIV .

[From the Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . M u s . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t s 2 3 a n d 2 4 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d a d o r i n g t h e s u n ' s d i s k w h i c h r i s e s a b o v e t h e

t o p o f a t r e e .

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY IN THE

U N D ERWORLD . N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f r e v e r e n c e , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"I am Yest erday , To-day, and To-morrow , [and I have] the

"power (3) to be born a second time ; [ I a m ] t h e d i v i n e h i d d e n

"Soul who createth the gods, and who g iveth sepulchral meals

" u n t o t h e d e n i z e n s o f t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) , A m e n t e t , a n d h e a v e n .

" [ I a m ] t h e r u d d e r ( 4 ) o f t h e e a s t , t h e p o s s e s s o r o f t w o d i v i n e

"faces w herein his beams are seen . I am the l ord of the men

" w h o a r e r a i s e d u p ; [ t h e l o r d ] w h o c o m e t h f o r t h f r o m o u t o f t h e

"darknes s, and (5 ) whos e forms of existence are of the house

" w h e r e i n a r e t h e d e a d . H a i l , y e t w o h a w k s w h o a r e p e r c h e d u p o n



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 113

" y o u r r e s t i n g - p l a c e s , w h o h e a r k e n u n t o ( 6 ) t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e

" s a i d b y h i m , w h o g u i d e t h e b i e r t o t h e h i d d e n p l a c e , w h o l e a d

" a l o n g R d , a n d ( 7 ) w h o f o l l o w [ h i m ] i n t o t h e u p p e r m o s t p l a c e o f

" t h e s h r i n e w h i c h i s i n t h e c e l e s t i a l h e i g h t s ! [ H a i l , ] l o r d o f t h e

" s h r i n e w h i c h s t a n d e t h i n t h e m i d d l e o f t h e e a r t h . ( 8 ) H e i s I ,

" a n d I a m h e , a n d P t a h h a t h c o v e r e d h i s s k y w i t h c r y s t a l. [ H a i l ]

"Rd, thou who art content, thy heart (g) is g lad by reason of

" t h y b e a u t i f u l l a w o f t h e d a y ; thou enterest in by Khemennu ( ? )

"and comes t forth at the cast, and the divine (io) first-born

"beings who are in [thy] presence cry out with gladness [unto

" t h e e ] . Mak e thou thy roads gl ad for me, and make broad for

" m e t h y p a t h s ( i i ) w h e n I s h a l l s e t o u t f r o m e a r t h f o r t h e l i f e

" i n t h e c e l e s t i a l r e g i o n s . Send forth thy light upon me, 0 Soul

"unknown, for I am [one] of those who are ab out to enter in,

" a n d t h e d i v i n e s p e e c h i s i n ( 1 2 ) [ m y ] e a r s i n t h e T u a t ( u n d e r -

" w o r l d ) , a n d l e t n o d e f e c t s o f m y m o t h e r b e [ i m p u t e d ] u n t o m e ;

"let me be del ivered and let me be safe from (i3) him whose

" d i v i n e e y e s s l e e p a t e v e n t i d e , w h e n [ h e ] g a t h e r e t h t o g e t h e r a n d

" f i n i s h e t h [ t h e d a y ] i n n i g h t . I f l o o d [ t h e l a n d ] w i t h w a t e r a n d

"`Qem-ur' is ( r 4) my name and the g arment wherewith I am

" c l o t h e d i s c o m p l e t e . H a i l , t h o u d i v i n e p r i n c e A t i - s h e - f , c r y o u t

"unto thos e divine beings who dwel l in their hair at the (15)

"season w hen the god is [ lifted upon] the shoulder, saying

"'Come thou who [dwel les t] abov e thy divine abyss of water,

" f o r v e r i l y ( r 6 ) t h e t h i g h [ o f t h e s a c r i f i c e ] i s t i e d t o t h e n e c k ,

" a n d t h e b u t t o c k s a r e [ l a i d ] u p o n t h e h e a d o f A m e n t e t . ' M a y t h e

" U r - u r t i g o d d e s s e s ( i . e . , I s i s and Nephthys) grant [s uch] gifts

"unto me when my tears start from me as I see mysel f (i7)

"journeying w ith the divine Tend in Abydos , and the w ooden

"fastenings which fasten the four doors abov e thee are in thy

"power ( i8) within thy g arment . Thy face is like t hat of a

"gr eyhound which scenteth with his nos e the place whither I

"go on my feet . The god (rg) Aliau transporteth me to the

" c h a m b e r ( ? ) , a n d [ m y ] n u r s e i s t h e d i v i n e d o u b l e L i o n - g o d h i m -

" s e l f . I am made strong and I ( 2 0 ) come forth like him that

"forceth a way through the g ate, and the radiance which my

8



1 1 4THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" h e a r t b a t h m a d e i s e n d u r i n g ; ` I k n o w t h e a b y s s e s ' i s t h y n a m e .

"I work for you, (21 ) 0 ye Khus-four millions, s ix-hundred

"thous and, one thousand and two hundred are they-concerning

" t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e t h e r e . [ I a m ] o v e r t h e i r a f f a i r s w o r k i n g

" ( 2 2 ) f o r h o u r s a n d d a y s i n s e t t i n g s t r a i g h t t h e s h o u l d e r s o f t h e

" t w e l v e S a h g o d s , ( 2 3 ) a n d j o i n i n g t h e h a n d s o f t h e i r c o m p a n y ,

" e a c h t o e a c h ; t h e s i x t h w h o i s a t t h e h e a d o f t h e a b y s s i s t h e

" h o u r o f t h e d e f e a t o f t h e F i e n d s . [ I ] h a v e c o m e ( 2 4 ) t h e r e i n

" t r i u m p h , a n d [ I a m ] h e w h o i s i n t h e h a l l s ( o r c o u r t y a r d s ) o f

" t h e u n d e r w o r l d , a n d I a m h e w h o i s l a i d u n d e r t r i b u t e t o ( 2 5 )

" S h u . I r i s e a s t h e L o r d o f L i f e t h r o u g h t h e b e a u t i f u l l a w o f

"this day and it is their bl ood and the cool water of [their]

"sl aughter (26) which make the union of the earth to bloss om .

"I make a way among the horns of all those who make them-

s e l v e s s t r o n g a g a i n s t m e , a n d [ a m o n g ] t h o s e w h o i n s e c r e t ( 2 7 )

"make thems elves a dversaries unto me, and who are upon their

" b e l l i e s . I have come as the envoy of my Lord (28) of lords

" t o g i v e c o u n s e l [ c o n c e r n i n g ] O s i r i s ; t h e e y e s h a l l n o t a b s o r b ,

" i t s t e a r s . I a m t h e d i v i n e e n v o y ( ? ) o f (29) the hous e of him

" t h a t d w e l l e t h i n h i s p o s s e s s i o n s , a n d I h a v e c o m e f r o m S e k h e m

"to Annu to make known to the Benrnt b i r d t h e r e i n c o n c e r n i n g

" t h e e v e n t s o f ( 3 o ) t h e " 1 ' u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) . H a i l , t h o u A u k e r t ,

e . , u n d e r w o r l d ) w h i c h h i d e s t t h y c o m p a n i o n w h o i s i n t h e e ,

" t h o u c r e a t o r o f f o r m s o f e x i s t e n c e l i k e t h e g o d K h e p e r d , g r a n t

" t h o u t h a t ( 3 1 ) N e b s e n i , t h e s c r i b e a n d d e s i g n e r t o t h e t e m p l e s

"of the South and of the North, may come forth (32) to s ee

" t h e D i s k , a n d t h a t h i s j o u r n e y i n g s f o r t h ( ? ) m a y b e i n t h e p r e -

sence of the great god, that is to s ay, Shu, who dwell eth in

" e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s . Let me journey on in peace ; ( 3 3 ) l e t m e p a s s

" o v e r t h e s k y ; l e t m e a d o r e t h e r a d i a n c e o f t h e s p l e n d o u r [ w h i c h

" i s i n ] m y s i g h t ; l e t m e s o a r l i k e a b i r d t o s e e ( 3 4 ) t h e c o m -

p a n i e s ( ? ) o f t h e Klurs in the pres ence of Ra day by day, who

" v i v i f i e t h e v e r y h u m a n b e i n g ( 3 5 ) t h a t w a l k e t h u p o n t h e r e g i o n s

"which are upon the earth . Hail, Hemti (i . e . , R u n n e r ) ; H a i l ,

"Hemti ; w h o c a r r i e s t a w a y t h e s h a d e s o f t h e d e a d ( 3 6 ) a n d t h e

t . Literally, "eat . "



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 1 1 5

"K h u s from earth, grant thou unto me a p rosperous way to the

"Tuat (underworld ), such as is made for the favoured ones [ of

"the god], because (37) [I am] helples s to gather tog ether the

" e m a n a t i o n s w h i c h c o m e fr o m m e . W h o a r t t h o u , t h e n , w h o

"cons umest in its hidden pl ace? (38 ) 1 a m the Chief in Re-stau,

" and `H e that g o eth i n in hi s ow n name an d comet h f orth in

" t h a t o f I - l e h i ( ? ) , the lord of millions of years, and of the earth,'

"i s m y n a m e . The pregnant goddes s bath (39) depos ited [upon

"the earth] her l oad, and hath given birth to Hit straightway ;

"the closed door which is by the wall is overthrown, ( 40) it is

"turned up side down and I rejoice thereat . T o t h e M i g h t y O n e

"hath his eye b een given, and it send eth forth light from his

"face when the earth b ecometh light (or at day-break) . I s h a l l

" n o t b e c o m e c o r r u p t ( 4 1 ) , but I shall come into being in the

"form of the Lion-god and l ike th e bl oss oms of Shu ; I am the

" b e i n g w h o is n e v e r o v e r w h e l m e d in t h e wa t e r s . H a p p y , y e a

" h a p p y i s h e t h a t l o o k e d u p o n t h e f u n e r a l c o u c h w h ic h b a t h

" c o m e t o i t s p l a c e of r e s t , u p o n t h e h a p p y d a y ( 4 2 ) of t h e

" g od w ho s e heart re s teth, w ho ma k eth hi s p l ace of ali g hti n g

"[thereon] . I a m h e w h o c o m e t h f o r t h b y d a y ; the lord of

"the b ier which giveth l ife in the pre sen ce of Osiris . (43) In

"very truth the things which are thine are s tab le each day, 0

" s c rib e , artis t , chil d of the S e s he t c h a m b e r , N e b s e n i, l o r d of

"veneration . I clasp the sycamore tree, ( 4 4 ) 1 myse lf am joined

` u n t o t h e s y c a m o r e t r e e , a n d it s a r m s ] a r e o p e n e d u n t o m e

"graciously . I have come and I have clasped the Utc ha t, ( 4 5) a nd

"I have caused it to be seated in peace upon its throne . I have

"come to see Ra when he settet h, and I abs orb into myself the

" wi nd s [w hi ch aris e] ( 4 6 ) w he n he cometh f orth, and b oth my

" h a n d s a r e c l e a n t o a d o r e h i m . I have gathered together [all

" m y m e m b e r s ] , I h a v e g a t h e r e d t o g e t h e r [ a l l m y m e m b e r s ] . I

"soar like a b ird (47 ) and I descend upon the earth, and mine

"eye maketh me to walk thereon in my footsteps . I am the child

"of yesterday and the Akeru (48 ) gods of the earth have made

" me to come i nto b ei n g , and they have made me s tron g f or my

"moment [of coming forth] . I hide with the g od Aba-aaiu who

8 *




"will walk ( 49) b ehind me, and my members s hall g erminate,

"and my k h i t shall be as an amulet for my body and as one

"who watcheth [to protect] my soul ( So) a nd to defend it and

"to converse therewith ; a n d t h e c o m p a n y of t h e g o d s s h a l l

"hearken unto my word s . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] HE SHALL

BE VICTORIOUS BOTH UPON EARTH AND IN (5i) THE UNDERWORLD. HE

SHALL DO WHATSOEVER A MAN DOETH WHO IS UPON THE EARTH, AND

HE SHALL PERFORM ALL THE DEEDS WHICH THOSE DO WHO ARE [ALIVE] .

NOW IT IS A GREAT PROTECTION [GIVEN] BY THE GOD . THIS CHAPTER

WAS FOUND (52) IN THE CITY OF KHEMENNU INSCRIBED UPON THE BLOCK

OF IRON IN LETTERS OF LAPIS-LAZULI WHICH WAS UNDER THE FEET OF

THIS GOD .

In the Rubric to this Chapter as found in the Papyrus of

Mes -em-neter, the Chapter is said to have been " discovered in

" t h e f o u n d a t i o n s o f t h e s h r i n e o f t h e d i v i n e H e n n u b o a t b y t h e

"chief mason in the time of the king of the Nor th and of the

" S o u t h , H e s e p t i , t t r i u m p h a n t , " a n d i t i s t h e r e d i r e c t e d t h a t i t

"shal l be recited by one who is ceremonially pure and clean,

"and who hath not touched women, and who b ath not eaten

" f l e s h o f a n i m a l s o r f i s h . "

CHAPTER LXIV[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t. Mu s . No . 10 , 4 77, sh e e t 1 3 ) . ]

Vignett e : I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N u t h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o v i g n e t t e .

Text : ( I ) THE CHAPIER OF' KNOWING THE "CHAPTERS OF

COMING FORTH BY DAY" IN A (2) SINGLE CHAPTER. The over-

s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

b e g o t t e n o f t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , A m e n - h e t e p , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a i t h :-

"I am Yeste rday an d To-morrow ; a n d I h a v e t h e p o w e r , t o

"be b orn a second time . [ I a m ] t h e d i v i n e h i d d e n ( 3 ) S o u l , w h o

I . A k in g o f t h e fir s t d y n a s t y . S e e a l s o t h e r u b r i c t o t h e l o n g e r v e r s i o n

o f t h e 6 4 t h f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , infra, p . 1 t3 .



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .1 1 7

"createth the gods, and who giveth sepulchral meals to the

"divine hidden beings [in the Tuat (underw orld) ], in Amenti,

"and in heaven . [ I a m ] t h e r u d d e r o f t h e e a s t , t h e p o s s e s s o r o f

" t w o d i v i n e f a c e s w h e r e i n h i s b e a m s a r e s e e n . ( 4 ) I a m t h e l o r d

"of those who are raised up, [ the lord] who cometh forth from

"out of the darknes s . [Hail,] ye two d ivine Hawks w ho are

"perched upon your resting-places, and who hearken unto the

" ( 5 ) t h i n g s w h i c h a r e s a i d b y h i m , t h e t h i g h [ o f t h e s a c r i f i c e ]

" i s t i e d t o t h e n e c k , a n d t h e b u t t o c k s [ a r e l a i d ] u p o n t h e h e a d

"of Ament et . May the Ur-urti (6) g oddesses ( i . e . , I s i s a n d

"Nephthys ) grant s uch gifts unto me when my tears s tart from

"me as I look on . ` I k n o w t h e a b y s s e s ' i s t h y n a m e . [I] work

"for [you], 0 ye ( 7 ) K k u s , who are in numb er [four] mill ions,

"[s ix] hundred and one thousand, and two hundre d, and they

" a r e [ i n h e i g h t ] t w e l v e c u b i t s . [ Y e ] t r a v e l o n j o i n i n g t h e h a n d s ,

" e a c h t o e a c h , b u t t h e s i x t h [ h o u r ] , ( 8 ) w h i c h b e l o n g e t h a t t h e

" h e a d o f t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) , i s t h e h o u r o f t h e o v e r t h r o w o f

" t h e F i e n d . [I] have come there in triumph, and [I am] he who

" i s i n t h e h a l l ( o r c o u r t y a r d ) o f t h e T u a t ; ( g ) a n d t h e s e v e n ( ? )

" c o m e i n h i s m a n i f e s t a t i o n s . The strength w hich protecteth me

"is that which hath my K l i n u n d e r i t s p r o t e c t i o n , [ t h a t i s ] t h e

" b l o o d , a n d t h e c o o l w a t e r , a n d t h e s l a u g h t e r i n g s w h i c h a b o u n d ( ? ) .

"I open [a way among] (io) the horns of all those who would

"do harm unto me, who keep themselv es hidden, who make

"themselves adversaries unto me, and those who are upon( I I )

" t h e i r b e l l i e s . The Eye shall not eat (or abs orb) the tears of

"the goddess Aukert. Hail, g oddess Aulcert, open thou unto me

" t h e e n c l o s e d p l a c e , a n d ( 1 2 ) g r a n t t h o u u n t o m e p l e a s a n t r o a d s

"whereupon I may travel. Who art thou, then, who consume st

"in the hidden p lac es? I am the Chief in Re-stau, an d [I] go

"in and come forth ( i3) in my name of `Hehi, the l ord of mil-

" l i o n s o f y e a r s [ a n d o f ] t h e e a r t h ' ; [I am] the maker of my

" name . The pregnant one hath depos ited [upon the earth] her

" l o a d . The door by the wall is shut fast, and the (r4) things

" o f t e r r o r a r e o v e r t u r n e d a n d t h r o w n d o w n u p o n t h e b a c k b o n e ( ? )

" o f t h e Bennu b i r d b y t h e t w o Samait g o d d e s s e s . To the Mighty



I I8 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" O n e b a t h h i s E y e b e e n g i v e n , a n d h i s f a c e e m i t t e t h l i g h t w h e n

" [ h e ] (15) i l l u m i n e t h t h e e a r t h , [ m y n a m e i s h i s n a m e ] . I s h a l l

"not become corr upt, but I shal l come into being in the form

"of the Lion-god ; the blossoms of Shu shall be in me . I am

"he who is never overwhelmed in the waters . Happy, yea happy,

" i s t h e f u n e r a l c o u c h o f t h e ( r 6 ) S t i l l - h e a r t ; he maketh him-

"sel f to alight upon the pool( ?), and verily he cometh forth

" [ t h e r e f r o m ] . I a m t h e l o r d o f m y l i f e . I h a v e c o m e t o t h i s [ p l a c e ],

"and I hav e come forth from Re-as-urt (I7 ) t h e c i t y o f O s i r i s .

"Verily the things w hich are thine are with the S a t - i t t d e i t i e s .

" I h a v e c l a s p e d t h e s y c a m o r e t r e e a n d I h a v e d i v i d e d ( ? ) i t ( i 8 ) ;

" I h a v e o p e n e d a w a y f o r m y s e l f [ a m o n g ] t h e S e k h i u g o d s o f t h e

"Tuat . I h a v e c o m e t o s e e h i m t h a t d w e l l e t h i n h i s d i v i n e u r a e u s ,

" f a c e t o f a c e a n d e y e t o (Ig) eye, and [I] draw to mysel f the

"winds [which rise] when he cometh forth . M y t w o e y e s ( ? ) a r e

"weak in my face, 0 Lion[-god], Bab e, who dwell est in Utent .

" ( 2 0 ) Thou art in me and I am in thee ; a n d t h y a t t r i b u t e s a r e

" m y a t t r i b u t e s . I am the god o f the Inundation (Bah), and

"'Qem-ur-she' ( 2 1 ) is my name . M y forms are the forms of the

"g od Khepera , the hair of the earth of Tem, the hair of the

"earth of Tem . (22) I have entered in as a man of no under-

s t a n d i n g , a n d I s h a l l c o m e f o r t h i n t h e f o r m o f a s t r o n g Khu,

"and I shall l ook upon my form which shall be that of men

"and women for ever and for ever . "

Rubric 2 : 1 . [IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN] BY A -MAN HE SHALL COME

FORTH BY DAY, (23) AND HE SHALL NOT BE REPULSED AT ANY GATE OF

'THE TUAT (UNDERWORLD), EITHER IN GOING IN OR IN COMING OUT. HE

SHALL PERFORM [ALL] THE TRANSFORMATIONS WHICH HIS HEART SHALL

DESIRE FOR HIM AND HE SHALL NOT DIE;2 4 ) BEHOLD, THE SOUL OF [THIS]

MAN SHALL FLOURISH . AND MOREOVER, IF [HE] KNOW THIS CHAPTER HE

SHALL BE VICTORIOUS UPON EARTH AND IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND HE

SHALL PERFORM EVERY ACT OF A LIVING (25) HUMAN BEING . NOW IT IS

A GREAT PROTECTION WHICH [HATH BEEN GIVEN] BY THE GOD . THIS

CHAPTER WAS FOUND IN THE FOUNDATIONS OF THE SHRINE OF HENNU

BY THE CHIEF MASON DURING THE REIGN OF HIS MAJESTY, 'THE KING OF

i . T h e s e w o r d s a r e a d d e d f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i .

2 . F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t I 3 .



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH B Y DA Y . 1 1 9

T H E N O R T H A N D O F T H E S O U T H , H E S E P T I , T R I U M P H A N T , W H O C A R R I E D ( I T ]

A W A Y A S A I N I Y S T E R I O U S O B J E C T W H I C H H A D N E V E R [ B E F O R E ] B E E N S E E N

OR LOOKED UP ON . T H I S C H A P T E R S H A L L B E R E C I T E D B Y A M A N W H O I S

CEREMONIALLY CLEAN AND PURE, WHO HATH NOT EATEN THE FLESH OF

ANIMALS OR FISH, AND WHO HATH NOT HAD INTERCOURSE WITH WOMEN .

Rubric' : I I . ( t ) I F T H I S C H A P T E R B E K N O W N [ B Y T H E D E C E A S E D ] H E

SHALL BE VICTORIOUS 1 30TH UPON EARTH AND IN THE UND ERWORLD,

A N D H E S H A L L P E R F O R M E V E R Y A C T O F A L I V I N G H U M A N ( 2 ) B E I N G . NOW

I T I S A G R E A T P R O T E C T I O N W H I C H [ H A T H P E E N G I V E N ] B Y T H E G O D .

T H I S C H A P T E R W A S F O U N D I N T H E C I T Y O F K H E M E N N U U P O N A B L O C K

O F I R O N O F T H E S O U T H , W H I C H H A D B E E N I N L A I D [ W I T H L E T T E R S ] ( 3 )

O F R E A L L A P I S - L A Z U L I , U N D E R T H E F E E T O F T H E G O D D U R I N G T H E R E I G N

O F H I S M A J E S T Y , T H E K I N G O F T H E N O R T H A N D O F T H E S O U T H , M E N - K A U -

R A ( M Y C E R I N U S T R I U M P H A N T , B Y T H E R O Y A L S O N H E R U - T , A - T A - F , 2 T R I U M -

PHANT ; H E F O U N D I T ( 4 ) W H E N H E W A S J O U R N E Y I N G A B O U T T O M A K E A N

I N S P E C T I O N O F T H E T E ) , I P L E S . ONE NEKHT(?) WAS WITH HID- WHO WAS

D I L I G E N T I N M A K I N G H I M T O U N D E R S T A N D ( ? ) I T , A N D H E B R O U G H T I T ( 5 )

TO THE KING AS A WONDERF UL OBJECT WHEN HE SAW THAT IT WAS A

THING OF GREAT MYSTERY, WHICH HAD NEVER [BEFORE] BEEN SEEN OR

LOOKED UP ON .

T H I S C H A P T E R ( 6 ) S H A L L B E R E C I T E D B Y A M A N W H O I S C E R E M O N I A L L Y

CLEAN AND P URE, WHO HATH NOT EATEN THE FLESH OF ANIM ALS OR

FISH, AND WHO HATH NOT HAD INTERCOURSE WITH WOMEN. A N D B E H O L D ,

T H O U S H A L T M A K E A S C A R A B O F G R E E N S T O N E , W I T H ( 7 ) A R I M P L A T E D ( ? )

W I T H G O L D , W H I C H S H A L L B E P L A C E D I N T H E H E A R T O F A M A N , A N D I T

SHALL PERFORM FOR HIM THE "OPENING OF THE MOUTH" . AND THOU

SHALT ANOINT IT WITH ANTI UNGUENT, AND THOU SHALT RECITE OVER

IT [THESE] ENCHANTMENTS:--CHAPTE R LXV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i i ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e R a , h a w k - h e a d e d ,

a n d h a v i n g a d i s k e n c i r c l e d b y a n u r a e u s o n h i s h e a d ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . ,

Bd . I . B I 7 7 ) -

I . F r o m P a p y r u s o f N u , s h e e t 2 1 .

2 . H e w a s t h e s o n o f C h e o p s , t h e b u i l d e r o f t h e G r e a t P y r a m i d a t G i z e h.

3 . H e r e f o l l o w s t h e t e x t o f C h a p t e r X X XB.




Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY D AY AND

OF GAINING THE MASTERY OVER ENEMIES . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -

c h i e f , N u , s a i t h :- (2)

" RA s i t t e t h i n h i s h a b i t a t i o n o f m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s , a n d h e b a t h

"gath ered togeth er the company of the gods, with those divine

"beings, whose faces are hidden, who dwell in the Temple of

"Khepera, who eat (3) the god B a h , and who drink the drink-

" o f f e r i n g s w h i c h a r e b r o u g h t i n t o t h e c e l e s t i a l r e g i o n s o f l i g h t ;

" a n d c o n v e r s e l y . G r a n t t h a t I m a y t a k e p o s s e s s i o n o f t h e c a p -

t i v e s ( 4 ) o f O s i r i s , a n d n e v e r l e t m e h a v e m y b e i n g a m o n g t h e

" f i e n d s o f S u t i ! H a i l , l e t m e s i t u p o n h i s f o l d s i n t h e h a b i t a -

t i o n o f t h e g o d U s e r - b a ( i ,. , h e o f t h e s t r o n g S o u l ) ! ( S ) G r a n t

"thou that I may sit upon the throne o f Rd, and le t me have

"possess ion of my body before the god Seb . Grant thou that

"Osiris may come forth triumphant over Suti [and ov er] the

" n i g h t - w a t c h e r s ( 6 ) o f S u t i , a n d o v e r t h e n i g h t - w a t c h e r s o f t h e

" C r o c o d i l e , y e a t h e n i g h t - w a t c h e r s o f t h e C r o c o d i l e , w h o s e f a c e s

"are hidden and w ho dwel l in the divine Temple of the King

"of the North in the apparel of the gods on the s ixth day

" o f t h e f e s t i v a l , ( 7 ) w h o s e s n a r e s a r e l i k e u n t o e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s

"and whose cords are like unto eternity . I have seen the god

" A b e t - k a p l a c i n g t h e c o r d ; t h e c h i l d i s l a i d i n ( 8 ) f e t t e r s , a n d

" t h e r o p e o f t h e g o d A b - k a i s d r a w n t i g h t ( : )ehold me .

"I am born , and I come forth in the form of a living Khu, (g)

"and the human beings who are upon the earth ascribe praise

"[unto me] . H a i l , M e r , w h o d o e s t t h e s e t h i n g s f o r m e , a n d w h o

"art put an en d to by the vigour of Ra, grant thou that I may

"see Rd ; (io) g rant thou that I may come forth against my

"enemies ; and grant thou that I may be victorious over them

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s o f t h e g r e a t g o d w h o

" a r e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t g o d . I f , r e p u l s i n g [ m e ] , thou

"dolt not ( ii) al low me to come forth against my Enemy and

"to be victorious over him before the sov ereign princes, then

"may Hapi-who liveth up on l aw and order-not come forth

"into heaven-now he l iveth by Maat ( 1 2 ) a n d ma y Rd-wh o

"feedeth upon fish-not descend into the waters ! And then,



THE CHAPTER OF VICTORY OVER ENE_VIES . 1 2 1

"verily s hall Rd--who feedeth upo n right and order-come forth

"into heaven, and then, verily, ( i3) shall Hapi-who feedeth

" u p o n f i s h - d e s c e n d i n t o t h e w a t e r s ; a n d t h e n , v e r i l y , t h e g r e a t

"day upon the earth shall not be in its s eason . I have come

"against my Enemy, ( 1 4 ) he hath been g iven unto me, he bath

"come to an end, an d I have g otten pos ses sion [of him] before

" t h e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s . "

CHAPTER LXV .

[ F r om Le p s iu s , To d te n b uc h , BI . 2 5 . ]

Vignett e : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g up a n d h o l d i n g a s t a f f i n h i s l e f t h a n d .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTE R OF COMING FORTH BY DAY AND OF

GAINING THE MAS TERY OVER ENEMIES .

"Hail, [ thou] who shinest from the Moon and who sendest

" f o r t h l i g h t t h e r e f r o m , t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h a m o n g t h y m u l t i t u d e s ,

" a n d t h o u g o e s t r o u n d a b o u t , l e t m e r i s e , " o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ,

"let me be broug ht in among the K l z u s , and let the underworld

"be opened [unto me] . ( 2 ) Behol d, I have come forth on this

"day, and I have become a K h u ( o r a s h i n i n g b e i n g ) ; t h e r e -

" f o r e s h a l l t h e Khus l e t m e l i v e , a n d t h e y s h a l l c a u s e m y e n e -

m i e s t o b e b r o u g h t t o m e i n a s t a t e o f m i s e r y i n t h e p r e s e n c e

" o f t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s . Th e d iv in e k a (doubl e) of my

" m o t h e r ( 3 ) s h a l l r e s t i n p e a c e b e c a u s e o f t h i s , a n d I s h a l l s t a n d

"upon my feet and have a staff of gol d," or (as othe rs say) ,

"a rod of gol d in my hand, wherewith I shall inflict cuts on

"the limbs [ of mine enemy] and shal l l ive . The legs of Sothis

" a r e s t a b l i s h e d , a n d I a m b o r n i n t h e i r s t a t e o f r e s t . "

CHAPTER LXVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f t k m e n - e m - h e b ( N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . i . 1 3 1 - 7 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : I n t h e o n l y p a p y r u s k n o w n t o c o n t a i n t h i s C h a p t e r i t h a s n o

v i g n e t t e .



1 2 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING F ORTH BY DAY . Th e

s c r i b e M a h u s a i t h :-

"I have knowledge . I w a s c o n c e i v e d b y ( 2 ) t h e g o d d e s s S e k h e t ,

"and the goddes s Neith gave b irth to me, I am Horus, and [I

"have] (3) come forth from the Eye of Horus . I am Uatchit

"who cam e forth from Horus . I am Horus and I fly up ( f)

"and perch m ysel f upon the forehead of Ra in the b ows of his

"boat which is in heaven . "

CHAPTER LXVI1 .

[From the P a p y r u s o f Nu ( B r i t . M us . N o .1 0,477, sheet t5) . ]

Vign ette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF OPENING THE UN DERWORLD . Th e

o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"The chamber of those who dwel l in Nu is opened , and the

" f o o t s t e p s o f t h o s e w h o d w e l l w i t h t h e g o d o f L i g h t a r e s e t f r e e .

"The chamber of Shu is opened, and he cometh . f o r t h ; a n d I

"shal l come forth (3) outs ide, and I shall advan ce from my

" t e r r i t o r y ( ? ) , I s h a l l r e c e i v en d I s h a l l l a y f i r m h o l d u p o n

" t h e t r i b u t e i n t h e H o u s e o f t h e C h i e f o f h i s d e a d . ( q . ) I s h a l l

"advance to my throne which is in the boat of Rd . I s h a l l n o t

"be mol ested, and I shall not suffer shipwreck from my throne

"wh ich is in the b oat of Rd ( 5 ) , the mighty one . Hail thou

" t h a t s h i n e s t a n d g i v e s t l i g h t f r o m H e n t - s h e ! "

CHAPTER LXVIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10,477, s h e e t 7 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g b e f o r e a g o d d e s s s e a t e d b y a t r e e

( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , Bd . I . B l . 8 o ) , o r t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b y t h e s i d e

o f a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s a n d a d o r i n g a g o d d e s s w h o s t a n d s i n a s h r i n e .



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY 1 2 3

Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OP COMING FORTH ( 2 ) BY DAY . Th e

o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a i t h :-

"The doors of heaven are opened for me, the doors of earth

"are opened for me, the bars and bol ts of Seb are opened for

"me, (3) and the first temp le hath b een unfastened for me by

" t h e g o d P e t r a . Behold, I was guarded and watched, [b ut now]

" I a m r e l e a s e d ; behol d, his hand had tied cords round me and

"his hand had darted upon me (4 ) in the earth . Re-bent hath

"been op ened for me and Re-bent bath b een unfastened before

"me, Re-bent hath b een given unto me, and I shall come forth

"by day into whatsoever place I please . I have gained the

"mastery over my heart ; (5) I have gained the mastery over

" m y b r e a s t ( ? ) ; I have gained the mastery over my two hands ;

"I have gained the mastery over my t wo feet ; I have gained

" t h e m a s t e r y o v e r m y m o u t h ; I have gained (6) the mastery

"over my whole body ; I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r s e p u l c h r a l

" o f f e r i n g s ; I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r t h e w a t e r s ; I h a v e

"gained the mastery ov er the air ; I have ga ined the mastery

" ( 7 ) o v e r t h e c a n a l ; I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r t h e r i v e r

" a n d o v e r t h e l a n d ; I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r t h e f u r r o w s ;

"I have gained the mastery over the mal e workers for me ; ( 8 )

"I have gained the mastery over the female workers for me in

" t h e u n d e r w o r l d ;I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r [ a l l ] t h e t h i n g s

"which were ordered to be done for me upon the earth, accord-

i n g t o t h e e n t r e a t y w h i c h y e s p a k e f o r m e ( 9 ) [ s a y i n g ] , ` B e h o l d ,

"let him live upon the bread of Seb .' That which is an abo-

"mination unto me, I shal l not eat, [nay] I shal l l ive upon

"cakes [ made] of white grain, and my ale shall be [made] of

"the red g rain (ro) of Hapi (i . e . , t h e N i l e ) . I n a c l e a n p l a c e

" s h a l l I s i t o n t h e g r o u n d b e n e a t h t h e f o l i a g e o f t h e d a t e p a l m

" o f t h e g o d d e s s H a t h o r , w h o d w e l l e t h i n t h e s p a c i o u s D i s k ( I r )

" a s i t a d v a n c e t h t o A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , h a v i n g t h e b o o k s o f t h e

"divine words of the writings of the god Thoth . I h a v e g a i n e d

"the mastery over my heart ; I have ga ined the mastery over

" m y h e a r t ' s p l a c e ( o r b r e a s t ) ( 1 2 ) ; I have gained the mastery




" o v e r my mouth ; I have g a i n e d t h e mas tery over my two

"hands ; I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r t h e w a t e r s ; I h a v e g a i n e d

"the mastery over the canal ; I have ained the mastery over

" ( 1 3 ) t h e r i v e r ; I have gained the mastery over the furrows ;

"I have gained the mastery ove r the men who wor k for me ;

"I have gained the mastery over the women who work ( i4)

"for me in the underworl d ; I have gained the maste ry over

"[al l] the things which were ordered to be done for me upon

"earth and in the underworld . I s h a l l l i f t m y s e l f u p o n m y l e f t

" s i d e , a n d I s h a l l p l a c e m y s e l f o n m y r i g h t s i d e ; ( t 5 ) I s h a l l

" l i f t m y s e l f u p o n m y r i g h t s i d e , a n d I s h a l l p l a c e m y s e l f [ o n

" m y l e f t s i d e ] . I s h a l l s i t d o w n , I s h a l l s t a n d u p , a n d I s h a l l

" p l a c e m y s e l f i n [ t h e p a t h o f ] t h e w i n d ( 1 6 ) like a guide who

" i s w e l l p r e p a r e d . "

Rubric : IF THIS COMPOSITION HE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] HE

SHALL COME FORTH BY DAY, AND HE SHALL BE IN A POSITION TO JOUR-

NEY ABOUT OVER THE EARTH AMONG THE LIVING, AND HE SHALL NEVER

SUFFER DIMINUTION, (17) NEVER, NEVER .

CHAPTER LXIX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M e s - e m - n e t e r ( N a v i l l e , op . c i t ., Bd . I . Bl . 8 i ) . ]

Vign ette : T h i s . C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e b ot h i n t h e T h eb a n a n d

S a i t e R e c e n s i o n s o f t h e Book of t h e D e a d .

Text : ( i ) ANOTHER ( 2 ) CHAPTER .

"I am the Fire-god, the divine b rother of the Fire-god, and

" [ I a m ] O s i r i s t h e b r o t h e r o f I s i s . M y d i v i n e s o n , t o g e t h e r w i t h

"his mother Isis, hath aveng ed me on mine enemies . ( 3 ) M y

" e n e m i e s h a v e w r o u g h t e v e r y [ k i n d o f ] e v i l , t h e r e f o r e t h e i r a r m s ,

" a n d h a n d s , a n d f e e t , h a v e b e e n f e t t e r e d b y r e a s o n o f t h e i r w i c k e d -

ness which they have wrought (4) up on me . I a m O s i r i s , t h e

" f i r s t - b o r n o f t h e d i v i n e w o m b , t h e f i r s t - b o r n o f t h e g o d s , a n d

" t h e h e i r o f m y f a t h e r O s i r i s - S e b ( r ) . I a m O s i r i s , t h e l o r d s o f

" t h e h e a d s ( 5 ) t h a t l i v e , m i g h t y o f b r e a s t a n d p o w e r f u l o f b a c k ,

" w i t h a p h a l l u s w h i c h g o e t h t o t h e r e m o t e s t l i m i t s [ w h e r e ] m e n



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 1 2 5

"and women [live] . I am Sah (Orion) who travelleth over his

" d o m a i n a n d w h o j o u r n e y e t h a l o n g b e f o r e ( 6 ) t h e s t a r s o f h e a v e n ,

"[wh ich is] the bel ly of my mother Nut ; she conceived me

" t h r o u g h h e r l o v e , a n d s h e g a v e b i r t h t o m e b e c a u s e i t w a s h e r

" w i l l s o t o d o . I am (7) Anpu (Anubis) on the day of the god

"Sepa . I am the Bull at the head of the meadow . I , e v e n I ,

"am Osiris w ho imprisoned his father together with his mot her

" ( 8 ) o n t h e d a y o f m a k i n g t h e g r e a t s l a u g h t e r ; n o w , [ h i s ] f a t h e r

" i s S e b , a n d [ h i s ] m o t h e r i s N u t . I a m H o r u s , t h e f i r s t - b o r n o f

"Rd of the risings . I am Anpu (Anub is) [on the d ay of] (9)

"the god Sepa . I , e v e n I , a m t h e l o r d T e r n . I a m O s i r i s . H a i l ,

"thou divine first-born, who dos t enter and dost s peak b efore

" t h e d i v i n e S c r i b e a n d D o o r k e e p e r o f O s i r i s , g r a n t t h a t ( t o ) I

" m a y c o m e . I have become a k h u , I have been judg ed, I have

"become a divine being, I have come, and I have avenged mine

òwn body . I h a v e t a k e n u p m y s e a t b y t h e d i v i n e b i r t h - c h a m b e r

" ( I I ) o f O s i r i s , a n d I h a v e d e s t r o y e d t h e s i c k n e s s a n d s u f f e r i n g

"which were there . I have become mighty, and I have become

" a d i v i n e b e i n g b y t h e s i d e o f t h e b i r t h - c h a m b e r o f O s i r i s , I a m

"bro ught forth with him, I renew my youth , ( 1 2 ) I renew my

"youth, I take poss ess ion of my two thighs which are in the

" p l a c e w h e r e i s O s i r i s , a n d I o p e n t h e m o u t h o f t h e g o d s t h e r e -

" w i t h , I t a k e m y s e a t b y h i s s i d e , a n d T h o t h c o m e t h f o r t h , ( t 3 )

" a n d [ I a m ] s t r e n g t h e n e d i n h e a r t w i t h t h o u s a n d s o f c a k e s u p o n

" t h e a l t a r s ( 1 4 ) o f m y d i v i n e f a t h e r , a n d w i t h m y b e a s t s , a n d w i t h

" m y c a t t l e , a n d w i t h m y r e d f e a t h e r e d f o w l , ( 1 5 ) and with my

"oxen, and with my geese, and with my ducks, for Horus my

"Chieftain, and with the offerings which I make t o Thoth, and

" w i t h t h e s a c r i f i c e s w h i c h I o f f e r u p t o A n - h e r i - e r t a i t s a . "

CHAP TBR L X X .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M e s - e m - n e t e r ( N a v i l l e , o f f : . c i t . , B d . I . B I 8 2) . ]

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e b o t h i n t h e T h e b a n a n d

S a i t e R e c e n s i o n s o f t h e B o o k o f t h e D e a d .



126 THE CHAPTERS OF CO-41ING FORTH BY DAY .

Text : ( i ) ANOTHER CHAPTER .

"I have sac rificed unto An-beri-ertaitsa , and I am decreed to

"be s trengthened in heart, for I have made offerings at the altars

"of my divine father ( 2 ) Osiris ; I rule in Tattu an d I lift my-

"s elf up ove r his l and . I sniff the wind of the east by its hair ;

" I l a y h o l d u p o n t h e n o r t h w i n d b y i t s ( 3 ) h a i r , I s e i z e a n d

" h o l d f a s t t o t h e w e s t wi n d b y i t s b o d y , a n d I g o r o u n d a b o u t

"heaven on its four sides ; I l ay ho l d up on the s outh wi nd b y

"(4) i ts e v e , a n d I b e s t o w a i r u p o n t h e v e n e r a b l e b e i n g s [ w h o

" a r e i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d ] a l o n g w i t h t h e e a t in g o f c a k e s .

Rubric : IF THIS COMPOSITION BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] (5) UPON

EARTH HE SHALL COME FORTH 13Y DAY, AND HE SHALL HAVE THE FACULTY

OF TRAVELLING ABOUT AMONG THE LIVING, AND HIS NAME SHALL NEVER

PERISH .

CHAPTER LXXI .

[From t h e Papyrus of Nebseni ( B r i t . M u s . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t t 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : The deceased kneeling, with both hands raised in adoration,

before the goddess Meh-urt ; the legend reads : "the homage of the

scribe Nebseni to the goddess Meh-urt, lady of heaven, and mistress of

e a r t h ." Elsewhere (Naville, o p . c i t . , B d . I . B t . 8 3 ) t h e d e c e a s e d i s s e e n

adoring Ra in the pres ence of Thoth and Osiris .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF' COMING FORTH BY DAY . The

libationer, the lord of reverence, Nebs eni, saith :-

"Hail , th o u ha wk wh o ri s e s t in hea v e n , th o u l o r d of the g o d-

d e s s M e b - u rt ! ( 2) S t r e n g t h e n t h o u m e a c c o r d in g a s t h o u h a s t

" s t r e n g t h e n e d t h y s e l f , a n d s h e w t h y s e l f u p o n t h e e a r t h , 0 t h o u

" t h a t r e t u r n e s t a n d w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d l e t t h y w il l b e

" d o n e . "

`Behold the god of One Face (3) is with me . [I am] the

" haw k w hi ch is wi thi n the s h ri ne ; and I open th at which is

" u pon the han gi n g s thereof . B e h o l d H o r u s , t h e s o n o f Is i s . "

" [ B e h o l d ] Ho r n s t h e s o n of I s is ! ( 4 ) S t r e n g t h e n t h o u m e ,

" a c c o r d in g a s t h o u h a s t s t r e n g t h e n e d t h y s e l f , a n d s h e w t h y s e l f



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY D_1 Y . 127

" u p o n e a r t h , 0 t h o u t h a t r e t u r n e s t a n d w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d

" l e t t h y w i l l b e d o n e . "

"Behold, ( 5 ) the g od of One Fac e is with me . [I am] the

" h a w k i n t h e s o u t h e r n h e a v e n , a n d [ I a m ] T h o t h i n t h e n o r t h e r n

"heaven ; I make peace with the raging fire and I bring M aat

" ( 6 ) to him that lov eth her . "

"Behol d Thoth, even Thoth ! Strengthen thou me according

" a s t h o u h a s t s t r e n g t h e n e d t h y s e l f , a n d s h e w t h y s e l f u p o n e a r t h ,

" 0 t h o u t h a t r e t u r n e s t a n d ( 7 ) w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d l e t t h y

"will be done . "

`Beho ld the g od of One Face is with me . I am the Plant

" ( 8 ) o f t h e r e g i o n w h e r e n o t h i n g s p r o u t e t h , a n d t h e B l o s s o n o f

"the hidden horizon . "

" B e h o l d O s i r i s , y e a O s i r i s ! Streng then thou me according as

" t h o u h a s t s t r e n g t h e n e d t h y s e l f , ( 9 ) a n d s h e w t h y s e l f u p o n e a r t h ,

" 0 t h o u t h a t r e t u r n e s t a n d w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d l e t t h y w i l l

"be done . "

`Behold, the g od of One Face ( io) is with me . H a i l , t h o u

" w h o [ s t a n d e s t ] u p o n t h y l e g s , i n t h i n e h o u r , " o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ,

" H a i l , t h o u w h o a r t v i c t o r i o u s u p o n t h y l e g s i n t h i n e ( i i ) h o u r ,

"thou l ord of the two divine T c h a f i , I who lives t [in] the two

" d i v i n e 1 c h a J i , s t r e n g t h e n t h o u m e a c c o r d i n g a s t h o u h a l t s t r e n g -

t h e n e d t h y s e l f , a n d ( t 2 ' s h e w t h y s e l f u p o n e a r t h , 0 t h o u t h a t

" r e t u r n e s t a n d v w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d l e t t h y w i l l b e d o n e . "

`Behold , the god o f One Face is with me . ( r 3 ) H a i l , t h o u

"Nekhen who art in thine egg , thou lord of the goddess Meh-

"urt, strengthen thou me according as thou bast s trengthened

" t h y s e l f , ( r 4 ) a n d s h o w t h y s e l f u p o n e a r t h , 0 t h o u t h a t r e t u r n -

" e s t a n d w i t h d r a w e s t t h y s e l f , a n d l e t t h y w i l l b e d o n e . "

`Beho ld, the g od of One Face is with (i5) me . The g od

"Sebek hath stood up within his ground, and the g oddess Neith

" h a t h s t o o d u p w i t h i n h e r p l a n t a t i o n , 0 t h o u t h a t r e t u r n e s t a n d

" w i t h d r a w e s t ( r 6 ) t h y s e l f , s h e w t h y s e l f u p o n e a r t h a n d l e t t h y

"will be done . "

i . I . e . , the souls of Horus and Re .




"Behold, t h e g od of One Fac e is with me . Hail, ye s even

"beings who make decrees, who (17) s u p p o r t t h e S c a l e s o n t h e

"night of the judgm ent of the Utchat, who cut off heads, w ho

" h a c k n e c k s i n p i e c e s , w h o t a k e p o s s e s s i o n o f h e a r t s b y v i o l e n c e

"and rend the places (I8) where hearts are fixed, who mak e

"sl aughterings in the Lake of Fire, I know you and I know

"your names, therefore know ye me even as ( 1 g ) I know your

"names . I come forth to you, th erefore come ye forth to me,

" f o r y e l i v e i n m e a n d I w o u l d l i v e i n y o u . Ma ke ye me to be

"vigorous by means of that which is in your hands , that is to

" s a y , b y t h e r o d o f p o w e r w h i c h i s (20) in your hands . D e c r e e

" y e f o r m e l i f e b y [ y o u r ] s p e e c h y e a r b y y e a r ; g i v e m e m u l t i -

t u d e s o f y e a r s o v e r a n d a b o v e m y y e a r s o f l i f e , a n d m u l t i t u d e s

"of months over and ab ove my month s (21) o f l i f e , a n d m u l t i -

tudes of days ov er and abo ve my days of life, and multitudes

" o f n i g h t s o v e r a n d a b o v e m y n i g h t s o f l i f e ; a n d g r a n t t h a t I

"may come forth and shine upon my statue ; and [grant me]

" ( 2 2 ) air for my nose, and let my eyes ha ve the power to see

"among thos e divine beings who dwel l in the horizon on the

"day when evil-doing and wrong are j ustly as sess ed . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE RECITED FOR THE DECEASED HE SHALL

BE STRONG UPON EARTH BEFORE RA, AND HE SHALL HAVE A COMFORTABLE

BURIAL (OR TOMB) WITH OSIRIS, AND IT SHALI, BE OF GREAT BENEFIT TO

A MAN IN THE UNDERWORLD. SEPULCHRAL BREAD SHALL 13E GIVEN UNTO

HIM, AND HE SHALI, COME FORTH INTO THE PRESENCE [OF RA] DAY BY

DAY, AND EVERY DAY, REGULARLY, AND CONTINUALLY . '

CHAPTER LXXII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mu s . N o . 9,900, sheet 3 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g a n d h o l d i n g a s t a f f i n h i s l e f t h a n d .

Text : (1) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY AND OF

OPENING UP A WAY THROUGH THE AMIIEHET . Behold the

s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t r i u m p h a n t , w h o s a i t h :-

r . T h is R u b r i c i s t a k e n f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f T h e n n a ( s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . ,

Bd I I . p . 153) .



THE CHAPTER OF .M IAKING A WAY INTO THE A!LI_NIEHET . 1 2 9

"Homage to you, 0 ye lords of Kas, ye who are without ( 2 )

" s i n a n d w h o l i v e f o r t h e l i m i t l e s s a n d i n f i n i t e a e o n s o f t i m e

"which make up eternity, I have opened up a way for myself

"to you! I have become a khu (3) in my forms, I have gained

"the mastery over my enchantments, and I am decreed to be a

"khu ; ( 4 ) t h e r e f o r e d e l i v e r y e m e f r o m t h e c r o c o d i l e [ w h i c h l i v e t h

" i n ] t h i s c o u n t r y o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h . Grant ye to me my mouth

"that I may speak therewith, (5) and cause that my sepulchral

" m e a l s b e p l a c e d i n m y h a n d s i n y o u r p r e s e n c e , f o r I k n o w y o u ,

"and I know (6) your names, and I know also the name of the

"mighty god, b efore whose nose ye s et your t c h e f a u f o o d ; and

"his name is 'Tekem' . ( 7) [When] he openeth up his path in

"the east ern horizon of heaven, and [wh en] he fluttereth down

"in the western horizon of heaven ( 8 ) , may he carry me along

"with him and may I be s afe and sound! Let not the Mesqet

"make an end of me, let not the Fiend gain the mastery (9)

"over me, let me not be turned back at your portals, and (to)

"let not your doors be shut in my face, becaus e my cakes arc

" i n t h e c i t y o f P e a n d m y a l e i s i n (I i) t h e c i t y o f T e p . And

"there, in the cele stial mans ions of heaven which my divine

"father Tem hath stablished, let my hands lay hold (12) upon

" t h e w h e a t a n d t h e b a r l e y w h i c h s h a l l b e g i v e n u n t o m e t h e r e i n

"in abundant measure, and may the son of mine own b ody make

" [ r e a d y ] f o r m e m y f o o d t h e r e i n . And grant ye unto me the rein

" s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s , a n d i n c e n s e , a n d w a x , a n d a l l t h e b e a u t i f u l

"and ( I 3 ) p u r e t h i n g s w h e r e o n t h e g o d l i v e t h , i n v e r y d e e d f o r

" e v e r i n a l l ( 1 4 ) t h e t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s w h i c h i t p l e a s e t h m e [ t o

"perform] ; and grant me the power to float down and to sail

" u p t h e s t r e a m i n S e k h e t - A a r r u [ a n d m a y I r e a c h S e k h e t - h e t e p ! ] .

" ( I 5 ) I am the doubl e Lion-god . "

Rubric' : ( i ) I F( 2 ) THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASEI)] UPON

EARTH, [OR IF IT BE DONE] IN WRITING UPON [HIS] COFFIN, HE SHALL

COME FORTH BY (3) DAY IN ALL THI? FORMS WHICH HE IS PLEASED [TO

TAKE], AND HE SHALL ENTER IN TO [HIS] PLACE AND SHALL NOT BE DRIVEN

BACK. (4) AN)) CAKES, AND ALE, AND JOINTS OF MEAT UPON TILL; ALTAR

I . From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . N o . 10,470, s h e e t 6 ) .

9



I3 o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

OF OSIRIS SHALL BE GIVEN UNTO HIM ; AND HE SHALL ENTER (5) IN PEACE

INTO SEKHET-AARRU TO KNOW THE DECREE OF HIM WHO DWELLETH IN

TATTG ; THERE SHALL WHEAT AND BARLEY BE GIVEN UNTO HIM ; THERE

SHALL HE FLOURISH AS HE DID (7) UPON EARTH ; AND HE SHALL DO

WHATSOEVER IT PLEASEATH HIM TO DO, EVEN AS THh : COMPANY OF THE

GODS WHICH IS IN (8) THE UNDERWORLD, CONTINUALLY, AND REGULARLY,

FOR MILLIONS OF TIMES .

CHAPTER LXXIII .

[ S ee Chap ter IX , P ap yru s of Ani (B rit . M u s . N o . 10,470, sheet 1 8 ) . ]

This Chapter is g iven twice in the Turin Papyrus ( see Lep-

s i u s , o p . c i t . , B i l . 3 a n d 2 7 ) ; o n c e w i t h a v i g n e t t e a n d o n c e w i t h -

o u t ; the vign ette in the Theba n Recension is quite different

from that in the Sa ite Recension, where the deceas ed is seen

s t a n d i n g a n d h o l d i n g a s t a f f i n h i s l e f t h a n d .

CHAPTER LXXIV.

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10,477, s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n ,

b e f o r e t h e S e k e r b o a t p l a c e d u p o n i t s s l e d g e ( P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t t 8 ) .

I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d i s s t a n d i n g n e a r a t w o - l e g g e d s e r p e n t

( L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 2 7 ) .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF LIFTING UP THE FEE T AND OF

COMING FORTH UPON THE EARTH . ( 2 ) T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f ,

N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Perform thy work, 0 Sek er, perform thy work, 0 Seker, 0

" t h o u [ w h o d w e l l e s t i n t h y h o u s e ] , a n d w h o [ s t a n d e s t ] o n [ t h y ]

" f e e t i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d ! I a m t h e g o d w h o s e n d e t h f o r t h r a y s o f

" l i g h t o v e r t h e T h i g h o f ( 3 ) h e a v e n , a n d I c o m e f o r t h t o h e a v e n

"and I sit mysel f down by the Go d of Light ( K k u ) . H a i l , I

"have become helpl ess! Hail, I have become helples s! but I go

"forward . I have become helpless , I have become helpless (4)

"in the regions of those who plunder in the underworl d . "



THE CHAPTER OF JOURNEYING TO ANNU . 131

CHAPTER LXXV.

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . i o , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i 3 ) . ]

Vignette : In the Saite Recension the decea sed is stand ing before the

embl em of Annu (Heliopolis) (Lepsius, op . c i t . , Bl . 2 8 ) .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF JOURNEYING TO ANNU (HELIO-

POLIS) AND OF RECEIVING A THRONE THEREIN . The ch a n c e l l o r-

i n-c hi ef, N u , t ri u m p h a n t , s ai t h :- ( 2 )

"I have come forth from the uttermos t parts o f the earth, and

" [I hav e] receiv ed my ap p arel (%) at th e will (?) o f the Ap e . I p ene-

trate into the hol y habitations of those who ar e in [their] shrines

"(o r coffins) , ( 3 ) I forc e my wa y th r o u g h th e ha bi ta tion s of the

" g o d R e m r e m , a n d I a r riv e i n t h e h a b i t a ti o n s of t h e g o d A k h s e s ef ,

"I travel on through the holy chambers, and I pass into the

"Temple of the god (4) Kemkem. The Buckle hath been given

" u n t o m e , i t [ h a t h p l a c e d ] i t s h a n d s u p o n m e , i t h a t h d e c r e e d

" [ t o m y s e r v i c e ] i t s s i s t e r K h e b e n t , a n d i t s m o t h e r K e h k e h e t . It

" p l a c e t h m e ( 5 ) i n [ t h e e a s t e r n p a r t o f h e a v e n w h e r e i n Rd r i s e t h

"a n d i s e x a l t e d e v e r y da y ; a n d I r i s e t h e r e in a n d t r a v e l o n w a r d ,

"and I become a spiritual body (sap) like the god, and they

" s e t m e ] 1 ( 6 ) o n t h a t h o l y w a y o n w h i c h Th o t h j o u r n e y e t h w h e n

"he goeth to make peace between the two Fighting-gods (i . e . ,

"Horns and Set) . H e j o u r n e y e t h , h e j o u r n e y e t h t o t h e c i t y o f

"Pe, and he cometh to the city of Tepu . "

CHAPTER LXXVI.

[From the Papyruso f

Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t q ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : This Chapter is without a vignet te in the Theban Recension,

but in the S aite Recension a figure of the deceased is given above th e

Chapter (see Lepsins, o p . c i t . , BI . 8 7 ) .

i . The words i n b r a c k e t s a r e s u p p l i e d f r o m N a v i l l e , op . c i t . . Bd . I I . p . 1 5 8 .

9 *




Text : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF A MAN TRANSFORMING HIM-

S EL F INTO WHATEVER FORM HE PLEASETH . (2) T h e c h a n c e l l o r -

i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"I have come into the House of the King b y means of the

"mantis ( o b i t ) which led me hither . Homage to thee, (3) 0

"thou who fliest into heaven, and dost s hine upon the son of

"the white crown, and dost protect the white crown, let me

" h a v e m y e x i s t e n c e w i t h t h e e ! I h a v e g a t h e r e d t o g e t h e r t h e g r e a t

"god [s], I am mighty, I have made my way an d I have trave ll ed

"along thereon . "

CHAPTER LXXVII .

[ F r o m the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M us . No. 1 0 , 4 7 i , s h e e t t o ) . ]

Vign ette : A g o l d e n h a w k , h o l d i n g a f l a i l , e m b l e m a t i c o f r u l e ( s e e

P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 2 5 ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF PERFORMING THE TRANSFORMA-

TION INTO A HAWK OF GOLD . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

"I have risen, I have risen l ike the mighty hawk [ of gold]

" t h a t c o m e t h f o r t h f r o m h i s e g g ; I f l y ( 3 ) a n d I a l i g h t l i k e t h e

"hawk w hich hath a back four cubits wide, and the wings of

"which are like unto the moth er-of-emerald of the south. ( q )

"I have com e forth from the interior of the S e l a e t b o a t , a n d

"my heart hath bee n brou g ht unto me from the mountain of

" t h e e a s t . I have alighted ( 5) upon the A t e t boat, and those

"who were dwel ling in their companies have been broug ht unto

" m e , a n d t h e y b o w e d l o w in p a ying ( 6 ) h o m a g e u n t o m e a n d

"in saluting me w ith cries of joy . I have risen, and I have

" g a t h e r e d m y s e l f t o g e t h e r l i k e t h e b e a u t i f u l h a w k ( 7 ) o f g o l d ,

"which hath the head of a Bennu b i r d , a n d R d e n t e r e t h i n d a y

" b y day to hearken unto my words ; I have taken my seat

"among those (8 ) first-born gods of Nut . I am stablished, and

" t h e d i v i n e S e k h e t - h e t e p i s b e f o r e ( g ) m e , I h a v e e a t e n t h e r e i n ,

"I have become a khu therein, I have an ab undance therein



111E CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMIATIONS 1 3 3

" a s m u c h a s I desire-the g od Neprd h a t h g i v e n t o m e my

" t h r o a t , and I have g a i n e d t h e mastery over (so) that which

"guardeth (or belong eth to) my head . "

CHAPTER LXXV111 .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t s 1 3 a n d 1 4 ) . ]

Vigne tte : A h a w k , p a i n t e d g r e e n , h o l d i n g a f l a i l , a n d s t a n d i n g u p o n a

p y l o n - s h a p e d p e d e s t a l ( s e e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 25) .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO A DIVINE HAWK . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a i t h :-

"Hail, G reat God, come now ( 2 ) t o T a t t u ! Make thou smooth

"for me the ways and l et me go roun d about [ to visit] my

" t h r o n e s ; I h a v e r e n e w e d ( ? ) m y s e l f , a n d I h a v e r a i s e d m y s e l f u p .

"0 gran t thou that I may be feared, ( 3 ) and make thou me to

" b e a t e r r o r . Let the gods of the underworld b e afraid of me,

" a n d m a y t h e y f i g h t f o r m e i n t h e i r h a b i t a t i o n s w h i c h a r e t h e r e i n .

" ( 4 ) Let not him that woul d do me harm draw nigh unto me,

"or injure(?) me, in the House of Darknes s, that is, he that

"clotheth and cov ereth the feebl e one, and whose [name] is

"hidden ; (5) and let not the gods act likewise towards me .

" [ H a i l ] , y e g o d s , w h o h e a r k e n u n t o [ m y ] s p e e c h ! H a i l , y e r u l e r s ,

" w h o a r e a m o n g t h e f o l l o w e r s o f O s i r i s ! B e y e t h e r e f o r e s i l e n t ,

"0 ye gods, (6) when one god speaketh unto another, for he

" h e a r k e n e t h u n t o r i g h t a n d t r u t h ; and what I speak unto [him]

"do thou also speak for me then, 0 Osiris . Grant thou that I

"may journey round about [ according to] that which cometh

"forth from thy mouth concer ning me, (7) and gran t that I may

"see thine own Form ( or forms), and the dispos itions of thy

" S o u l s . Grant t hou that I may come forth, and that I may have

"power over my leg s, and that I may have my existence there

" l i k e ( 8 ) u n t o t h a t o f N e b - e r - t c h e r w h o i s o v e r [ a l l ] . May the

"gods of the underworl d fear me, and may they fight for me in




" t h e i r h a b i t a t i o n s . Grant thou that I may move along therein

"(9) together with the divine beings w ho journey onwards, and

"may I be stab lished upon my resting-place like the Lord of

" L i f e . May I be j oined unto Isis the divine lady, and may sh e

"protect me ( 1 o ) from him that woul d do an injury unto me ;

"and let not any one come to see the divine one naked and

" h e l p l e s s . May I journey on, may I come into the uttermost

" ( i i ) p a r t s o f h e a v e n . I exchange speech with the god Seb, I

" m a k e s u p p l i c a t i o n f o r d i v i n e f o o d f r o m N e b - e r - t c h e r ; t h e g o d s

" o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d h a v e f e a r o f m e , a n d t h e y ( 1 2 ) f i g h t f o r m e

" i n t h e i r h a b i t a t i o n s w h e n t h e y s e e t h a t t h o u h a s t p r o v i d e d m e

" w i t h f o o d , b o t h o f t h e f o w l o f t h e a i r a n d o f t h e f i s h o f t h e

" s e a . I am one of those Khus who dwe ll with ( 1 3 ) t h e d i v i n e

' W h i t , and I have made my form like unto his divine Form,

"when he cometh forth and mak eth himsel f manifest in Tattu .

" [ I a m ] a s p i r i t u a l b o d y ( s a h ) (14) and possess my soul , and

"will speak unto thee the things which concern me . 0 grant

"thou that I may be feared, and make thou me to be a te rror ;

" l e t t h e g o d s o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d b e a f r a i d o f m e , (15) and may

" t h e y f i g h t f o r m e i n t h e i r h a b i t a t i o n s . I , e v e n I , a m t h e K h u

"who dwelleth with the divine Khu, whom the god Tern him-

" s e l f h a t h c r e a t e d , ( 1 6 ) and who hat h come into being from

" t h e b l o s s o m ( i . e . , t h e e y e l a s h e s ) o f h i s e y e ; he hath made to

"have existence, and he hath made to be gl orious (i. e

. ,t o b e

"Khus), and he hath made mighty thereby those who have their

"existence along with him . Behol d, he is the only One in Nu,

"(17 ) and they sing praises (or do homage) unto him [when]

"he cometh forth from the horizon, and the gods and the Khus

"who have come into being along with him ascribe [the l ord-

" s h i p o f ] t e r r o r u n t o h i m . "

"I am one of those worms( ?) which the eye of the Lord, the

"onl y One, ( 1 8 ) h a t h c r e a t e d . And behold, when as yet Isis

"had not g iven birth to Horus, I had germinated, and had

"flourished, and I had become ag ed, (ig) and I had become

"greater than those who dw elt with the divine Khu, a n d w h o

"had come into being al ong with him . And I had risen up like



TILE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS . 135

"the divine hawk, and Horus made for me a spiritual b ody ( 2 0 )

"containing his own soul , so that I might take pos s es sion of all

"that belonged unto Osiris in the underworld . The doubl e Lion-

" g od, the g o vernor of the thin g s w hi ch b e l on g to the T emp l e

"of the nemmes crown, ( 2 1 ) who dwell eth in his secret ab ode,

"saith [unto me] :- `Get thee back to the uttermost parts of

" h e a v e n , f o r b e h o l d , in a s m u c h a s t h r o u g h t h y fo r m of Ho r u s

"thou hast bec ome a spiritual bod y, ( s a h ) the nemmes crown is

"not for thee ; b ut ( 2 2 ) behold, thou hast the power of speech

"even to the uttermost parts of heaven .' And I, the guardian,

"took p oss ession of the things of Horus [wh ich bel onged] unto

"Osiris in the underwor ld, and Horus tol d aloud unt o me ( 2 3 )

"the t hings wh ich his divine father Osiris spak e unto h im in

" year s [ g one b y] on the day of his ow n b uri a l . I have given

"unto thee i the nemmes c r o w n t h r o u g h t h e d o u b l e L io n - g o d

" t h a t t h o u m a y e s t p a s s o n w a r d ( 2 4 ) a n d m a y e s t c o m e t o t h e

"heavenly path, and that those who dwell in the uttermost parts

"of the horizon may s ee thee, and that the g ods of the under-

"world may see thee and may fight for thee (25) i n t h e i r h a b i t a -

t i o n s . A nd of them i s the A uhet . 2 The g od s , each and a l l of

"them, who are the warders of the shrine of the Lord, the onl y

"One, have fall en before my words . Hail! (26) He that is exalted

" u p o n h i s t o m b i s o n m y s i d e , a n d h e h a t h b o u n d [ u p o n m y

"head] the nemmescrow n, b y th e decree of the dou b l e Lion-

" g o d o n m y b e h a l f , a n d t h e g o d A u h e t h a t h p r e p a r e d a w a y

"for me . I, even I, am exalted (27) in my tom b , and the dou b l e

"Lion- g od hath b ound the nemmes c r o w n u p o n m y [ h e a d ], a n d

" he hath a l s o gi ven unto me the dou b l e hai ry coveri n g of my

" head . H e hath s ta b li s hed my heart throu g h his ow n b ac k b o ne,

" he hath s ta b l i s hed my heart throu g h his ow n ( 2 8 ) great and

"exceeding strength, and I shall no t fall throug h Shu . I m a k e

"my peace with the beautiful divine Brother, the lord o f the

" t w o u r a e i , a d o r e d b e h e ! I, e v e n I a m h e w h o k n o w e t h t h e

i . L i t e r a l l y : "Thou hast g iven unto me . "

2 . T h e v a r i a n t s a r e A a h e t A t , A a h e t A t e h , a n d o n e p a p y r u s g i v e s t h e w o r d s

"I am the great god" ; s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . I I . p . 1 6 7 .



06 THE CHAPTERS OF CO NIING FORTH B Y DAY .

" r o a d s t h r o u g h t h e s k y ( 2 9 ) , a n d t h e w i n d t h e r e o f i s i n m y b o d y .

"The bull which striketh terror [into men] shal l not drive me

"back, and I shall pass on to the place where lieth the ship-

" w r e c k e d m a r i n e r o n t h e b o r d e r o f t h e S e k h e t - n e l } e h ( i . e . , F i e l d

" o f i l l i m i t a b l e t i m e ) , ( 3 o ) a n d I s h a l l j o u r n e y o n t o t h e n i g h t a n d

"so rrow of the regions of Amenti . 0 O s i r i s , I s h a l l c o m e e a c h

"day into the House of the double Lion-god, and I shall come

" f o r t h t h e r e f r o m i n t o t h e H o u s e o f ( 3 1 ) I s i s , t h e d i v i n e l a d y .

" I s h a l l b e h o l d s a c r e d t h i n g s w h i c h a r e h i d d e n , a n d I s h a l l b e

" l e d o n t o t h e s e c r e t a n d h o l y t h i n g s , e v e n a s t h e y h a v e g r a n t e d

"unto me (32) to see the b irth of the Great God . Horns hath

"made me to be a spiritual body through his soul , [and I see

" w h a t i s t h e r e i n . If I speak near the mighty one s of Shu they

" r e p u l s e m y o p p o r t u n i t y . I a m t h e g u a r d i a n a n d I ] t a k e p o s s e s s i o n

"of the things which Horns h ad from Osiris in the underw orld

"I, even I, (33) am Horus who dwe ll eth in the divine Khu . [ I ]

"have gained power over his crown, I have gained power over

" h i s r a d i a n c e , a n d I h a v e t r a v e l l e d o v e r t h e r e m o t e , i l l i m i t a b l e

" p a r t s o f ( 3 4 ) h e a v e n . H o r n s i s u p o n h i s t h r o n e , H o r n s i s u p o n

" h i s r o y a l s e a t . M y face is l ike unto that of the divine hawk ,

"my s trengt h is like unto that of the divine hawk, a nd I am

òne who hath b een fully equipped by his divine Lord . I s h a l l

" c o m e f o r t h t o T a t t u , ( 3 5 ) I s h a l l s e e O s i r i s , I s h a l l p a y h o m a g e

"to him on the right hand and on the left, I shal l pay homag e

" u n t o N u t , a n d s h e s h a l l l o o k u p o n m e , a n d t h e g o d s s h a l l l o o k

"upon me, tog ether with the Eye of Horns who (36) is without

" s i g h t ( ? ) . They ( i . e . , the gods) shall make their arms to come

"forth unto me . I r i s e u p [ a s ] a d i v i n e P o w e r , a n d [ I ] r e p u l s e

"him that would subj ect me to restraint . They open unto me

"the holy paths, they see ( 37) my form, and they hear that

"which I speak . [D own] upon your faces, ye gods of the Tuat

"(underworld), who would resist me with your faces and oppose

"me with your powers , who lead along the s tars which never

"(38) rest, and who make the holy p aths unto the Hemati abode

" [ w h e r e i s ] t h e L o r d o f t h e e x c e e d i n g l y m i g h t y a n d t e r r i b l e S o u l .

"Horns hath commanded that ye l ift up your faces so that I



THE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS . 07

" m a y ( 3 9 ) l o o k u p o n y o u . I have risen up like the divine hawk,

" a n d H o r u s b a t h m a d e fo r m e a s p i ri t u a l b o d y , t h r o u g h hi s

"own soul, to take posses sion of that which belongeth to Osiris

"( 4o) in the Tuat (underw orld) . I have bound up the go ds with

"divine tres ses, and I have travel led on to those who ward their

" Ch a m b e r s , a n d w h o w e r e o n b o t h s id e s o f m e . I h a v e m a d e

"my roads and I have (4 1 ) journeyed on and have reached those

"divine beings who inhabit their secret dwell ings, and who arc

"war ders o f the Temple o f Osiris . I have sp oken unto the m with

" s t r e n g t h , a n d h a v e m a d e t h e m t o k n o w ( 4 2 ) t h e m o s t mi g h t %

"power of him that is p rovided with two horns [to fight] against

"Suti ; a n d I m a k e t h e m t o k n o w c o n c e r nin g him t h a t h a t h

"taken poss ession of the divine food, and who is prov ided with

"the M ight of Tem . ( 4 3 ) M a y th e g o d s of the un d e r wo r l d [o r d e r]

" a p r o s p e r o u s j o u r n e y f o r m e ! 0 y e g o d s w h o in h a b i t y o u r

"secr et dwell ings, and who are wa rders of the Temple of Osiris,

"and whose numbers are great and multitudinous, grant ye ( 44 )

"that I may come unto you . I have bound up and I have gather ed

" t o g e t h e r t h e p o w e r s of Ke s e m u -e n e n e t , " o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) ,

"Kese miu-enene t ; and I have made holy (45) the Powers of the

"paths of those who watch a nd ward the roads of the horizon,

"and wh o are th e gua rdians of the horizon of Hemati which is

"in heaven . I have s tablished ha bitations for Osiris, I have made

"the ways hol y (46) for him, I have done that which bath been

"comman ded, I have come forth to Tattu, I have s een Osiris,

"I have spok en unto him concerning the matters of his first-

" b o r n s o n w h o m ( 4 7 ) h e l o v e t h a n d c o n c e r n i n g t h e w o u n d in g

"of the heart o f Sut i, and I have seen the divine one who is

"without l ife . Y e a , I h a v e m a d e t h e m t o k n o w c o n c e r n i n g t h e

"counsel s of the gods which Horus carried out (48 ) while his

"father Osiris was not [with him] . Hail, Lord, thou mo st mighty

"and terrible S oul! Verily, I, even I, have come, look thou upon

" m e , ( 4 9 ) a n d d o t h o u m a k e m e t o b e e x a l t e d . I h a v e m a d e

" m y w a y t h r o u g h t h y T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) , a n d I h a v e o p e n e d

" u p t h e p a t h s w h ic h b e l o n g t o h e a v e n a n d a l s o t h o s e w h i c h

"belong to earth, and I have s uffered no op position therein . ( 5 0 )



1 3 8 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DAY

" E x a l t e d [ b e t h o u ] u p o n t h y t h r o n e , 0 O s i r i s ! Thou hast heard

" f a i r t h i n g s , 0 O s i r i s ! T h y s t r e n g t h i s v i g o r o u s , 0 O s i r i s . Thy

" h e a d i s f a s t e n e d u n t o t h e e , 0 O s i r i s . T h y b r o w i s s t a b l i s h e d ,

" ( 5 1 ) 0 O s i r i s . Thy heart is g lad, [0 Osiris] . Thy speech( ?)

" i s s t a b l i s h e d , [ 0 O s i r i s ] , a n d t h y p r i n c e s r e j o i c e . Thou art

" s t a b l i s h e d l i k e t h e B u l l o f A m e n t e t . ( 52) Thy son Horus hath

" r i s e n l i k e t h e s u n u p o n t h y t h r o n e , a n d a l l l i f e i s w i t h h i m .

" M i l l i o n s o f y e a r s m i n i s t e r u n t o h i m , a n d m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s h o l d

"him in fear ; the company of the gods are his servants, and

"the comp any of the gods h old him in fear . T h e g o d T e m ,

" ( 5 3 ) t h e G o v e r n o r a n d o n l y One of t h e g o d s , b a t h s p o k e n

" [ t h e s e t h i n g s ] , a n d h i s w o r d p a s s e t h n o t a w a y . Horus is both

" t h e d i v i n e f o o d a n d t h e s a c r i f i c e . [He] bath pas sed on( ?) t o

" g a t h e r t o g e t h e r [ t h e m e m b e r s o f ] h i s d i v i n e f a t h e r ( 5 4 ) ; Horus

" i s [ h i s ] d e l i v e r e r , H o r u s i s [ h i s ] d e l i v e r e r . Horus bath sprung

" f r o m t h e w a t e r o f h i s d i v i n e f a t h e r a n d [ f r o m h i s ] d e c a y . He

"bath b ecome the Governor of Egypt . The gods labour for him,

" a n d t h e y t o i l f o r h i m f o r ( 5 5 ) m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s ; and he bath

"made to live mill ions of years th rough his Eye, the onl y One

" o f i t s L o r d ( o r N e b - s ) , N e b t - e r - t c h e r . "

CHAPTER LXXIX .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t s 8 a n d q ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e t h r e e g o d s ( s e e

N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , Bd . I . 1 3 1 . g o ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF' BEING TRANSFORMED INTO THE

GOVERNOR OF THE SOVEREIGN PRINCES . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -

c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h : - ( 2 )

" I a m t h e g o d T e m , t h e m a k e r o f h e a v e n , t h e c r e a t o r o f t h i n g s

"which are, who cometh forth from the earth, who mak eth to

"come into being the seed w hich is sown, the lord of things

"which shall be, who g ave birth to the gods ; [ I a m ] t h e g r e a t

"god who made himsel f, (3) the lord of life, who maketh to



THE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS. 139

"flourish the com pany of the gods . H o m a g e t o y o u , 0 y e l o r d s

"of divine things ( or of creation), ye p ure beings wh ose ab odes

"are hidden! Homage to you, 0 ye everl asting l ords, (4 ) whose

"forms are hidden and whose sh rines are hidden in plac es which

" a r e u n k n o w n ! Ho m a g e t o y o u , ( 5 ) 0 y e g o d s , w h o d w e l l i n

"the Tenait O! H o m a g e t o y o u , 0 y e g o d s o f t h e c ir c u i t o f

" the f l ooded l and s of Q e b hu ! H o m a g e t o y o u , 0 y e g o d s w h o

"live in Amentet ! ( 6 ) Ho m a g e t o y o u , 0 y e c o m p a n y o f t h e

" g o d s w h o d w e l l i n N u t ! G r a n t y e t h a t I m a y c o m e u n t o y o u ,

"for I am pu re, ( 7) I am divine, I am a khu, I am strong, I

"am endowed with a soul ( or I am mighty), a nd I have brought

" u n t o y o u i n c e n s e , a n d s w e e t - s m e l l in g g u m s , a n d n a t r o n ; I

"have made a n end of the spittle which floweth ( 8) from your

"mouth upon me. I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e m a d e a n e n d o f

"the evil things which are in your hearts, and I have remo ved

"the faults which ye kept [l aid up against me] . I have brought to

" y ou ( 9 ) t h e t h in g s w h ic h a r e g o o d, a n d I m a k e t o c om e in t o

" y o u r p r e s e n c e Rig h t a n d T r u t h . I , e v e n I, k n o w y o u , a n d I

" know your name s , and I know ( t o ) your f orm s , w hi ch are un-

k n o w n , a n d I c o m e i n t o b e i n g a l o n g w i t h y o u . My coming is

"like unto that of the god who eateth men and ( t 1 ) who liveth

" u p o n t h e g o d s . I a m m i g h t y w i t h y o u l i k e t h e g o d w h o i s

"exalted upo n his resting-place ; the g od s come to me in g l ad-

ness, and goddess es make supp lication ( 1 2 ) u n t o m e w h e n t h e y

" s e e m e . I h a v e c o m e u n t o y o u , a n d I h a v e ri s e n l i k e y o u r

"two divine daug hters . I have taken my s eat in the ( 1 3) h or iz on ,

"and I receive my offerings upon my tabl es, and I drink drink-

"offerings a t eventide . My coming is [rec eived] with (1 4) s houts

"of joy, and the divine beings wh o dwell in the horizon asc ribe

"praises unto me, the divine sp iritual b ody (Sah), the lord of

"divine beings ( 1 5 ) . I am exalted like the holy god who dwell-

"eth in the Great Temple, an d the gods rejoice when they see

" me i n my b eaut if ul comi n g forth f rom the b ody of Nut, w hen

" m y m o t h e r N u t g iv e t h b i r t h u n t o m e . "



1 4 0 THE CHAPTERS OF CONING FORTH B Y DA Y

CHAPTER LXXX .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 2 8 ) . ]

Vignett e : A g o d w i t h t h e d i s k o f t h e s u n u p o n h i s h e a d .

Text : ( i) [THE CHAPTER OF] MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO THE GOD WHO GIVETH LIGHT [IN] THE DARKNESS . S a i t h

O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i , t r i u m p h a n t :-

"I am ( 2 ) t h e g i r d l e o f t h e r o b e o f t h e g o d N u , w h i c h s h i n e t h

"and sheddeth light upon that which bel ongeth to his breast,

" w h i c h s e n d e t h f o r t h l i g h t i n t o t h e d a r k n e s s , w h i c h u n i t e t h t h e

"two fighting deities ( 3) who dwel l in my body through the

"mighty spe l l of the word s of my mouth, which raiseth up

"him that hath fallen-(4 ) for he who was with him in the

"val ley of Abtu ( Abydos) ha th fall en-and I rest . I h a v e r e -

m e m b e r e d him . I h a v e t a k e n p o s s e s s i o n o f t h e g o d Hu in my

" c i t y , f o r I f o u n d ( 5 ) h i m t h e r e i n , a n d I h a v e l e d a w a y c a p t i v e

"the darkness by my might . I h a v e r e s c u e d t h e E y e [ o f t h e S u n ]

"when it waned at the c oming of the festival of the fifteenth

" d a y , ( 6 ) a n d I h a v e w e i g h e d S u t i n t h e c e l e s t i a l h o u s e s a g a i n s t

"the Aged one who is with him . I have endowed (7 ) Thoth

"[with what is nee dful] in the Temple of the Mo on-god for

" t h e c o m i n g o f t h e f i f t e e n t h d a y o f t h e f e s t i v a l . I have taken

" p o s s e s s i o n o f t h e U r e r e t crown ; M a a t ( i . e . , r i g h t a n d t r u t h )

" i s i n m y ( 8 ) b o d y ; i t s m o u t h s a r e o f t u r q u o i s e a n d r o c k - c r y s t a l .

"My homes tead is among the furrows w hich are [of the colour

" o f ] l a p i s - l a z ul i . I am (g ) Hem-Nu ( ? ) who shedd eth light in

" t h e d a r k n e s s . I h a v e c o m e t o g i v e l i g h t i n t h e d a r k n e s s , w h i c h

"is made light and bright [by me] . I h a v e g i v e n l i g h t i n t h e

" d a r k n e s s , ( i o ) a n d I h a v e o v e r t h r o w n t h e d e s t r o y i n g c r o c o d i l e s .

"I have sung praises unto those who dwell in the darkness, I

" h a v e r a i s e d u p t h o s e w h o ( i t ) wept, and w ho had hidden their

"faces and had sunk down in wretchedness ; and they did look

"then upon me . [Hail, then,] ye being s, I am Hem-Nu ( ? ) , and

" I w i l l n o t l e t y o u h e a r c o n c e r n i n g t h e m a t t e r . [ I ] h a v e o p e n e d



THE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS .1 4 1

"[the way], I am Hem-Nu ( ? ) , [I] have made light the dark nes s ,

" I h a v e c o m e , h a v i n g m a d e a n e n d o f t h e d a r k n e s s , w h i c h b a t h

" b e c o m e l i g h t in d e e d . "

CHAPTER LXXXI A .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i t ) . ]

Vignette : I n t h e P a p y r u s of N e b s e n i ( s h e e t 3 ) the vignet te of this

Chapter is simply a l otus flower in f u l l b l o o m , b u t i n t h e P a p y r u s o f

Ani (sheet z8) a human head is seen springing from the lotus which is

growing in a pool of water . See also Lepsius, o p . c i t . , B l . 3 1 .

Text : (r) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO A LOTUS . The o v e r s e e r of the pa l a c e , th e ch a n c e l l o r-in-

chief, Nu, saith :- (2)

"I am the pure lotus which springeth up from the divine

" s p l e n d o u r t h a t b e l o n g e t h t o t h e n o s t r il s o f Ra . I have made

"[ m y w a y], an d I fo l l o w on s e e ki n g for him wh o i s Horn s . I am

"the pure one who cometh forth out of the Field . "

CHAPTER LXXXI B .

[From the Papyrus o f P a g r e r ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . B l . 9 3 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : A human head s p ringing from a lotus .


INTO A LOTUS . Saith Osiris Paqrer :- ( 2 )

"Hail, thou lotus, thou type of the god Nefer-Temu ! I am

"the man that knoweth you, and (3) I know your names among

"[thos e of] the gods , the lords of the underworl d, and I am one

" o f ( 4 ) y o u . Grant ye that [I] may see the gods who are the

" d i v in e g u i d e s i n t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) , a n d g r a n t y e u n t o m e

" a p l a c e i n ( 5 ) t h e u n d e r w o r l d n e a r u n t o t h e l o r d s o f A m e n te t .

"Let me arrive at a hab itation in the land of Tchesert, and r e-




"ceive me, 0 all ye gods, ( 6) in the presence of the lords of

" e t e r n i t y . Grant tha t my soul may come forth whithersoever it

"pl easeth , and let it not be driven away from the presence of

"the great company of the gods . "

CHAPTER LXXXII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t s 9 a n d t o ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e g o d P t a h i n a s h r i n e , b e f o r e w h i c h i s a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSF ORMATION

INTO PTAH, OF EATING CAKES, AND OF DRINKING ALE, AND

O F U N F E T TE R IN G T HE S T E P S , A N D O F B E C O M I N G A LIVING

BEING IN ANNU (Heliopol is) . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m -

p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

" I f l y l i k e a h a w k , I c a c k l e l i k e t h e smen g o o s e , a n d I p e r c h

" ( 3 ) upon that abode of the underwor ld ( d a t ) o n t h e f e s t i v a l

" o f t h e g r e a t B e i n g . That which is an abo mination unto me,

" t h a t w h i c h i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o m e , I h a v e n o t e a t e n ; f i l t h

"is an ab omination unto me and I have not eaten thereof, (4 )

" a n d t h a t w h i c h i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o m y k a b a t h n o t e n t e r e d

"into my bell y . Let me, then, live upon that which the gods

"and the Khus decree for me ; ( 5 ) l e t m e l i v e a n d l e t m e h a v e

" p o w e r o v e r c a k e s ; l e t m e e a t t h e m b e f o r e t h e g o d s a n d t h e Khus

" [ w h o h a v e a f a v o u r ] u n t o ( 6 ) m e ; l e t m e h a v e p o w e r o v e r [ t h e s e

" c a k e s ] a n d l e t m e e a t o f t h e m u n d e r t h e [ s h a d e o f t h e ] l e a v e s

"of the palm tree of the goddes s Hathor, (7) who is my divine

"Lady . L e t t h e o f f e r i n g o f t h e s a c r i f i c e , a n d t h e o f f e r i n g o f c a k e s ,

"and ves sel s of libations be made in Annu ; let me clothe my-

" s e l f i n ( 8 ) t h e t a d u g a r m e n t [ w h i c h I s h a l l r e c e i v e ] f r o m t h e

"hand of the godde ss Tait ; let me stand up and let me sit

"down (g) wheresoever I please . My head is like unto that of

"Rd, and [when my members are] gathered together [I am] like

"unto Tern ; t h e f o u r [ s i d e s o f t h e d o m a i n ] o f R a , ( 1 o ) a n d t h e

"width of the earth four times . I come forth . My tong ue is






" e t h i n (6) Se khem, and of the Sou ls who are in Annu, and

"there is a s tream between them (7) I have come by day, and I

" h a v e r i s e n i n t h e f o o t s t e p s o f t h e g o d s . I am the god Khensu,

"who driveth back all that oppos e him . "

Rubr ic : [ IF] THIS CHAPTER [BE KNOWN BY THE DECEASED] HE SHALL

COME FORTH PURE BY DAY AFTER HIS DEATH, AND HE SHALL PERFORM

WHATSOEVER TRANSFORMATIONS HIS HEART DESIRETH . HE SHALL BE IN

THE FOLLOWING OF UN-NEFER, AND HE SHALL BE SATISFIED WITH THE

FOOD OF OSIRIS AND WITH SEPULCHRAL MEALS . [ H E ] S H ALL S E E TH E D I S K ,

[HE] SHALL BE IN GOOD CASE UPON EARTH BEFORE RA, AND HE SHALL BE

TRIUMPHANT 13EFORE OSIRIS, ANT) NO EVIL THING WHATSOEVER SHALL,

HAVE DOMINION OVER HIM FOR EVER AND EVER .

CHAPTER LXXXIV.

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mu s . No . 10,4i7, sheeti o ) . ]

Vign ette : A h e r o n .

Text : [THE CHAPTER OF M AKING THE TRANS FORMATION INTO

A HERON . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-] ( 8 )

"[I] have gotten dominion over the b easts that are broug ht

" f o r s a c r i f i c e , w i t h t h e k n i v e s w h i c h a r e [ h e l d ] a t t h e i r h e a d s ,

" a n d a t t h e i r h a i r , a n d a t t h e i r ( g )H a i l ] , A g e d o n e s

" [ h a i l , ] Khzzs, w h o a r e p r o v i d e d w i t h t h e o p p o r t u n i t y , t h e c h a n -

" c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,(MO)

" i s u p o n t h e e a r t h , a n d w h a t h e h a t h s l a u g h t e r e d i s i n h e a v e n ;

"and what he hath s laughtered is in heaven and he is upon the

" e a r t h . Behold, I am strong, and I work mighty deeds to the

" v e r y h e i g h t s o f h e a v e n . (I I) I have made mysel f pure, and [I]

" m a k e t h e b r e a d t h o f h e a v e n [ a p l a c e f o r ] m y f o o t s t e p s [ a s I g o ]

" i n t o t h e c i t i e s o f A u k e r t ; I advance, and I go forward ( 1 2 )

"into the city of Unnu (Hermopolis) . I h a v e s e t t h e g o d s u p o n

"their paths, and I have roused up the exalted ones who dwel l

" i n t h e i r s h r i n e s . Do I not know Nu? ( 1 3 ) Do I not know Ta-

"tunen ? Do I not know the b eings of the col our of fire who



THE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS .

" t h r u s t f o r w a r d t h e i r h o r n s ? D o I n o t k n o w [ e v e r y b e i n g h a v i n g ]

"incantations unto whose word s I listen? (t4 ) I am the Smam

" b u l l [ f o r s l a u g h t e r ] w h i c h i s w r i t t e n d o w n i n t h e b o o k s . The

"gods crying out say : ` L e t y o u r f a c e s b e g r a c i o u s t o h i m t h a t

"cometh onward' . T h e l i g h t ( 1 5 ) i s b e y o n d y o u r k n o w l e d g e , a n d

" y e c a n n o t f e t t e r i t ; and times and s ea son s are in my body .

" I d o n o t u t t e r w o r d s t o t h e g o d I I u , [ I d o n o t u t t e r w o r d s o f ]

" w i c k e d n e s s i n s t e a d o f [ w o r d s o f ] r i g h t a n d t r u t h , ( t 6 ) a n d e a c h

"day right and truth come upon my eyebrows . A t n i g h t t a k e t h

"pl ace the festival of him that is dead, the Aged One, who is

" i n w a r d [ i n ] t h e e a r t h . "

CHAPTER LXXXV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vign ette : A s o u l .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO A LIVING SOUL, AND OFNOT ENTERING INTO THE CHAMBER

OF TORTURE ; w h o s o e v e r k n o w e t h [ i t ] s h a l l n o t s e e c o r r u p t i o n .

T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"I am the divine Sou l of Rd procee ding from the god Nu ;

" t h a t d i v i n e S o u l w h i c h i s G o d , [ I a m ] t h e c r e a t o r o f t h e d i v i n e

" f o o d , a n d t h a t w h i c h i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o m e i s s i n ( 3 ) w h e r e -

on I look not . I p r o c l a i m r i g h t a n d t r u t h , a n d I l i v e t h e r e i n .

" I a m t h e d i v i n e f o o d , w h i c h i s n o t c o r r u p t e d i n m y n a m e ( 4 ) o f

"Soul : I gave birth unto mysel f together with Nu in my name

"of Khepera in whom I come into being day b y day . I am the

"lord of (5) light, and that which is an abomination unto me

" i s d e a t h ; l e t m e n o t g o i n t o t h e c h a m b e r o f t o r t u r e w h i c h i s

"in the Tuat (under worl d) . I a s c r i b e h o n o u r [ u n t o ] O s i r i s , a n d

" I m a k e t o b e a t p e a c e t h e h e a r t [ s ] o f ( 6 ) t h o s e b e i n g s w h o d w e l l

"among the divine things which [I] love . They caus e the fear

" o f m e [ t o a b o u n d ] , a n d t h e y c r e a t e a w e o f ( 7 ) m e i n t h o s e b e i n g s

" w h o d w e l l i n t h e i r d i v i n e t e r r i t o r i e s . B e h o l d , I a m e x a l t e d u p o n

10

x 4 5




" my s tandard ( 8 ) , and upon my seat, and upo n the throne which

"is adjudged [to me] . I am the god Nu, and the work ers of ini-

quity shall not des troy me ( g ) . I am the first-born g od of prim-

eval matter , that is to say, the divine Soul, ev en the (io) Souls

"of the gods of everlas tingness , and my body is eternity . My

"Form is everlastingnes s , and is the lord of years (x x) and the

" p r i n c e o f e t e r n i t y . [I am] the creator of the darkness who maketh

"his habitation in the uttermost parts of the sky, [which] I love

" ( 1 2 ) , and I arrive at the confines th ereof . I a d v a n c e u p o n m y

"feet, I become master of (x3) my vine, I sail over the sk y which

"formeth the division [betwixt heav en and e arth], [I] destroy

"the hidden (i4) worms that trav el nigh unto my footsteps which

" a r e t o wa r d s t h e l o r d of t h e t w o h a nd s a n d a r m s . M y s o u l i s

"t h e S o u l s of the s o u l s ( 1 5 ) of everlastingness , and my body is

" e t e r n i t y . I am the divine exal ted being who is the lo rd of the

" l a nd of T eb u . Ì am the Boy ( x 6 ) i n the city and the Youn g

" m a n i n t h e p l a i n ' is m y n a m e ; `he that never suffereth cor-

ru pti on' is my nam e . I am the S ou l , the creator of the g od

" N u w h o m a k e t h h i s h a b i t a t io n i n ( i7 ) t h e u n d e r w o r l d : my

"place of incubation is unseen and my egg is not cracked . I have

" done a w ay wi th a l l my i niqui ty, and I s ha l l s e e my di vi ne

"Father, (x 8) the lor d of eventide, whose body dwel l eth in Annu .

"I travel(?) to the god o f night(?), who dwell eth with the god

"of light, by the w estern reg ion of the Ibis (i . e ., Thoth) . "

CHAPTER LXXXVI .

[ F r o m the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M us . N o . 1 0, 47 7 , s h e e t i o ) . ]

Vigne tte : A s w a l l o w p e r c h e d u p o n a c o n i c a l o b j e c t .

Text : (x) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO A SWALLOW. The chancel lor-in-chief, Nu, triumpha nt,

s a i t h :- (2)



THE CHAPTERS OF TRANSFORMATIONS . 1 4 7

" I a m a swa llow, I am a swa llow . I am the Scorp ion, the

"daug hter of Ra. H a i l , y e g o d s , w h o s e s c e n t i s s w e e t ; h a i l , y e

" g o d s , w h o s e s c e n t i s s w e e t ! [ H a i l , ] F l a m e , w h i c h c o m e t h f o r t h

" f r o m t h e h o r i z o n ! H a i l , t h o u w h o a r t i n t h e c i t y , I h a v e b r o u g h t

"the Warde n of his Bight th erein . 0 stretch out unto me thy

"hand so that I may be able to pass my days in the Pool of

"Doubl e Fire, and ( q . ) let me advance with my mess age, for I

" h a v e c o m e w i t h w o r d s t o t e l l . 0 open [thou] the doors to me

" a n d I w i l l d e c l a r e t h e t h i n g s w h i c h h a v e b e e n ( 5 ) s e e n b y m e .

"Horns hath be come the divine prince of the Boat of the Sun,

"and unto him hath been g iven the throne of his divine father

" O s i r i s , a n d ( 6 ) S e t , t h a t s o n o f N u t , [ l i e t h ] u n d e r t h e f e t t e r s

" w hich he had made for me . I have made a compu tation of

"what is in the city of Sekhem, ( q) I have stretched ou t both

"my hands and arms at the w ord(?) of Osiris, I have pas sed

"on to jud g ment, and I have come that [I] may (8 ) s peak ;

"grant that I may pass on and declare my tidings . I e n t e r i n ,

"[I am] judg ed, and [I] come forth worthy at (g) the gate of

" N e b - e r - t c h e r . I am pure at the great place of the passag e of

"souls , I have done away with (io) my sins, I have put away

" m i n e o f f e n c e s , a n d I h a v e d e s t r o y e d t h e e v i l w h i c h a p p e r t a i n e d

"unto my members upon earth . H a i l , y e d i v i n e b e i n g s w h o g u a r d

"the doors, make ye for me (I Il away, for, behol d, I am like

"unto you . I have come forth by day, I have j ourneyed on on

" m y l e g s , I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r m y f o o t s t e p s [ b e f o r e ]

" t h e G o d o f L i g h t , (12) I know the hidden ways and the doo rs

" o f t h e S e k h e t - A a r u , v e r i l y I , e v e n I , h a v e c o m e , ( r 3 ) I have

"overthrown mine enemies upon earth, and yet my perishab le

" b o d y i s i n t h e g r a v e ! "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED], HE SHALL

COME FORTH BY DAY, HE SHALL NOT BE TURNED BACK AT 04 ) ANY GATE

IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND HE SHALL MAKE HIS TRANSFORMATION INTO

A SWALLOW REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY

1 0 *




CHAPTER LXXXVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i i ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The serpent S ata with human leg s .

Text : (t) THE CHAPTER OF MAKING THE TRANSFORMATION

INTO THE SERPENT SATA . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -c h i e f ( 2 ) , N u ,

triumphant, saith :- ( 3 )

" I a m t h e s e r p e n t S a t a w h o s e y e a r s a r e m a n y ." I die and I

" a m b o r n a g a i n e a c h d a y . I a m t h e s e r p e n t S a t a w h i c h d w e l l -

"eth in the uttermost parts of the earth . I die, and I am bo rn

" a g ai n, and I renew my s e lf , and I g row youn g ( 5 ) each day . "

CHAPTER LXXXVIII.

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 i 1 , s h e e t n ) . ]

Vigne tte : A crocodile upon a pylon or g ateway .


INTO A CROCODILE . The ch a n c e l l o r-in-chief ( 2 ) , N u , trium-

phant, s aith :-

"I am the divine crocodile w hich dwel l eth in his terro r, I am

"the divine crocodile, and I seize [my pre y] like (4 ) a ravening

"beast . I am the g re at and M i g hty Fi s h w hi ch i s in the ci ty

" o f Q e m - u r . I a m ( 5 ) t h e l o r d t o w h o m b o wi n g a n d p r o s t r a t i o n s

"[are made] in the city of Sekhe m . "

CHAPTER LXXXIX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t t 7 ) . ]

Vigne tte : The mummy of the deceased lying upon a b ier ; a b o v e i s h i s

soul in the form of a human-headed bird, hol ding s h e n , t h e em b l e m of

e t e r n i t y , i n i t s c l a w s .

i . L i t e r a l l y , " d i l a t e d w i t h y e a r s . -



THE CHAPTER OF UNITING THE SOUL TO THE BODY . 1 4 9

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF CAUSING THE SOUL TO BE

UNITED TO ITS BODY IN THE UNDERWORLD . The Osiris Ani,


"Hail, thou god Anniu (i . e . , B r i n g e r ) ! Hail, thou g od Pehrer

" ( 1 . e . , R u n n e r ) , 2 who dwellest in thy hall ! [ H a i l , ] g r e a t G o d !

"Grant thou that my sou l may come unto me from wheresoever

"it may be . I f [ i t ] w o u l d t a r r y , t h e n l e t m y s o u l b e , b r o u g h t

" ( 3 ) unto me from wheresoever it may be, for thou shal t find

"the Eye of Horns standing by thee like unto those b eings who

"are l ike unto Osiris, and who never l ie down in death . Let

"not ( 4) the Osiris Ani, triumphant, l ie down in death among

" t h o s e w h o l i e d o w n i n A n n u , t h e l a n d w h e r e i n s o u l s a r e j o i n e d

"unto their bodies even in thousands . Let me have poss ession

" o f my ba ( s o u l ) , a n d o f m y k l u , , a n d l e t m e t r i u m p h ( 5 ) t h e r e -

" w i t h i n e v e r y p l a c e w h e r e s o e v e r i t m a y b e . [ O b s e r v e t h e s e t h i n g s

" w h i c h [ I ] s p e a k , f o r i t h a t h s t a v e s w i t h i t ] I ; o b s e r v e t h e n , 0 y e

"divine guardians of heaven, my soul [ wheres oever it may b e ] . '

"If it would (6) tarry, do thou mak e my soul to l ook upon my

"body, 2 for thou shal t find the Eye of Horns standing b y thee

" ( 7 ) l i k e t h o s e [ b e i n g s w h o a r e l i k e u n t o O s i r i s ] .

" H a i l , y e g o d s , w h o t o w a l o n g t h e b o a t o f t h e l o r d o f m i l l i o n s

" o f y e a r s , w h o b r i n g [ i t ] ( 8 ) a b o v e t h e u n d e r w o r l d a n d w h o m a k e

" i t t o t r a v e l o v e r N u t , w h o m a k e s o u l s t o e n t e r i n t o [ t h e i r ] s p i r i t u a l

" b o d i e s , ( g ) w h o s e h a n d s a r e f i l l e d w i t h y o u r r o p e s a n d w h o c l u t c h

"your weapons tight, destroy ye ( io) the Enemy ; t h u s s h a l l t h e

" b o a t o f t h e s u n b e g l a d a n d t h e g r e a t G o d s h a l l s e t o u t o n h i s

" j o u r n e y i n p e a c e . A n d b e h o l d , g r a n t y e t h a t t h e s o u l o f O s i r i s

"Ani, (ii) triumphant, may come forth before the g ods and

"that it may be triumphant al ong with you in the eastern par t

"of the sky to foll ow unto the place where it was yesterday ;

"[an d that it may have] peace, pe ace in Amentet . (12) M a y

" i t l o o k u p o n i t s m a t e r i a l b o d y , m a y i t r e s t u p o n i t s s p i r i t u a l

i . Added from the Papyrus of Nebseni .

2 . The Papyrus of Nebseni has : "mak e thou me to s ee my soul and my

shade . "




"body ; a n d m a y i t s b o d y n e i t h e r p e r i s h n o r s u f f e r c o r r u p t i o n

" f o r e v e r . "

Rubric : [THESE] WORDS ARE TO BE SAID OVER A SOUL OF GOLD IN-

LAID WITH PRECIOUS STONES AND PLACED ON THE BREAST OF OSIRIS

CHAPTER XC.

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10 i 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : A j a c k a l w a l k i n g t o w a r d s t h e f u n e r a l m o u n t a i n ( s e e N a v i l l e ,

o p . c i t . , Bd . I . B l . r o a ) ,o r t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t i n t h e p r e s e n c e

o f t h e g o d T h o t h w h o i s a b o u t t o g i v e u n t o h i m a r o l l o f p a p y r u s ( s e e

L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B1 . 3 3 ) .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF DRIVING EVII . RECOLLECTIONS

FROM THE MOUTH . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r -

i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e s o n o f t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e ,

t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , A m e n - h e t e p , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

" H a i l , t h o u t h a t c u t t e s t o f f h e a d s , a n d s l i t t e s t b r o w s , t h o u

"being who p uttest aw ay the memory of evil things from the

"mouth of the Kilos by means of the incantations which they

"have within them, look not upon me with the [same] eyes ( 3)

"with which thou lookes t upon them . Go thou round about on

" t h y l e g s , a n d l e t t h y f a c e b e [ t u r n e d ] b e h i n d t h e e s o t h a t t h o u

"mayest be ab le to s ee the divine slaughterers of the god Shu

"who are coming up ( ¢) behind thee to cut off thy head, and

"to slit thy brow b y reason of the message of violence [sent]

" b y t h y l o r d , a n d t o s e e ( ? ) t h a t w h i c h t h o u s a g e s t . Work thou

"for me so that the memory of evil things shal l dart (5 ) from

" m y m o u t h ; let not my head be cut off ; let not my brow be

" s l i t ; and let not my mou th be s hut fast by reas on of the in-

c a n t a t i o n s w h i c h t h o u h a s t w i t h i n t h e e , a c c o r d i n g t o t h a t w h i c h

"thou doest for the Khus throug h (6) the incantations which

" t h e y h a v e w i t h i n t h e m s e l v e s . Get thee b ack and depart at the

"[sound of] the two speeches which the goddess Isis uttered

"when thou didst come to cast the reco ll ection of evil things



THE CHAPTER OF KEEPING THE SOUL FREE . 1 5 1

" i n t o t h e mouth o f O s i r i s ( 7 ) b y t h e w i l l o f S u t i h i s e n e m y ,

"saying, `Let thy face be towards thy privy parts, and l ook

"upon that face which cometh forth from the flame of the Eye

"of Horus aga inst thee from within the Eye of Tem,' and the

" c a l a m i t y ( 8 ) o f t h a t n i g h t w h i c h s h a l l c o n s u m e t h e e . A n d O s i r i s

"went b ack, for the ab omination of thee was in him ; and thou

" d i d s t g o b a c k , f o r t h e a b o m i n a t i o n o f h i m i s i n t h e e . I have

"gone back, for the abomination of thee is in me ; and thou

" s h a l t g o b a c k , f o r t h e a b o m i n a t i o n o f m e i s i n t h e e . (g ) Thou

"woulds t come unto me, but I say that thou shalt not advance

"to me s o that I come to an end, and [I] say then to the di-

v i n e s l a u g h t e r e r s o f t h e g o d S h u , ` D e p a r t ' . "

CHAPTER XCI .

[From the Papyru s of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e s o u l o f t h e d e c e a s e d , i n t h e f o r m o f a h u m a n - h e a d e d

b i r d , s t a n d i n g i n f r o n t o f a p y l o n ( s e e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t I 7 ) .

Text : (I) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING ( 2 ) THE SOUL OF

N U , TRIUMPHANT, BE CAPTIVE IN THE UNDERWORLD . H e s a i t h :-

"Hail, thou w ho art exal ted ! [Hail,] thou who art adored!

" O t h o u m i g h t y o n e o f S o u l s , t h o u d i v i n e S o u l , t h o u p o s s e s s o r o f

" ( 2 ) t e r r i b l e p o w e r , w h o d o s t p u t t h e f e a r o f t h y s e l f i n t o t h e g o d s ,

"thou who art crown ed upon thy throne of majesty, I pray thee

"to make a way for the b a ( s o u l ) , a n d f o r t h e k h u , a n d f o r t h e

" k h a i b i t ( s h a d e ) o f t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -

" c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ( 3 ) [ a n d l e t h i m b e ] p r o v i d e d t h e r e w i t h .

" I a m a p e r f e c t k h u , and I have made [my] way unto the plac e

"where in dwel l Rd and Hathor . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER HE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] HE SHALL BE

ABLE TO TRANSFORM HIMSELF INTO A KHU PROVIDED [WITH HIS SOUL AND

WITH HIS SHADE] IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND HE SHALL NEVER BE HELD

CAPTIVE AT ANY DOOR IN AMENTET, IN ENTERING IN OR IN COMING OUT . i

I . This Rubric is taken from the P apyru s of Ani, sheet 1 7 .



15 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY D AY

CHAPTER XCII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , ( B r i t. M u s . N o . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e s o u l o f t h e d e c e a s e d , i n t h e f o r m o f a h u m a n - h e a d e d

b i r d , f l y i n g o u t f r o m t h e d o o r w a y o f t h e t o m b . V a r i a n t v i g n e t t e s r e -

p r e s e n t t h e d e c e a s e d a s h a v i n g o p e n e d t h e d o o r o f t h e t o m b a n d h a v i n g

h i s s o u l b y h i s s i d e , o r a s s t a n d i n g b e f o r e t h e o p e n d o o r w i t h h a n d s

s t r e t c h e d o u t t o e m b r a c e h i s s o u l . A n i n t e r e s t i n g v i g n e t t e r e p r e s e n t s t h e

d i s k o f t h e s u n w i t h r a y s s h o o t i n g f o r t h f r o m i t a b o v e t h e t o m b , a n d t h e

s o u l o f t h e d e c e a s e d h o v e r i n g o v e r h i s s h a d e , d r a w n i n s o l i d b l a c k c o l o u r ,

w h i c h h a s j u s t e m e r g e d t h e r e f r o m ( s e e N a v i l i e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . 1 3 1 . 1 0 4 ) .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF OP ENING THE TOM B TO THE

SOUL [AND] "1 'O THE SHADE OF OSIRIS the s cribe Ne bs eni, the

lord of reverence, born of the lady of the house M ut-restha,

triump han t, SO THAT HE M AY COME FORTH BY DAY AND (2 )

HAVE D OMINION OVER HIS F EET . [ H e s a i t h :-]

" T h a t w h i c h w a s s h u t f a s t b a t h b e e n o p e n e d , t h a t i s t o s a y ,

"lie that lay down in death [path been opened]. That which

"was open hath been s hut to my soul through the command of

"the Eye of Horus, ( 3) which hath streng thened me and which

" m a k e t h t o s t a n d f a s t t h e b e a u t i e s w h i c h a r e u p o n t h e f o r e h e a d

" o f R a , w h o s e s t r i d e s a r e l o n g a s [ h e ] l i f t e t h u p [ h i s ] l e g s [ i n

" j o u r n e y i n g ] . I have made for myse lf a way, my member s are

"mighty (4 ) and are s trong . I am Horus the av enge r of his

" d i v i n e f a t h e r. I am he who b ringeth along his divine father,

" a n d w h o b r i n g e t h a l o n g h i s m o t h e r b y m e a n s o f h i s s c e p t r e ( ? ).

"And the way shall be opened unto him who bath (5) g otten

" d o m i n i o n o v e r h i s f e e t , a n d l i e s h a l l s e e t h e G r e a t G o d i n t h e

" B o a t o f R d , [ w h e n ] s o u l s a r e c o u n t e d t h e r e i n a t t h e b o w s , ( 6 )

"and when the years als o are counted up. Grant that the Eye

"of Horus, w hich maketh the adornments of light to be firm

"upon the ( 7) forehead of Rd, may deliver my s oul for me, and

"let there be darkness upon your faces, 0 ye who would hold

" f a s t O s i r i s. 0 keep not captive my soul, 0 keep not ward (8 )

"over my shade, b ut let a way be opened for my soul [and]



THE CHAPTER OF NOT SAILING TO THE FAST .1 5 3

"for m y s h a d e , a n d l e t [ t h e m ] s e e t h e G r e a t G o d in t h e s h r i n e

"( g ) o n th e da y of the j u d g m e n t of s o u l s , an d l e t [t h e m] recite

" t h e u t t e r a n c e s of Osi ri s , w h o s e h a b i t a tio n s a r e hi d d e n , t o t h o s e

"who guard the members of Osiris, and (to) who keep ward

" o v e r t h e K h u s , and who hold captive the shades of the dead

" w h o w o u l d w o r k ( i i) e v i l a g a i n s t m e , s o t h a t t h e y s h a l l [ n o t ]

"work evil against me. May a way for thy double ( k a ) a l o n g

" w i t h t h e e a n d a l o n g w i t h [ t h y ] s o u l b e p r e p a r e d b y t h o s e w h o

"keep ward over the members of Osiris, and who hold captive

" ( i a ) t h e s h a d e s of the de a d . Hea v e n s h a l l [ n o t] ke e p th e e , th e

" e a r t h s h a l l [ n o t ] h o l d t h e e c a p t iv e , t h o u s h a l t n o t h a v e t h y

"being with the divine beings who make slaughter, ( 1 3 ) b u t

"thou shalt have dominion over thy legs, and thou shalt ad-

v a n c e to th y b o d y s t r ai g h t wa y in the ea r t h [a n d to] tho s e wh o

" b e l o n g t o t h e s h r i n e a n d g u a r d t h e m e m b e r s o f Os i r is . "

CHAPTER XCIII .

[ Fr om t h e P ap yr us o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10 ,4 7 7 , s h e e t 6 ) . ]

Vignette : A B u c k l e w i t h h u m a n h a n d s a n d a r m s w h ic h g r a s p t h e d e -

ceased b y his left arm ( . ; c c N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , Bd. L B l . r 0 5 ) . In the Ani

P ap yrus (p late 1 7 ) and in the S aite Recension the vignette s hetivs the

decease d standing, with both hands raised in adoration, before a god who

is seated in a boat and who has his head turned so that his face looks

backwards (s ee Lepsius, o p , c i t . , 1 3 1 . 3 4 ) .

Text : ( t ) Tt l E CtIAPTr :a OF NOT SAILING TO THF EAST IN

TIIF: UNDFRwoRI_D . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

saith :- (2)

"Hail , ph a l l u s of Rd, wh o de p a r t e s t from th y ca l a mity [ which

"a ri s e t h] thr o u g h o p p o s i tion ( % ) , the cycles have been without

"movement for millions of years . I am stronger (3) than the

"strong, I am mightier than the mighty . If I sail a way o r if

"I b e s n a t c h e d a w a y t o t h e c a s t t h r o u g h t h e t w o h o r n s , " o r ( a s

" o t h e r s s a y ) , " i f a n y e v i l a n d a b o m i n a b l e t h i n g b e d o n e u n t o




"me a t the feast o f t h e d e v il s , t h e p h a l l u s o f R d s h a l l b e s w a l -

l o w e d u p , ( 5 ) [ a l o n g w i t h ] t h e h e a d o f Os i r i s . And behold me,

"for I j o u r n e y a l o n g o v e r th e fie l d s w h e r ein th e g o d s mo w do wn

"those who make reply unto [their words] ; n o w ve ri l y ( 6 ) th e

"t wo ho r n s of the g o d Khe p e r a s h a l l b e th r u s t a side ; a n d v e ri l y

"pus shal l sp ring into being in the eye of Tern along with cor-

r u p ti o n if I b e k e p t i n r e s t r ai n t , o r if I h a v e g o n e ( 7 ) t o w a r d s

"the eas t, or if the feast of devils b e made in my presence, or

"if any malignant wound be inflicted upon me . " I

CHAPTER XCIV .

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No. 1 0 i 4 7 7 , s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased seated with a tabl e before h im on which rest

an ink-pot and the pal ette of a scribe : in the Saite Recension (see Lep-

s i u s , op . c i t . , Bl . 34 ) the deceas ed is offering an ink-pot and a palette to

t h e g o d T h o t h .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF ( 2 ) PRAYING FOR AN INK-POT

AND FOR A PALETTE . The cha ncel l or-in-chief, Nu, triumphant,

saith :-

" H a il , a g e d g o d , w h o d o s t b e h o l d t h y d i v in e f a t h e r a n d w h o

"art the guardian of the book (3) of Thoth, [behold I have

"come ; I a m e n d o w e d w i t h g l o r y , I a m e n d o w e d w i t h s t r e n g t h ,

" I a m f il l e d w i t h m ig h t , a n d I a m s u p p l i e d w i t h t h e b o o k s o f

"Thoth], and I have brou ght [them to enab le me] to pas s throug h

"the god Aker who dwelleth in Set . I h a v e b r o u g h t t h e i n k -

" p o t a n d t h e p a l e t t e a s b e i n g t h e o b j e c t s w h i c h a r e i n t h e h a n d s

" ( 4 ) of Thoth ; hidden is that which is in them. Behold me

" i n t h e c h a r a c t e r o f a s c r i b e ! I have broug ht the offal of Osiris,

"a n d I ha v e writt e n th e r e o n ( 5 ) . I h a v e m a d e ( i . e ., copied) the

"wo r d s of the g r e a t an d b e a u tifu l g o d ea c h da y fair l y . 0 lier u-

"khuti, thou didst order me and I have made (i . e ., copied)

"wh a t i s ri g h t an d tr u e , an d I do b rin g it unt o th e e ea c h da y . "

i . The Papyrus o f A n i ( s e e p l a t e s t G a n d 1 7 ) c o n t a i n s w h a t a r e , a p p a r e n t l y ,

t w o v e r s i o n s o f t h i s C h a p t e r ; t h e t e x t s o f both are g iven in the accompanying

v olume .



THE CHAPTER OF BP--IV(;IGH UNTO THOTH .

CHAPTER XCV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 7 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b e f o r e T h o t h w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d

i n a d o r a t i o n o f t h e g o d ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . B l . 1 0 7 ) . In the

p a p y r u s o f U s e r - h a t ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1o,oog), which probably belongs

t o t h e p e r i o d o f t h e X V 1 1 1 t h d y n a s t y , t h e v i g n e t t e i s a g o o s e , b u t t h i s

a r i s e s f r o m t h e f a c t t h a t t h e C h a p t e r i s t h e r e c a l l e d " [ T h e C h a p t e r ] o f

m a k i n g t h e t r a n s f o r m a t i o n i n t o a g o o s e " .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTO THOTH . The

chance ll or-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, saith : - - ( 2 )

"I am he who s endeth forth terror into the po wers of rain

" and thund er, and I w ard off from the g reat divi ne l ady the

"attacks of violence . [I have smitten like the god Shat ( i . e . ,

"the god of slaughter), and I have poured out l ibations of cool

"water l ike the god Ashu, and I have worke d for the great di-

vine lady [ to ward off] the attacks of violence], I have made

"to flourish [my] knife along with the knife (3) which is in the

" hand o f T hoth in the po w er s o f rai n and thund er . "

CHAPTERS XCVI AND XCVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t .Mus

.No . 1 0, 47 7 , s h ee ts i 9 an d 2 0 ) . ]

Vigne tte : The deceas ed standing behind the god Thoth .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTO THOTH AN D

OF GIVING GLORY UNTO A MAN IN THE UNDERWORLD. The

chance llo r-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, s aith :-

"I am the go d Her-ab-maat-f (i . e . , ` h e t h a t i s w i t h i n h i s e y e ' ) ,

" a n d I h a v e c o m e t o g iv e ( 2 ) right and truth to Rd ; I have

"made Sut i to be at peace with me by means of offerings made

"to the god Aker and to the Tesheru deities, and b y [making]

"reverence unto Seb . " I

i . T h e X C V I t h C h a p t e r e n d s h e r e a c c o r d i n g t o t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p -

s i u s , o p . c i t . , B I . 3 4 ) .

1 5 5




[ T h e f o l l o w i n g ] w o r d s a r e t o b e r e c i t e d i n t h e S e k t e t b o a t :-

" [ H a i l , ] ( 3 ) s c e p t r e o f A n u b i s , I h a v e m a d e t h e f o u r Khus w h o

" a r e i n t h e t r a i n o f t h e l o r d o f t h e u n i v e r s e t o b e a t p e a c e w i t h

" m e , a n d I a m t h e l o r d o f t h e f i e l d s t h r o u g h t h e i r d e c r e e . ( 4 )

"I am the divine father Bah ( i . e . , t h e g o d o f t h e w a t e r - f l o o d ) ,

"and I do away with the thirst of him that ke epeth ward ov er

"the Lakes . Behold ye me, then, 0 great (5) gods of majesty

"who dwel l among the Soul s of Annu, for I am lifted up over

"you . I am the god Menkh (i . e ., Gracious one) who dwelleth

" among you . (6 ) Verily I have cleansed my soul , 0 great g od

"of majesty, set not b efore me the evil obs tacles which issue

"from thy mouth, (7) and let not destruction come round about

" m e , o r u p o n m e . I have made mysel f clean in the Lake of

"making to be at peace, [and in the Lake of] weighing in the

"bal ance, and I have bathed mys elf in Netert-utchat, which is

" u n d e r t h e h o l y s y c a m o r e t r e e ( 8 ) o f h e a v e n . B e h o l d [ I a m ] b a t h -

e d , [ a n d I h a v e ] t r i u m p h e d [ o v e r ] a l l [ m i n e e n e m i e s ] s t r a i g h t -

"way who come forth and rise up ag ainst right and truth . I a m

" r i g h t a n d t r u e i n t h e e a r t h . I , e v e n I , h a v e s p o k e n ( ? ) w i t h m y

"mouth [ which is] the pow er of the Lord, the Only on e, Rd

"the mighty, who liveth upon right and truth . L e t n o t i n j u r y

"be inflicted upon me, [b ut let me b e] clothed on the day of

"those who g o forward(?) ( to) to every [g ood] thing . "

CHAPTER XCVIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vignett e : I n t h e T h e b a n p a p y r i t h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o v i g n e t t e ; i n t h e

S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 3 5 ) t h e v i g n e t t e r e p r e s e nt s t h e

d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g w i t h h i s r i g h t h a n d o u t s t r e t c h e d i n t h e a c t o f a d d r e s s -

i n g a g o d w h o i s s e a t e d i n a b o a t .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING ALONG A BOAT IN

HEAVEN . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"Hail to thee, 0 thou Thigh which dwelles t in the northern

" h e a v e n i n t h e G r e a t L a k e , w h i c h a r t s e e n a n d w h i c h d i e s t n o t .



THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING THE -IIAKHENT BOAT 1 5 7

"I have st ood up over thee wh en thou didst rise like a god . I

"have seen thee, (3) and I have not lain down in death ; I h a v e

"stood over thee, and I have risen like a god . I have cackled

" l ik e a g o o s e , a n d I h a v e a l i g h t e d l ik e t h e h a w k ( 4 ) b y t h e

" d i v in e c l o u d s a n d b y t h e g r e a t d e w . I h a v e j o u r n e y e d fr o m

"the earth to heaven . Th e g o d S h u b a t h [ m a d e] m e t o s t a n d

"up, the g od of Light (5 ) hath made me t o be vigorous b y the

"two sides of the ladder, and the s tars which never rest set

" [ m e ] on [my] way and bring [me] away from slau ghter . I bring

"along with me the things which drive back (6) ca lamities as

"I advance over the pass age of the god Pen ; t h o u c o m e s t , h o w

" g r e a t a r t t h o u , 0 g o d P e n ! I h a v e c o m e fr o m t h e P o o l o f

"(7) Flame which is in the S ekhet-Sasa ( i . e . , t h e F i e l d o f F i r e ) .

" T h o u l iv e s t i n t h e P o o l of F l a m e in S e k e t -S a s a , a n d ( 8 ) I

"live upon the s taff of the holy [go d] . H ail , t h o u g o d K a a ,

" w h o d o s t b r in g t h o s e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e in t h e b o a t s b y t h e

"g ) I stand up in the boat an d I guide mysel f

"[over] the water ; I h a v e s t o o d u p in t h e b o a t a n d t h e g o d

" h a t h g u i d e d m e . I ha v e s t oo d u p . I ha v e s p ok e n . [ I am m a s te r

"of the] (to) crops . I sail round a bout as I go forward, and

" t h e g a t e s w h i c h a r e in S e k h e m ( Le t o p o l i s ) a r e o p e n e d u n t o

"me, and fields are awarde d unto me in the city of Unnu (Her-

"m o p o l is ) , (it) and labourers ( ? ) are gi ven unto me to g ether

" w i t h t h o s e of m y o w n fl e s h a n d b o n e . "

CHAPTER XCIX .

[From the P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M us . N o . 10,477, sheets 21 a n d 2 2 ) . ]

Vig ne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d a n d a b o a t m a n i n a b o a t ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . ,

Bd. I . B 1 . i io ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF' BRINGING ALONG A BOAT IN

THE UNDERWORLD (2) The chancell or-in-chief, Nu, triumpha nt,

s a i t h :-



1 58 THE CHAPTERS OF COMIN G F ORTH B Y DA Y .

"Hail , ye w ho b rin g a l on g the b oat over the ev il b ac k [of

"Apepi], gran t that I may bring the boat al ong, an d coil up

"(3) [ i t s ] r o p e s i n p e a c e , i n p e a c e . Come, come, hasten, hasten,

"for I have come to see my father Osiris, the lord of the a n si

" g arment, w ho b ath g ained the ma s tery ( 4 ) wi th j oy of heart .

"Hail, l ord of the rain-stor m, thou M ale, t hou Sa ilor ! Hail,

" thou w ho do s t s ai l over the evi l b ac k of Apep ! Hail, tho u

" that do s t bi nd up head s and do s t s ta b li s h the b one s of the

"neck ( 5 ) when thou com est forth from the knives . Hail, th ou

"who art in charge of the hidden boat, who dost fetter Apep,

" g rant that I may b ri n g a l on g the b oat, and that I may coil

"up (6) the ropes and that I may sail forth therein . This l and

"is baleful, and the stars have over-balanced thems elves and

"have fallen up on their faces the rein, and they have not found

"anything which will help them to ascend ag ain : t h e i r p a t h i s

"blocked b y ( 7 ) the ton gue o f Rd . Antebu [is] the g uide of the

" t w o l a n d s . Seb is stabl ished [through] their rudders . ( 8 ) Th e

" p o w e r w h i c h o p e n e t h t h e D i s k . The prince of the red b eings .

"I am broug ht along like (g) him that bath s uffered shipwreck ;

" gr a nt th at my Kh u , m y b r o t h e r , m a y c o m e t o m e , a n d t h a t

" [ I ] may set out for the place wh ereof thou (io) kno west . "

"Te l l me my name," s aith the w ood w hereat I w ou l d anchor ;

" Lo r d of t h e t w o l a n d s w h o d w e l l e s t i n t h e S h r i n e , " is t h y

name .

"Tell me my name," (i r) saith the Rudder ; "Leg o f Hap iu"

is thy name .

"T e l l me my name," s ai th the (12) Rope ; "Hair with which

" An p u ( A n u b is ) fi nis h e t h t h e w o r k of m y e m b a l m m e n t " i s t h y

name .

"Tell us our name," s ay the Oar-rests ; "Pillars of the under-

" w o r l d " i s y o u r n a m e .

"Tell me (14 ) my name," saith the Hold ; "Akar" is thy na me .

"T e l l me my name," s ai th the M a s t ; ( i 5 ) " H e w h o b r i n g e t h

" b a c k t h e g r e a t l a d y a f t e r s h e b a t h g o n e a w a y is t h y n a m e .

" T e l l m e m y n a m e , " s a it h t h e ( r 6 ) L o w e r d e c k ; " S tandard

"of Ap-uat" is thy name .



THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING ALONG THE MAKHENT BOAT1 5 9

" Te l l m e m y n a m e , " s a i t h t h e U p p e r p o s t ; ( 1 7 ) "Throat of

" M e s t h a " i s t h y n a m e .

"Tell me my name," saith the Sail ; ( i 8 ) " Nut" i s thy name .

"Tell us our name," say the Pieces of leather ; "Ye who are

"made from the hide (ig) of the Mnevis Bull, which was bu rned

" b y S uti," i s your name .

"Tell us our name," (20) say the Paddles ; "Fingers of Horus

"the first-born" is your n ame .

" T e l l m e ( 2 t ) m y n a m e , " s a i t h t h e M a t c h a b e t ; " T h e h a n d

" of Isi s , w hi ch wi peth aw ay the b l ood f rom the (22) E y e o f

"Horus," is thy name .

"T e l l u s our name s , " s a y the P l an k s w hi ch are in i ts (22 )

"hulk ; " M e s t h i , Ha p i , T u a m a u t e f , Q e b h - s e n n u f , ( 2 3 ) Hagau

" ( i . e . , he who leadeth away capt ive), Thet-em-aua ( i . e . , h e w h o

"seizeth by violence), Maa-an-tef ( i . e . , h e w h o s e e t h w h a t t h e

"father bring eth) , and Ari-nef-tchesef (i . e . , h e w h o m a d e h i m -

"sel f)," are your names .

" Te l l u s o u r n a m e , " s a y t h e B o w s ; "H e w ho is at the head

"of his nom es" (24) is y o u r n a m e .

" Te l l m e m y n a m e , " s a it h t h e H u l l ; " M e r t " i s t h y n a m e .

"Te l l m e m y n a m e , " s ait h t h e Ru d d e r ; " A qa " ( i . e . , true

" o n e ) i s t h y n a m e , 0 t h o u w h o s h i n e s t f r o m t h e w a t e r , ( 2 5 )

" h id d e n b e a m ( ? ) is thy name .

"Tell me my name," sa ith the Keel;

"Thigh (or Leg) of Isis,

"which Rd cut off with the knife (26) to bring blood into the

"Sektet boat," is thy name .

"Tell me my name," saith the Sailor ; "Traveller" i s t h y n a m e .

"(27) Te l l m e m y n a m e , " s a i t h t h e Wi n d b y w h i c h t h o u a r t

" b orne a l on g ; "The North Wind which cometh from Tem to

"the no str ils of Khenti-Amenti" z ( 28) is thy name .

"Tell me my name," saith the River, "if thou wouldst trav el

"upon me" ; " T h o s e w h i c h c a n b e s e e n " i s t h y n a m e .

"Tell us our name," say the River-Banks ; "Des troyer of the

" g o d (29) Au-a ( i . e . , he of the spacious hand) in the water-

" h o u s e " i s t h y n a m e .

i . I . e . , t h e " G o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i " , o r O s i r i s .



I6 o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

"Tell me my name," saith the Ground, "if thou woulds t walk

" u p o n m e " ; "The Nose of heaven w hich proceedeth from the

" g o d U t u , ( 3 o ) w h o d w e l l e t h i n t h e S e k h e t - A a r u , a n d w h o c o m e t h

" f o r t h w i t h r e j o i c i n g t h e r e f r o m , " i s t h y n a m e .

THEN SHALL BE RECITED BEFORE THEM THESE WORDS :-

" H a i l t o y o u . , 0 y e d i v i n e b e i n g s w i t h s p l e n d i d Kas, y e d i v i n e

" l o r d s ( 3 I ) o f t h i n g s , w h o e x i s t a n d w h o l i v e f o r e v e r , a n d [ w h o s e ]

" d o u b l e p e r i o d o f a n i l l i m i t a b l e n u m b e r o f y e a r s i s e t e r n i t y , I

"have made a way unto you, gr ant ye me food and sepul chral

"meals for my mouth, [and g rant that] I may speak (32) there-

" W i t h , a n d t h a t t h e g o d d e s s I s i s [ m a y g i v e m e ] l o a v e s a n d c a k e s

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t g o d . I k n o w t h e g r e a t g o d b e f o r e

"whose nostrils ye place (33) t c h e f a u food, and his na me is

" T h e k e m ; both w hen he maketh his way from the eastern ho-

rizon of heaven and when he j ourneyeth into the western ho-

rizon of heaven may his journey be ( 34) my j ourney, and his

"going forth my going forth . Let me not be destroyed at the

" N l e s g e t chambe r, and let not the devils gain dominion over

" m y m e m b e r s . I have my cakes ( 35) in the city of Pe, and I

" h a v e m y a l e i n t h e c i t y o f T e p u , a n d l e t t h e o f f e r i n g s [ w h i c h

" a r e g i v e n u n t o y o u ] b e g i v e n u n t o m e t h i s d a y . L e t m y o f f e r i n g s

"he wheat and barley ; l e t m y o f f e r i n g s ( 3 6 ) b e anti unguent

"and linen garments ; l e t m y o f f e r i n g s b e f o r l i f e , s t r e n g t h , a n d

" h e a l t h : let my o fferings b e a coming forth by day in any

"form whatsoever (37) in which it may please me to app ear

"in Sek het-Aarru . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] HE SHALL

COME FORTH INTO SEKHET-AARRU, (38) AND BREAD, AND WINE, AND CAKES

SHALL BE GIVEN UNTO HIM AT THE ALTAR OF THE GREAT GOD, AND

FIELDS, AND AN ESTATE [SOWN] WITH WHEAT AND PARLEY, WHICH THE

FOLLOWERS OF HORUS SHALL (39) REAP FOR HIM . AND HE SHALL EAT OF

THAT WHEAT AND BARLEY, AND HIS LIMBS SHALL BE NOURISHED THERE-

WITH, AND HIS BODY SHALL BE LIKE UNTO THE BODIES OF THE GODS, AND

HE SHALL COME FORTH INTO ( 4 0 ) SEKHET-AARRU IN ANY FORM WHAT-

SOEVER HE PLEASETH, AND HE SHALL APPEAR THEREIN REGULARLY

AND CONTINUALLY .



THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING THE BOAT OF RA 1 61

CHAPTERS C AND CXXIX .

[From the Papyrus of No (B rit . M us . N o . 1 0 , 4 77, sheets 27 a n d 2 8 ) . ]

Vignette : A boat, wherein stand th e deities Isis, Thoth, Khepera, and

Shu, and the decease d sailing on a stream . The vignette in the Safte

Recension ( see Lepsius, o p . c i t . , Bl . 37) shews the deceased poling along

a boat wh erein are Rd and the B ennu bird, and in front of the boat s tand

the embl em of the East, the god Osiris, and the T e t , i . e . , t h e e m b l e m

o f O s i r i s a n d o f s t a b i l i t y . The four sho rt lines of text written over the

boat read :- The overseer of the palace, the cha ncel lor-in-chief, Nu,

triumphant, raiseth up the T e e , and stablisheth the Buckle, and he saileth

with Rd into any place that he pl easeth .

Text : ( I) THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU AND

OF CAUSING HIM TO GO FORTH INTO THE BOAT OF RA ALONGWITH THOSE WHO ARE IN HIS FOLLOWING(?). ( 2 ) Th e o v e r s e e r

o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -c h i e f, N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"I h a v e b r o u g h t t h e d i v in e B e n n u t o t h e e a s t , a n d O s i r is t o

"t h e city of Tatt u . (3) I have opened the treasure houses of

"the god Hap, I have made clean the roads of the Disk, and

" I h a v e d r aw n t h e g o d S e k e r i al o n g ( 4 ) u p o n h i s s l e d g e . The

"mighty and divine Lady hath made me strong at her hour . I

"have praised and glorified the Disk, (5) and I have united

"myself unto the divine apes who sing at the dawn, and I am

"a divine Being among them . I have made myself a counter-

" p a r t o f t h e g o d d e s s I s is , ( 6 ) and her power ( K h u ) hath made

" m e s t r o n g . I ha v e tied u p th e ro p e , I ha v e dri ve n b a c k Ape p ,

"I have made him to walk backwards . ( 7 ) R d h a t h s t r e t c h e d

" o u t t o m e b o t h h is h a n d s , a n d h i s m a r in e r s h a v e n o t r e p u l s e d

"me ; m y s t r e n g t h i s t h e s t r e n g t h of t h e U t c h a t , a n d t h e s t r e n g t h

"of the Utchat is m y s t r e n g t h . ( 8 ) I f t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e h o u s e ,

" t h e c h a n c e l l o r - in - c h i e f, N u , t r i u m p h a n t , b e s e p a r a t e d [ f r o m t h e

" b o a t o f Ra ] , t h e n s h a l l h e ( i . e . , Ra ) b e s e p a r a t e d ( 9 ) f r o m t h e

"Egg and from the Abtu f i s h .

Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER THE DESIGN WHICH

HATH BEEN DRAWN ABOVE, AND IT SHALL BE WRITTEN UPON PAPYRUS

II




(io) WHICH HATH NOT BEEN WRITTEN UPON, WITH [INK MADE OF] GRAINS

OF GREEN ABUT MIXED WITH ANTI WATER, AND THE PAPYRUS SHALL BE

PLACED ON THE BREAST (ii) OF THE DECEASED ; IT SHALL NOT ENTER IN

TO (I. E . , TOUCH) HIS MEMBERS . IF THIS BE DONE FOR ANY DECEASED

PERSON HE SHALL GO FORTH ( 1 2 ) INTO THE BOAT OF RA IN THE COURSE

OF THE DAY EVERY DAY, AND THE GOD THOTH SHALL TAKE ACCOUNT OF

HIM AS HE COMETH FORTH FROM (i3) AND GOETH IN THE COURSE OF THE

DAY EVERY DAY, REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY, [INTO THE BOAT OF RA]

AS A PERFECT KHU. AND HE SHALL SET UP THE TETAND SHALL STABLISH

THE BUCKLE, AND SHALL SAIL ABOUT WITH RA INTO ANY PLACE HE

WISHETH.

In t h e S a ' i t e Recension Chapter C i s r e p e a t e d as CXXIX,

and b o t h texts h a v e t h e same vignette . The rubric o f Chapter

CXXIX i s , h o w e v e r , f u l l e r t h a n that o f Ch a p t e r C , a n d i t m a y

c o n v e n i e n t l y b e d i v id e d i n t o t w o p a r t s , t h e fir s t of w hi c h r ef e r s

t o t h e p i c t u r e w h i c h i s o r d e r e d t o b e w r i t t e n u p o n a p i e c e o f

n e w p a p y r u s , a n d t h e s e c o n d t o t h e C h a p t e r i t s e l f ; the origi-

nal s of both are to be found in the variant texts of the rubric

o f t h e Ch a p t e r p u b l i s h e d b y N a v i l l e (op . c i t . Bd. I I . P . 2 3 6 ) .

CHAPTER CI .

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . Mus . N o . 10 , 4 77, s h e e t 2 7 ) . ]

Vignette : I n t h e p a p y r u s of Nu this Chapter has no vignette . In the

Saite Recension the deceased is seen pol ing along a boat where in are the

g o d R a a n d t h e B ennu bird (see Lepsius, o p . c i t . , Bl . 3 7 ) .

Text : [THE CHAPTER OF PROTECTING THE BOAT OF RA . ] r

"(1) 0 th o u th a t c l e a v e s t th e wa t e r ( 2 ) a s t h o u c o m e s t fo r t h

" f r o m t h e s t r e a m a n d d o s t s i t u p o n t h y p l a c e i n t h y b o a t , s i t

"thou upon thy place in thy boat as thou goest forth to thy

" s t a t i o n o f y e s t e r d a y , a n d d o t h o u j o i n t h e O s ir i s , t h e (3) ov er-

s e e r of t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r-i n-c hi ef, N u , t ri u m p h a n t , t h e

"perfect K h u , u n t o t h y m a r i n e r s , a n d l e t t h y s t r e n g t h b e h i s

" s t r e n g t h . Hail, Rd, in thy name of Rd, ( q . ) i f t h o u d o l t p a s s

1 . This t i t l e i s taken from the Saite Recension .



THE CHAPTER OF PROTECTING THE BOAT OF RA . 1 63

" b y t h e e y e o f s e v e n c u b i t s , w h i c h h a t h a p u p i l o f t h r e e c u b i t s ,

"then verily do thou strengthen the Osiris, Nu, triumphant,

" t h e p e r f e c t Khu, [and let him be among] thy mariners, and

" l e t t h y ( 5 ) s t r e n g t h b e h i s s t r e n g t h . H a i l , R d , i n t h y n a m e o f

"Rd, if thou dost pass by those who are overturned in death

" t h e n v e r i l y d o t h o u m a k e t h e O s ir i s , ( 6 ) N u , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e

" p e r f e ct s o u l , t o s t a n d u p u p o n h i s f e e t, a n d m a y t h y s t r e n g t h

" b e h i s s t r e n g t h . H a il , R d , i n t h y n a m e o f Rd , ( 7 ) i f t h e h i d d e n

" t h i n g s o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d a r e o p e n e d u n t o t h e e a n d t h o u d o s t

"gr atify ( ? ) t h e h e a r t o f t h e c y c l e o f t h y g o d s , t h e n v e r i l y d o

" t h o u g r a n t j o y of h e a r t u n t o t h e c h a n c e l l o r-in- c hief , N u , t riu m-

" p h a n t , a n d l e t t h y s t r e n g t h b e h i s ( 8 ) s t r e n g t h . Thy members,

"O Rd, ar e e s t a b l i s h e d b y ( t hi s ) Cha p t e r ( ? ) . "

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER A BANDLET OF THE

FINE LINEN OF KINGS [UPON WHICH] IT HATH BEEN WRITTEN WITH ANTI,

WHICH SHALL BE LAID UPON THE NEEK OF THE PERFECT K H U ( 9 ) ON THE

DAY OF THE BURIAL. IF THIS AMULET BE LAID UPON HIS NEEK HE SHALL

DO EVERYTHING WHICH HE DESIRETH TO DO EVEN LIKE THE GODS ; AND

HE SHALL JOIN HIMSELF UNTO THE FOLLOWERS (io) OF HORUS ; AND HE

SHALL BE STABLISHED AS A STAR FACE TO FACE WITH SEPTET (SOTHIS) ;

AND HIS CORRUPTIBLE BODY SHALL BE AS A GOD ALONG WITH HIS KINS-

FOLK FOR EVER ; AND THE GODDESS (ii) MENQET SHALL MAKE PLANTS TO

GERMINATE UPON HIS BODY ; AND THE MAJESTY OF THE GOD THOTH LOV-

INGLY SHALL MAKE THE LIGHT TO REST UPON HIS CORRUPTIBLE BODY

AT WILL, EVEN AS HE DID FOR THE MAJESTY OF THE KING OF THE NORTH

AND OF THE SOUTH, THE GOD OSIRIS, TRIUMPHANT .

CHAPTER CII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mu s . N o . 1 0,4 77 , s hee t 28 ) . ]

Vignette : The boat of Rd with the god seated therein and holding a

p a d d l e ; before him kneels the goddess Isis (?) and behind him the de-

ceased . S o m e t i m e s R d is a c c o m p a n i e d b y t h e g o d s T h o t h a n d K h e p e r a

and sometimes by Anubis al one (see Naville, o p . c i t . , Bd. 1 . 1 3 1 . 14) .I n

the Saite Recension the decease d is k neeling before Rd at a tab l e of

offerings (s ee Lepsius, o p . c i t . , Bl . 3 8 ) .

i t *




Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO THE BOAT ( 2 ) OF

RA . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hail, thou G reat God who art in thy boat, bring thou me

" i n t o t h y b o a t . [ I h a v e c o m e f o r w a r d t o t h y s t e p s ) , l e t m e b e t h e

" d i r e c t o r ( 3 ) o f t h y j o u r n e y i n g s a n d l e t m e b e a m o n g t h o s e w h o

"belong to thee and who are among the stars w hich never rest .

"The things which are an abomination unto thee and the things

"which are an abomination unto me I will not eat, that wh ich

"is an abomination unto me, (4 ) that which is an abomination

"unto me is filth and I will not eat thereof ; b u t s e p u l c h r a l

" o f f e r i n g s a n d h o l y f o o d [ w i l l I e a t ] , a n d I s h a l l n o t b e o v e r -

"thrown thereby . I w i l l n o t d r a w n i g h u n t o f i l t h w i t h m y h a n d s ,

"and I will not walk ( 5) thereon with my sandals, because my

"bre ad [is made] of white barle y, and my ale [is made] of red

" b a r l e y ; and behold, the S e k t e t boat and the A t e t boat have

" b r o u g h t t h e s e t h i n g s ( 6 ) a n d h a v e l a i d t h e g i f t s ( ? ) o f t h e l a n d s

"upon the al tar of the Souls of Annu . Hymns of praise b e to

" t h e e , 0 U r - a r i t - s , a s t h o u t r a v e l l e s t t h r o u g h h e a v e n ! L e t t h e r e

"be food [for thee], 0 dweller in the c i t y o f T e n i ( T h i s ) , ( 7 )

"and when the dogs gather together l et me not suffer harm . I

" m y s e l f h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e d e l i v e r e d t h e g o d f r o m t h e t h i n g s

"which have b een inflicted upon him, and from the grievous

"sickness of the body (8) of the arm, and of the leg . I have

"come and I have spit upon the body, I have bound up the

" a r m , a n d I h av e m a d e t h e l e g t o w a l k . ( g ) [ I h a v e ] e n t e r e d

"[the b oat] and [I] sail round a bout b y the command of Rd . "

CHAPTER CIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e g o d d e s s H a t h o r , h a v i n g a d i s k a n d h o r n s u p o n h e r h e a d ,

a n d a s c e p t r e i n h e r l e f t h a n d ; b e h i n d h e r s t a n d s t h e d e c e a s e d .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF BEING WITH THE GODDESS

HATHOR . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING OFFERINGS TO THE KA . 1 6 5

"I am the pure travel ler . Behold, ( 2 ) As-Ahi, beh ol d, As-Ahi,

" l e t m e b e a m o n g t h o s e w h o f o l l o w t h e g o d d e s s Ha t h o r . "

CHAPTER CIV .

[From the Papyrus of Neb seni (Brit . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : Two "great gods" s eated on thrones facing each other : on

the ground between them sits the deceased . In the Saite Recension the

deceased is seated on a low pedestal before three gods (see Lepsius,

op . c i t . , Bl . 3 8 . )

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF' SITTING AMONG THE GREAT

GODS . B e h o l d N e b s e n i , ( 3 ) w h o s a it h :-

" I s it a m o n g t h e g r e a t g o d s , a n d I h a v e m a d e a w a y f o r m y -

s e lf ( 4 ) t h r o u g h th e ho u s e of the S e k t e t b o a t ; a n d b e h o l d , t h e

" m a n t i s r h a t h b r o u g h t m e t o s e e t h e g r e a t g o d s ( 5 ) w h o d w e l l

"i n th e un d e r wo r l d , an d I s h a l l b e trium p h a n t b efor e th e m , for

" I a m p u r e . "

CHAPTER CV .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No. 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t

7 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased standing before a ka on a pedestal (J_) ;

w i t h h i s r i g h t h a n d h e p o u r s o u t a l i b a t i o n , a n d w i t h h i s l e f t h e m a k e s a n

o f f e r i n g o f i n c e n s e .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF' MAKING OFFERINGS TO THE KA

IN THE UNDERWORLD . The over s eer of the pa l ace, the chan-

cell or-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, saith :- ( 2 )

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 my ka, w h o a r t m y p e r i o d of l i fe ! 2

" G rant thou that I may come b ef ore thee, and l et me ri s e up

" [ l i k e t h e S u n ] , a n d l e t m e b e s t r o n g , a n d l e t m e h a v e m y

" s o u l , ( 3 ) a n d l e t m e g a i n t h e m a s t e r y [ o v e r mi n e e n e m ie s ] .

i . B e b a i t o r A b a i t ; see Chapter LXXVI . 1 . 2 .

2 . Or, "contempora ry . "




"For I have b rought t o thee an offering of incense, and I have

" m a d e m y s e l f p u r e t h e r e w it h , a n d I w il l p u r i fy t h a t w h i c h

"issueth from thee therewith . ( 4 ) The evil th ings which I have

"spok en, and the hateful transg ress ions which I have committed

"lay tho u not upon m e, for I am the mothe r-of-emeral d amule t,

"which (5) belongeth unto the neck of Rd, and which hath been

"placed [ there] by those who dwel l in the doubl e horizon (i . e . ,

"the eastern and western parts of the sky) . Their vigour is my

"vigour, their vigour is my vigour ; my k a i s like unto their

" k a s , and the tchefau food of my k a i s like unto the tchefau

"food of their kas . ( 6 ) 0 thou w ho lifte s t up the S c a l e s and

"who exaltes t right and truth to the nostrils of Rd this day,

"let not my hea d fall a way from me . (7 ) For, behold, am I not

"the eye which look eth upon th ee? And am I not the ear which

"hearkeneth unto [thee]? For, behold, am I not the bul l of those

"who have fallen down in death? And have not s epulchral meals

" [ b e e n m a d e ] fo r m e ? ( 8 ) An d a r e n o t t h o s e w h o l i v e i n t h e

"heights," or according to another reading, "thos e who are chiefs

"of Nut, for me? [Grant thou that] I may go forward by thee,

"for I, even I, am pure, an d [I have] made Osiris to tr iumph

"over his enemies . "

CHAPTER C V I .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vigne tte : A t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d i s

m a k i n g o f f e r i n g s t o t h e g o d P t a h ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . cit . , Bi 3 8 ) .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF GIVING SEPULCHRAL MEALS

UNTO THE OSIRIS N u , TRIUMPHANT, IN HET-PTAH-KA( i

. e. ,

MEMPHIS) IN THE UNDERWORLD . The chancel lor-in ch ief, Nu,

triumphant, saith :- ( 2 )

" Hail , G r e a t G o d , t h o u l o r d of tchefau food! Hai l , Gr eat

" G od, tho u pri nce of the ce l e s ti a l ha bi tation s w hi ch s u p p l y

" b r ead f or the g od Ptah ! [H ail , M ig hty One w ho d w e l l e s t i n



THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF THE It E ST . 1 6 7

"the Great House!] Grant ye unto me bread, g rant ye (3) unto

"me ale, and let me cl eanse mysel f by means of the haunch

" a n d b y t h e o f f e r i n g s o f c a k e s . H a i l , t h o u d i v i n e b o a t o f S e k h e t -

"Aarru, let these cakes be brought to me (4 ) by thy stream,

"even as thy divine father, the mighty one, pass ed thereon in

" t h e d i v i n e b a r k . "

CHAPTER CVII .

There is no equivalent for this Chapter in the papyri con-

taining t he Theban Recens ion . In the Saite Recension ( see

L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 3 9 ) t h i s C h a p t e r i s c a l l e d t h e "CHAPTER

OF GOING INTO AND OF' COMING OUT FROM THE GATE OF THE

GODS OF THE WEST, OF BEING AMONG THE FOLLOWERS OF

RA, AND OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF THE WEST," and the

v i g n e t t e r e p r e s e n t s t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d

i n a d o r a t i o n , b e f o r e R a , S e b e k , H a t h o r , a n d a s e r p e n t , w h o r e s t

on the sl ope of a mountain . T h e t e x t i s a c t u a l l y t h e f i r s t l i n e

and a ha lf of Chapter CIX, which is entitled the "CHAPTER

OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF THE EAST" .

CHAPTER CVIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 8 ) . ]

Vignette : The deities Tmu, Sebek and Hathor s eated .

Text : ( r) THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING ( 2 ) THE SOUL S OF

THE WEST . T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Now the Moun tain of Bakh au (i . e . , the moun tain of the

" s u n r i s e ) , w h e r e u p o n t h i s h e a v e n s u p p o r t s i t s e l f , ( 3 ) i s s i t u a t e d

" i n t h e e a s t e r n p a r t o f h e a v e n , a n d i t b a t h d i m e n s i o n s o f t h r e e

"hundred k h e t ( i . e . , 3 o , o o o c u b i t s r in leng th, and one hundred

s . The Papyrus of Nebs eni reads : - "It is a cub it of seve n and a hal f

s p a n s ( i . e . , t h e w i d t h o f 3 o f i n g e r s ) o f t h e b a l a n c e o f t h e e a r t h i n i t s l e n g t h ,

a n d 3 o o c u b i t s i n w i d t h , 200 . "



1 68 THE CHAPTERS OF CO-41 ING F ORTH BY DAY .

" a n d f i f t y k h e t ( i . e . , 15000 cubits) in breadth ; Sebek, the lord of

" B a k h a u , ( 4 ) [dwell eth] to the east of the Mountain, and his temple

"is on the earth there . There is a s erpent on the b row of that

"Mountain, and he measureth thirty cubits in length ; t h e f i r s t

"eight cubits of his le ngth are [ covered] with ( 5 ) flints a nd with

"shining metal plate s . The Osiris Nu, triumphant, k noweth t he

"name of this serpent wh ich [dwell eth] on his hill, `Dw ell er in his

" f i r e ' ( 6 ) is his nam e . Now after Ra hath stood still he inclineth

"his eyes towar ds him and a stopp age of the boat [of Ra] taketh

"place, and a mighty (7 ) s leep cometh upon him that is in the

" b oat, and he g u l p eth dow n s e ven cu b it s of the g reat w ater s .

"Thereby he maketh S uti to depart having the harpo on of iron

"(8) in him, and thereb y he is caused to throw up everything

"which he bath eaten, and thereb y is Set p ut into his place of

" r e s t r a i n t . A n d t h e n [ I] r e c it e b e f o r e hi m t h e e n c h a n t m e n t ,

"saying, (9) G et thee back to the sky , for that which is in my

"hand is ready. I stand up in thy pl ace of restraint, the b oat

" a d v a n c e t h t a k i n g h e e d t o t h e w a y ; ( 1o) thy head is covered

"up while I sail on and turn back [thy s teps] . I a m t h e M a n

" w h o c o v e r e t h t h y h e a d a n d w h o p o u r e t h c o l d w a t e r u p o n t h y

"palm, I have strength and 0 i ) I am strong , I am the d ivine

" one w ho i s mi g hty i n enchantment s , name l y, the s on of Nut,

" a n d m y s p l e n d o u r b a t h , t h e r e fo r e , b e e n d e l i v e r e d u n t o m e .

"Who, then, is this venerab le Khu ( 1 2 ) w ho advanceth w a l ki n g

"upon his bel ly and upon his tail and upon the joints of his

" b ac k ? Veri l y it i s I my s e l f w ho do w a l k ov er thee, and thy

"strength is in my power . I am he who (13) l i f t e t h u p s t r e n g t h ,

" a n d I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e b e c o m e m a s t e r of t h e s e r p e n t s

"of Rd when he s etteth in my sight at eventide . (14) I go round

"about hea ven, bu t thou art fettered with fetters, which thing

"was ordained for thee former ly wh en Rd set in life in his ho-

rizon . I, even I, know (15) how to g ui de the matter s w here b y

"the serpent Apep is driven back, and I know the divine Soul s

"of the West, that is to say, Tem, and Sebek, the l ord of Bakhau,

" ( 1 6 ) and Hathor, the lady o f the even ing . "



THE CHAPTER OFKNOWING THE SOULS OF THE EAST. 1 6 9

CHAPTER CIX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M us . No . 1 0 , 4 1 1 , s h e e t 1 2 ) . ]

Vign ette : The god Heru-khuti (Harmachis) seat ed ; before him is a

s p o t t e d c a l f , b e h i n d w h i c h s t a n d s t h e d e c e a s e d w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d

i n a d o r a t i o n o f t h e g o d ; a b o v e i s t h e M o r n i n g S t a r . Elsewhere the de-

ceased is seen s tanding, with both hands raised in adoration, before

t h r e e s e a t e d i b i s - h e a d e d d e i t i e s ( s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . I . B l . I 2 0 ) . I n

t h e S a l t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l . 3 9 ) t h e v i g n e t t e i s q u i t e

d i f f e r e n t . The god Rd-Harmachis, haw k-headed and wearing a disk

w h i c h i s e n c i r c l e d b y a s e r p e n t , i s s e a t e d i n a b o a t ; a b o v e t h e d i s k i s

t h e e m b l e m o f a i r , a n d h e h o l d s o n h i s k n e e s t h e e m b l e m o f l i f e . B e f o r e

h i m i n t h e b o a t i s a c a l f a b o v e w h i c h i s a s t a r , a n d b e h i n d h i m s t a n d s

t h e d e c e a s e d . T h e b o a t i s a b o u t t o s a i l b e t w e e n t w o s y c a m o r e t r e e s i n

f r o n t o f w h i c h s t a n d s t h e d e c e a s e d , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n .

Te x t : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOUL S OF THE

EAST . (2) The chancel l or-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, s aith :-

"I, even I, know th e eastern gate of heaven-now its s outhern

"part is at the Lake of Kharu (3) and its norther n part is at

" the cana l of the g ee s e- w hereout R d cometh wi th wind s w hi ch

" m a k e h i m t o a d v a n c e . I am he who is concerned w ith the

" t a c k l e ( ? ) (4) [which is] in the divine bark, I am the sailor who

"cease th not in the boat of Rd . I, even I, know the two syca-

mores ( 5) of turquoise between which Rd sheweth himself when

"he strideth forward over the supports of Shu I t o wa r d s th e g a t e

" ( 6 ) of the l o rd of the E a s t throu g h w hi ch Rd cometh f orth .

"I, even I, know the Se ktet-Aarru of (7 ) Ra, the wall s of which

"are of iron . The height of the wheat therein is five cub its, of

"the ears th ereof two cubits, and of the stal ks the reof three

" c u b i t s . ( 8) The barley therein is [in height] seven cub its, the

"ears thereof are three cubits, and the stalks thereof are four

" c u b i t s . A n d b e h o l d , t h e K h u s , e a c h o n e of w h o m t h e r e i n is

"nine cubits in height, ( 9 ) reap it near the divine Soul s of the

"East . I, even I, know the divine Soul s of the East, that is to

1 . 1 . e . , t h e f o u r p i l l a r s a t t h e S o u t h , N o r t h , W e s t , a n d E a s t o f h e a v e n u p o n

w h i c h t h e h e a v e n s w e r e b e l i e v e d t o r e s t .




"say, Heru-khuti (Harmachis), and the Calf of the goddes s Khera,

"and (so) the Morning Star r [daily . A divine city hath been built

"for me, I know it, and I know the name thereof ; 'Sekhet -Aarru'

"is its name] . 2

CHAPTER CX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t t 7 ) . ]

Vigne tte : The Sek het-hetepet or "Fields of peace", commonly called

t h e " E l y s i a n F i e l d s " , s u r r o u n d e d a n d i n t e r s e c t e d b y s t r e a m s . T h e d i v i -

s i o n s c o n t a i n t h e f o l l o w i n g :- ( a ) N e b s e n i , t h e s c r i b e a n d a r t i s t o f t h e

T e m p l e o f P t a h , w i t h h i s a r m s h a n g i n g b y h i s s i d e s , e n t e r i n g t h e E l y s i a n

F i e l d s . ( b ) T h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i m a k i n g a n o f f e r i n g o f i n c e n s e t o t h e " g r e a t

company of the gods" . ( c ) N e b s e n i s e a t e d i n a b o a t p a d d l i n g ; a b o v e t h e

b o a t a r e t h r e e s y m b o l s f o r " c i t y " . ( d ) T h e d e c e a s e d a d d r e s s i n g a b e a r d e d ,

mummied figure . ( e ) T h r e e P o o l s o r L a k e s c a l l e d U r t i , 3 H e t e p , 4 a n d Q e t g e t

r e s p e c t i v e l y . ( f ) N e b s e n i r e a p i n g i n S e k h e t - h e t e p e t . ( g ) N e b s e n i g r a s p i n g

t h e B e n n u bird which is perched upon a s tand ; i n f r o n t a r e t h r e e k as

a n d t h r e e k h u s . ( h ) N e b s e n i s e a t e d a n d s m e l l i n g a f l o w e r , t h e t e x t r e a d s

" T h o u s a n d s o f a l l g o o d a n d p u r e t h i n g s t o t h e k a o f N e b s e n i . " ( i ) A t a b l e

o f o f f e r i n g s . ( j ) F o u r P o o l s o r L a k e s c a l l e d N e b t - t a u i , U a k h a , K h a ( ? ) , and

Hetep . ( k ) N e b s e n i p l o u g h i n g w i t h o x e n b y t h e s i d e o f a s t r e a m w h i c h i s

one thousand [meas ures] in length, and the width of which cannot be

s a i d ; i n i t t h e r e a r e n e i t h e r f i s h n o r w o r m s . ( 1 ) N e b s e n i p l o u g h i n g w i t h

o x e n o n a n i s l a n d " t h e l e n g t h o f w h i c h i s t h e l e n g t h o f h e a v e n " . ( m ) A

d i v i s i o n s h a p e d l i k e a b o w l i n w h i c h i s i n s c r i b e d : " T h e b i r t h - p l a c e o f t h e .

g o d o f t h e c i t y , Q e n q e n [ e t n e b t ] " . ( n ) A n i s l a n d w h e r e o n a r e f o u r g o d s

a n d a f l i g h t o f s t e p s ; t h e l e g e n d r e a d s : " T h e g r e a t c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s

w h o a r e i n S e k h e t - h e t e p . " ( o ) T h e b o a t T c h e t e t f e t w i t h e i g h t o a r s , f o u r

a t t h e b o w s a n d f o u r a t t h e s t e r n , f l o a t i n g a t t h e e n d o f a c a n a l ; i n i t i s

a f l i g h t o f s t e p s . T h e p l a c e w h e r e i t l i e s i s c a l l e d t h e " D o m a i n o f N e t h " .

( p ) T w o P o o l s , t h e n a m e s o f w h i c h a r e i l l e g i b l e .

T h e v i g n e t t e i n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( s h e e t 3 5 ) h a s s o m e i n t e r e s t i n g

v a r i a n t s , a n d m a y b e t h u s d e s c r i b e d :-

t . I n t h e S a l t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s a b o u t t w i c e a s l o n g a s i t i s i n t h e

T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n .

2 . T h e w o r d s i n b r a c k e t s a r e f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i .

3 . V a r . H e m a t .

4 . V a r . H a s t .



THE CHAPTER OF THE ELY.S IAN F IELDS . 1 7 1

( t ) A n i m a k i n g a n o f f e r i n g b e f o r e a h a r e - h e a d e d g o d , a s n a k e - h e a d e d

g o d , a n d a b u l l - h e a d e d g o d ; b e h i n d h i m s t a n d s T h o t h , h o l d i n g h i s r e e d

a n d p a l e t t e . A n i p a d d l i n g a b o a t , A n i a d d r e s s i n g a h a w k , b e f o r e w h i c h

a r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s , t h r e e o v a l s , a n d t h e l e g e n d " B e i n g a t p e a c e i n t h e

F i e l d [ o f P e a c e ] , a n d h a v i n g a i r f o r t h e n o s t r i l s " .

( 2 ) A n i r e a p i n g c o r n , A n i d r i v i n g t h e o x e n w h i c h t r e a d o u t t h e c o r n ;

A n i a d d r e s s i n g ( o r a d o r i n g ) a B e n n o b i r d p e r c h e d o n a s t a n d ; A n i s e a t e d

h o l d i n g t h e k h e r p s c e p t r e ; a h e a p o f r e d a n d a h e a p o f w h i t e c o r n ; t h r e e

k a s a n d t h r e e k h u s , w h i c h a r e p e r h a ps t o b e r e a d , " t h e f o o d o f t h e khus" ;

a n d t h r e e P o o l s .

( 3 ) A n i p l o u g h i n g a f i e l d n e a r a s t r e a m w h i c h c o n t a i n s n e i t h e r f i s h n o r

s e r p e n t s .

( 4 ) T h e b i r t h p l a c e o f t h e g o d o f t h e c i t y ; an island on which is a

f l i g h t o f s t e p s ; a r e g i o n c a l l e d t h e p l a c e o f t h e khus who are seven

c u b i t s h i g h , t h e w h e a t i s t h r e e c u b i t s h i g h a n d i t i s t h e sdhu who have

become perfect who reap it ; the region Ashet, the god who dwelleth

t h e r e i n b e i n g U n n e f e r ; a boat w ith eight oars , lying at the end of a

c a n a l ; and a boat floating on a canal . T h e n a m e o f t h e f i r s t b o a t i s

"Behutu-tcheser", and the name of the second, "Tchefau" .

I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i a r e t w o s c e n e s , o n e o n e a c h s i d e o f " S e k h e t -

h e t e p e t " , o r t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s . I n t h e f i r s t ( A ) N e b s e n i s t a n d s , w i t h b o t h

hands raised in adoration, and adores the company of the gods wh o

d w e l l i n S e k h e t - h e t e p , s a y i n g : "Homage to you, 0 ye l ords of food, I

" h a v e c o m e i n p e a c e t o y o u r F i e l d t o r e c e i v e t c h e f a u food . G r a n t y e t h a t

" I m a y c o m e t o t h e G r e a t G o d d a i l y , a n d g r a n t t h a t I m a y a t t a i n t o t h e

" o f f e r i n g s , t h a t i s t o s a y , t o t h e c a k e s , a n d a l e , a n d o x e n , a n d d u c k s , a n d

" b r e a d , w h i c h a r e o f f e r e d u n t o h i s k a" . T h e t h r e e s h o r t l i n e s o f h i e r o -

g l y p h i c s ( B ) i n f r o n t o f N e b s e n i r e a d :- " N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f r e v e r e n c e ,

"the scribe and artist in the temples of the South and of the North,

" a s c r i b e t h p r a i s e t o t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s a n d a d o r e t h t h e g r e a t g o d. "

I n t h e s e c o n d s c e n e N e b s e n i i s s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t a n d a y o u t h i s p o u r i n g

a l i b a t i o n o v e r h i m ; a t t h e s a m e t i m e a n o t h e r y o u t h i s b r i n g i n g t o h i m

a n o f f e r i n g o f r a i m e n t . T h e t e x t a b o v e h i m ( C ) r e a d s :- "May the g od

" O s i r i s a n d a l l t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o d w e l l i n S e k h e t - h e t e p g r a n t

" o f f e r i n g s o f c a k e s , a n d a l e , a n d o x e n , a n d d u c k s , a n d b r e a d , a n d a l l

" g o o d t h i n g s , a n d l i n e n g a r m e n t s , a n d i n c e n s e e a c h d a y , a n d a n o f f e r i n g

" o n t h e a l t a r e a c h d a y , a n d t h e r e c e i v i n g o f c a k e s o f v a r i o u s k i n d s , a n d

" m i l k , a n d w i n e , a n d t c h e f a u f o o d , a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g o f t h e g o d a t h i s

" c o m i n g f o r t h d u r i n g h i s f e s t i v a l s o f R e - s t a u a l o n g w i t h t h e f a v o u r e d

" o n e s o f t h e g r e a t g o d , t o t h e k a o f t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i ," e t c .

Text : ( i ) HERE BE GIN THE CHAPTERS OF SEKHET-HETEPET,

AND THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY ; OF GOING



1 7 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DAY .

INTO AND OF COMING OUT FROM THE UNDERWORLD ; OF COMING

TO SEKHET-AARU ; OF BEING IN SEKHET-(2)HETEPET, THE

MIGHTY LAND, THE LADY OF WINDS ; OF HAVING POWER THERE ;

OF BECOMING A KHU THERE ; OF PLOUGHING THERE ; OF REAP-

ING THERE ; OF EATING THERE ; OF DRINKING THERE ; OF

MAKING LOVE (3) THERE ; AND OF DOING EVERYTHING EVEN

AS A MAN DOETH UPON EARTH . B e h o l d t h e s c r i b e a n d a r t i s t o f

the Temple of Ptah, Nebs eni, who (4) s aith :-

"Set hath taken pos ses sion of Horus, who looked with the

"two eyes upon the building(?) round Sekhet-hetep, but I have

"unfettered Horus [ and taken him from] Set, and S et bath

"opened the wa ys of the two eyes [ which are] in heaven . ( 5 )

" S e t h a t h c a s t ( ? ) h i s m o i s t u r e t o t h e w i n d s u p o n t h e s o u l [ t h a t

" h a t h ] h i s d a y ( o r his eye) and who dwel leth in the city of

" M e r t , a n d h e h a t h d e l i v e r e d t h e i n t e r i o r o f t h e b o d y o f H o r u s

"from the gods of Alert . Behold me ( 6) now, for I make this

"mighty boat to trav el over the Lake of Hetep, and I brought

"it away with might from the pal ace of Shu ; the domain of

" h i s s t a r s g r o w e t h y o u n g a n d r e n e w e t h i t s f o r m e r s t r e n g t h . I h a v e

"brought the boat ( 7) i n t o t h e l a k e s t h e r e o f s o t h a t I m a y c o m e

" f o r t h i n t o t h e c i t i e s t h e r e o f , a n d I h a v e s a i l e d i n t o t h e i r d i v i n e

" c i t y H e t e p . A n d b e h o l d , i t i s b e c a u s e I , e v e n I , a m a t p e a c e

" w i t h h i s s e a s o n s , a n d w i t h h i s g u i d a n c e , a n d w i t h h i s t e r r i t o r y ,

"and with the company of the gods who (8 ) are his firstb orn .

"He maketh the two divine fighters ( i . e., Horus and Set) to

"be at peace w ith those who w atch over the living ones whom

" h e h a t h c r e a t e d i n f a i r f o r m , a n d h e b r i n g e t h p e a c e [ w i t h h i m ] ;

"he maketh the tw o divine fighters to be at peace with those

" w h o w a t c h o v e r ( g ) t h e m . He cuttet h off the hair from the

" d i v i n e f i g h t e r s , h e d r i v e t h a w a y s t o r m f r o m t h e h e l p l e s s , a n d

"he keepeth away harm from the Khus . ( i o ) Let me gain do-

"minion within that Field, for I know it, and I have s ailed

" a m o n g i t s l a k e s s o t h a t I m i g h t c o m e i n t o i t s c i t i e s . My mouth

" i s s t r o n g ; and I am equipped [w ith weapons to us e] against

" t h e Khus ; let them not hav e dominion over me . 0 i ) Let me

" b e r e w a r d e d w i t h t h y f i e l d s , 0 t h o u g o d I ; I e t e p ; t h a t w h i c h i s



THE CHAPTER OF THE EL YSIAN FIELD S . 1 7 3

"thy wish, shal t thou do, 0 lord of the winds . M a y I b e c o m e

" a k hu therein, may I eat the rein, may I drink therein, ( r 2 )

"may I plou gh th erein, may I reap the rein, may I fight therein,

" m a y I m a k e l o v e t h e r e i n , m a y m y w o r d s b e m ig h t y t h e r e in ,

"may I never be in a state of servitude therein, ( r 3 ) b u t m a y

"I be in authority ther ein . T h o u h a s t m a d e s t r o n g ( ? ) t h e m o u t h

"and the throat ( ? ) of the g od H etep ; Qetetb u is its (?) name .

"He is stab lished upon the watery supports ( ?) of the god Shu,

"and is linked unto the p leas ant things of Rd . ( i4) He is the

"divider of years, he is hidden of mouth, his mouth is s ilent,

"that which he uttereth is secret, he fulfilleth eternity and taketh

"poss ession of everlas tingness of existence as Hetep, the lord

"H etep . T he g od H orn s (i 5 ) ma k eth hi m s e lf to b e s tron g li ke

" u n t o t h e H a w k w h i c h is o n e t h o u s a n d c u b i t s in l e n g t h a n d

"two th ousa nd [cu bits in width] in life ; h e h a t h e q uip m e n t s

"with him, and he jou rneyeth on and cometh w here the seat of

"his (i6) heart wisheth in the Pool s ther eof and in the cities

"thereof. He was beg otten in the birth-chamb er of the god of

" the ci ty, he hath offeri n g s [ma de unto hi m] of the f ood of

"the g od of the city, he performeth that which it is meet to

"do ther ein, and the union thereof, in the mat ter of everything

"of the birth-chamb er ( 1 7) of the divine city . When [he] setteth

"in life like crys tal he performeth everything therein, and thes e

" thi n g s are l ike unto the thi n g s w hi ch are done i n the L ake

"of double Fire, wherein there is none that rej oiceth, and wherein

"are all m anner of (i8) ev il things . T h e g o d H e t e p g o e t h i n ,

" a n d c o m e t h o u t , a n d g o e t h b a c k w a r d s [ i n] t h a t Fi e l d w h i c h

"gathereth t ogether al l manner of things for the birth-chamber

" o f t h e g o d of t h e ci t y . When h e sett eth in life like (ig)

"crysta l he performeth all manner of things th erein which are

" l i k e u n t o t h e t h i n g s w h ic h a r e d o n e in t h e L a k e of d o u b l e

"Fire, wherein there is none tha t rejoiceth, and whe rein are no

"evil things whatsoever . ( 2 0 ) [Let me] live with the god Hetep,

"clothed and not despoiled by the lord s of the north (?), a n d

"may the l ords o f divine things br ing food unto me ; may he

" m a k e m e t o g o fo r w a r d a n d m a y I c o m e fo r t h , a n d m a y h e




" b r i n g my power to me ( 2 1 ) t h e r e , a n d m a y I r e c e i v e i t , a n d

"may my equipment be from the god Hetep . M ay I gain the

"mas tery over the gr eat and mighty word which is in my body

" i n t h i s m y p l a c e , a n d b y i t I w i l l ( 2 2 ) remember and I will

" f o r g e t . Let me go forward on my journey, and let me plough .

"I am at peac e in the divine city, I and I know the water s,

" c i t i e s , ( 2 3 ) n o m e s , a n d l a k e s w h i c h a r e i n S e k h e t - h e t e p . I e x i s t

"therein, I am strong therein, I become a khu t h e r e i n , I e a t

" t h e r e i n , I s o w ( 2 4 ) s e e d t h e r e i n , I r e a p t h e h a r v e s t t h e r e i n ,

" I p l o u g h t h e r e i n , I m a k e l o v e t h e r e i n , I a m a t p e a c e w i t h t h e

"god Hetep therein . Beho ld ( 2 5 ) I s c a t t e r s e e d t h e r e i n , I s a i l

" a b o u t a m o n g i t s L a k e s a n d I c o m e f o r w a r d t o t h e c i t i e s t h e r e o f ,

"0 divine Hetep . Behol d, my mouth is equipped with my horns

" [ f o r t e e t h ] , g r a n t m e a n o v e r f l o w i n g s u p p l y o f t h e f o o d w h e r e -

"on the kas and k h u s (26) [ l i v e ] . I have pass ed the judgment

"of Shu upon him that knoweth him, so that I may go forth

" t o t h e c i t i e s t h e r e o f , a n d m a y s a i l a b o u t a m o n g i t s l a k e s a n d

"may walk ab out in Sekhet-hetep ; ( 2 7 ) and behol d, Rd is in

"heaven, and b ehold, the g od Hetep is its doubl e offering . I

"have come onward to its land, I have put on my girdle(?),

" I h a v e c o m e f o r t h s o t h a t t h e g i f t s w h i c h a r e a b o u t t o b e g i v e n

"unto me may be ( 2 8 ) given, I have made gladness for myself .

"I have laid hold upon my s trength which the god Hetep bath

" g r e a t l y i n c r e a s e d f o r m e . 0 Unen-em-hetep, 2 I have entered

"in to thee and my sou l (29) followeth after me, and my di-

vine food is upon bo th my hands , 0 Lady of the two l ands, 3

"who stab lishest my word whereby I remember and forget ; ( 3 o )

"I would live without injury, without any injury [being done]

"unto me, 0 grant to me, 0 do thou gran t to me, joy of heart .

"Ma k e thou me to be at peace, bind thou up my sinews and

"muscles, and make me to receive the (31) a i r . 0 Un[en ]-em-

"hetep, thou Lady of the winds, I have ent ered in to thee and

i . Or, "I am at peace with the god of the city . "

2 . I. e . , "Existence in Peace", the name of the first large section of the

E l y s i a n F i e l d s .

3 . The name of a Pool in the second s ection of the Elysian Fields .



THE CHAPTER OF THE ELYSIAN FIELDS 1 7 5

"I have opened (i . e . , shewn ) my head . R d f a l l e t h a s l e e p , b u t

" I a m a w a k e , a n d t h e r e i s t h e g o d d e s s I - l a s t a t t h e g a t e o f h e a v e n

" ( 3 2 ) by night . Obstacles have been set b efore me, but I have

"gathered tog ether what he hath emitted . I am in my city . 0

"Nut-urt,t I have entered into thee and I have counted my

"harvest, ( 33) and I go forward to Uakh . 2 I am the Bull en-

vel oped in turquoise, the l ord of the Field of the Bull , the

" l o r d o f t h e d i v i n e s p e e c h o f t h e g o d d e s s S e p t e t ( S o t h i s ) ( 3 4 )

"at her hours . 0 Uakh, I have entered into thee, I have

"eaten my brea d, I have gott en the mastery ove r choice pieces

"of the fles h of oxen and of feathered fowl, and th e birds

"of Shu have been g iven unto (35) me ; I foll ow after the

"god s and [I come after] the divine kas . 0 Tchefet, 3 I h a v e

" e n t e r e d i n t o t h e e . I a r r a y m y s e l f i n a p p a r e l ( 3 6 ) , a n d I g i r d

"mysel f with the s a garmen t of Rd ; now beh old, [he is] in

"heaven, and those who dwell therein follow Rd, and [I]

"foll ow Rd in heaven . 0 Unen-em-(37 )l hetep, lord of the two

" l a n d s , I h a v e e n t e r e d i n t o t h e e , a n d I h a v e p l u n g e d i n t o t h e

" l a k e s o f T c h e s e r t ; b e h o l d m e , f o r a l l f i l t h b a t h d e p a r t e d f r o m

" m e . The Great God (38 ) g roweth therein, and behol d, I have

" f o u n d [ f o o d t h e r e i n ] ; I h a v e s n a r e d f e a t h e r e d f o w l a n d I f e e d

" u p o n t h e f i n e s t [ o f t h e m ] . 0 Qenqentet, 4( 3 9 ) I h a v e e n t e r e d

" i n t o t h e e , a n d I h a v e s e e n t h e O s i r i s [ m y f a t h e r ] , a n d I h a v e

"ga zed upon my mother, and I have made love. I h a v e c a u g h t

"the worms and s erpents, and I am delivered . ( 40) And I know

"the name of the god who is opposite to the goddess Tchesert,

"and who hath straight hair and is equipped with two horns ;

"he reapeth, and I both plough (4 1) and reap . 0 Hast, I have

"entered in to thee, I have driven back thos e who woul d come

"to the turquoise [s ky], and I have follo wed the winds of the

"company of the god s . T h e G r e a t G o d b a t h g iv e n m y h e a d

" ( 4 2 ) unto me, and he who bath b ound on me my head is the

t . T h e n a m e o f a P o o l i n t h e f i r s t s e c t i o n o f t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s .

2 . The name of a Pool in the second sec tion of the Elysian Fields .

3 . T h e n a m e o f a d i s t r i c t i n t h e t h i r d s e c t i o n o f t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s .

4 . T h e n a m e o f a P o o l i n t h e f i r s t s e c t i o n o f t h e E l y s i a n F i e l d s .



1 7 6 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DAY .

" Mi g h t y o n e w h o b a t h t u r q u o i s e ( ? ) e y e s , n a m e l y , A r i - e n - a b - f

"(i,. , h e d o e t h a s h e p l e a s e t h ) . 0 User t,I I have com e into

"thee at the head of the house w herein (43) divine food is

"broug ht for me . 0 S mam,r I have come into thee . My heart

"watcheth , my head is equipped with the white crown, I am led

" i n t o c e l e s t i a l r e g i o n s , a n d I m a k e t o f l o u r i s h ( 4 4 )t e r r e s t r i a l

" o b j e c t s , a n d t h e r e i s j o y o f h e a r t f o r t h e B u l l , a n d f o r c e l e s t i a l

"beings , and for the company of the gods . I am the god who

" i s t h e B u l l , t h e l o r d o f t h e g o d s , a s h e g o e t h f o r t h f r o m t h e

" t u r q u o i s e [ s k y ] . 0 divine nome of wheat and barl ey, (4 5) I

"have come into thee, I have come forward to thee and I have

"taken up that which followeth me, namel y, the bes t of the

" l i b a t i o n s o f t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s . I have tied up my boat

" i n t h e c e l e s t i a l l a k e s , ( 4 6 ) I h a v e l i f t e d u p t h e p o s t a t w h i c h t o

" a n c h o r , I h a v e r e c i t e d t h e p r e s c r i b e d w o r d s w i t h m y v o i c e , a n d

"I have ascribed praises unto the gods who dwell in Sekhet-

" h e t e p. "

i . The name of a Pool in the third section of the Elys ian Fields .

CHAPTER CXI .

In the Theban Recension this Chapter has not as yet been

found . In the S aite Recension it is cal led " The Chapter of

knowing the Sou ls o f Pe", bu t an examination of the text

s h e w s t h a t i t i s identical with that of Chapt er CVIII ; i t h a s

n o v i g n e t t e .

CHAPTER CXII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 i , s h e e t t 8 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h e g o d s H o r n s ( h a w k - h e a d e d ) , M e s t h a , a n d H a p i , s e a t e d.

Text : ( i ) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF

PE . The overseer of the pal ace, the chan cell or-in-chief, Nu,




THE CHAPTER OF KNOWGING THE SOULS OF PE. 1 7 7

"[Hail,] Khat, who dw ell est in Khat, in Anpet,r and in the

"nome of Khat ! [ H a i l , ] y e g o d d e s s e s o f t h e c h a s e ( 2 ) who dwe ll

" i n t h e c i t y o f P e , y e c e l e s t i a l l a n d s ( ? ) , y e s t a r s , a n d y e d i v i n e

"beings, who give cakes and ale ( ? ) , do ye know (3 ) for what

"reason the city of Pe hath been g iven unto Horus ? I , e v e n I ,

"k now thou gh ye know it not . Behold, Rd gave the city unto

" h i m i n r e t u r n f o r ( q ) the injury in his eye, for which cause

" R d s a i d t o H o r u s , ` L e t m e s e e w h a t i s c o m i n g t o p a s s i n t h i n e

"eye,' and forthwith he l ooked thereat . Then Rd said (5) to

" H o r n s , ` L o o k a t t h a t b l a c k p i g ' , a n d h e l o o k e d , a n d s t r a i g h t w a y

" a n i n j u r y w a s d o n e u n t o h i s e y e , [ n a m e l y , ] ( 6 ) a m i g h t y s t o r m

" [ t o o k p l a c e ] . Then said Horus unto Rd, `Verily, my eye seems

"as if it were an eye up on which Suti had inflicted a b low' ;

" [ a n d t h u s s a y i n g ] h e a t e ( 7 ) h i s h e a r t . 2 Then said Rd to thos e

"gods , `Place ye him in his chambe r, and he shall do wel l . '

"Now the b lack p ig was S uti who had transformed himsel f into

" a ( 8 ) b l a c k p i g , a n d h e i t w a s w h o h a d a i m e d t h e b l o w o f f i r e

"which was in the eye of Horns . T h e n s a i d R d u n t o t h o s e g o d s ,

"`The pig is an abominable thing unto Horns ; (g) 0 but he

" s h a l l . d o well altho ugh the pig is an abomination unto him . '

"Then the company of the god s, w ho were amon g the divine

"followers of Horus w hen he existed in the form of his ow n

" c h i l d , s a i d , ` L e t s a c r i f i c e s b e m a d e [ t o t h e g o d s ] o f h i s b u l l s ,

" a n d o f h i s g o a t s , a n d o f h i s p i g s . ' N o w t h e f a t h e r o f M e s t h i ,

"Hapi, Tuamautef (ii) and Qeb hsennuf is Horns, an d their mo-

t h e r i s I s i s . T h e n s a i d H o r u s t o R d , ` G i v e m e t w o d i v i n e b r e t h -

ren in the city of Pe and tw o divine b rethren in the city of

"Nekhen, (12) who [have sprun g ] from my body and who s ha ll

" b e w i t h m e i n t h e g u i s e o f e v e r l a s t i n g j u d g e s , t h e n s h a l l t h e

"earth bloss om and thunder-clouds and rain be b lotted out . '

"And the name of Horus became 'Her-uatch-f' (i . e . , P r i n c e o f

"his emerald stone) . I , e v e n I , (13) know the Souls of Pe,

"namely, Horus, M esthi, and Hapi . "

1 . A name of the city of Mendes, the metropolis of the sixteenth nome of

Lower E gyp t .

2 . I. e . , h e l o s t h i s t e m p e r a n d r a g e d .

1 2




CHAPTER CXIII .

[From the P a p y r u s of Nu (B rit . M u s . N o . 10 , 4 77, sh e e t 1 8 ) . ]

Vig n ette : The gods Horus, Tuamdutef and Qebhsennuf .

Te x t : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF

NEKHEN . The ove rseer of the pala ce, the chancell or-in-chief,

Nu, triumphant, saith :- (2)

"I know the hidden things of the city of Nekh en, that is to

" s ay, the thi n g s w hi ch the mother of H oru s di d for hi m, and

"how she [m ade her voice to go forth] over the waters, say ing,

" ` S p e a k y e u n t o m e c o n c e r n in g t h e j u d g m e n t w h i c h is u p o n

"me, [and s hew me] the path behind you, and let me discover [ i t ] ' ;

"and how Rd said, `This son of Isis hath perished' ; a n d w h a t

"the mothe r of Horus did for him [when] she cried out, saying,

" ( 3 ) 'S e b e k , the l ord of the papyru s s w am p, s ha l l b e b rou g ht

"to us .' [A nd S e b e k] fis hed for them and he f ound them, and

" t h e m o t h e r of Ho r u s m a d e t h e m t o g r o w in t h e p l a c e s t o

" w h ic h t h e y b e l o n g e d . T h e n S e b e k , t h e l o r d o f h is p a p y r u s

" s w a m p , s a i d , Ì w e n t a n d I f o u n d t h e p l a c e w h e r e t h e y h a d

"pas s ed with my fingers on the ed ge of the waters, and I en-

" c l o s ed them i n [my] net : and s tron g w a s that net .' And Rd

"said, `So then, there are fish with the god Seb ek, and [ he]

" h a t h f o u n d t h e h a n d s a n d a r m s of ( 5 ) H o r u s f o r him i n t h e

"l and of fish' ; and [that] land became the land of the city of

" R e m u ( i . e . , F i s h ) . And Ra said, À land of the pool , a la nd

" o f t h e p o o l t o t h i s n e t .' Then were the hands of Horus b rought

"to him (6) at the uncovering of his face at the festivals of the

"month a nd hal f month in the Land of Remu . And Ra said, Ì

"give the c ity of Nekhe n to Horus for the h abitation of his two

"arms and hands, and his face shal l be uncovered ( 7 ) b e f o r e h i s

" t w o h a n d s a n d a r m s i n t h e ci t y of N e k h e n ; and I give into

"his power the slau ghtered b eings wh o are in them at the fest-

i va l s of the month and ha l f month .' T hen H oru s s ai d, `Let

"me carry off (8) Tuamautef and Qebhs ennuf, and let them wat ch

` o v e r m y b o d y ; and if they are allow ed to be there, then shal l



THE CHAPTER OF KNO WING THE SOULS OF KIIE. i 1 E N VNU 1 7 9

" t h e y b e s u b s e r v i e n t t o t h e g o d o f t h e c i t y o f N e k h e n . ' ( 9 ) A n d

" R d s a i d , ` I t s h a l l b e g r a n t e d u n t o t h e e t h e r e a n d i n t h e c i t y

" o f S e n k e t ( i . e . , S a t i ) , a n d t h e r e s h a l l b e d o n e f o r t h e m w h a t

"hath be en done for those who dwel l in the city of Nekhen,

" a n d v e r i l y t h e y s h a l l b e w i t h t h e e . ' ( i o ) A n d H o r u s s a i d , ` T h e y

"have been with thee and [now] they sha ll b e with me, and

"sha ll hearken unto the god Suti when he calleth upon the

"Souls of Nekhen .' Grant to me [that I, even I, may pass on

"to the Sou l s of Nekhen, and that I may unloo se the bond s

"of Horns] . 1, even I, know the Souls of Nekhen, namely,

" ( i i ) Horus, Tuamautef and Qebhs ennuf . "

CHAPTER CXIV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 7 ) . ]

Vignett e : T h r e e i b i s - h e a d e d g o d s . I n t he S a it e R e c en s i o n t h e d ec e a s e d

i s s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n , b e f o r e t h e g o d s T h o t h ,

S a , a n d T e m ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B I . 4 3 ) .

Text : (r ) THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF KHE-

ME NNU ( Hermopo lis) .

" ( 2 ) The goddess Maat is carried by the arm at the s hining

" o f t h e g o d d e s s N e i t h i n t h e c i t y o f M e n t c h a t , a n d a t t h e s h i n -

i n g ( 3 ) o f t h e E y e w h e n i t i s w e i g h e d . I a m c a r r i e d o v e r b y i t

"and I know what it bringeth from the city of Kesi,r (4 ) and

" I w i l l n e i t h e r d e c l a r e i t u n t o m e n n o r t e l l i t u n t o t h e g o d s .

" I h a v e c o m e , b e i n g t h e e n v o y o f R d , t o s t a b l i s h ( 5 ) M a a t u p o n

"the arm at the s hining of Neith in the city of Mentchat and

" t o a d j u d g e t h e e y e t o h i m t h a t s h a l l s c r u t i n i z e i t . I h a v e c o m e

" a s ( 6 ) a p o w e r t h r o u g h t h e k n o w l e d g e o f t h e S o u l s o f K h e m e n n u

"(Hermopolis) who love to know what ye love . I k n o w M a a t ,

" ( 7 ) which bath germinated, and bath become strong , and hath

"been jud g ed, and I have joy in passing jud gment upon the

"things which are to be judg ed . Homage to you, 0 ye Souls

i . I , e . , C u s a e , t h e m e t r o p o l i s o f t h e f o u r t e e n t h n o m e o f U p p e r E g y p t .

5 2 *



i 8 o THE CHAPTERS OF COATING FORTH BY DAY .

"of Khemennu, I, even I, know (8 ) the things which are un-

known on the festivals of the month and half month . Rd

" k n o w e t h t h e h i d d e n t h i n g s o f t h e n i g h t , a n d k n o w y e t h a t i t i s

"Thoth who hath made me to have knowledge . ( 9 ) Homage to

"you, 0 ye Soul s of Khemennu, since I know you eac h day . "

CHAPTER CXV.

[From the P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 1 8 ) . ]

Vignett e : I n t h e P a p y r u s o f Nu t h i s C h a p t e r ha s n o v i g n e t te . I n t h e

S a I t e R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d i s s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o -

r a t i o n , b e f o r e t h e g o d s R a , S h u , a n d T e f n u t ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B 1 . 4 4 ) -

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF COMING F ORTH FROM HEAVEN,

AN D OF MAKING A WAY THROUGH THE AMM EHET, AND OF KNOW-

ING THE SOUL S OF A N N U (HELIOPOLIS) . T h e C h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f

N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

"I have passed the day since yesterday among the great di-

vine beings, and I have come into being al ong with the god

"Khepera . [ M y ] f a c e i s u n c o v e r e d b e f o r e t h e E y e , t h e o n l y O n e ,

" a n d t h e o r b i t o f t h e n i g h t h a t h b e e n o p e n e d . ( 3 ) I a m a d i v i n e

"being among you . I know the S ou ls of Annu . S h a l l n o t t h e

"god Ur- ma pass over it as [he] journeyeth (4 ) forward with

"vigour ? Have I not overcome( ?), and have I not spok en to

"the gods ? Behold, he that is the heir of Annu hath been de-

" s t r o v e d . I, even I, know for what reas on was ma de the lock

"of hair of the (5) M an . Rd sp ake unto the g od Ami-haf, and

"an injury was done unto his mouth, that is to say, he was

"wounded in [that] mouth . And Rd spak e (6) u nto the go d

" A m i - h a f , s a v i n g , ` O h e i r o f m e n , r e c e i v e [ t h y ] h a r p o o n ' ; and

"the harpoon-house came into being . Behol d, 0 god Ami-haf,

"two divine brethren have come into being, [ that is to say],

" ( 7 ) Senti-Ra came into b eing, and S etem-ansi-f came into be-

i n g . And his hand sta yed not, and h e made his form into that

"of a woman with a lock o f hair (8 ) wh ich became the divine



THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF KHEMENNU 18I

"lock in Annu, and which became the strong and mighty one

" i n t h i s t e m p l e ; and it became the stron g one of Annu, and

" i t b e c a m e t h e h e i r o f ( g ) t h e h e i r o f U r - m a a t - f ( i . e . , t h e m i g h t y

"one of the two eyes), and it became b efore him the god Ur-

" m a o f An n u . I know the Sou l s of Annu, (to ) name ly, Rd,

"S hu, and Tefnut . "

CHAPTER CXVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10,417, sheet I 8 ) . ]

Vign ette : T h e d e c e a s e d a d o r i n g t h r e e i b i s - h e a d e d g o d s . I n t h e S a i t e

R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d i s s t a n d i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n ,

b e f o r e t h e g o d s T h o t h , S a , a n d T e m ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , Bl . 4 4 ) .

Text : ( r ) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE SOULS OF

KHEMENNU (HERMOPOLIS) .T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m -

p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2)

"The goddess Neith shineth in Matchat, and the g oddess M aat

"is carried by the arm of him who eateth the Eye, and who

" i s i t s d i v i n e j u d g e , a n d t h e S e m p r i e s t c a r r i e t h m e o v e r u p o n

" i t . I w i l l n o t d e c l a r e i t u n t o m e n , a n d I w i l l n o t t e l l i t u n t o

"the gods ; I w i l l n o t d e c l a r e i t u n t o m e n , a n d I w i l l n o t t e l l

"it unto the gods . I have entered in being an ignorant man,

"and I have seen the hidden things . ( 4 ) Homage to you, 0

" y e g o d s w h o d w e l l i n K h e m e n n u , y e k n o w m e e v e n a s I

"know the g oddess Neith, and [ye give] to the Eye the growth

"which endureth . (5) There is j oy [to me] at the judgmen t of

"the things which are to be j udged . I , e v e n I , k n o w t h e S o u l s

"of Annu ; t h e y a r e g r e a t a t t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e m o n t h , a n d a r e

" l i t t l e a t t h e f e s t i v a l o f t h e h a l f m o n t h . They are Thoth (6)

"the Hidden one, and Sa, and Tem . "

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] OFFAL

SHALL BE AN ABOMINATION UNTO HIM, AND HE SHALL NOT DRINK FILTHY

WATER.



182 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DA I'

CHAPTER CXVII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased, hol ding a staff in his left hand, ab out to wal k

up one s ide of a hill of the horizon . In the Saite Recension the god

Anubis is lea ding the decease d to a shrine which is se t on a hill (s ee

Lepsius, op . c i t . , B l . 4 4 ) .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF RECEIVING PATHS [WHEREON

TO WALK] IN RE-STAU. T h e c h a n c e l l o r - in - c h ie f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

saith :- ( 2 )

"The paths which are above me [lead] to Re-stau . I am he

" w h o i s g i r t a b o u t w i t h h is g i r d l e a n d w h o c o m e t h f o r t h fr o m

"t h e [ g o d d e s s of] t h e Ureret crown. I have come, and I have

" s t a b l i s h e d t h i n g s i n Ab t u ( A b y d o s ) , ( 3 ) a n d I h a v e o p e n e d o u t

"pa ths in Re-stau . The god Osiris hath eased my pains . I am

" h e w h o m a k e t h t h e w a t e r s t o c o m e in t o b e i n g , a n d w h o s e t t e t h

"his throne [thereon], and who maketh his path through the

"funeral valley and through the Great Lake . (4) I have made

" m y p a t h , a n d i n d e e d I a m [ O s ir i s ] .

"[Osiris was victorious ov er his enemies, and th e Osiris Neb-

"q e t i s vict o riou s o v e r h i s en e mie s . He hath become as one

" o f y o u r s e l v e s , [ 0 y e g o d s ] , h is p r o t e c t o r i s t h e L o r d o f e t e r n -

" i t y , he walketh even as ye walk, he standeth even as ye

" s t a n d , h e s i t t e t h e v e n a s y e s i t , a n d h e t a l k e t h e v e n a s y e t a l k

"in the presence of the Great God, the Lord of Amentet . ] " I

CHAPTER CXVIII .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . M u s . No. 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceas ed hol ding a staff in his left hand . In the Saite

Recension this Chapter has no vignette .

1 . T h e w o r d s i n brackets are from the Papyrus o f N e b - q e t ( s h e e t 3 ) .



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROM RE-STAG . 1 8 3

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROM RE-STAU .

The chancel lor-in-chief, Nu, tr iumphant, s aith :-

"I was born in ( 2 ) Re-stau, and splendour hath been given

"unto me by those who dwell in their spiritual bodies (sahu)

" i n t h e h a b i t a t i o n w h e r e l i b a t i o n s a r e m a d e u n t o O s ir i s . The

" d i v i n e m in i s t e r s w h o a r e i n R e -s t a u s h a l l r e c e i v e [ m e ] ( 3 ) w h e n

"Osiris is led into the two fold funeral re gion of Osiris ; 0 l e t

"me be a divine being whom they shall lead into the twofold

" f u n e r a l r e g i o n of O si ris . "

CHAPTER CX1X .

[From the Papyrus of N u ( B r i t . M u s . No. 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vig n e t t e : The deceased adoring the god Osiris who stands in a shrine .

In the Satte Recension the deceased i s walk ing away from a shrine which

is set upon a hill (see Lepsius, o p . c i t . , B1 . 4 4 ) .

Text : (i) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROM RE-

STAU . r T h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n -c h i e f, N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"I am the Great God who maketh his light . I h a v e c o m e t o

" t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , a n d I o ff e r p r a i s e u n t o ( 3 ) t h e e . [I am] pure

"from the issues which are carried away from thee . Thy name is

"made in Re-stau, and thy power is in Abtu (Abydos) . Thou

" a r t r a i s e d u p , t h e n , 0 O s i r is , ( 4 ) a n d t h o u g o e s t r o u n d a b o u t

" t h r o u g h h e a v e n wi t h R d , a n d t h o u l o o k e s t u p o n t h e g e n e r a t i o n s

"of men, 0 thou One who circlest, thou Ra . B e h o l d , v e r i l y I

"h a v e s aid un t o th e e , 0 O siris , Ì am ( 5 ) th e s piritu a l b o d y of

" t h e G o d , ' a n d I s a y , ` Le t i t c o m e t o p a s s t h a t I s h a l l n e v e r

"be rep ul se d before thee, 0 Osiris . " '

The fo l l o win g i s th e Cha p t e r in a fu l l e r form :-- 2

(r) THE CHAPTER OF KNOWING THE NAME OF OSIRIS AND OF

ENTERING INTO AND OF GOING OUT FROM RE-STAU [IN ALL THE

I . A f u l l e r t i t l e of t h i s C h a p t e r i s , "The Chapter of k nowing the name of

O s i r i s, a n d o f going into and of coming forth from Re-stau . "

2 . F o r t h e t e s t s e e N a v i l l e , n p . c i t . , Bd. I . BI . i 3 o .




FORMS WHEREIN HE WILLETH TO COME FORTH] . I The scribe

M e s - e m - n e t e r , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

"I am the Great Name who maketh (3) his light . I have

"come t o thee, 0 Osiris, and I offer praise u nto thee . I am

"pure from the issues which are carried away from thee . [ T h y ]

" n a m e b a t h b e e n m a d e i n R e - s t a u w h e n i t b a t h f a l l e n ( 4 ) t h e r e i n .

"Homage to thee, 0 Osiris, in thy stre ngth and in thy power,

"thou hast ob tained the ma s t e r y . i n R e - s t a u . Thou art raised

"up, 0 Osiris, in thy (5) might and in thy power, thou art

"raised up, 0 Osiris, and thy might is in Re-stau, and thy

"power is in Abtu ( Abydos) . Thou goest round about through

" h e a v e n , a n d ( 6 ) t h o u s a i l e s t b e f o r e R d , a n d t h o u l o o k e s t u p o n

"the generations of men, 0 thou Being who circlest, thou Rd .

" B e h o l d , v e r i l y , I h a v e s a i d u n t o t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , ` I a m t h e s p i r i -

tual b ody of the God,' and I say, `Let it come to pass that

" I s h a l l n e v e r b e r e p u l s e d b e f o r e t h e e , 0 O s i r i s . " '

CHAPTER CXX .

Vignet te : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e b o t h i n t h e T h e b a n a n d

S a i t e R e c e n s i o n s .

Text : I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s g i v e n t w i c e : s e e

L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l l . 3 a n d 4 5 , a n d s u p r a , Chapter XII .

CHAPTER CXXI .

Vigne tte : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e b o t h i n t h e T h e b a n a n d

S a i t e R e c e n s i o n s .

Text : I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r i s g i v e n t w i c e ; s e e

L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l l . 4 a n d 4 5 , a n d s u p r a , C h a p t e r X I I I .

i . The words in brackets ar e from the Papyrus of Amen-em-heb (s ee Na-

v i l l e , o p . c i t . , Bd . I I . p . 2 6 7 ) .



THE CHAPTER OF GOING ABOUT IN THE UNDERWORLD . 1 8 5

CHAPTER C XXII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No. 1 0 , 4 7 7 ,

s h e e t 9 ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e P a p y r u s o f N u i s t h e o n l y d o c u m e n t c o n t a i n i n g t h e T h e -

b a n R e c e n s i o n w h i c h i s k n o w n , a t p r e s e n t , t o g i v e a t e x t o f t h i s C h a p t e r ,

b u t i t i s w i t h o u t a v i g n e t t e . I n t h e S a Y t e R e c e n s i o n t h e d e c e a s e d i s b o w i n g

b e f o r e a s h r i n e w h i c h i s s e t u p o n a h i l l ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 4 5 ) •

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF GOING IN AFTER COMING FORTH

[FROM THE UNDERWORLD] . T h e o v e r s e e r of the palace, the

chancel lor-in-chief, Nu, triumphant , saith : - - (2)

"O p e n u n t o m e ' W h o t h e n a r t t h o u ? W hit h e r g o e s t t h o u

" W h a t i s t h y n a m e ? I a m o n e of you, 'Assemb er of Souls ' is

" t h e n a m e of m y b o a t ; (3) `Mak ing the hair to s tand on end'

" i s t h e n a m e o f the oars ; 'Watchf u l one' i s the name of i ts

" b o w s ; Èvil is it' is the nam e of the rudder ; ` S t e e r i n g s t r a i g h t

" fo r t h e mi d d l e ' i s t h e n a m e of t h e M a t c h a b e t ; so likewise

"[the b oat] is a typ e o f m y s a il in g o n w a r d t o t h e p o o l . L e t

" t h e r e b e g i v e n u n t o m e v e s s e l s of m i l k ,( 5 )

together with

"cakes, and loaves of b r e a d , a n d c u p s of drink, and pieces of

" m e a t i n t h e T e m p l e of An p u , " o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y ) , " G r a n t

" thou me [the s e thi n g s] w ho l l y . Le t it b e s o d o n e u n t o m e

" t h a t I m a y e n t e r in ( 6 ) l i k e a h a w k , a n d t h a t I m a y c o m e

"forth like the B e n n u bird, [and like] the Morning Sta r . Let

" m e m a k e [ m y] p a t h s o t h a t [I] m a y g o in p e a c e in t o t h e

" b eautiful A mentet, and l et the L ake of Osi ris b e mi ne . ( 7 )

"L et me ma k e my path, and l et me enter i n, and l et me adore

"Osiris, the Lord of life . " I

CHAPTER CXXIII OR CXXXIX . 2

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t o ) . ]

Vigne tte : T h e d e c e a s e d , o r h i s s o u l , s t a n d i n g b e f o r e a p a l a c e o r s h r i n e ;

i n t h e S a t e R e c e n s i o n t h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o v i g n e t t e .

i . S e v e r a l p a s s a g e s i n t h i s C h a p t e r a r e a l s o f o u n d i n C h a p t e r L V I I I .

2 . T h i s C h a p t e r o c c u r s t w i c e i n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ; s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . ,

B I I . 4 5 a n d5 7

. As Chap . CXXIII i t i s c a l l e d " A n o t h e r C h a p t e r " , b u t a s

Chap . CXXXIX i t i s c a l l e d " A hymn o f p r a i s e t o T e m " .




Text : (r) THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO THE GREAT

HOUSE.' The overseer of the palace, t he chancel lor-in-chief, Nu,

triumphant, saith :-

" Ho m a g e t o t h e e , 0 T h o t h . I am Thoth, who have weighed

"t h e t wo divine Fig h t e r s (i . e . , Horn s an d S e t ) , ( 2 ) I ha v e de-

s t r o y e d th eir wa rfar e an d I ha v e dimini s h e d th eir wai lin g s . I

"h a v e de li v e r e d th e Atu f is h i n h i s t u r n i n g b a c k , a n d I h a v e

"p e rfor m e d th a t which th o u did s t or d e r ( 3 ) co n c e r nin g him, an d

" a f t e r w a r d s I l a y d o w n w i t h in m y e y e . [I am he who hath

" b e e n wit h o u t o p p o s it io n . I ha v e c o m e ; d o t h o u l o o k u p o n m e

" in t h e T e m p l e o f N e m - h r a ( o r U h e m -h r a ) . ] I g iv e c o m m a n d s

"i n t h e w o r d s o f t h e d i v in e a g e d o n e s , a n d , m o r e o v e r , I g u i d e

"for thee the less er deities . "

CHAPTER CXXIV.

[From the Papyrus of N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t o ) . ]

Vigne tte : The deceased adoring Mes tha, Ilapi, Tuamautef and Qebh-

sennuf . 2

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF GOING INTO THE PRESENCE OF

THE DIVI NE S OVEREIGN PRI NC E S O F O SIRI S . (2) The o v e r s e e r of

the p alace, the chancel lor-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, s aith :-

"My s oul hath built for me a habitation in the city of Tattu ; I

" s o w s e e d in the city of Pe , an d ( 3 ) I p l o u g h my fie l d with my

" l a b o u r e r s ( ? ) , a n d f or t h i s r e a s o n m y p a l m t r e e i s l i k e A m s u .

" T h a t w h i c h is a n a b o m i n a t io n u n t o m e , t h a t w h i c h is a n a b o -

m i n a t io n u n t o m e I s h a l l n o t e a t . (4 ) That which is an abo-

mi n a t io n u n t o m e , t h a t w h i c h is a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o m e is

" f i l t h . I shall not eat thereof ; b y s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s a n d f o o d I

"s h a l l n o t b e de s t r o y e d . [The abominable thing] I shall not take

i . Two c o p i e s of this Chapter taken from royal tomb s are given by Na-

v i l l e with C h a p t e r CXXV ( U e b e r s c h r i f t ) ; s e e T o d t e n b u c h , B d . I I , p . 335 .

2 . I n t h e P a p y r u s of Nu Chapter CXXIV is g i v e n u n d e r t h e t i t l e , " C h a p t e r

of m a k i n g t h e t r a n s f o r m a t i o n i n t o a Bennu b i r d , " a n d t h e v i g n e t t e a b o v e i t i s

a Bennu b i r d .



THE CHAPTER OF GOING TO THE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS . 1 87

" in t o m y h a n d s , ( 5 ) I s h a l l n o t w a l k u p o n it i n m y s a n d a l s ,

" b e c a u s e m y c a k e s a r e [ m a d e ] of w hit e g r a i n , a n d m y a l e i s

"[made] of red grain, and behol d, (6) th e S e k t e t b o at and the

" M a t e t boat b ring them to me, and I eat [thereo f] under the

"branche s of [the trees ], the b eautiful arm s [o f which] I know .

"O let (7) s plendour be prep ared for me with the white crown

"which is lifted up upon me by the uraei-goddess es . Hail, thou

"gua rdian of the divine doors o f the god S ebete p-taui ( i . e . , ` h e

"who maketh the world to b e at peace'), bring [thou] (8) to me

"that of which they make sep ulchral meal s ; grant thou that I

"may lift up the branch es(?) . (9) May the god of light open to

" m e hi s a r m s , a n d m a y t h e c o m p a n y of t h e g o d s k e e p s i l e n c e

"whilst the denizens (io) of heaven tal k with the chancel lor-

"in-chief, Nu, triumphant . I am the leader of the hearts of the

" g od s w hi ch s tren g then ( ii ) me, and I am a mi g hty one amon g

"the divine beings . If any god or any goddes s ( 1 2 ) shal l come

"forth against me he shall be judged b y the ancestors of the year

"who live upon hearts (13) a n d w h o m a k e ( ? ) c a k e s ( ? ) fo r m e ,

"and Osiris s hall devour him at [his] coming forth ( r q . ) from

"Ab tu (A b ydo s ) . He shal l be judged b y the ancestors of RA, and

"he shal l b e judged by the (r5) G od of Light who clotheth heaven

"among the divine princes . I shall hav e bread in my mouth at

"stated s easons, an d I shal l enter in before the gods Ahiu . ( i 6 )

"He shal l speak with me, and I shall speak with the followers

"of the gods . I shal l speak with the Disk and I shal l s peak with

"the denizens of heaven . (r7 ) I shall put the terror of myself

"into the black ness of night which is in the god dess Meh-urt,

"[who is near] him that dwell eth in might . (i8) And behold, I

"sha ll b e there with Osiris . My condition of comple teness s hall

"be his condition of completeness among the divine princes . I s h a l l

" s p e a k u n t o hi m [ w it h ] t h e w o r d s of ( r g ) m e n , a n d h e s h a l l

" re peat unto me the w ord s of the g od s . A khu who is equipped

" [ with pow er] s ha l l come .' I am a k h u who is equipped [w ith

" pow er] ; I am equipped [ with the power ] of all the k h u s , [ b e -

i . The Papyrus of Mes-em-neter adds, "b ringing right unto thee the divine

being who loveth her . "




"ing the form of the S d h u ( i . e. , s p i rit u a l b o di e s of An n u , T a t t u ,

"Suten-henen, Abtu, Apu, and Sennu .I The Osiris Auf-dnkh is

" v i c t o ri o us o v e r e v e r y g o d a n d e v e r y g o d d e s s w h o a r e h i d d e n in

" N e t e r- k h e r t e t] . " 2

CHAPTER CXXV .

The CXXVth Cha p t e r co n si s t s of thr e e pa r t s: the Introduction,

t h e N e g a t i v e Co n f e s s i o n , a n d a c o n c l u d i n g t e x t . The Introduction

wa s s aid wh e n th e de c e a s e d ar ri ve d at th e Ha l l of dou b l e M a a ti ;

the Nega tive Confession was rec ited by him before the forty-two

gods who were in this Hall ; and the concluding text when he

came into the underworld .

I. The Introduction .

[From the Papyrus of Ani (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 3 o ) . ]

Vignette : I . The god O s i r i s , bearded and we aring the "white" crown,

stands in a shrine the roof of which is s urmounted by a haw k 's head

and by uraei ; he holds the usual emb lems of sovereignty and dominion .

Behind him is the goddes s Isis, and before him, standing upon a lotus

flower, are the four children of Horns, Mes tha, Hapi, Tuamautef, and

Q e b h s e n n u f .

Vig n e t t e : I I . Ani and his wife Thuthu sta nding, with hands raised in

adoration to Osiris, before a ta ble of offerings .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO THE HALL OF

DOUBLE MAATI ; A HYMN OF PRAISE TO OSIRIS, THE GOVERN-

OR OF AMENTET . O si ris , t h e s c ri b e A ni , t ri u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

( 2 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d [ 1 ] h a v e d r a w n n ig h t o s e e t h y b e a u -

"ties ; my hands [are raised] in adoration of thy name `Right

t . IL e. ,Heliopolis, Mendes or Busiris, Heracleopo lis, Abydos, Panopol is,

and Sennu (a city near Panopolis) .

2 . The words in bracket s are from the Salte Recension (see Lepsius, op .

cit. , B I 4 6) .



THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING THE HALL OF -1L-IA TI . 18 9

"and Truth' . I came and I drew nigh unto [the place where]

"the acacia tree groweth not, where (3) the tree thick with

"leaves existeth not, and where the ground yieldeth neither

"herb nor grass . Then I entered into the hidden place, and I

"spake with ( 4 ) the god Set, and my protector(?) advanced to

"me, and his face was clothed (or covered), and [he] fell upon

"the hidden things . He entered into the Temple of Osiris, and

"he looked upon the hidden things which were therein ; and the

"sovereign chiefs of the pylons [were] in the form of khus . And

"the god Anpu (6) spake [to those who were on] both sides of

"him with the speech of a man [as he] came f rom Ta-mera 1 ; he

"knoweth our paths and our cities . I m a k e o f f e r i n g s ( ? ) , ( 7 ) a n d I

"smell the odour of him as if he were one among you, and I say

"unto him, I am Osiris, the scribe Ani, triumphant in peace, trium-

phant! I have (8) come, and (I) have drawn nigh to see the

"great gods, and I feed upon the offerings which are among

" t h e i r f o o d . I have been to the borders [of the territory of] (g)

"Ba-neb-Tettet (i . e . , the `Soul, the lord of Tattu', or Osiris), and

"he hath caused me to come forth like a Bennu bird, and to

"utter words . I have been in the water of the stream, and (io)

"I have made offerings of incense . I have guided myself to the

"Shentet tree of the [divine] children . I have been in Abu (or

"Abu, i . e . , Elephantine [ ? ] ) in the Temple of the goddess Satet .

" ( i i ) I have submerged the boat of mine enemies [whilst] I

"myself have sailed over the Lake in the Neshmet boat . I have

"seen the ( 1 2 ) Sahu (i . e . , the spiritual bodies) [in] the city of

"Qem-ur. I have been in the city of Tattu, and I have brought

"myself to silence [therein] . I have caused the god to have

"the mastery over his two feet . (i3) I have been in the Temple

"of Tep-tu-f (i . e . , `he that is on his hill', or Anubis), and I

"have seen him that is lord of the divine temple . I have en-

tered into the Temple (r4) of Osiris, and I have arrayed my-

"self in the apparel of him that is therein . I have entered into

"Re-stau, and I have seen the hidden things (i5) which are

" t h e r e i n . I was shrouded [therein], but I found a way f or my-

i . I. e . , the "Land of the inundation", a name of Egypt .



I g o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" s e l f . I have gone into the city of An-garret-f (i . e ., the place

"where nothing groweth), and I covered my nakedness with the

"garments which were therein . There was given unto me the

" a n t i unguent [such as] women [use], along with the powder

"of human beings . Verily Sut ( ? ) ( i 7 ) hath spoken unto me

"the things which concern himself, and I said, Let thy weigh-

ing be in ( ? ) us . "

"The Majesty of the god Anpu saith, (i8) 'Knowest thou

"the name of this door so as to declare it unt o me?' And O s i r i s ,

"the scribe Ani, triumphant in peace, triumphant ! s a i t h , ( i g )

"`Destroyer of the god Shu' is the name ( 2 0 ) of this door . The

"Majesty of the god Anpu saith, ( 2 1 ) 'Knowest thou the name

"of the upper ( 2 2 ) leaf and of the lower leaf?' 'Lord of Maat

"(23) upon his two feet' is the name of the upper (24 . ) l e a f ,

"and ` Lord of twofold strength, the subduer of cattle', ( 2 5 ) [ i s

"the name of the lower leaf. The Majesty of the god Anpu

"saith], `Since thou knowest ( 2 6 ) pass on, 0 Osiris the scribe,

"the teller ( 2 7 ) of the divine offerings of all the gods of Thebes,

"(27) Ani, triumphant, the lord of reverence' . "

The Introductio n .

[From the Papyrus o f N i t ( B r i t . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 2 2 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased and his wife standing with both hands raised

in adoration .

Text : ( r ) [THE FOLLOWING] SHALL BE SAID WHEN THE OVER-

SEER OF THE PALACE, THE CHANCELLOR-IN-CHIEF, NU, TRIUM-

PHANT, COMETH FORTH INTO THE HALL ( 2 ) OF DOUBLE MAATI'

SO THAT HE MAY BE SEPARATED FROM EVERY SIN WHICH HE

HATH DONE AND MAY BEHOLD THE FACES OF THE GODS. The

Osiris Nu, triumphant, saith :- ( 3 )

"Homage to thee, 0 Great God, thou Lord of double Maati,

" I have come to thee, 0 my Lord, and I have brought myself

i . I n o t h e r p a p y r i t h i s C h a p t e r i s c a l l e d :- ( t ) "The Chapter o f g o i n g i n t o

t h e H a l l o f d o u b l e M a a t i ; " ( 2 ) "The Chapter o f [ t h e H a l l o f ] d o u b l e M a a t i a n d

o f knowing what i s t h e r e i n " ; and (3) "The Book o f e n t e r i n g i n t o t h e H a l l o f

d o u b l e M a a t i " ; s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I I. P .

2 7 5 .



THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING THE HALL OF JIAATI . 1 9 1

"hither that (4) I may behold thy beauties . I know thee, and

"I know thy name, and I know the name[s] of the two and

"forty gods who exist with (5) thee in this Hall of double Maati,

"who live as warders of sinners and who f eed upon their blood

" ( 6 ) on the day when the lives of men are taken into account

"in the presence of the god Un-nefer ; in truth ` Rekhti-merti-

"neb-Maati' ( i . e . , 'twin-sisters with two eyes, ladies of double

"Maati') is thy name . In truth (7) I have come to thee, and I

"have brought Maat (1 . e., right and truth) to th ee, and I have

"destroyed wickedness for thee . [I have not done evil to] man-

"kind . I have not oppressed the members of my family, (8) I

"have not wrought evil in the place of right and truth . I h a v e

"had no knowledge of worthless men . I have not wrought evil .

"I have not made to be the first [consideration] of each day

"that excessive labour ( 9 ) should be performed for me . [I have]

"not brought forward my name for [exaltation] to honours . I

"have not ill-treated servants . [I have not thought scorn of

"God.] I have not defrauded the oppressed one of his property . '

"I have not done that which is an ab omination (to) unto the

"gods . I have not caused harm to be done to the servant b y

"his chief. I have not caused pain . I have made no man to

"suffer hunger . I have made no one to weep . I have done no

"murder . ( i i ) I have not given the order for murder to be done

"for me . I have not inflicted pain upon mankind . I have not

"defrauded the temples of their oblations . I have not (12) pur-

"loined the cakes of the gods . I have not carried off th e cakes

"offered to the khus. I have not committed fornication . I have

` snot polluted myself [in the holy places of the god of my city],'

"nor diminished from the bushel . (i3) I have neither added to

"nor filched away land . I have not encroached upon the fields

"[of others] . I have not added to the weights of the scales [to

"cheat the seller] . I have not mis-read the pointer of the scales

"[to cheat the buyer] . (r4) I have not carried away the milk

i . V a r i a n t , "I h a v e n o t c a u s e d m i s e r y , I h a v e n o t c a u s e d a f f l i c t i o n . "

2 . The words in brackets are added from the Papyrus of Amen-neb (Brit,

Mus . No . 9 , 9 6 4 ) ; s e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , B d . 1 1 , p . 2 8 2 .




"from the mouths of children . I have not driven away the cattle

"which were upon their pastures . I have not snared (15) the

"feathered fowl of the preserves of the gods . I have not caught

"fish [with bait made of] fish of their kind . I have not turned

"back the water at the time [when it should f low] . I have not

"cut (16) a cutting in a canal of running water. I have not

"extinguished a fire (or light) when it should burn . I have not

"violated the times I [of offering] the chosen meat-offerings . I

"have not driven off (17) the cattle from the property of the

"gods. I have not repulsed God in his manifestations . I am

"pure . I am pure . I am pure. I am pure . My purity is the

"purity of that (18) great Bennu which is in the city of Sut en-

" henen (Heracleopolis), for, behold, I am the nose of the God

"of the winds, who maketh all mankind to live on (19) the day

"when the Eye (Utchat) of Rd is full in Annu (Heliopolis) at

"the end of the second month 2 of the season Pert (i . e . , the

"season of growing) [in the presen ce of the divine lord of this

"earth] . 3 I have seen the Eye of Ra when it was full in Annu,

"therefore let not evil befall me (20) in this land and in this

"Hall of double Maati, because I, even I, know the name[s] of

"these gods who are therein [and who are the followers of the

"great god] . " 4

The Negative Confession .

[From the Papyrus of N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t 3 o ) . ]

Vignette :s The Hall of double Maati, that is to say the Hall of the

goddesses Isis and Nephthys who symbolize Right and Truth ; herein

are seated or stand forty-two gods, to each of whom the deceased must

address a prescribed negative statement . At each end is one half of a

folding door, one having the name of NEB -MART-aER1-TEP-RETUI-F and

the other of NEB-PEHTT-QESU-RIENMFNET . 6 On the centre of the roof,

i . V a r i a n t :-"I h a v e n o t d e f r a u d e d t h e g o d s o f t h e i r c h o s e n m e a t o f f e r i n g s . "

2 . 1. e . , the month called by the Copts Mekhir, the sixth month of the

E g y p t i a n y e a r .

3 . These words are added from the Papyrus of Nebseni .

4 . These words are added from the Papyrus of Ani .

5 . T h e v i g n e t te h e r e d e s c r i b e d i s t h a t o f t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 3 t .

6 . S e e a b o v e , p . 1 9 o .



THE NEGATIVE CONFESSION . 191

w h i c h h a s a c o r n i c e o f u r a c i , t y p i f y i n g d i v i n i t y , a n d f ea t h e r s, s y m b o l i c

o f M a a t , i s a s e a t e d d e i t y , ' p a i n t e d b l u i s h - g r e e n , w i t h h a n d s e x t e n d e d ,

t h e r i g h t o v e r t h e E y e o f H o r u s , a n d t h e l e f t o v e r a p o o l . At the end

o f t h e H a l l a r e f o u r s m a l l v i g n e t t e s , in which are depicted :-I . The

M a a t i g o d d e s s e s , e a c h s e a t e d u p o n a t h r o n e a n d h o l d i n g a s c e p t r e i n h e r

r i g h t h a n d , a n d t h e e m b l e m o f l i f e i n h e r l e f t . 2 . T h e d e c e a s e d , a r r a y e d

i n w h i t e , s t a n d i n g b e f o r e t h e g o d O s i r i s w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o -

r a t i o n . 3 . A b a l a n c e w i t h t h e h e a r t , s y m b o l i z i n g t h e c o n s c i e n c e o f t h e

d e c e a s e d , i n o n e s c a l e , a n d t h e f e a t h e r , e m b l e m a t i c o f R i g h t a n d T r u t h ,

i n t h e o t h e r . T h e g o d A n u b i s i s t e s t i n g t h e t o n g u e o f t h e b a l a n c e , a n d

c l o s e b y s t a n d s t h e m o n s t e r A m - m e t . 4 . T h o t h , i b i s - h e a d e d , s e a t e d u p o n

a p y l o n - s h a p e d p e d e s t a l , p a i n t i n g a l a r g e f e a t h e r o f M a a t .

Text : The scribe Nebseni, triumphant, saith :-

I . "Hail, thou whose strides are long, who comest forth from

"Annu (Heliopolis), I have not done iniquity .

2 . "Hail, thou who art embraced by flame, who comest forth

"from Kher-aba, 2 I have not robbed with violence .

3 . "Hail, thou divine Nose (Fenti), who comest forth from

"Khemennu (Hermopolis), I have not done violence [to any

"man] .

4 . "Hail, thou who eatest shades, who comest forth from the

"place where the Nile riseth, 3 I have not committed theft .

5 . "Hail, Neha-hau, 4 who comest forth f rom Re-stau, I have

"not slain man or woman .

6 . "Hail, thou double Lion-god, who comest forth fr om heaven,

"I have not made light the bushel .

7 . "Hail, thou whose two eyes are like flint, 5 who comest

"forth from Sekhem (Letopolis), I have not acted deceitfully .

8 . "Hail, thou Flame, who comest forth as [thou] goest back,

"I have not purloined the things which b elong unto God .

t . I n t h e X V I l t h C h a p t e r , l i n e 4 6 ( s e e a b o v e , p . 4 7 ) t h i s g o d i s c a l l e d H e h ,

i . e . , " Mi l l i o n s o f ye a r s . "

z . A c i t y n e a r M e mp h i s .

3 . T h e Q e r t i o r c a v e r n s o u t o f w h i c h f l o w e d t h e N i l e w e r e t h o u g h t t o b e

s i t u a t e d b e t w e e n A s w a n a n d P h i l a e .

4 . V a r i a n t , N e h a - h r a .

5 . Variant, "like fire . "

1 3




9 . "Hail, thou Crusher of bones, who comest fort h from

" S u t e n - h e n e n ( H e r a c l e o p o l i s ) , I h a v e n o t u t t e r e d f a l s e h o o d .

1 o . "Hail, thou who makest the flame to wax strong, who

"comest forth from Het-ka-PtaI (Memphis), I have not carried

"away food .

i i . " H a i l , Q e r t i , ( i . e ., the two sources of the Nile), who

"come forth from Amentet, I have not uttered evil words .

1 2 . " H a i l , t h o u w h o s e t e e t h s h i n e , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m T a -

" s h e ( i . e . , the Fayyum), I have attacked no man .

1 3 . "Hail, thou who dost consume blood, who comest forth

" f r o m t h e h o u s e o f s l a u g h t e r . I h a v e n o t k i l l e d t h e b e a s ts [ w h i c h

"are the property of God] .

14 . "Hail, thou who dost consume the entrails, who comest

" f o r t h f r o m t h e mabel c h a m b e r , I h a v e n o t a c t e d d e c e i t f u l l y .

1 5 . "Hail, thou god of Right and Truth, who comest forth

" f r o m t h e c i t y o f d o u b l e M a a t i , I h a v e n o t l a i d w a s t e t h e l a n d s

"which have been ploughed ( ? ) .

16 . "Hail, thou who goest backwards, who comest forth from

" t h e c i t y o f B a s t ( B u b a s t i s ) , I h a v e n e v e r p r i e d i n t o m a t t e r s [ t o

"make mischief] .

1 7 . "Hail, Aati, who comest forth from Annu (Heliopolis), I

"have not set my mouth in motion [against any man] .

1 8 . "Hail, thou who art doubly evil, who comest forth from

"the nome of Ati,I I have not given way to wrath concerning

"myself without a cause .

1 g . "Hail, thou serpent Uamemti, who comest forth from the

" h o u s e o f s l a u g h t e r , I h a v e n o t d e f i l e d t h e w i f e o f a m a n .

2 0 . "Hail, thou who lookest upon what is brought to him,

"who comest forth from the Temple of Amsu, I have not com-

m i t t e d a n y s i n a g a i n s t p u r i t y .

2 1 . " H a i l , C h i e f o f t h e d i v i n e P r i n c e s , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m

" t h e c i t y o f N e h a t u , 2I h a v e n o t s t r u c k f e a r [ i n t o a n y m a n ]

.

2 2 . ` H a i l , K h e m i u ( i . e . , D e s t r o y e r ) , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e

1 . 1 . e . , t h e ninth nome of Lower Egypt, the capital of which was Per-

Ausar or Busiris .

2 . The "city of the sycamore" ; a name of a city of Upper Egypt .



THE NEGATIVE CONFESSION, 1 9 5

"Lake of Kaui, I have not encroached upon [sacred times and

" s e a s o n s ] .

2 3 . "Hail, thou who orderest speech, who comest forth from

"Urit, I have not been a man of anger .

24 . "Hail, thou Child, who comest forth f rom the Lake of

"Heq-at,' I have not made myself deaf to the words of right

"and truth .

2 5 . " H a i l , t h o u d i s p o s e r o f s p e e c h , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e

" c i t y o f U n e s , 2 I h a v e n o t s t i r r e d u p s t r i f e .

2 6 . "Hail, Basti, who comest forth from the Secret city, I

"have made [no man] to weep .

2 7 . " H a i l , t h o u w h o s e f a c e i s [ t u r n e d ] b a c k w a r d s , w h o c o m e s t

"forth from the Dwelling, I have not committed acts of im-

p u r i t y , n e i t h e r h a v e I l a i n w i t h m e n .

28 . "Hail, Leg of fire, who comest forth from Akhekhu, I

"have not eaten my heart . 3

29 . " H a i l , K e n e m t i , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m [ t h e c i t y o f ] K e -

"nemet, I have abused [no man],

3o . " H a i l , t h o u w h o b r i n g e s t t h i n e o f f e r i n g , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h

" f r o m t h e c i t y o f S a n ( S a i s ) , I h a v e n o t a c t e d w i t h v i o l e n c e .

3 1 . " H a i l , t h o u g o d o f f a c e s , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e c i t y

" o f T c h e f e t , I h a v e n o t j u d g e d h a s t i l y .

32 . " H a i l , t h o u w h o g i v e s t k n o w l e d g e , w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m

"Unth, I have notnd I have not taken vengeance"upon the god .

33 . "Hail, thou lord of two horns, who comest forth from

"Satin, I have not multiplied [my] speech overmuch .

34 . "Hail, Nefer-Tem, who comest forth f rom Het-ka-Ptah

" ( M e m p h i s ) , I h a v e n o t a c t e d w i t h d e c e i t , a n d I h a v e n o t w o r k e d

"wickedness .

3 5 . "Hail, Tem-Sep, who comest forth f rom Tattu, I have

" n o t u t t e r e d c u r s e s [ o n t h e k i n g ] .

i . The thirteenth nome of Lower Egypt .

2 . The metropolis of the nineteenth nome of Upper Egypt .

3 . 1 e., "lost my temper and become angry . "

t3*



1 9 6 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY.

3 6 . " H a i l , thou whose heart doth labour, who comest forth

" f r o m t h e c i t y o f T e b t i , I h a v e n o t f o u l e d ( ? ) w a t e r .

3 7. "Hail, Ahi of the water, who comest forth from Nu, I

"have not made haughty my voice .

3 8 . "Hail, thou who givest commands to mankind, who comest

"forth from [San ( ? ) ] , I have not cursed the god .

3 9 . "Hail, Neheb-nefert, who comest forth from the Lake of

" N e f e r ( ? ) , I have not behaved with insolence .

4 0. "Hail, Neheb-kau, who comest forth from [thy] city, I

" h a v e n o t s o u g h t f o r d i s t i n c t i o n s .

4 1 . "Hail, thou whose head is holy, who comest forth from

" [ t h y ] h a b i t a t i o n s , I h a v e n o t i n c r e a s e d m y w e a l t h , e x c e p t w i t h

" s u c h t h i n g s a s a r e [ j u s t l y ] m i n e o w n p o s s e s s i o n s .

4 2 . "Hail, thou who bringest thine own arm, who comest

"forth from Aukert (underworld), I have not thought scorn of

"the god who is in my city . "

Address to the gods of the underworld .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 10 , 47 7, sh ee t 2 4) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n.

Text : [ THEN SHALL THE HEART WHICH IS RIGHTEOUS AND

SINLESS SAY] r :-

( 1 ) T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u ,


"Homage to you, 0 ye gods who dwell in the Hall of double

"Maati, I, even I, know ( 2 ) you, and I know your names . L e t

"me not fall under your knives of slaughter, and bring ye not

"forward my wickedness unto the god in whose train ye are ;

" ( 3 ) and let not evil hap come upon me by your means . 0

"declare ye me right and true in the presence of Neb-er-ther,

i . These words are added from Brit . Mus . No . 9 9 0 5 . Other papyri intro-

d u c e t h e a d d r e s s w i t h t he w o r d s :-(t) "To be said when [the deceased cometh

forth victorious from the Hall of double Maati" ; ( 2 ) "To be said when he

cometh forth to the gods of the underworld" ; (3) "The words which [are to

b e s a i d ] a f t e r t h e H a l l o f d o u b l e M a a t i . "



ADDRESS TO THE GODS OF THE UNDERWORLD .1 97

"because I have done that which is right and true in Ta-mera

"(Egypt) . (4) I have not cursed God, and let not evil hap come

"upon me through the king who dwell eth in my day . Homage

"to you, 0 ye gods, who dwell in the Hall of double Maati, (5)

"who are without evil in your bodies, and who live upon right

"and truth, and who feed yourselves upon right and truth in

"the presence of the god Horns, who (6) dwelleth in his divine

"Disk : deliver ye me from the god Bab a who feedeth upon the

"entrails of the mighty ones upon the day of the great judg-

ment . (7) 0 grant ye that I may come to you, for I have not

"committed faults, I have not sinned, I have not done evil, I have

"not borne false witness ; (8) therefore let nothing [evil] be done

"unto me . I live upon right and truth, and I feed upon right

"and truth . I have performed the commandments of men [as

"well as] the things whereat are gratified the gods, (9) I have

"made the god to be at peace [with me by doing] that which

"is his will . I have given bread to the hungry man, and

"water to the thirsty man, and apparel to the naked (ro) man,

"and a boat to the [shipwrecked] mariner . I have made holy

"offerings to the gods, and sepulchral meals to the k h u s . B e y e

"then my deliverers, (ii) be ye then my protectors, and make

",ve not accusation against me in the presence of [the great god] .

"I am clean of mouth and clean of hands ; t h e r e f o r e l e t i t b e

"said unto me by those who shall behold me, `Come in peace ;

"come in peace', ( 1 2 ) for I have heard that mighty word which

"the spiritual bodies ( s a h u ) 1 spake unto the Cat ( 1 3 ) in the

"House of Hapt-re . I have been made to give evidence before

"the god Hri -f-ha-f (i . e ., he whose face is behind him), and

"he hath given a decision [concerning me] . I have seen the

"things over which the persea tree spreadeth [its branches]

"(14) within Re-stau . I am he who hath offered up prayers

"to the gods and who knoweth their persons . I have come

"and I have advanced to make the declaration of right and

"truth, and to set the (15) balance upon wha t supporteth it

i . The ordinary reading is, "For I have heard the word which was spoken

by the Ass with the Cat . "




"within the region of Aukert . Hail, thou who art exalted upon

"thy standard, thou lord of the A t e f u crown, whose name is

"proclaimed as ` Lord of the winds', deliver thou me (16) from

"thy divine messengers who cause dire deeds to hap pen, and

"who cause calamities to come into being, and (17) who are

"without coverings for their faces, for I have done that which

"is right and true for the Lord of right and truth . I have pu-

rified myself and my breast (18) with libations, and my hinder

"parts with the things which make clean, and my inner parts

"have been in the Pool of right and truth . There is no single

"member of mi ne which lacketh right and truth . (tg) I have

"been purified in the Pool of the south, and I have rested in

"the northern city which is in the Field of the Grasshoppers,

"wherein the divine sailors of Rd bathe at the (20 ) second hour

"of the night and at the third hour of the day . And the hearts

"of the gods are gratified ( ? ) after they have passed through it,

"whether it be by night, or whether it be by day, and they say

"unto me, ( 2 1 ) `Let thyself come forward' . And they say unto

"me, `Who, then, art thou?' And they say unto me, `What is thy

"name?' 'I am he who is equipped under the flowers [and I am]

"the dweller in his olive tree,' ( 2 2 ) is my name . And they say

"unto me straightway, `Pass thou on' ; and I passed on by the

"city to the north of the olive tree . What, then, didst thou see

"there? The leg and the thigh . What, then, (23) didst thou say

"unto them? Let me see rejoicings in those lands of the Ten-

"khu .t And what did they give unto thee? A flame of(24)

f i r e

"and a tablet (or- sceptre) of crystal . What, then, didst thou do

"therewith? I buried them by the furrow of Manaat as ` things for

"the night' . ( 2 5 ) What, then, didst thou find by the furrow of

"Maaat? A sceptre of flint, the name of which is ` Giver of winds' .

"What, then, didst thou do to the flame of fire and the ( 2 6 ) t a b l e t

"(or sceptre) of crystal after thou hadst buried them? I uttered

"words over them in the furrow, [and I dug them out theref rom] ; 2

r . A people who dwelt, probably, on the north-east frontier of Egypt, and

who have been by some identified with the Phoenicians

2 . These words are added from the Papyrus of Nebseni .



ADDRESS TO THE GODS OF THE UNDERWORLD . 1 9 9

" I e x t i n g u i s h e d t h e f i r e , a n d I b r o k e t h e t a b l e t ( o r s c e p t r e ), a n d

" I c r e a t e d ( 2 7 ) a p o o l o f w a t e r . ` C o m e , t h e n , ' [ t h e y s a y , ] ` a n d

" e n t e r i n t h r o u g h t h e d o o r o f t h i s H a l l o f d o u b l e M a d t i , f o r t h o u

" k n o w e s t u s ' . "

" ' W e w i l l n o t l e t t h e e e n t e r i n t h r o u g h u s ' , s a y t h e b o l t s o f

" ( 2 8 ) t h e d o o r , ` u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t [ u s ] o u r n a m e s ' ; ` Tongue

" [ o f t h e B a l a n c e ] o f t h e p l a c e o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h ' i s y o u r n a m e .

" ' I w i l l n o t l e t t h e e e n t e r i n b y m e , ' s a i t h t h e [ r i g h t ] l i n t e l

" ( 2 9 ) of the door, ùnless thou tellest [me] my name' ; ' B a -

" l a n c e o f t h e s u p p o r t o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h ' i s t h y n a m e . ` I w i l l

" n o t l e t t h e e e n t e r in b y m e , ' s a i t h t h e [ l e f t ] l i n t e l o f t h e d o o r ,

" ( 3 o ) ` u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t [ m e ] m y n a m e ' ; [ ' B a l a n c e o f ] w i n e ' i s

"thy name . ` I w i l l n o t l e t t h e e p a s s o v e r m e , ' s a i t h t h e t h r e s -

h o l d o f t h i s d o o r , ` u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t [ m e ] m y n a m e ' ; ` O x o f

"the god Seb' is thy name . ` I w i l l n o t o p e n u n t o t h e e , ' s a i t h

" t h e f a s t e n i n g o f t h i s d o o r , ` u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t [ m e ] m y n a m e ' ;

" ' F l e s h o f h i s m o t h e r ' i s t h y n a m e . ` I w i l l n o t o p e n u n t o t h e e , '

"saith the socket of the fastening of the door, ùnless thou

"tellest me my name ; ' ] ` L i v i n g e y e o f t h e g o d S e b e k , t h e l o r d

"of Bakhau' is thy name . ` I w i l l n o t o p e n u n t o t h e e [ a n d I w i l l

"not let thee enter in by me,' saith the guardian of the leaf

" o f ] t h i s d o o r , ' u n l e s s ( 3 1 ) t h o u t e l l e s t [ m e ] m y n a m e ' ; Èlbow

"of the god Shu when he placeth himself to protect Osiris' is

"thy name . ` We will not let thee enter in by us,' say the

" p o s t s o f t h i s d o o r , ` u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t u s o u r n a m e s ' ; ( 3 2 )

" ' C h i l d r e n o f t h e u r a e i - g o d d e s s e s ' i s y o u r n a m e .' 'Thou know-

" e s t u s , ' [ t h e y s a y ] , ( 3 3 ) ` p a s s o n , t h e r e f o r e , b y u s . '

" ` I w i l l n o t l e t t h e e t r e a d u p o n m e , ' s a i t h t h e f l o o r o f ( 3 4 )

" t h e H a l l o f d o u b l e M a d t i , ` b e c a u s e I a m s i l e n t a n d I a m h o l y .

"and because I do not know the name[s] of thy two feet where-

"with thou wouldst walk (35) upon me ; t h e r e f o r e t e l l t h e m t o

"me . ' ` T r a v e l l e r ( % ) o f t h e g o d K h a s ' i s t h e n a m e o f m y r i g h t

" f o o t , a n d ` S t a f f o f t h e g o d d e s s H a t h o r ' i s t h e n a m e o f m y l e f t

i . The Papyrus of Nu continues, "I will not open unto thee and I will not

l e t t h e e p a s s b y m e ' , s a i t h t h e G u a r d i a n o f t h i s d o o r , ' u n l e s s ( 3 3 ) t h o u t e l l e s t

[me] my name';Ox of Seb' is thy name . " S e e a b o v e , 1 . 3 o .



200 THE CHAPTERS OF CO-41ING FORTH BY DAY

" f o o t . ' ( 3 6 ) ' T h o u k n o w e s t m e , ' [ i t s a i t h ] , ` p a s s o n t h e r e f o r e

" o v e r me . " '

" ` I w i l l n o t m a k e m e n t i o n o f t h e e , ' s a i t h t h e g u a r d i a n o f t h e

" d o o r o f t h i s H a l l o f d o u b l e M a d t i , u n l e s s t h o u t e l l e s t [ m e ] m y

"name ; ' D i s c e r n e r o f ( 3 7 ) h e a r t s a n d s e a r c h e r o f t h e r e i n s ' i s

"thy name . ` Now will I make mention of thee [to the god] .

"But who is the god that dwelleth in his hour? Speak thou it'

"( i . e . , h i s n a m e ) . Maau-Taui ( i . e . , h e w h o k e e p e t h t h e r e c o r d o f

" t h e t w o l a n d s ) [ i s h i s n a m e ] . `Who then is (38) Maau-Taui?'

"He is Thoth . ` C o m e ' , s a i t h T h o t h . ` B u t w h y h a s t t h o u c o m e ? '

"I have come, and I press forward that I may be mentioned .

"What now (39) is thy condition? I, even I, am purified from

" e v i l t h i n g s , a n d I a m p r o t e c t e d f r o m t h e b a l e f u l d e e d s o f t h o s e

" w h o l i v e i n ( 4 0 ) t h e i r d a y s ; and I am not among them . `Now

"will I make mention of thee (to the god] . ' `[Tell me now],

"who is he 2 whose (44) heaven is of fire, whose walls [are

"surmounted by] living uraei, and the floor of whose house is

" a s t r e a m o f w a t e r ? W h o i s h e , I s a y ? ' I t i s ( 4 4 ) O s i r i s . `Come

" f o r w a r d , t h e n : v e r i l y t h o u s h a l t b e m e n t i o n e d [ t o h i m ] . Thy

"cakes [shall come] from the Eye of Ra, and thine ale [shall

"come] from (4 5) the Eye of Ra, and the sepulchral meals

" [ w h i c h s h a l l b e b r o u g h t t o t h e e ] u p o n e a r t h [ s h a l l c o m e ] f r o m

"the Eye of Ra . This bath been decreed for the Osiris the

" o v e r s e e r o f t he p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t . "'

Rubric : ( 4 6 ) THE MAKING OF THE REPRESENTATION OFWHAT SHALL HAPPEN IN THIS HALL OF DOUBLE MAATI . THIS

CHAPTER SHALL BE SAID [BY THE DECEASED] AFTER HE HATII BEEN

CLEANSED AND PURIFIED, AND WHEN HE IS ARRAYED IN APPAREL, (4j)

AND IS SHOD WITH WHITE LEATHER SANDALS, AND HIS EYES HAVE BEEN

PAINTED WITH ANTIMONY, AND [HIS BODY] HATH BEEN ANOINTED WITH

UNGUENT OF ANTI, AND WHEN HE OFFERETH OXEN, AND FEATHERED

FOWL, AND INCENSE, AND CAKES, AND ALE, AND (48) GARDEN HERBS .

AND, BEHOLD, THOU SHALT DRAW A REPRESENTATION OF THIS IN COL-

OUR UPON A NEW TILE MOULDED FROM (49) EARTH UPON WHICH NEITHER

A PIG NOR OTHER ANIMALS HAVE TRODDEN . AND IF [THOU] DOEST THIS

I . Here the Papyrus repeats a passage given above .

2 . The words semd-kud a r e s u p e r f l u o u s .



THE CHAPTER OF THE FOUR APES . 2 0 1

BOOK UPON IT [IN WRITING, THE DECEASED] SHALL FLOURISH, AND HIS

CHILDREN ( 5 o ) SHALL FLOURISH, AND [HIS NAME] SHALL NEVER FALL IN-

TO OBLIVION, AND HE SHALL BE AS ONE WHO FILLETH (I. E ., S ATISFIETH)

THE HEART OF THE KING AND OF HIS PRINCES . AND BREAD, AND CAKES,

AND SWEETMEATS, (51) AND WINE, AND PIECES OF FLESH SHALL HE GIVEN

UNTO HIM UPON THE ALTAR OF THE GREAT GOD ; AND HE SHALL NOT

BE TURNED BACK AT ANY DOOR IN AMENTET, AND HE SHALL BE (52)

13ROUGHT IN ALONG WITH THE KINGS OF UPPER AND LOWER EGYPT,

AND HE SHALL HE IN THE TRAIN OF OSIRIS' CONTINUALLY AND REGU-

LARLY FOR EVER .%

CHAPTER CXXVI .

[From t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 4 ) . ]

Vignette : A l a k e o f f i r e , a t e a c h c o r n e r o f w h i c h i s s e a t e d a d o g -

h e a d e d a p e .

Text : ( 1)T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e

c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e s o n o f t h e o v e r s e e r o f

the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, Amen-hetep, triumphant,

s a i t h :- (2)

" H a i l , y e f o u r a p e s w h o s i t i n t h e b o w s o f t h e b o a t o f ( 3 ) R d ,

"who convey right and truth to Neb-er-tcher, who sit in judg-

ment (4) on my misery and on my strength, who make the

"gods to rest contented by means of the flame of (5) your

"mouths, who offer holy offerings to the gods and sepulchral

"meals to the lrhars, (6) who live upon right and truth, and

"who feed upon (7) right and truth of heart, who are without

"deceit and fraud, and to whom wickedness is an abomination,

" ( 8 ) do ye away with my evil deeds, and put ye away my sin

"[which deserved stripes upon earth, and destroy ye any evil

"whatsoever that belongeth unto me], 4 and let there be no oh-

"stacle whatsoever on my part towards (9) you . 0 g r a n t y e t h a t

I . After 'Osiris' a Paris papyrus adds, 'He shall come forth in whatsoever

form he is pleased to appear as a living soul for ever and ever . "

2 . In the Papyrus of Ani (sheet 33) this Rubric comes after Chap . X L I I ,

and is written below the Vignette of Chapter CXXVI .

3. This Chapter has no title either in the Theban or in the SaIte Re-

c e n s i o n .

4 . The words in brackets are added from Brit . Mus. No . 9 9 1 3 .




"I may make my way through the underworld (ammehet), let me

"enter into Re-stau, let me pass through (to) the hidden pylons

"of Amentet . 0 grant that there may be given to me cakes,

"(ii) and ale, and sweetmeats(?), even as [they ar e given]

"to the living khus, and grant that I may enter in (12) and

come forth from Re-stau . "

"[The four apes make answer, saying], `Come, then, for we

"have done away with thy wicke dness, and we have put away

"thy sin, along with the [sin deserving of] stripes which thou

"[didst commit] upon earth, and we have destroyed [all] the (13)

"evil which belonged to thee upon the eart h . Enter, therefore,

"into Re-stau, and pass thou through the hidden pylon s of

"Amentet, and there shall be given unto thee cakes, (14) and

"ale, and sweetmeats(?), and thou shalt come forth and thou

"shalt enter in at thy desire, even as do those khus who are

"favoured [of the god], and thou shalt be proclaimed (or called)

"each day in the horizon . "

CHAPTER CXXVII A .

[From the Tomb o f R a m e s e s I V ( s e e N a v i l l e , o r . cit ., B d . I . B L 1 4 1 ; L e f e b u r e ,

T o n z b e a u d e R a n z s e s I V , P l a t e 1 3 ) . ]

Vignette : This version of the CXX VIIth Chapter has not yet been

f o u n d i n t h e p a p y r i c o n t a i n i n g t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n . I n t h e S a i t e R e -

c e n s i o n ( L e p s i u s , op. cit., B I . 5 1 ) t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d s , w i t h b o t h h a n d s

r a i s e d i n a d o r a ti o n , b e f o r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s p l a c e d i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f

s i x g o d s , t h r e e s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t a n d t h r e e s e a t e d , e a c h o f w h o m h o l d s

i n h i s h a n d s a fl a i l a n d a s c e p t r e . T h e f i r s t g o d h a s th e h e a d o f a b u l l ,

t h e s e c o n d i s j a c k a l - h e a d e d , t h e t h i r d i s s n a k e - h e a d e d , t h e f o u r t h i s

h u m a n - h e a d e d , t h e f i f t h i s b u l l - h e a d e d , a n d t h e s i x t h i s h u m a n - h e a d e d .

T h e l a s t t h r e e h a v e f e a t h e r s , e m b l e m a t i c o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h , o n t h e i r h e a d s .

Text : ( I ) THE BOOK OF THE PRAISE OF THE GODS OF THE

QERTI I WHICH A MAN SHALL RECITE WHEN HE COMETH FORTH

BEFORE THEM TO ENTER IN TO SEE THE GOD IN THE GREAT

TEMPLE OF THE UNDERWORLD . And he shall say :-

i . IL c , d i s t r i c t s o r d i v i s i o n s o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d .



ADORATIONS TO THE GODS OF THE QERTI . 203

"Homage to you, 0 ye gods of the Q e r t i , ( 2 ) ye divine

"dwellers in Amentet! Homage to you, 0 ye guardians o f the

"doors of the underworld, who keep ward over the god, who

"bear and proclaim [the names of thos e who come] into the

"presence of the god ( 3 ) Osiris, and who hold yourselves ready,

"and who praise [him], and who dest roy the Enemies of Ra .

"0 send ye forth your light and scatter ye the darkness [which

"is about] you, and behold ye the holy and divine (4) Mighty

"One, 0 ye who live even as he liveth, and call ye upon him

"that dwelleth within his divine Disk . Lead ye the King o f

"the North and of the South, (Usr-Maat-Ra-setep-en-Amen, the

"son of the Sun, (Ra-meses-meri-Amen-Ra-heq-Maat), through

"your doors, may his divine soul enter into your hidden places,

"(5) [for] he is one among you, and he hath shot f orth cala-

mities upon the serpent fiend Apep, and he hath beaten down

"the obstacles [which Apep set up] in Amentet . Thy word bath

"prevailed mightily over thine enemies, 0 great God, who livest

"in thy divine Disk ; thy word bath (6) prevailed mightily over

"thine enemies, 0 Osiris, Governor of Amentet ; thy word bath

"prevailed mightily over thine enemies in heaven and in earth,

"0 thou King of the North and of the South, (Usr-Maat-Ra-

"setep-en-Amen, the son of the Sun, (Ra-meses-meri-Amen-Ra-1

"heq-Maat', and over the sovereign princes of every god and

"of every goddess, (7) 0 Osiris, Governor of Amentet ; he hath

"uttered words in the presence [of the god in] the valley of the

"dead, and he bath gained the mastery over the mighty sove-

reign princes . Hail, ye doorkeepers (?), hail, ye doorkeepers, who

"guard your gates, who punish (8) souls, who devour the bo-

dies of the dead, who advance over them at their examination

"in the places of destruction, who give right and truth to the

"soul and to the divine k h n , the beneficent one, (g) the might%

"one, whose throne is holy in Akert, who is endowed with soul

"like Ra and who is praised like O s i r i s , lead ye along the King

"of the North and of the South ( Usr-Maat-Ra-setep-en-Amen

"the son of the Sun, (Rd-meses-meri-Amen-Rd-heq-Maati, un-




"bolt ye for him (to) the doors, and open [ye] the place of his

" Q e r t i for him . Behold, make ye his word to triumph over his

"enemies, and indeed let meat-offerings and drink-offerings be made

"unto him by the god of the double door, and let him (t t ) p u t

"on the n e m m e s crown of him that dwelleth in the great and hid-

"den shrine . B ehold the image of Heru-khuti (Harmachis), who is

"doubly true, and who is the divine Soul and the divine and ( 1 2 )

"perfect Khu ; he hath prevailed with his hands . The two great

"and mighty gods cry out to the King of the North and South

"(Usr-Maat-Rd -setep-en-Amen, , the son of the Sun, (Ra-meses-

"meri-Amen-Ra-heq-Maat , they rejoice in him, they sing praises

"to (i3) him [and clap] their hands, they accord him their pro-

tection, and he liveth . The King of the North and South

"(Usr-Maat-Rd-setep-en-Amen , , the son of the Su n, (Ra-mews_

"meri-Amen-Ra-heq-Maat, riseth like a living soul in heaven .

"He hath been commanded to ( 1 4 ) make his transformations, he

"hath make himself victorious before the divine sovereign chiefs,

"and he hath made his way through the gates of heaven, and

"of earth, and of the underworld, even as hath Ra . The King

"of th e North and Sout h, (Usr-Maat-Ra-setep-en-Amen, the son

"of the Sun, (Rd-mews-meri-Amen-Rd-heq-Maat",, ( 1 5 ) s a i t h ,

"'Open unto me the gate[s] of heaven, and o f earth, and of

"the underworld, for I am the divine soul of Osiris and I rest

"in him, and let me pass through their halls . Let [the gods]

"sing praises unto me [when] they see (z6) me ; let me enter

"and let favour be shewn unto me ; let me come forth and let

"me be beloved ;and let me go forward, for no defect or fail-

ing hath been found clinging unto me ."'

CHAPTER CXXVII B .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f P t a h - m e s ( N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , B d . I . BI . 1 4 2 ) . ]

Vignette : Sixteen gods in four groups, each containing two pairs ;

b e f o r e e a c h g r o u p i s a t a b l e o f o f f e ri n g s .



ADORATIONS TO THE GODS OF THE QERTI . 2 0 5

Text : ( I ) A CHAPTER TO BE RECITED ON COMING BEFORE

THE DIVINE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS OF OSIRIS TO OFFER PRAISE

UNTO THE GODS WHO ARE THE GUIDES OF THE UNDERWORLD .

O s i r i s , ( 2 ) the chief scribe and draughtsman, Ptah-mes, trium-

p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to you, 0 ye gods who dwell in the Qerti, ye gods

"who dwell in Amentet, (3) who keep ward over the gates of

"the underworld and are the guardians [thereof], who bear and

"proclaim [the names of those who come] into the (4) presence

"of Osiris, who praise him and who destroy the enemies of Rd .

" 0 s e n d f o r t h y o u r l i g h t a n d ( 5 ) s c a t t e r y e t h e d a r k n e s s [ w h i c h

"is about] you, and look upon the face of Osiris, 0 ye who

" l i v e e v e n a s h e l i v e t h , a n d p r a i s e [ y e ] h i m ( 6 ) t h a t d w e l l e t h

" i n h i s D i s k , a n d l e a d [ y e ] m e a w a y f r o m y o u r c a l a m i t i e s . Let

"me come forth and let me enter in through (7) your secret

"places, for I am a mighty prince among you, for I have done

"away with evil there, and I have beaten down the (8) ob -

s t a c l e s (?) [which have been set up] in Amentet . Thou hast

"been victorious over thine enemies, 0 thou that dwellest in

" t h y D i s k ; t h o u h a s t b e e n v i c t o r i o u s o v e r t h i n e ( g ) enemies, 0

" T h o t h , w h o p r o d u c e s t ( ? ) s t a t u t e s ; t h o u h a s t b e e n v i c t o r i o u s o v e r

"thine enemies, 0 Osiris, (io) the chief scribe and draughts-

"man, Ptah-mes, triumphant ; thou hast been triumphant over

"thine enemies, 0 Osiris, thou Governor of Amentet, in heaven

"and upon earth in the presence of the (ii) divine sovereign

"chiefs of every god and of every goddess ; and the food ( ? )

" o f O s i r i s , t h e G o v e r n o r o f A m e n t e t , i s i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e

"god whose name is hidden before ( 1 2 ) t h e g r e a t d i v i n e s o -

v e r e i g n c h i e f s . H a i l , y e g u a r d i a n s o f t h e d o o r s , y e [ g o d s ] w h o

"keep ward over their habitations ( ? ) , who keep the reckoning

"and who commit [souls] to (i3) destruction, who grant right

"and truth to the divine soul which is stablished, who are

"without evil in the abode of Akert, (14) who are endowed

"with soul even as is Ra, and who ares i s O s i r i s ," g u i d e y e O s i r i s t h e c h i e f s c r i b e , t h e d r a u g h t s m a n , ( i 5 ) P t a h - m e s ,

"triumphant, open ye unto him the gates of the underworld,




"and the uppermost part of h is estate and his Q e r t . (t6) Be-

"hold, make [ye him] to be victoriou s over his enemies, pro-

"vide [ye him] with the offerings of the god of the underworld,

"make noble the divine being who dwelleth in the nemmes

" ( 1 7 ) crown, the lord of the knowledge of Akert . Behold, sta-

" b l i s hhis soul in right and truth, (r8) [and let it be-come] a perfect soul that hath gained the mastery with its

"two hands . The great and mighty gods cry out, `He hath

"gotten the victory,' ( I g ) and they rejoice in him, and they

"ascribe praise unto him with their hands, and they turn unto

"him their faces . ( 2 0 ) The living one is triumphant, and is

"even like a living soul dwelling in heaven, and he hath been

"ordered to perform [his] transf ormations . Osiris ( 2 1 ) triumphed

"over his enemies, and Osiris, the chief scribe and draughtsman,

"Ptah-mes, triumphant, hath gained the victory ( 2 2 ) over his

"enemies in the presence of the great divine sovereign chiefs

"who dwell in heaven, and in the presence of the great divine

"sovereign chiefs who dwell upon the earth . "

I . A name of the c i t y o f A b y d o s .

CHAPTER CXXIX .

[ F r om L e p si u s, T o dt en b u c h , B I . 5 t . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b e f o r e a t a b l e o f o f f e r i n g s , w i t h b o t h

h a n d s r a i s e d in a d o r a t i o n , i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e g o d s O s i r i s , I s i s , Horus

t h e s o n o f I s i s , a n d N e p h t h y s .

Text : A HYMN OF PRAISE TO OSIRIS . ( I ) The Osiris, Auf-

ankh, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to thee, 0 Osiris Un-nefer, triumphant, thou son

"of Nut, thou first-born son of Seb, thou mighty one who comest

"forth f rom Nut, thou King in the city of Nifu-ur,I thou Governor

"of Amentet, thou lord ( 2 ) of Abtu (Abydos), thou lord of souls,

"thou mighty one of strength, thou lord of the a t e f crown in

"Suten-henen, tho4 lord of the divine form in the city of Nifu-



HYMN TO OSIRIS. 2 0 7

" u r , t h o u l o r d o f t h e t o m b , t h o u m i g h t y o n e o f s o u l s i n T a t t u ,

" t h o u l o r d o f [ s e p u l c h r a l ] o f f e r i n g s , t h o u w h o s e f e s t i v a l s a r e m a n y

" i n T a t t u . ( 3 ) T h e g o d H o r u s e x a l t e t h h i s f a t h e r i n e v e r y p l a c e

" ( o r s h r i n e ) , a n d h e u n i t e t h [ h i m s e l f ] u n t o t h e g o d d e s s I s i s a n d

"unto the goddess Nephthys ; a n d t h e g o d T h o t h r e c i t e t h f o r h i m

" t h e m i g h t y g l o r i f y i n g s w h i c h a r e w i t h i n h i m , [ a n d w h i c h ] c o m e

" f o r t h f r o m h i s m o u t h , a n d t h e h e a r t o f H o r u s i s s t r o n g e r t h a n

" t h a t o f a l l t h e g o d s . (4) Rise up, then, 0 Horus, thou son of

" I s i s , a n d a v e n g e t h y f a t h e r O s i r i s . H a i l , 0 O s i r i s , I h a v e c o m e

"unto thee ; I am Horus and I have avenged thee, and I feed

" t h i s d a y u p o n t h e s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s o f o x e n ; a n d f e a t h e r e d f o w l ,

" a n d u p o n a l l t h e b e a u t i f u l t h i n g s [ o f f e r e d ] u n t o O s i r i s . R i s e u p ,

" t h e n , 0 O s i r i s , ( 5 ) f o r I h a v e s t r u c k d o w n f o r t h e e a l l t h i n e

"enemies, and I have taken vengeance upon them for thee . I

"am Horus upon this beautiful day of thy fair rising in thy

" S o u l w h i c h e x a l t e t h t h e e a l o n g w i t h i t s e l f o n t h i s d a y b e f o r e

" t h y d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s. H a i l , 0 O s i r i s , ( 6 ) t h y ka h a t h

"come unto thee and is with thee, and thou restest therein in

"thy name of Ka-Hetep . I maketh thee glorious in thy name

"of Khu, and it maketh thee like unto the Morning Star in thy

"name of Pehu, and it openeth for thee (7) the ways in thy

"name of Ap-uat . Hail, 0 Osiris, I have come unto thee and

" I h a v e s e t t h i n e e n e m i e s u n d e r [ t h y f e e t ] i n e v e r y p l a c e , a n d

"thou art triumphant in the presence of the company of the

" g o d s a n d o f t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s . H a i l , 0 O s i r i s , t h o u

"hast received thy sceptre and (8) the place whereon thou art

" t o r e s t , a n d t h y s t e p s a r e u n d e r t h e e . Thou bringest food to

"the gods, and thou bringest sepulchral meals unto those who

"dwell in their tombs . Thou hast given thy might unto the

"gods and thou hast created the Great God ; thou hast thy

" e x i s t e n c e w i t h t h e m i n t h e i r s p i r i t u a l b o d i e s , t h o u g a t h e r e s t

"thyself unto (g) all the gods, and thou hearest the word of

"right and truth on the day when offerings to this god are

" o r d e r e d o n t h e f e s t i v a l s o f U k a . "




CHAPTER CXXIX

[See Chapter C . ]

CHAPTER CXXX.

[From the Papyrus of Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 1 7 ) . ]

Vignette : In the papyrus of Nu this Chapter has no vignette, but in

the Saite Recension (see Lepsius, op . c i t . , BI . 5 2 ) the deceased is seen

standing in the stern of a boat b ehind Ra and two other gods .

Text : ( t ) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU,

WHICH IS [TO BE RECITED ON] THE BIRTHDAY OF OSIRIS, AND

OF MAKING TO LIVE THE SOUL FOR EVER . ' ( 2 ) The chancellor-

in-chief, Nu, triumphant, saith :-

"The heavens are opened, the earth is opened, the West is

"opened, the East is opened, the southern half of heaven is

"opened, the northern half of heaven is opened, the doors are

"opened, and the (3) gates are thrown wide open to Rd [as] he

"cometh forth from the horizon . The S e k t e t boat openeth for

"him the double doors and the , V l a t e t boat bursteth open [for

"him] the gates ; he breatheth, and the god (4) Shut [cometh

"into being], and he createth the goddess Tefnut . Those who

"are in the following of Osiris f ollow in his train, and the over-

"seer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, Nu, triumphant, (5)

"followeth on in the train of Rd . He taketh his iron weapon

"and he forceth open the sh rine even as doth Horus, and press-

"ing onwards he advanceth unto the hidden things of his habi-

tation with the libations of (6) his divine shrine ; the messenger

"of the god that loveth him . The Osiris Nu, the overseer of

"the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, bringeth forth

t . Variant, "The Book o f making the soul t o l i v e f o r e v e r . [To b e r e c i t e d ]

on the day o f embarking in the boat o f Ra to pass over to the chiefs o f

f l a m e . " S e e N a v i l l e , op c i t . , B d . I I . p . 3 3 8 .

2 . Read S l u e i n s t e a d o f maat .



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING STRONG THE KHU . 209

"the right and the truth, and he maketh to advance the going

"forward I of (7) Osiris . The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the

"palace, the chancellor -in- chief, triumphant, taketh in [his]

"hand[s] the cordage and he bindeth fast the shrine . St orms

"are the things which he abominateth . (8) Let no water-flood

"be nigh unto him, let not the Osiris Nu, the overseer of the

"palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, be repulsed bef ore

"RA, and let him not be made to turn back ; for, behold, the

"Eye is in his two hands . ( 9 ) Let not the Osiris Nu, the over-

"seer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, walk in

"the valley of darkness, let him not enter into (to) the Lake

"of those who are evil, and let him have no existence among

"the damned, even for a moment . Let not the Osiris Nu fall

"headlong (i i) among those who would lead him captive, and

"let not [his] soul go in among them . Let his divine face take

"possession of the place behind the block, the block of the god

"Septu . "

"Hymns of praise be unto you, 0 ye divine beings of the

"Thigh, ( 1 2 ) the knives of God [work] in secret, and the two

"arms and hands of God cause the light to shine ; it is doubly

"pleasant unto him to lead the (i3) old unto him alon g with

"the young at his season . Now, behold, the god Thoth dwelleth

"within his hidden places, and he performeth the ceremonies

"of libation (r4) unto the god who reckoneth millions of years,

"and he maketh a way through the firmament, and he doeth

"away with storms and whirlwinds from his strongho ld, and

"the Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-

"chief, triumphant, arriveth in the places of his (i5) habitations .

"[O ye divine beings of the Thigh], do ye away with his sor-

row, and his suff ering, and his pain, and may the sorrow of

"the Osiris Nu be altogether put away. Let the Osiris Nu, the

"overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, gra-

tify (r6) Rd, let him make a way into the horizon of Rd, let

"his boat be made ready f or him, let him sail on happily, and

"let Thoth put light into [his] heart ; (r7) then shall the Osiris

i . O r , " i m a g e s " .

I 4




"Nu, t r i u m p h a n t , praise and glorify Rd, and Rd shall hearken

"unto his words, and he shall beat down the obstacles which

"come from his enemies . I have not been (i8) shipwrecked, I

" h a v e n o t b e e n t u r n e d b a c k i n t h e h o r i z o n , f o r I a m R d - O s i r i s ,

" a n d t h e O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r -

" i n - c h i e f , s h a l l n o t b e s h i p w r e c k e d ( i g ) i n t h e G r e a t B o a t . B e -

"hold him whose face is in the god of the Thigh, because the

"name of Rd is in the body of the Osiris Nu, the overseer of

" t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , a n d h i s h o n o u r i s i n h i s

"mouth ; ( 2 0 )he shall speak unto Rd, and Rd shall hearken

"unto his words . "

"Hymns of praise unto thee, 0 Rd, in the horizon, and ho-

m a g e u n t o t h e e , 0 t h o u t h a t p u r i f i e s t w i t h l i g h t ( 2 1 ) t h e d e -

n i z e n s o f h e a v e n , 0 t h o u w h o h a s t s o v e r e i g n p o w e r o v e r h e a v e n

"at that supreme moment when the paddles of thine enemies

"move with thee ! T h e O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e ,

" t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , ( 2 2 ) cometh with the or-

dering of right and truth, for there is an iron firmament in

"Amentet which the fiend Apep bath broken through with his

"storms before the double Lion-god, ( 2 3 ) and this will the

"Osiris Nu set in order ; 0 hearken ye, ye who dwell upon

" t h e t o p o f t h e t h r o n e o f m a j e s t y . The Osiris Nu shall come

" i n a m o n g t h y d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s , ( 2 ¢ ) and Rd shall de-

"liver him from Apep each day so that he may not come nigh

"unto him, and he shall make himself vigilant . The Osiris Nu

"shall have power over the things which are written, he shall

" r e c e i v e ( 2 5 ) sepulchral meals, and the god Thoth shall pro-

"vide him with the things which should be prepared for him .

"The Osiris Nu maketh right and truth to go round about the

"bows in the Great Boat, ( 2 6 ) and bath triumph among the

" d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s , a n d h e e s t a b l i s h e t h [ i t ] f o r m i l l i o n s o f

" y e a r s . The divine chiefs guide him and give unto him a pas-

sage in the boat ( 2 7 ) with joy and gladness ; t h e f i r s t o n e s

"among the company of the sailors of Rd are behind him, and

"he is happy . R i g h t a n d t r u t h a r e e x a l t e d , a n d t h e y h a v e c o m e

"unto their divine lord, and praises have been ascribed unto



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING STRONG THE KHU . 211

"(28) t h e g o d N e b - e r - t c h e r . T h e O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e

" p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , p a t h t a k e n i n h i s

"hands the weapon and he hath made his way through heaven

" t h e r e w i t h ; t h e d e n i z e n s t h e r e o f h a v e a s c r i b e d p r a i s e s u n t o h i m

" a s [ u n t o ] a d i v i n e b e i n g w h o s t a n d e t h u p ( 2 9 ) a n d n e v e r s i n k e t h

" t o r e s t . The god Rd exalteth him by reason of what he hath

"done, and he causeth him to make of none effect the whirl-

"wind and the storm ; he looketh (3o) upon his splendours,

" a n d h e s t a b l i s h e t h h i s o a r s , a n d t h e b o a t s a i l e t h r o u n d a b o u t

"in heaven, rising like the sun in the darkness . Thoth, the

"mighty one, leadeth the Osiris Nu (3I) within his eye, and

" h e s i t t e t h [ u p o n h i s ] t h i g h [ s ] i n t h e m i g h t y b o a t o f K h e p e r a ;

"he cometh into being, and the things which he saith come to

" p a s s . ( 3 2 ) T h e O s i r i s NIT advanceth, and he journeyeth round

"about heaven unto Amentet, the fiery deities stand up before

"him, and the god Shu rejoiceth exceedingly, and they take in

"their hands the bows [of the boat] of Rd along with his

"divine mariners . (33) Rd goeth round about and he looketh

" u p o n O s i r i s . The Osiris Nu is at peace, the Osiris Nu is at

" p e a c e . He hath not been driven back, the flame of thy moment

" ( 3 4 ) hath not been taken away from him, [0 Ra,] the whirl-

"wind and storm of thy mouth have not come f orth against

"him, he hath not journeyed upon the path of the crocodile-

"for he abominateth (35) the crocodile-and it hath not drawn

"nigh unto him . The Osiris Nu embarketh in thy boat, 0 Ra,

"(36) he is furnished with thy throne, and he receiveth thy

" s p i r i t u a l f o r m . The Osiris Nu travelleth over the paths of Ra

"at daybreak to drive back the fiend Nebt ; [he] cometh (37)

"upon the flame of thy boat, [0 Ra,] upon that mighty Thigh .

"The Osiris Nu knoweth it, and he attaineth unto thy boat,

" ( 3 8 ) a n d b e h o l d h e [ s i t t e t h ] t h e r e i n ; and he maketh sepulchral

" o f f e r i n g s . "

Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER S HALL. B E] RECITED OVER A BOAT OF THE

GOD RA WHICH HATH BEEN PAINTED (39) IN COLOURS IN A PURE PLACE .

AND BEHOLD THOU SHALT PLACE A FIGURE OF THE DECEASED IN THE

BOWS THEREOF, AND THOU SHALT PAINT A SEKTET BOAT UPON THE RIGHT

I4




SIDE THEREOF, AND AN ATET BOAT UPON THE LEFT SIDE THEREOF, AND

THERE SHALL BE MADE (4o) UNTO THEM OFFERINGS OF BREAD, AND CAKES,

AND WINE, AND OIL, AND EVERY KIND OF FAIR OFFERING UPON THE

BIRTHDAY OF OSIRIS. IF THESE CEREMONIES BE PERFORMED HIS SOUL

SHALL HAVE EXISTENCE, AND SHALL LIVE FOR EVER, AND SHALL NOT

DIE (44 A SECOND TIME .

T h e f o l l o w i n g i s f r o m t h e R u b r i c t o t h i s C h a p t e r i n t h e S a i t e

R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l .5 3 ) :-

" [ H e s h a l l k n o w ] t h e h i d d e n t h i n g s o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d , h e s h a l l

" p e n e t r a t e t h e h i d d e n t h i n g s i n N e t e r - k h e r t e t ( t h e u n d e r w o r l d ) . "

" [ T h i s C h a p t e r ] w a s f o u n d i n t h e l a r g e h a l l ( ? ) o f t h e T e m p l e

" u n d e r t h e r e i g n o f H i s M a j e s t y H e s e p t i , t r i u m p h a n t , a n d i t w a s

"found in the cavern of the mountain which Horns made for

" h i s f a t h e r O s i r i s U n - n e f e r , t r i u m p h a n t . Now since Rd looketh

"upon this deceased in his own flesh, he shall look upon him

"as the company of the gods . T h e f e a r o f h i m s h a l l b e g r e a t ,

"and the awe of him shall he mighty in the heart of men, and

"gods, and Khus, and the damned . He shall be with his soul

" a n d s h a l l l i v e f o r e v e r ; h e s h a l l n o t d i e a s e c o n d t i m e i n t h e

"underworld ; and on the day of weighing of words no evil

" h a p s h a l l b e f a l l h i m . H e s h a l l b e t r i u m p h a n t o v e r h i s e n e m i e s ,

" a n d h i s s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s s h a l l b e u p o n t h e a l t a r o f R a i n t h e

"course of each day, day by day . "

CHAPTER CXXXI .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 10,477, sheets 17 and 18 ) . ]

Vignette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t V i g n e t t e , b o t h i n t h e P a p y r u s o f

Nu a n d i n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 5 4 ) .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF HAVING EXISTENCE NIGH UNTO

RA . 1 T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u ,


"I am that god Rd who shineth in the night . Every (2) b e i n g

" w h o f o l l o w e t h i n h i s t r a i n s h a l l h a v e l i f e i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f

I . Or, "The Chapter o f making the way into heaven nigh unto Rd" .



THE CHAPTER OF LIVING NIGH UNTO RA 213

" t h e g o d T h o t h , a n d h e s h a l l g i v e u n t o h i m t h e r i s i n g s o f H o r n s

" i n t h e d a r k n e s s. The heart of Osiris Nu, the overseer of the

" p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , i s g l a d ( 3 ) b e c a u s e

" h e i s o n e o f t h o s e b e i n g s , a n d h i s e n e m i e s h a v e b e e n d e s t r o y e d

" b y t h e d i v i n e p r i n c e s. I am a follower of Rd, and [I have]

"received his iron weapon. (4) I have come unto thee, 0 my

"father Rd, and I have advanced to the god Shu. I h a v e c r i e d

"unto the mighty goddess, I have equipped the god Hu, (5)

"and I alone have removed the Nebt god from the path of

"Ra . I am a Khu, and I have come to the divine prince at the

" b o u n d s o f t h e h o r i z o n. I h a v e m e t ( 6 ) a n d I h a v e r e c e i v e d t h e

"mighty goddess. I h a v e r a i s e d u p t h y s o u l i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f

" t h y s t r e n g t h , a n d m y s o u l [ l i v e t h ] t h r o u g h t h y v i c t o r y a n d t h y

"mighty power; it is I who give commands (7) in speech to

"Rd, in heaven. Homage to thee, 0 great god in the east of

"heaven, let me embark in thy boat, 0 Rd, let me open myself

"out in the form of a divine hawk, (8 ) let me give my com-

mands in words, let me do battle in my Sekhem (?), let me be

"master under my vine. Let me embark in thy boat, 0 Rd, in

" p e a c e , ( 9 ) a n d l e t m e s a i l i n p e a c e t o t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t e t.

"Let the god Tem speak unto me, [saying], 'Wouldst [thou]

"enter therein?' The lady, the goddess Mehen, is a million of

" y e a r s , y e a , t w o m i l l i o n y e a r s i n ( s o ) e x t e n t , a n d d w e l l e t h i n

"the House of Urt and Nif-urt [and in] the Lake of a million

" y e a r s

; the whole company of the gods move about among" t h o s e w h o a r e a t t h e s i d e o f h i m w h o i s t h e l o r d o f d i v i s i o n s

" o f p l a c e s ( ? ). And I say, 'On every road and among (r i) these

" m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s i s R a t h e l o r d , a n d h i s p a t h i s i n t h e f i r e;

'and they'go round about behind him, and they go round about

"behind him. " '

CHAPTER CXXXII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t 1 8 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b e f o r e a h o u s e a n d h o l d i n g a l o n g

s t a f f i n h i s h a n d . I n t h e B r o c k l e h u r s t p a p y r u s t h e s o u l o f t h e d e c e a s e d ,




in the form of a human-headed bird, is seen hovering over a house by

the side of which is a tree (see Naville, o p . c i t . , B d . I . B l. 1 4 5 ) .

Text : (t) THE CHAPTER OF CAUSING A MAN TO COME BACK

TO SEE HIS HOUSE UPON EARTH . , The Osiris Ani saith :-"I am the Lion-god ( 2 ) coming forth with extended strides .

"I have shot arrows and I have wounded the prey ; I have shot

"arrows and I have wounded the prey . I am the (3) Eye of

"Horns, and I pass through the Eye of Horns at this season .

"I have arrived at the furrows ; let the Osiris Ani advance in

"peace . " 2

CIIAPTI R CXXXIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t t 6 ) . ]

Vignette : 3 The god Ra, hawk-headed and having upon his head the

sun's disk encircled with a serpent, seated upon a throne in a boat ;i n

his right hand he holds a sceptre and in the left the emblem of "life" .

Above him is the legend, "Ra in his shrine ." Before him, but outside

the boat, stands Nebseni, who "maketh adoration to Ra each day", with

both hands raised in adoration .

Text : (t) THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE Kilu ( 2 )

WHICH IS "1 'O BE RECITED ON THE DAY OF THE MONTH . The

Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, t he chancellor-in-chief,

triumphant, saith :-

"Ra riseth in his horizon, and his company of the gods f ollow

"after him . The god cometh forth out of his hidden (3) habita -

tions, and food falleth out of the eastern horizon of heaven at

"the word of the goddess Nut who maketh plain the paths of

"`Ra, whereupon straightway the Prince goeth round about .

"(k) Lift up then thyself, 0 thou Rd, who dwellest in thy di-

vine shrine, draw thou into thyself the winds, inhale the north

i . I n t h e S a i te R e c e n s i o n (s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B I . 5 4 ) t h e h o u s e i s s a i d t o

be "in the underworld" .

2 . Another papyrus acids the words, "I have advanced, and behold, I have

not been found light, and the Balance is empty of my affair" .

3 . S e e t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i , s h e e t 2 2 .



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU 215

"wind, swallow thou the skin(?) of (5) thy net on the day

"wherein thou breathest right and truth . Thou separatest the

"divine followers, and thou sailest in [thy] boat to Nut ; the

"divine princes (6) march onwards at thy word . Thou takest

"count of thy bones, thou gatherest together thy members, thou

"settest thy face towards the beautif ul Amentet, and thou comest,

"being renewed each day . Behold, (7) thou art that Image of

"gold, and thou dost possess the splendours of the disks of

"heaven and art terrible ; thou comest, being renewed each day .

" ( 8 ) Hail, the horizon rejoiceth, and there are shouts of joy in

"the rigging [of thy boat] ; when the gods who dwell in the

"heavens see the Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chan-

"cellor-in-chief, triumphant, (g) they ascribe unto him as his due

"praises which are like unto those ascribed unto Ra . The Osiris

"Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, trium-

phant, is a divine prince and he seeketh ( ? ) the ureret crown

"of Ra, ( 1 o ) and he, the only one, is strong in good f ortune(?)

"in that supreme body which is of those divine beings who

"are in the presence of Ra . (11) The Osiris Nu is strong both

"upon earth and in the underworld ; and the Osiris Nu is strong

"like unto Rd every day . ( 1 2 ) The Osiris Nu shall not tarry,

"and he shall not lie without motion in this land for ever . B e -

ing doubly beautiful [he] shall see with his two eyes, and he

"shall hear ( 1 3 ) with his two ears; rightly and truly, rightly

"and truly . The Osiris Nu is like unto Ra, and he setteth in

"order the oars [of his boat] among those who are in the train

"of ( 1 q .) Nu . He doth not tell that which he hath seen, and

"he doth not repeat that which he hath heard in the s ecret

"places . H a i l , ( 1 5 ) let there be shouts of joy to the Osiris Nu,

"who is of the divine body of Ra, as he journeyeth over Nu,

"and who propitiateth the KA of the god (16) with that which

"he loveth . The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chan-

"cellor-in-chief, is a hawk, the transformations of which are

"mighty (or manifold) . " '

i . The Papyrus of Nebseni has, "The Osiris Nebseni is the lord of trans-

formations in the presence of the hawk of gold" .




Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER SHALL BE RECITED OVER A BOAT FOUR ~

CUBITS IN ITS LENGTH (r7) AND MADE OF GREEN PORCELAIN [ON WHICH

HAVE BEEN PAINTED] THE DIVINE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS OF THE CITIES ; A N D

A HEAVEN WITH ITS STARS SHALL [ALSO] BE MADE, AND THIS THOU

SHALT HAVE MADE CEREMONIALLY PURE BY MEANS OF NATRON AND IN-

CENSE. AND, BEHOLD, (i8) THOU SHALT MAKE AN IMAGE OF RA IN YEL-

LOW ( ? ) COLOUR UPON A NEW PLAQUE ANI) SET IT AT THE BOWS OF THE

BOAT. AND BEHOLD, THOU SHALT PLACE AN IMAGE OF THE KHU (ig)

WHICH THOU DOS'I' WISH TO MAKE PERFECT [AND PLACE IT] IN THIS

BOAT, AND THOU SHALT MAKE IT TO TRAVEL ABOUT IN THE BOAT [WHICH

SHALL BE MADE IN THE FORM OF THE BOAT] OF RA ; AND HE SHALL SEE

THE GOD RA ( 2 0 ) HIMSELF THEREIN. LET NOT THE EYE OF ANY MAN

WHATSOEVER LOOK UPON IT WITH THE EXCEPTION OF THINE OWN SELF,

OR THY FATHER, OR THY SON, AND GUARD [THIS] WITH GREAT CARE . '

[NOW THESE THINGS] SHALL MAKE THE KHU PERFECT IN THE HEART OF

RA, AND IT SHALL GIVE UNTO HIM POWER WITH THE COMPANY OF THE

GODS ; AND THE GODS SHALL LOOK UPON HIM AS A DIVINE BEING LIKE

UNTO THEMSELVES ; ( 2 1 ) AND MANKIND ANI) THE DEAD SHALL LOOK UPON

HIM AND SHALL FALL DOWN UPON THEIR FACES, AND HE SHALL BE SEEN

IN THE UNDERWORLD IN THE FORM OF THE RADIANCE OF RA .

CHAPTER CXXXIV .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 10,477, sheet I7) . ]

Vignette :* The boat of the sun, before which stand the deceased and

his daughter ;-' on the bows is perched the hawk of Horus with the crown

of the South upon his head . In the boat are the gods Shu, Tcfnut, Seb,

Nut, Osiris, Isis, and Hathor, human-headed, and Horus, hawk-headed .

In the Saite Recension the gods in the boat are nine in number, and

behind them is the disk o f the sun (see Lepsius, o p . c i t . , BI . 55) .

I . The Papyrus of Ani has "seven cubits" .

2 . The words "or thy father" are from the Papyrus o f Ani .

3 . These words are from the B rocklehurst papyrus (see Naville, o p . c i t . ,

B d . II . p . 334). There are three copies of this rubric extant and no one of

them is complete !

4 . See the Papyrus of Nebseni, sheet 6 .

5 . Called "Thent-Men-nefer . "



KHU. I T h e O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r -

i n - c h i e f , t r iu m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, 0 thou who art within thy divine shrine,

"who shinest with rays of light (2 ) a n d s e n d e s t f o r t h r a d i a n c e

" f r o m t h y s e l f , w h o d e c r e e s t j o y f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s u n t o t h o s e

"who love him, who givest their heart's desire unto mankind,

"thou god Khepera within thy boat who hast overthrown (3)

"Apep . 0 y e c h i l d r e n o f t h e g o d S e b , o v e r t h r o w y e t h e e n e m i e s

" o f O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f ,

"triumphant, and destroy ye them (4) from the boat of Rd ;

"and the god Horus shall cut off their heads in heaven [where

" t h e y a r e ] i n t h e f o r m o f f e a t h e r e d f o w l , a n d t h e i r h i n d p a r t s s h a l l

" b e o n t h e e a r t h i n t h e f o r m o f a n i m a l s a n d i n t h e L a k e i n t h e f o r m

" o f ( 5 ) f i s h e s . E v e r y m a l e f i e n d a n d e v e r y f e m a l e f i e n d s h a l l t h e

" O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f th e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , d e -

stroy, whether he descendeth from the heaven, or whether he

"cometh forth from (6) the earth, or whether they come upon

" t h e w a t e r s , o r w h e t h e r t h e y a d v a n c e t o w a r d s t h e s t a r s , t h e g o d

"Thoth, the son of Aner, coming forth from the Anerti, shall

"hack them in pieces . T h e O s i r i s ( 7 ) N u i s s i l e n t a n d d u m b ( ? ) ;

"cause ye this god, the mighty one of slaughter, the being

" g r e a t l y t o b e f e a r e d , t o m a k e h i m s e l f c l e a n i n y o u r b l o o d a n d

"to bathe (8) himself in your gore, and ye shall certainly be

"destroyed by him (g) from the boat of his f ather Ra . The

"Osiris Nu is the god Horus to whom his mother the goddess

" I s i s b a t h g i v e n b i r t h , ( r o ) a n d w h o m t h e g o d d e s s N e p h t h y s h a t h

"nursed and dandled, even like Horus when [he] repulsed the

" f i e n d s o f t h e g o d S u t i ; and when they see the ureret crown

" s t a b l i s h e d ( i i ) u p o n h i s h e a d t h e y f a l l d o w n u p o n t h e i r f a c e s

" a n d t h e y g l o r i f y [ h i m ] . Behold, when men, and gods, and Khus,

" a n d t h e d e a d s e e t h e O s i r i s ( 1 2 ) Nu in the form of Horus with

"the ureret c r o w n s t a b l i s h e d u p o n h i s h e a d , t h e y f a l l d o w n u p o n

i . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i t h e t i t l e o f t h i s C h a p t e r r e a d s :-"The Chapter

of embark ing in the boat of Ra and of being with those who are in his

f o l l o w i n g . "

THE CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU . 217

Text : ( i ) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE




" t h e i r f ac e s . And the Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the

" c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , ( 1 3 ) triumphant, is victorious over his ene-

mies in the heights of heaven, and in the depths thereof, and

"before the divine sovereign chiefs of every god and of every

"goddess . "

Rubric : ( 1 4 ) [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL RE RECITED OVER A HA WK STAND-

ING AND HAVING THE WHITE CROWN UPON HIS HEAD, [AND OVER FI-

GURES OF] TENT, SHU, TEFNUT, SER, NUT, OSIRIS, ISIS, SUTI, ANT) NEPHTHYS

PAINTED IN YELLOW COLOUR (15) UPON A NEW PLAQUE, WHICH SHALL RE

PLACED IN [A MODEL OF] THE BOAT [OF THE SUN], ALONG WITH A FIGURE

OF THE DECEASED WHOM THOU WOULDST MAKE PERFECT . THESE SHALT

THOU ANOINT WITH CEDAR OIL, AND (i6 INCENSE SHALL BE OFFERED UP

TO THEM ON THE FIRE, AND FEATHERED FOWL SHALL RE R OASTED . I T IS

AN ACT OF PRAISE TO RA AS HE JOURNEYETH, AND IT SHALL CAUSE A

MAN TO HAVE HIS BEING (17) ALONG WITH RA DAY BY DAY, WH .ITH ER-

SOEVER'THE GOD VOYAGETH ; AND IT SHALL DESTROY THE ENEMIES OF

RA IN VERY TRUTH REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY .

CHAPTER CXXXV .

[ Fr o m Le ps i us , T od te nb u ch , B I . 5 5 . ]


Text : ANOTHER CHAPTER TO BE RECITED WHEN THE MOON

RENEWETH ITSELF ON THE DAY OF THE MONTH. The Osiris

Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

" (1) Osiris unfettereth," or, as others say, "openeth the storm

"cloud [in] the body of heaven, and is unf ettered himself ; Horus

"is made strong happ ily each day . He whose transformations

"are great (or many) hath offerings made unto him at the mo-

ment, (2) and he hath made an end of the storm which is in

"the face of the Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant . Verily he cometh,

"and he is Rd in [his] journeying, and he is the four celestial

"gods in th e heavens a bove . The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant,

"cometh forth (3) in his day, and he embarketh among the

"tackle of the boat . "



THE CHAPTER OF TRAVELLING IN THE BOAT OF RA 219

Rubric : IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN BY THE DECEASED HE SHALL

BECOME A PERFECT KHU IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND HE SHALL NOT DIE

THEREIN A SECOND TIME, AND HE SHALL EAT HIS FOOD SIDE BY SIDE

WITH OSIRIS. (4) IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN BY HIM UPON EARTH HE

SHALL BE LIKE UNTO THOTH, AND HE SHALL BE ADORED BY THE LIVING

ONES ; HE SHALL NOT FALL HEADLONG AT THE MOMENT OF ROYAL FLAME

OF THE GODDESS BAST, AND THE MIGHTY PRINCESS SHALL MAKE HIM TO

ADVANCE HAPPILY .

CHAPTER CXXXVI A .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,477, s h e e t 2 8 ) . ]

Vignette : This Chapter has no vignette in the Theban Recension ; see

Chapter CXX XVI B .

Text : ( I) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF TRAVELLING IN THE GREAT

B OAT OF RA . The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the

chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, saith :- ( 2 )

"Behold now, 0 ye luminaries in Annu, ye people in Kher-

"aba, the god Kha(?) bath been born ; his cordage (3) hath been

"completed, and the instrument wherewith he maketh his way

"hath [he] grasped firmly . I have protected the implements of

"the gods, and I have delivered the boat Kha ( ? ) for him. I

"have come forth into heaven, and I have travelled therein with

"Ra in the form of an ape, and have (4 . ) turned back the paths

"of Nut at the staircase of the god Sebek . "

CHAPTER CXXXVI A .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,47i, s h e e t j 6 ) . ]

Vignette : In the Theban Recension this Chapter has no Vignette, but

in the Saite Recension the deceased stands in the boat of the god Ra who

is seated therein (see Lepsius, o p . c i t . , Bl . 5 6 ) .

Text : ( I) ANOTHER CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE

KHU ; [it shall be recited] on the festival of Six . The Osiris




Nu, t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m -

p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" B e h o l d n o w , 0 y e l u m i n a r i e s i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , y e p e o p l e

" i n ( 2 ) Kher-aba, the god hath been born ; h i s c o r d a g e ( ? ) b a t h

"been completed, and the instrument wherewith he maketh his

"way he bath grasped firmly ; a n d t h e O s i r i s N u i s s t r o n g ( 3 )

"with them to direct the implement of the gods . The Osiris

" N u b a t h d e l i v e r e d t h e b o a t o f t h e s u n t h e r e w i t hnd"he cometh forth (4) into heaven . T h e O s i r i s N u s a i l e t h r o u n d

" a b o u t i n h e a v e n , h e t r a v e l l e t h t h e r e i n u n t o N u t , h e j o u r n e y e t h

"along with Ra, and he voyageth therein in the form of (5)

" a p e s ; [ h e ] t u r n e t h b a c k t h e w a t e r - f l o o d w h i c h i s o v e r t h e T h i g h

" o f t h e g o d d e s s N u t a t t h e s t a i r c a s e o f t h e g o d S e b a k u . ( 6 ) T h e

"hearts of Seb and Nut are glad and repeat the name which is

"new . U n - n e f e r u r e n e w e t h [ h i s ] y o u t h , R a i s i n h i s s p l e n d o u r s

"of light, (7) Unti hath his speech, and lo, the god of the

"Inundation is Prince among the gods . T h e t a s t e o f s w e e t n e s s

" h a t h f o r c e d a w a y i n t o t h e h e a r t o f t h e d e s t i t u t e o n e , a n d t h e

"lord of thy outcries (8) hath been done away with, and the

"oars(?) of the company of the gods are in vigorous motion .

"Adored be thou, 0 divine Soul, who art endowed more than

" t h e g o d s o f t h e S o u t h a n d N o r t h [ i n ] t h e i r s p l e n d o u r s ! B e h o l d ,

" ( 9 ) g r a n t t h o u t h a t t h e O s i r i s N u m a y b e g r e a t i n h e a v e n e v e n

" a s t h o u a r t g r e a t a m o n g t h e g o d s ; d e l i v e r t h o u h i m f r o m e v e r y

"evil and murderous thing which may be wrought (io ) upon

"him by the Fiend, and fortify thou his heart . Grant thou,

" m o r e o v e r , t h a t t h e O s i r i s N u m a y b e s t r o n g e r t h a n a l l t h e g o d s ,

" a l l t h e Khus, a n d a l l t h e d e a d . (ii) The Osiris Nu is strong

"and is the lord of powers . T h e O s i r i s N u i s t h e l o r d o f r i g h t

" a n d t r u t h ( r 2 ) w h i c h t h e g o d d e s s U a t c h i t w o r k e t h . T h e s t r e n g t h

" w h i c h p r o t e c t s t h e O s i r i s N u i s t h e s t r e n g t h w h i c h p r o t e c t s t h e

"god Rd in heaven . 0 god Rd, grant thou that the Osiris Nu

"may travel on (i3) in thy boat in peace, and do thou prepare

"a road whereon [thy] boat may journey onwards ; f o r t h e f o r c e

" w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h ( r 4 ) O s i r i s i s t h e f o r c e w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h t h e e .

"The Osiris Nu driveth back the Crocodile from Rd day by day .



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU 221

"(15) The Osiris Nu cometh even as doth Horus in the splen-

"dours(?) of the horizon of heaven, and he directeth ( 1 6 ) Rd

"through the mansions of the sky ; t h e g o d s r e j o i c e g r e a t l y

"when the Osiris Nu repulseth the Crocodile . The Osiris Nu

"hath the amulet(?) of the god, and (17) the cloud of Nebt

" s h a l l n o t c o m e n i g h u n t o h i m , a n d t h e d i v i n e g u a r d i a n s o f t h e

" m a n s i o n s o f t h e s k y s h a l l n o t d e s t r o y h i m . T h e O s i r i s N u i s a

" ( 1 8 ) d i v i n e b e i n g w h o s e f a c e i s h i d d e n , a n d h e d w e l l e t h w i t h i n

" t h e G r e a t H o u s e [ a s ] t h e c h i e f o f t h e S h r i n e o f t h e g o d . The

" O s i r i s NIT c a r r i e t h t h e w o r d s o f t h e g o d s t o R a , (1g) and he

" c o m e t h a n d m a k e t h s u p p l i c a t i o n u n t o t h e d i v i n e l o r d ( 2 0 ) w i t h

" t h e w o r d s o f h i s m e s s a g e . T h e O s i r i s N u i s s t r o n g o f h e a r t , a n d

"he maketh his offering at the moment (21) among those who

" p e r f o r m t h e c e r e m o n i e s o f s a c r i f i c e . "

Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID OVER A FIGURE OF THE

DECEASED WHICH SHALL BE PLACED IN [A MODEL OF] THE BOAT OF THE

SUN, AND BEHOLD, [HE THAT RECITETH IT] SHALL BE WASHED, AND SHALL

BE CEREMONIALLY PURE, (23) AND HE SHALL HAVE 13URNT INCENSE BE-

FORE RA, AND SHALL HAVE OFFERED WINE, AND CAKES, AND ROASTED

FOWL FOR THE JOURNEY [OF THE DECEASED] IN THE BOAT OF RA . NOW,

EVERY (24) KHU FOR WHOM SUCH THINGS ARE DONE SHALL HAVE AN

EXISTENCE AMONG THE LIVING ONES, AND HE SHALL NEVER PERISH, AND

HE SHALL HAVE A BEING LIKE UNTO THAT OF THE HOLY GOD ; NO EVIL

THING WHATSOEVER SHALL ATTACK HIM . (25) AND HE SHALL BE LIKE

UNTO A HAPPY KHU IN AMENTET, AND HE SHALL NOT DIE A SECOND

TIME. HE SHALL EAT AND HE SHALL DRINK IN THE PRESENCE OF OSIRIS

EACH DAY ; HE SHALL BE BORNE ALONG ( 2 ( i i ) WITH THE KINGS OF THE

NORTH AND OF THE SOUTH EACH AND EVERY DAY ; HE SHALL QUAFF

WATER AT THE FOUNTAIN-HEAD ; HE SHALL COME FORTH BY DAY EVEN

AS DOTH HORGS ; (27) HE SHALL LIVE AND SHALL BECOME LIKE UNTO

GOD; AND HE SHALL BE HYMNED BY THE LIVING ONES, EVEN AS IS RAEACH AND EVERY DAY CONTINUALLY AND REGULARLY FOR EVER .

CHAPTER CXXXVI B .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 8 ) . ]

Vignette : A b o a t i n w h i c h i s t h e h e a d o f a h a w k , e m b l e m at i c o f R d ,




w h e r e u p o n i s a d is k e n c i r c l e d b y a s e r p e n t ; o v e r t h e b o w s a n d s t e r n a r e

u t c h a t s , o r s y m b o l ic e y e s .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF SAILING IN THE GREAT BOAT

OF RA TO PASS OVER ( 2 ) THE CIRCLE OF BRIGHT FLAME .

The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-

c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"[Hail], ye bright and shining flames that keep your place

"behind Ra, and which slay (3) behind him, the boat of Rd is

" i n f e a r o f t h e w h i r l w i n d a n d t h e s t o r m ; s h i n e y e f o r t h , t h e n ,

" a n d m a k e [ y e y o u r s e l v e s ] v i s i b l e . I have come [daily] along

" w i t h t h e g o d S e k - h r a f r o m t h e b i g h t o f h i s h o l y l a k e , ( 4 ) a n d

" I h a v e s e e n t h e M a d t [ g o d d e s s e s ] p a s s a l o n g , a n d t h e l i o n - g o d s

"who belong unto them . H a i l , t h o u t h a t d w e l l e s t i n t h e c o f f e r ,

"who hast multitudes of plants ( ? ) , 1 (5) have seen [what is]

" t h e r e . W e r e j o i c e , a n d t h e i r p r i n c e s r e j o i c e g r e a t l y , a n d t h e i r

" l e s s e r g o d s ( ? ) a r e g l a d . I have made a (6) way in front of

" t h e b o a t o f R d , I h a v e l i f t e d m y s e l f u p i n t o h i s d i v i n e D i s k ,

"I shine brightly through his splendours ; he hath furnished

" h i m s e l f w i t h t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e h i s , t a k i n g p o s s e s s i o n t h e r e o f

" a s t h e l o r d o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h . (7) And behold, 0 ye company

" o f t h e g o d s , a n d t h o u a n c e s t o r o f t h e g o d d e s s I s i s , i g r a n t y e

"that he may bear testimony to his father, the lord of those

"who are therein . I have (8) weighed then h i m [ a s ]

"chief, and I have brought to him the goddess Tefnut and he

" l i v e t h . B e h o l d , c o m e , c o m e , a n d d e c l a r e b e f o r e h i m t h e t e s t i -

mony ( g ) of right and truth of the lord Tem . I c r y o u t a t

"eventide and at his hour, saying ;- Grant ye unto me (io)

"that I may come . I have brought unto him the jaws of the

"passages of the tomb ; I have brought unto him the bones

" w h i c h a r e i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) ; ( i i ) I h a v e g a t h e r e d t o g e t h e r

" f o r h i m h i s m a n i f o l d p a r t s ; I have driven back for him the

"serpent fiend Apep ; I have spit upon his gashes for him ; I

"have made my road and I have passed in (12) among you . I

"am he who dwelleth among the gods, come, let [me] pass

i . Read "god Osiris" ?



THE CHAPTER OF THE FOUR FLAMES . 223

"onwards in the boat, the boat of the lord Sa . B ehold, 0

"Heru-ur, ( i 3 ) there is a flame, but the fire hath been extin-

guished . I have made [my] road, 0 ye divine f athers and

"your divine apes ! I have entered upon the horizon, and I have

"passed on (14) to the side of the divine princes, and I have

"borne testimony unto him that dwelleth in his divine boat .

"I have gone forward over the circle of bright ( 1 5 ) flame which

"is behind the lord of the lock of hair which moveth round

"about . Behold, ye who cry out over yourselves, ye worms in

"[your] hidden places, grant ye that I may pass onwards, (r6)

"for I am the mighty one, the lord of divine strength, and I

"am the spiritual body (sah) of the lord of divine right and

"truth made by the goddess Uatchit . His strength which pro-

"tecteth (i7) is my strength which protecteth, which is the

"strength which protecteth Ra . [Grant ye that I may be in the

"followi ng of Ra], and grant ye that I may go round about

"with him in Sekhet-hetep [and in] the two lands . (i8) [I am] a

"great god, and [I have been] judged by the company of his gods ;

"grant that divine, sepulchral meals may be given unto me . "

CHAPTER CXXXVII A .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 6 ) . ]

Vignette : Four m e n , e a c h h o l d i n g a f l a m e , s t a n d i n g i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f

a g o d b e f o r e w h o m a r e f o u r p o o l s o r l a k e s .

Text : (r) THECHAPTER OF THE FOUR BLAZING FLAMES WHICH

ARE MADE FOR THE KHU . Behold, thou shalt make four square

troughs of clay, (2) whereon thou shalt scatter incense, and thou

shalt fill them with the milk of a white cow, and by means

of these thou shalt extinguish the flame . ( 3) The Osi ris Nu,

the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant,

s a i t h :-

"The fire cometh to thy KA, 0 Osiris, governor of Amenti ;

" t h e f i r e ( 4 ) c om et h t o t hy KA, 0 Osiris Nu, the overseer of

"the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant . He that ordereth




"the night cometh after the day . (5) [The flame cometh to thy

"KA, 0 Osiris, governor of those in Amenti] i and the two

" s i s t e r s ( ? ) o f R d c o m e l i k e w i s e . B e h o l d , [ t h e f l a m e ] r i s e t h i n

"Abtu (Abydos) and it cometh ; a n d I c a u s e i t t o c o m e [ t o ] ( 6 )

"the Eye of Horus . I t i s s e t i n o r d e r u p o n t h y b r o w , 0 O s i r i s ,

" g o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i , 2 a n d i t i s ( 7 ) f i x e d w i t h i n t h y s h r i n e a n d

"riseth upon thy brow ; i t i s s e t i n o r d e r u p o n t h y b r e a s t , 0

" O s i r i s N u , ( 8 ) a n d i t i s f i x e d u p o n t h y b r o w . The Eye of Horus

" i s p r o t e c t i n g t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , g o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i , a n d i t k e e p e t h

" t h e e ( g ) i n s a f e t y ;i t c a s t e t h d o w n h e a d l o n g a l l t h i n e e n e m i e s

" f o r t h e e a n d a l l t h i n e e n e m i e s h a v e f a l l e n h e a d l o n g b e f o r e t h e e .

" ( i o ) 0 O s i r i s N u , t h e E y e o f H o r u s p r o t e c t e t h t h e e , i t k e e p e t h

"thee in safety, and it casteth down headlong (ii) all thine

"enemies . Thine enemies have fallen down headlong before thy

"KA, 0 O s i r i s , g o v e r n o r o f (I2) Amenti, the Eye of Horus pro-

" t e c t e t h t h e e , i t k e e p e t h t h e e i n s a f e t y , a n d i t h a t h c a s t d o w n

"headlong all thine enemies . (t3) Thine enemies have fallen

"down headlong before thy Ka, 0 Osiris Nu, the overseer of

" t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , (i4) the Eye

" o f H o r u s p r o t e c t e t h t h e e , i t k e e p e t h t h e e i n s a f e t y , i t h a t h c a s t

"down headlong for thee all thine enemies, and thine enemies

"have fallen down headlong before thee . The Eye of Horus

"(i5) cometh, it is sound and well, and it sendeth forth rays

"like unto Rd in the horizon ; it covereth over with darkness

" t h e p o w e r s o f S u t i , i t t a k e t h p o s s e s s i o n t h e r e o f a n d i t b r i n g e t h

" i t s f l a m e ( t 6 ) a g a i n s t h i m u p o n [ i t s ] f e e t ( ? ) . The Eye of Horus

" i s s o u n d a n d w e l l , t h o u e a t e s t t h e f l e s h ( ? ) o f t h y b o d y b y m e a n s

" t h e r e o f , a n d t h o u g i v e s t p r a i s e ( ; ) t h e r e t o . T h e f o u r f l a m e s e n t e r

" i n t o t h y KA, 0 O s i r i s , g o v e r n o r o f ( t 7 ) A m e n t i , t h e f o u r f l a m e s

" e n t e r i n t o t h y k a , 0 O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e

" c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t . Hail, ye children of Horus,

"Mesthi, Hapi, Tuamautef (t8) and Qebbsennuf, ye have given

" y o u r p r o t e c t i o n u n t o y o u r d i v i n e F a t h e r O s i r i s , t h e g o v e r n o r o f

" A m e n t i , g r a n t y e y o u r p r o t e c t i o n t o t h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t .

i . Added from the Papyrus of Nebseni .

2 . In the Papyrus of Nebseni the deceased is here addressed .




"(Ig) Now therefore, inasmuch as ye have destroyed the oppo-

4' n e n t [ s ] o f O s i r i s , t h e g o v e r n o r o f A m e n t i , h e l i v e t h w i t h t h e

" g o d s , a n d h e b a t h s m i t t e n S u t i w i t h h i s h a n d a n d a r m s i n c e l i g h t

"dawned upon the earth, and Horus hath gotten power, (20) and

"he hath avenged his divine Father Osiris himself ; a n d i n a s -

much as your divine father hath been made vigorous through

" t h e u n i o n w h i c h y e h a v e e f f e c t e d f o r h i m w i t h t h e Ka o f O s i r i s ,

"the Governor of Amenti-now the Eye of Horus (21) hath

" a v e n g e d h i m , a n d i t b a t h p r o t e c t e d h i m , a n d i t b a t h c a s t d o w n

"headlong for him all his enemies, and all his enemies have

"fallen down before him-even so do ye destroy the (22) Op-

"ponent[s] of the Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the

" c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t . Let him live with the gods,

"let him smite down his enemy, let him destroy [him] (23.)

"when light dawneth upon the earth, let Horus gain power

" a n d a v e n g e t h e O s i r i s N u , l e t t h e O s i r i s N u h a v e v i g o u r t h r o u g h

"the union which ye have effected for him with his ka . 0 O s i -

" r i s N u , t h e E y e o f H o r u s h a t h a v e n g e d t h e e , i t b a t h c a s t d o w n

" h e a d l o n g a l l t h i n e e n e m i e s f o r t h e e , a n d a l l t h i n e e n e m i e s h a v e

"fallen down headlong before thee . H a i l , O s i r i s, (24) Governor

"of Amenti, grant thou light and fire to the happy soul which

" i s i n S u t e n - h e n e n ( H e r a c l e o p o l i s ) ; a n d [ 0 y e c h i l d r e n o f H o r u s ]

"grant ye power unto the living soul of the (25) Osiris Nu

" w i t h i n h i s f l a m e . Let him not be repulsed and let him not be

"driven back at the doors of Amentet ; 0 l e t h i s o f f e r i n g s o f

"bread and of linen garments be brought unto him (z6) among

" [ t h o s e o f ] t h e l o r d s o f f u n e r a l o b l a t i o n s , 0 o f f e r y e p r a i s e s a s

" u n t o a g o d , t o t h e O s i r i s N u , d e s t r o y e r o f h i s o p p o n e n t [ s ] i n

" h i s f o r m o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h a n d i n h i s (27) a t t r i b u t e s o f a g o d

" o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h . "

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER FOUR FIRES [MADE

OF] ATMA CLOTH WHICH HATH BEEN ANOINTED WITH HATETUNGUENT OFTHEHENNU, AND THEY SHALL BE PLACED IN THE HANDS OF FOUR MEN

WHO SHALL HAVE THE NAMES OF THE PILLARS OF HORUS WRITTEN (28)

UPON THEIR SHOULDERS, AND THEY SHALL BURN THE FIRES IN THE BEAUTI-

FUL RAYS OF RA, AND THIS SHALL CONFER POWER AND MIGHT UPON THE

KHUAMONG THE STARS WHICH NEVER SET . IF THIS CHAPTER 13E RECITEDI5




(29) FOR HIM HE SHALL NEVER, NEVER FAIL, ANT) HE SHALL BECOME A

LIVING SOUL FOR EVER, AND THESE FIRES SHALL MAKE THE KHU AS VI-

GOROUS AS OSIRIS, ( 3 o ) THE GOVERNOR OF AMENTI, REGULARLY ANT) CON-

TINUALLY FOR E VER. IT IS A GREAT STRUGGLE. THOU SHALT NOT PER-

FORM THIS CEREMONY BEFORE ANY HUMAN BEING EXCEPT THINE OWN

SELF, OR THY FATHER, (31) OR THY SON, BECAUSE IT IS AN EXCEEDINGLY

GREAT -MYSTERY OF AMENTET, AND IS A TYPE OF THE HIDDEN THINGS OF

THE UNDERWORLD. FOR WHEN [THIS CEREMONY HATH BEEN PERFORMED]THE GODS, AND THE KHUS, AND THE DEAD SHALL SEE HIM (32) IN THE

FORM OF THE GOVERNOR OF AMENTI, AND HE SHALL HAVE POWER AND

DOMINION LIKE THIS GOT) .

IF THOU SHALT UNDERTAKE TO PERFORM FOR HIM [WHAT IS ORDERED]

IN THIS "CHAPTER OF THE FOUR BLAZING FLAMIES" EACH [DAY?], (33) THOU

WILT CAUSE THE FORM OF THE DECEASE-) TO COME FORTH FROM EVERY

HALL [IN THE UNDERWORLD] ANT) FROM THE SEVEN HALLS OF OSIRIS. AND

HE SHALL HAVE AN EXISTENCE IN THE FORM OF THE GOT), HE SHALL HAVE

POWER ANI) DOMINION CORRESPONDING TO THAT OF THE GODS ANT) THE

KHUS FOR EVER AND EVER ; HE SHALL ENTER IN THROUGH THE HIDDEN

PYLONS AND SHALL NOT BE TURNED BACK BEFORE THE GOD OSIRIS . ANT)

IT SHALL COME TO PASS, IF THESE THINGS HAVE BEEN DONE FOR HIM,THAT HE SHALL ENTER IN AND COME FORTH, (33) HE SHALL NOT BE TURNED

BACK, NO LIMIT [TO HIS JOURNEYING] SHALL BE SET, ANT) HE SHALL NOT

HAVE SENTENCE OF EVIL PASSED UPON HIM ON THE DAY OF THE NEIGHING

OF WORDS BEFORE THE GOD OSIRIS FOR EVER AND EVER .

AN I) 'THOU SHALT PERFORM [WHAT IS ORDERED IN] THIS BOOK FOR (36)

THE DECEASED, ANT) HE SHALL BECOME PERFECT AND PURE, ANI) [THOU

SHALT] OPEN HIS MOUTH WITH THE IRON INSTRUMENT, AND SHALT WRITE

DOWN THESE WRITINGS IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE THINGS WHICH ARE

FOUND IN THE BOOKS OF THE ROYAL SON HERU-TA-TA-F, (37) WHO DIS-

COVERED [THEM] IN A HIDDEN CHEST-NOW THEY WERE IN THE HAND-

WRITING OF THE GOT) HIMSELF-IN THE TEMPLE OF THE GODDESS UNNUT,

THE LADY OF UNNU (HERMOPOLIS), DURING HIS JOURNEY TO MAKE AN IN-

SPECTION (38) OF THE TEMPLES, AND OF THE LANDS, AND OF THE FUNERAL

SHRINES OF THE GODS. ANI) THESE THINGS SHALL BE DONE SECRETLY IN

THE UNDERWORLD, THEY ARE -MYSTERIES OF THE UNDERWORLD, AND

THEY ART, (39) A TYPE OF THE MYSTERIES OF NETER-KHERT

And thou s h a l t s a y :- "[I] have come advancing q u i c k l y

" a n d c a s t i n g l i g h t u p o n [ h i s ] f o o t s t e p s , a n d h i d i n g [ m y s e l f ] t o

"cast light upon his hidden place ( ? ) . I stand up behind the

" ! ' e t ; I (4o) stand up behind the 7 ' e t of Rd turning back the

" s l a u g h t e r . I a m p r o t e c t i n g t h e e , 0 O s i r i s . "




Rubric : THIS CHAPTER SHALL BE RECITED OVER A TET OF CRYSTAL

WHICH IS SET UP UPON A BRICK (4i) MADE OF GREEN CLAY WHEREUPON

HA'I'H BEEN INSCRIBED THIS CHAPTER. THEN THOU SHALT MAKE A CAVITY

IN THE WEST WALL, AND, HAVING [TURNED] THE FRONT OF THE TET TO-

WARDS THE EAST [THEREIN] THOU SHALT WALL IT UP WITH EARTH MOIST-

ENED WITH (42) CEDAR JUICE ( ? ) . IT WILL REPULSE THE ENEMIES OF OSIRIS

WHO SET THEMSELVES AT THE EAST WALL .

And thou shalt say :- " [ I ] have driven back [thy foes, and

"I] have kept watch for thee ; and he that is upon his moun-

t a i n ( i . e . , Anubis) hath kept watch (43) at thy moment, and

"hath repulsed [thy foes for thee] . I have driven back the Cro-

codile [fo r thee] at thy moment, and I am protecting thee,

"0 Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief,

"triumphant . " (44)

Rubric : THIS CHAPTER SHALT, BE RECITED OVER [A FIGURE OF] ANUBIS

MADE OF GREEN CLAY KNEADED ( ? ) WITH INCENSE AND SET UP ON A BRICK

OF GREEN CLAY WHEREUPON IT HATH BEEN INSCRIBED . (45) THEN THOU

SHALT MAKE A CAVITY IN THE EAST WALL, AND HAVING [TURNED] THE

FACE OF ANUBIS TOWARDS THE WEST [THEREIN], THOU SHALT WALL IT

UP. [IT WILL REPULSE THE ENEMIES OF OSIRIS] WHO SET THEMSELVES AT

THE SOUTH (WEST?) WALL . ( 4 6 )

And thou shalt say : "I am the collar (or girdle of sand

"around the hidden coffer turning back the arm from the blazing

"flame of the funeral mountain ; I have marched over the roads,

"and I am protecting the Osiris (47) Nu, the overseer of the

"palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant . "

Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER A BRICK OF GREEN

CLAY WHEREUPON IT HATH BEEN INSCRIBED ; AND THOU SHALT PLACE IN-

CENSE ( ? ) IN THE MIDDLE THEREOF, (48) AND THOU SHALT SMEAR IT WITH

PITCH (OR RESIN) AND SET LIGHT TO IT. THEN THOU SHALT MAKE A

CAVITY IN THE SOUTH WALL, AND HAVING [TURNED] THE FRONT OF THE

BRICK TOWARDS THE NORTH ['THEREIN], THOU SHALT WALL IT UP . [IT

WILL REPULSE THE ENEMIES OF OSIRIS] WHO SET THEMSELVES AT THE (4g)

NORTH WALL .

And thou shalt say :- "0 thou that comest to make a burning,

"I will not let thee do it ; 0 thou that comest to shoot forth

I 5




" [ f i r e ] , I w i l l n o t l e t t h e e d o i t . I w i l l b u r n t h e e , I w i l l s h o o t

" f o r t h [ f i r e ] ( 5 0 ) a t t h e e , f o r I a m p r o t e c t i n g t h e O s i r i s N u ,

" t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t . "

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER A BRICK OF GREEN

CLAY WHEREUPON IT HATH BEEN INSCRIBED, ALONG WITH A FIGURE(?)

OF A (51) PALM TREE SEVEN FINGERS IN HEIGHT ; AND THOU SHALT OPEN

ITS MOUTH. THEN THOU SHALT MAKE A CAVITY IN THE NORTH WALL, AND

HAVING [TURNED] THE FACE OF THE FIGURE TOWARDS THE SOUTH [THERE-

IN], THOU SHALT WALL IT UP [IT WILL REPULSE THE ENEMIES OF OSIRIS

WHO SET THEMSELVES AT THE SOUTH WALL] .

"And behold, these things shall be performed by a man who

"is clean and is (52) ceremonially pure, one who hath eaten

" n e i t h e r m e a t n o r f i s h , a n d w h o h a t h n o t [ r e c e n t l y ] h a d i n t e r -

"course with women ; a n d b e h o l d , t h o u s h a l t m a k e o f f e r i n g s o f

" c a k e s a n d a l e , a n d s h a l t b u r n i n c e n s e o n t h e f i r e o f t h e s e g o d s .

" ( 5 3 ) And every Khtt f o r w h o m t h e s e t h i n g s s h a l l b e d o n e s h a l l

"become like a holy god in the underworld ; h e s h a l l n o t b e

"turned back at any gate in Amentet, and he shall be in the

" f o l l o w i n g o f ( 5 4 ) O s i r i s , w h e r e s o e v e r h e g o e t h , r e g u l a r l y a n d

" c o n t i n u a l l y . " r

CHAPTER CXXXVII B .

[From the Papyrus of Nebseni (Brit . Mus . No . 9,900, sheet 6 ) . ]

Vignette : The goddess Api, the lady who giveth protection, in the form

of a hippopotamus, setting light to a vessel of incense . In the Saite Re-

cension the deceased is seen sitting upon a chair with two burning lamps

on each side of him (see Lepsius, Todtenbuch, B l . 5 6 ) ; there the Chapter

is called, "Chapter of making the flame to burn up" .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF KINDLING A FLAME BY NEBSENI,

THE SCRIBE AND DRAUGHTSMAN IN THE TEMPLE OF PTAH

[ H e s a i t h ] :-

i . The version of this Chapter found in the Papyrus of Nebseni (sheet 24)

is much shorter than t hat here given and that Papyrus omits all the supple-

mentary Chapters and rubrics which are written in the Papyrus of Nu ; a

version much shorter still is given by Naville (op . c i t . , Bd . I I . p . 361) from the

Papyrus of Nefer-uben-f at Paris .



THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO ABYDOS . 229

"The white (or shining) Eye of Horus cometh . (2) The

"brilliant Eye of Horus cometh . It cometh in peace, it sendeth

"forth rays of light unto Rd in the horizon, and it destroyeth

"the powers (3) of Set a ccording to the decree(?) . It leadeth

"them on, and it taketh possession [of him], and its f lame is

"kindled against him . [Its] flame cometh and goeth about, and

"bringeth (4) adoration(?) ; [it] cometh and goeth about heaven

"in the train of Rd upon the two hands of thy two sisters, 0

"Rd. The Eye of Horus liveth, yea liveth within the great hall ;

"the Eye of Horus liveth, yea liveth, and is An-Mdut-f . "

CHAPTER CXXXVIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 1 q ) . ]

Vignette : The standard, emblematic of the nome of Teni, the capital

of which was Abydos, surmounted by plumes and uraeus, etc . , b e i n g s e t

up by Isis and Osiris . On each side winged u t c h a t s , a f a n o r f l y - f l a p p e r

held upright by an emblem of lif e from which project human hands and

arms, the hawk emblematic of Horus-S ept, a ram having plumes above

his horns, and three gods standing upright . On one side are the Souls

of Pe, and the jackal, emble m of Anpu (Anubis) or of Ap-uat ; and on

the other are the Souls of Tel) and the jackal, emblem of Ap-uat or of

Anpu . Beneath the standard are the lion-gods of the horizon, one of

whom is called "Yesterday" and the other "To-morrow" .

Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING INTO ABTU, AND OF

BEING IN THE FOLLOWING OF OSInIs . The Osiris Nu, the over-

seer of the house, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, saith :- (2)

"Hail, ye gods who dwell in Abtu (Abydos), ye divine sove-

reign chiefs who are gathered together, come y e forwar d with

"joy and gladness to (3) meet me, and look ye upon my divine

"father Osiris . I have been judged, and I have come forth f rom

"his shrine . I am Horus, the lord of Qemt (Egypt), and of the

"(4) red hilly desert ; I have taken possession thereof . There is

"none who hath power over him, his Eye is mighty against his

"enemies, he bath avenged his divine Father, he hath destroyed



23o THE CHAPTERS OF CO41ING FORTH B Y DAY.

" t h e w a t e r f l o o d o f h i s m o t h e r , h e h a t h ( 5 ) c r u s h e d h i s e n e m i e s ,

" h e h a t h p u t d o w n v i o l e n c e m i g h t i l y , a n d b a t h s t i l l e d t h e s t r e n g t h

" o f t h e g o d N e b t . T h e d i v i n e p r i n c e o f m a n y p e o p l e s , t h e s o v e -

r e i g n o f t h e t w o l a n d s , b a t h t a k e n p o s s e s s i o n o f t h e h o u s e o f

" h i s d i v i n e F a t h e r ( 6 ) b y m e a n s o f t h e w r i t t e n d e c r e e s . I h a v e

"been tried in the Balance, my word is right and true, I have

" g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r m y e n e m i e s , a n d b r i n g t o n a u g h t ( ? ) t h e

"things (7) which they work against me . I am strong in the

"strength which protecteth me, I am the son of Osiris, and my

" d i v i n e F a t h e r p r o t e c t e t h h i s b o d y w i t h s t r e n g t h a n d m i g h t ( ? ). "

CHAPTER CXXXIX .

[See Chapter CXXIII . ]

CHAPTER CXL .

[From Lepsius, Todtenbnch, BI . 5 i . 1

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g , w i t h b o t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n ad o r a t i o n ,

b e f o r e t h e ja c k a l o f A n u b i s w h i c h i s c o u c h a n t o n a p y l o n , a k n e el i n g

f i g u r e h a v i n g a n utchat o n h i s h e a d , a n d t h e g o d R d .

Text : THE BOOK WHICH IS TO BE RECITED ON THE LAST

DAY OF THE SECOND MONTH OF THE SEASON PERTI WHEN THE

UTCHAT IS FULL IN THE SECOND MONTH OF THE SEASON PERT( i ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h s a i t h :-

"The divine Power hath risen and shineth [in] the horizon,

"and the god Tem bath risen [out of] the odour of that which

" floweth from him . The Khus s h i n e i n h e a v e n a n d H e t - b e n b e n e t

" ( 2 ) rejoiceth, for there is among them a form which is like

" u n t o t h e m s e l v e s ; and there are shouts and cries of gladness

"within the shrine, and the sounds of those who rejoice go

"round about through the underworld, ( 3 ) a n d h o m a g e [ i s p a i d ]

i . I . e . , t h e s i x t h m o n t h o f t h e E g y p t i a n y e a r , w h i c h t h e E g y p t i a n C h r i s t i a n s

or Copts call Mekhir .Mt,gtp or a .exlp, Gr. U E Y L P



THE BOOK OF THE SECOND MONTH OF PERT 231

"unto him at the decree of Tem and Heru-khuti (Harmachis) .

"His Majesty ordereth the company of the gods to follow in

" t h e t r a i n o f h i s M a j e s t y ; h i s M a j e s t y o r d e r e t h t h e c a l l i n g o f

" t h e U t c h a t with you [to] (¢) my members . He hath given

"strength to all my limbs, and hath made them vigorous that

"which cometh forth from the mouth of His Majesty . H i s d i v i n e

"Eye resteth upon its seat with His Majesty at that hour (5)

"of the night, on the day(?) of the fulfilment of the fourth

"hour ( o r f o u r h o u r s ) o f t h e b e a u t i f u l l a n d ( ? ) , o n t h e l a s t d a y

` . of the second month of the season p e r t . The Majesty of the

" U t c h a t i s in the presence of the company of the gods, and

"His Majesty shineth as he shone in the primeval time, when

" t h e U t c h a t w a s [ f i r s t ] ( 6 ) u p o n h i s h e a d . Rd, Tem, Utchatet,

" S h u , S e b , O s i r i s , S u t i , H o r n s , M e n t h , B a h , R a - e r - n e h e h , T e h u t i ,

" N a a m , ( 7 ) T c h e t t a , N u t , I s i s , N e p h t h y s , H a t h o r , N e k h t , M e r t ( ? ) ,

"Maat, Anpu, and Ta-mes-tchetta [are] the soul and body of

"Rd.8 ) T h e c o m p u t a t i o n o f t h e U t c h a thath been made in the

" p r e s e n c e o f t h e d i v i n e l o r d o f t h i s e a r t h ; i t i s f u l l t o t h e u t t e r -

m o s t , a n d i t r e s t e t h ( o r s e t t e t h ) . A n d t h e s e g o d s a r e r e j o i c i n g

"on this day, and they have their hands beneath (?) them, and

" t h e f e s t i v a l o f e v e r y g o d ( 9 ) h a v i n g b e e n c e l e b r a t e d , t h e y s a y :-

"Hail, praise be unto thee, 0 thou who art as Rd, rejoice in

" h i m , f o r t h e m a r i n e r s o f [ h i s ] b o a t s a i l r o u n d a b o u t , a n d [ h e ]

"hath overthrown the fiend Apep . H a i l , p r a i s e b e u n t o t h e e , 0

"thou who art as Rd who maketh himself to come into being

" ( 1 o ) i n t h e f o r m o f t h e g o d K h e p e r a . H a i l , p r a i s e b e u n t o t h e e ,

"0 thou who art as Rd, for [he] hath destroyed his enemies .

" H a i l , p r a i s e b e u n t o R d , f o r h e h a t h c r u s h e d t h e h e a d s o f t h e

" c h i l d r e n (i 1) o f i m p o t e n t r e b e l l i o n . And praise and rejoicing

"be unto the Osiris Auf-Ankh, triumphant . "

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER AN UTCHAT OF

REAL LAPIS-LAZULI OR OF 11AK S'T'ONE PLATED WITH GOLD, BEFORE

WHICH SHALL BE OFFERED ( 1 2 ) EVERY KIND OF FAIR AND PURE OBLATION

WHEN RA SHEWETH HIMSELF ON THE LAST DAY OF THE SECOND MONTH

OF THE SEASON PERT AND THOU SHALT MAKE ANOTHER UTCHAT OF

JASPER AND PLACE IT UPON SUCH PART OF THE DEAD MAN'S BODY AS




THOU PLEASEST, AND WHEN THIS CHAPTER HATH BEEN RECITED (i3) BE-

FORE THE BOAT OF RA, THE DECEASED SHALL BE BORNE ALONG WITH

THESE GODS, AND HE SHALL BECOME ONE OF THEM, AND HE SHALL BE

MADE TO RISE UP IN THE UNDERWORLD. AND WHILST THIS CHAPTER IS

BEING RECITED, AND LIKEWISE WHILST THE OFFERINGS ARE BEING MADE

(1q) AT THE TIME WHEN THE UTCHAT IS FULL, FOUR ALTARS SHALL BE

LIGHTED FOR RA-TEM, AND FOUR FOR THE UTCHAT, AND FOUR FOR THE

GODS WHO HAVE BEEN MENTIONED . AND UPON EACH ONE OF THEM SHALL

THERE BE BREAD-CAKES MADE OF FINE FLOUR, AND FIVE WHITE CAKES,

AND PLANTS ( ? ) , AND FIVE WHITE CAKES, AND SHAI, AND FIVE B A A Q , ANDOF INCENSE ONE MEASURE, AND OF TEQ INCENSE ONE MEASURE, AND ONE

ROASTED JOINT OF MEAT .

CHAPTERS CXLI AND CXLII .

[From the Papyrus o f Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 10,477, sheet 1 5 ) . ]

Vignette : The deceased, with hands raised in adoration, bowing before

a table of offerings of every kind ; or, the deceased standing and offering

incense and pouring out a libation be fore Osiris ; or, the god Osiris seat-

ed within a shrine on a throne, by the side of which stand I s i s and

Nephthys . On a lotus flower stand the four Children of Horus, and on

a standard is a jackal, emblematic of Anub is . These Vignettes are figured

by Naville (op . c i t . , Bd . I . Bl . 153), and differ entirely f rom the Vignette

which accompanies Chapter CXLII in the Saite Recension (see Lepsius,

op . c i t . , B l . 5 9 ) . Originally the text of Chapters CXLI and CXLII formed

one composition, but it might readily be divided into two sections, vi z . ,

the list of the gods to whom a man was directed to make offerings for

the bene fit o f his f ather and his son, and a list o f the names o f Osiris,

and this is what the Editors of t he Saite Recension actually did, and they

emphasized the division b y giving to each section a distinct title .

Text : [ HERE BEGINNETH] THE BOOK I [WHICH] A MAN SHALL

RECITE FOR HIS FATHER OR FOR HIS SON DURING THE FESTI-

VALS OF AMENTET2WHEREBY HE SHALL MAKE HIM PERFECT

WITH RA AND WITH THE GODS, AND WHEREBY HE SHALL HAVE

I . In the Saite Recension the title of the first section runs :- "[HERE BE-"GINNETH] THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE DECEASED, AND OF KNOW-

ING THE NAMES OF THE GODS OF THE SOUTHERN AND NORTHERN"HEAVENS, AND OF THE GODS OF THE QERTI, AND OF THE GODS WHO"ARE THE GUIDES OF THE UNDERWORLD (TUAI) . IT SHALL BE RECITED

"BY A MAN FOR HIS FATHER OR FOR HIS MOTHER," etc .



THE BOOK OF THE FESTIVAL OF AMENTET. 233

HIS EXISTENCE WITH THEM ; IT SHALL BE RECITED ON THE

NINTH DAY OF THE FESTIVAL . Behold, the Osiris Nu, the over-

seer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, triumphant, maketh

offerings of cakes, and ale, and oxen, and feathered fowl, and

joints of roast meat ; and he burneth incense

i . to Osiris, the governor of Amenti,t

2 . to Ra-Heru-khuti (Rd-Harmachis), 2

3 . to Nu, 3

4 . to Maat,

5 . to the Boat of Rd,

6 . to Temu, 4

7- to the Great company of the gods,

8 . to the Little company of the gods,

g . to Horns, the lord of the ureret crown,

to . to Shu,

i i . to Tefnut,

1 2 . to Seb,'

i 3 . t o Nut,b

1 4 -t o I s i s ,

1 5 . to Nephthys, 7

16 . to the Temple of the Kas of Nebt-er-tcher,

17 . to the Raging-one-of-heaven-who-raiseth-up-the god,

i 8 . to Aukert 8 -dwelling-in-her-place,

i g . to the city of Meht-Khebitet, the sahu of the god,

20 . to the Goddess-greatly-beloved-with-red-hair,

2 1 . to the Goddess-joined-unto-life-with-f lowing-hair,

22 . to the Goddess-whose-name-is-mighty-in-her-works,

23 . to the Bull, the husband of the divine Cow, 9

24 . to the beautiful Power of the beautiful Rudder of the

northern heaven, to

i . The S . R . ( i . e ., Saite Recension) adds, "lord of the four districts of

Abtu (Abydos) . " 2 . S . R . , H e r u - k h u t i . 3 . T h e S . R . a d d s , " F a t h e r o f t h e g o d s . "

4 . S . R ., Tem-Khepera . 5 . I n t h e S . R. Seb and Nu are mentioned together .

6 . I n t h e S . R. Seb and Nut are mentioned together . 7 . In the S . R . O s i r i s ,

Isis, and Nephthys are mentioned together . 8 . I n t h e S . R . , A m e n t i . 9 . I n t h e

S . R ., "To the Bull of the Cows ." io . I n t h e S . R . , " T o t h e b e a u t i f u l P o w e r ,

the Opener of the D isk . To the beautiful Rudder of the northern heaven . "




2 5 . to Him that revolveth, the guide of the two lands, the

b e a u t i f u l R u d d e r o f t h e w e s t e r n h e a v e n , '

2 6 . to the God of light, who dwelleth in the Temple of the

ashemu 2 b e i n g s , t h e b e a u t i f u l R u d d e r o f t h e e a s t e r n h e a v e n , r3

2 7 . to the Dweller in the Temple of the ruddy ones, the

b e a u t i f u l R u d d e r o f t h e s o u t h e r n h e a v e n , 3

28 . t o M e s t h i ,

29 . t o H a p i ,

3 o . t o Tuamautef,

3 1 . t o Q e b h s e n n u f , 4

32 . t o t h e Atert o f t h e S o u t h ,

3 3 . t o t h e A t e r t o f t h e N o r t h ,

3 4 , t o t h e S e k t e t b o a t ,5

3 5 . t o t h e A t e t b o a t , 6

3 6 . t o T h o t h , 7

3 7 . t o t h e G o d s o f t h e S o u t h ,

3 8 . t o t h e G o d s o f t h e N o r t h , "

3 9 . to the Gods of the West,

4 0 , t o t h e G o d s o f t h e E a s t , 9

4 1 . to the Gods of the Thigh,

42 . t o t h e G o d s o f t h e f u n e r a l o f f e r i n g s , ' 0

4 3 . t o t h e G r e a t H o u s e ,

44 . to the Temple of Flame,"

45. t o t h e G o d s o f t h e p l a c e s o f t h e d e a d ,

4 6 . t o t h e G o d s o f t h e h o r i z o n , r 2

4 7. t o t h e G o d s o f t h e f i e l d s ,

i . I n t h e S . R . "To Him that revolveth, the guide of the two lands . T o t h e

b e a u t i f u l R u d d e r o f t h e e a s t e r n h e a v e n . " 2 . 1 . e . , t h e g o d s i n m a t e r i a l f o r m s .

3 . I n t h e S . R . t h i s p a r a g r a p h i s i n t w o s e c t i o n s . 4 . I n t h e S . R . t h e f o u r " c h i l d r e n

of Horns" are mentioned together . 5 . I n t h e S . R . the two boats of the Sun

are mentioned together . 6 . After "Atet boat", the S . R . adds, "to Hathor . "

7. I n t h e S . R . "To Thoth, the Bull of Maat, to Thoth, the Weigher of the

words of the Company of the gods, to Thoth, the Guide of the gods ." 8 . I n

the S . R . the gods of the South and North are mentioned together . 9 . I n t h e

S . R . the gods of the W est and East are mentioned t o g e t h e r . s o . T h i s l i n e i s

omitted in the S . R . i i . In the S . R . the "Great Double-House," and the

"Double-House of Flame" are mentioned together . 1 2 . In the S . R . t h e g o d s

of the cemeteries and of the horizon are mentioned together .



THE BOOK OF THE FESTIVAL OF A_p1ENTET . 235

48. t o t h e God s o f t h e d iv in e P e r t i , I

49. t o t h e God s o f t h e d iv in e N e s t i , 2

50. to the Roads of the South,

5' . t o t h e Roa d s o f t h e Nor t h , 3

52 . to the Roads of the East,

53 . to the Roads of the West, 4

54 . to the Doors of the Underworld,

55 . to the Pylons of the Underworld,

56 . t o t h e Lea v es o f t h e h id d en d oor s ,

57 . to the hidden doors,

58 . to the Guardians of the leaves of the

(Underworld), 5

59. to the Hidden Faces who guard the roads,

6 o . t o the Guardians who give divine food(?),

6 i . to t h e Gu a r d ia n s o f t h e f u n er a l mou n t a in s wh o giv e h a ppy

faces ( ? ) ,

62 . to the Flaming beings who give forth fire,

63. to the divine burning Altars,

64 . to those who scatter and extinguish the flame of f ire in

Amentet, 6

65 . to Osiris-Un-nefer, 7

66. to Osiris-Ankhti,

t . I n t h e S . R . t he g od s o f th e f i e l d s an d o f th e Q e r t i ( no t P e r t i ) are men-

t i o n e d t o g e t h e r . 2 . In the S . R . , " l i tt l e o ne s . " 3 . I n th e S . R . t h e g o d s o f t he

r e t c h e s and the southern and northern roads are mentioned together . 4 . I n

the S . R . the roads of the W est and East are mentioned together .5. I n t h e

S . R . we have :-"To the Guide of the doors of the Tuat, to the Doorkeepers

of the Tuat and of the pylons of the Tuat, to the hidden pylons of the Tuat,

t o t h e D o o r k e e p e r s o f t h e p y l o n s o f t h e T u a t , t o t h e h i d d e n d o o r s o f t h e T u a t . "

6 . I n t h e S . R . we have :-"To t h o s e w h o s c a t t e r a n d e x t i n g u i s h t h e f i r e , t o

t h e f i r e i n A m e n t e t , " a n d a f t e r t h e s e l i n e s a r e a d d e d t h e f o l l o w i n g

"To Him that giveth triumph to the Khu,

"To the Perfect one in Amentet,

"To the East (Abtet) and to its Ka .

7 . I n t h e S . R . here begins Chapter CXLII with the title, "The Book of

" m a k i n g p e r f e c t t h e d e c e a s e d , a n d o f m a k i n g [ h i m ] t o a d v a n c e w i t h l o n g s t r i de s ,

"and to come forth by day in all the transformations which he pleaseth, and

"to know the names of the god Osiris in every place wherein he chooseth

"to be. "

Doors of the T u a t




6 7 . t o O s i r i s - l o r d - o f - l i f e ,

6 8 . t o O s i r i s - l o r d - o f - w h o l e n e s s ,

6 9 . t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - P e k u ( ? ) ,

7 0 . t o O s i r i s - O r i o n ( S a l z ) ,

7 1. t o O s i r i s - S a a ,

7 2 . t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - t em p l e s ,

7 3 . t o O s i r i s - i n - R e s e n e t ,

74 . t o O s i r i s - i n - M e h e n e t ,

7 5. t o O s i r i s - g o l d en - o n e - o f - m i l l i o ns - o f - y e a r s ,

76 . t o O s i r i s - B a t i - e rp i t ,

77 . t o O s i r i s - P t a h - l o r d - o f - l i f e,

78 . t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r- i n - R e - s t a u ,

79 . t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - t h e - f u n e r a l - m o u n t a i n ,

8 o . t o O si ri s - in - At i,

8 1 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S e p t e t ,

82 . t o O s i r i s - i n - N e t c h e f e t ,

83 . t o O s i r i s - i n - R e s u ,

84 . t o O s i r is - i n - P e ,

85 . t o O s i r i s - i n- N e t e r u ,

8 6 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S a u - t h e - L o w e r ,

8 7 . t o O s i r i s - i n - B a k e t ,

8 8 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S u n n u ,

89 . t o O s i r i s - i n - R e h e n e n e t ,

g o. t

o O s i r i s - i n - A p e n ,

g i . t o O s i r i s - i n - Q e f e n n u ,

9 2 . t o O s i r i s - S e k r i - i n - P e t - s h e ,

9 3 . t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - h i s - c i t y ,

94 . t o O s i r i s - i n - P e s k - r e ,

95 . t o O s i r i s - i n - h i s - h a b i t a t i o n s - i n - t h e - L a n d - o f - t h e - N o r t h ,

g 6 . t o O s i r i s - i n - h e a v e n .

97 . t o O s i r i s - i n - h i s - h a b i t a t i on s - i n - R e - s t a u ,

98 . t o O s i r i s - N e t c h e s t i ,

9 9 . t o O s i r i s - A t e f - u r ,

i o o . to O s i r i s - S e k r i ,

101 . t o O s i r i s - g o v e r n o r - o f - et e r n i ty ,

1 0 2 . t o O s i r i s - t h e - b e g e t t e r ,



THE BOOK OF FLAKING PERFECT THE DECEASED . 237

i o3 . t o O s i r i s - i n - t he - w a t e r ( ? ) ,

10 4 . t o O s i r i s - i n - b a t t l e ( ?) ,

105 . t o O s i r i s - l o r d - o f - e v e r l a s t i n g n es s ,

i o6 . t o O s i r is - P r i n c e ,

1 0 7. t o O s i r i s - T a i t i ,

i o8 . t o O s i r i s - i n - R e - s t a u ,

1 o g . t o O s i r i s - u p o n - h i s - s a n d ,

I I o i t o O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - t h e - h a l l - o f - t h e - C o w ,

I II . t o O s i r i s - i n - T a n e n e t ,

112 . t o O s i r i s - i n - N e t e b i t ,

i 1 3 . t o O s i r i s - i n- S a a ,

114 . t o O s i r i s - i n - B e t e sh u ,

115 t o O s i r i s - i n - T e p u ,

i 1 6 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S a u - t h e - U p p e r ,

117 . t o O s i r i s - i n - N e p e r t ,

1 1 8 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S h e n n u ,

I I g i t o O s i r i s - i n - l , I e n k e t ,

120 . t o O s i r i s - i n - T a - s e k r i ,

121 . t o O s i r i s - i n - S h a u ,

122 . t o O s i r i s - i n - F a t - H e r u ,

123 . t o O s i r i s - i n - M a a t i ,

124 . t o O s i r i s - i n - H e n a .

I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l . 5 9 ) C h a p t e r

CXLII is much fuller than in the papyri extant which contain

the Theban Recension ; a s t h e r e g i v e n i t i s i n a t a b u l a r f o r m

a n d i s d i v i d e d i n t o s i x s e c t i o n s e a c h c o n t a i n i n g t w e n t y - s i x l i n e s .

I t r u n s :-

Text : THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE DECEASED AND

OF MAKING HIM TO ADVANCE WITH LONG STRIDES, AND TO

COME FORTH BY DAY IN ALL THE TRANSFORMATIONS WHICH

PLEASE HIM, AND TO KNOW THE NAMES OF THE GOD OSIRIS

IN EVERY PLACE WHEREIN HE CHOOSETH TO BE . The Osiris

Auf-ankh, born of Sheret-Amsu, triumphant, saith :-

I . ( 1 ) " O s i r i s - U n - n e f e r , ( 2 ) O s i r i s - t he - l i v i n g - o n e , ( 3 ) O s i r i s -

" l o r d - o f - l i f e , ( 4 ) O s i r i s - N e b - e r - t c h e r , ( 5 ) O s i r i s - o p e n e r - o f - t h e -




" b a c k - o f - t h e - t w o - l a n d s , ( 6 ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - U n , ( 7 ) O s i r i s -

" d w e l l e r - in - c o r n , ( 8 ) O s i r i s - S a h ( O r i o n ) , ( g ) O s i r i s - h o l y - c r o w n -

" o f - t h e - S o u l s - o f - A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , ( io ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - T h e n e -

" n e t , ( i i ) O s i r i s - i n - R e s e n e t , ( 1 2 ) O s i r i s - i n - M e h e n e t , ( i 3 ) O s i r i s -

" l o r d - o f - m i l l i o n s - o f - y e a r s , ( r 4 ) O s i r i s - s o n - o f - t h e - E r p e t i ( i . e . , I s i s

" a n d N e p h t h y s ) , ( r 5 ) O s ir i s- P t a h -l o rd - of - l if e , ( r 6 ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r -

" i n - R e - s t a u , ( 1 7 ) O s i r i s - g o v e r n o r - o f - t h e - w o r l d - d w e l l i n g - i n - T a t t u ,

" ( 1 8 ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - t h e - f u n e r a l - m o u n t a i n , ( r g ) O s i r i s - h o l y -

" S o u l - i n - T a t t u , ( 2 0 ) O s i r i s - i n - A t i ( ? ) , ( 2 1 ) O s i r i s - i n - H e s e t , " o r

a s o t h e r s s a y , " i n N e t e r - s e h , ( 2 2 ) O s i r i s - l o r d - o f- T a - a n k h t e t ( i . e . ,

" L a n d o f L i f e ) , ( 2 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - S a u ( S a i s ) , ( 2 4 ) O s i r i s- i n - N e t c h e t ,

" ( 2 5 ) O s i r i s - i n - t h e - S o u t h , " o r a s o t h e r s s a y , " a m o n g - t h e- d i v i n e -

" s o v e r e i g n - c h i e f s , ( 2 6 ) O s i r i s - i n - P e . "

I I . " ( 1 ) O s i r i s - i n - T e p t , (2 ) O s i r i s - i n- N e t r a , ( 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - L o w e r -

" S a u ( S a i s ) , ( 4 ) O s i r i s - i n - U p p e r - S a u ( S a i s ) , ( 5 ) O s i r i s - i n- A n - r u t - f ,

" ( 6 ) O s i r i s - i n - t h e - t w o - h aw k - g o d s , ( 7) O s i r i s - i n - S u n n u , ( 8 ) O s i r i s -

" i n - R e n e n , ( g) O s i r i s - i n - A p e r , ( i o ) O s i r i s - i n - Q e f e n n u , ( i r ) O si r i s -

" i n - S e k r i , ( 1 2 ) O s i r i s - i n - P e t e t , ( r 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - h is - t e m p l e - i n - R e -

" s t a u , ( r 4 ) O s i r i s - i n - N i f - u r , (t 5 ) O s i r i s - i n - N e t i t , ( r 6 ) O s i r i s -

" d w e l l e r - i n - hi s - c i t y , ( r 7 ) O s i r i s - H e n t i ( i . e . , O s i r i s o f t h e t w o

" c r o c o d i l e s ) , ( r 8 ) O s i r i s - i n- P e k e s , ( r g ) O s i r i s - i n - h i s - t e m p l e - i n - t h e -

" L a n d - o f - t h e - S o u t h , ( 2 0 ) O s i r i s - i n - h is - t e m p l e - i n - t h e - L a nd - o f - t h e -

" N o r t h , ( 2 1 ) O s i r i s - i n - h e a v e n , ( 2 2 ) O s i r i s - o n - e a r t h , ( 2 3 ) O s i r i s -

" u p o n - [ h i s - ] t h r o n e , ( 2 4 ) O s i r i s - i n - A t e f - u r , ( 2 5 ) O s i r i s - S e k e r - i n -

" t h e- c l o s e d - c h e s t, (26) O s i r i s - p r i n c e - o f - e t e r n it y - i n - A n n u . "

I I I . ( r ) " O s i r i s - t h e - b e g e t t e r , ( 2 ) O s i r i s - i n - t h e - S e k te t - b o a t , ( 3 )

" O s i r i s - i n - R e r t u - n i f u , ( 4 ) O s i r i s - l o r d - o f - e t e r n i t y , ( 5 ) O s i r i s - l o r d -

" o f - e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , ( 6 ) O s i r i s - i n - T e s h er , ( 7) O s i r i s - i n - S e s h e t, ( 8 )

" O s i r i s - i n - U t - r e s e t , ( g ) O s i r i s - i n - U t - m eh t , ( i o ) O s i r i s - i n - A a t - u r t,

" ( i i ) O s i r is -i n- A p e r t, ( 1 2 ) O s i r i s - i n - S h e n n u , ( r 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - H e -

" k e n n u t , " o r a s o t h e r s s a y , " i n - H e s e r t ,( 1 4 )

O s i r i s - i n - S e k e r , ( r 5 )

" O s i r i s - i n - S h a u , ( 1 6 ) O s i r i s - f a - H e r u ,( 1 7 )

O s i r i s- i n - U u - P e l z , ( 1 8 )

" O s i r i s - i n - M a a t i , ( r g ) O s i r i s - i n - M e n d , ( 2 0 ) O s i r i s - S o u l s - o f - h i s -

" f a t h e r , ( 2 1 ) O s i r i s - l o r d - o f- t h e - w o r l d - k i n g- o f - t h e - g o ds , ( 2 2 ) O s i r i s -

" i n - B e n e r , ( 2 3 ) O s i r i s - T a i , ( 2 4 ) O s i r i s - o n - h i s - s a n d , ( 2 5 ) O s i r is -

" d w e l l e r - i n - t h e- h a l l - o f - h i s - C o w s , ( 2 6 ) O s i r i s - i n - S a . "



THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE DECEASED . 2 3 9

IV . ( i ) " O s i r i s - i n - S ~ i p t i , ( 2 ) O s i r i s - i n - A s h e r , ( 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - a l l -

" l a n d s , ( 4 ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - t h e - p o o l - o f - t h e - G r e a t - d o u b l e - H o u s e ,

" ( 5 ) O s i r i s - i n - H e t - b e n b e n e t , ( 6 ) O s i r i s - i n - A n n u , ( 7 ) O s i r i s - t h e -

" a g e d - C h i e f - i n - A n n u , ( 8 ) O s i r i s - i n - H e m a k , ( g ) O s i r i s - i n - A k e s h ,

" ( i o ) O s i r i s - i n - P e - o f - N u , ( i i ) O s i r i s - i n - t h e - G r e a t - T e m p l e , ( I 2 )

" O s i r is - l o r d- o f - l i fe - i n - A b t u , ( i 3 ) O s i r i s- l o r d - of - T a t tu , ( 1 4) O s ir is -

" d w e l l e r - i n - t h e - t h r o n e - o f - h i s - h a b i t a t i o n s ( ? ) , ( i 5 ) O s i r i s- P r i n c e - i n -

" A b t u , ( i 6 ) O s i r i s - P r i n c e - i n - t h e - h i d d e n - p l a c e , ( i 7 ) O s i r i s - i n - l i f e -

" i n - l ; I e t - k a - P t a h , ( i 8 ) O s i r i s - l o r d - o f - m i g h t - d e s t r o y e r - o f - t h e - f o e ,

" ( i g ) O s i r i s - B u l l - i n - Q e m t , ( 2 0 ) O si ri s- ah et i, ( 2 1 ) O si r i s- se h, ( 22 )

" O s i r i s - H e r u - k h u t i , ( 2 3 ) Tem-Bull-of-the-body-of-the-Great-Com-

" p a n y - o f - t h e - g o d s , ( 2 4 ) O p e n e r - o f - t h e - r o a d s - o f - t h e - s o u t h - g o v e r n -

" o r - o f - t h e - t w o - l a n d s , ( 2 5 ) O p e n e r - o f - t h e - r o a d s - o f - t h e - n o r t h - g o -

" v e r n o r - o f - h e a v e n , ( 2 6 ) P t a h - s t a b l i s h e r - o f - t h e - h o l y - s e a t - o f - R a . "

V . ( i ) " O n e - i n v o k e d ( ? ) - i n - H e t - b e n b e n e t , ( 2 ) S e b - p r i n c e - o f - t h e -

" g o d s , ( 3 ) H e r u - u r , ( 4 ) H e r u - k h e n t e t - a n - m a a t i , ( 5 ) H e r u - s a - A u s e t ,

"(6) Amsu-suten-Heru-nekht, (7) An-mut-f-ab-ur, (8) Khnemu-

" H e r u - h e t e p , ( g ) H e r u - s e k h a i , ( i o ) H e r u - k h e n t - K h a t t h i , ( i i ) H e r u -

" T e h u t i , ( i 2 ) An-Heru, (r3) Anpu-khent-neter-seh, ( i 4 ) N u t ,

" ( i 5 ) I s i s - g o d d e s s - i n - a l l - h e r - n a m e s , ( 1 6 ) R e - s e k h a i t , ( i 7 ) S h e n t h i t ,

" ( i 8 ) H e g t i t , ( i g ) N e s h e m e t - B o a t - l o r d - o f - e t e r n i t y , ( 2 0 ) N i t ( N e i t h ) -

" S e r q e t , ( 2 1 ) M a a t , ( 2 2 ) A h i t , ( 2 3 ) T h e - f o u r - b i r t h - p l a c e s - i n - A b t u ,

" ( 2 4 ) Great-Meskhen, ( 2 5 ) Meskhen-Seqebet, ( 2 6 ) Meskhen-Men-

" k h e t . "

VI . ( r ) " M e s k h e n - n e f e r t , ( 2 ) A m s e t h , ( 3 ) I - 1 a p i , ( 4 ) Tuamautef,

" ( 5 ) Qebhsennuf, ( 6 ) U r a e u s - w i t h i n - t h e - D i v i n e - H o u s e , ( 7 ) G o d s -

"guides-of-the-Tuat, (8) Gods-of-the-Qerti, (g) Gods-goddess-

"within-Abtu, (io) Shrines-North-South, (ii) Devoted-ones-of-

" O s i r i s , ( i 2 ) O s i r i s - d w e l l e r - i n - A m e n t e t , ( i3 ) O s i r i s - in - h i s - ev e r y -

" p l a c e , ( 1 4 ) O s i r i s - i n - h i s - p l a c e - i n - t h e - L a n d - o f - t h e - S o u t h , ( i 5 )

" O s i r i s - i n - h i s - p l a c e - i n - t h e - L a n d - o f - t h e - N o r t h , ( 1 6 ) O s ir is - in - ev e r y -

" p l a c e - w h e r e - h i s - K A - w i s h e t h - t o - b e , ( i 7 ) O s i r i s - i n - a l l - h i s - h a l l s ,

" ( i 8 ) O s i r i s - i n - a l l - h i s - c r e a t i o ns , ( i g ) O s i r i s - i n - a l l - h i s - n a m e s , ( 2 0 )

" O s i r i s - i n- a l l - h i s h o l d i n gs , ( 2 I ) O s i r i s - i n a 1 1 - h i s - r i s i n g s , ( 2 2 ) O s i r i s -

" i n - a l l - h i s - o r n a m e n t a t i o n s , ( 2 3 ) O s i r i s - i n - a l l - h i s - s t a t i o n s , ( 2 4 )




"Heru-netch-tef -f-in-his-every-na me, (25) Anpu-dweller- in-the-

"selz-hall-in-his-every-name, (26) Anpu-in-the -town -of-emba lm-

"mentCHAPTER CXLIII .

Chapter CXLIII consists of the Vignette to Chapter CXLII

(see Lepsius, op . c i t ., Pl . 59) which is f ound in the Saite Re-

cension only . This Vignette is divided into five sections :- (i)

A woman standing upright with arms pendent . ( 2 ) A hawk

upon a standard placed in a boat . (3) A man, with his left

hand raised as if in invocation, standing in a boat ; before him

are two disks, one large and one small . ( 4 ) The S e k t e t boat

wherein are two hawks upon standards . (5) A man (the de-

ceased) standing upright with both hands ra ised in adoration .

CHAPTER CXLIV .

[From the Papyrus o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . N o . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 6 ) . ]

Vignette : The seven Arits (or mansions) . I

Text : ( I ) [THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN . The Osiris Nu,

triumphant, saith :-] 2

I . "THE FIRST ARIT. Sekhet-hra-asht-aru is the name of the

"doorkeeper of the first Arit, Semetu is the name of the watcher,

"and Hu-kheru is the name of the herald thereof. "

I I . "THE SECOND ARIT. Tun-hat is the name of the door-

"keeper of the second Arit, Se-qet-hra is the name of the watcher,

"and Sabes is the name of the herald th ereof . "

I . In many papyri two gods, each holding a knife, are seated before each

door ; one i s the herald and the other the watcher . Each door i s u s u a l l y

numbered . S e e N a v i l l e , op . c i t . , Bd . I . B l 1 5 4 -

2 . T h e t i t l e o f t h i s C h a p t e r i s taken from the B rocklehurst Papyrus ( i b i d . ) .

I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n i t i s called "The knowing o f the names o f t h e A ri t s " .



THE CHAPTER OF THE ARITS. 2 4 1

I I I . "THE THIRD ARIT . Am-huat-ent-peh-fi is the name of

"the doorkeeper of the third Arit, Res-hra is the name of the

"watcher and Uaau is the name of the herald thereof . "

IV. "THE FOURTH ARIT . Khesef-hra-dsht-kheru is the name

"of the doorkeeper of the fourth Arit, Res-jib is the name of

"the watcher, and Neteka-hra-khesef-atu is the name of the

" h e r a l d t h e r e o f . "

V. "THE FIFTH ARIT . A n k h - e m - f e n t u i s t h e n a m e o f t h e d o o r -

"keeper of the fifth Arit, Ashebu is the name of the watcher,

"and Teb-her-kehaat is the name of the herald thereof. "

VI . "THE SIXTH ARIT . A k e n - t a u - k - h a - k h e r u i s t h e n a m e o f t h e

" d o o r k e e p e r o f t h e s i x t h A r i t , A n - h r a i s t h e n a m e o f t h e w a t c h e r ,

" a n d M e t e s - h r a - a r i - s h e i s t h e n a m e o f t h e h e r a l d t h e r e o f . "

VII . "THE S EVENTH ARIT . M e t e s - s e n i s t h e n a m e o f t h e d o o r -

" k e e p e r o f t h e s e v e n t h A r i t , A a a - k h e r u i s t h e n a m e o f t h e w a t c h e r ,

"and Khesef-hra-khemiu is the name of the herald thereof . "

( r ) " H a i l , I y e A r i t s ! H a i l , y e w h o m a k e t h e A r i t s f o r O s i r i s !

" H a i l , y e w h o w a t c h y o u r A r i t s ! H a i l , y e w h o h e r a l d t h e a f f a i r s

" o f t h e ( 2 ) two lands for the god Osiris each day, the Osiris

" N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m -

phant, knoweth you, and he knoweth your names . T h e O s i r i s

"Nu hath been born in Re-stau, (3) and every glory of the ho-

rizon [and] every honour have been given unto him. The

" O s i r i s N u i s i n t h e c i t y o f P e l i k e t h e p u r e b e i n g ( ? ) O s i r i s .

"The Osiris Nu hath received acclamations in Re-stau, and ( 4 )

"the gods lead [him] over the horizon along with the divine

"princes who are behind Osiris . I am the divine One among

"them, and [I am] their leader . The Osiris Nu (5) is a Khu,

" t h e l o r d o f t h e Khus, a Khu [who] worketh . The Osiris Nu

"celebrateth the monthly festival and he is the herald of the

" h a l f - m o n t h l y f e s t i v a l . H a i l , t h o u t h a t r e v o l v e s t , t h e O s i r i s N u

" ( 6 ) i s u n d e r t h e f i e r y E y e o f H o r n s , a n d h e i s u n d e r t h e h a n d

"of Thoth on the night when he travelleth over heaven in

"triumph . The Osiris Nu passeth onwards in peace, and he

i . A v e r s i o n o f t h i s p o r t i o n o f C h a p t e r C X L I V i s f o u n d i n L e p s i u s , op . c i t . ,

B 1 1 . 6 o , 6 j .

I 6




"journeyeth (7) in the boat of Rd . The strength which protecteth

"the Osiris Nu is the strength which protecteth the boat of Rd .

"The Osiris Nu (8) hath a name greater than yours, and he is

"greater than ye are on the path of Maat ; the Osiris abominat-

"eth defeat(?) . The strength which protecteth the Osiris Nu

"is (g) the strength which protecteth Horus the firstborn of Rd .

"[He] bath made his heart, and the Osiris Nu shall not be con-

"strained and he shall not be repulsed at the Arits of the god

"Osiris . (io) The Osiris Nu hath b een provided [with all things]

"by the double Lion-god, and the pure one ( ? ) i s i n t h e f o l l o w i n g

"of Osiris, the governor of Amenti, throughout the course of

"each day, daily . ( i 1 ) His fields are in Sekhti-hetep with the

"divine beings who know things, and with those who perform

"things for the Osiris Nu ( I 2 ) by the hand of Thoth among

"those who make offerings of propitiation . And Anubis hath

"commanded him that dwelleth among offerings that the offerings

"of the Osiris Nu shall be with him, and that they shall not

"be taken away (i3) from him by those divine beings who dwell

" i n f e t t e r s . The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chan-

"cellor-in-chief, triumphant, cometh like unto Horus in the splen-

dour of the horiz on of heaven, and Rd hath set him in order

" ( r 4 ) for the Arits of the horizon ; the gods rejoice in him when

"they meet him . The amulets ( ? ) of the god are for(15) the

"Osiris Nu, the god Nebt shall not come to him, and the door-

"keepers of the Arits shall not overthrow him . The Osiris Nu

" ( 1 6 ) is hidden of face within the great celestial house [which

"is] the shrine of the god, and he arriveth there in the follow-

ing of the pure one(?) Hathor . The Osiris Nu ( 1 7 ) c r e a t e t h

"multitudes of human beings, he maketh Maat to advance to

"Rd, and he destroyeth the two-fold strength of Apep . The

"Osiris Nu (z8) maketh a way through the firmament, he driv-

"eth away the whirlwind and the storm, he maketh the mari -

ners of Rd to live, and he maketh offerings to come unto the

"place where h e ( ? ) i s . (ig) The Osiris Nu causeth a boat to be

"made, he travelleth therein happily ; the Osiris Nu maketh a

"way and he advanceth thereon . The face of the Osiris Nu ( 2 0 )



THE CHAPTER OF THE PYLONS . 2 4 3

"is like that of the god Ur-pehi-f by reason of the might(?),

"and the Osiris Nu is the lord of might . The Osiris Nu is at

" r e s t i n t h e h o r i z o n , a n d h e i s (21) v a l i a n t t o o v e r t h r o w y o u ,

"O ye Nehesu gods ; m a k e a p a t h , t h e n , f o r y o u r l o r d O s i r i s . "

Rubric : THIS CHAPTER SHALL BE SAID OVER A DRAWING OF THE

DIVINE SOVEREIGN CHIEFS, WHICH HATH BEEN DONE IN YELLOW INK,

( 2 2 ) ON THE BOAT OF RA ; AND OFFERINGS AND OBLATIONS SHALL 13E MADE

UNTO THEM, AND SACRIFICES OF FEATHERED FOWL, AND INCENSE [SHALL

BE BURNT] BEFORE THEM . THESE ACTS WILL MAKE THE DECEASED TO LIVE,

AND THEY WILL GIVE HIM STRENGTH AMONG ( 2 3 ) THESE GODS, AND HE

SHALL NEITHER BE REPULSED NOR TURNED BACK AT THE PYLONS OF THE

UNDERWORLD. AND MOREOVER, THOU SHALT MAKE A FIGURE OF THEDECEASED IN THEIR PRESENCE, ANI) THOU SHALT MAKE IT TO COME FORTH

TOWARDS EVERY ONE OF ( 2 4 ) THESE GATES WHICH ARE PAINTED [ABOVE] .

AND THOU SHALT RECITE THIS CHAPTER AT THE DOOR OF EACH OF THE

ARITS WHICH ARE PAINTED [ABOVE], AND AT EACH ONE OF THEM THOU

SHALT MAKE OFFERINGS, VIZ., THE THIGH, THE HEAD, THE HEART, AND

THE HOOF OF A RED BULL ; ( 2 5 ) AND FOUR VESSELS OF BLOOD WHICH HATH

NOT COME FROM THE BREAST ; AND AMULETS( ? ) ; ANT) SIXTEEN LOAVES OF

WHITE BREAD, AND EIGHT PASEN (OR PERSEN) LOAVES, AND EIGHT SHEVEN

LOAVES, AND EIGHTKHENFU LOAVES, AND EIGHT HEBENNU LOAVES, ANDEIGHT LARGE VESSELS OF BEER, AND ( 2 6 ) [EIGHT] LARGE VESSELS OF GRAIN ;

AND FOUR EARTHENWARE VESSELS FILLED WITH THE MILK OF A WHITE

COW, AND FRESH HERBS, AND FRESH OLIVES, AND UNGUENT, AND EYE-

PAINT, AND HATET ( 2 7 ) UNGUENT, AND INCENSE [TO BE BURNT] ON THE

FIRE. AND [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED TWICE OVER EACH EARTHEN-

WARE VESSEL, AFTER THE DRAWING ( O R IMAGE) HATH BEEN MADE, AT

THE FOURTH HOUR, GOING ROUND ABOUT BY DAY ; ( 2 8 ) AND TAKE GOOD

HEED TO THE TIME IN THE HEAVENS . NOW WHEN THOU DOEST [WHAT IS

WRITTEN IN] THIS BOOK DO NOT ALLOW ANY PERSON WHATSOEVER TO

SEE [THEE] . [AND THIS CERE\TONY] SHALL MAKE LONG THE STRIDES (29) OF

THE DECEASED IN HEAVEN, AND ON EARTH, ANT) IN THE UNDERWORLD,

AND IT SHALL BENEFIT HIM IN EVERYTHING WHICH HE DOETH, AND HE

SHALL [POSSESS] THE THINGS OF THE DAY REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY .

CHAPTER CXLV .

[From Lepsius, T o d t e n b u c h , B [ I . 61-65 . ]

Chapter CXLV and CXLVI are two versions of one and the

s a m e t e x t . Of these, Chapter CXLV is the longer, and the two

1 6 *




different forms of it-of each of which, unfortunately, only a

s i n g l e i m p e r f e c t c o p y i s e x t a n t - a r e d e s c r i b e d b y N a v i l l e(Ein-

leitung, pp . i 1 i and 173-176) . B o t h a r e a n c i e n t , o n e a p p e a r i n g

in the tomb of Seti II Meri-en-Ptah at Thebes, and the other

i n t h e p a p y r u s o f t h e r o y a l m i l i t a r y s c r i b e P a - u r (Einleitung,

p . 104) . A better general view of the contents of Chapter CXLV

will probably be obtained from the text as given in the Salte

Recension than from the mutilated ancient forms now known ;

i t i s , m o r e o v e r , f u l l e r t h a n t h e o t h e r s , a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g t r a n s -

lation has been made from it .

Vignette : T h e t w e n t y - o n e p y l o n s o f S e k h e t - A a n r e o f t h e H o u s e o f

O s i r i s . I n e a c h s e c t i o n t h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d s w i t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a -

t i o n b e f o r e a g o d w h o s t a n d s b y t h e s i d e o f a s h r i n e .

Text : [HERE BEGIN THE CHAPTERS OF] THE PYLONS OF

SEKHET-AANRE OF THE HOUSE OF OSIRIS . ( r ) T h e O s i r i s A u f -

a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

I . "Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou first pylon of the

" S t i l l - H e a r t . I have made [my] way . I know thee, and I know

"thy name, and I know ( 2 ) the name of the god who guardeth

" t h e e ! ` L a d y o f t r e m b l i n g s , w i t h l o f t y w a l l s , t h e s o v e r e i g n l a d y ,

"the mistress of destruction, who setteth in order the words

"which drive back the whirlwind and the storm, who delivereth

"from destruction him that travelleth along the way', is thy

"name . (3) The name of the god who guardeth thee is Nerau .

"I have washed myself in the water wherein the god Rd washeth

"himself when he leaveth the eastern part of the sky . I have

" a n o i n t e d m y s e l f ( 4 ) w i t h h a t i unguent [made from] the cedar,

"I have arrayed myself in apparel of i n e n k h , and I have with

"me my sceptre of h e t i wood . "

[ S a i t h t h e p y l o n :-] "Pass on, then, thou art pure . "

I I . ( 5 ) " T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou second pylon of the


"thy name, and I know (6) the name of the god mho guardeth

" t h e e . ' L a d y o f h e a v e n , t h e m i s t r e s s o f t h e w o r l d , w h o t e r r i f i e t h



THE CHAPTER OF THE PYLONS . 2 45

" t h e e a r t h from the place of [thy] body', is thy name . The

"name of the god who guardeth thee is Mes - Ptah . I have

" w a s h e d m y s e l f i n t h e w a t e r w h e r e i n t h e g o d O s i r i s ( 7 ) w a s h e t h

"himself, to whom were given the S e k t e t boat and the M a t e t

"boat when he came forth over Am-urt, and passed through the

"pylons . I h a v e a n o i n t e d m y s e l f w i t h t h e u n g u e n t o f t h e f e s t i v -

a l s , ( 8 ) I h a v e a r r a y e d m y s e l f i n a p p a r e l o f s e s h e t , a n d I h a v e

"with me my sceptre of b e n b e n wood . "

[ S a i t h t h e p y l o n :-] " P a s s o n , t h e n , t h o u a r t p u r e . "

I I I . ( g ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou third pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the name of the god (io) who guardeth

" t h e e . 'Lady of pylons, lady to whom abundant offerings are

"made, who giveth whatsoever is there, ( r ) the guide of the

" o f f e r i n g s , w h o g r a t i f i e t h t h e g o d s , w h o g i v e t h t h e d a y f o r t h e

"sailing up of the boat Neshemet to Abtu (Abydos)', is thy

"name . (ii) The name of the god who guardeth thee is Beq .

"I have washed myself in the water wherein the god Ptah

"washeth when he saileth up to carry away the god Ilennu on

"the day of 'opening the face' . I have anointed ( 1 2 ) m y s e l f

"with h a t i unguent [made] of hekennu unguent and of tahennu

" u n g u e n t , I h a v e a r r a y e d m y s e l f i n a p p a r e l o f s h e s a , and I have

"with me my sceptre of ahen( ? )

wood. "


IV . ( i 3 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou fourth pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the name of the god (14) who guardeth

" t h e e . ' S h e w h o p r e v a i l e t h w i t h k n i v e s , t h e m i s t r e s s o f t h e t w o

"lands, who destroyeth the enemies of the Still-Heart, who

" m a k e t h t h e d e c r e e f o r t h e e s c a p e o f t h e n e e d y f r o m e v i l h a p ' ,

"is thy name . The name of the god who guardeth thee is IIu-

" t e p a . (i5) I have washed myself in the water wherein the god

"Un-nefer, triumphant, washeth himself, when he hath had a

"dispute with Set, and when victory is given unto him . I h a v e




"anointed myself (16) with sundt unguent and with enen unguent,

"I am pure ( ? ) , I have arrayed myself in shesd apparel like unto

"that in which thy son [was arrayed],nd I have with"me my sceptre of tau-atutu wood . "

[Saith the pylon :-] "Pass on, then, thou art pure . "

V. (r7) The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou f ifth pylon of the

"Still-Heart . I have made [my] way . I know thee, and I know

"thy name, I know the name of the god who (r8) guardeth

"thee . 'Lady of splendour, lady of praises, lofty one, Neb-er-

"tchert, the lady to whom supplications are made and unto whom

"none enterethis thy name . The name of the god"who guardeth thee is Erta-hen-er-regau . (rg I have washed

"myself i n the water wherein Horus washed himself when he

"made himself the Chief reader and Sa-mer-f for his f ather

" O s i r i s . I have anointed myself with aber unguent [made] of

"holy offerings, I have upon me the ( 2 0 ) skin of the panther,

"and I have with me my sceptre wherewith to smite those who

"are black of heart . "


VI . (21) The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou sixth pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the name of the god who guardeth

"thee ( 2 2 )lady to whom abundant supplication i s

"made . . . . ; the difference between whose height and breadth

"is unknown ; the like of whom for strength hath not been

"overturned ( ? ) since the beginning ; the number of the serpents

"which are there upon their bellies is unknown ; the divine

"image, the strengthener (23) out of the night, being b orn in

"the presence of the Still-Heart', is thy name . The name of the

"god who guardeth thee is S amti . I have washed myself in the

"water wherein the god Thoth washed himself when he made

"himself the t c h a t of Horus . (24) I have anointed myself with

"aka unguent, I have arrayed myself in apparel of t h e s t h e s , and

"I have with me my sceptre of s e p t wood. "



THE CHAPTER OF THE PYLONS . 24 7


VII . ( 2 5 ) The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou seventh pylon of the



"thee . ( 2 6 ) ` Waterflood which clotheth the feeble one, weeper

"for that which she loveth, shrouding the body', is thy name .

"The name of the god who guard eth thee is Am-Nit . I have

"washed myself in the water wherein (27) the goddesses Isis

"and Nephthys washed themselves when they passed the Croco-

dile with his crocodiles on their way to the opening of the

"place of purity . I have anointed myself with hekenu unguent, I

"have arrayed myself in (28) unkh apparel, and I have with me

"my sceptre and [my] paddle . "


VIII . ( 2 9 ) The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou eighth pylon of the



"thee ( 3 o ) . ` She that belongeth to her lord, the mighty god-

dess, the gracious one, the lady who giveth birth to the divine

"form of her lord," or as others say, "who passeth through and

"traverseth [the land], the head [of which] is millions of cubits

"in depth and in height', is thy name . The name of the god

"who guardeth thee is Netchses . I have washed myself in the

"water wherein ( 3 i ) the god Anpu washed when he had per-

"formed the office of embalmer and bandager," or as others say,

"the Chief reader of Osiris . ( 3 2 ) I have anointed myself with s e f t

"unguent, I have arrayed myself in apparel of a t m a , and I have

"my garment(?) of even s t u f f , " o r a s o t h e r s s a y , " o f c a t ' s s k i n ( ? )

"with me . "


IX . ( 3 3 ) The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, saith"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou ninth pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the name of the g od who guardeth ( 3 4 )




" t h e e . ' B l a z i n g f l a m e of Horus which cannot be extinguished ;

" w h i c h h a v i n g p a s s e d i s f o l l o w e d b y a n o t h e r ; w h i c h i s p r o v i d e d

" w i t h t o n g u e s o f f l a m e t h a t p r o j e c t t o d e s t r o y ; i r r e s i s t i b l e a n d

"impassable [by any] by reason of the injury which it doeth',

" i s t h y n a m e . T h e r e i s f e a r ( 3 5 ) t h r o u g h t h e m i g h t o f i t s r o a r i n g .

"The name of the god who guardeth thee is Khu-tchet-f . I h a v e

"washed myself in the water wherein the Ram, Lord of Tattu,

"washed himself thoroughly from one end of his body to the

" o t h e r . I have (36) anointed myself with a n t unguent of the

"divine members, and with ankh unguent, I have arrayed my-

"self in a tunic of fair white linen, and I have with me my

" s c e p t r e o f benen wood . "


X . ( 3 7 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou tenth pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the name of the god who guardeth (38)

" t h e e . `Lofty of gates, who raiseth up those who cry (?), who

" a r t t e r r i b l e u n t o h i m t h a t w o u l d c o m e u n t o t h e e , " o r a s o t h e r s

say, "She who maketh one to make supplication, by reason of

" t h e l o u d n e s s o f h e r v o i c e ; vanquisher of the foe who is not

"constrained by that which is within her,' is thy (39) name .

"The name of the god who watcheth thee is Sekhen-ur . I h a v e

"washed myself in the water wherein the god Astes washed him-

"self when he entered in to be an advocate for Set within the

"hidden chamber . (40) I have anointed myself with , t e s h e n u n -

guent, and I have with me a sceptre made of the bone of the

" b i r d t e s h e r , having a head like that of a greyhound . "


XI . ( 4 i ) T h e O s i r i s , A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou eleventh pylon of the


"thy name, and (42) I know the name of the being who is

" w i t h i n t h e e . 'She who repeateth slaughters, who burneth up

" t h e f i e n d s , t h e m i s t r e s s o f e v e r y p y l o n , t h e l a d y t o w h o m a c -




" c l a m a t i o n i s m a d e o n t h e d a y ( 4 3 ) o f h e a r i n g i n i q u i t y ' i s t h y

"name . Thou halt the judgment of the feeble bandaged one . "


X I I . ( 4 4 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou twelfth pylon of the


"thy name, and I know the (45) name of the being who is

" w i t h i n t h e e . ` S h e w h o j o u r n e y e t h a b o u t i n t h e t w o l a n d s ; who

"destroyeth those who come with flashings and with fire, the

"lady of splendour ; who hearkeneth to the word of her lord

" e v e r y d a y ' , i s t h y n a m e . Thou hast the (46) judgment of the

"feeble bandaged one . "


X I I I . ( 4 7 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou thirteenth pylon of

" t h e S t i l l - H e a r t . I have made [my] way . I know thee, and I

"know (48) thy name, and I know the name of the being who

" i s w i t h i n t h e e . ` When the company of the gods is led along

" t h e i r h a n d s a r e [ r a i s e d i n ] a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e h e r f a c e , a n d t h e

"watery abyss shineth with light by reason of those who are

" t h e r e i n , ' i s t h y n a m e ( 4 9 ) . Thou hast the judgment of the

"feeble bandaged one . "


X IV . ( 5 0 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou fourteenth pylon of


"know thy name, and I know (5i) the name of the b eing who

" i s w i t h i n t h e e . `Mighty one of Souls, red of hair, Aakhabit,

"who cometh forth by night ; w h o d e s t r o y e t h t h e F i e n d s i n t h e i r

"created forms which their hands give to the Still-Heart (52)

"in his hour ; the one who cometh and goeth', is thy name .

"She hath the judgment of the feeble bandaged one . "


XV . ( 5 3 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou fif teenth pylon of





"know thy name, (54) and I know the name of the being who

" i s w i t h i n t h e e . ` L a d y o f v a l o u r , d e s t r o y e r o f t h e r u d d y o n e s ,

" w h o c e l e b r a t e t h t h e H a k e r f e s t i v a l s ( r ) [ w h e n ] t h e f i r e i s e x -

t i n g u i s h e d o n t h e d a y o f h e a r i n g [ c a s e s o f ] i n i q u i t y ' , i s t h y

"name . ( 5 5 ) S h e h a t h t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e b a n d a g e d o n e . "


X VI . ( 5 6 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , s a i t h H o r u s , 0 t h o u s i x t e e n t h p y l o n o f t h e


"thy name, and I know the name of the being who is (57)

"within thee . ` Lady of victory, whose hand goeth after the

" F i e n d s , w h o b u r n e t h w i t h f l a m e s o f f i r e w h e n s h e c o m e t h f o r t h ,

" c r e a t o r o f t h e m y s t e r i e s o f t h e e a r t h ' , i s t h y n a m e . She bath

"the judgment of the (58) feeble bandaged one . "

[ S a i t h t h e p y l o n :-] " P a s s o n , t h e n , t h o u a r t p u r e . " .

XVII . ( 5 9 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou seventeenth pylon

" o f t h e S t i l l - H e a r t . I have made [my] way . I know thee, and

"I know thy name, and I know (6o) the name of the being

"who is within thee . `Mighty one in the horizon, lady of the

" r u d d y o n e s , d e s t r o y e r i n b l o o d , A a k h a b i t , P o w e r , l a d y o f f l a m e ' ,

" i s t h y n a m e . She bath the judgment (6i) of the feeble band-

"aged one . "


XVIII . ( 6 2 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou eighteenth pylon of


"know thy name, and I know (63) the name of the being who

" i s w i t h i n t h e e . ` L o v e r o f f l a m e , p u r e o n e , h e a r k e n i n g u n t o t h ee h o l d [ s h e ] l o v e t h t o c u t o f f t h e h e a d [ s ] o f t h e v e -

n e r a t e d o n e s , l a d y o f t h e G r e a t H o u s e , d e s t r o y e r ( 6 4 ) o f f i e n d s

" a t e v e n t i d e ' , [ i s t h y n a m e ] . S h e h a t h t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e

"bandaged one . "


X IX . ( 6 5 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou nineteenth pylon of





"know thy name, and I know (66) the name of the being who

" i s w i t h i n t h e e . ` D i s p e n s e r o f s t r e n g t h , o r a s o t h e r s s a y , o f l i g h t ,

" o f t h e p a l a c e ( ? ) , t h e m i g h t y o n e o f t h e f l a m e , t h e l a d y o f t h e

" s t r e n g t h a n d o f t h e w r i t i n g s o f P t a h h i m s e l f ' , i s t h y n a m e . S h e

"bath the judgment of the (67) feeble bandaged one . "


XX. ( 6 8 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Homage to thee, saith Horus, 0 thou twentieth pylon of the

" S t i l l - H e a r t . I know thee, and I know thy name, and ( 69) 1

"know the name of the being who is within thee . ' S t o n e ( ? ) o f

" h e r l o r d , f i e l d w i t h a s e r p e n t ( , ) , C l o t h e r , w h a t s h e c r e a t e t h s h e

" h i d e t h , t a k i n g p o s s e s s i o n o f h e a r t s , o p e n e r o f h e r s e l f ' , i s t h y

"name . S h e h a t h t h e ( 7 0 ) j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e b a n d a g e d o n e . "


X X I . ( 7 1 ) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , s a i t h H o r n s , 0 t h o u t w e n t y - f i r s t p y l o n o f t h e


"thy name, (72) and I know the name of the god who guardeth

" t h e e . `Sword that smiteth at the utterance of its own name,

"goddess with face turned backwards, the unknown one, over-

"thrower of him that draweth nigh to her flame', is thy name .

"Thou keepest the secret things of the avenger of the god who

"guardeth thee, and his name is (73) Amam . He maketh it to

"come to pass that the cedar trees grow not, that the acacia

" t r e e s b r i n g n o t f o r t h , a n d t h a t c o p p e r i s n o t b e g o t t e n i n t h e

"mountain . The divine sovereign chiefs of this pylon are as

"seven gods . Tchen or At is the name of the (74) one at the

"door ; Hetep-mes is the name of the second ; M e s - s e p i s t h e

"name of the third ; U t c h - r e i s t h e n a m e o f t h e f o u r t h ; Ap-uat

" i s t h e n a m e o f t h e f i f t h ; Beq is the name of the sixth ; and

"Anpu is the name of the seventh . "

(75) "I have made [my] way . I am Amsu-Heru, the avenger

" o f h i s f a t h e r , t h e h e i r o f h i s f a t h e r U n - n e f e r . I have come,

"and I have caused to be overthrown all the enemies of my

" f a t h e r O s i r i s . I have come day by day with victory, doing




" m y s e l f t h e w o r s h i p o f t h e g o d ( 7 6 ) i n t h e h o u s e o f h i s f a t h e r

"Tem, the lord of Annu . The Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, is

"in the southern heaven . I have done what is right and true

"for him that made right and truth ; I have celebrated the

" H a k e r f e s t i v a l s f o r t h e l o r d t h e r e o f : I have led the way in

" t h e f e s t i v a l ; I h a v e g i v e n c a k e s u n t o t h e l o r d s o f t h e a l t a r ;

" ( 7 7 ) and I have brought offerings and oblations, and cakes,

"and ale, and oxen, and ducks, to my father Osiris Un-nefer .

"I have my being in a body which hath the soul, and I make

" t h e Bennu bird to come forth at [my] words . I have come

" d a i l y i n t o t h e h o u s e o f t h e g o d t o m a k e o f f e r i n g s o f i n c e n s e .

"I have brought (78) garments of byssus, and I have sailed on

" t h e [ s a c r e d ] l a k e i n t h e Neshem b o a t . I have made Osiris,

"the Governor of Amentet, to be triumphant over his enemies ;

" I h a v e c a r r i e d a w a y a l l h i s f o e s t o t h e p l a c e o f s l a u g h t e r i n

" t h e E a s t ; and they shall never come forth from the durance

" o f t h e g o d ( 7 9 ) S e b t h e r e i n . I stand up for him [along with]

" t h e d i v i n e K e f a u i o f R d , a n d I m a k e [ h i m ] t o b e t r i u m p h a n t ( ? ) .

"I have come even as a scrib e and I have made all things

" p l a i n . I have made the god to have power over his legs . I

" h a v e c o m e i n t o t h e h o u s e o f ' h i m t h a t i s u p o n h i s h i l l ' ( i . e . ,

" A n u b i s ) , a n d I h a v e s e e n h i m t h a t i s r u l e r i n t h e d i v i n e h a l l

" (i . e . , A n u b i s ) . ( 8 o ) I h a v e e n t e r e d i n t o R e - s t a u ; I h a v e h i d d e n

"myself, and I have found out the way : I h a v e t r a v e l l e d u n t o

" A n - r u t - f . I h a v e c l o t h e d h i m t h a t w a s n a k e d , ( 8 i ) I h a v e s a i l e d

"up to Abtu (Abydos), I have praised the gods Hu and Sau .

"I have entered into the house of Astes, and I have made sup-

plication to the (82) Khati gods and to Sekhet in the Temple

" o f N e i t h , " o r a s o t h e r s s a y , " t o t h e p r i n c e s . I h a v e e n t e r e d

" i n t o R e - s t a u ; I have hidden myself, and I have found out

"the way ; I h a v e t r a v e l l e d ( 8 3 ) u n t o A n - r u t - f . I have clothed

"him who was naked . I have sailed up to Abtu ; I h a v e p r a i s e d

"Hu and Sau . I have received my (84) crown ( ? ) a t m y r i s i n g ,

"and I have crowned myself upon my throne in the habitation

"of my father and of the first company of the gods . I have

"worshipped [in my] birthplace of Ta-tchesertet, and my mouth




" is f i l l e d ( ? ) w i t h ( 8 5 ) r i g h t and t r u t h . I have drowned t h e

" s e r p e n t Akhkha . I have come i n t o t h e G r e a t House which

"giveth vigour unto the limbs ; and it hath been granted unto

"me to sail about in the Boat of Hai . The fragrance of ant

"unguent ariseth from (86) the hair of the beings who have

"knowledge . I h a v e e n t e r e d i n t o t h e h o u s e o f A s t e s , a n d I h a v e

"made supplication unto the Khati gods and unto Sekhet in

"the Temple of the (87) Prince . "

[ S a i t h t h e p y l o n :-] "Thou hast come being a favoured one

"in Tattu, 0 Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, son of Sheret-Amsu,

"triumphant . "

CHAPTER CXLVI .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 5 ) . ]

Vignettes : F o u r t e e n s h r i n es , i n e a c h o f w h i c h a g o d i s s e a t e d . '

Text : ( i) [HERE BEGIN] THE CHAPTERS OF ENTERING IN AT

THE HIDDEN PYLONS OF THE HOUSE OF OSIRIS IN SEKHET-(2)

AANRERU I . T h e O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n -

c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e f i r s t p y l o n

( 3 ) o f O s i r i s , s a i t h :-

"I have made [my] way . I know you, and I know your name,

"and I know (¢) the name of the god who guardeth you . ` L a d y

"of tremblings, with lofty walls, the sovereign (5) lady, the

" m i s t r e s s o f d e s t r u c t i o n , w h o s e t t e t h i n o r d e r t h e w o r d s w h i c h

"drive back the whirlwind and the storm, who delivereth from

" d e s t r u c t i o n h i m t h a t t r a v e l l e t h a l o n g t h e w a y , ' ( 6 ) i s t h y n a m e .

"The name of thy doorkeeper is Neri . "

I I . The Osiris Nu, (7) when he cometh to the second pylon

o f O s i r i s , s a i t h:-

"I have made [my] way . I know you, and I know (8) your

"name, and I know the name of the god who guardeth you .

i . The grotesque forms of the gods who guard these pylons can be well

s t u d i e d i n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t s t o a n d 12 .




"` Lady of heaven, the mistress of the world, who devoureth

"with fire, the lady of (g) mortals, who knoweth mankind', is

"thy name . The name of thy doorkeeper is Mes-Peh (or Mes-

" P t a h ) . "

I I I . The Osiris Nu, (to) when he cometh to the third pylon

o f O s i r i s , s a i t h :-

"I have made [my] way . I know ( i t ) you, and I know your


"`Lady of the ( 1 2 ) a l t a r , t h e l a d y t o w h o m a b u n d a n t o f f e r i n g s

"are made, in whom every god rejoiceth on the day of sailing

"up to Abtu (Abydos),' is thy name . The name of thy door-

" k e e p e r i s E r t a t - ( 1 3 ) S e b a n g a . "

IV . T h e O s i r i s N u , ( t 4 ) when he cometh to the fourth pylon


"I have made [my] way . I know you, and I know ( 1 5 ) your


"'She who prevaileth with knives, the mistress of the world,

" ( i 6 ) d e s t r o y e r o f t h e f o e s o f t h e S t i l l - H e a r t , w h o m a k e t h t h e

"decree for the escape of the needy from (17) e v i l h a p , ' i s t h y

"name . The name of thy doorkeeper is Nekau . "

V . T h e O s i r i s N u , ( t 8 ) w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e f i f t h p y l o n o f

O s i r i s , s a i t h :-

"I have made [my] way . I know you, and I know (ig) your


" ' F i r e , t h e l a d y o f f l a m e s , w h o i n h a l e t h ( 2 0 ) t h e s u p p l i c a t i o n s

" w h i c h a r e m a d e t o h e r , w h o p e r m i t t e t h n o t t h eo e n t e r" i n , ' is thy name . The name of thy doorkeeper is Henti-Requ . "

VI . ( 2 t ) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the sixth pylon


"I have made [my] way. I know ( 2 2 ) you, and I know your


" ( 2 3 ) 'Lady of light, the lady to whom abundant supplication

"is made ; t h e d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n h e r h e i g h t a n d h e r b r e a d t h i s

"unknown ; the like of her hath never been found ( 2 4 ) s i n c e

" t h e b e g i n n i n g . T h e r e i s a s e r p e n t t h e r e u p o n w h o s e s i z e i s n o t




"known ; i t w a s b o r n ( 2 5 ) i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e S t i l l - H e a r t , ' i s

"thy name . The name of the doorkeeper is Semamti . "

V I I . ( 2 6 ) T h e O s i r i s N u , w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e s e v e n t h p y l o n


"I have made [my] way . (27) I know you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name (28) of the god who guardeth

"you . `Robe which doth clothe the divine feeble one, weeping

" ( 2 9 ) f o r w h a t i t l o v e t h a n d s h r o u d i n g t h e b o d y , ' i s t h y n a m e .

"The name of the doorkeeper is Akenti . "

V I I I . ( 3 o ) T h e O s i r i s N u , w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e e i g h t h p y l o n


"I have made [my] (31) way . I know you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of the god (32) who guardeth

"you . 'Blazing fire, the flame whereof [cannot] be quenched,

"provided with tongues of flame (33) which reach afar, the

"slaughtering one, the irresistible one through whom a man

"may not pass by reason of the hurt which she doeth,' is thy

"name . (34) The name of the doorkeeper is Khu-tchet-f . "

IX . (35) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the ninth pylon


" I . have made [my] way . (36) I know you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of the god (37) who guardeth

"you . ` S h e w h o i s i n t h e f r o n t , t h e l a d y o f s t r e n g t h , q u i e t o f

" h e a r t , w h o g i v e t h b i r t h t o h e r l o r d ; w h o s e g i r t h i s t h r e e h u n -

d r e d a n d f i f t y m e a s u r e s ; ( 3 8 ) w h o s e n d e t h f o r t h r a y s l i k e t h e

"catch s t o n e o f t h e s o u t h ; w h o r a i s e t h u p t h e d i v i n e f o r m a n d

"clotheth the feeble one ; who giveth [offerings] to (39) her

" l o r d e v e r y d a y ' , i s t h y n a m e . The name of the doorkeeper is

"Tchesef . "

X. (4o) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the tenth pylon


"I have made [my] way . (4i) I know you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of the god who guardeth you . ( 4 2 )

"`Thou who art loud of voice, who raisest up those who cry

"and who make supplication unto her, whose voice is loud, the

" t e r r i b l e o n e , ( 4 3 ) t h e l a d y w h o i s t o b e f e a r e d , w h o d e s t r o y e t h




" n o t t h a t w h i c h i s i n h e r , ' i s t h y n a m e . The name of the door-

"keeper is Sekhen-ur ." I

XI . (44 ) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the eleventh

p y l o n o f O s i r i s , s ai t h :-

"I have made [my] way . I know (45) you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of her who is within thee . ` S h e

" w h o s l a u g h t e r e t h a l w a y s ( 4 6 ) t h e b u r n e r u p o f f i e n d s , m i s t r e s s o f

"the every pylon, the lady to whom acclamation is made on the

" ( 4 7 ) d a y o f d a r k n e s s , ' i s t h y n a m e . She hath the judgment of

"the feeble bandaged one . "

X I I . ( 4 8 ) T h e O s i r i s N u , w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e t w e l f t h p y l o n


"I have made [my] way . I know you, (49) and I know your

"name, and I know the name of her who is within thee . 'Thou

"who invokest thy two lands, (50) who destroyest those who

" c o m e w i t h f l a s h i n g s a n d w i t h f i r e , t h e l a d y o f s p l e n d o u r , w h o

"hearkeneth unto the speech (51) of her lord', is thy name .

"She hath the judgment of the feeble bandaged one . "

X I I I . (52) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the thirteenth

p y l o n o f O s i r i s , s ai t h :-

"I have made [my] way . I know (53) you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of her who is within thee . ' O s i r i s

"bringeth (54 ) his two hands over her and maketh the god

" I T a p i ( i . e . , t h e N i l e ) t o s e n d f o r t h s p l e n d o u r o u t o f h i s h i d d e n

" p l a c e s , ' i s t h y n a m e . ( 5 5 ) S h e h a t h t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e

"bandaged one . "

X IV . (56) The Osiris Nu, when he cometh to the fourteenth

p y l o n o f O s i r i s , s a i t h :-

"I have made [my] way . (57) I know you, and I know your

"name, and I know the name of her who is within thee . ( 5 8 )

""Lady of might, who danceth on the blood-red ones, who

"keepeth the festival of Haker on the day of the hearing (59)

" o f f a u l t s , ' i s t h y n a m e . She hath the judgment of the feeble

"bandaged one . "

t . In the Papyrus of Ani ten pylons only are enumerated .




XV . T h e f i f t e e n t h p y l o n . The Osiris Heru-em-khebit, trium-

p h a n t , s a i t h w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h i s p y l o n :- (38) "The Fiend,

"red of hair and eyes, who cometh forth by night, (39) and

" d o t h f e t t e r t h e f i e n d i n h i s l a i r ; may her hands be given to

"the Still-Heart (40) in his hour, and may [she] advance and

" g o f o r w a r d , ' [ i s t h y n a m e ] . S h e h a t h t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e

" ( 4 1 ) bandaged one . "

X VI . T h e s i x t e e n t h p y l o n . T h e O s i r i s H e r u - e m - k h e b i t , t r i u m -

p h a n t , s a i t h ( 4 2 ) w h e n h e c o m e t h f o r t h t o th i s p y l o n : - " ' T e r r i b l e

" o n e , t h e l a d y o f t h e r a i n - s t o r m , w h o p l a n t e t h r u i n ( ? ) i n t h e ( 4 3 )

" s o u l s o f m e n , t h e d e v o u r e r o f t h e d e a d b o d i e s o f m a n k i n d , t h e

" o r d e r e r , a n d p r o d u c e r , a n d ( 4 4 ) c r e a t o r o f s l a u g h t e r , ' [ i s t h y

"name] . S h e b a t h t h e j u d g m e n t o f t h e f e e b l e b a n d a g e d o n e. " ( 4 5 )

XVII . The seventeenth pylon . [The Osiris Heru-em-khebit,

triumphant, saith when he cometh f orth to this pylon :-]

" ' H e w e r - i n - p i e c e s i n b l o o d , A h a b i t ( ? ) , l a d y o f ( 4 6 ) h a i r , ' [ i s t h y

"name] . She hath the judgment of the feeble bandaged one . "

XVIII . The eighteenth pylon . The Osiris Heru-em-khebit,

t r i u m p h a n t , ( 4 7 ) s a i t h w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h i s p y l o n :- "'Lover

" ( 4 8 ) o f t h e f i r e , p u r e o f s l a u g h t e r i n g s w h i c h s h e l o v e t h , c u t t e r o f f

" o f h e a d s , ( 4 9 ) v e n e r a t e d o n e ( ? ) , lady of the Great House, de-

s t r o y e r o f f i e n ds a t e v e n t i d e, ' [ i s t h y n a m e ] . S h e h a t h t h e j u d g -

ment of the feeble bandaged one . "

X IX . The nineteenth pylon . ( 5 1 ) T h e O s i r i s H e r u - e m - k h e b i t ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h i s p y l o n :- " ' D i s p e n s e r

" o f l i g h t d u r i n g h e r p e r i o d ( 5 2 ) o f l i f e , w a t c h e r o f f l a m e s , t h e

" l a d y o f t h e s t r e n g t h a n d o f t h e w r i t i n g s o f t h e g o d P t a l i h i m -

" s e l f , ' [ i s t h y n a m e ] . She hath the judgment of the bandages of

" P e r - a n " ( o r P e r - h e t c h ) .

XX. The twentieth pylon . T h e O s i r i s H e r u - e m - k h e b i t , t r i u m -

phant, saith when he cometh to this pylon :- (54) "'She who

"dwelleth within the cavern of her lord, Clother is her name,

" ( 5 5 ) she hideth what she hath created, she taketh possession

" o f h e a r t s , s h e s w a l l o w e t h ( ? ) , ' [ i s t h y n a m e ] . She hath (56)

"the judgment of the bandages of Per-an" (or Per-hetch) .

' 7




X X I . The twenty-first pylon . The Osiris Heru-em-khebit,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h i s p y l o n :- ( 5 7 ) " ' K n i f e

"which cutteth, when [its name] is uttered, (58) and slayeth

" t h o s e w h o a d v a n c e t o w a r d s i t s f l a m e s , ' [ i s t h y n a m e ] . S h e b a t h

" ( 5 9 )s e c r e t p l o t s a n d c o u n s e l s . "

CHAPTER C X L V I I .

[ F r o m t h e Papyrus of Ani ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 7 0 , s h e e t s ii and 1 2 ) . ]

THE FIRST ARIT .

Vignette : A n i a n d h i s w i f e T h u t h u a p p r o a c h i n g t h e f i r s t A r i t , a t t h e

e n t r a n c e o f w h i c h s i t t h r e e g o d s , h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f a h a r e , o f a s e r p e n t ,

a n d o f a c r o c o d i l e r e s p e c t i v e l y .

Text : (i) The name of the doorkeeper is Sekhet-hra-asht-

a r u ; the name of the (2) watcher is [Se]metti ; the name of

the herald is Ha-kheru . The Osiris Ani, (3) triumphant, shall

say when he cometh unto the first Arit :- "I am the mighty

"one who createth his own light . (4) I have come unto thee,

" 0 O s i r i s , a n d , p u r i f i e d f r o m t h a t w h i c h d e f i l e t h t h e e , I a d o r e

" t h e e . Lead on : (5) name not the name of Re-stau unto me .

"Homage to thee, 0 Osiris, in thy might and in thy strength

" ( 6 ) i n R e - s t a u . R i s e u p a n d c o n q u e r , 0 O s i r i s , i n A b t u . Thou

" g o e s t r o u n d a b o u t h e a v e n , t h o u s a i l e s t i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f R d ,

" ( 7 ) thou lookest upon all the beings who have knowledge .

" H a i l , R d , t h o u w h o c i r c l e s t i n t h e s k y ! V e r i l y I s a y , 0 O s i r i s ,

" I a m t h e s p i r i t u a l b o d y ( s a h ) ( 8 ) o f t h e g o d , a n d I s a y , ( 9 ) l e t

"me not be driven (to) hence, nor upon (ii) the wall of (I2)

" b u r n i n g c o a l s . (i3) Open the way in (14) Re-stau, (r5) ease

" t h e ( t 6 ) p a i n o f O s i r i s ,( 1 7 )

embrace that which the balance

"bath weighed ; make a path for him in the great valley, make

" l i g h t t o b e o n t h e w a y o f O s i r i s . "

THE SECOND ARIT .

Vignette : A n A r i t g u a r d e d b y t h r e e g o d s h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f a l i o n ,

o f a m a n , a n d o f a d o g r es p e c t i v e l y .



THE CHAPTER OF THE ARITS . 259

Text : (i) The name of the (2 ) d o o r k e e p e r i s U n - h a t ; ( 3 ) t h e

name of the watcher is Seget-(4)hra ; the name of the herald

( 5 ) i s U s e t . The Osiris Ani, triumphant, shall say when he

c o m e t h ( 6 ) t o t h i s A r i t :- " H e s i t t e t h t o d o h i s h e a r t ' s d e s i r e ,

" a n d h e w e i g h e t h ( 7 ) w o r d s a s t h e s e c o n d o f T h o t h . T h e s t r e n g t h

"which protecteth Thoth humbleth the hidden Madt gods ( ? ) ( 8 )

"who feed upon Madt throughout the years [of their lives] . I

" m a k e o f f e r i n g s ( 9 ) at the moment when he maketh his way ;

"I pass on and enter upon the way . Grant thou that I may

"pass onwards and that I may gain sight of Ra together with

"those who make offerings . "

THE THIRD ARIT .

Vignette : A n A r i t g u a r d e d b y t h r e e g o d s h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f a j a c k a l ,

t h e h e a d o f a d o g , a n d t h e h e a d o f a s e r p e n t r e s p e c t i v e l y .

Text : (i) The name of the ( 2 ) d o o r k e e p e r s i s A m - h a u a t u ( 3 ) -

e n t - p e h u i ; the name of the watcher (4) is Seres-(5)hra ; t h e

name of the herald is Aa . The Osiris Ani, triumphant, shall

say [when he cometh to this Arit] :- " I a m t h e h i d d e n o n e ( 6 )

" [ i n ] the great deep, [I am] the judge of the Rehui . I have

"come and I have done away with the offensive thing which

"was upon Osiris . I am fastening the place whereon he shall

" s t a n d ( 7 ) w h i c h p r o j e c t e t h f r o m t h e U r e r e t crown . I h a v e p e r -

fected matters in Abtu, I have opened the way in Re-stau, I

"have eased (8) the pain which was in Osiris . I have made

" s t r a i g h t h i s s t a n d i n g p l a c e , a n d I h a v e m a d e [ h i s ] p a t h . He

" s h i n e t h i n R e - s t a u . "

THE FOURTH ARIT .

Vignette : A n A r i t g u a r d e d b y t h r e e g o d s h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f a m a n ,

o f a h a w k , a n d of a l i o n r e s p e c t i v e l y.

Text : (i) The name of ( 2 ) t h e d o o r k e e p e r i s K h e s e f - h r a - a s h t -

( 3 ) k h e r u ; the name of the (4) watcher is Seres-tepu ; ( 5 ) t h e

n a m e o f t h e h e r a l d i s ( 6 ) K h e s e f - a t . T h e O s i r i s A n i , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s h a l l s a y [ w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h i s A r i t ] :- " I a m t h e B u l l , ( 7 )

I 7



26o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY

" t h e s o n o f t h e a n c e s t r e s s o f O s i r i s . 0 g r a n t y e t h a t h i s f a t h e r ,

"the lord of his godlike (8) companions, may bear witness for

"him . I have weighed the guilty in judgment . I have brought

" u n t o ( g ) h i s n o s t r i l s t h e l i f e w h i c h i s e v e r l a s t i n g . I am the

"son of Osiris, I have made the way . I have passed thereover

" i n t o N e t e r - k h e r t . "

THE FIFTH ARIT .

Vignette : A n A r i t g u a r d e d b y t h r e e g o d s h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f a h a w k ,

o f a m a n , a n d o f a s n a ke r e s p e c t i v e l y .

Text : (i) The name ( 2 ) of the doorkeeper is Ankh-f-em-

f e n t ; ( 3 ) t h e n a m e o f t h e w a t c h e r i s ( 4 ) S h a b u ; t h e n a m e o f ( 5 )

t h e h e r a l d i s T e b - l i r a - ( 6 ) h a - k h e f t . The Osiris Ani, triumphant,

shall say [when he cometh to this Arit] :- "I have brought

" [ u n t o t h e e ] t h e b o n e s o f t h y ( 7 ) j a w s i n R e - s t a u , I h a v e b r o u g h t

"thee thy backbone in Annu (Heliopolis), gathering together

" i t s m a n i f o l d p a r t s ( 8 ) t h e r e i n . I have driven back Apep for

"thee, I have spit upon the wounds [which are in him], I have

"made a path among you . I am ( g ) the Ancient One among

" t h e g o d s . I h a v e m a d e t h e o f f e r i n g o f O s i r i s , I h a v e a v e n g e d ( ? )

"him in triumph, gathering his bones and bringing together

" a l l h i s l i m b s . "

THE SIXTH ARIT .

Vignette : A n A r i t g u a r d e d b y t h r e e g o d s , t h e f i r s t h a v i n g t h e h e a d o f

a j a c k a l , a n d t h e s e c o n d a n d t h i r d t h e h e a d o f a d o g .

Text : ( t ) The name ( 2 ) o f t h e d o o r k e e p e r i s A t e k - t a u - k e h a q -

( 3 ) k h e r u ; t h e n a m e o f t h e ( 4 ) w a t c h e r i s A n - h r a ; ( 5 ) t h e n a m e

o f t h e h e r a l d i s ( 6 ) A t e s - h r a - [ a r i ] - s h e . The Osiris Ani, trium-

phant, shall say [when he cometh to this Arit] :- "I have

"come (7) daily, I have come daily . I have made [my] way ;

"I have passed along that which was created by Anpu (Anubis) .

"I am the lord of the Ureret crown, (8) possessing words of

"magical power, the avenger of Maat . I have avenged his Eye,

"I have delivered (g ) Osiris, and I have made the way ; t h e

"Osiris Ani passeth along with you in [triumph] . "



THE CHAPTER OF PROVIDING FOOD . 261

THE SEVENTH ARIT .

Vignette : An Arit guarded by three gods having the head of a hare,

o f a l i o n , a n d o f a m a n r e s p e c t i v e l y .

Text : ( 1 ) The name ( 2 ) of the doorkeeper is Sekhemet-em-

t e s u - ( 3 ) s e n ; the name of the (4 ) watcher is Aa-maa-kheru ; ( 5 )

the name of the herald is Khesef-khemi . The Osiris Ani, trium-

phant, (6) shall say [when he cometh to this Arit] : - - "I have

"come unto thee, 0 Osiris, who art cleansed of [thine] im-

p u r i t i e s . Thou goest round about heaven , thou seest Rd,

"thou seest the beings who have knowledge . (7) [Hail,] Only

"One! behold, thou art in the S e k t e t boat [as] it goeth round

"about the horizon of heaven . I speak what I will unto his

"spiritual body ( s a h ) ; (8) it waxeth strong and it cometh into

"being, even as he spake . Thou meetest his face . Prosper thou

"for me all the ways [which lead] unto thee . " r

CHAPTER CXLVIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t i t ) . ]

Vignette : 2 A h a l l , o r s h r i n e , w i t h i n w h i c h , o n t h e l e f t , A n i s t a n d s b e -

f o r e t w o t a b l e s o f o f f e r i n g s a d o r i n g R d ( o r O s i r i s ) , h a w k - h e a d e d . N e x t

a r e r a n g e d s e v e n k i n e a n d a b u l l , e a c h a n i m a l h a v i n g o f f e r i n g s b e f o r e i t .

B e h i n d a r e f o u r r u d d e r s , e m b l e m a t i c o f t h e c a r d i n a l p o i n t s , a n d o n t h e

e x t r e m e r i g h t a r e f o u r t r i a d s o f g o d s . T h e s p e e c h o f A n i r e a d s :- "Ho-

" m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u l o r d , t h o u l o r d o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h , t h e o n l y O n e ,

" t h e l o r d o f e t e r n i t y a n d c r e a t o r o f e v e r l a s t i n gn e s s , I h a v e c o m e u n t o

i . I n t h e P a p y r u s o f T h e n n a t h e s c r i b e t h e f o l l o w i n g w o r d s a r e a d d e d :-

" I f [ t h e s e ] w o r d s b e r e c i t e d b y t h e d e c e a s e d w h e n h e c o m e t h t o t h e s e v e n A r i t s

" a n d e n t e r e t h i n t o t h e p y l o n s h e s h a l l n e i t h e r b e t u r n e d b a c k n o r r e p u l s e d b e -

" f o r e O s i r i s , a n d h e s h a l l b e m a d e t o h a v e h i s b e i n g a m o n g t h e b l e s s e d Khus" a n d t o h a v e d o m i n i o n a m o n g t h e p r i n c i p a l f o l l o w e r s o f H o r u s . I f t h e s e t h i n g s

" s h a l l b e d o n e f o r a n y d e c e a s e d p e r s o n h e s h a l l h a v e h i s b e i n g t h e r e l i k e a

" l o r d o f e t e r n i t y i n o n e b o d y a l o n g w i t h O s i r i s , a n d a t n o p l a c e s h a l l a n y g r e a t

" f i g h t b e m a d e" [ c o n c e r n i n g h i m ] . F o r t h e t e x t s e e t h e a c c o m p a n y i n g v o l u m e ,

p . 3 6 2 .

2 . S e e t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i , s h e e t 3 5 .




" t h e e , 0 m y l o r d R d . I h a v e m a d e o f f e r i n gs o f h e r b s u n t o t h e s e v e n k i n e

` a n d u n t o t h e i r b u l l . 0 y e w h o g i v e c a k e s an d a l e u n t o t he Khus, g r a n t

" y e t o m y s o u l t o b e w i t h y o u . M a y O s i r i s A n i b e b o r n u p o n y o u r

"thighs ; m a y h e b e l i k e u n t o o n e o f y o u f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r ; a n d

"may he become a Khu i n t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t i . "

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF PROVIDING THE DECEASED

WITH FOOD [IN THE UNDERWORLD] . The Osiris Nu, the over-

s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e s o n

of the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief, Amen-

b e t e p , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

( 2 ) " H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u t h a t s h i n e s t f r o m t h y D i s k , t h o u

" l i v i n g [ S o u l ] w h o c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e h o r i z o n , t h e O s i r i s N u

"knoweth thee, and he knoweth thy name, and he knoweth the

" n a m e o f ( 3 ) t h y s e v e n k i n e a n d o f t h e b u l l t h a t b e l o n g e t h u n t o

"them . H a i l , y e w h o g i v e c a k e s , a n d a l e , a n d s p l e n d o u r t o t h e s ou l s

"who are provided with food in the underworld, (¢) grant ye

" c a k e s a n d a l e u n t o t h e O s i r i s N u ; provide ye him with food,

"let him be in your following, and let him be born upon your

" t h i g h s . "

[Here follow the names of the seven kine and of their bull,

with the address to them by the deceased . ]

( i ) H e t - k a u - N e b t - e r - t c h e r . ( 2 ) A k e r t - k h e n t e t - a u s e t - s . ( 3 ) M e h -

k h e b i t e t - s a h - n e t e r . ( 4 ) U r - m e r t u - s - t e s h e r t - s h e n i . (5) Khenemet-

em-ankh-annuit . ( 6 )S e k h e m e t - r e n - s - e m - a b e t - s . ( 7 ) S h e n a t - p e t -

u t h es e t - n e t e r . ( 8 ) K a - t c h a i - k a u i t . I

" [ H a i l , y e c o w s a n d b u l l , ] g r a n t y e c a k e s , a n d a l e , a n d o f f e r -

ings of food, to the Osiris Nu, and supply ye him with food,

" ( 8 ) and make him to be a perfect Khu in the underworld . "

[Here follow the addresses to the four rudders by the de-

c e a s e d . ]

( i ) " H a i l , t h o u b e a u t i f u l P o w e r , t h o u b e a u t i f u l r u d d e r o f t h e

"northern heaven ;

(2 ) "Hail, thou who revolvest, thou pilot of the two lands,

" t h o u b e a u t i f u l r u d d e r o f t h e w e s t e r n h e a v e n ;

i . I . e . , " B u l l , m a k i n g t h e k i n e t o b e f r u i t f u l . "



THE CHAPTER OF PROVIDING FOOD . 263

( 3 ) "Hail, thou shining one, who dwelles t in the Temple

"wherein are the gods in visible forms, thou beautiful rudder

"of the eastern heaven ;

(4) "Hail, thou who dwellest within the Temple of the ruddy

"beings, thou beautiful rudder of the southern heaven ;

"grant ye cakes, and ale, and offerings of food, and splendour

"to the Khu of the Osiris Nu . (I I) Grant ye unto him life, and

"strength, and health, and abiding joy of heart upon earth, and

"grant ye unto him [triumph] in the horizon of Annu, and in

"heaven, and upon earth, and in the underworld'[Here follow the addresses to the four triads]

(I2) "Hail, ye fathers of the gods, hail, ye mothers of the

"gods, ye who are above the earth and who dwell in the under-

world, deliver ye the Osiris Nu ( I 3 ) from every obstacle of

"evil [from every attack of evil], from the cruel snare, and

"[from] the slaughtering knives, and from every wicked and

"evil thing whatsoever (which) ye could order to be done unto

"him (I4) by men, and by gods, and by the Khus, and by the

"dead on this day, or on this night, or in this month, or in

"this half-monthly festival, or ( I 5 ) in this year, or in any of

"the seasons thereof whatsoever . "

Rubric : [THESE WORDS] SHALL BE SAID WHEN RA APPEARETH OVER

[FIGURES] OF THE GODS WRITTEN (OR PAINTED) IN COLOUR UPON A BOARD ( ? ) ,

AND THOU SHALT PLACE OFFERINGS AND (16) TCHEI-AU FOOD BEFORE THEM,

CAKES, ALE, FLESH, FEATHERED FOWL, AND INCENSE, AND THEY SHALL

CAUSE THE DECEASED TO POSSESS SEPULCHRAL MEALS WITH RA, AND

SHALL GIVE HIM (i7) AN ABUNDANCE OF FOOD IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND

SHALL DELIVER HIM FROM EVERY EVIL THING WHATSOEVER . AND THOU

SHALT NOT RECITE THIS 1300K OF UN-NEFER IN THE PRESENCE OF (i8) ANY

PERSON EXCEPT THINE OWN SELF . AND IF THIS BE DONE FOR THE DE-

CEASED RA SHALL BE A RUDDER FOR HIM AND SHALL BE A STRENGTH

PROTECTING HIM, AND HE SHALL MAKE AN END OF ALL (iq) HIS ENEMIES

FOR HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND IN HEAVEN, AND UPON EARTH, AND

IN EVERY PLACE WHEREVER HE MAY ENTER, AND HE SHALL HAVE ABUN-

DANCE OF FOOD REGULARLY ANT) CONTINUALLY FOR EVER .

i . Reading maakheru em khut Annu pet to tuat .




CHAPTER CXLIX .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 77 , s he et s 2 8 , 2 9 , 3 o ) . ]

The Fourteen Aats, or divisions of Sekhet-Aanru .

I . Vignette : T h e f i r s t A a t L - - , , - J .

Text : ( i ) T h e f i r s t A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ) g r e e n . The

O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h:- ( 2 )

" H a i l , t h o u A a t o f A m e n t e t , w h e r e i n a m a n l i v e t h u p o n c a k e s

"and ale,' remove thy wigs (3) when I come towards thee . And

"behold, the Mighty god who dwelleth in thee hath bound up

"my bones, and he hath stablished my members ; ( 4 ) a n d t h e

" A h i , t h e l o r d o f h e a r t s , h a t h g a t h e r e d ( ? ) t o g e t h e r m y b o n e s , a n d

" h a t h s t a b l i s h e d t h e U r e r e t crown of Tent [upon my head] ;

"and Neheb-kau hath (5) stablished for me my head . F u l l , f u l l ,

" a n d s t a b l i s h e d i s t h e B a l a n c e . Thou shalt have dominion among

"the gods, 0 Amsu-qet . "

I I . Vignette : T h e s e c o n d A a t . T h e h o r i z o n .

Text : (i) The second Aat [which is painted] green . "The

"god therein is Ra-Heru-khuti ." The Osiris Nu saith :-

"I am the mighty one of possessions in Sekhet-Aarru . H a i l ,

"thou Sekhet-(2)Aarru, the walls of which are of iron! The

" h e i g h t o f t h e w h e a t t h e r e o f i s f i v e c u b i t s , t h e e a r s ( 3 ) t h e r e o f

" b e i n g t w o c u b i t s l o n g a n d t h e s t a l k s t h r e e c u b i t s ; t h e b a r l e y

" t h e r e o f i s s e v e n c u b i t s i n h e i g h t , t h e e a r s b e i n g t h r e e c u b i t s

" l o n g a n d ( 4 ) t h e s t a l k s f o u r c u b i t s . A n d b e h o l d , t h e Khus, e a c h

"of whom therein is nine cubits in height, reap the wheat and

"the barley (5) side by side with Heru-khuti (Harmachis) . I

"know the door which is in the middle of Sekhet-Aarru where-

" f r o m ( 6 ) R d c o m e t h f o r t h i n t o t h e e a s t e r n p a r t o f h e a v e n ; t h e

"southern portion thereof is in the Lake of the Kharu f o w l ,

"and the northern portion thereof is in the Canal of the Re

i . Or, "upon bread [made of] the finest grain . "



THE CHAPTER OF THE RATS . 265

" f o w l , ( 7 ) i n t h e p l a c e w h e r e i n R d s a i l e t h r o u n d a b o u t b y m e a n s

"of the winds which bear him along . I am he who watcheth

" t h e l e a t h e r s i n ~ 8 ) t h e d i v i n e b o a t , I a m i n t h e b o a t , a n d I a m

"he who doth navigate it without ceasing . I know (g) the two

"sycamore trees of turquoise, from between which the god Rd

"doth emerge when he setteth out upon his journey (to) over

"the pillars of Shu towards the door of the Lord of the East,

"wherefrom Rd cometh forth . I (it) know the Sekhet-Aarru of

"Rd . The wheat therein is ( 1 2 ) f i v e c u b i t s i n h e i g h t , t h e e a r s

" b e i n g t w o c u b i t s l o n g , a n d t h e s t a l k s t h r e e c u b i t s ; t h e b a r l e y

"thereof is seven cubits in height, (t3) the ears being three

" c u b i t s l o n g a n d t h e s t a l k s f o u r c u b i t s . And behold, the Khus

"therein, who are nine cubits in height, (t4) reap the wheat

" a n d t h e b a r l e y , s i d e b y s i d e w i t h t h e d i v i n e S o u l s o f t h e E a s t . "

I I I . Vignette : T h e t h i r d A a th i c h i s c a l l e d " t h e A a t oft h e Khus" .

Text : (i) The third Aat [which is to be painted] green .

T h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-"Hail, thou Aat of the Khus, whereover none can sail ( 2 )

"and wherein are the Khus ; t h e f i r e t h e r e o f i s b l a z i n g w i t h

" f l a m e . H a i l , t h o u A a t o f ( 3 ) t h e K h u s ! Y o u r f a c e s a r e i n t h e

" l a n d ( r ) [make clear your ways], and purify ye your Aats, and

"what hath been decreed by Osiris do ye for me (4) for ever .

"I am the mighty one of the Te s h e r t crown which is on the

"brow of the god of Light, and which maintaineth in life the

"two lands and the men and women thereof (5) b y means of

" t h e f l a m e o f i t s m o u t h . The god Rd hath been delivered from

"the Fiend Apep . " I V . Vignette : T h e f o u r t h A a tw h e r e i n i s i n s c r i b e d " t h e

d o u b l e m o u n t a i n , d o u b l y h i g h , a n d d o u b l y g r e a t ".

Text : ( t ) The fourth Aat [which is to be painted] green .

T h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h : - - ( 2 )

"Hail, thou who art chief of the hidden Aat . Hail, thou

"One who art lofty and great, who dwellest in the underworld,




"over whom the heaven spreadeth itself . (3) Thou art three

"hundred measures in length, and two hundred and thirty

"measures in width, and thou hast over thee a serpent the

"name of which is Sati - temui I ( ? ) ; (4) he is seventy cubits

"in length, and he liveth by slaughtering the Khus and the

"dead who are in the underworld . I s t a n d u p i n t h y e n c l o s u r e ,

" ( 5 ) 0 Mad, I sail round about, and I see the way [which

" l e a d e t h ] u n t o t h e e . I g a t h e r m y s e l f t o g e t h e r t o t h e e . I am the

"Man, and [I] clothe (6) thy head ; I am strong and I have

"become strong . I am the god who is mighty in enchantments ;

"my two eyes have been given to me, and I am glorious (7 )

" t h e r e w i t h . Who art thou, 0 Khu t h a t g o e s t u p o n t h y b e l l y ,

"and whose two-fold strength is upon thy mountain ? Grant

"thou unto me (8) that I may go unto thee, and that thy two-

"fold strength may be with me . I l i f t u p m y s e l f b y [ t h y ] t w o -

"fold strength, I have come, (g) and I have vanquished the

"Akriu serpent of Rd. His peace is to me at eventide

; I r e -

v o l v e i n ( t o ) t h e h e a v e n s a n d t h o u a r t i n t h e m o u n t a i n v a l l e y .

"A decree [bath been made] concerning thee upon earth . "

V . Vignette : T h e f i f t h A a tzText : ( i ) T h e f i f t h A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] g r e e n . The

O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hail, thou Aat of the Khus, whereover none may pass . ( 2 )

"The K l u i s w h o a r e t h e r e i n h a v e t h i g h s s e v e n c u b i t s l o n g , a n d

"they live upon the shades of the weak and helpless . ( 3 ) H a i l ,

"thou Aat of the Khus, open ye unto me your ways so that I

"may pass by you and may go on (4) to the beautiful Amentet,

"according to that which Osiris, the Khu, the lord of Khus,

"hath decreed . I l i v e b y r e a s o n o f m y s p l e n d o u r , ( 5 ) I p e r f o r m

" e v e r y f e s t i v a l o f t h e m o n t h , a n d I o b s e r v e r i g h t l y t h e f e s t i v a l

"of the half month . I revolve, and the Eye of Horns is under

"my hand in the (6) following of Thoth . The mouth of every

"god and of every dead person devoureth mine enemy this day,

" a n d h e f a l l e t h d o w n a t t h e b l o c k o f s l a u g h t e r .

i . I . e., Sati of the two knives .




V I . Vignette : T h e s i x t h A a ti t h a f i s h i n s i d e i t .

Text : ( i ) T h e s i x t h A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] g r e e n . The

O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hail, thou Ammehet which art holy unto the gods, and art

"hidden unto the Khus, ( 2 ) and art baleful unto the dead ; t h e

" n a m e o f t h e g o d w h o d w e l l e t h t h e r e i n i s S e k h e r - A t ( r ) . H o m a ge

" t o t h e e , 0 A m m e h e t , I h a v e c o m e ( 3 ) t o s e e t h e g o d s w h o

"dwell in thee . U n c o v er y o u r f a c e s a n d l a y d o w n y o u r h e a d -

"dresses when ye meet me, (4) for, b ehold, I am a m ighty god

"amon g you, a n d I h ave come t o p repare p rovi si on s for you .

"Let not Sekher-At (?) have dominion over me, let not the di-

v i n e s l a u g h t e r e r s c o m e a f t e r m e , l e t n o t t h e m u r d e r o u s f i e n d s

" c o m e ( 6 ) a f t e r m e , b u t l e t m e l i v e u p o n s e p u l c h r a l o f f e r i n g s

" a m o n g y o u . "

V I I . Vignette : T h e s e v e n t h A a tText : (i) The seventh Aat [wh ich is to b e painted] green .

T h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

"Hail, thou city of Ases, which art remote fro m sight, and

" t h e f i r e o f w h i c h i s i n f l a m e . There is a serpent within thee

" ( 3 ) and his name is Rerek ; t h e l e n g t h o f h i s b a c k b o n e i s s e v e n

" c u b i t s , a n d h e l i v e t h u p o n t h e Khus, a n d h e a n n i h i l a t e t h ( 4 )

" t h e i r g l o r i o u s s t r e n g t h . Get thee back, 0 Rerek, who dwellest

"in the city of Ases, who devourest with thy mouth, and from

" w h o s e e y e s ( 5 ) e v i l l o o k s p o u r f o r t h . L e t t h y b o n e s b e b r o k e n ,

"and let thy emissions be impotent. C ome thou not against me,

"and let not thy emissions (6) come upon me ; l e t t h y p o i s o n

"fall and lie dead u pon the earth, and let thy two lips be in

" [ t h y ] d e n . (7) The Ka of th e Serpent bath f allen, and, con-

v e r s e l y , I h a v e g a i n e d g l o r i o u s s t r e n g t h . T h e M a f t e t ( i . e . , Lynx)

"bath cut off thy head . "

V I I I . Vignette : T h e e i g h t h A a t C~Text : ( i ) T h e e i g h t h A a t ( w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] g r e e n . The

O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )



268 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DAY .

" H a i l , H a - h e t e p , g r e a t a n d m i g h t y o n e o f t h e c a n a l ! No n e

"can o btain the mastery over the water which is therein . ( 3 ) I t

" i s m i g h t i l y t o b e f e a r e d , a n d t h e r o a r i n g s w h i c h a r e t h e r e i n

" a r e m i g h t y . The (¢) name o f the god th erein is Qa-ha-hetep,

" a n d h e g u a r d e t h i t g l a d l y s o t h a t n o n e m a y e n t e r . I a m t h e

" E n n u r b i r d w h i c h i s ( 5 ) a b o v e t h e t h i g h o f t h e g o d ( ? ) A n -

"ker-s, and I have brought the possessions of the earth to the

" g o d T e m , a n d [ I ] m a k e s t r o n g a n d f o r t i f y t h e m a r i n e r s [ o f

"Ra], ( 6 ) I h a v e s e t t h e t e r r o r o f m y s e l f i n t h e d i v i n e l o r d s o f

" t h e s h r i n e , a n d I h a v e s e t t h e a w e o f m e i n t h e d iv i n e l o r d s

" ( 7 ) o f t h i n g s ; t h e r e f o r e I s h a l l n o t b e c a r r i e d o f f t o t h e s l a u g h t e r

" b l o c k o f t h o s e w h o w o u l d w i l l i n g l y d e s t r o y m e . ( 8 ) I a m t h e

" g u i d e o f t h e n o r t h e r n h o r i z o n [ a n d I k n o w t h e g o d w h o i s

"therein] . "

IX . V i g n e t t e : The ninth Aat . A c r o co d i l e t h r u s t i n g h i s s n o u t i n t o a

v a s e ( r ) c a l l e d A k e s i .

T e x t : ( i ) Th e n i n t h A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] y e l l o w .

The Osiris Nu, triumphant, saith :-

"Hail, thou city Akesi, which art hidden ( 2 ) f r o m t h e g o d s ,

" t h e Khus k n o w t h e n a m e o f w h i c h t h e g o d s a re a f r a i d . No n e

" c a n e n t e r t h e r e i n , a n d n o n e c a n c o m e f o r t h t h e r e f r o m ex c e p t

" t h a t h o l y g o d ( 3 ) w h o d w e l l e t h i n h i s e g g , a n d w h o p u t t e t h

" h i s f e ar i n t o t h e g ods an d t h e t e rror o f h i mse l f i n t o t h e K h u s .

" ( q ) The opening [into the city] is of fire, and the winds thereof

"destroy both nostrils and mouths, and the god bath made it for

"those who follow willingly (5) in his train ; none can breathe

" t h e w i n d s [ t h e r e o f ] ex c e p t t h a t h o l y g o d w h o d w e l l e t h i n (6)

" h i s e g g . H e b a t h m a d e t h e c i t y s o t h a t h e m a y d w e l l t h e r e i n

"at will, and none can enter therein except on the day of great

" ( 7 ) t ran s f o r mat i on s . H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u h o l y g o d w h o

" d w e l l e s t i n t h i n e e g g , I h a v e c o m e u n t o t h e e ( 8 ) t h a t I m a y

" b e a m o n g t h o s e w h o f o l l o w t h e e ; let me come forth from the

"city o f Akesi, let me enter therein, let the gates thereof be

" o p e n e d u n t o m e , l e t m e b r e a t h e t h e a i r ( g) w h i c h i s t h e r e i n ,

"and let me have possession of the offerings th ereof . "





270 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DA Y .

" u p ( 7 ) after it was b rought low, [I am] glorious in heaven,

"an d [I am] mi g h t y up on e art h . I f l y l i k e a h a w k , ( 8 ) a n d I

" c a c k l e l i k e t h e s m e n goose, and it hath b een given to me to

" a l i g h t a t t h e ` T h i g h o f t h e L a k e ' . I stand up upon it, I sit

"down (g) upon it, I rise up like a god, I eat of the food of

"Se kh t i- h e t ep, an d I g o on wards t o t h e (t o) domai n of t h e

" s t a r r y g o d s . T h e d o u b l e d o o r s o f M a a t a r e o p e n e d u n t o m e ,

"and the double doors of the land of the great deep (t t ) a r e

"unbolted before me . I set up a ladder to heaven among the

"g ods, an d I am a divine be i n g amon g t h e m . I s p e a k w i t h t h e

" v o i c e o f ( 1 2 ) t h e s m e n goose to which the gods listen, and

"my speech and my voice are those of the star S ept (Sothis) . "

X I i . Vignette : T h e t w e l f t h A a t , c a l l e d ' A s t c h e t e t e m A m e n t " .

Text : (i) The twelfth Aat [whic h is to be painted] green .

T h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

" H a i l , t h o u A a t o f t h e c i t y o f U n t ( ? ) a t t h e h e a d o f R e - s t a u ,

"the flame of w hich is a blazing fire, the gods are unable to

" a p p r o a c h t h e e ( 3 ) a n d t h e Khus a r e u n a b l e t o g a t h e r t o g e t h e r

"t h e re i n by re ason of t h e urae i wh i ch would blot out t h e i r

"names . H a i l , t h o u A a t o f U n t , I a m i n t h e f o r m o f t h e m i g h t y

" g o d w h o d w e l l e t h a m o n g t h e Khu s and who dwelleth in thee .

" ( 5 ) I a m a m o n g t h e s t a r s t h a t n e v e r f a i l w i t h i n t h e e ; I s h a l l

" n e v e r f a i l , a n d m y n a m e s h a l l n e v e r f a i l . ( 6 ) ` H a i l , o d o u r o f

"the god,' say they, the gods who dwell in the Aat of Unt ; [ I

" s h a l l b e w i t h y o u , I s h a l l l i v e w i t h y o u , 0 y e g o d s w h o d w e l l

"in the Aat of Unt ; ] l o v e y e m e m o r e t h a n y o u r o w n g o d s ,

" ( 7 ) f o r I s h a l l b e w i t h y o u f o r e v e r [ i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e

" f o l l o w e r s o f t h e g r e a t g o d ] . "

X I I I . Vignette : T h e t h i r t e e n t h A a t c a l l e d " U a r t e n t m u " . B e -

h i n d i t s t a n d s t h e h i p p o po t a m u s H e b e t c h - r e - f , w i t h t h e r i g h t f o r e p a w

r e s t i n g o n a b e e t l e .

Text : ( i ) T h e t h i r t e e n t h A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] g r e e n .

The Osiris Nu, triumphant, sa ith :-

"Hail, thou Aat wherein the Khu s g a i n ( 2 ) no mastery . Thy




" w a t e r s a r e o f f i r e , a n d t h e s t r e a m s w h i c h a r e i n t h e e b u r n w i t h

" f i r e a n d ( 3 ) t h y f l a m e i s a b l a z i n g f i r e ; those who are there

"and who wish to drink thy waters to quench (4) their thirst

"cannot do so by reason of the mighty dread which possesseth

" t h e m a n d b y r e a s o n o f t h e g r e a t t e r r o r w h i c h i t c a u s e t h , t h e m

"to have. Th e g od s a nd th e Kh u s ( 5 ) look up on t h e wat e rs

" t h e r e o f a n d r e t r e a t w i t h o u t h a v i n g q u e n c h e d t h e i r t h i r s t , a n d

" t h e i r h e a r t s a r e n o t ( 6 ) s e t a t r e s t ; an d t h oug h t h e y wi sh t o

"enter into them they cannot do so . T h e s t r e a m i s f i l l e d w i t h

"reeds, even as the stream (7) which floweth from the issues

"which come forth from Osiris . I h a v e g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r

"the waters [thereof], I have drunk from the canal [thereof]

"(8) like the god who dwelleth in the Aat of the waters , and

"wh o i s t h e g uardi an t h e re of . The g ods are more afrai d t o

" d r i n k ( g ) t h e w a t e r s t h e r e o f t h a n a r e t h e Khus , and they re-

" t r e a t I t h e r e f r o m . H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 t h o u g o d w h o d w e l l e s t

"in the Aat of the waters, (to) I have come unto thee, gra nt

" t h o u t h a t I m a y g a i n p o w e r o v e r t h e w a t e r s [ t h e r e o f ] , a n d t h a t

"I may drink from the canal thereof, (ii) even as thou dost

" a l l o w t o d r i n k t h e g r e a t g o d f r o m w h o m c o m e t h H a p ( i . e . ,

"the Nile), who maketh gr een things to come into being, (12)

"wh o make t h t o g row t h e t h i n g s wh i ch g row, wh o make t h vi-

g orous youn g p lan t s an d h e rbs, an d wh o also g iveth t o t h e

" g o d s g i f t s w h i c h p r o c e e d f r o m h i m a n d o f f e r i n g s ( ' ) . A n d g r a n t

"thou tha t I may come to Hap, (t3) and that I may gain power

"ove r youn g p lan t s an d h e rbs, for I am t h e son of t h y b ody

" f o r e v e r . "

XIV . Vignette : T h e f o u r t e e n t h A a t . A r a n g e o f m o u n t a i n s c a l l e d

" F i e l d o f K h e r - a b a " , a m a n h o l d i n g a l i b a t i o n v a s e , t h e g o d A n u b i s , a

h a w k w i t h a d i s k , a l i o n - go d , a m a n s e t t i n g t h e tes her c r o w n u p o n a g o d ,

a h i p p op o t a m u s , a c r o c o d i l e , a n d a w o r m .

Tex t : ( i ) T h e f o u r t e e n t h A a t [ w h i c h i s t o b e p a i n t e d ] y e l l o w .

T h e O s i r i s N u , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- (2)

" H a i l , t h o u A a t o f K h e r - a b a , w h i c h t u r n e t h b a c k H a p a t T a t t u ,

i . Or, "they are terrified thereat . "




" g r a n t t h o u t h a t l .Iap may come (3) abund ant in grain as he

"advanceth for the mouth of those who eat, and giving divine

" o f f e r i n g s t o t h e g o d s , a n d ( 4 ) s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s f o r t h e Khus .

"There is a serpent in the double q e r t i of Abu (Elephanti ne)

"at t h e mout h of (5) Hap, an d h e come t h wi t h wat e r an d h e

"standeth up upon the Thigh of Kher-aba w ith his divine sove-

r e i g n p r i n c e s ( 6 ) a t t h e h e a d o f t h e c a n a l , a n d s e e t h i n h i s h o u r ,

" w h i c h i s t h e s i l e n c e o f t h e n i g h t . H a i l , y e g o d s o f ( 7 ) K h e r -

" a b a , a n d y e s o v e r e i g n p r i n c e s a t t h e h e a d o f t h e c a n a l [ t h e r e o f ] ,

"let your pools be o pened to me, let your streams be opened

" ( 8 ) to me, let me gain power over the water, let me rest on

" t h e c a n a l , l e t m e e a t g r a i n , ( 9 ) l e t m e b e s a t i s f i e d w i t h y o u r

" f o o d , l e t m e l i f t m y s e l f u p , l e t m y h e a r t b e g r e a t , e v e n a s [ i s

" t h a t o f ] ( t o ) t h e g o d w h o d w e l l e t h i n K h e r - a b a , l e t o f f e r i n g s

"li ke un t o yours be made t o me , le t me n ot be de st roye d by

"the (ii) issues which come f orth from Osiris, and let me not

"he withdrawn therefrom for ever . "

Here endeth the book in peace .

CHAPTER CL[ F r om t h e P a p y r us o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . N o . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 3 o ) . ] '

Vignette : I . F o u r s e r p e n t s , e m b l e m a t i c p r o b a b l y o f t h e c a r d i n a l

p oi n t s , a n d f i f t e e n A a t s :-

I . I1Sekhet-Aarru ; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s R a - H e r u - K h u t i

"(Rd-Harmachis) . "

I I . "Th e brow of fi re ; t h e g od wh e re i n i s Fa-akh

" ( B e a r e r o f a l t a r s ) . "

I I I . "Mountain, exceedingly high . "

IV . "Aat of the Khus . "

V .D" A m m e b e t ; t h e g o d w h e r e i n

" t h r o w e r o f f i s h ) . "

V I .

1" A s s e t . "

t . T h e P a p y r u s o f N o e n d s w i t h t h i s C h a p t e r .

i s S e k h e r - r e m u ( O v e r -



THE CHAPTER OF THE FUNERAL BIER. 273

V II . " H a - s e r t; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s F a - p e t ( B e a r e r o f

"Heaven. ) "

V III . "The brow of the god[s] Qahu. "

IX . "Atu ; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s S e p t ( S o t h i s ) . "

X" o f s o u l s ) . "

XI . 11 ~The

"sekhemu . "

X II .

X I I I .

XIV .

XV.

upon

"(9)

I I

"Unt ; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s H e t e m e t - b a i u ( De s t r o y e r

b r o w o f t h e w a t e r s ; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s Aa-

"Aat of Kher-aba; t h e g o d w h e r e i n i s H a p ( N i l e ) . "

" S t r e a m o f t h e L a k e o f f l a m e w h i c h i s i n t h e f i r e. "

" A k e s i ; the god wherein is Maa-Thet-f. "

"The beautiful Amentet ; the gods whereinc a k e s a n d ale(?) . "

CHAPTER CLI[From the Papyrus of M u t - h e t e p ( B r i t . M u s . No. I o , o i o , s h e e t 5 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e f u n e r a l c h a m b e r. In the centre, upon a bier, lies the

m u m m y o f t h e d e c e a s e d a n d o n o n e s i d e i s h e r s o u l , i n t h e f o r m o f a

h u m a n - h e a d e d b i r d ; the god Anubis, jackal-headed, stands on the other

s i d e b e n d i n g o v e r t h e m u m m y. At the head of the bier k neels Nephthys,

and at the foot Isis . The walls, which are here depicted as lying flat on

t h e g r o u n d , a r e o r n a m e n t e d w i t h e m b l e m s a n d t e xts , a n d a t e a c h c o r n e r

stands one of the gods of the ca rdinal points . T w o u s ha b tiu f igu r es , tw o

s o u l s , a f l a m e , e t c . , f il l u p the r em a ining s pa c es .

Text : (r . ) " T h y r i g h t e y e i s l i k e t h e S e k t e t b o a t ; thy left

"(2) e ye i s l i k e t h e A t e t b o a t ; t h i n e e y e b r o w s a r e l i k e ( 3 ) A n p u ;

" t h y f i n g e r s a r e l i k e T h o t h : ( 4 ) t h y h a i r i s l i k e P t a h - S e k e r;

"(5) they make a fair way for thee, and they smite down (6)

" f o r t h e e t h e f i e n d s o f S e t . " I

I . Isis saith :- ( 7) " I h a v e c o m e t o p r o t e c t t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , ( 8 )

"with the north wind which cometh forth from Tern; I h a v e

s t r e n g t h en e d f o r t h e e t h y t h r o a t; I h a v e c a u s e d t h e e ( t o )

I . T h i s t e x t i s a p a r t o f t h e s p e e c h o f A n pu ; s e e i n f ra , p . 2 7 6 .

1 8

live




" t o b e w i t h ( i i ) t h e g o d ; a n d I h a v e p l a c e d a l l t h i n e e n e m i e s

" ( 1 2 ) u n d e r t h y f e e t . "

I I . N e p h t h y s s a i t h :- ( i ) " I g o r o u n d a b o u t b e h i n d m y s i s t e r

" O s i r i s M u t - h e t e p . I have come th at (2) I may protect thee,

" a n d m y s t r e n g t h w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h s h a l l b e b e h i n d t h e e f o r ( 3 )

"ever and ever . The god (4) Rd hearkeneth unto thy cry, (4)

"t h ou, 0 daug h t e r of Hat h or, art made t o t ri ump h , t h y h e ad

"shall never be taken away from thee, and thou shalt be made

" t o r i s e u p i n p e a c e . "

I I I . A d e i t y ( ? ) s a i t h :- "( I) I f a n y w o u l d c o m e t o f e t t e r t h e e

" I w i l l n o t a l l o w h i m t o d o s o ; (2) i f a n y w o u l d c o m e t o

"hurl missiles at thee I will not allow him to do so . But I

" w i l l ( 3 ) f e t t e r t h e e , a n d I w i l l h u r l m i s s i l e s a t t h e e ; and I

"am (4) protecting thee, 0 Mut-hetep, triumphant . "

IV . T h e Tet s a i t h :- ( 1 ) " 0 t h o u t h a t c o m e s t q u i c k l y , I t u r n

"bac k thy steps, (2) 0 Kep-bra, a nd I illumine thy h idden (3)

" p l a c e . I s t a n d b e h i n d t h e Tet on the day (4) of turning back

" s l a u g h t e r s , ( 5 ) a n d I a m p r o t e c t i n g t h e e , 0 M u t - h e t e p , ( 6 ) t r i u m -

p h a n t b e f o r e O s i r i s . "

V. T h e f l a m e s a i t h :- (i) "I surround with sand the hidd en

"tomb, (2) and drive away him tha t would attac k it . I l i g h t e n

" t h e f u n e r a l m o u n t a i n , I c a s t l i g h t ( 3 ) t h e r e o n . I t r a v e r s e t h e

"way, and I protect (4) Mut-hetep, triumphant . "

VI . (i) "Anubis, (2) who is at the head of the divine hall

"an d wh o [dwe lle t h ] up on h i s moun t ai n , (3) t h e lord of Ta-

" t ch e s e r t , s a i t h :- I h a v e c o m e ( 4 ) t o p r o t e c t O s i r i s M u t - h e t e p ,

"triumphant . "

V I I . The living soul of Mu t-(2)hetep saith :- "Le t (3) Rd

"be adored in heaven, and when (4) he setteth on the western

"horizon of heaven . "

V I I I . ( r ) T h e l i v i n g s o u l a n d t h e p e r f e c t Kh u o f M u t - h e t e p ,

( 2 ) t r i u m p h a n t ( 3 ) b e f o r e O s i r i s , s a y :- [ " A d o r ed b e R d w h en

" h e r i s e t h i n t h e e a s t e r n h o r i z o n o f heaven"].,IX a and b . ( i ) The lady of the house, Mut-hetep, saith :-

" H a i l , s h a b t i f i g u r e , i f I b e c o n d e m n e d ( 2 ) o r i f t h e r e b e a l l o t -

i . Added from the Papyrus of Qenna at Leyden, ed . Leemans, Plate XVIII .



THE CHAPTER OF THE FUNERAL BIER . 2 7 5

"ted to me any work to do in the underworld-beh old, let (3)

" o p p o s i t i o n b e s e t a s i d e - s u c h a s i s d o n e b y a m a n i n h i s t u r n ,

"namely, sowing (4) the fields, and filling the channels with

"water, and bringing the (5) sand of the west to the east, 0

"be thou present when I call unto thee . "

X . ( r ) M e s t h a s a i t h :- "I am thy daughter, 0 Mut-hetep, and

"I h ave come ( 2) t o p r o t e c t t h e e ; I make thy hou se to germi-

nate and to be stablished firmly (3) according to what Ptah

" b a t h c o m m a n d e d a n d a c c o r d i n g t o w h a t R d h a t h c o m m a n d e d . "

X I . ( r ) H a p i s a i t h :- "I h ave come t o p rot e ct t h e e , 0 (2)

" O s i r i s M u t - h e t e p ; I bind up for thee thy head and thy mem-

bers, I smite down thine enemies (3) for thee beneath thee,

"and I give thee thy head for ever . "

X I I . ( r ) S a i t h T u a - m a u t - e f :- "I am thy daughter who l oveth

"thee, 0 Mut-hetep, triumphant for ever ; ( 2) I h ave come an d

"I have avenged [thee, 0] my father Osiris, [upon him tha t]

" d i d [ e v i l ] u n t o t h e e a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t ( 3 ) h i m u n d e r t h y f e e t . "

X I I I . ( r ) Q e b b - s e n n u - f :- "I am Qebh-sennu -f, and I have

" c o m e (2) t h a t I m a y p r o t e c t M u t - l i e t e p ; I h a v e c o l l e c t e d i n t o

" a w h o l e b o d y f o r t h e e t h y b o n e s , I h a v e g a t h e r e d ( 3 ) t o g e t h e r

"for thee thy members, I have brought thy heart and I do set

" i t u p o n i t s s e a t w i t h i n t h y b o d y , a n d I m a k e t h y h o u s e t o g e r -

m i n a t e a f t e r t h e e . "

CHAPTER CLL'

Vignette : T h e g o d A n p u ( A n u b i s ) s t a n d i n g b y t h e mummy of t h e d e -

c e a s e d w h i c h l i e s o n a b i e r .

Text : (r) The god Anpu, wh o dwelleth in th e [city of] em -

balmment, the governor of the divine house, placeth his two

h an ds up on t h e lord of li fe 2 (2) of Nebseni, the scribe and

t . A s h o r t e n e d f o r m o f t h i s C h a p t e r a l s o o c cu r s i n t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i

( s h e e t 21 ) ; i t h a s f o r a V i g n e t t e a m a l e h e a d , a n d i s e n t i t l e d , " T h e C h a p t e r of

a h e a d of s e c r e t t h i n g s " .

2 . 1. e . , t h e d e a d b od y of N e b s e n i .

t8*




draughtsman of the Temple of Ptah, the lord of piety, the son

o f t h e s c r i b e a n d d e s i g n e r T h e n a , t r i u m p h a n t , b o r n o f t h e l a d y

of the house Mut-resth, triumphant, (3) and he furnisheth him

w i t h t h e t h i n g s w h i c h b e l o n g t o h i m . " H o m a ge t o t h ee, 0

"h appy on e , divine lord, wh o art e n dowe d wi t h t h e s i g h t of

" t h e U t c h a t ( ? ) , ( 4) P t ah - Se ke r bat h boun d t h e e up , Anpu h at h

" e x a l t e d t h e e , a n d S h u h a t h c a u s e d t h e e t o b e l i f t e d u p , 0 ( 5 )

" F a c e o f b e a u t y , t h o u d i v i n e p r i n c e o f e t e r n i t y . T h o u h a s t t h i n e

" e y e , 0 s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h o u l o r d o f p i e t y , a n d b e a u t i f u l i t i s .

" T h y r i g h t e y e i s ( 6 ) i n t h e S e k t e t b o a t , a n d t h y l e f t e y e i s i n

" t h e A t e t b o a t ; and thine eyebrows are of fair appearance in

"the presence of the (7) company of the gods . Thy brow is in

"the protection of Anpu ; and the back of thy head, 0 beauti-

f u l o n e , ( 8 ) i s b e f o r e t h e h o l y H a w k . T h y f i n g e r s a r e s t a b l i s h e d

"with written works in the presence of the lord of Khemennu,

"Th ot h , (g) wh o bat h g iven t o me t h e spe e ch of t h e s acre d

"books . Thy hair is beautiful before Ptah-Seker, and thou, 0

" s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h o u l o r d o f p i e t y , a r t b e a u t i f u l b e f o r e ( i o ) t h e

"great company of the gods . T h e g r e a t g o d l o o k e t h u p o n t h e e ,

" a n d h e l e a d e t h t h e e a l o n g t h e p a t h o f h a p p i n e s s , a n d s e p u l c h r a l

"meals are bestowed upon thee ; h e o v e r t h r o w e t h f o r t h e e [ a l l ]

"thine enemies, (ii) and setteth them under thee in the pre-

s e n c e o f t h e g r e a t c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o d w e l l i n t h e

"mighty House of the Aged One which is in Annu (Heliopolis) . "

CHAPTER CLII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus . No . 1 0 , 4 i 7 , s h e e t 1 3 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g b e f o re a h o u s e . '

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF BUILDING A HOUSE UPON THE

EARTH . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u ,

t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

1 . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , op . c i t . , B l . 7 4) t h e V i g n e t t e r e p re s e n t s

t h e d e c e a s e d s e a t e d i n a c h a i r h o l d i n g o u t h i s h a n d s t o r e c e i v e t h e b r e a d a n d

w a ter w hic h the k neel ing go d d es s o f the s y c a m o r e tr ee is a b o u t to give him .



THE CHAPTER OF BUILDING A HOUSE UPON EARTH . 277

" H a i l ! S e b r e j o i c e t h , f o r t h e O s i r i s N u s t a n d e t h u p o v e r h i s

"body, [and he goeth round about among those who follow Ra] .

"To men [and to the gods] who have given birth to their own

" f a t h e r s ( 3 ) I h a v e a s c r i b e d p r a i s e ; and they have sight . T h e

"goddess Sesheta hath bro ught the god Nebt, and Anpu (Anubis)

"bath called unto the Osiris Nu (4) to build a house on the

" e a r t h . I t s f o u n d a t i o n i s i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , a n d t h e c i r c u i t

" t h e r e o f [ r e a c h e t h ] t o K h e r - a b a , t h e s h r i n e ( ? ) i s [ l i k e t h a t o f ]

"t h e g od Se kh e m, wh o d we lle t h i n (5) Se kh e m, acco rdi n g t o

" t h a t w h i c h I h a v e w r i t t e n f o r t h e r e n e w a l ( ? ) t h e r e o f , a n d m e n

" a n d w o m e n b r i n g o f f e r i n g s , a n d l i b a t i o n s , a n d m i n i s t r a n t s ( ? ).

" A n d O s i r i s s a i t h u n t o ( 6 ) t h e g o d s w h o a r e i n [ h i s ] f o l l o w i n g

"and who journey along, `Behold ye the house which hath been

" b u i l t f o r a Klzu w h o i s p r o v i d e d ( 7 ) w i t h [ a l l h i s a t t r i b u t e s ] ,

" w h o c o m eth d a i l y t o r enew h i m s el f a m ong y o u . 0 h o l d y e

"him in awe, and ascribe ye unto him praises, and let him be

"a favoured being with you ; look ye (8) to what I have done

"and to what I have said . ' A n d O s i r i s s a i t h c o n c e r n i n g t h e g o d ,

" ` L e t h i m c o m e d a i l y t o r e n e w h i m s e l f a m o n g y o u . A n d l e t

"beasts [for sacrifice] be brought u nto him (9) by the south

"wind, and let grain be brought unto him by the north wind,

" a n d l e t b a r l e y b e b r o u g h t u n t o h i m f r o m t h e e n d s o f t h e e a r t h ' ;

"the mouth of Osiris bath ordered [this] for me . Drawi n g on-

" w a r d m a y h e ( t o ) g o r o u n d a b o u t o n h i s l e f t h a n d , m a y h e

"place himself on his right hand, and may he see men, and the

"gods, and the Kh u s , and the dead drawing him along with

" p r a i s e s a n d c r i e s o f j o y , ( i i ) a n d m a y h e b e a f a v o u r e d b e i n g

" w i t h t h e m . " I

CHAPTER CLIII A .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y ru s o f Nu ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 0 ) . ]

Vignette : A n e t f a s t e n e d a t o n e e n d t o g r o u n d b e l o w o r n e a r w a t e r

i . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n t h e s e w o r d s a r e f o l lo w e d b y a s p e e c h o f t h e d e -

c e a s e d , a s p e e c h o f t h e " l a d y o f t h e s y c a m o r e s " , a n d a p r a y e r t o h e r o n b e -

h a l f o f t h e d e c e a s e d .



278 T H E C H A P T E R S O F C O M I N G F O R T H B Y DA YY

b y m e a n s o f a s t a k e d r i v e n t h r o u g h a c o i l o f r op e w h i c h i s d r a w n t i g h t

b y t h e d e c e a s e d .

Text : (t) THE CHA PTER OF COMING F ORTH FR OM THE NET .

The Osiris Nu, the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-

c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hai l, t h ou ` g od wh o looke st b e h i n d t h e e ', t h ou ` g od wh o

" h a l t g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y ( 2 ) o v e r t h i n e h e a r t ' , I g o a - f i s h i n g

" w i t h t h e c o r d a g e o f t h e ` u n i t e r o f t h e e a r t h ' , a n d o f h i m t h a t

" m a k e t h a w a y t h r o u g h t h e e a r t h . Hail, ye fishers who have

" g i v e n b i r t h t o y o u r o w n f a t h e r s , ( 3 ) w h o l a y s n a r e s w i t h y o u r

"nets, and who go round about in the chambers of the waters,

"take ye not me (q . ) i n t h e n e t w h e r e w i t h y e e n s n a r e d t h e h e l p -

"less fiend s, and rope me not in with the rope (5) wherewith

"ye roped in the abominable earth - followers, which had its

" w o o d e n f r a m e ( ? ) [ r e a c h i n g ] u n t o h e a v e n , a n d i t s w e i g h t e d p a r t s

"up on t h e e art h. L e t m e c o m e f o r t h ( i . e . , e s c a p e ) f r o m t h e

" p e g s ( ? ) t h e r e o f , l e t m e r e j o i c e a l o n g w i t h ( 6 ) t h e g o d o f t h e

"Hennu boat, let me come forth from its bars(?), let me rise

"up like the god Sebek, and let me make a flight to you away

"from the snare of the fowler (7) whose fingers are hidden . I

" k n o w t h e p o l e w i t h c u r v e d e n d s w h i c h i s i n i t; ` M i g h t y f i n g e r

" o f S e k r i ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] . I know the mekhes which is in it ; ( 8 )

"'Thigh of the god Nemu' [is its name] . I know the piece of

"wood which o peneth in it; ` H a n d o f I s i s ' [ i s i t s n a m e ]

. I k n o w

" t h e k n i f e o f s l a u g h t e r ( 9 ) w h i c h i s i n i t; ` S l a u g h t e r i n g k n i f e

" w h e r e w i t h I s i s c u t o f f a p i e c e o f f l e s h f r o m H o r u s ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] .

"I kn ow t h e n ame s of t h e frame(?) an d we i g h t s wh i ch are i n

" i t

; `Leg and Thigh (to) of the double Lion-god' [are their

" n a m e s ]. I know the name of the cordage wherewith it snareth

" [ li v i n g t h i n g s ]; ` V i g o u r o f T e m ' [ i s i t s n a m e ]

. ( i i ) I k n o w t h e

"name of the snarers who lay snares therewith; ' A k e r u g o d s ,

" a n c e s t o r s o f t h e A k h a b i u g o d s ' [ a r e t h e i r n a m e s ] . ( 1 2 ) I k n o w

"the names of its hands; ' T w o h a n d s o f t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e l o r d

"who heareth speech in Annu (Heliopolis) on the night of the

" f e s t i v a l o f t h e h a l f - m o n t h i n t h e T e m p l e o f t h e M o o n - g o d ' . . .

" ( 1 3 ) [ a r e t h e i r n a m e s ] . I k n o w t h e n a m e o f t h e T h i g h w h i c h



THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROM THE NET . 2 79

"surrounderh it at its upper part ; ` T h i g h o f i r o n w h e r e u p o n

"the gods stand' [is its name] . I know ( 1 4 ) t h e n a m e o f t h e

" s u p e r i n t e n d en t w h o r e c e iv e t h t h e f i s h t h e r e f r o m ; `Kni f e a n d

" v e s s e l o f t h e s u p e r i n t e n d e nt o f t h e g o d ' [ i s h i s n a m e ] . I k n o w

" t h e . n a m e o f t h e t a b l e w h e r e a t h e p l a c e t h h i m s e l f ; 'Table of

"Horus [whereat he] sitteth in solitude in the darkness and is

"not seen, the a bjects fear him and those therein ascribe unto

" h i m (16) p r a i s e s ' , [ i s i t s n a m e ] . "

" I h a v e c o m e , a n d I a m c r o w n e d ( o r h a v e r i s e n ) l i k e t h e

" M i g h t y g o d w h o l e a d e t h a l o n g t h e e a r t h , a n d I h a v e g o n e

" d o w n t o t h e e a r t h i n t h e t w o g r e a t ( 1 7) b o a t s ; a n d b e h o l d ,

" t h e m i g h t y o n e h a t h p l a c e d m e w i t h i n t h e T e m pl e o f t h e

" M i g h t y g o d . I h a ve c o m e a l o n g w i t h t h e s n a r e r , m y w o o d e n

" t o o l s ( g r i t ) a r e w i t h m e , m y k n i f e i s w i t h m e , ( i 8) a n d m y

" h a c k i n g k n i f e i s w i t h m e ; I come forth and I go round about ,

"and I snare(?) with t he Net . "

" I k n o w t h e n a m e o f t h e p o l e w i t h c u r v e d e n d s ; ` Te m e n reu

" f l o w i n g (i g ) f r om t h e g r e a t f in g e r o f Os i r i s ' , [ i s it s n a m e ] . I

" k n o w t h e n a m e o f t h e t w o p i e c e s o f w o o d w h i c h h o l d f a s t

"'Hooks of the ancestors of Rd' [is the name of one], and `Hook

"o f the ancestor o f Hathor ' [is the name o f the other] . ( 2 0 ) 1 ,

" e v e n I , k n o w t h e c o r d s w h i c h a r e o n t h e p o l e w i t h c u r v e d

"ends : `C ords(?) o f t h e l o r d o f m a n k i n d ' [ i s t h e i r n a m e ] . I

"know ( 2 1 ) t h e n a m e o f t h e t a b l e ; ` H a n d o f I s i s ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] .

" I k n o w t h e n a m e o f i t s r o p e s ( ? ) ; `Rope of the god , the first-

"born' [is their name] . ( 2 2 ) I k n o w t h e n a m e o f t h e c o r d a g e( ? ) ;

" ' C ordage o f the day ' [is its name] . I k n o w t h e n a m e s o f t h e

" fowlers and o f the fishermen ; ( 23 ) ` A l k e r u gods, ancestors of

"Rd' [is their name] . I k n o w t h e n a m e s o f t h e tememu ; ' A n -

"ce st ors o f Se b ' [i s t h e i r n ame ] . "

( 2 4 ) " 1 h a v e b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e t h a t w h i c h t h o u e a t e s t , a n d

" I h a v e b r o u g h t t h a t w h i c h I e a t ; and thou eatest that which

"Seb cateth with Osiris . H a i l , t h o u ` g o d w h o s e f a c e i s b e h i n d

"him' , ( 2 5 ) t h o u ` g o d w h o h a s t g a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r h i s

" h e a r t ' , t h o u f i s h e r a n d f o w l e r o f t h e o p e n e r o f t h e e a r t h !

" H a i l , y e f i s h e r s w h o h a v e g i ve n b i r t h t o y o u r o w n f a t h e r s , ( 2 6 )



28o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

"and who lay snar s within the city of Nefer-sent, take ye me

"not into you r net, and snare y e me not with the (27) snares

"wherewith ye ensnared the helpless fiends and w herewith ye

"caught the abominable earth-followers ; for I kn ow t h e Net .

"(28) I know the upper f ramework(?) and the lower heavy parts

" t h e r e o f . Be h old me , t h e n , for I h ave come . I h a v e m y p o l e

"with curved ends with m e, I have my m e k h e s w i t h m e , ( 2 9 ) I

"have my table with me, and I have my slaughtering knife with

" " m e . I have come, and I have entered in, and I have myself

" p r e s s e d f o r w a r d ( ? ). K n o w y e t h a t I , e v e n ( 3 o ) I , k n o w t h e

" n a m e o f t h e s n a r e r o f ( o r t h a t w h i c h s n a r e t h ) f o w l [ i n ] h i s p l a c e ?

" I h a v e s m i t t e n [ i t ] , I h a v e o p e n e d [ i t ] o u t , I h a v e s t r u c k [ i t ] ,

"and I have set it upon its seat . N o w t h e i n e k h e s which is

"with me is (3 I) t h e `Th i g h of t h e g od Nemu' ; and th e pole

"with curved ends which is with me is the `Finger of Sekeri' ;

" a n d t h e t a b l e w h i c h i s w i t h m e i s t h e ` H a n d o f I s i s ' ; ( 3 2 ) a n d

"the slaughtering knife which is with me is the 'Slau ghtering

"knife of the god Nemu' . 0 g ran t t h at I may come ; 0 g r a n t ,

" t h e n , t h a t I m a y s i t ( 3 3 ) i n t h e b o a t o f R d ; l e t m e s a i l f o r t h

"on the Lake of Testes ( ? ) towards the northern heaven ; l e t m e

" d o a s d o t h e y w h o s i n g w h e n t h e y s i n g p r a i s e s ( 3 4 ) o f m y

" k a ; and let me live as do they th ere . The Osiris Nu, trium-

phant, cometh forth upon your ladder which Rd hath made for

"him, (35) and Horus and Suti ho ld him fast b y his hand. "

I n t h e S a t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 7 4 ) t h e f o l lo w -

i n g r u b r i c i s a d d e d t o t h i s C h a p t e r

[THIS CHAPTER[ SHALL BE RECITED OVER A FIGURE OF THE DECEASED

WHICH SHALL BE PUT IN A BOAT . ANI) BEHOLD, THOU SHALT MANE A

SEKTET BOAT ON HIS RIGHT SIDE, AND A DIATET BOAT ON HIS LEFT, ANI)

LET THEM BRING OFFERINGS OF CAKES, AND OF ALE, AND OF ALL KINDS

OF FAIR THINGS ON THE DAY OF THE BIRTH OF OSIRIS . THE SOUL OF HIM

WHOA THESE THINGS HAVE BEEN GIVEN SHALL LIVE FOR EVER, AND HE

SHALL NOT DIE A SECOND TIME .



THE CHAPTER OF ESCAPING FRO-11 THE CATCHER OFFISH . 281

CHAPTER CLIII B .

[From the P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7, s h e e t 2 0 ) . ]

Vignette : A n e t f u l l o f f i s h b e i n g d r a w n t o g e t h e r b y t h r e e d o g -

h e a d e d a p e s .

Text : ( t ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH FROM THECATCHER OF THE FISH . The O si ri s Nu, t h e ove rse e r o f t h e

p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

" H a i l , y e w h o l a y s n a r e s ( ? ) , a n d y e w h o w o r k t h e n e t s , a n d y e

" w h o a r e f i s h e r s ; h a i l , y e w h o h a v e g i v e n b i r t h t o y o u r o w n f a t h e r s ,

" k n o w y e ( 3 ) t h a t I k n o w t h e n a m e o f t h e g r e a t a n d m i g h t y n e t ?

" ` A n g e t ' ( i . e . , C l i n c h e r ) i s i t s n a m e . Know ye th at I know (4)

" t h e n a m e o f i t s c o r d a g e ? ` R u t ( i . e . , V i go u r) o f Is i s ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] .

" Kn ow y e t h at I k no w th e na m e o f th e (5 ) m eh es ? ` Th igh of

" T e m ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] . Know ye that I know the name of its pole

" w i t h c u r v e d e n d s ? ' F i n g e r o f N e m u ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] . (6) Know ye

" t h a t I k n o w t h e n a m e o f i t s t a b l e ? ` H o o k o f P t a h ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] .

"Know ye that I know (7) the name of its s laughter ing knife?

" ' C h o p p e r o f I s i s ' [ i s i t s n a m e ] . Know ye that I know the na me

" o f i t s w e i g h t s ? ` I r o n ( 8 ) i n h e a v e n ' [ i s t h e i r n a m e ] . Know ye

"that I know the name of [its] rushes? `Feathers (or hair) of

" t h e H a w k ' [ i s t h e i r n a m e ] . Know ye (9) that I know the name

" o f t h e f i s h e r s ? ` A p e ' [ i s t h e i r n a m e ] . Know ve (io) that I kno w

"the name of the Thigh? ['Thigh] wh ereon standeth the Temple

" o f t h e M o o n ' i s i t s n a m e . Know ye that ( t r) I know the name

" o f t h e f o w l e r ? ` P r i n c e , m i g h t y o n e w h o s i t t e t h o n t h e e a s t e r n

" s i d e o f h e a v e n ' [ i s h i s n a m e ] . I h a v e n o t e a t e n , 0 g r e a t d i v i n e

"on e . ( 1 2 ) Behold, the great divine one bath given me drink ;

" I h a v e n o t s e a t e d m y s e l f u p o n [ m y ] t h i g h s [ i n ] t h e w a t e r s , b u t

" I e a t a n d I s a t i s f y m y s e l f w i t h f o o d b e f o r e h i m . ( i 3 ) T h e s e e d s

"of death are in my body . I am Nekh , I am Rd, comi n g fort h

" f r o m N u , t h e d i v i n e s o u l o f t h e g o d . I c r e a t e t h e g o d (14) I , I u ;

"an d wron g i s t h e t h i n g wh i ch I abomi n at e . I a m O s i r i s , t h e

"maker of Maat wh ereon Rd doth live each and every day . (15)




" I a m i nvoke d [by t h e n ame of] ` Bull', an d I am addre sse d

" a m o ng t h e c o m pa ny o f t h e g o d s b y t h e n a m e o f `Nek h ' . I

" c r e a t e m i n e o w n s e l f a l o n g w i t h N u i n m y n a m e ( i 6 ) o f K h e p e r a ,

"whereby I create myself each a nd every day . I am t h e g od of

"divine splendour, and I rise up as Rd, the lord of the East ;

"life is given unto me through his (17) c o m i n g s f o r t h t h e r e -

" f r o m . I have come into heaven, and I embrace my seat wh ich

"i s i n t h e East wi t h t h e ch i ldre n of t h e p ri n ce s wh o dwe ll

" ( 1 8 ) i n [ t h e i r ] f i e l d s , a n d I h a v e d e l i v e r e d h e r t h a t b r o u g h t

"me fort h i n pe ace . I eat like the god Shu, I satisfy myself

"with food like the god Shu, (ig) I ease myself like the god

" S h u . The divine kings of the North and South ar e with me,

"the god Khensu is with me, and those wh o bind up their heads

"are with me ; e m b r a c e y e , t h e n , ( 2 0 ) t h e f l a m e i n t h e l a n d o f

" t h e m u l t i t u d e . "

CHAPTER CLIV.

[From t h e P a p y r u s o f Nu ( B r it . M us . N o . 1 0 , 477, s he e t 1 8 ) . ]

Vignette : T h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o V i g n e t t e i n t h e T h e b a n R e c e n s i o n ; i n

t h e S a I t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B I . 7 5 ) t h e m u m m y o f t h e d e -

c e a s e d i s s e e n l y i n g u po n a b i e r w i t h t h e s u n s h i n i n g u p on i t .

Text : ( 1 ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE 13ODY PERISH .

The Osiris Nu, the o verseer of the palac e, the chancello r-in-

c h i e f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :- ( 2 )

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 m y d i v i n e f a t h e r O s i r i s . I came to

"e mbalm t h e e , do t h ou e mbalm t h e se my me mbe rs, for I would

"n ot pe ri sh an d come t o a n e n d ( 3 ) , [ b u t w o u l d b e ] e v e n l i k e

"unto my divine father Khepera, the divine type of him that

"never saw corruption . Come, then, make strong my breath

"then, 0 lord of the winds, (4) who dost magnify those divine

"beings who are like unto himself . Stablish me doubly, then,

"and fashion me strongly, 0 lord of the funeral chest . G r a n t

" t h o u t h a t I m a y e n t e r i n t o t h e l a n d o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , a c c o r d -

i n g t o t h a t w h i c h w a s d o n e f o r t h e e ( 5 ) a l o n g w i t h t h y f a t h e r



THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING THE BODY PERISH . 283

" T e m , w h o s e b o d y n e v e r s a w c o r r u p t i o n , a n d w h o i s t h e b e i n g

" w h o n ev e r s a w c o r r u p t i o n . I h a v e n ev e r d o n e t h a t w h i c h t h o u

" h a t e s t , n a y , I h a v e c r i e d o u t a m o n g t h o s e w h o l o v e ( 6) t h y

"Ka . L e t n o t m y b o d y b e c o m e w o r m s , b u t d e l i v e r m e a s t h o u

"didst thyself . I p ray t h e e , le t me n ot f a l l i n t o r ot t e n n e ss e v e n

" a s t h o u d o s t p e r m i t ( 7) e v e r y g o d , a n d e v e r y g o d d e s s , a n d

" e v e r y a n i m a l , a n d e v e r y r e p t i l e t o s e e c o r r u p t i o n w h e n t h e

"soul hath gone forth from them a fter their death . And when

"the soul departeth (or perisheth), a man seeth corruption and

"the bones (8) of his body rot and become wholl y stinkingness,

" t h e m e m b e r s d e c a y p i e c e m e a l , t h e b o n e s c r u m b l e i n t o a h e l p-

" l e s s m a s s , a n d t h e f l e s h b e c o m e t h f o e t i d l i q u i d , (9) a n d h e

" b e c o m e t h a b r o t h e r u n t o t h e d e c a y w h i c h c o m e t h u p o n h i m ,

" a n d h e t u r n e t h i n t o m u l t i t u d e s o f w o r m s , a n d h e b e c o m e t h

"altogether worms, and an end is made o f him, and he perisheth

"in the sight of t he god Shu even as doth every god, a nd every

" g o d d e s s , ( i o ) a n d ev e r y f e a t h e r e d f o w l , a n d ev e r y f i s h , a n d

"every creeping thing, and every reptilen d"every animal, and every thing whatsover . T h e r e f o r e s h a l l t h e y

"[fall] on (ii) their bellies [when] they recognize me, and be-

"hold, the fear of me shall terrify them ; a n d t h u s l i k e w i s e s h a l l i t

" b e w i t h e v e r y b e i n g a f t e r d e a t h , w h e t h e r i t b e a n i m a l , ( 1 2 ) o r .

" b i r d , o r f i s h , o r w o r m , o r r e p t i l e . L e t l i f e [ c o m e ] f r o m i t s d e a t h , I

"and let not decay caused by any reptile make an end [o f me],

" a n d l e t t h e n n o t c o m e a g a i n s t ( r 3 ) m e i n t h e i r [ v a r i o u s ] f o r m s .

"Do n o t t h o u g iv e m e o v e r u n t o t h a t s l a u g h t e r e r w h o d w e l l e t h

"in his torture-chamber(?), who ( 1 4 ) k i l l e t h t h e m e m b e r s a n d

" m a k e t h t h e m r o t b e i n g [ h i m s e l f ] h i d d e n - w h o w o r k e t h d e -

s t r u c ti o n u p o n m a n y d e ad b o d i e s a n d l iv e th b y s l a u g h t e r . L e t

" m e l i v e a n d p e r f o r m h i s m e s s a g e , a n d l e t m e d o t h a t w h i c h

" ( 1 5 ) i s c o m m a n d e d b y h i m . G i v e me n ot ov e r un t o h i s f i n g e rs,

" l e t h i m n o t g a i n t h e m a s t e r y o v e r m e , f o r I a m u n d e r t h y

" c o m m a n d , 0 l o r d o f t h e g o d s . "

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 m y d i v i n e f a t h e r O s i r i s , t h o u h a s t t h y

" b e i n g w i t h t h y m e m b e r s . ( i6) Th ou di dst n ot de c ay, t h o u di d st

i . I . e . , the d ea th o f the b o d y .



284 . THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" n o t b e c o m e w o r m s , t h o u d i d s t n o t d i m i n i s h , t h o u d i d s t n o t

"become corruption, thou didst not putrefy, and thou didst not

" t u r n i n t o w o r m s . I am the god Khepera, and my members

"s h a ll h a v e an e v e rlast i n g ex i st e n ce . (17) I shall not decay, I

"s h a ll n ot rot , I s h a ll n ot p ut re f y , I s h a ll n ot t urn i n t o w orms,

"and I shall not see corruption before the eye o f the god Shu .

"I shall have my being, I shall h ave my being ; (I8) I s h a l l l i v e ,

"I shall live ; I shall germinate, I shall germinate, I sha ll ger-

minate ; I s h a l l w a k e u p i n p e a c e ; I sh all n ot p ut re f y ; my

" i n t e s t i n e s (?) shall not perish ; I shall not suf fer injury ; (rg)

" m i n e e y e s h a l l n o t d e c a y ; the form of my visage(?) shall not

"disappear ; m i n e e a r s h a l l n o t b e c o m e d e a f ; my h e ad s h a l l n ot

" b e s e p a r a t e d f r o m m y n e c k ; m y t o n g u e s h a l l n o t b e c a r r i e d

" a w a y ; my hair s hall no t ( 2 0 ) b e c ut o f f ; mine eyeb rows shall

" n o t b e s h a ve d o f f ; a n d n o b a l e f u l i nj u r y s h a l l c o m e u p o n m e .

"M y b o d y s h a l l b e st a b li s h e d, an d i t s h a l l n e i t h e r f a l l i n t o r ui n

"(2I) nor be destroyed on this earth. "

CHAPTER C L V .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0, 4 77, s h ee t 27) . ]

V i g n e t t e : A Tet .

T e x t : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF A TET OF GOLD . The Osiris Nu,

the overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief , saith :- (2)

" R i s e u p t h o u , 0 O s i r i s . [ T h o u h a s t t h y b a c k b o n e , 0 S t i l l -

"Heart, thou hast the ligatures o f thy neck and back, 0 Still-

"Heart] .I Place thou thysel f upon thy base . I put water beneath

" t h e e , a n d I b r i n g u n t o t h e e a Te t o f g o l d t h a t t h o u m a y e s t

" r e j o i c e t h e r e i n . "

R u b r i c : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER . A TET OF GOLD

S E T I N ( 3 ) A P L I N T H ( ? ) OF SYCAMORE WOOD WHICH H ATH BEEN STEEPED

IN WATER OF ANKHAM FLOWERS, AND IT SHALL BE PLACED AT THE NECK

OF THE DECEASED ON THE DAY OF THE FUNERAL. IF THIS AMULET BE

PLACED AT HIS NECK, HE SHALL BECOME A PERFECT (4) KHU IN THE

I . A d d e d f r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N eb s e n i , s h e e t l o .



THE CHAPTER OF THE BUCKLE OF CARNELIAN . 285

UNDERWORLD, AND AT THE NEW YEAR (FESTIVALS HE SHALL BE] LIKE

THOSE WHO ARE IN THE FOLLOWING OF OSIRIS CONTINUALLY AND

FOR EVER

CHAPTER CLVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,4 77, s h e e t 27 ) . ]

Vignette : A Buckle .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF A BUCKLE OF CARNELIAN . T h e

O s i r i s N u , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f ,

s a i t h :-

" M a y t h e b l o o d o f I s i s , a n d t h e p o w e r s o f I s i s , a n d t h e e n c h a n t -

m e n t s o f I s i s b e p o w e r s t o p r o t e c t (2) this mighty one and to

" g u a r d h i m f r o m h i m t h a t w o u l d d o u n t o h i m a n y t h i n g w h i c h

"he abominateth . "

R u b r i c : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID OVER A BUCKLE OF CAR-

NELIAN, WHICH HATH BEEN STEEPED IN WATER OF ANKHAMI FLOWERS,

ANT) SET (3) IN A PLINTH OF SYCAMORE WOOD, AND IT SHALL BE PLACED

AT THE NECK OF THE DECEASED ON THE DAY OF THE FUNERAL . I F T HE SE

THINGS BE DONE FOR HIM THE POWERS OF ISIS ( 4 ) SHALL PROTECT HIS

LIMBS, AND HORUS THE SON OF ISIS SHALL REJOICE IN HIM, WHEN HE

SEETH HIM ; AND THERE SHALL BE NO HIDDEN PLACES ON HIS PATH,

AND ONE HAND SHALL BE TOWARDS HEAVEN, AND ONE HAND SHALL BE

TOWARDS EARTH, REGULARLY AND CONTINUALLY . (5) THOU SHALT NOT

LET ANY PERSON WHO IS WITH THEE SEE ITI . T h e R u b r i c i n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , BI . 75 ) a d d s :-

" H e s h a l l n o t b e t h r u st b a c k a t t h e d o o r s o f A m e n t e t ; c a k es , a nd a l e, a n d

m e a t - o f f e r i n g s s h a l l b e o f f e r e d u n t o h i m u p o n t h e a l t a r s o f R E , o r ( a s s o m e

say) of Osiris Un-nefer ; a n d h e s h a l l t r i u m p h o v e r h i s f o e s i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d

f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . "

2 . T h e R u b r i c i n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B L 7 5 ) a d d s :-

" I f t h i s C h a p t e r b e k n o w n [ b y t h e d e c e a s e d ] h e s h a l l b e a m o n g t h o s e w h o

f o l l o w O s i r i s U n - n e f e r , t r i u m p h a n t . The gates of the underworld shall be

o p e n e d u n t o h i m , a n d a h o m e s t e a d s h a l l b e g i v e n u n t o h i m , t o g e t h e r w i t h

w h e a t a n d b a r l e y , i n t h e S e k h e t - A a r u ; a n d t h e f o l l o w e r s o f H o r n s w h o r e a p

therein shall proclaim his n a m e a s o n e o f t h e g o d s w h o a r e t h e r e i n . "




CHAPTER CLV11 .

[ F r o m L e p s i u s , Todtenbuch, 131 . 76 . ]

V i g n e t t e : A vulture with outstretched wings holding the symbol of

l i f e i n e a c h t a l o n .

T e x t : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF THE VULTURE OF GOLD WHICHIS TO BE PLACED AT THE NECK OF THE DECEASED. (2) The

O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Isis cometh and hovereth over the city, and she goeth about

" s e e k i n g t h e s e c r e t h a b i t a t i o n s o f H o r u s a s h e e m e r g e t h f r o m

"his papyrus swamps, and she lifteth up his shoulder which is

" i n e v i l c a s e . H e i s m a d e o n e (3) o f t h e c o m p a n y i n t h e d iv i n e

" b o a t , a n d t h e s o v e r e i g n t y o f t h e w h o l e w o r l d i s d e c r e e d f o r

" h i m . H e b a t h w a r r e d m i g h t i l y , a n d h e m a k e t h [ h i s ] d e e d s t o

" b e r e m e m b e r e d ; h e h a t h m a d e f e a r o f h i m t o e x i s t , a n d a w e

"[o f him] to have its being . His mother, the mighty lady, pro-

"tecteth him, and she hath (4) transferred her power to Horus . "

R u b r i c : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID OVER A VULTURE OF GOLD

WHEREUPON IT HATH BEEN INSCRIBED, AND THOU SHALT PLACE THE

VULTURE ON THE NECK TO PROTECT THE PERFECT DECEASED ONE ON THE

DAY OF THE FUNERAL CONTINUALLY AND REGULARLY .

CHAPTER CLV111 .

[ F r o m L e p s i u s , Todtenbuch, BI. 76. ]

V i g n e t t e : A c o l l a r .

T e x t : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF A COLLAR OF GOLD w h i c h

s h a l l b e p l a c e d a t t h e n e c k o f t h e d e c e a s e d . ( 2 ) Th e O s i r i s

Au f-ankh, triumphant, saith :-

" O m y f a t h e r , m y b r o t h e r , m y m o t h e r I s i s , I a m u n s w a t h e d ,

" a n d I s e e . I a m o n e o f t h o s e w h o a r e u n s w a t h e d a n d w h o

" s e e t h e g o d S e b . "



THE CHAPTERS OF THE UATCH AMULET . 287

Rubric : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID OVA A COLLAR OF GOLD

WHEREON IT HATH BEEN ENGRAVED, AND THE COLLAR SHALL BE PLACED

ON THE NECK OF THE DECEASED ON THE DAY OF THE FUNERAL .

CHAPTER CLIX .

[ F r o m L e p s i u s , T o d t e n b u c h , B l . 7 6 . ]

Vignette : Th e Uatch a m u l e t .

Text : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF THE UATCH AMULET [MADEOF] MOTHER-OF-EMERALD which s h a l l b e p l a c e d a t t h e n e c k

o f t h e d e c e a s e d . (2) T h e O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Hail, thou who comest forth daily from the Temple of the

" g o d . T h e m i g h t y l a d y s p ea k e t h a n d s h e g o e t h r o u n d a b o u t

" i n t h e g a t e o f t h e d o u b l e h o u s e , a n d s h e t a k e t h p o s s e s s i o n o f

" t h e m i g h t o f h e r f a t h e r , t h a t i s t o s a y , t h e Sahu (3) [ w h o i s ]

"the bull of the godd ess Renenet . She taketh those who are in

"her following, and she m aketh an opportunity for those, the

" o p p o r t u n i t y o f t h e d o o r ( ? ) . "

Rubric : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE SAID OVER AN UATCH OF MOTHER-

OF-EMERALD WHEREUPON IT HATH BEEN INSCRIBE]), AND THE UATCH

SHALL BE PLACED ON THE NECK OF THE DECEASED .

CHAPTER CLX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M us . N o . 9,900, shee t t o ) . ]

Vignette : T h o t h , t h e g r e a t g o d , gi v i n g a n Uatch a m u l e t o f m o t h e r - o f -

e m e r a ld t o t h e d e c e a s e d .

Text : ( i) [THE CHAPTER OF] GIVING AN UATCH OF MOTHER-

OF-EMERALD t o t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t r i u m p h a n t [ w h o s a i t h ] :- (2)

"I am t h e U a t c h of mother-of-emeral d which cannot be in-

j u r e d ( r ) , an d wh i ch t h e ( 3 ) h an d of Th ot h adore t h ; i n j u r y i s

"a thing which I abominate . I t i s i n s o u n d s t a t e a n d I a m i n



288 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY.

" s o u n d s t a t e ; i t i s n o t i n j u r e d a n d I a m n o t i n j u r e d ; i t i s n o t

"[worn away] and I am not worn away . T h e w o r d s o f T h o t h

" [ a r e a t ] t h y b a c k , 0 t h o u w h o c o m e s t i n p e a c e , 0 d i v i n e P r i n c e

"of An n u (He li opoli s), t h ou mi g h t y g od wh o dwe lle st i n t h e

" c i t y o f P e . T h e g o d S h u a d v a n c e t h t o h i m a n d f i n d e t h h i m

"in the city of Sh enmu in his name 'Neshem' (i . e . , m o t h e r - o f -

" e m e r a l d ) ; he maketh his place in the for tress of the mighty

" g o d . The god Tem resteth upon his eye, and his members

" s h a l l n o t s u f f e r i n j u r y . " '

CHAPTER CLXI .

[From the Papyrus of Nefer-uben-f (see Naville, op . c i t . , 1 3 1 . t 8 4 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e g o d T h o t h o p e n i n g t h e d o o r s o f t h e f o u r w i n d s .

Tex t : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF FORCING AN ENTRANCE INTO

HEAVEN . [This] Thoth doeth to make felicitous [the way for

him that] w ould enter into th e Disk .

I . [To the Door of the west wind . ] " R d l i v e t h , t h e T o r t o i s e 2

" d i e t h . Pure is the body in the earth, and pure are the b ones

" o f O s i r i s , t h e dm-khent, 3 N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t . "

I I . [To the Door of the east wind . ] " R d l i v e t h , t h e T o r t o i s e

" d i e t h . Sound is he who is in the chest, w ho is in the chest,

" O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t . "

I I I . [To t h e Door of t h e n ort h w i n d . ] " R d l i v e t h , t h e T o r -

t o i s e d i e t h . T h e O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t , i s s t r o n g i n

"h i s me mbe rs, Qe bh - se nn uf g uarde t h t h e m . "

IV . [To t h e Door of t h e sout h wi n d . ] " R d l i v e t h , t h e T o r -

t o i s e d i e t h . The bolts(?) are drawn and they pass through his

" f o u n d a t i o n . "

i . I n t h e S a i t e R e c e n s i o n ( s e e L e p s i u s , o p . c i t . , B l . 76) this Cha pter has a

r u b r i c w h i c h r e a d s : - " [ T h i s C h a p t e r ] s h a l l b e r e c i t e d o v e r a n Uatch o f m o t h e r -

"of-emerald whereupon it bath been inscrib ed, and the Uatch s h a l l b e p l a c e d

"on the neck of the deceased . "

2 . T u r t l e ?

3 . A p r i e s t l y t i t l e .



THE CHAPTER OF GIVING HEAT TO THE DECEASED 289

R u b r i c : ( i ) EVERY SaHU FOR WHOM THESE DIVINE FIGURES HAVE

BEEN PAINTED UPON HIS COFFIN SHALT, MAKE HIS WAY THROUGH THESE

( 2 ) FOUR ENTRANCES INTO HEAVEN. THAT OF THE NORTH WIND BELONGETH

TO OSIRIS ; THAT OF THE SOUTH WIND TO RA ; (3) THAT OF THE WEST

WIND TO ISIS ; AND THAT OF THE EAST WIND TO NEPHTHYS. EACH ONE

OF THESE WINDS (q) SHALL BREATHE INTO HIS NOSTRILS AS HE ENTERETH

IN HIS DAILY COURSE . LET NONE WHO IS OUTSIDE KNOW [THIS CHAPTER] ;

(3) IT IS A GREAT -MYSTERY, ANT) THOSE WHO DWELL IN THE SWAMPS (I . E . ,

THE IGNORANT) KNOW IT NOT. THOU SHALT NOT DO THIS IN THE PRE-

SENCE OF ANY PERSON (6) EXCEPT THY FATHER OR THY SON, OR THYSELF

ALONE ; FOR IT IS, INDEED, AN EXCEEDINGLY (7) GREAT MYSTERY WHICH

NO MAN WHATEVER KNOWETH .

CHAPTER CLXII .

[From Lepsius, Todtenbuch, BI 77 . 1

Vignette : A c o w h a v i n g t h e d i s k w i t h p l u m e s b e t w e e n h e r h o r n s , a n d

wearing the collar, from which is suspended the emblem of "life" round

h e r n e c k .

Text : THE CHAPTER OF MAKING HEAT TO BE UNDER THE

HEAD OF THE DECEASED . (I) T o b e r e c i t e d :- " H o m a g e t o t h e e ,

"0 thou god Par, thou mighty one, whose plumes are lofty,

"thou lord of the L l r e r e t crown, who rulest with the whip ;

" t h o u a r t t h e l o r d o f t h e p h a l l u s , t h o u g r o w e s t a s t h o u s h i n e s t

" w i t h r a y s o f l i g h t , ( 2) a n d t h y s h i n i n g i s t o t h e u t t e r m o s t p a r t s

" [ o f e a r t h a n d s k y ] . T h o u a r t t h e l o r d o f t r a ns f o r m a t i o n s , a n d

"halt manifold skins, which thou hidest in the U t c h a t a t its

" b i r t h . Thou art the mighty one of names(?) among (3) the

" g o d s , t h e m i g h t y r u n n e r w h o s e s t r i d e s a r e m i g h t y ; t h o u a r t t h e

"god the mighty one who comest and rescuest the needy one

" a n d t h e a f f l i c t e d f r o m h i m t h a t o p p r e s s e t h h i m ; g i v e h e e d t o

"my cry. I am the Cow, (4) and thy divine name is in my

" m o u t h , a n d I w i l l u t t e r i t ; `Hagahakaher' is thy name ; 'Au -

' r a u a a g e r s a a n g r e b a t h i ' ( 5 ) i s t h y n a m e ; ` K h e r s e r a u ' i s t h v n a m e ;

" ` K h a r s a t h A ' i s t h y n a m e . I praise thy name . I am the Cow

I . T h is R u b r i c i s a d de d f r o m t h e Sa l t e R e c e ns i o n ( s e e L e p si u s , o p . c i t . , B I. 7 7 ) .

I 9




" t h a t h e a r k e n e t h u n t o t h e p e t i t i o n o n t h e d a y - w h e r e i n ( 6 ) t h o u

"placest heat under the head of Rd . 0 p l a c e i t f o r h i m i n t h e

" d i v i n e g a t e ' i n A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , a n d t h o u s h a l t m a k e h i m t o

"become even like him that is upon the earth ; h e i s t h y s o u l

" . . . . 0 b e g r a c i o u s u n t o O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , ( 7 ) a n d

" c a u s e t h o u h e a t t o e x i s t u n d e r h i s h e a d , f o r , i n d e e d , h e i s t h e

"soul of the great divine Body wh ich resteth in Annu, `Khu-

" k h e p e r - u r u ' ( ? ) is his name ; ` B a r e k a t h a t c h a r a ' i s h i s n a m e . B e

"gracious, then, (8) and grant that he may beco me like unto

"one of those who are in thy f ollowing, for he is even as art

"thou . "

R u b r i c : [ THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER THE IMAGE OE A

COW WHICH SHALL BE MADE IN FINE GOLD AND PLACED AT THE NECK

OF THE DECEASED, AND IT SHALL BE WRITTEN UPON (9) NEW PAPYRUS

AND PLACED UNDER HIS HEAD, THEN SHALL ABUNDANT WARMTH BE IN

HIM THROUGHOUT EVEN LIKE THAT WHICH WAS IN HIM WHEN HE WAS

UPON EARTH . THIS HATH EXCEEDINGLY GREAT PROTECTIVE POWER FOR

IT WAS MADE BY THE COW FOR HER SON RA WHEN HE WAS SETTING

AND WHEN ( t o ) HIS HABITATION WAS SURROUNDED BY A COMPANY OF BE-

INGS OF FIRE . AND THE DECEASED SHALL BECOME DIVINE IN THE UNDER-

WORLD, AND HE SHALL NEVER BE TURNED BACK AT ANY OF THE GATES

THEREOF . ( i r )

AND THOU SHALT SAY WHEN THOU PLACEST [THE IMAGE OF] THIS GOD-

DESS AT THE NECK OF THE DECEASED :- "O AMEN, 0 AMEN, WHO ART IN

"HEAVEN, TURN THY FACE UPON THE DEAD BODY OF THY SON AND MAKE

"HIM SOUND AND STRONG IN THE UNDERWORLD . " (12) THIS IS A COMPOSI-

TION OF EXCEEDINGLY GREAT MYSTERY . LET NOT THE EYE OF ANY MAN

WHATSOEVER SEE IT, FOR IT IS AN ABOMINABLE THING FOR (EVERY MAN]

TO KNOW IT ; THEREFORE HIDE IT . "BOOK OF THE MISTRESS OF THE HID-

DEN TEMPLE" IS ITS NAME .

He re e n de t h t h e Book . 2

I . Or "underworld" .

2 . The document from which the scribe of the Turin Papyrus copied this

Chapter probably ended with it .



THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING TILE BODY DECAY 291

CHAPTER CLXIII .

[ F r o m L eps iu s , T o d t e n b u c h , B 1 . 7 7 . 1

V i g n e t t e : T w o w i n g e d U t c h a t s o n l e g s , a n d a s e r p e n t a l s o u p o n l e g s ,

w i t h a d i s k a n d h o r n s u p o n h i s h e a d .

Text : T h e C h a p t e r s w h i c h a r e t a k e n f r o m a n o t h e r w o r k

a n d a r e h e r e a d d e d t o t h e " B o o k o f c o m i n g f o r t h b y d a y " .

THE CHAPTER OF NOT ALLOWING THE BODY OF A MAN TO

MOULDER AWAY IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND OF DELIVERING

HIM FROM THOSE WHO DEVOUR THE SOULS THAT ARE SHUT

IN IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND OF NOT ALLOWING TO RISE

UP AGAINST HIM THE THINGS WHICH HE ABOMINATED UPON

EARTH, AND OF MAKING SOUND AND STRONG HIS LIMBS AND

BONES AGAINST WORMS AND AGAINST EVERY GOD WHO WOULD

ATTACK HIM IN THE UNDERWORLD, AND OF CAUSING HIM TO

COME FORTH AND TO GO IN AS HE PLEASETH AND TO DO

WHATSOEVER HE HATH IN HIS HEART TO DO WITHOUT HIND-

RANCE . (i) The Osiris Auf-ankh, tri umphant, saith :-

"I am the divine soul of the great divine body which is laid

" t o r e s t i n A t h a b u , w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h t h e b o d y o f ( 2 ) I l a r e t h i ,

" t h e . . . . w h i c h r e s t e t h i n t h e m a r s h e s o f Se n h a q a r e h a . 0 d i -

vine soul which hath no languor of hea rt either in rising (3)

"or setting, and which resteth within his divine body which is

"laid to rest in Senhaparekana, grant th ou to Osiris Auf-ankh,

" t r i u m p h a n t , t h a t h e m a y d e l i v er h i m s e l f ( 4 ) f r o m t h e s o u l s

" o f t h e g o d - o f - t h e - s a v a g e - f a c e , w h o g a i n e t h t h e m a s t e r y o v e r

" h e a r t s a n d t a k e t h p o s s e s s i o n o f l i m b s , a n d f r o m w h o s e m o u t h s

" fire cometh forth to devour souls . H a i l , t h o u w h o a r t l y i n g

" p r o s t r a t e w i t h i n t h y b o d y , w h o s e f l a m e (5 ) c o m e t h i n t o b e i n g

" f r o m o u t o f t h e f i r e w h i c h b l azet h w i t h i n t h e s e a ( o r w a t e r

" i n s u c h w i s e t h a t t h e s e a ( o r w a t e r i s r a i s e d u p o n h i g h o u t o f

"the fire thereof, gr ant thou that the flame (6) may leave the fire,

" w h e r ev e r i t m a y b e , t o r a i s e u p t h e h a n d o f O s i r i s A u f - an k h ,

"triumphant, and to ma ke him to have an existence for ever and

I 9 *




"f or ever . Verily, let his period of existence be as the period of

"existence (7) of heaven in the limitless b oundaries thereof . Hea-

v e n h o l d e t h t h y s o u l , 0 O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , a n d e a r t h h o l d e t h t h y

" f o r m . 0 deliver thou Osiris Auf-ankh, triumphant, and let him

"not be [consumed] by the kau i (8) w h o d e v o u r t h e s o u l s o f t h o s e

"w h o h av e rai se d up e v i l (?) . Let his soul have its being within

"his body, and let his body have its being with his soul ; a n d

" l e t h i m b e h i d d e n w i t h i n t h e p u p i l o f t h e U t c h a t o f t h e g o d

"w h o se n ame i s S h a re i - sh are i - sh ap u- n e t e r- ari ( g )- ka, w h o r e p ose t h

"at the northwest of th e brow of the Apt of the land of Kenset

"(Nub i a) , an d journ e ye t h n ot t o t h e c ast . H a i l , g o d A m e n , t h o u

" d i vi n e B u l l - S c ar a b , (i o ) t h o u lo r d o f t h e d i v in e U t c h a t s ! G o d -

"t h e - p up i l- o f - w h ose - e ye -i s- t e rri b le i s t h y n ame , t h e Osi ri s A u f -

" a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , b o r n o f S h e r e t - A m s u , t r i u m p h a n t , i s t h e

" e m a n a t i o n o f t h y t w o E y es , t h e n a m e o f o n e o f w h i c h i s

" S h a r e - s h a r e - k h e t , a n d ( i i) S h a p u - n e t e r - a r i - k a o f t h e o t h e r ,

" t h o u g h ` S h a k a - A m e n - S h a k a n a s a a t t h e b r o w o f T e m w h o

" i l l u m i n e t h t h e t w o l a n d s ' (12) i s h i s n a m e i n v e r y t r u t h .

" G r a n t t h a t O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , m a y b e o f t h i s l a n d

" o f M a a t , l e t h i m n o t b e l e f t i n h i s s o l i t u d e , f o r h e i s o f t h i s

" e a r t h w h e r e i n h e w i l l n o [ m o r e ] a p p e a r , a n d ` A n ' ( i3) i s h i s

"name. 0 l e t h i m b e wi th a pe r fe ct Kh u , or (as others say),

" a s t r o n g Kh u , a n d l e t h i m b e t h e s o u l o f t h e m i g h t y b o d y

"which is in San (Sals), the city of Neith . "

R u b r i c : [THIS CHAPTER] IS TO BE RECITED OVER A SERPENT HAVING

LEGS AND WEARING (14) A DISK AND TWO HORNS, AND OVER TWO UTCHATS

HAVING BOTH EYES ANDWNGS . IN THE PUPIL OF ONE OF THE UTCHATS

THERE SHALL BE A FIGURE OF THE GOD-OF-THE-LIFTED-HAND WITH THE

FACE OF THE DIVINE SOUL, AND HAVING PLUMES AND A BACK . (u ) LIKE A

HAWK; AN[) IN THE PUPIL OF THE OTHER THERE SHALL BE A FIGURE OF

THE GOD-OF-THE-LIFTED-HAND WITH THE FACE OF THE GODDESS NEITH,

AND HAVING PLUMES AND A BACK LIKE A HAWK . AND THIS CHAPTER

SHALL BE WRITTEN WITH ANTI EITHER UPON A MEH STONE . . . . OR UPON

MOTHER-OF-EMERALD (06) OF THE SOUTH AND [DIPPED] IN WATER OF THE

WESTERN LAKE OF QEMT (EGYPT), OR UPON A BANDAGE OF UATCHET

LINEN WHEREWITH A MAN SHOULD SWATHE EVERY LIMB . AND THE DE-

CEASED SHALL NOT BE TURNED BACK AT ANY GATE OF THE UNDERWORLD ;






" u t t e r e d ] i n t h e s p e e c h o f t h e N e g r o e s , . a n d o f t h e A n t i , a n d o f

"people of Ta-Kensetet (Nubia ) . P rai se h e t o t h e e , 0 Lady,

"who art mightier than the gods, and words of adoration rise

"to thee fro m the Eight gods . T h e l i v i n g s o u l s w h o a r e i n t h e i r

"chests (7) praise thy myster y, 0 thou who art their mother ,

"thou source from whom they sprang, [who] makest for them a

"place of repose in the hidden underworld, [who] makest sound

"their bones and pres ervest them from terr or, (8) who makest

"them strong ( ? ) i n t h e a b o d e o f e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s , w h o p r e s e r v e s t

" t h e m f r o m t h e e v i l c h a m b e r o f t h e s o u l s o f t h e g o d - o f - t h e - t e r -

" r i b l e - f a c e [ w h o i s ] a m o n g t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s . ` B a b e t h a t

" c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m t h e g o d - o f - t h e - t e r r i b l e - f a c e w h o k e e p e t h h i s

" b o d y h i d d e n ' i s t h y n a m e . ( 9 ) ` A t a r e - a m - t c h e r - g e m t u - r e n n u - p a r -

" s h e t a ' i s t h e n a m e o f o n e d i v i n e s o n , ' P a - n e m m a ' [ i s t h e n a m e ]

" o f t h e o t h e r . ' U t c h a t o f S e k h e t , m i g h t y l a d y , ( i o ) m i s t r e s s o f

"the gods' is thv name . Èmanation ofi s t h e n ame of" M u t , w h o m a k e t h s o u l s s t r o n g ( ? ) a n d w h o m a k e t h s o u n d b o -

dies, and who delivereth them from the abode of the fiends

"which is in the evil chamber . (I I) T h e g o d d e s s s a i t h w i t h h e r

"own mouth, 'They shall never be fettered, and I will do ac-

"cordi n g t o wh at ye say, 0 ye T chaui o f t h e d i v i n e s o n , f o r

"whom they performed the funeral rites . " '

R u b r i c : ( 1 2 ) [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER [A FIGURE OF]

HUT WHICH HATH THREE HEADS ; THE FIRST SHALL BE LIKE UNTO THATOF PEKHAT, AN]) SHALL HAVE [UPON IT] PLUMES ; THE SECOND SHALL BE

LIKE UNTO THAT OF A MAN AND SHALL HAVE [UPON II'] THE CROWNS OF

THE SOUTH AND NORTH ; AND THE THIRD SHALL BE LIKE UNTO THAT OF

A VULTURE AND SHALL HAVE [UPON IT] PLUMES. ANT) THE FIGURE SHALL

HAVE .PHALLUS ( i 3 ) , AND A PAIR OF WINGS, AND THE CLANS OF A LION,

ANT) IT SHALL BE PAINTED WITH ANT AND POWDER ( ? ) OF UATCH MIXED ( ? )

WITH YELLOW COLOUR ( ? ) UPON A BANDAGE OF ANES LINEN. I N FRONT

OF IT SHALL STAND ONE DWARF, AND BEHIND IT [ANOTHER] ; ANI) (14)

[EACH] SHALL HAVE UPON HIM PLUMES, ANT) [ONE] HAND ANT) ARM SHALL

BE RAISED, ANI) [EACH] SHALL HAVE TWO FACES, ONE OF A HAWK AND

ONE OF A MAN, ANI) THE BODY OF EACH SHALL BE FAT. [THEN SHALL THE

DECEASE])] BE DIVINE ALONG WITH THE GODS IN THE UNDERWORLD ; ( r 5 )

HE SHALL NEVER, NEVER BE TURNED BACK ; HIS FLESH AN]) HIS BONES

SHALL BE LIKE THOSE OF ONE WHO HATH NEVER BEEN DEAD ; HE SHALL



THE CHAPYER OF ARRIVING IN PORT . 2 9 5

DRINK WATER AT THE SOURCE OF THE STREAM ; A HOMESTEAD SHALL

BE GIVEN UNTO HIM IN SEKHET AANRE ; (i6) HE SHALL BECOME A STAR

OF HEAVEN ; HE SHALL SET OUT AGAINST THE SERPENT-FIEND NEKAU AND

AGAINST TAR, WHO ARE IN THE UNDERWORLD ; HE SHALL NOT BE SHUT

IN ALONG WITH THE SOULS WHICH ARE FETTERED ; HE SHALL DELIVER

HIMSELF WHEREVER HE MAY BE ; ANT) WORMS SHALL NOT DEVOUR HIM .

CHAPTER CLXV[From Lepsius, T o d t e nb u c h , B I . 7 9 . ]

Vignette : An i t h y p h a l l i c g od w i t h t h e b o d y o f a b e e t l e ; on h i s h e a d

a r e p l u m e s , a n d h i s r i g h t h a n d a n d a r m a r c r a i s e d . B e h i n d h i m i s a m a n

w h o h a s a r a m ' s h e a d o n e a c h s h o u l d e r .

Text : THE CHAPTER OF ARRIVING IN PORTo m a k ethe body germinate, and to drink water, and not to disappear

r e c i t e t h e f o l l o w i n g :-

( I ) "Hail, 0 Bekhennu, Bekhennu ; 0 P r i n c e , P r i n c e ; 0 A m e n ,

" A m e n ; 0 Re-lukasa ; 0 god, Prince of the gods of the east-

e r n p a r t (2) o f h e a v e n , 0 A m e n - N a t h a k e r e t h i - A m e n . 0 th o u

"whose skin is hidden, whose form is secret, thou lord of the

" t w o h o r n sf Nut, thy nam e is Na-(3)ari-k, or (as" o t h e r s s a y ) ` K a - a r i - k a ' . ' K a s a i k a ' i s t h y n a m e . ' A r e t h i k a s a t h i k a '

"is thy name . ' A m e n - n a - a n - k a - e n t e k - s h a r e ' , ( ¢ ) o r ( a s o t h e r s s a y )

" ' T h e k s h a r e - A m e n - k e r e t h i ' i s t h y n a m e . 0 Amen, let me make

" s u p p l i c a t i o n u n t o t h e e . I, even I, know thy name . Thy trans-

" f o r m a t i o n s ( 5 ) are in my mouth, thy skin is before my eyes .

"Come , I pray t h e e , an d p lace t h ou t h y h e i r an d t h y i mag e ,

" O s i r i s A u f - a n k h , t r i u m p h a n t , b o r n o f S h e r e t - A m s u , t r i u m p h a n t ,

" ( 6 ) in the everlasting underworld . Grant thou that all his

"memb ers may repose in Neter-khertet (the underworl d) or (as

" o t h e r s s a y ) i n A k e r t e t ( t h e u n d e r w o r l d ) ; l e t h i s w h o l e b o d y b e -

"come like that of a god ; l e t h i m e s c a p e f r o m t h e e v i l c h a m b e r

" a n d l e t h i m n o t b e i m p r i s o n e d ( 7 ) t h e r e i n . I adore thy name .

"Th ou h ast made for me a ski n , an d t h ou h ast comp re h e n de d

" [ m y ] speech, and thou know est it exceedingly well . ` A m e n ' i s



296 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH 1 3 Y DA Y .

" t h y n a m e . 0 Re t sas h a ka, (8) I h av e made f o r t h e e a s ki n , [n am-

" e l y ] a d i v i n e s o u l . ' I r e q a i ' i s t h y n a m e ; 'Margathai' is th y name ;

"`Rerei' is thy name ; ' Na s aq b u b u ' ( 9 ) i s t h y n a m e ; 'Thanasa -

"Thanasa' is thy name ; 'Shareshathakatha' is thy name . 0 A m e n ,

"O Amen, 0 God, 0 God, 0 Amen, ( I o ) I a d o r e t h y n a m e ,

" g r a n t t h o u t o m e t h a t I m a y c o m p r e h e n d t h e e ; grant t hou

" t h a t I m a y h a v e p e a c e i n t h e T u a t ( u n d e r w o r l d ) a n d m a y p o s -

sess all my mem bers [therein] . A n d t h e d i v i n e S o u l w h i c h i s

" i n N u t (I I) s a i t h :- ' I w i l l m a k e m y d iv i n e s t r e n g t h t o p r o -

tect thee, and I will perf orm everything which thou has t said . " '

R u b r i c : [THIS CHAPTER] SHALL BE RECITED OVER [A FIGURE OF] THE

GOD-OF-THE-LIFTED-HAND WHICH SHALL HAVE PLUMES UPON ITS HEAD ;

THE LEGS THEREOF SHALL BE WIDE APART, AND THE MIDDLE PORTION OF

IT SHALL BE IN THE FORM OF ( 1 2 ) A BEETLE, ANT) IT SHALL BE PAINTED

BLUE WITH LAPIS-LAZULI MIXED WITH QAAIAI WATER. A N T ) [ I T S H A L L B E

RECITED OVER] A FIGURE WITH A HEAD LIKE UNTO THAT OF A MAN, ANI)

THE HANDS AND ARMS THEREOF SHALL 13E STRETCHED (i3) AWAY [FROM

ITS BODY] ; ABOVE ITS RIGHT SMOULDER SHALL THERE 13E THE HEAD OF

A RAM, AND ABOVE ITS LEFT SHOULDER SHALL THERE BE THE HEAD OF

A RAM . ANT) THOU SHALT PAINT UPON A PIECE OF LINEN A FIGURE OF

THE GOD-OF-THE-LIFTED HAND ( 1 q ) IMMEDIATELY OVER HIS HEART, ANI)

THOU SHALT PAINT THE [OTHER[ FIGURE OVER THE BREASTS . LET NOT

THE GOD SUKATI 95) WHO IS IN THE UNDERWORLD KNOW IT . THEN SHALL

THE DECEASED DRINK WATER FROM THE SOURCE OF THE STREAM, AND HE

SHALL SHINE LIKE THE STARS I N THE HEAVENS ABOVE .

CHAPTER CLXVI[ F r o m the Pa py r u s o f Neb s eni ( B r it . M u s . No . 9 , 9 0 0, s h e e t 2 3 ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : A h e a d - r e s t .

T e x t : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF THE PILLOW .

"Thou art lifted up, 0 sick one that lie st prostrate, (2) 0"scribe Nebseni . (3) They lift up thy head to the h orizon, thou

" a r t r a i s e d u p , a n d d o s t t r i u m p h b y r e a s o n o f w h a t h a t h b e e n

" d o n e f o r t h e e . P t a h h a t h o v e r t h r o w n ( S . ) t h i n e e n e mi e s [ ac-



THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING THE UTCHAT. 297

" c o r d i n g t o w h a t ] w a s o r d e r e d t o b e d o n e f o r t h e e . T h o u a r t

"Horus, the son of Hathor, Nesert, Nesertet, who giveth [back]

"the head (5) after the slaughter . Thy head shall not be carried

" a w a y f r o m t h e e a f t e r [ t h e s l a u g h t e r ] , t h y h e a d s h a l l n ev e r ,

" n ev e r b e c a r r i e d a w a y f r o m t h e e . "

CHAPTER CLXVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M u s . N o . 9, 90 0, sh e e t 2 2 ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : A n U t c h a t resting upon the emblem of gold ( ? ) .

T e x t : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF BRINGING THE UTCHAT . (2) Neb-

s e n i , t h e s c r i b e , s a i t h :-

" T h e g o d T h o t h h a t h b r o u g h t t h e U t c h a t , ( 4 ) a n d h e h a t h

made it to rest (or to be at peace) after it depar ted, [0] (5)

" R d . It was grievously a f f licted b y storm, but Thoth (6) made

" i t t o b e a t r e s t a f t e r i t h a d d e p a r t e d f r o m t h e s t o r m . I a m

"sound, (7) and it is sound ; I am sound, and it is sound ; and

" N eb s e n i , t h e l o r d o f p i e t y , i s s o u n d . "

CHAPTER CLXVIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M u t - h e t e p ( B r i t . Mu s . N o . i o , o t o , s h e e t 2 ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : ( a ) A s t r e a m u p o n w h i c h s a i l t h r e e b o a t s . T h e f i r s t c o n t a i n s

Khnemu, the sec ond Khepera, and the third Ra ; e a c h g o d i s s e a t e d i n a

s h r i n e . H a r p o cr a t e s o c c u p i e s t h e p l a c e o f l o ok - o u t i n t h e b o a t s o f K h n e m

and Ra . B e h i n d t h e b o a t s R a i s s e a t e d o n a t h r o n e w h i c h r e s t s o n t h e

wat e r ; t w o h a n d s a n d a r m s s t r e t c h d o w n f r o m h e a v e n a n d e n s h r i n e h i m .

(b) A man-headed sphinx on a bier . A god with a serpent on his head .

T wo g ods l yi n g on b i e rs wi t h a se rp e n t b e t we e n . Anubis . A goddess

s e a t e d . A b u l l o n a p e d e s t a l . A m an - h e ade d li on . Two gods and two

g o d d e s s e s . A bowed human figure and a mummy . A m a n h o l d i n g a d i s k .

A d i s k s h e d d i n g l i g h t . Two women lying face downwards . Two male

f i g u r e s e a c h c a r r y i n g a h u m a n b e i n g o n h i s h e a d .




T e x t : The twenty-seven short lines o f text which accompany

this Vignette consist of extracts from a version of the Chapter

w h i c h i s g iv e n i n f u l l i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w i n g , a n d t o t h i s t h e

reader is referred .

CHAPTER CLXVIII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s , B r i t . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 8 , s h e e t 2- 7 . ]

Section I .

i . T e x t : ( i ) " M a y t h e y w h o c a r r y t h e b u r d e n a b o v e t h e m

"to heaven in front o f the boat o f Ra grant th at Osiris . . . . r

" m a y s e e R d w h e n h e s h i n e t h . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d c a r r y i n g a c h i l d u p o n h i s s h o u l d e r s , a n d t h e n u m b e r

f o u r , I I I I .

T e x t : ( 2 ) " A n d t h e r e s h a l l b e m a d e u n t o t h e m a n o f f e r i n g

"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . the lord of

"offerings in Amentet, in the Bight of Sekhet-hetep . "

2 . T e x t : ( i ) " M a y t h e y w h o c a r r y t h e b u r d e n a b o v e t h e m

"to heaven in front o f the boat o f Rd grant th at Osiris . . . .

" m a y s e e R d w h e n h e s h i n e t h . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d c a r r y i n g a c h i l d u p o n h i s s h o u l d e r s , a n d I I I I .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . the follower

"o f the great god, the lord o f the beautiful Amentet . "

3 . Text : (r ) " M a y t h e y w h o s m i t e R a g r a n t t h a t c a k e s s h a l l

" c o m e u n t o O s i r i s . . . . a s t o t h e f o l l o w e r s o f R d [ w h e n ] h e

" s e t t e t h . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n l y i n g f a c e d o w n w a r d s , a n d I I I I .


"o f a li b at i on o f on e v ase up on e art h b y Osi ri s . . . w h e n H o r n s ,

" t h e l o r d o f Te h e n t , c o m e t h . "

t . S p a c e s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e n a m e o f t h e d e c e a s e d a r e p a i n t e d i n y e l l o w b u t

l e f t b l a n k t h r o u g h o u t t h e p a p y r us ; f r o m t h e f a c t t h a t t h e n a m e ` M u t ' f r e q u e n t l y

o c c u r s i m m e d i a t e l y f o l l o w i n g a s p a c e i t w o u l d s e e m t h a t t h e d e c e a s e d w a s a n

o f f i c i a l o f t h i s g o d d e s s .



THE CHAPTER OF THE Off-ERINGS . 299

4 .Text : ( r ) " M a y t h e y w h o p o s s e s s o f f e r i n g s g r a n t t h a t

" O s i r i s . . . . s h a l l e x i s t , e v e n a s d o t h o s e w h o a r e i n t h e u n d e r -

"world . "

Vignette : A w o m a n l y i n g f a c e d o w n w a r d s , a n d I I I I .

Text : ( 2 ) And there shall be made unto them an offering of

"a libation of o ne vase upon earth by Osiris . . . . w h o s h a l l

"come forth a nd go in along with Rd for ever . "

5 . Text : (i) "May those who build up grant that Osiris . . . .

" s h a l l a r r i v e h a p p i l y i n t h e H a l l o f D o u b l e T r u t h . "

Vignette : A w o m a n l y i n g f a c e d o w n w a r d s , a n d I I I I .

Text : ( 2 ) "And there shall be made unto them an offering

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . a s l o r d o f

" o f f e r i n g s i n t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t e t . "

6 . Text : ( r ) " M a y t h o s e w h o m a k e a d o r a t i o n s g r a n t t h a t

" O s i r i s . . . s h a l l f o l l o w a f t e r R d i n h i s b o a t . "

Vignette : A g o d b o w i n g t o t h e g r o u n d , a n d I I I I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . w h o s h a l l

"walk with long strides with the gods of the underworld . "

7 . Text : (i) "M ay t h ose wh o h ave of fe ri n g s, an d wh o make

" s a c r i f i c i a l m e a l s f o r t h e g o d s , g r a n t o b l a t i o n s o f t c h e f i u f o o d

" t o O s i r i s . . . . in the underworld . "

Vignette : A g o d h o l d i n g u p ri g h t a c o n i c a l o b j e c t


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . a l o n g w i t h

"them, whose souls shall stand up at the pylon . "

S e c t i o n I I . THE GODS O f ' ' I HE EIGHTH QERERT IN THE UNDER-

WORLD, WHOSE ATTRIBUTES ARE HIDDEN, AND WHO . . . . WINDS.

i . Text : (r) "May the gods who dwell in their shrines, the

" p r i n c e s o f N u , g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . . s h a l l d r i n k w a t e r . "

Vignette : A g o d i n a s h r i n e , w i t h t h r e e s e r p e n t s i n f r o n t o f h i m

a n d t h r e e b e h i n d h i m ; a t t h e e n t r a n c e t o t h e s h r i n e i s t h e n u m b e r f o u r -

t e e n , f I I I I


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . ; m a y h i s

"soul live and his body be preserved in the underworld . "



3 o o THE CHAPTERS OF CO.IING FORTH BY DAY .

2 . Text : ( t ) " M a y t h e gods w h o a r e i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f

" O s i r i s g r a n t t h a t t h e b o d y o f O s i r i s . . . . s h a l l r e s t a l o n g w i t h

" h i s sah. "

Vignette : A w o m a n , a n d a g o d , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o u r t e e n , n 1 1 1 1 .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . . b y t h e

" s i d e o f t h e g r e a t g o d w i t h i n h i s b o a t . "

3 . Text : ( t ) "May Aha (1, e . , H e w h o s t a n d e t h m a k e O s i r i s

. . . . t o p r a i s e R d w h e n h e r i s e t h . "

Vignette : A g o d , s t a n d i n g , h o l d i n g a s c e p t r e .

Text : ( 2 )"And there shall be made unto them an offering

"of a liba tion of one vase upon earth by Osirisr i u m -

phant, who shall be with those wh o are over [their] altars . "

4 . Text : ( t ) " Ma y A m en ( i . e . , the Hidden o ne) give power

" u n t o O s i r i s . . . . i n t h e H a l l o f S e b . "

Vignette : A c o w s t a n d i n g o n a s t a n d a r d .

Tex t : ( 2 ) "And there shall be made unto them an offering

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . t r i u m p h a n t ,

"who knoweth al l the mysteries of the Tuat . "

3 . T e x t : ( i ) " M a y S h e t a ( i . e . , t h e S e c r e t o n e ) m a k e t h e b o d y

" o f O s i r i s . . . . to grow and to be sound upon earth and in

"the underworld . "

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t .

Text : ( 2 )"And there shall be made unto them an offering

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e b y O s i r i s . . . . a s t h e l o r d o f s t r i d e s

"in the underworld and in Re-stau . "

6 . Text : ( t ) "May Setek give cakes and ale to Osiris . . . .

"along with you in the House of Osiris . "

Vignette : A g o d , s t a n d i n g , w i t h a p l a t f o r m u po n h i s h e a d , w h e r e o n

i s a b u l l .

Tex t : ( 2 )"And there shall be made unto them an offering

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . w h o h a t h

" e n t e r e d i n t o a l l t h e s e c r e t p l a c e s o f t h e T u a t . "

7 . T e x t : ( i ) " M a y S e s h e t a A u s z r ( i . e ., he who maketh Osiris

" t o b e s e c r e t ) g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . . m a y b e a l o r d o f s t r i d e [ s ]

" i n t h e h a b i t a t i o n o f T c h e s e r t . "



THE CHAPTER OF OFFERINGS 3 o i

Vignette : A g o d , s t a n d i n g , w i t h a p l a t f o r m up o n h i s h e a d , w h e r e o n

i s a b u l l .


"of a li bat i on of on e vase up on e art h wh e n h e be come t h t h e

"lord of an ab ode in the underworld . "

8 . Text : (i) "May Sherem not all ow any evil thing to come

" t o O s i r i s . . . . in the underworld . "

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . . t h e s o u l

"that hearkeneth unto the words of the gods . "

g . T e x t : ( t ) " M a y S t a ( i . e . , t h e l e a d e r ) g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . .

"may se e Rd wh e n h e ri se t h an d wh e n h e se t t e t h . "

Vignette : A b u l l u p o n a s t a n d a r d .



"limbs live and may his limbs be sound fo r ever . "

i o . Text : ( t ) " Ma y S enk ( i . e . , s p l e n d o u r ) g i v e g l o r y t o O s i -

" r i s . . . . up on e art h , an d make h i m st ro n g i n Ame n t e t . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t .



"legs have power as the lord of an abode in Amentet . "

i i . Tex t : (i) "May He-who-liveth-in-darkness ( 1 . e . , Horus)

" g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . . s h a l l b e a m o n g t h o s e w h o a r e o v e r t h e i r

" a l t a r s . "

V i g n e t t e : A c r o c o d i l e - h e a d e d g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . who is in

" t h e e v e r l a s t i n g T u a t . "

1 2 . Tex t : ( i ) " M a y t h e . . . . o f O s i r i s . . . . g r a n t t h a t h e s h a l l

"be near the great god, the lord of Amentet . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o u r , l t i l .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . ; m a y h e



3 0 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BF DAY .

" b e c o m e t h e l o r d o f [ h i s ] h a n d s a n d h a v e p o w e r o v e r [ h i s ] h e a r t

"in the underworld . "

13 . Text : (i) "May those whos e hands hide gra nt that Osi-

" r i s . . . . shall be along with them in the underworld . "

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d h i d i n g s o m e t h i n g w i t h h i s

h a n d s .

Tex t : (i) "And there shall b e made unto them an offering

"of a libatio n of one vase upon earth by Osirism a y"they bring me to the throne of Osiris . "

1 4 . Tex t : ( i) " May t h o s e w h o s e h a n d s h i d e g r a nt t h a t

" O s i r i s . . . s h a l l b e s o u n d , a n d t h a t o f f e r i n g s s h a l l b e b e f o r e

"him continually . "

V i g n e t t e : [ A s i n N o . t 3 ] .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . who shall

" b e [ a l o r d o f ] h o r n s a n d s h a l l l i s t e n u n t o t h e w o r d s o f t h e g o d s . "

15 . Tex t : (i) "May He whose lim bs are hi dden give right

" a n d t r u t h t o O s i r i s b e f o r e R d , a n d i n t h e c o m p a n y o f h i s g o d s . "


Tex t : ( 2 ) An d t h e re sh all be made un t o t h e m an of fe ri n g

"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . . a s l o r d

"of the phallus and r avisher of women for ever . "

i 6 . Text : ( i) " Ma y t h e s o u l s w h o c o m e f o r t h o pen t h e

"mouth of Osiris . . . . among the gods who are along with

"them . "

V i g n e t t e : A b i r d o n a t r e e , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o u r , I I I I .


"of a libatio n of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . . a m o n g

" t h e l i v i n g o n e s , t h e l o r d s o f e t e r n i t y . "

1 7. Tex t : ( t ) " M a y T h o s e w h o b e l o n g t o t h e i r . . . . g r a n t

" t h a t O s i r i s . . . . m a y h a v e p o w e r o v e r h i s o f f e r i n g s u p o n e a r t h ,

" e v e n a s h a v e t h e g o d s , t h e l o r d s o f [ o f f e r i n g s ] . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p ri g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o ur , I I II .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . w h o s h a l l

"be e n dowe d abun dan t ly wi t h t c h e f a u f o o d i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d . "



THE_ CHAPTER OF OFFERINGS 3 o 3

i 8 . Text : ( i ) " M a y t h o s e w h o r e c e i v e g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s

" s h a l l e n t e r i n o v e r a l l t h e s e c r e t p l a c e s o f t h e T u a t . "

Vignette : A g o d b o w i n g t o t h e g r o u n d , a n d a s t a r .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . who shall

" h a v e p o w e r o v e r o f f e r i n g s u p o n e a r t h , a n d b e t h e l o r d o f

" a l t a r s . "

r g . Text : (i) "May the A nenit ( i . e . , Wi d o w s ( % ) ) g r a n t t h a t

" O s i r i s . . . s h a l l b e w i t h t h e g r e a t g o d a s p o s s e s s o r o f a p h a l l u s

" b e f o r e . . . "

Vignette : A w o m a n k n e e l i n g o n a c o u c h .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h o s h a l l

" b e o r d e r e d t o d w e l l i n t h e s e c r e t p l a c e i n t h e d a r k n e s s . "

20 . Text : ( i ) " M a y O s i r i s - A n u b i s g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . m a y

" b e a p o s s e s s o r o f a s e a t i n T a - t c h e s e r t e t . "

Vignette : A n u b i s h o l d i n g a h a w k - h e a d e d s c e p t r e i n e a c h h a n d .

Text : ( 2 ) " A n d t h e r e s h a l l b e m a d e u n t o t h e m a n o f f e r i n g o f

"a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris who shall go in

"and pass through the pylon of Osiris . "

S e c t i o n I I I .

THE GODS OF THE [TENTH] QERERT I N THE TUAT WHOARE TO BE PRAISED AND WHOSE MYSTERIES ARE HOLY .

i . Text : ( i ) " M a y t h o s e w h o a r e d e n i z e n s o f l i g h t g r a n t t h a t

" O s i r i s . . . s h a l l s h i n e i n t h e d a r k n e s s . "

f i l l

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u pr i g h t a n d t h e n u m b e r e i g h t I I I I .

Text : ( 2 ) "An d t h e re sh all be made un t o t h e m an of fe ri n g

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s who prais-

" e t h t h e g r e a t g o d i n h i s a b o d e day by day . "

2 . Text : ( i ) " M a y t h e S m i t e r s g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . m a y b e

"among those who sing praises . "

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t h o l d i n g i n h i s u p r a i s e d h a n d a

h a t c h e t d r i p pi n g w i t h b l o od .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth b y O s i r i s . . . . o n t h e




"day when he repulseth the serpent fiend Bi, the mighty one

" o f i n i q u i t y . "

3 . Tex t : (i) "May the company of the gods who gua rd those

" w h o a r e i n [ t h e T u a t ] , . . . . g i v e t h e b r e a t h s o f l i f e t o O s i r i s

"upon earth and in the underworld . "

I I I I I I

V i g n e t t e : A g o d l y i n g o n a b i e r , a n d t h e n u m b e r n i n e , I I I


"of a lib ation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . , w h o

"shooteth forth [his] hand, and repulseth him that cometh . "

4 . Text : (i) "M ay t h e comp an y of t h e g ods of t h e h i dde n

" h a n d g i v e g l o r y u n t o O s i r i s . . . . a s u n t o t h e p e r f e c t K h u s . "

I I I I I I

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r n i n e , I I I


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i sh o s h a l l

"be sound upon earth and in the underworld . "

5 . Text : (i) "May the Hidden goddess grant that the soul

" o f O s i r i s , . . . may grow, and that his body may be preserved

"even as are those of the go ds who dwel l in the Tuat . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n s t a n d i n g b e f o r e a n U t c h a t .


"of a lib ation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . , whose

" s o u l s h a l l r e s t u p o n w h a t e v e r s e a t h e p l e a s e t h . "

6 . Text : ( i ) " M a y t h e s o u l s o f t h e g o d s w h o h a v e c o m e

"into being in the members of Osiris . . . g r a n t t h a t h e s h a l l

"have peace . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n l y i n g u p o n h e r b a c k , a n d t h e n u m b e r t w e n t y -

o n e , n I n .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , wh o sh all

" r e c e i v e h i s p l a c e i n t h e l a n d o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d . "

7 . Text : (i) "May those who praise Ra not turn Osiris

"back at the pylons of the Tuat . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m be r f o u r , I II I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , who shall



THE CHAPTER OF OFFERINGS . 3 0 5

"come forth by day and shall refresh himself in the place of

" c o o l n e s s . "

8 . Tex t : ( i ) " M a y t h e b e i n g s o f w a r l i k e f a c e g r a n t c o o l n e s s

" u n t o O s i r i s . . . i n t h e p l a c e o f f l a m e . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o u r , I I I I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , w h o s h a l l

" s i t i n t h e s h r i n e w i t h t h e g r e a t g o d . "

Section IV . THE GODS OF THE ELEVENTH QERERET [OF THE

TUAT]. Tex t : (r) "May the goddess Amemet grant tha t Osiris . . .

" s h a l l b e s t r o n g b e f o r e t h e g r e a t g o d i n t h e T u a t . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n i n a s h r i n e .

Tex t : (z) "And there shal l be ma de unto them a n offer ing


"beco me like the god Khepera in Amentet . "

2 . Tex t : (i) "May the Soul of Ament grant sepulchral meals

" u n t o O s i r i s . . . upon earth and in the underworld . "



' C o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , t h e l o r d

" o f t h e a b o d e o f p e a c e i n t h e m o u n t a i n o f t h e u n d e r w o r l d . "

3 . Tex t : (i) "May the Soul of the Earth make Osiris . . . .

"to triumph over his enemies in heaven and upon earth . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u pr i g h t , w i t h d r o o p i n g h a n d s , a n d t h e

n u m b e r f o u r , I I I I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i shose"body shall be concealed from any that would look upon him . "

4 .Tex t : "May those who sing praises grant that Osiris . . .

" s h a l l b e l i k e t h e d i v i n e m a r i n e r s w h o a r e i n h e a v e n . "

Vignette : A m a n s t a n d i n g u pr i g h t w i t h h i s h a n d s r a i s e d .

Text : ( 2) "And there shall be made unto them an offering

"of a libatio n of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n h e

"entereth through the hidden pylons . "

20



3o6 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

5 . Text : ( r ) " M a y t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o r u l e o v e r

" A m e n t g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . . s h a l l g o i n t h r o u g h t h e s e c r e t

"door o f the House o f Osiris . "

I I I I I I

V i g n e t t e : A god lying upon a b i e r , a n d t h e n u m b e r n i n e , I I I

Text : ( 2 ) " A n d t h e r e s h a l l b e m a d e u n t o t h e m a n o f f e r i n g

"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . , w h o s h a l l

" w a l k w i t h l o n g s t r i d e s a m o n g t h e l o r d s o f t h e T u a t . "

6 . T e x t : ( r ) " M a y t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o a r e i n t h e

"f ollo wing of Osiris grant that Osiris . . . shall have power over

"his enemies . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d l y i n g u p o n , o r b y t h e s i d e o f , a s e r p e n t o n a b i e r .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . when he

" b e c o m e t h a p e r f e c t s o u l d a y b y d a y ( ? ). "

7 . T e x t : "May Aqeh grant that Osiris shall be with Rd, and

"that he shall walk over heaven for ever . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t a n d h o l d i n g a s c e p t r e .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n h e i s

" i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f h i m t h a t d w e l l e t h i n t h e c i t y o f e m b a l m -

"ment (i . e . , An u b i s) , t h e l ord o f T a- t c h e se rt . "

8. Text : ( i ) " M a y t h o s e w h o . . . . Osiris grant that the soul

"of Osiris . . . . m a y l i v e , a n d t h a t i t m a y n e v e r d i e a s e c o n d

" t i m e . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o u r , I I I I .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . , f o r w h o m

"lamentation shall be decreed as for his god . "

g . T e x t : (i) "May the Nine Watchers grant that Osiris

" m a y w a k e u p a n d t h a t h e m a y n e v e r b e d e s t r o y e d . "

I I I

V i g n e t t e : A n u b i s o n a s t a n d a r d a n d t h e n u m b e r n i n e , I I I I I I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , t r i u m p h a n t

"before Osiris, the lord of the land of the Lake . "



THE CHAPTER OF OFFERINGS . 3 0 7

i o . Text : (i) "M ay t h e Nine M ourn e rs cau se mourn i n g t o

"be made for Osiris . . . as was made for Osiris . "

Vignette : A w o m a n l y i n g o n t h e g r o u n d f a c e d o w n w a r d s .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n h i s

"soul cometh forth with the Kh u . "

i i . Text : (i) "May he tha t invoketh Rd invoke Osiris

"before Rd and bef ore the company of his gods . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d c r y i n g o u t t o s o m e o n e .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . wh e n h i s

" s o u l g o e t h i n t o t h e h i d d e n p l a c e a n d c o m e t h f o r t h f r o m e a r t h . "

12 . Tex t : (i) "May Aqen drive away every evil thing from

" O s i r i s . . . f o r e v e r . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t w i t h h a n d s h a n g i n g d o w n .


"of a l ibation of one vase upon earth by Osiris w h e n h e

"come t h i n pe ace an d h at h t ri ump h e d . "

i 3 . Tex t : (i) "May those who dwell with Tesert grant that

" O s i r i s . . . . may g o i n an d come out wi t h lon g st ri de s li k e

"the lords of the Tuat . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n - h e a d e d s e r p e n t o v e r a p y l o n .



"go in and come forth through the door of the Tuat . "

i ¢ . T e x t : ( t ) "May the goddess Tesert grant that Osiris

"may h ave powe r ove r t h e wat e r . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t , a n d t h e n u m be r f o u r , I II I .


"of a l ibation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n h e

" s h a l l w a l k u p t h e G r e a t S t a i r c a s e . "

1 5 . Tex t : ( t ) " M a y M e b e n i t g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . m a y b e a

" d i s t i n g u i s h e d b e i n g i n t h e T u a t f o r e v e r . "

V i g n e t t e : A s e r p e n t o n a p y l o n .


2 0 *



3o8 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

"of a liba tion of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . a s a p e r -

f e c t s o u l i n h i s s h r i n e . "

i 6 . Text : (i) "May those who dwell with Mehenit grant

" t h a t O s i r i s . . . m a y w a l k w i t h l o n g s t r i d e s i n t h e h o l y p l a c e . "

V i g n e t t e : A w o m a n s t a n d i n g u p ri g h t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f o ur , I II I .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . . w h e n h e

" i s w i t h t h e f o l l o w e r s o f H o r u s . "

1 7 . Text : ( i ) " M a y t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s w h o h i d e

" O s i r i s g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . shall sit upon the throne which

" h e l o v e t h . "I I I

V i g n e t t e : A s e a t e d g o d . a n d t h e n u m b e r n i n e , I I I I I I .



"be amon g t h e lords of M aat . "

i 8 . Text : ( i ) " M a y h e t h a t d e s t r o y e t h t h e f a c e o p e n t h e f a c e

" o f O s i r i s . . . and let him see the Kh u . "


Text : ( 2 ) "An d t h e re sh all be made un t o t h e m an of fe ri n g


"be in the following of the goddes s Mehi of Amentet . "

Section IV .

THE GODS OF THE TWELFTH QERERET IN THE TUAT . . . .

i . Tex t : ( i ) " M a y M a a t g r a n t t h a t O s i r i s . . . may be a lord

"of the Lake of Maati . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p ri g h t a n d h o l d i n g a s c e p t r e .


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris a s a l o r d

" o f o f f e r i n g s i n S e k h e t - A a r u . "

2 . Text : (i) "M ay t h e g ods wh o dwe ll i n t h e lan d of t h e

" T u a t g r a n t j u s t i c e u n t o O s i r i s . . . i n t h e H a l l o f D o u b l e T r u t h . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p ri g h t a n d h o l d i n g a s c e p t r e .



" p l o u g h i n S e k h e t - I H e t e p . "



THE CHAPTER OF OFFERINGS . 3og

3 . Text : (i) "May the gods who dwell with Mehen grant

" t h a t O s i r i s . . . s h a l l b e i n w h a t s o e v e r p l a c e h i s k a w i s h e t h

"to be . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d w i t h i n t h e f o l d s o f a s e r p e n t .


" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s . . . , w h o s h a l l

"come into being at the words of the lord o f Amentet . "

4 . T e x t : (i) "May the gods who possess la nd grant a lake

" u n t o O s i r i s . . . in Sekhet-Aanru . "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i gh t , a n d t h e n u m b e r f ou r , II I I .



"sit upon whatsoever place he would there . "

5 . T e x t : (r) "May Her-ta ( ? ) g r a n t a n e s t a t e u n t o O s i r i s

" i n S e k h e t - I l e t e p . "

V i g n e t t e : A s n a k e - h e a d e d g o d .



"be protected by amulets ( ? ) l i k e t h e l o r d s o f t h e T u a t . "

6 . Text : "May the gods who dwell in the land grant offer-

i n g s , a n d t c h e f a u food, and joints of meat to Osiris . . . i n

"the underworld . "

Vignette : A g o d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t w i t h a r m s h a n g i n g d o w n , a n d

t h e n u m b e r f o u r , I I I I.


"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n R d

"setteth in Manu . "

7. T e x t : ( t ) "May the Chiefs of the secret things who dwell

"in the land place their wal l behind Osiris . . . even as they

" d o f o r t h e S t i l l - H e a r t . "

V i g n e t t e : A r a m - h e a d e d s c e p t r e .


"of a lib ation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . w h e n h e

"cometh forth and goeth into the underworld . "

8 . T e x t : (i) "May the gods who dwell in the fol ds of the

" s e r p e n t g o d d e s s M e h e n g r a n t a s i g h t o f t h e D i s k t o O s i r i s . . . "



3 1 o THE C H A P TER S O F C O M IN G FO R TH BY DAY .

V i g n e t t e : A g od w i t h i n t h e f o l d s o f a s e r p e n t .

Tex t : (2) "And there shal l be ma de unto them a n offer ing

"of a libation of one vase upon earth by Osiris . . . a s a k h u

"who bath gained power over fresh w ater. "

9. T e x t : ( i ) " M a y A n u - b a ( ? ) g r a n t p e a c e u n t o O s i r i s . . . i n

" A m e n t e t. "

V i g n e t t e : A g o d b o w i n g .

Text : (2) "And there shal l be ma de unto them a n offer ing

" o f a l i b a t i o n o f o n e v a s e u p o n e a r t h b y O s i r i s. . . in coming

"out and going into Ament, along with other folk [therein]. "

CHAPTER CLXIX .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r us o f N e f e r - u b e n - f ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p. c i t . , B d . I . B l . t 9 o ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t v i g n e t t e .

Text : THE CHAPTER OF MAKING TO STAND UP THE HENKIT . I

( 1 ) T h e A m - k h e n t , O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h:-

"Thou art the Lion-god. T h o u a r t t h e d o u b l e L i o n-go d .

" T h o u a r t H o r n s , t h e a v e n g e r o f h i s f a t h e r [ O s i r i s ] . T h o u a r t

" F o u r , t h e f o u r g l o r i o u s g o d s. A c c l a m a t i o n i s m a d e [ u n t o t h e e ]

"along with cries of d elight (2) and sounds of joy, and the

" w a t e r f r o m t h e i r h a u n c h e s a n d f r o m t h e i r t h i g h s I b r i n g [ u n t o

" t h e e ]. T h o u a r t l i f t e d u p o n t h y r i g h t s i d e , a n d t h o u a r t l i f t e d

" u p o n t h y l e f t s i d e. T h e g o d S e b h a t h o p e n e d f o r t h e e ( 3 )

"thy two eyes which were blind, and he ba th given [thee] the

" p o w e r t o s t r e t c h o u t t h y l e g s [ i n w a l k i n g ]. H a t h b e e n b o u n d

" u n t o t h e e t h y h e a r t ( a b ) , [ t h y ] m o t h e r , a n d t h y h e a r t ( h a t ) i s

"in thy body . Thy soul is in heaven, and thy body is under

"the ground. There are cakes for thy body, and water for thy

"throat, and sweet (¢) breezes for thy nostrils, and thou art

" s a t i s f i e d w i t h o f f e r i n g s. T h o s e w h o d w e l l i n t h e i r s h r i n e s o p e n

" t h e i r a b o d e s ( ? ) u n t o t h e e , t h o u h a s t t h y p r o v i s i o n s ( ? ) , a n d t h o u

" j o u r n e y e s t a l o n g . Th ou art st abli sh e d up on t h at wh i ch e ma-

i . I . e . , t h e f u n e r a l b e d .



T H E C H A P T E R O F S E T TI N G U P T H E F U N ER A L B E D . 311

"nateth from thy existence, and thou comest forth from h eaven .

" T h e c o r d h a t h b e e n c o i l e d u p f o r t h e e ( 5 ) b y t h e s i d e o f

" R d , a n d t h o u s n a r e s t f i s h w i t h t h e n e t i n t h e s t r e a m f r o m

" w h i c h t h o u d r i n k e s t v e s s e l s o f w a t e r . T h o u p e r f o r m e s t a

" j o u r n e y o n t h y l e g s , a n d i n g o i n g f o r w a r d t h o u d o l t n o t

" s t u m b l e ( ? ) ; t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h (6) f r o m o v e r t h e e a r t h , t h o u

" d o s t n o t m a k e t h y a p p e a r a n c e f r o m b e l o w t h e w a l l s [ t h e r e o f ] .

" T h y w a l l s a r e n o t t h r o w n d o w n , a n d w h a t t h e r e i s o f t h i n e

" w i t h i n h a t h b e e n m a d e f o r t h e e b y t h e g o d o f t h y c i t y . T h o u

"art p ure , t h o u a rt p ure . T h y f o re p art s a re w as h e d b y li b at i on s,

"and thy hinder parts are clean sed (7) with resin and natron,

" a n d m a d e c o o l w i t h i n c e n s e . T h o u a r t m a d e c l e a n w i t h t h e

"milk o f the Hap c o w , a n d w i t h t h e a l e o f t h e g o d d e s s Te n e -

" m i t , a n d w i t h n a t r o n . A l l t h e e v i l wh i c h c l u n g t o t h e e (8)

" h a t h b e e n d o n e a w a y w i t h , a n d T e f n e t , t h e d a u g h t e r o f R d ,

" h at h m a de o f f e ri n g s on t h y b e h a l f e v e n as s h e di d f o r h e r f at h e r

" R d ; and the funeral valley which was the burial place o f her

" f at h e r Osi ri s h at h b e e n se t i n orde r f o r t h e e . I make to eat o f

"the sweet things (9) which he giveth there the Osiris Nefer-

"uben-f, triumphant, that is to say, the celestial cakes which

" a r e b e f o r e R d , a n d t h e g r a i n ( ? ) a n d d r i n k , a n d t h e f o u r t e r -

r e s t r i a l c a k e s w h i c h a r e b e f o r e t h e g o d S e b , a n d t h e g r a i n

"[brought b y] the citizens . ( so) I h av e b r o ug h t un t o t h e e Se k h e t -

" b e t e p an d t h e g i f t s t h e re o f a re b e f o re t h e e . Thou comest forth

" a s R d , t h o u b a s t g o t t e n p o w e r a s R d , a n d t h o u b a s t g o t t e n

" p o w e r o v e r t h y l e g s ; a n d t h o u , 0 O s i r i s Ne f e r - u b e n - f , b a s t

"gotten power over thy le gs at every (ii) season and at every

" h o u r . T h o u b a s t n o t b e e n c o n d e m n e d i n t h e j u d g m e n t , t h o u

" b a s t n o t b e e n p u t u n d e r r e s t r a i n t , a g u a r d h a t h n o t b e e n s e t

" o v e r t h e e , t h o u b a s t n o t b e e n i m p r i s o n e d , a n d t h o u b a s t n o t

" b e e n g i v e n o v e r t o t h e c h a m b e r o f t h e F i e n d s ( 1 2 ) therein .

" T h e s a n d i s g a t h e r e d t o g e t h e r b e f o r e t h y f a c e a n d g u a r d e d

"are the offerings which are for thee ; t h y f a ce i s n ot su f f e re d

" t o b e t u r n e d b a c k , a n d t h o u a r t g u a r d e d a n d d o s t n o t c o m e

"f orth . Thou bast received thy tunic, and thy sandals, and thy

" s t i c k , ( i 3 ) a n d t h y g a r m e n t , a n d t h y w e a p o n s f o r f i g h t i n g o f




"all kinds wherewith thou shalt cut o f f heads ; t h o u s h a l t t u r n

" b a c k t h e n e c k s o f t h y f o e s w h o m t h o u s h a l t t a k e c a p t ive , a n d

" t h o u s h a l t k e e p a w a y f r o m t h e e d e a t h s o t h a t i t s h a l l n o t

" c o m e n i g h u n t o t h e e . A n d t h e ( i 4) G r e a t G o d h a t h s a i d c o n -

cerning thee : ` B r i n g h i m [ h i t h e r ] o n t h e d a y w h e n e v e n t s

" ' t a k e p l a c e .' The Hawk rejoiceth in thee, and the S e m e n goose

"cackleth at thee . R d o p e n e t h f o r t h e e t h e d o o r s o f h e a v e n ,

"and Seb unbolteth for thee the earth . (15) T h y k h u i s m i g h t y ,

" a n d i t i s p e r f e c t k n o w i n g t h y n a m e ; t h y s o u l m a k e t h a w a y

" t h r o u g h A m e n t , a n d t h y p e r f e c t s o u l , 0 Ne f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m -

p h a n t , b a th t h e p o w e r o f s pe e c h . T h y f o r m i s w i t h i n R d (16)

"and it resteth within the divine sovereign chiefs o f him wh o

" u n i t e t h t h e t w o p a t h s ; m a n k i n d k e e p e t h g u a r d o v e r i t , a n d

" t h e d o u b l e L i o n - g o d g u i d e t h i t , t o t h e p l a c e w h e r e t h o u , 0

"Osiris Nefer-uben-f , triumphant, makest t h y k a to rest . A n d

" b e h o l d , t h e t w o l a n d s a n d m a n k i n d w o r k (17) the snare for

"t h e e . T h o u l iv e s t , t h y s o u l i s s t r o n g , t h y b o d y i s e n d u r i n g

" a n d g r e a t , t h o u h a s t s i g h t o f t h e f i r e , t h o u c o s t s n u f f t h e

"b reeze, thy f ace doth penetrate into the house of darkness , (18)

"thou a bidest at the Gap, thou dost not see th e whirlwind and

" t h e s t o r m , t h o u f o l l o w e s t i n t h e t r a i n o f t h e p r i n c e o f t h e

"two lands, and thou refreshest thysel f on the branch o f m e r i t

" t r e e o n b o t h s i d e s o f t h e g o d U r - h e k a u . The goddess Seshetet

"sitteth (ig) before thee, the god Sa protecteth thy mem bers,

"the steer and his cow give thee milk from the breast [in] the

" f o l l o w i n g of S e k h a t - H e r u . T h o u w a s h e s t t h y s e l f a t t h e m o u t h

" o f t h e s t r e a m o f K h e r - a b a , ( 2 0 ) t h o u a r t i n f a v o u r w i t h t h e

" p r i n c e s o f t h e c i t i e s o f P e a n d Tep , t h e g o d T h o t h a n d t h y -

s e l f s e e e a c h o t h e r , a n d R d i n h e a v e n h o l d e t h c o nv e r s e w i t h

" t h e e , t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m a n d t h o u e n t e r e s t i n t o t h e k n i t

" c h a m b e r , a n d t h o u h o l d e s t c o nv e r s e w i t h t h e t w o d iv i n e c o m -

batants ( i . e . , H o r u s a n d S e t ) . ( z i ) T h y ka i s w i t h t h e e t o

"make t h e e t o re joi ce , t h y h e art i s wi t h t h e e t o [g i v e t h e e ] t h y

"transformations, happy . . . k e e p w a t c h o v e r t h e e , t h e c o m p a n y

" o f t h e g o d s m a k e t h y h e a r t g l a d , t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h t o f o u r

" c a k e s i n t h e c i t y o f S e k h e m , a n d f o u r i n ( 2 2 ) t h e ci t y o f



THE CHAPTER OF ARRANGING THE FUNERAL BED . 313

" A q e n n u , t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h t o f o u r i n t h e c i t y o f A n n u , u p o n

"the altar of the lady of the two lands . T h e s t a r s k e e p w a t c h

" o v e r t h e e b y n i g h t , t h e l o r d s o f A n n u h a v e a f a v o u r u n t o

"thee, the god Hu is in thy mouth, thy feet are not (23) turn-

ed back, and thy mem bers have life . Thou graspest the smd i n

"Abtu, the sacrificial ca kes of the divine chiefs and the libations

"o f the celestial beings are brought forward to thee, with the

"offerin gs in the festival (24) which are due to Osiris on the

" m o r n i n g o f t h e U a l . f e st i v al f o r h i dde n t h i n g s( ? ) . T h o u a r t

"ornamented with o bjects o f gold, and thine apparel is inter-

w o v e n ( ? ) with byssus . Hapi (i . e ., the Nile) thrusteth himself

" u p o n t h y b o d y( 2 5 ) ,

thou hast power over the ta blet(?) which

"i s i n scri b e d wi t h [ li st s o f ] o f f e ri n g s, an d t h o u d ri n ke st wat e r

" o n b o t h s i d e s o f t h e L a k e o f T e s t e s ( ? ) . T h e g o d s w h o a r e

" t h e r e h a v e a f a v o u r u n t o t h e e , a n d t h o u c o m e s t f o r t h f r o m

" h e a v e n a l o n g w i t h t h e g o d s ( 2 6) w h o m a k e t o a d v a n c e t h e

" m a a t o f R d , a n d t h o u a r t l e d i n t o t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e c o m -

p a n y o f t h e g o d s ; a n d t h e r e i s d o n e f o r t h e e ev e n a s i t i s

" d o ne f o r o n e of t h e m . T h o u a r t t h e Kh a r t b i r d o f t h e g e e se ,

" a n d P t a h o f t h e S o u t h e r n (27) Wa l l m a k e t h a n o f f e r i n g u n t o

"Nefer-uben-f, triumphant . "

CHAPTER CLXX

[From the Papyrus of Nefer-uben -f (see Naville, op. c i t . , B d . I . B I . 1 9 1 ) . ]

Vignette : This Chapter is without Vignette . .

T e x t : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF ARRANGING THE HENKIT . I (s) The

Osiris Nefer-ub en-f saith :-

"Thy flesh have I given unto thee . Thy bones have I fastened

"together for thee . T h y m e m b e r s h a v e I c o l l e c t e d f o r t h e e . T h e

"earth submitteth itself unto thee . Thy lim bs are guarded . T h o u

"art t h e (2) m i g h t y o n e w i t h i n t h e e g g . Thou art set in order .

"Thou seest the gods(?) . Thou settest out on thy way, and thy

t . IL e . , t h e f u n e r a l b e d .




"hand [ r e a c h e t h ] un t o t h e h orizon, an d un t o t h e h oly p lace

"where thou wouldst be . There is acclamation made unto thee,

"and there are (3) shouts of joy raised to thee at thine ap-

p e a r a n c e s a t t h e a l t a r . Horus maketh thee to stand up at his

" r i s i n g s , e v e n a s h e d i d h i m w h o i s i n t h e c h a m b e r o f h o l i n e s s .

" H a i l , O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e g o d d e s s U a ( ? ) hath

"given thee birth, (4) and Anpu (Anubis), who dwelleth u pon

" h i s h i l l , h a t h s e t t h e e i n o r d e r , a n d h e b a t h f a s t e n e d f o r t h e e

"t h y swat h i n g s . Hail, Nefer-uben-f, the god Ptah-Sekri bath

"given unto thee of the ornaments of the divine house which

" h e h a t h . ( 5 ) H a i l , N e f e r - u b e n - f , t h e g o d T h o t h h i m s e l f c o m e t h

"un t o t h e e wi t h t h e books of h oly words, an d h e make t h t h y

" h a n d [ t o r e a c h ] u n t o t h e h o r i z o n , e v e n u n t o t h e p l a c e [ w h e r e i n ]

"thy . k a loveth to be ; and Osiris worketh [f or thee on] the

"night of journeying unto life . Th y wh i t e cro wn (6) i s st a-

" b l i s h e d o n t h y b r o w . T h e go d Nem u is w it h t h ee, a n d h e

" g i v e t h u n t o t h e e f i n e f e a t h e r e d f o w l . H a i l , O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f ,

"t ri ump h an t , t h ou h ast be e n se t i n orde r up on t h y fun e ral

" c o u c h ; thou comest forth, and Rd (7) who is in the hidden

"horizon within his b oat hath set thee in order . H a i l , O s i r i s

" N e f e r - u b e n - f , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e g o d T e m , t h e f a t h e r o f t h e g o d s . ,

"bath mad e for thee the things which are to endure for ever .

"Hail, Osiris Nefer-uben-f, triumphant, (8) the god Amsu of

" Q e b t i h a t h s e t t h e e i n o r d e r , a n d t h e g o d s o f t h e s h r i n e p r a i s e

" t h e e . H a i l , O s i r i s N e f e r - u b e n - f , w i t h t w o - f o l d h a p p i n e s s t h o u

" s e t t e s t o u t i n p e a c e t o t h i n e e v e r l a s t i n g h a b i t a t i o n a n d t o t h i n e

" a b o d e o f e t e r n i t y . H o m a g e i s p a i d u n t o t h e e ( g ) i n t h e c i t i e s

" o f P e a n d T e p u i n t h e s h r i n e w h i c h t h y k a loveth and be-

"fore thine abode, and thou art the mighty one of souls, and

"a t h s e t t h e e i n o r d e r , a n d t h e g o d s e m b r a c e

" t h e e . (so) Thou art like a god, and thou hast been begotten

"for transformations which are more numerous and with a

"created form more perfect than those of the gods . T h o u h a s t

"more light(?) than the Kh us a nd th ou ar t m or e m ig ht y o f

" s o u l s t h a n a r e t h o s e w h o a r e i n [ t h e m ] . Hail, (ii) Osiris

" N e f e r - u b e n - f , P t a h o n h i s S o u t h e r n W a l l b a t h s e t t h e e i n o r d e r ,



T H E C H A P T E R O F T Y I NG O N T H E G A R M E NT O F P U R I T Y . 315

" a n d h e h a t h m a d e t o a d v a n c e t h i n e a b o d e m o r e t h a n [ t h a t o f ]

" t h e g o d s . H a i l , O s i r i s , t h e d m - k h e n t , Nefer-uben-f, thou art

"Horns, the son of Isis, begotten of (12) P t a h ; a n d N u t h a t h

"cre at e d [t h e e ] a b e i n g o f li g h t l i ke un t o R d i n t h e h o riz on w h e n

" h e i l l u m i n e t h t h e t w o l a n d s w i t h h i s b e a u t e o u s l i g h t . A n d

" t h e g o d s s a y u n t o t h e e :- ` C o m e f o r w a r d , a d v a n c e n o w a n d

" ` l o o k t h o u u p o n t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e t h i n e i n t h i n e ( t 3 )

"'abode of everlastingness . ' T h e g o d d e s s R e n n u t e t , t h e h e i r

"and first-born of Tem, path set thee in order in the presence

" o f t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s( 1 4 )

o f N u t . I , ev e n 1 , a m t h e

" h e i r o f h e a v e n , a n d t h e f e l l o w o f t h e G o d w h o m a k e t h h i s

" l i g h t . I h a v e c o m e f o r t h f r o m t h e w o m b , a n d I s h a l l g r o w

" y o u n g a g a i n e v e n a s d o t h ( 1 5 ) my father, and I shall not be

" p r e v e n t ed f r o m m a k i n g [ m y ] a n s w e r i n m y s e a s o n . "

CHAPTER CLXXI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A m e n - h e t e p ( s e e M a r i e t t e , Papyrus d e B o u l a q ,

tom . I I I . Pl . 7) . ]

V i g n e t t e : T h i s C h a p t e r h a s n o V i g n e t t e .

T e x t : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF TYING ON THE GARMENT OF

PURITY ( a b ) .

" O Te r n , 0 S h u , 0 Te f n u t , 0 S e b , 0 Nu t , 0 O s i r i s , 0 I s i s ,

" 0 S e t , 0 N e p h t h y s , ( 2 ) 0 H e r u - k h u t i ( H a r m a c h i s ) , 0 H a t h o r

" i n t h e G r e a t H o u s e , 0 Kh ep e r a , 0 M e n t h u , t h e l o r d o f T h e b e s ,

" O A m e n , t h e l o r d o f t h e t h r o n e s o f t h e t w o l a n d s , 0 G r e a t

" c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s , 0 L i t t l e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s , 0 g o d s

" a n d g o d d e s s e s w h o d w e l l i n ( 3 ) Nu , 0 S e b e k o f t h e t w o

" M e h t , 0 Sebek in all thy manifold names in thi ne every place

" w h e r e i n t h y Ka hath delig ht, 0 gods (4) of the south, 0 gods

" o f t h e n o r t h , 0 y e w h o a r e i n h e a v e n , 0 y e w h o a r e u p o n

"earth, grant ye (5) this garment of purity to the perfect Khu

" o f A m e n - h e t e p . G r a n t y e y o u r s t r e n g t h [ u n t o h i m ] , ( 6 ) a n d

" d e s t r o y y e [ a l l ] t h e ev i l w h i c h b e l o n g e t h u n t o A m e n - h e t e p b y




" m e a n s o f t h i s g a r m e n t o f p u r i t y . H o l d [ y e ] h i m g u i l t l e s s , t h e n ,

" f o r e v e r a n d e v e r , a n d d e s t r o y y e [ a l l ] t h e e v i l w h i c h b e l o n g e t h

" u n t o h i m . "

CHAPTER CLXXII .

[From the Papyrus of Nebseni, (Brit . M u s . No . 9 , 9 00 , s h e e t s 3 2 , 3 3 ) . ]


Tex t : ( I )THE FIRST OF THE CHAPTERS OF THE ARRANGE-

MENTS (OR PRAISINGS) WHICH ARE TO BE PERFORMED IN THE

UNDERWORLD .

" [ I s n u f f ] t h e bet i n c e n s e , I i n h a l e t h e s c e n t o f hesmen ( n a t r o n )

" a n d ( 2 ) i n c e n s eam pure with the purity of"[pure are] the praises which come forth from my mouth, more

"pure than mat( ? )

i t s e l f( 3 )f t h e f i s h t h a t a r e i n t h e

" r i v e r ; to the statue of the Temple of Hesmen ( n a t r o n ) . Pure

" a r e t h e p r a i s e s ( 4 ) o f t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e d e s i g n e r o f t h e

"h ouse of g old, be g ot t e n of t h e scri b e an d de si g n e r Th e n a,

"triumphant, born of the lady of the house Mut-restha, trium-

phant . A n d a s f o r t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f p i e t y , w h o

"is happy with a two-fold happiness, (5) Ptah hath a favour

"un t o h i m, an d He of t h e Sou t h e rn Wall h at h a fa vour un t o

"h i m, an d eve ry g od h at h a favour un t o h i m, an d eve ry g od-

de ss h at h a favour un t o h i m . Thy beauties ar e a stream (6)

" [ b e a r i n g ] t h i n g s w h i c h c a u s e r e s t a n d a r e l i k e u n t o w a t e r w h i c h

" f l o w e t h n e a r e r ( ? ) ; t h y b e a u t i e s a r e l i k e a h a l l o f f e s t i v a l w h e r e i n

"each man may exalt his [own] god ; t h y b e a u t i e s a r e l i k e u n t o

" t h e p i l l a r o f t h e g o d P t a h ( 7 ) a n d l i k e t h e c o u r t y a r d o f i n c e n s e ( ? )

" o f R d . N e b s e n i , t h e s c r i b e a n d d e s i g n e r o f t h e T e m p l e o f P t a h ,

" h a t h b e e n m a d e a p i l l a r o f P t a h , a n d t h e l i b a t i o n v a s e o f t h e

"god of the Sou thern Wall . "

I . ( 8 ) " H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n v o k e d ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n -

"voke d . H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t l a m e n t e d . V e r i l y , t h o u a r t p r a i s e d ;

" v e r i l y , t h o u a r t e x a l t e d ; v e r i l y , t h o u a r t g l o r i o u s ; v e r i l y, t h o u



THE CHAPTER OF PRAISINGS . 3 1 7

" a r t s t r o n g . H a i l , t h o u s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h o u w h o h a s t b e e n r a i s e d

"up, (9) thou art raised up by means of the ceremonies which

"have been performed for thee . Thine enemies have fallen and

"the god Ptah hath thrown do wn headlong (io) thy foes ; t h o u

" h a s t t r i u m p h e d o v e r t h e m a n d t h o u h a s t g a i n e d p o w e r o v e r

"them . They obey thy words and they perform tha t which thou

" o r d e r e s t t h e m [ t o d o ] ; thou art raised up, and thy wo rd is a

" l a w u n t o t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s o f e v e r y g o d , a n d o f e v e r y

"goddess . " ( i i )

I I . " H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n v o k e d ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n -

voked . T h y h e a d , 0 m y l o r d , i s a s t a n d a r d w i t h l o c k s o f r i p -

pling hair like unto the hair of a woman of Asia ; t h y f a c e

"shineth more brightly than the House ( 1 2 ) o f t h e M o o n - g o d ;

" t h e u p p e r p a r t o f t h y h e a d i s a z u r e i n c o l o u r ; t h y l o c k s a r e

"blacker than the doors of the underworld ; t h y h a i r i s d a r k a s

" n i g h t ; thy visage is decorated with an azure blue ; ( i 3 ) t h e

" r a y s o f R d a r e u p o n t h y f a c e ; thy garments are of gold which

" H o r u s h a t h d e f t l y o r n a m e n t e d w i t h a z u r e b l u e ; t h i n e e y e - b r o w s

" a r e t h e t w o s i s t e r g o d d e s s e s w h o a r e a t p e a c e w i t h e a c h o t h e r

"and whom Horus (i4) hath deftly ornamented with azure blue ;

" t h y n o s e s n u f f e t h i n a n d t h y n o s t r i l s e x h a l e a s i t w e r e t h e w i n d s

" f r o m h e a v en . Thine eyes look towards (15) M o u n t B a k h a u o f

" t h e r i s i n g s u n ; thine eyelashes are fixed each day, and the

" u p p e r e y e l i d s t o w h i c h t h e y b e l o n g a r e o f v e r i t a b l e l a p i s - l a z u l i;

" t h e a p p l e s o f t h i n e e y e s a r e [ a s ] o f f e r i n g s o f p e a c e ( ? ) ; a n d t h e

" l o w e r e y e l i d s a r e f i l l e d w i t h ( i 6 ) e y e - p a i n t o f me st ch e m . Thy

"two lips give unto thee law, they r epeat unto [thee] the law

"of Rd, and they ma ke to be at peace the hearts of the gods .

" T h y t e e t h a r e t h e t w o h e a d s ( i 7 ) o f t h e s e r p e n t g o d d e s s M e h e n

"which sport(?) with the Horus gods ; t h y t o n g u e i s m a d e s k i l -

f u l ; t h y s p e e c h i s m o r e s h r i l l t h a n t h a t o f t h e t c h e r u b i r d o f

" t h e f i e l d ; thy jawbo nes are starr y lamps ; ( i 8 ) t h y b r e a s t s ( ? )

" a r e s t a b l i s h e d u p o n t h e i r s e a t s ; an d t h e y journ e y un t o t h e

"funeral mountain of Amentet . "

I I I . " [ H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n v o k e d ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n -

"voke d . ] T h y n e c k i s d e c o r a t e d w i t h g o l d , a n d ( i g ) i t i s g i r t




"a bout ( ? ) wi t h re f i n e d c op p e r . Thy gullet and throat are those

" o f A n p u ; thy bones are the bones o f the two Uatch goddesses ;

" t h y b a c k b o n e i s (20) s t u d d e d w i t h g o l d , a n d i s g i r t a b o u t ( ? )

"wi t h re f i n e d c op p e r ; thy loins(?) are those of Nephthys ; th y . . .

" i s a Ni l e w h i c h i s w i t h o u t w a t e r ; thy buttocks ( 2 1 ) a r e t w o

"crystal eggs ; thy thighs are strong for walking ; t h o u s i t t e s t

"upon thy seat ; and the gods [give] ( 2 2 ) un t o t h e e t h i n e e ye s,

"0 scribe Nebseni, thou lord of piety . "

I V . " [ H a i l , v er i l y t h o u a r t i nv o k ed ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n -

" v o k e d . ] T h y t h r o a t i s t h e t h r o a t o f A n p u ; t h y m e m b e r s ( 2 3 )

"are plated with gold ; thy breasts are two crystal eggs which

" H o r u s h a t h d e f t l y o r n a m e n t e d w i t h az u r e b l u e ; t h y s h o ulde rs

" a r e m a d e l i k e u n t o c r y s t a l ; t h i n e a r m s ( 2 ¢ ) are st a b li s h e d

"through the strength which protecteth them ; t h y h e art i s g lad

" e a c h d a y ; thy breast is of the work of th e two divine Forms ;

"thy person adoreth the starry deities who dwell in the heights

" a n d d e p t h s o f h e a v e n ; ( 2 5 ) t h y b e lly i s, a s i t we re , t h e h e a-

vens ; thy navel is th e Tuat (i . e ., underworld) which is open,

" a n d w h i c h o r d e r e t h t h e l i g h t i n t h e d a r k n e s s , a n d t h e o f f e r i n g s

" o f w h i c h a r e ( 2 6 ) ankham f l o w e r s .' And Nebseni praiseth the

"majesty of Thoth, the beloved one [saying] :- ` M a y h i s b e a u -

" t i e s b e i n m y t o m b , a n d m a y a l l t h e p u r i t y w h i c h h e l o v e t h

"(27) b e t h e r e e v e n a s m y G o d b a t h c o m m a n d e d f o r me. "'

V. "Hail, verily thou art invoked ; hail, verily thou art in-

vo k e d . T h y t w o h a n d s a r e a p o o l o f w a t e r i n t h e s e a s o n o f

" a n a b u n d a n t i n u n d a t i o n , a p o o l o f w a t e r f r i n g e d a b o u t w i t h

" t h e d iv i n e o f f e r i n g o f t h e w a t e r - g o d . Thy (28) thighs are

"encircled with gold ; t h y k n e e s a r e t h e p l a n t s o f t h e w a t e r s

"where are the nests of the birds ; t h y f e e t are st a b li s h e d e ac h

" d a y ; thy legs lead thee into a ( 2 9 ) p at h o f h ap p i n e ss, 0 scri b e

"Nebseni, thou favoured one . Thy hands and arms are pillars ( ? )

"[set] upon their pedestals ; thy fingers are strips(?) of gold, the

" n a i l s o f w h i c h a r e l i k e s h a r p f l a k e s (3o) o f f li n t b y re ason o f

" t h e w o r k s w h i c h t h e y p e r f o r m f o r t h e e . "

V I . " H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n v o k e d ; hail, verily thou art in-

vo k e d . T h o u c l o t h e s t t h y s e l f w i t h t h e g a r m e n t o f p u r i t y ( a b u ) ,



THE CHAPTER OF PRAISINGS. 319

" a n d b e h o l d , t h o u d r a w e s t o f f f r o m t h y s e l f t h e u m e t g a r m e n t

"when ( 3 1 ) thou goest up to stretch thyself upon the couch(?).

" H a u n c h e s o f m e a t a r e c u t f o r t h y k a , 0 s c r i b e N e b s e n i , a n d

" a b r e a s t ( o r h e a r t ) o f t h e a n i m a l i s o f f e r e d u n t o t h y s a h u .

" T h o u r e c e i v e s t a g a r m e n t o f t h e f i n e s t l i n e n ( 3 2) f r o m t h e

"hands o f the ministrant(?) of Ra ; thou eatest the cakes upon

"the cloth which th e goddess Tait herself b ath prepared ; t h o u

"eatest the haunch o f th e animal (33) ; thou takes t boldly th e

" j o i n t w h i c h R d h a t h e n d o w e d w i t h p o w e r i n h i s h o l y p l a c e ;

" t h o u w a s h e s t t h y f e e t i n t h e s i l v e r b a s i n s w h i c h t h e g o d S e k e r ,

"t h e a rt i f i ce r, h at h w r oug h t ; a n d b e h o l d , (3 4) t h o u e a t e s t o f

" t h e c a k e w h i c h a p p e a r e t h o n t h e a l t a r a n d w h i c h t h e t w o

"divine f athers have sanctified . T h o u e a t e s t o f t h e b a k e d b r e a d

" a n d o f t h e h o t m e a t s o f t h e s t o r e h o u s e ; t h ou ( 3 5) sme lle s t

"the f lowers ; t h y h e art f e are t h n ot [t o a dv an ce ] t o t h e a lt ar o f

" t h e o f f e r i n g s m a d e t o t h e e ; a n d t h o s e w h o f e e d t h e e w i t h

" f o o d m a k e f o r t h e e t h e l o a v e s a n d b r e a d - c ak e s o f t h e S o u l s

" o f A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) , ( 3 6 ) a n d t h e y t h e m s e l v e s b e a r t h e m

" u n t o t h e e . T h i n e o f f e r in g s ( ? ) a r e o r d e r e d f o r th e e , a n d t h y

" o r d i n a n c e s a r e i n t h e g a t e s o f t h e G r e a t H o u s e . T h o u r i s e s t

"up like Sah (Orion) ; thou arrivest like the star B au ; (37) an d

" t h e g o d d e s s N u t [ s t r e t c h e t h o u t ] h e r h a n d s u n t o t h e e . S a h

" (O r i o n) , t h e s o n o f R d , a n d Nu t , w h o g a v e b i r t h t o t h e g o d s

" - t h e t w o m i g h t y g o d s i n h e a v e n - s p e a k e a c h t o t h e o t h e r ,

"sayi n g , ( 38) `T ake t h e s cri b e an d d raug h t sman N e b se n i i n t o t h i n e

4 4

' arms, and I will take him into mine on this day, and let us

" ` m a k e h a p p i n e s s f o r h i m w h e n p r a i s e s a r e s u n g t o h i m a n d

" ` w h e n m e n t i o n i s m a d e o f h i m , a n d w h e n [ h i s n a m e ] i s i n

" ' t h e m o u t h o f a l l y o u n g m e n a n d m a i d e n s . ' (39) T h o u a r t

" r a i s e d u p , [ 0 Ne b s e n i , ] a n d t h o u h e a r e s t t h e s o n g s o f c o m -

m e m o r a t i o n t h r o u g h t h e d o o r o f t h y h o u s e . "

VII . " H ai l, v e ri ly t h o u a rt i n v oke d ; hail, verily th ou art in-

v o k e d . A n u b i s h a t h b e s t o w e d u p o n t h e e t h y w i n d in g - s h e e t ,

" h e b a t h ( 4 0 ) w r o u g h t [ f o r t h e e ] a c c o r d i n g t o h i s w i l l , h e

" h a t h p r o v i d e d t h e e w i t h t h e o r n a m e n t s o f h i s b a n d a g e s , f o r

"he is the overseer of the great god . T h o u s e t t e s t o u t o n t h y



320 T H E C H A P T E R S O F C O M I NG F O R T H B Y DA Y .

" w a y a n d t h o u h a s t b e e n w a s h e d i n t h e L a k e o f P e r f e c t i o n ;

" t h o u m a k e s t o f f e r i n g s i n t h e c e l e s t i a l m a n s i o n s , a n d t h o u p r o -

" p i t i a t e s t ( 4 i ) t h e l o r d s o f A n n u ( H e l i o p o l i s ) . T h e w a ter o f

" R a i s p r e s e n t e d u n t o t h e e i n v e s s e l s , a n d m i l k i n l a r g e v a s e s .

"Thou art raised up and thou makest off erings upon the altar,

"thou washest thy f eet upon the stone of42) on the"banks of the Lake of God . Thou comest forth and thou seest

"Rd upon the pillars which are the arms of heaven, upon the

" h e a d o f A n - m u t - f a n d u p o n t h e a r m s o f A p - u a t ; he openeth

`but fo r thee a way (43) and thou seest the horizon wherein

" i s t h e p l a c e o f p u r i t y w h i c h t h o u l o v e s t . "

V I I I . "Hail, verily thou art invoked ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t

" i n v o k e d . O f f e r i n g s a r e a l l o t t e d u n t o t h e e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f R d ,

"and according to that which Ho rus and Thoth ordered for thee

"thou hast had a b eginning and an end . ( 4 4 ) T h e y i n v o k e t h e e ,

"0 scribe Nebseni, and see thy splendour there, causing thee

"to come forth [a s] a god (45) and to advance to the Souls of

" A n n u . T h o u g o e s t f o r t h u p o n t h e g r e a t r o a d s i n t h y S a h , w h o

" h a s t r e c e i v e d t h e o f f e r i n g s o f t h y f a t h e r u p o n t h y t w o h a n d s ;

"thou art furnished with linen garments each day, at the be-

"ginning of the journey of the god through the gates of the

" ( 4 6 ) G r e a t H o u s e . "

IX . " H a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n v o k e d ; h a i l , v e r i l y t h o u a r t i n -

"yo ked . The scribe Nebseni hath air for his nose and breath

" f o r h i s n o s t r i l s , a n d o n e t h o u s a n d g e e s e , a n d f i f t y b a s k e t s o f

" p u r e a n d f a i r o f f e r i n g s . Hail, Nebseni, thine enemies have

"fallen down headlo ng and they shall nevermore exist . "

CHAPTER CLXXIII .

[From th e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . M u s . No . 9,900, sheets 9 and i o ) . ]

Vignette : " O s i r i s , t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e l o r d of A b t u , t h e l o r d o f t r a n s -

f o r ma t i o n s , t h e p ri n c e o f e t e r n i t y " , s e a t e d i n a s h r i n e ; t h e d e c e a s e d

s t a n d s , w i t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n , b e f o re t h e g o d , a n d t h e g r ou n d



THE SPEECHES OF HORUS TO OSIRIS . 321

b e t w e e n t h e m i s c o v e r e d w i t h t h e b o d i e s o f b i r d s a n d b e a s t s w h i c h h a v e

b e e n p r e p a r e d f o r s a c r i f i c e .

T e x t : THE SPEECHES OF HORUS TO HIS DIVINE FATHER

OSIRIS WHEN HE ENTERETH IN TO SEE HIM, AND WHEN HE

COMETH FORTH FROM NEAR THE GREAT ABT CHAMBER TO LOOK

UPON RA AS UN-NEFER, THE LORD OF TA-TCHESERT ; THEN

DOTH EACH EMBRACE THE OTHER AT THE PLEASURE OF HIS

KHU, THERE IN THE UNDERWORLD . ( 1 ) A H y m n o f P r a i s e t o

" O s i r i s , g o v er n o r o f t h o s e i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d , t h e g r e a t g o d , t h e

"lord of Ab yd os, the king of eternity, the prince of everlasting-

"ness, the holy god in Re-stau, ( 2 ) b y t h e s c r i b e Ne b s e n i , w h o

" s a i t h :- ( 3 )

" I a s c r i b e p r a i s e u n t o t h e e , 0 l o r d o f t h e g o d s , t h o u G o d

" O n e , w h o l iv e s t ( 4) u p o n r i g h t a n d t r u t h , b e h o l d , I t h y s o n

" H o r n s c o m e u n t o t h e e ; (5 ) 1 h a v e a v e n g e d t h e e , a n d I h a v e

" b r o u g h t t o t h e e m a a t - e v e n t o t h e p l a c e w h e r e i s t h e c o m -

p a n y o f t h y g o d s . ( 6) G r a n t t h o u t h a t I m a y h a v e m y b e i n g

" a m o n g t h o s e w h o a r e i n t h y f o l l o w i n g , f o r I h a v e o v e r t h r o w n

" a l l t h y (7) f o e s , a n d I h a v e s t a b l i s h e d a l l t h o s e w h o a r e o f

" t h y s u b s t a n c e u p o n t h e e a r t h f o r ev e r a n d ev e r . "

[Here follow forty declarations each o f which is preceded by

t h e w o r d s " H a i l , O s i r i s , I a m t h y s o n " . ]

( 8) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e a v e n g e d [ t h e e , 0 m y f a t h e r

" O s i r i s ] .

( g ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e o v e r t h r o w n f o r t h e e t h i n e e n e -

m i e s .

( 1 o ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e d o n e a w a y w i t h e v e r y e v i l

" t h i n g w h i c h b e l o n g e t h u n t o t h e e .

( 1 1 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e s l a i n f o r t h e e h i m t h a t a t -

"tacked thee .

( 1 2 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e s e n t f o r t h m i n e a r m a g a i n s t

" t h o s e w h o w e r e h o s t i l e t o w a r d s t h e e .

(13) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e t h e f i e n d s

"o f Set with their fetters upon them .

(14) "I have come, and I have brough t unto thee the lan d o f

"the South, a nd I have united unto thee the land o f the North .

21




(15) "I have come, and I have stablished for t hee divine of-

f e r i n g s f r o m t h e S o u t h a n d f r o m t h e N o r t h .

( r 6 ) "I have come, and I have ploughed ' f or thee the f ields .

( 1 7 ) "I have come, and I have filled for thee the canals with

"water .

( i 8) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e h o e d u p f o r t h e e t h e g r o u n d .

(ig) "I have come, and I have built cisterns for thee .

( 2 0 ) " 1 h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e g o n e r o u n d a b o u t t h e s o i l

" f o r t h e e .

(21) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e m a d e s a c r i f i c i a l v i c t i m s o f

" t h o s e w h o w e r e h o s t i l e t o t h e e .

(22) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e m a d e s a c r i f i c e s u n t o t h e e o f

"thine animals and victims for slaughter .

(23) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e s u pp l i e d [ t h e e ] w i t h f o o d i n

" a b u n d a n c e [ o f t h e c r e a t u r e s w h i c h a r e u p o n e a r t h ] .

( 2 4 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e(25) "I have come, and I have slain for thee(26) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e s m i t t e n f o r t h e e e m a s c u l a t e d

" b e a s t s .

(27) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e n e t t e d f o r t h e e b i r d s a n d

" f e a t h e r e d f o w l .

( 2 8 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e t a k e n c a p t ive f o r t h e e t h i n e

"enemies in their chains .

(29) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e f e t t e r e d f o r t h e e t h i n e e n e -

mies with fetters .

(3o) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t f o r t h e e c o o l w a t e r

" f r o m A b u (El ep h a n t i n e) , w h e r e w i t h t h o u m a y e s t r e f r e s h t h i n e

"heart .

( 3 i ) " I h a ve c o m e , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e h e r b s o f

"every kind .

( 3 2 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e s t a b l i s h e d f o r t h e e t h o s e w h o

" a r e o f t h y s u b s t a n c e d a i l y .

(33) " 1 h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e m a d e t h y c a k e s i n t h e c i t y

"o f Pe o f the red barley .

i . T h e t e x t a c t u a l l y h a s , " I h a v e o v e r t h r o w n . "



(34) "I have come, and I have made thy ale in the city of

"Tepu of the white grain .

(35) "1 have come, and I have ploughed for thee w heat and

"barley in Sekhet-Aaru .

( 3 6 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e r e a p e d i t f o r t h e e t h e r e i n .

( 3 7 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e g l o r i f i e d t h e e .

(38) "I have come, and I have given [to thee] thy so uls .

(39) "I have come, and I have given [to thee] thy pow er .

(40) "I have come, and I have given [to thee th y](4i) "I have come, and I have given [to th ee thy]( 4 2 ) " I h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e g i v e n [ t o t h e e ] t h y t e r r o r .

(43) "I have come, and I have given [to thee] th y victory .

(4 4) "I h ave come , an d I h ave g iven t o t h e e t h i n e e ye s,

"[which are] the plumes on thy head .

( 4 5 ) " 1

THE SPEECHES OF HOR US TO OSIRIS. 3 2 3

h a v e c o m e , a n d I h a v e g i v e n [ t o t h e e ] I s i s a n d N e p h -

" t h y s t h a t t h e y m a y s t a b l i s h t h e e .

(46) "I have come, and I have filled for th ee the Eye of

" H o r u s [ w i t h ] o i l ( o r u n g u e n t ) .

(47) "I have come, and I have brought unto thee the Eye of

"Horus, whereby thy face shall be destroyed . "

CHAPTER CLXXIV .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f M u t - h e t e p ( B r i t . Mus. No . 1 0 , 0 1 0 , s h e e t 3 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g w i t h h e r b a c k t o w a r d s a d o o r f r o m

w h i c h s h e h a s j u s t c o m e f o r t h .

Text : ( i ) T H E C H A P T ER O F C A U S I N G T H E KHU TO C O M E

FORTH FROM THE GREAT DOOR ." Mut-hetepeth, triumphant,

s a i t h :-

"Th y son h at h of fe re d up for t h e e [a sacri f i ce ], an d t h e

" d i v i n e , m i g h t y o n e s t r e m b l e (2 ) w h e n t h e y l o o k u p o n t h e

"slaughtering knife which is in thy hand [when] thou comest

i . F o r t h e o r i g i n a l f o r m o f t h i s C h a p t e r a s f o u n d i n t h e P y r a m i d o f U n a s ,

s e e M a s p e r o , Recueil de Travaux, t o r n . IV . P . 4 3 . 1 1 . 3 7 9-399 .

21*




" f o r t h f r o m t h e T u a t . H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 g o d S a a , t h e g o d

" S e b b a t h c r e a t e d t h e e , a n d t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s h a v e

" g iv e n b i r t h u n t o t h e e . ( 3 ) H o r u s r e s t e t h u p o n h i s E y e , a n d

" t h e g o d Te m r e s t e t h u p o n h i s y e a r s , a n d t h e g o d s o f t h e e a s t

" a n d o f t h e w e s t r e s t u p o n t h e m i g h t y o n e w h o b a t h c o m e

"into existence within [thy] hand . ( 4 ) A g o d b a t h b e e n b o r n

" [ n o w t h a t ] I h a v e b e e n b o r n ; I see and I have sight ; I h av e

"my existence ; I a m l i f t e d u p u p o n m y p l a c e ; [I have] done

" w h a t b a t h b e e n d e c r e e d ; (5) [I] hate sl umber ; I h a v e e n d o w e d

" w i t h m i g h t t h e f e e b l e o n e . H e t h a t d w e l l e t h i n t h e c i t y o f

" N e t e t h a t h m a d e c a k e s f o r m e i n t h e c i t y o f P e , a n d I h a v e

" r e c e i v e d [ m y f o r m ] i n A n n u , f o r i t i s H o r n s w h o h a t h c o m -

m a n d e d ( 6) w h a t s h a l l b e d o n e f o r h i s f a t h e r t h e l o r d o f

" w i n d s ( ? ) , a n d th e g o d S e t q ua k e t h ; h e b a th r a i se d me u p,

" a n d T e m h a t h r a i s e d m e u p . 0 , I a m t h e m i g h t y o n e , ( 7 )

" a n d I h a v e c o m e f o r t h f r o m b e t w e e n t h e t h i g h s o f t h e c o m -

p a n y o f t h e go d s . I h a v e b e e n c o n c e i v e d b y S e k h e t ( 8 ) a n d

" b y [ S h e s ] - Kh e n t e t , a n d I h a v e b e e n b r o u g h t f o r t h a t t h e

" d o o r o f t h e s t a r S e p t ( S o t h i s ) , t h e f o r e m o s t( ? ) o n e w h o w i t h

" l o n g s t r i d e s ( g) b r i n g e t h a l o n g t h e c e l e s t i a l p a t h o f R d d a y

" b y d a y . I h a v e c o m e t o m y h a b i t a t i o n ( i o ) a s p r i n c e o f t h e

" N o r t h a n d S o u t h , a n d I r i s e ( o r I a m c r o w n e d ) i n t h e g a t e .

" H a i l , t h o u o f t h e 0 i ) d o u b l e p l u m e s w h o a r t c a l l e d b y t h e

" n a m e o f M i - s h e p e s , I a m t h e l o t u s (12) w h i c h s h i n e t h i n t h e

" L a n d o f P u r i t y a n d w h i c h b a t h r e c e i v e d m e a n d w h i c h m a k e t h

"my a bode at the nostrils o f the G reat Form, ( i 3 ) I h a v e c o m e

"into the Lake o f Flame, and I have placed right and truth in

"t h e P lace o f Si n . (14) I am t h e w at c h e r o f t h e s es h er u g ar me nt s,

"and the watcher of the Uraeus on the night of the flood of the

" G r e a t o n e .(15)

I ri se li ke N e f e r-T e m, w h o i s t h e l ot us a t t h e

" n o s t r i l s o f R d , w h e n h e c o m e t h f o r t h f r o m t h e h o r i zo n e a c h

" d a y ; and the gods are purif ied at the (i6) sight of the la dy

" o f t h e h o u s e M u t - h e t e p e t h , w h o i s t r i u m p h a n t b e f o r e t h e Kas

"and who gathereth together hearts f or Saau-ur, whom (r7) the

" g o d , S a a - A m e n t i - R a , h o l d e t h ( ? ) . I h a v e c o m e u p o n m y s e a t

" be f o re t h e Ka s , and I have gathered together hearts for Saa-



THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECOND TIME . 325

" u r t , a n d I h a v e m y b e i n g ( 1 8 ) a s S a a w h o m R a t h e g o d o f

" A m e n t i , h o l d e t h ( ? ) ; a n d t h e t c h e t c h i m p l e m e n t i s w i t h m e . I

"recite the mighty [words] wh ich are in the heart on the festival

"of the A n s i g a r m e n t , a n d I a m S a - A m e n t i ( 1 g)-Rd, the strong(?)

" o f h e a r t w i t h i n t h e h i d d e n c h a m b e r o f N u . "

CHAPTER CLXXV.

[From t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,470, s h e e t 2 9 ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : The deceased and his wife standing, with hands raised in

adoration, bef ore the god Thoth, who is seated upon a pylon-shaped

t h r o n e , a n d h a s t h e e m b l e m o f " l i f e " u p o n h i s k n e e s .

T e x t : ( 1) THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECOND TIME .

Osiris, the scribe Ani, triumphant, saith :- ( 2 )

" H a i l , T h o t h !Wh a t i s i t t h a t h a t h h a p p e n e d u n t o t h e d i -

v i n e c h i l d r e n o f N u t ? ( 3 ) T h e y h a v e d o n e b a t t l e , t h e y h a v e

"upheld strife, the y have done evil, (4) they have created the

" f i e n ds, t h e y h av e made slau g h t e r, t h e y h av e cause d ( 5) t rou b le ;

"in truth, in all their doings the mighty h ave worked against

" t h e w e a k . (6) G r a n t , 0 m i g h t o f T h o t h , t h a t t h a t w h i c h t h e

" g o d T e r n b a t h d e c r e e d [ m a y b e d o n e ] ! A n d t h o u r e g a r d e s t

"not evil, nor art thou (7) provoked to anger whe n they bring

" t h e i r y e a r s t o c o n f u s i o n a n d t h r o n g i n a n d p u s h t o d i s t u r b

" t h e i r m o n t h s ; f o r i n a l l t h a t t h e y h a v e d o n e (8) u n t o t h e e

" t h e y h a v e w o r k e d i n i q u i t y i n s e c r e t . I a m t h y w r i t i n g p a l e t te ,

" 0 Th o t h , a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e t h i n e i n k - j a r . I a m

"not (g) of those who work iniquity in their secret places ; le t

" n o t e v i l h a p p e n u n t o m e . "

S a i t h O s i r i s , t h e s c r i b e A n i :- (t o ) " H a i l , T m u ! What manner

" [ o f l a n d ] i s t h i s i n t o w h i c h I h a v e c o m e ? I t h a t h n o t w a t e r ,

"it hath not air ; it is depth u nfathomab le, (it) it is black as

" t h e b l a c k e s t n i g h t , a n d m e n w a n d e r h e l p l e s s l y t h e r e i n . In it

" a m a n m a y n o t l iv e i n q u i e t n e s s o f h e a r t ; n o r m a y t h e l o n g -

ings of love be satisfied ( 1 2 ) therein. B u t l e t t h e s t a t e o f




" t h e shining ones be given unto me instead of wa ter and air

" a n d t h e s a t i s f y i n g o f t h e l o n g i n g s o f l o v e , a n d l e t q u i e t n e s s

" o f h e a r t b e g i v e n u n t o m e i n s t e a d o f c a k e s ( r 3 ) a n d a l e . The

"god Tem hath decreed that I shall see thy face, and that I

" s h a l l n o t s u f f e r f r o m t h e t h i n g s w h i c h p a i n t h e e . May every

" g o d t r a n s m i t u n t o t h e e ( r 4 ) h i s t h r o n e f o r m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s .

"Th y t h ron e bat h de sce n de d un t o t h y son Horus, an d t h e g od

" T em b a t h d e c r e e d t h a t h i s c o u r s e s h a l l b e a m o n g t h e h o l y

" p r i n c e s . ( 1 5 ) I n t r u t h , h e s h a l l r u l e o v e r t h y t h r o n e , a n d h e

"sh all be h e i r of t h e t h ron e of t h e Dwelle r i n t h e Lake of

"Double Fire . I n t r u t h , i t b a t h b e e n d e c r e e d t h a t i n m e h e s h a l l

"see his likeness, and that my f ace (r6) shall look upon the

"face of the lord Tem . How lon g t h e n h a ve I t o live ? I t i s

" d e c r e e d t h a t t h o u s h a l t l i v e f o r m i l l i o n s o f m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s ,

" a l i f e o f m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s .( 1 7 )

May it be granted unto me

"that I pass on unto the holy princes, for indeed, I am doing

" a w a y w i t h a l l t h e w r o n g w h i c h I d i d , f r o m t h e t i m e w h e n

" t h i s e a r t h c a m e i n t o b e i n g f r o m N u ( r 8 ) , w h e n i t s p r a n g

"from the watery ab yss even as it was in the days of old . I

"am Fate (or Time) and Osiris, and I have made my transf or-

m a t i o n s i n t o t h e l i k e n e s s o f d i v e r s ( 1 g ) s e r p e n t s . M a n k n o w e t h

"not, and the gods cannot behold, the two-fold beauty which I

" h a v e m a d e f o r O s i r i s , w h o i s g r e a t e r t h a n a l l t h e g o d s . I h a v e

"given unto him (20) the region of the dea d. A n d v e r i l y , h i s

"son Horus i s se at e d up on t h e t h ron e of t h e Dwelle r i n t h e

" L a k e o f D o u b l e F i r e , a s h i s h e i r . I have made him to ha ve

" h i s t h r o n e ( 2 1 ) i n t h e b o a t o f m i l l i o n s o f y e a r s . H o r u s i s s t a -

" b l i s h e d u p o n h i s t h r o n e , [ a m o n g h i s ] f r i e n d s a n d a l l t h a t b e -

"lon g e d un t o h i m . V e r i l y , t h e s o u l o f S e t , w h i c h ( 2 2 ) i s g r e a t e r

"than all the gods, bath departed . May it be granted that I

" b i n d h i s s o u l i n t h e d i v i n e b o a t ( 2 3 ) a t m y ( ? ) w i l l , a n d t h a t

" [ h e ] may h ave fe ar of t h e divine body . 0 my father Osiris,

"thou halt done for me that which thy father Rd did for thee .

"May I abide upon the earth lastingly ; (24) may I keep pos -

session of my throne ; m a y m y h ei r be s tr o ng ; m a y m y t o m b

"an d my fri e n ds wh o are up on e art h flou ri sh ; (25) m a y m y



THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECOND TIME . 327

" e n e m i e s b e g iv e n o v e r t o d e s t r u c t i o n a n d t o t h e s h a c k l e s o f

" t h e g o d d e s s S e r q . I a m t h y s o n , a n d R a i s m y f a t h e r . ( 2 6 )

" F o r m e l i k e w i s e t h o u h a s t m a d e l i f e , s t r e n g t h , a n d h e a l t h .

" H o r u s i s e s t a b l i s h e d u p o n h i s t h r o n e . G r a n t t h o u t h a t t h e

" d a y s o f m y l i f e m a y c o m e u n t o w o r s h i p a n d h o n o u r . "

T h e r e m a i n s o f a m u c h l o n g e r v e r s i o n o f t h i s C h a p t e r h a v e

been found in the papyrus o f "a scribe o f the o f ferings o f the

King o f the North and South ", called Rd (see Lepsius, o p . c i t . ,

Bd . I . B l l . 198, igq), and f rom these w e may see tha t the hap-

p i n e s s o f t h e d e c e a s e d i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d w a s m o r e f u l l y d e -

scribed therein . No c o n n e c t e d s e n s e c a n , h o w ev e r , b e g iv e n t o

t h i s v e r s i o n , f o r t h e b e g i n n i n g s a n d e n d s o f t h e l i n e s o f t h e

t e x t o f t h e C h a p t e r a r e w a n t i n g a l m o s t t h r o u g h o u t . F r o m t h e

R u b r i c w e l e a r n t h a t t h e C h a p t e r w a s " t o b e r e c i t e d o v e r a

figure of Horus m ade of lapis-lazuli which was to be laid upon

t h e n e c k o f t h e d e c e a s e d " , a n d t h a t t h e p e r f o r m a n c e o f t h i s

c e r e m o n y w a s b e l i ev e d t o b e m o s t e f f i c a c i o u s i n s e c u r i n g i m -

p ort an t b e n e f i t s f o r t h e de ad .

CHAPTER CL.XXVI .

[From the P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 1 0 i 4 7 7 , s h e e t 2 2 ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t V i g n e t t e .

T e x t : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT DYING A SECOND TIME .

The Osiris Nu, the overseer o f the palace, the cha ncellor-in-

chief, triumphant, saith :-

" T h at w h i c h I a b o m i n at e i s t h e l a n d o f t h e Ea s t . L e t m e n o t

" e n t e r i n t o t h e t o r t u r e c h a m b e r . L e t t h e r e n o t h e d o n e u n t o

" m e a n y o f t h o s e ( 2 ) t h i n g s w h i c h t h e g o d s h o l d i n a b o m i n a -

tion, for behold, [I] have passed as a pure being through the

" M es qe t c h am be r . A n d l e t t h e g o d Ne b - e r - t c h e r g r a n t u n t o m e

"his glorious power on the day of burial (3) in the presence of

" t h e L o r d o f T h i n g s . "




R u b r i c : IF [THE DECEASED] KNOW THIS CHAPTER HE SHALL BECOME

LIKE A PERFECT KHU IN THE UNDERWORLD .

CHAPTER CLXXVII .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N e b s e n i ( B r i t . Mus . No . 9 , 9 0 0 , s h e e t I 8 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g u p r i g h t ; p u r e w a t e r i s b e i n g p o u re d

o u t b e f o re h i m , a n d o f f e r i n g s o f l i n e n g a r m e n t s a r e b e i n g m a d e u n t o h i m .

Tex t : ( I) THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THE KHU AND OF

MAKING THE SOUL TO LIVE IN THE UNDERWORLD . T h e s c r i b e

Nebseni, the draughtsm an in the Temple of Ptah, the l ord of

p i e t y w h o i s i n t h e f a v o u r o f h i s g o d , s a i t h :- (2)

" [ H a i l , ] N u t , ' N u t w h o c a s t e s t t h y f a t h e r t o e a r t h a n d s e t -

" t e s t ( ? ) Horus be h i n d h i m, h i s wi n g s g row li ke [t h ose of] a

"h awk, an d h i s p lume s li ke (3) [th ose of] h i m wh o se e t h ( ? ) .

"His soul hath been brought unto him, he is filled with words

" [ o f m a g i c a l p o w e r ] , a n d h i s p l a c e i s d e c r e e d f o r h i m o p p o s i t e

" t o ( 4 ) t h e s t a r s o f t h e h e a v e n , f o r b e h o l d t h o u a r t a s t a r o f

"Nut by thyself . . . T h o u s e e s t t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f

"piety, [in] happiness, (5) and giving his commands unto the

"Khus ; and behold, the divine Power ( o r P r i n c e ) i s n o t [ a m o n g

"them], and thy . . . is not among them, unless thou art among

"them . T h o u s e e s t t h e c h i e f N e b s e n i , t h e s c r i b e ( 6 ) a n d d r a u g h t s -

"man of t h e Te mple of P t ah , i n t h e form of a soul wh o bat h

"the horns of the cows Smamet and An-unser the Black . [ H a i l , ]

"children of Ser at-Beget, who have sucked milk fro m (7) the

" f o u r Uaipu cows(?), Horus of the blue eyes cometh unto you ;

"p rot e ct ye Horus of t h e re d e ye s wh o i s si ck . Let not his

" s o u l b e t u r n e d b a c k , ( 8 ) l e t h i s o f f e r i n g s b e b r o u g h t [ u n t o h i m ] ,

" l e t t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e f o r h i s b e n e f i t ( ? ) b e c a r r i e d t o h i m;

" a n d l e t t h e m c o m e u p o n t h e s h o u l d e r o v e r t h e We s t . This

"on ly on e advan ce t h t o t h e e . T h e G o d s p e a k e t h t h y w o r d s

I . F o r a n o r i g i n a l f o r m of t h i s t e x t a s f o u n d i n t h e P y r a m i d o f Un i t s , s e e

M a s p e r o , R ec u eil d e T r ava ux, t o m . IV . 1 . 3 6 1 f f .



THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THE_ DEAD BODY 329

"9 ) ; the gods make thy name to b e triumphant before

"the gods, and the company of the gods distinguish thee with

" t h e i r h a n d s . The God of the Field of the gods speaketh, and

"thou gainest the power over the door of Kas i n t h e i r h o r i z o n ;

" t h e y u n b o l t ( i o ) f o r t h e e t h e i r d o o r s , f o r t h e y h a v e a f a v o u r

" u n t o t h e e , a n d t h o u g a i n e s t p o w e r o v e r t h e i r s h r i n e s . Th e g od

"[Seb and his company of gods enter in], and they come forth

"lifting on high (ii) their faces, and they look upon thee in

"t h e p re se n ce of t h e g re at g od Amsuhy head . . . .

" t h y h e a d . I [make to] stand up thy head [for thee], and thou

"bast power thereover . His head diminisheth behind thee, but

" t h y h e a d s h a l l n o t d i m i n i s h , a n d t h o u s h a l t n o t b e d e s t r o y e d ,

"an d t h ou sh alt do wh at t h ou h ast t o do be fore me n an d be-

" f o r e t h e g o d s . "

CHAPTER CLXXVIII .

[ F r o m the Pa py r u s o f Neb s eni ( B r it. Mu s. No . 9 , 9 0 0, s h e e t 1 9 ) . ]


Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THE DEAD BODY,

[OF GIVING SIGHT TO] THE EYES, OF GAINING POWER OVER

THE EARS, OF STABLISHING ( 2 ) THE HEAD, AND OF PROVIDING

THE FACE WITH THE POWER OF PROTECTION . T h e O s i r i s , t h e

s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e d r a u g h t s m a n o f t h e T e m p l e o f P t a h , t h e l o r d

o f p i e t y , s a i t h :-

"The Eye of Horu s is presented unto thee, and it feedeth

" t h e e w i t h t h e f o o d o f o f f e r i n g s . H a i l , ' y e w h o m a k e t h e ( 3 )

" l a b o u r e r s t o r e j o i c e a n d w h o r a i s e u p t h e h e a r t a n d p u r i f y t h e

"body, wh o h ave e at e n t h e Eye of Ho rus, t h ou O live t re e i n

" A n n u , ( 4 ) d e s t r o y y e [ w h a t e v i l t h e r e i s ] i n t h e b o d y o f [ O s i r i s ]

"Nebseni, the scrib e and draughtsma n in the Temple of Ptah .

i . For a very ancient form of the text of this Chapter as found in the

Pyramid of Unas, see Maspero, Recueil de Travaux, t o m e I I I . Unas . 1 . 1 6 6 f f .



3 3 o THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY .

" 0 O s i r i s , l e t h i m n o t s u f f e r t h i r s t b e f o r e h i s g o d , l e t h i m

"su f fer neither hunger nor thirst, and let the god (5) Khas ( ? )

" c a r r y t h e m a w a y , a n d l e t h i m d o a w a y w i t h h i s h u n g e r , 0

"thou that fillest, 0 thou that fillest hearts . 0 chiefs who dis-

pense cakes [and ale] , 0 ye who have charge o f (6) the water

" f l o o d , c o m m a n d y e t h a t c a k e s a n d a l e b e g i v e n u n t o t h e

" O s i r i s Ne b s e n i e v e n a s R d h i m s e l f c o m m a n d e d t h i s t h i n g .

" A n d , m o r e o v e r , R d h a t h c o m m a n d e d t h o s e w h o a r e o v e r t h e

" a b u n d a n c e o f t h e ( 7) y e a r t o t a k e h a n d f u l s o f w h e a t a n d

" barley and to give them to him for his cakes, f or behold, he

"is a great bull ; [these] sha ll ye give to the Osiris Nebseni .

" 0 g u a r d i a n o f t h e f iv e c a k e s i n (8) t h e d iv i n e h o u s e , t h r e e

"cakes are in heaven before Rd, and two are upon earth before

" t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s ; m a y h e b u r s t t h r o u g h N u , m a y h e

" s e e , m a y h e s e e ! 0 R d , b e g r a c i o u s u n t o t h e s c r i b e ( g) Ne b -

"seni this day, be gracious . T h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i i s a s a l o r d

" o f p i e t y a c c o r d i n g t o - t h e c o m m a n d o f S h u a n d I s i s , a n d h e

" bath been united (io) unto the piety o f happiness before his

" g o d . M a y [ t h e g o d s ] g iv e c a k e s a n d a l e u n t o t h e s c r i b e Ne b -

" s e n i , a n d m a y t h e y p r e p a r e f o r h i m a l l g o o d a n d p u r e t h i n g s

"(i i) this happy day, things for journeying and travelling, things

" o f t h e E y e o f H o r u s , t h i n g s o f t h e b o a t ( ? ) , a n d a l l t h i n g s

" w h i c h s h ou l d e n te r i n t o th e s i g h t o f t h e g od . T h o u s h a l t

" h a v e p o w e r o v e r t h e w a t e r , a n d t h o u s h a l t a d v a n c e t o ( 1 2 )

"the table of offerings having cakes(?) and four measures(?) of

" w a t e r . T h e Ey e o f H o r u s b a t h o r d e r e d t h e s e t h i n g s f o r t h e

" s c r i b e Ne b s e n i , a n d t h e g o d S h u h a t h o r d e r e d t h e [ m e a n s o f ]

"subsistence for him, (r3) [both] cakes and ale . Wa t c h , 0 j u d g e s

"o f the form(?) of Thoth, watch him that lieth in death . W a k e

"up , 0 t h ou t h at d we lle s t i n [Ke n se t ]! G ran t t h o u o f f e ri n g s (14)

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f T h o t h , t h e m i g h t y g o d , w h o c o m e t h f o r t h

" f r o m H a p i ( i . e . , t h e Ni l e) , a n d o f A p - u a t w h o c o m e t h f o r t h

"from Asert, for the mouth of Nebseni, the scrib e and designer

"o f t h e ( c5) T e mp le o f P t a h , i s p ure . T h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s

" o f f e r i n c e n s e t o t h e s c r i b e Ne b s e n i , a n d h i s m o u t h i s p u r e ,

" a n d h i s t o n g u e w h i c h i s t h e r e i n i s r i g h t a n d t r u e . T h a t



THE CHAPTER OF RAISING UP THE DEAD BODY . 331

" w h i c h (16) the s c r i b e Ne b s e n i a b o m i n a t e t h i s f i l t h , a n d h e

" b a t h f r e e d h i m s e l f t h e r e f r o m ev e n a s S e t f r e e d h i m s e l f [ f r o m

"it] in the city of Rehiu, and he b ath set out [with] Thoth for

" h e a v e n (17) . 0 y e w h o h a v e d e l i v e r e d t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i

"along with yourselves, let him eat of that whereof ye eat, let

" h i m d r i n k o f t h a t w h e r e o f y e d r i n k , l e t h i m s i t d o w n u p o n

" t h a t w h e r e o n (18) y e s i t , l e t h i m b e s t r o n g i n t h e s t r e n g t h

"wherein ye are strong, let him sail about where ye sail about ;

" t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i b a t h d r a w n t h e n e t t o g e t h e r i n t h e ( i g )

" r e g i o n o f A a r u , a n d h e b a t h r u n n i n g w a t e r i n S e k h e t - h e t e p,

" a n d h i s o f f e r i n g s a r e a m o n g [ t h o s e o f ] t h e g o d s . T h e w a t e r

" o f t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i (20) i s t h e w i n e o f R d , a n d N e b s e n i

" g o e t h r o u n d a b o u t h e a v e n a n d t r a v e l l e t h [ t h e r e i n ] l i k e u n t o

" T h o t h . I t i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o t h e s c r i b e Ne b s e n i t o s u f f e r

" h u n g e r a n d n o t t o e a t , a n d i t i s a n a b o m i n a t i o n u n t o h i m

"(21) t o b e t h i r s t y [ a n d n o t t o d r i n k ] ; b u t s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s

" h a v e b e e n g i v e n u n t o h i m b y t h e l o r d o f e t e r n i t y , w h o b a t h

"ordered [these things] for him . T h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i w a s c o n -

ceived in (22) t h e n i g h t , a n d w a s b r o u g h t f o r t h i n t h e d a y -

" l i g h t , a n d t h o s e w h o a r e i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f R d , t h e d iv i n e

"an ce st ors, a dore [ h i m] . [ T h e s c r i b e Ne b s e n i w a s c o n c e iv e d i n

" N u , a n d w a s b r o u g h t f o r t h i n N u , a n d h e b a t h c o m e ] I a n d

"bath brought to you what he bath (23) f o u n d o f t h a t

" w h i c h t h e E y e o f H o r u s b a t h s h e d u p o n t h e b r a n c h e s o f t h e

" T h e n t r e e . T h e g o v e r n o r o f t h o s e i n A m e n t i c o m e t h t o h i m

" a n d b r i n g e t h t o h i m t h e d iv i n e f o o d a n d o f f e r i n g s o f H o r u s ,

"(24) t h e g o v e r n o r o f Te m p l e s , a n d u p o n t h a t w h e r e o n h e d o t h

" l iv e t h e s c r i b e Ne b s e n i l iv e t h a l s o , a n d o f t h a t w h e r e o f h e

" d r i n k e t h d o t h t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e d e s i g n e r o f t h e ( 25 )

"Temple of Ptah, drink also, and facing his off erings of cakes

" a n d a l e i s a h a u n c h o f m e a t a l s o . Osiris, the scribe Neb-

" s e n i , i s t r i u m p h a n t , a n d h e i s f a v o u r e d o f A n u b i s (26) who

"is upon his hill . "

"Hail, scribe Nebseni, thou hast the form wherein thou hadst

i . These words are added from the Pyramid o f U n a s , 1 1 . 1 9 9 , 200 .




"thine existence upon earth, and thou livest and renewest thy

"youth each day ; t h y f a c e i s u n c o v e r e d a n d t h o u s e e s t ( 2 7 ) t h e

" l o r d o f t h e h o r i z o n , w h o g i v e t h t o t h e e s e p u l c h r a l m e a l s i n t h y

"hour and in thy season of night . Horus h at h aven g e d t h e e ,

" a n d h e h a t h d e s t r o y e d t h e j a w - b o n e s ( 2 8 ) o f t h i n e e n e m i e s ; h e

" h a t h s h u t i n t h e d o e r o f v i o l e n c e a t t h e m o u t h o f h i s f o r t r e s s . "

"Hail, scr ibe Nebseni, thou hast no enemies in Het-ur, (29)

"and the scales bala nced when thou wert weighed therein, and

" t h e h a l l w h e r e i n t h e y w e r e b e l o n g e d t o O s i r i s , t h e l o r d o f o f -

f e r i n g s o f A m e n t e t . A n d t h o u s h a l t e n t e r i n a t w i l l , a n d t h o u

" s h a l t s e e ( 3 o ) t h e G r e a t G o d i n h i s f o r m , a n d l i f e s h a l l b e g i v e n

" t o t h y n o s t r i l s , a n d t h o u s h a l t t r i u m p h o v e r t h i n e e n e m i e s . "

" H a i l , s c r i b e N e b s e n i , w h a t t h o u a b o m i n a t e s t i s ( 3 i ) i n i q u i t y .

"The divine lord of creation hath ma de peace with thee on the

"night of silencing the weeping . A n d s w e e t l i f e , w h e r e u p o n

"Thoth resteth, hath been given unto thee from the mouth of

" t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s , ( 3 2 ) a n d t h o u d o s t t r i u m p h o v e r t h i n e

"enemies, 0 scribe Nebseni . Thy mother Nut spreadeth herself

"over thee" in her name of Shetet-pet, and she maketh thee to

"be a fo llower (33) of the great god, and to be without ene-

mies, and she delivereth thee from every evil thing in her

"n ame of Khne me t-urt , t h e divine, mi g h t y f orm wh o dwe lle t h

"among her (34) children, 0 scribe Nebseni . "

" H a i l , 2 chiefs of the hours, ancestors of Ra, m ake ye a way

" f o r t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e l o r d o f p i e t y , ( 3 5 ) a n d l e t h i m p a s s

" w i t h i n t h e c i r cl e o f O s i r i s , t h e l o r d o f t h e l i f e o f t h e t w o l a n d s ,

" w h o l i v e t h f o r e v e r . A n d l e t t h e s c r i b e N e b s e n i , t h e d r a u g h t s -

man in the Temple of Ptah, the lor d of piety, the ha ppy one,

" ( 3 6 ) b e i n t h e f o l l o w i n g o f N e f e r - T e m , t h e l o t u s a t t h e n o s t r i l s

" o f R dn the presence of the gods, and let him see

Ra for ever . "

i . This line is found on the cover of the w ooden coffin of Men-kau-Ra

( M y c e r i n u s ) , B r i t . M u s . No . 6 6 4 7 . S e e m y P a p y r u s o f A n i , p. XX .

2 . S ee the Py r a m id o f Una s , 1 . 3 9 9 f .



THE CHAPTER OF ADVANCING FRO-11 YESTERDAY . 3 3 3

CHAPTER CLXXIX .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mu s. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t 5 ) . ]


Text : ( i) THE CHAPTER OF ADVANCING FROM YESTERDAY

AND OF COMING FORTH BY DAY ; w h e r e b y h e a n d h i s ( 2 )

m e m b e r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d ed w i t h f o o d . The overseer of the

p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , t h e s o n o f t h e

o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , A m e n - h e t e p , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

" L e t m y s p e e c h o f y e s t e r d a y b e g i v e n [ u n t o m e ] . I come

" d a i l y . I have come forth from the god of cr eation, (3) I am

" S epes c o m ing f o r t h f r o m h i s T r ee, a nd I a m Nu n c o m ing

" f o r t h f r o m h i s m i g h t . I a m t h e l o r d o f t h e u r e r e t c r o w n , a n d

"h e g o d N e h e b - k a u ( 4 ) . I a m T es h er w h o

"avengeth his Eve . I died yesterday but I come to-day . T h e

" m i g h t y L a d y w h o i s t h e g u a r d i a n o f t h e d o o r b a t h m a d e a

" w a y f o r m e . I c o m e f o r t h ( 5) b y d a y a g a i n s t m i n e En e m y ,

"and I have gained the mastery over him ; he bath b een given

"over unto me, and he shall not be delivered out of my hand .

" A n d h e s h a l l c o m e t o a n e n d b e f o r e m e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f

" t h e [ g r e a t ] d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s [ ' w h o a r e i n t h e u n d e r w o r l d .

"The first, great rank bath been given unto me by him, along

" w i t h t h e s h a d e a n d f o r m o f t h e l i v i n g g o d s ; and I have m ade

"[my] p a t hi n e En e m y b a t h b e e n b r o u g h t u n t o m e ," a n d h e b a t h b e e n g i v e n u n t o m e , a n d h e s h a l l n o t b e d e l i v e r e d

"out of my hand ; the things which concern me have been ended

" i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e d i v i n e s o v e r e i g n c h i e f s o f ] O s i r i s ( 6 ) w h o

" i s [ c l o t h e d ] i n h i s a p p a r e l . A n d b e h o l d , t h e g o v e r n o r o f t h o s e

"i n Ame n t ia m t h e l o r d o f r e d n e s s o n t h e d a y o f" t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s . I a m ( 7 ) t h e l o r d o f k n i v e s a n d i n j u r y s h a l l

"n ot be don e un t o me . I have made [my] path . I a m t h e s c r i b e

" [ w h o w r itet h d o w n] t h e o d o r o u s t h ings w h i c h a r e in t h e

" s w e e t - s m e l l i n g i n c e n s e ( ? ) , a n d t h e t h i n g s w h i c h b e l o n g t o t h e

t . T he w o r d s in b r a c k ets a r e_ a d d ed f r o m the Pa py r u s o f Neb s eni .




" m i g h t y R u d d y o n e h a v e b e e n b r o u g h t [ t o m e ] , ( 8 ) a n d t h e

" m i g h t y R u d d y o n e h a t h b e e n g i v e n t o m e . I h a v e c o m e f o r t h

" b y d a y a g a i n s t m y En e m y , I h a v e b r o u g h t h i m a l o n g , I h a v e

" g a i n e d t h e p o w e r o v e r h i m ; h e b a t h b e e n g iv e n u n t o m e , a n d

" h e s h a l l n o t b e d e l iv e r e d ( g) o u t o f m y h a n d . H e b a t h c o m e

" t o a n e n d b e n e a t h m e i n t h e p r e s e n c e o f t h e d iv i n e s o v e r ei g n

"chiefs, and I eat him in the great field on the altar o f Ua-

" t c h i t ; I have (ro) gained the mastery over him as Sekh et, the .

"g re at lady . I a m t h e l o r d o f t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s , f o r I h a v e t h e

" t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s o f e v e r y g o d , a n d t h e y g o r o u n d a b o u t i n

". . . me. "

CHAPTER CLXXX

[From a Papyrus at Paris (see Naville, op . c i t . , B d . I . B I . 204) . ]

V i g n e t t e : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g i n s u p p l i c a t i o n b e f o r e t h r e e g o d s .

T e x t : ( r ) THE CHAPTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY, OF

PRAISING RA IN AMENTET, OF ASCRIBING PRAISE UNTO THOSE

WHO DWELL IN THE TUAT, OF OPENING UP A PATH FOR THE

(2) PERFECT KHU IN THE UNDERWORLD, OF CAUSING HIM TO

WALK, OF MAKING LONG HIS FOOTSTEPS, OF GOING IN AND

COMING FORTH FROM THE UNDERWORLD, AND OF PERFORMING

TRANSFORMATIONS LIKE A LIVING SOUL . (3) The Osirist ri ump h an t , s ai t h :-

"Rd setteth as Osiris with all the diadems ( 4 ) o f t h e di v i n e

"Whirs a n d o f t h e g o d s o f A m e n t e t . He i s t h e On e di v i n e f o r m,

"the hidden one of the Tuat, the holy Sou l at the head of Amentet,

"Un-nefer, whos e duration of life (5) is for ever and for ever .

"Words o f p rai s e are addre ss e d t o t h e e , [0 Osi ri s], i n t h e T uat ,

" a n d t h y s o n H o r u s b a t h s a t i s f a c t i o n i n t h e e , a n d h e b a t h s p o k e n

"[unto thee] the decree of words . (6) T h o u m a k e s t h i m t o r i s e

" u p o n t h o s e w h o d w e l l i n t h e T u a t l i k e a m i g h t y d iv i n e S t a r ,

" u n t o w h o m t h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e h i s h a v e b e e n b r o u g h t i n

" t h e T u a t . Thou travellest through it, 0 son of Ra, and comest



THE CHA PTER OF COMING FORTH BY DAY . 3 3 5

"forth like Tem . (7) Words of praise are addressed unto thee

" b y t h o s e w h o d w e l l i n t h e T u a t , [ w h i c h i s ] t h e t h r o n e - c h a m b e r

"de ar t o t h y M aje st y , t h e King , t h e P ri n ce of Au ke rt , t h e

"mi g h t y Rule r, [wh o i s crown e d wi t h ] t h e Ureret crown, (8)

"t h e g re at G od wh ose se at i s h i dd e n , t h e Lord an d Weig h e r

" o f w o r d s , a n d t h e S o v e r e i g n o f h i s d i v i n e c h i e f s . A n d w o r d s

"of praise are addressed unto thee by those who dwell in the

"Tuat, and they have satisfaction [in] thee . A n d w o r d s o f

" p r a i s e a r e a d d r e s s e d ( g ) unto thee by those who dwell in the

"Tuat , an d t h e divine be i n gs wh o we ep pluck ou t t h e i r h ai r

" f o r t h e e , a n d t h e y s m i t e t h e i r h a n d s t o g e t h e r , a n d t h e y p r a i s e

"thee, and they cry out (io) before thee, and they weep for

"thee, and they rejoice that thy soul hath glorified thy d ead

"body . Th e souls of R d i n Ame n t e t are exalt e d, an d i n t h e

" z o n e ( ? ) o f t h e T u a t t h e s o u l s . . . . ( i r ) c ry o u t i n t h e i r s o n g s

"of exaltation unto the souls of Rd who dwelleth therein ; t h e

"body an d souls o f t h e g od Tch e n t ch dwe ll i n t h e Tuat , an d

" ( 1 2 ) h i s d i v i n e s o u l r e s t e t h t h e r e i n . "

"Hai l, O si ri s, I am a se rvan t of t h y t e mple , an d on e wh o

" d w e l l e t h w i t h i n t h y d i v i n e h o u s e ; a n d t h o u u t t e r e s t w i t h c o m -

m a n d t h e w o r d s o f t h e d e c r e e . G ran t t h ou t h at I may ri se

"li ke a lumi n a ry amon g t h e de n izens (r3) of t h e Tuat , an d

"li ke a mi g h t y st ar un t o wh om i n t h e Tuat t h e t h i n g s wh i ch

"are his have been brought . L e t [ m e ] j o u r n e y t h r o u g h i t [ l i k e ]

" t h e s o n o f R d , a n d l et [ m e] c o m e f o r t h a s T em . L e t m e

"have rest in the Tuat, (r4) let me gain the mastery over the

"darkness, let me enter therein, let me come forth therefrom ,

"let thy hand s receive me, 0 Ta-tiunen, (r5) and let the He-

"tepu gods lift me up, 0 stretch ye out your hands to me, f or

"I, even I, know [your ] names . ( 1 6 ) Lead ye me along, praise

"ye me, 0 I-letepu gods with your praises, f or Rd rejoiceth

"over the praises which are offered u nto me (r7) even as he

" d o t h o v e r t h o s e w h i c h a r e o f f e r e d u n t o O s i r i s . I h a v e s t a b l i s h e d

" f o r y o u y o u r o f f e r i n g s , a n d y e h a v e o b t a i n e d t h e m a s t e r y o v e r

"your oblat i on s, even as Rd h at h comman de d me [t o do] . ( r 8 )

"I am t h e g od M e h i u an d I am h i s h e i r up on t h e e art h , an d



3 3 6 THE CHAPTERS OF CORING FORTH B Y DAY

" I h a v e m a d e [ m y ] p a t h . 0 ye He t epu g ods, g ran t ye t h at I

"may e n t e r i n t o t h e Tuat , an d l e t me make a way (ig) i n t o

" t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t e t . I h a v e s t a b l i s h e d t h e s c e p t r e o f t h e g o d

"Sah and the n e m m e s crown for the god whose name is hidden .

"Look ye, then, (20) 0 Hetepu gods, and ye gods who are the

"guides of the Tuat, and grant that I may receive my glorious

"might, and let me r ise like a luminary (21) above his hidden

"place, and deliver ye me from the deadly stakes o f those who

" a r e c h a i n e d t h e r e u n t o . Chain ye me not unto your ( 2 2 ) d e a d l y

" s t a k e s , a n d g i v e y e m e n o t o v e r t o t h e h a b i t a t i o n o f t h e f i e n d s

" w h o s l a y . "

"I am th e he ir of Osi ri s, an d I have rece ived h is n emin es

"crown i n t h e Tuat ; ( 2 3 ) look ye upon me, then, and let me

"rise like a luminary who hath come forth f rom your members ;

"and let me- come into being like my d ivine father (24) who

" i s w o r s h i p p e d . Look ye upon me, th en, and rejoice ye in me,

"and grant th at I may rise up, (25) and that I may come into

"being like him whose transformations were destroyed . O p e n

"ye a way unto my divine soul, 0 ye who stand upon your

" p l a c e s . G r a n t y e t h a t ( 2 6 ) I m a y r e s t i n t h e b e a u t i f u l A m e n t e t ,

"and decree ye for me a seat in front of you . Open ou t ye t o

"me your paths, and draw back for me the bolts of your doors .

" ( 2 7 ) B e h o l d , 0 R d , a s t h o u a r t t h e g u i d e o f t h i s e a r t h , s o l e t

" t h e d i v i n e s o u l s b e [ m y ] g u i d e s , a n d l e t [ m e ] f o l l o w a f t e r t h e

"gods . I a m h e w h o g u a r d e t h ( 2 8 ) his own pylon, and [I am]

" l e d a l o n g b y t h o s e w h o l e a d ; I a m h e w h o k e e p e t h w a r d

" o v e r h i s d o o r s , a n d w h o s e t t e t h t h e g o d s i n t h e i r p l a c e s ; ( 2 9 )

"I am h e wh o dwe lle t h up on h i s st an dard wi t h i n t h e Tuat . I

"am the god Henbi, the guardian of the lands(?) of the gods ;

"I am the boundaries of the Tuat, ( 3 o ) I a m t h e g o d H e t e p i

"in Aukert . M y o f f e r i n g s h a v e b e e n m a d e i n A m e n t e t b y t h e

"divine souls who dwell in the gods . ( 3 r ) I a m t h e g o d M e h -

" a - n u t i - R a . I am the hidden Bennu b ird ; I e n t e r i n [ a s ] h e

"resteth in the Tuat, and [I] come forth [as he] resteth ( 3 2 )

" i n t h e T u a t . I a m t h e l o r d o f t h e c e l e s t i a l a b o d e s a n d I j o u r n e y

" t h r o u g h t h e n i g h t s k y a f t e r R d . M y o f f e r i n g s a r e i n h e a v e n i n



T H E C H A P T ER O F E N T ER I N G I N T O T H E C H I EF S O F O S I R I S . 337

"the Field of (33) Rd, and my sepulchr al meals are on earth

" i n t h e F i e l d o f A a r u . I t r a v e l t h r o u g h t h e T u a t l i k e t h e b e i n g s

"fwho are with] Rd, and I weigh (34) words like the god

Choth . I stretch myself at my desire, I run forw ard with my

' s t r i d e s i n m y s p i r i t u a l f o r m o f ( 3 5 ) h i d d e n q u a l i t i e s , a n d m y

"transformations are those of the double god Horus -Set . I am

" t h e p r e s i d e n t o f t h e f o o d o f t h e g o d s o f t h e T u a t , a n d I g i v e

" t h e s e p u l c h r a l o f f e r i n g s ( 3 6 ) o f t h e Khus. I am the God of the

" M i g h t y H e a r t w h o s m i t e t h h i s e n e m i e s . H a i l , y e gods and Khus ,

" t h e a n c e s t o r s ( ? ) o f R d , w h o f o l l o w a f t e r ( 3 7 ) t h e d i v i n e S o u l

"which he hath, lead ye me along as ye lead [him] along, and

" d o y e , w h o a r e t h e g u i d e s o f R d a n d w h o a r e l e a d e r s ( 38)

"dwelling in the upper heaven, [guide me], for I am like unto

"the divine and holy Soul who is in Amentet . "

CHAPTER CLXXXI.

[ F r o m th e P a p y r u s o f Q e n n a ( s e e L e e m a n s , P a p y r u s E g y p t i e n , T . 2 . P I . t 6 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d k n e e l i n g i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e t h r e e g o d s w h o

a r e s e a t e d b e f o r e a d o or ; b e h i n d a r e a l i o n - h e a d e d a n d a v ul t u re - h e a d e d

g o d , e a c h o f w h o m h a s a s e r p e n t a b o v e h i s h e a d .

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN TO THE DIVINE

SOVEREIGN CHIEFS OF OSIRIS, AND TO THE GODS WHO ARE

GUIDES IN THE TUAT, ( 2 ) AND TO THOSE WHO KEEP WARD

OVER THEIR GATES, AND TO THOSE WHO ARE HERALDS OF

THEIR HALLS, (3) AND TO THOSE WHO ARE THE PORTERS OF

THE DOORS AND PYLONS OF AMENTET ; AND OF MAKING THE

TRANSFORMATIONS LIKE ( 4 ) A LIVING SOUL ; AND OF PRAIS-

ING OSIRIS AND OF BECOMING THE PRINCE OF THE DIVINE

SOVEREIGN CHIEFS . The Osiris Qenna, triumphant, sa ith :-

"Homage to the e, 0 governor (5) of Amentet, Un-nefer,

"lord of Ta-t ch e se rt , (6) 0 t h ou wh o art di ade me d li ke Ra,

" v e r i l y I c o m e t o s e e t h e e a n d t o r e j o i c e ( 7 ) a t t h y b e a u t i e s .

"His disk is thy disk ; his rays of light ar e thy rays (8) of

22




" l i g h t ; h i s U r e r e t c r o w n i s t h y U r e r e t c r o w n ; h i s m a j e s t y i s

" t h y m a j e s t y ; h i s r i s i n g s a r e t h y ( 9 ) r i s i n g s ; h i s b e a u t i e s a r e

" t h y b e a u t i e s ; t h e t e r r o r w h i c h h e i n s p i r e t h i s t h e t e r r o r w h i c h

" t h o u i n s p i r e s t ; his odour (io) is thy odour ; h i s h a l l i s t h y

" h a l l , h i s s e a t i s t h y s e a t ; h i s t h r o n e i s t h y t h r o n e ; ( i i ) h i s

" h e i r i s t h y h e i r ; his ornaments are thy ornaments ;(12) h i s

" d e c r e e i s t h y d e c r e e ; his hidden place is thy hidden place ;

" h i s t h i n g s a r e t h y t h i n g s ; ( i 3 ) h i s k n o w l e d g e ( o r p o w e r s ) i s

"t h y kn owle dg e ; t h e a t t r i b u t e s o f g r e a t n e s s w h i c h a r e h i s a r e

" t h i n e ; t h e p owe r (14) w h i c h p r o t e c t e t h h i m p r o t e c t e t h t h e e ; I

"he dieth not and thou diest not ; he is not triumphed over

" ( 1 5 ) b y h i s e n e m i e s , a n d t h o u a r t n o t t r i u m p h e d o v e r b y t h i n e

"enemies ; no evil thing whatsoever hath happened (i6) unto

"h i m, an d n o evi l t h i n g wh at soeve r sh all h appen un t o t h e e

" f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . "

( i 7 ) " H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 O s i r i s , s o n o f N u t , l o r d o f t h e t w o

" ho rn s, w ho se A te f c r o w n i s e x a l t e d , m a y t h eU r e r e t c r o w n b e

"given unto him, along with sovereignty before the co mpany of

" t h e g o d s . (z8) May the god Temu mak e terror of him to exist

"i n t h e h e art s of me n , an d wome n , (ig) an d g ods, an d K h u s ,

" a nd t h e d e a d . M a y d o m i n i o n b e g i v e n u n t o h i m i n A n n u

" ( H e l i o p o l i s ) ; ( 20 ) m a y h e b e m i g h t y o f t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s i n

"Tattu (Mendes) ; may h e be t h e lord g re at ly f e are d i n t h e

" A a t i ; m a y h e b e m i g h t y i n ( 2 t ) v i c t o r y i n R e - s t a u ; m a y h e

" b e t h e l o r d w h o i s r e m e m b e r e d w i t h g l a d n e s s i n t h e G r e a t

" H o u s e ; m a y h e h a v e m a n i f o l d (22) r i s i n g s l i k e a l u m i n a r y i n

" A b t u (A b y d o s ) ; m a y t r i um p h b e g iv e n un t o h i m i n th e p r e -

s e n c e o f t h e c o m p a n y o f t h e g o d s ; ( 23 ) m a y h e g a in t h e

"vi ct ory ove r t h e mi g h t y P owe rs ; m a y t h e - f e a r o f h i m b e

"made to go [throughout] the earth ; and may (i) the princes

"stand up 2 u p o n t h e i r s t a t i o n s b e f o r e t h e s o v e r e i g n o f t h e g o d s

"of the Tuat, ( 2 ) t h e mi g h t y Form of h e aven , t h e P ri n ce of

"the living ones, the King of those who ar e therein, and the

t . R e a d i n g m a k e t f m a k e t - k .

2 . Wh a t f o l l o w s h e r e i s f r o m t h e t e x t g i v e n b y N a v il l e ( o p . c i t . , Bd . I .

BI . 2 0 6 ) .



THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN TO THE CHIEFS OF OSIRIS . 339

" G lo r i f i e r of thousands in Kher-aba . The de n izens of h e aven

" r e j o i c e i n h i m w h o i s t h e ( 3 ) l o r d o f t h e c h o s e n o f f e r i n g s i n t h e

"mansions above ; a m e a t o f f e r i n g i s m a d e u n t o h i m i n t h e c i t y

"Het-ka-Ptah (Memphis) ; a n d t h e ' t h i n g s o f t h e n i g h t ' a r e p r e -

"pared for him in Sekhem (Letopolis) . Behold, 0 mighty god,

" t h o u g r e a t o n e o f ( 4 ) t w o - f o l d s t r e n g t h , t h y s o n H o r u s a v e n g -

" e t h t h e e . H e d o e t h a w a y w i t h e v e r y e v i l t h i n g w h a t s o e v e r

"that belongeth to thee, he bindeth up in order fo r thee thy

"person, he gathereth together for thee thy members, he col-

" l e c t e t h f o r t h e e t h y b o n e s , h e b r i n g e t h t o t h e e t h y( 5 ) . . ; t h o u a r t r a i s e d u p , t h e n , 0 O s i r i s , I h a v e g i v e n u n t o

"t h e e t h y h an d, an d I make t h e e t o st an d up alive for eve r

"and ever . The god Seb directeth ( ? ) t h y m o u t h , t h e g r e a t c o m -

" p a n y o f t h e g o d s p r o t e c t e t h t h e e , . . . . ( 6 )n d t h e y a c -

"comp an y t h e e un t o t h e door of t h e g at e of t h e Tuat . T h y

"mother Nut placeth her hands behind thee, she giveth thee

"strength, and she reneweth the power which protecteth thee .

" ( 7 )i r t h s , t h y t w o s i s t e r s I s i s a n d N e p h t h y s c o m e u n t o

" t h e e , a n d t h e y u n i t e t h e e u n t o l i f e , a n d s t r e n g t h , a n d h e a l t h ,

"and thy heart rejoiceth before them ; ( 8 )hey . . . i n

"thee through love of thee, and they load thy hands for thee

" w i t h t h i n g s o f a l l k i n d s . A l l t h e g o d s p r e s e n t u n t o t h e e p r o -

" v i s i o n s , a n d b e h o l d , ( 9 ) t h e y p r a i s e t h e e f o r e v e r . Happy art

"thou, 0 Osiris, for thou art crowned, and a rt endowed with

" s t r e n g t h , a n d a r t g l o r i o u s ; a n d t h i n e a t t r i b u t e s a r e s t a b l i s h e d

" f o r t h e e . T h y f a c e i s l i k e t h a t o f A n p u , ( i o ) R d r e j o i c e t h i n

"thee, and he maketh himself to be a brother to thy beautiful

" p e r s o n . Thou sittest upon thy throne, the god Seb maketh a

"libation for thee, and that which thou wishest to receive is

"in thy hands in Amentet . ( i i ) T h o u s a i l e s t o v e r t h e c e l e s t i a l

"regions each day, thy mother Nut maketh thee to go forth on

"thy way, and thou settest in life in Amentet in the boat of

" R d e a c h d a y , a l o n g w i t h ( 1 2 ) H o r u s w h o l o v e t h t h e e . T h e

"protecting strength of Rd guardeth thee, the wor ds of might

"of Thoth are behind thee, and Isis maketh strength to follow

" a f t e r t h y p e r s o n ( i 3 ) . "

22




"I have come t o thee, 0 lord o f T a - t c h e s e r t , O s i r i s , G o v e r -

nor of those who are in Amentet, Un-nefer, whose twofold

" e x i s t e n c e i s f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . M y h e a r t i s r i g h t a n d t r u e ,

"my hands are pure, I have brought (14)t h i n g s u n t o t h e i r

" d i v i n e l o r d , a n d o f f e r i n g s u n t o t h e g o d w h o m a d e t h e m . I h a v e

"come and I have advanced to your cities . I have done that

"which was good upon earth, I have slain t h i n e e n e m i e s f o r

" th e e l ik e s ac r if i ci al o xe n ( I5 ) . I h a v e s l a u g h t e r e d f o r t h e e t h y

"adversaries, and I have made them to fall down [upon] their

" f a c e s b e f o r e t h e e . I am pure, even as thou art pure ; I h a v e

" m a d e p u r e f o r t h e e t h y f e s t i v a l ; a n d I h a v eI6) upon

" t h i n e a l t a r t o t h y s o u l , a n d t o t h y F o r m , a n d t o t h e g o d s , a n d

" t o t h e g o d d e s s e s w h o a r e i n t h y t r a i n . "

Rubric : ( 24) IF THIS CHAPTER BE KNOWN [BY THE DECEASED] THINGS

OF EVIL SHALL NOT GAIN THE MASTERY OVER HIM, AND HE SHALL NOT

BE TURNED BACK FROM ANY OF THE DOORS OF AMENTET ; BUT HE SHALL

(25) GO IN AND COME OUT, AND CAKES, AND ALE, AND ALL BEAUTIFUL

THINGS SHALL BE GIVEN UNTO HIM IN THE PRESENCE OF THOSE WHO

DWELL IN THE TUAT .

CHAPTER CLXXXII .

[From the Papyrus of Mut-hetep (Brit . M u s . No . 10,010, s h e e t 4 ) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d l y i n g u p o n a b i e r w i t h i n a f u n e r a l c h e s t o r

c o f f e r ; beneath the bier are three vases . At the foot stand Isis, Ha p i ,

a n d T u a m a u t e f , a n d a t t h e h e a d N e p h t h y s , M e s t h a , a n d Q e b h s e n n u f . I n

the upper and lower registers are a number of s eated and standing man-

headed and animal-headed deities who hold in their hands snakes . l i z a r d s ,

a n d k n i ve s .

Text : ( I) THE BOOK OF STABLISHING OSIRIS FIRMLY, OF

GIVING AIR TO THE STILL-HEART, WHILST THOTH REPULSETH

THE FOES OF OSIRIS, w h o c o m e t h t h e r e i n h i s t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s ,

( 2 ) a n d i s p r o t e c t e d , a n d m a d e s t r o n g , a n d g u a r d e d i n t h e u n d e r -

world by the operation of the will of Thoth himself, and Shu

setteth upon him each day . [ T h o t h s a i t h :- ]



T H E B O O K O F S T A B L I S H I N G O S I R I S . 341

" I a m T h o t h , t h e p e r f e c t s c r i b e , (3) w h o s e h a n d s a r e p u r e ,

" t h e l o r d o f t h e t w o h o r n s , w h o m a k e t h i n i q u i t y [ t o b e d e -

"stroyed], the scribe o f right and truth, who a bominateth sin .

" B e h o l d , h e i s t h e w r i t i n g - r e e d o f t h e g o d Ne b - e r - t c h e r , t h e

" l o r d o f l a w s , ( 4 ) w h o g i v e t h f o r t h t h e s p e e c h o f w i s d o m a n d

" u n d e r s t a n d i n g , w h o s e w o r d s h a v e d o m i n i o n o v e r t h e t w o l a n d s .

" I a m [ T h o t h ] , t h e l o r d o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h , w h o t r i e t h t h e

" r i g h t a n d t h e t r u t h f o r t h e g o d s , t h e j u d g e o f w o r d s i n

"their essence, who se words triumph over violence . I have scat-

t e r e d ( 5 ) t h e d a r k n e s s , I h a v e d r i v e n a w a y t h e w h i r l w i n d

" a n d t h e s t o r m , a n d I h a v e g i v e n t h e p l e a s a n t b r e e z e o f t h e

" n o r t h w i n d u n t o O s i r i s U n - n e f e r a s h e c a m e f o r t h f r o m ( 6 )

" t h e w o m b o f h e r w h o g a v e h i m b i r t h . I h a v e m a d e R d t o

" s e t a s O s i r i s , a n d O s i r i s s e t t e t h a s R d s e t t e t h . I h a v e m a d e

" h i m t o e n t e r i n t o t h e h i dde n h a b i t at i on t o v i v i f y t h e (7) h e art

" o f t h e S t i l l - H e a r t , t h e h o l y S o u l , w h o d w e l l e t h i n A m e n t e t ,

"and to shout cries of joy unto the Still-Heart, Un-nefer, the

" s o n o f N u t . " ( 8 )

" I a m T h o t h , t h e f a v o u r e d o n e o f R d , t h e l o r d o f m i g h t ,

" w h o b r i n g e t h t o a p r o s p e r o u s e n d t h a t w h i c h h e d o e t h , t h e

" m i g h t y o n e o f e n c h a n t m e n t s w h o i s i n t h e b o a t o f m i l l i o n s

"o f years, the lord o f laws, the su bduer o f the two lands, (g)

"whose words of might gave strength to her that gave him birth,

" w h o s e w o r d d o e t h a w a y w i t h o p p o s i t i o n a n d f i g h t i n g , a n d

" w h o p e r f o r m e t h t h e w i l l o f R d i n h i s s h r i n e . "

" I a m T h o t h , w h o m a d e O s i r i s t o t r i u m p h ( i o ) o v e r h i s

"enemies . "

" I a m T h o t h w h o i s s u e t h t h e d e c r e e a t d a w n , w h o s e s i g h t

"f olloweth on again after [his] overthrow at his season, the guide

"of heaven, and earth, and th e underworld, ( 1 1 ) an d t h e c re at or

"o f t h e li f e o f [ a l l] n at i on s an d p e op le s . I g a v e a i r u n t o h i m

" t h a t w a s i n t h e h i d d e n p l a c e b y m e a n s o f t h e m i g h t o f t h e

"magical words of my utterance, and Osiris triumpheth over his

" e n e m i e s . ( 1 2 ) I came unto thee, 0 lord of Ta-tcheser, Osiris,

" B u l l o f A m e n t , a n d t h o u w e r t s t r e n g t h e n e d f o r e v e r . I set

" ev e r l a s t i n g n e s s a s a p r o t e c t i o n f o r t h y m e m b e r s , a n d I c a m e




" [ u n t o t h e e ] h a v i n g p r o t e c t io n ( 1 3 ) i n m y h a n d , a n d I g u a r d e d

"[thee] with streng th during the course of each and every day ;

"protection and life were behind this god, protection and life

" w e r e b e h i n d t h i s g o d , a n d h i s k a w a s g l o r i f i e d w i t h p o w e r . "

"T h e ki n g o f t h e T uat , ( r4 ) t h e p ri n ce o f A me n t e t , t h e v i ct or-

i o u s c o n q u e r o r o f h e a v e n , h a t h t h e Atef crown f i rmly st a b li s h e d

" [ u p o n h i m ] , h e i s d i a d e m e d w i t h t h e w h i t e c r o w n , a n d h e

" g r a s p e t h t h e c r o o k a n d t h e w h i p ; u n t o h i m , t h e g r e a t o n e o f

" s o u l s , t h e m i g h t y o n e o f ( 1 5 ) th e Ureret c r o w n , e v e r y g o d

" g a t h e r e t h t o g e t h e r , a n d l o v e f o r h i m w h o i s U n - n e f e r , a n d

"whose existence is for everlasting and all eternity, goeth through

"their b odies . "

" H o m a g e t o t h e e , 0 G o v e r n o r o f t h o s e w h o a r e i n A m e n t i ,

" ( 1 6) w h o m a k e s t m o r t a l s t o b e b o r n a g a i n , w h o r e n e w e s t t h y

" y o u t h , t h o u c o m e s t w h o d w e l l e s t i n t h y s e a s o n , a n d w h o a r t

" m o r e b e a u t i f u l t h a nh y s o n H o r n s ( 1 7 ) h a t h a v e n g e d

"t h e e ; the rank (or d i g n i t y ) o f Te m b a t h b e e n c o n f e r r e d u p o n

" t h e e , 0 U n - n e f e r . T h o u a r t r a i s e d u p , 0 B u l l o f A m e n t e t ,

" t h o u a r t s t a b l i s h e d , y e a s t a b l i s h e d i n t h e b o d y o f Nu t , w h o

" u n i t e t h h e r s e l f (18) unto thee, and who cometh forth with thee .

"Thy heart is stablished upon that which supporteth it, and thy

" b r e a s t i s a s i t w a s f o r m e r l y ; thy nose is firmly f ixed with life

"and power, thou livest, and thou art renewed, and thou makest

"thyself ( 1 g ) y o u n g l i k e R d e a ch a n d ev e r y d ay . M i g h t y , m i g h t y

"is Osiris in victory, and he is firmly stab lished w ith life . "

" I a m T h o t h , a n d I h a v e p a c i f i e d H o r u s , a n d I h a v e q u i e t e d

" t h e t w o ( 2 0 ) d i v i n e C o m b a t a n t s i n t h e i r s e a s o n o f s t o r m . I

" h a v e c o m e a n d I h a v e w a s h e d t h e R u d d y o n e , I h a v e q u i e t e d

" t h e S t o r m y o n e , a n d I h a v e f i l l e d ( ? ) h i m w i t h a l l m a n n e r

"of evil things . " ( 2 1 )

" I a m T h o t h , a n d I h a v e m a d e t h e ` t h i n g s o f t h e n i g h t ' i n

" S e k h e m ( L e t o p o l i s ) . "

" I a m T h o t h , a n d I h a v e c o m e d a i l y i n t o t h e c i t i e s o f P e

"and Tepu . I have led ( 2 2 ) alon g t h e o f f e ri n g s an d o b l at i on s,

"I have given cakes with lavish hand to th e Khus, I have pro-

t e c t e d t h e ( 2 3 ) s h o u l d e r o f O s i r i s , I h a v e e m b a l m e d h i m , I



A HYMN TO OSIRIS

"have made sweet his odour, even as is that o f the beautiful

" g o d . "

"I am Thoth, and I have come each d ay into the city of (24)

"Kher-aba . I h ave t i e d t h e cordag e an d I h ave se t i n g ood

"order the Makhent boat, and I have brought [it] [from] the

" E a s t [ t o ] t h e W e s t . I am more exalted upon my standar d (25)

"t h an an y g od i n my n ame of 'H e wh ose face i s exalt e d' . I

"have opened fair things in my nam e of Ap-uat (i . e . , O p e n e r

" o f t h e r o a d ) , a n d I h a v e ( 2 6 ) a s c r i b e d p r a i s e a n d d o n e h o m a g e

" u n t o O s i r i s U n - n e f e r , w h o s e e x i s t e n c e i s f o r e v e r a n d f o r e v e r . "

CHAPTER CLXXXIII .

[ F r o m the Pa py r u s o f H u -nef er ( B r it . M u s . No . 9 , 9 oi , s h e e t 3 ) . ]

Vignette : ( a ) T h e d e c e a s e d a n d h i s w i f e s t a n d i n g w i t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n

a d o r a t i o n ; ( b) T h o t h , i b i s - h e a d e d , s t a n d i n g u pr i g h t a n d p r e s e n t i n g s y m -

b o ls o f " s t r e n g t h " a n d " l i f e " .

Tex t : ( i) THE OSIRIS HU-NEFER, THE OVERSEER OF THE

PALACE OF THE LORD OF THE TWO LANDS, TRIUMPHANT,

PRAISETH OSIRIS AND ACCLAIMETH HIM, AND DOETH HOMAGE

UNTO UN-NEFER, AND BOWETH TO THE GROUND BEFORE THE

LORD OF TA-TCHESERT, AND EXALTETH THOSE WHO ARE UPON

HIS SAND, ( 2 ) s a y i n g :-

"I have come unto thee, (3) 0 son of Nut, Osiris, Prince of

" e v e r l a s t i n g n e s s ; I am in (4) the foll owing of the go d Thoth,

"and I have rejoiced (5) at every thing which he h ath done

" f o r t h e e . H e h a t h b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e s w e e t a i r ( 6 ) f o r t h y n o s e ;

"and life and strength to thy beautiful face ; an d t h e n ort h

"wi n d wh i ch (7) come t h for t h from Te m for t h y n ost ri ls , 0

" l o r d o f ( 8 ) T a - t c h e s e r t . H e b a t h m a d e t h e g o d S h u t o s h i n e

" u p o n t h y b o d y ; (9) he bath illu mined thy pa th with ray s of

" s p l e n d o u r ; h e b a t h d e s t r o y e d ( i o ) f o r t h e e [ a l l ] t h e e v i l d e -

fects which belong to thy members by (i i) the magical power

" o f t h e w o r d s o f h i s u t t e r a n c e . H e b a t h m a d e t h e t w o H o r u s

34 3



39 . 4 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH B Y DA Y

"brethren to be at peace for thee ; he hath dest royed the storm-

"wi n d an d t h e h urri can e ; h e h a t h m a d e t h e t w o C o m b a t a n t s

"to be gracious unto thee and the two lands to be ( 1 2 ) a t p e a c e

"before thee ; h e h at h p ut away t h e wrat h wh i ch was i n t h e i r

"h e art s, an d e ach bat h be com e re con ci le d un t o h i s brot h e r .

" T h y s o n H o r u s i s t r i u m p h a n t i n t h e p r e s e n c e ( 1 3 ) o f the

"wh ole comp an y of t h e g ods, t h e sove re i g n ty ove r t h e world

" h a t h b e e n g iv e n u n t o h i m , a n d h i s d o m i n i o n i s i n t h e u t t e r -

most parts of the earth . T h e t h r o n e o f t h e g o d S e b b a t h b e e n

" a d j u d g e d u n t o h i m , ( 1 4 ) a l o n g w i t h t h e r a n k w h i c h h a t h b e e n

" f o u n d e d b y t h e g o d T e m u , a n d w h i c h b a t h b e e n s t a b l i s h e d

" b y d e c r e e s i n t h e C h a m b e r o f b o o k s , a n d b a t h b e e n i n s c r i b e d

" u p o n a n i r o n t a b l e t a c c o r d i n g t o t h e c o m m a n d ( 1 5 ) o f thy

" f a t h e r P t a h -Ta n e n , [ w h e n h e s a t u p o n ] t h e g r e a t t h r o n e . He

" h a t h s e t h i s b r o t h e r u p o n t h a t w h i c h t h e g o d S h u b e a r e t h

"up, to stretch out the waters over the mountains, and to make

"to spring up (16) t h a t w h i c h g r o w e t h u p o n t h e h i l l s , a n d t h e

"grain(?) which shooteth upon the earth, and he giveth increase

" b y w a t e r a n d b y l a n d . Gods celestial and gods terrestrial

"transfer themselves to the service of thy son Horus, (17) a n d

"they follow him into his h all, [where] a decree is passed that

"he shall be lord over them, and they perform it straightway . "

"Thy heart rejoiceth, 0 lord of the gods, thy heart rejoiceth

" ( 1 8 ) g r e a t l y ; Egypt and the Red L and are at peace, and they

" s e r v e h u m b l y u n d er t h y s o v e r e ig n p o w e r . T h e t e m pl e s a r e

"stablished upon their own lands, cities and nomes (ig) possess

"firmly the property which they have in their names, and we

"will make to thee the divine o f ferings which we are boun d to

" m a k e , a n d o f f e r s a c r i f i c e s i n t h y n a m e f o r e v e r . ( 2 0 ) A c c l a m a t i o n s

"are made in thy name, libations are poured out to t h y k a , s e p u l -

c h r al me a ls [a r e b r o ug h t u n to th e e ] b y th e k h u s w h o a r e ( 2 1 )

"in thy following, and water is sprinkled upon the off erings ( ? )

" ( 2 2 ) u p o n b o t h s i d e s o f t h e s o u l s ( 2 3 ) o f t h e d e a d i n t h i s

"land ; e v e r y (24) design which b ath been ordered f or thee ac-

cording to his (i . e . , R a ' s ) c o m m a n d s i n t h e b e g i n n i n g b a t h

"been perfected . ( 2 5 ) Now t h e re fore , 0 son of Nut , t h ou art



HYMN TO OSIRIS .3 4 5

" d i a d e m e d a s ( 2 6 ) N e b - e r - t c h e r i s d i a d e m e d a t h i s r i s i n g . Thou

" l i v e s t , ( 2 7 ) t h o u a r t s t a b l i s h e d , t h o u r e n e w e s t t h y y o u t h , a n d

"thou art true and perfect ; thy father Rd maketh strong thy

"members, and the company of the gods make acclamations unto

" t h e e . T h e g o d d e s s I s i s ( 2 8 ) i s w i t h t h e e a n d s h e n e v e r l e a v e t h

" t h e e ; [thou art] not overthrown by thine enemies . T h e l o r d s

"of all lands praise thy beauties even as they praise Ra when

"(29) he riseth at the beginning of each day . Thou ris est up

" l i k e a n e x a l t e d o n e u p o n t h y s t a n d a r d , t h y b e a u t i e s e x a l t t h e

"face [of man] and m ake long [his] stride . (3o) I have given

"unto thee the sovereignty of thy father Seb, and the goddess

"M ut , t h y mot h e r, wh o g ave bi rt h t o t h e g ods, broug h t t h e e

" f o r t h a s t h e ( 3 i ) f i r s t b o r n o f f i v e g o d s , a n d c r e a t e d t h y b e a u -

"ties and fashioned thy members . T h o u a r t s t a b l i s h e d a s k i n g ,

"the white crown is upon thy head, a nd thou hast grasped in

" t h y h a n d s t h e c r o o k a n d t h e w h i p ; w h i l s t t h o u w e r t i n t h e

" w o m b , a n d h a d s t n o t u s y e t c o m e f o r t h t h e r e f r o m u p o n t h e

"earth, thou wert (32) crowned lord of the two lands, and the

"Atef c r o w n o f R a w a s u po n t h y b r o w . T h e g o d s c o m e u n t o

"thee bowing low to the ground, and they hold thee in fear ;

" t h e y r e t r e a t a n d d e p a r t w h e n t h e y ( 3 3 ) s e e t h e e w i t h t h e t e r r o r

" o f R d , a n d t h e v i c t o r y o f t h y M a j e s t y i s i n t h e i r h e a r t s . L i f e i s

"with thee, and offerings of m eat and drink (34) follow thee,

" a n d t h a t w h i c h i s t h y d u e i s o f f e r e d u p b e f o r e t h y f a c e . "

"Grant thou that I may follow in the train of thy Majesty

"even as I did upon earth . Let my soul (35) be called [into

" t h e p r e s e n c e ] , a n d l e t i t b e f o u n d b y t h e s i d e o f t h e l o r d s o f

"right and truth . I h a v e c o m e i n t o t h e C i t y o f G o d - t h e

"region [which existed] in primeval time-with [my] soul, and

"wi t h [my] double , an d wi t h [my] khu t o d w e l l i n t h i s l a n d .

" ( 3 6 ) T h e g o d t h e r e o f i s t h e l o r d o f r i g h t a n d t r u t h , h e i s t h e

" l o r d o f t h e t c h e f a u food of t h e g ods, an d h e i s most h oly .

"His land draweth unto itself every [other] land ; t h e Sout h

"cometh sailing d own the river thereto, and the North, (37)

" s t e e r e d t h i t h e r b y w i n d s , c o m e t h d a i l y t o m a k e f e s t i v a l t h e r e i n

"according to the command of the God thereof, who is the lord




" o f p e a c e t h e r e i n . And doth he not say, ' The happiness thereof

" ( 3 8 ) is a care unto me ? ' T h e g o d w h o d w e l l e t h t h e r e i n

"worketh right and truth ; unto him that doeth these things

"he giveth old age, and to him that followeth af ter them rank

"an d h on our , an d at le n g t h h e at t a i n e t h un t o (39) a h appy

" f u n e r a l a n d b u r i a l i n T a - t c h e s e r t . "

"I have come unto thee, and my hands ho ld right and truth,

"and my heart hath no crafty wickedness therein . ( 4 0 ) I o f f e r

" u p b e f o r e t h e e t h a t w h i c h i s t h y d u e , a n d I k n o w t h a t w h e r e o n

" t h o u l i v e s t . I h ave n ot commi t t e d an y si n i n t h e lan d, an d

"I have defrauded no man of (41) that which is his .

" I a m T h o t h , t h e p e r f e c t s c r i b e , w h o s e h a n d s a r e p u r e . I a m

" t h e l o r d o f p u r i t y , t h e d e s t r o y e r o f e v i l , t h e s c r i b e o f r i g h t

"and truth, a nd that which I abominate is (42) sin . B e h o l d

"me, for I am the writing reed of the god Neb-er-tcher, the

"lord of laws, wh o giveth forth the word of wisdom and under-

"standing, and whose speech hath dominion over the two lands .

"I am (43) Th ot h , t h e lord of ri g h t an d t rut h , wh o mak e t h

"t h e fe e ble on e t o g ai n t h e vi ct ory, an d wh o aven g e t h t h e

" w r etc h e d a n d t h e o ppr es s ed o n h i m t h a t w r o nget h h i m . I

" h a v e s c a t t e r e d t h e d a r k n e s s ; ( 4 4 ) I h a v e d r i v e n a w a y t h e s t o r m ,

" a n d I h a v e b r o u g h t t h e w i n d t o U n - n e f e r , t h e b e a u t i f u l b r e e z e

"of the north wind, even as it came forth from the womb (45)

"of h is moth e r . I h ave cause d h i m t o e n t e r i n t o t h e h i dde n

" a b o d e t o v i v i f y t h e h e a r t o f t h e S t i l l - H e a r t , U n - n e f e r , t h e s o n

"of Nut, Horus, triumphant . "

CHAPTER CLXXXIV .

[F r o m t h e P apy r u s o f U : a ( s e e N a v i l l e , o p . c i t . , l i d . 1 . B I . 2io) . ]

Vignette : T h e d e c e a s e d s t a n d i n g u pr i g h t b e f o r e O s i r i s , w h o w e a r s t h e

A t e f c r o w n , a n d h o l d s i n h i s h a n d s t h e w h i p a n d c r o o k , e m b l e m s o f

s o v e r e i g n t y a n d d o m i n i o n .



HYMN TO OSIRIS . 3 4 7

Text : ( i ) THE CHAPTER OF BEING NIGH UNTO OSIRIS. '

[ T h e O s i r i s U a a , t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e e s t a t e s o f A m e n , t r i u m p h a n t ,

s a ith :-]

CHAPTER CLXXXV .

[ F r o m the Pa py r u s o f S u tim es (ed . G u i e y e s s e a n d L e f e b u r e , P a r i s , 1 8 7 7 , P l . 1 ) . ]

Vignette : "Os ir is a t the hea d o f A b tu , the gr ea t go d , Pr inc e o f eter nity

a n d G o v e r n o r o f A m e n t e t " , e n t h r o n e d w i t h i n a s h r i n e ; he holds in his

h a n d s t h e w h i p a n d c r o o k , e m b l e m s o f s ove re i g n t y a n d d o m i n i o n . Before

h i m , w i t h h a n d s r a i s e d i n a d o r a t i o n , s t a n d t h e d e c e a s e d a n d " h i s w i f e

H e n t - n e t e r u , t h e l a d y o f t h e h o u s e , t h e s i n g i n g w o m a n o f A m e n ,

t r i u m p h a n t " .

Text : ( 3 ) THE GIVING OF PRAISES UNTO OSIRIS, AND PAY-

ING HOMAGE UNTO THE LORD OF ETERNITY, AND PROPITIATING

THE GOD IN HIS WILL, AND DECLARING THE RIGHT AND TRUTH,

THE LORD OF WHICH IS UNKNOWN . The Osiris Sutimes, the

l i b a t i o n e r a n d p r e s i d e n t o f t h e a l t a r c h a m b e r i n t h e A p t s , t h e

president of the scribes of the Temple of Amen, triumphant,

saith :-

"Homage to thee, 0 thou holy god, thou mighty and bene-

f i c e n t b e i n g , t h o u P r i n c e o f e t e r n i t y w h o d w e l l e s t i n t h y a b o d e

" i n t h e S e k t e t boat, thou whose risings are manifold in the

" A t e t boat, to thee are praises rendered in heaven and upon

" e a r t h . P e o p l e s a n d n a t i o n s e x a l t t h e e , a n d t h e m a j e s t y o f t h e

" t e r r o r o f h i m i s i n t h e h e a r t s o f m e n , a n d k h u s , a n d t h e d e a d .

" T h y S o u l i s i n T e t t e t ( M e n d es ) a n d t h e t e r r o r o f t h e e i s i n

"Suten-henen ; t h o u s e t t e s t t h e v i s i b l e e m b l e m s o f t h y s e l f i n

" A n n u a n d t h e g r e a t n e s s o f t h y t r a n s f o r m a t i o n s i n t h e d o u b l e

" p l a c e o f p u r i f i c a t io n . I have come unto thee, and my heart

" b a t h r i g h t a n d t r u t h t h e r e i n , a n d t h e r e i s n e i t h e r c r a f t n o r g u i l e

"in my breast ; grant thou that I may have my being among

i . T his C ha pter c o nta ins a b o u t tw o s ho r t l ines o f tex t, o f w hic h o nl y a

few words have come down to us in a single copy ; to make any connected

sense of them is impossible .




" t h e l i v i n g , a n d t h a t I m a y s a i l d o w n a n d u p t h e r i v e r a m o n g

" t h o s e w h o a r e i n t h y f o l l o w i n g . "

CHAPTER CLXXXVI .

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ( B r i t . M u s . No . 10,470, sheet 37) . ]

V i g n e t t e : The goddess Hathor, in the form of a hippopotamus, wear-

i n g upon h e r h e a d a d i s k a n d h o r n s ; in her right hand she holds an un-

i d e n t i f i e d o b ) e c t , a n d i n h e r l e f t t h e e m b l e m o f l i f e . B e f o r e h e r a r e o f f e r -

i n g s , a n d b e h i n d h e r t h e c o w M e h - u r i t , w h o m a y b e i d e n t i f i e d w i t h H a t h o r ,

looks forth from the funeral mountain . At the foot of the mountain is

the tomb, and in the foreground grows a group of flowering plants .

Text : "Hat h or, l ad y o f A me n t e t , mi g h t y d we lle r i n t h e f un e ral

"moun t ai n , l ady o f T a- t c h e se rt , d aug h t e r ( or e ye ) o f R d , d we lle r

" b e f o re h i m, b e aut i f u l o f f a c e i n t h e B o at o f mi lli on s o f ye ars,

"t h e h a b i t at i on ( or se at ) o f p eace , c re at or o f l a w i n t h e b o at ( ? )

" o f t h e f a v o u r e d o n e sI n t h e v e r s i o n s o f t h i s C h a p t e r g i v e n b y N a vi l l e ( o p . c i t . ,

Bd . I . B I . 2t2) t h e d e c e a s e d , s o m e t i m e s a c c o m p a n i e d b y h i s

w i f e , i s s e e n s t a n d i n g i n a d o r a t i o n b e f o r e t h e h i p p o p o t a m u s

a n d c o w g o d d e s s e s . T h e t e x t s w h i c h o c c u p y t h e u p p e r p o r t i o n s

o f t h e s c e n e s a r e l o n g e r t h a n t h a t g i v e n i n t h e P a p y r u s o f A n i ,

p a r t o f w h i c h i s m a n i f e s t l y c o r r u p t , a n d t h o u g h a l l o f t h e m

a r c m o r e o r l e s s f r a g m e n t a r y w e l e a r m f r o m t h e m t h a t t h i s

C h a p t e r i s e n t i t l e d , " T h e p r a i s e o f H a t h o r , t h e m i s t r e s s o f

A m e n t e t , a n d t h e p a y i n g o f h o m a g e t o M e h - u r i t " . After recit-

i n g t h e t i t l e s o f H a t h o r t h e d e c e a s e d d e s c r i b e s h i s d e v o t i o n t o

t h e g o d s a n d t h e w o r k s w h i c h h e d i d f o r t h e m w h i l s t h e w a s

u p o n e a r t h , a n d h a v i n g s t a t e d t h a t h e i s i n n o c e n t o f o f f e n c e ,

h e e n t r e a t s t h e g o d d e s s t h a t h e m a y h a v e h i s e x i s t e n c e a m o n g

h e r di v i n e f o l lowe rs an d t h at s ui t a b le o f f e ri n g s o f a l l ki n ds m ay

be made unto him in Amentet .



CH APTER O F ENTERING I N TO THE CO MP A NY OF TH E GODS . 349

CHAPTER CLXXXVII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . M u s . No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e ti9)]

V i g n e t t e : This Chapter is without a Vignette in the Papyrus of Nu .

T e x t : ( r) THE CHAPTER OF ENTERING IN UNTO THE COM-

PANY OF THE GODS . T h e ov e rse e r o f t h e p alace , t h e c h an ce llor-

in-chief , Nu, triumphant, saith :-

"Homage to you, 0 company of the gods of Rd, I have

" c o m e b e f o r e y o u , I a m i n t h e f o l l o w i n g (2) o f R d , I h a v e

" m a de m y w a y, a n d I h a ve p a s se d i n a m on g y o u . L e t n o t m y

" h a n d b e r e p u l s e d i n w h a t s o ev e r I d o t h i s d a y . "

CHAPTER CLXXXVIII .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus. No . 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t t g ) . ]

V i g n e t t e : This Chapter is without a Vignette in the Papyrus o f Nu .

T e x t : ( i) [THE CHAPTER OF] THE GOING IN OF THE SOUL

TO BUILD AN ABODE AND TO COME FORTH BY DAY IN HUMAN

FORM . (2) The overseer of the palace, the chancellor-in-chief,

Nu, triumphant, the son of the overseer of the palace, (2) Amen-

b etep, [triumphant,] saith

" [ C o m e ] i n p e a c e ! Th o u h a s t a khu . Enter [thou] in peace

"into the divine Utchat ! Behold, thou hast a k h u , together with

"a soul ( b a ) a n d a s h a d e ( k h a i b i t ) t o look ( 3 ) t h e r e u p o n . M a y

"it behold [me ], w h e n I a m j u d g e d , i n w h a t e v e r p l a c e i t m a y

" b e , w i t h m y a t t r i b u t e s , a n d w i t h m y f o r m , a n d w i t h m y

" f a c u l t i e s ( 4 ) o f m i n d , a n d w i t h a l l m y a t t r i b u t e s o r d e r e d a n d

"p e r f e ct , e v e n as a s o ul w h i c h i s p rov i de d [ wi t h a l l t h i n g s] an d

" i s d i v i n e . May I shine like Rd in his divine splendour (5) in

" t h e t e m p l e o fn d m a y [ m y ] s o u l a n d m y s h a d e c o m e




"[t o me ] up on t h e i r le g s f rom t h e p lace wh e re I am judg e d,

"and beh old me (6) . May I stand up, and sit down, and enter

"into the house of his body, which, behold, hath become one

" o f t h e s t a r r y g o d s o f O s i r i s ( 7 ) w h o t r a v e l b y d a y , a n d j o u r -

n e y b y n i g h t , a n d c e l e b r a t e t h e f e s t i v a l s . "

CHAPTER CLXXXIX .

[From the Papyrus of Nu (Brit . Mus . No. 1 0 , 4 7 7 , s h e e t i 9 ) . ]

Vignette : T h i s C h a p t e r i s w i t h o u t a V i g n e t t e i n t h e P a p y r u s o f N u .

Text : ( I ) THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING A MAN PERFORM

A JOURNEY ( 2 ) BEING HUNGRY(?), AND OF NOT LETTING HIM

EAT FILTH . T h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f ,

Nu, triumphant, the son of the overseer of the palace, Amen-

b e t e p , t r i u m p h a n t , s a i t h :-

"Th e t h i n gs wh i ch are an abomi n at i on un t o me , t h e t h i n g s

"wh i ch are an abomi n at i on un t o me , I wi ll n ot e at . Wh a t I

" a b o m i n a t e ( 3 ) i s f i l t h , a n d I w i l l n o t e a t t h e r e o f [ i n t h e p l a c e

" o f ] t h e s e p u l c h r a l c a k e s [ w h i c h a r e o f f e r e d u n t o ] t h e K a s . L e t

"[me] n ot be t h rown down up on i t , le t i t n ot li g h t up on my

" b o d y , l e t i t n o t e n t e r i n t o m y f i n g e r s , ( 4 ) a n d l e t i t n o t j o i n

" i t s e l f u n t o m y t o e s . Thou shalt live, then, upon that whic h

"the gods and the Khus decree for m e in this place and upon

" t h a t w h i c h i s b r o u g h t u n t o t h e e t h e r e . Let me live upon the

" ( 5 ) seven cakes which shall be brought unto me, four cakes

"before Horus , and three cakes before Thoth . T h e g o d s a n d

" t h e Khus sh all say un t o me , `What man n e r of food woul dst

"thou h ave given unto thee?' [A nd I reply, `Let me eat (6)

" m y f o o d b e n e a t h t h e s y c a m o r e t r e e o f t h e g o d d e s s H a t h o r ,

" a n d l e t m y t i m e s b e a m o n g t h e d i v i n e b e i n g s w h o h a v e

" a l i g h t e d t h e r e o n . L et m e h a v e t h e po w er t o o r d er m y o w n

"field s in Tattu and [my own] gr owing crops (7) in Annu . L e t

" m e l i v e u p o n b r e a d m a d e o f w h i t e b a r l e y , a n d l e t m y b e e r

"be [made] from red grain ; and may the persons of my father



THE CHAPTER OF NOT LETTING A ALAN EAT FILTH 3 5 1

" an d m o t h e r b e g i v e n unto me a s (8) guardians of my door

" a n d f o r t h e o r d e r i n g o f t h e d i v i n e t e r r i t o r y . L e t m e b e s o u n d

"an d st ron g , le t me h ave a larg e room, le t me mak e a way,

" l e t m e h a v e m y s e a t w h e r e v e r I p l e a s e , l i k e a l i v i n g s o u l , ( g )

"and let me never be kept in restraint by mine enemy . " '

"That which is an abomination unto me is filth and I will

"not eat thereof ; let me never pass over filth and off al in

"An n u, but le t i t depart from me . (io) I am the Bull who

" o r d e r e t h h i s h a b i t a t i o n . I fly like the mighty one, I cackle

" l i k e t h e s m en goose, and I alight upon the beautiful (ii)

"sycamore which standeth in the Lake of Akeb . I come fort h

" a n d I a l i g h t u p o n i t ; h e w h o a l i g h t e t h t h e r e i n t h e f o r m o f t h e

" g r e a t g o d s h a l l n o t b e d r i v e n a w a y t h e r e f r o m . Th e ( 1 2 ) t h i n g s

"which I abominate I will not eat ; the things which I abomi-

n a t e , t h e t h i n g s w h i c h I a b o m i n a t e a r e f i l t h a n d o f f a l , a n d I

" w i l l n o t e a t t h e r e o f . T h e t h i n g s w h i c h a r e a n a b o m i n a t i o n

"unto myk a

a r e f i l t h a n d o f f a l ; t h e y s h a l l n e v e r e n t e r i n t o

"my body, (i3) t h e y sh all n eve r come i n t o my h an ds, an d I

"will never tread upon them with my sandals . 0 s e n d y e n o t

" f o r t h a g a i n s t m e f o u l w a t e r , h a r m v e n o t m e (14) w i t h t h e r o d ,

"give ye not unto [me]n a t c h y e m e n o t a w a y f r o m"the edge of your d eep cisterns, and let me not depart from

"you being (15) overthrown . Th e divine A u k h e m u beings of

" t h e g o d P e n - h e s e b ( ? ) shall say [unto me], Ùpon what wilt

" t h o u l i v e i n t h i s l a n d w h i t h e r t h o u a r t g o i n g , a n d w h e r e i n t h o u

" w o u l d s t b e g l o r i o u s ? ' [ A n d I r e p l y ] , ` I w i l l l i v e u p o n ( i 6 ) t h e

"cake s [made ] of black g rai n , an d up on ale [made ] of wh i t e

"g rai n , an d up on four cake s i n Se kh e t He t ep, wh i ch i s more

"than [the food] of any (or every) god . M o r e o v e r , I h a v e f o u r

" l o a v e s o f b r e a d d u r i n g t h e c o u r s e ( i 7 ) o f e a c h a n d e v e r y d a y ,

"besides four loaves in Annu, which is more than [the food]

" o f a n y ( o r e v e r y ) g o d ' . And the divine A u k h e m u b e i n g s o f t h e

" g o d P e n - h e s e b ( ? ) s h a l l s a y [ u n t o m e ] , ` W h a t h a s t t h o u b r o u g h t

"to eat (z8) in that holy fu rrow?' on that day wh en I receive

" m y o f f e r i n g s w i t h a n t i u n g u e n t . [ A n d I r e p l y ] , ' I w i l l n o t e a t

" t h e r e o f , i t s h a l l n o t c o m e i n t o ( i g ) m y h a n d s , a n d I w i l l n o t



3 5 2 THE CHAPTERS OF COATING FORTH BY DAY .

" t r e a d t h e r e o n with my s a n d a l s ' . A n d t h e d i v i n e A u k h e m u

" b e i n g s o f t h e g o d P e n - h e s e b ( ? ) shall say unto me, Ùpon what

" w i l t t h o u l i v e ( 2 0 ) in this land whither thou art going, and

" w h e r e i n t h o u w o u l d s t b e g l o r i o u s ? ' [ A n d I r e p l y ] , ` I w i l l l i v e

"up on t h e seven cake s wh i ch sh all b e broug h t , four i n t h e

"Temple of Horus, and thr ee in the Temple of Thoth' . ( 2 1 ) A n d

" t h e d i v i n e A u k h e m u beings of the god Pen-heseb ( ? ) s h a l l s a y

"[unto me], 'Who, then, shall b ring them unto thee?' [And I

" r e p l y ] , ` T h e d i v i n e a s s o c i a t e o f t h e t e m p l e s o f t h e U r h e t c h a t i

"g odde sse s of An n u' . [An d t h ey say], ( 2 2 ) `Where wi l t t h ou

" e a t t h e m ? ' [ A n d I r e p l y ] , ` B e n e a t h t h e b e a m s o f t h e b e a u t i f u l

" a r k t o w h i c h h y m n s a r e s u n g a s i t i s b o r n e a l o n g ; t h i t h e r

" s h a l l I b e t a k e n ' . And the divine A u k h e m u beings of the god

"P e n- h e se b ( ? ) s h a l l s a y . [ u n t o m e ] , ( 2 3 ) 'Wouldst thou live,

"then, upon the things [which belong to] another every day?'

"And I reply, 'I will myself plough the fields of [my] estate

"in Sekhet-Aarru' . And the divine A u k h e m ub e i n g s ( 2 4 ) o f t h e

"g od P e n- h e se b sh all say [un t o me ], 'Who wi ll p rot e ct t h e m

" f o r t h e e ? ' A n d I r e p l y , ` T h e t w o d i v i n e d a u g h t e r s o f t h e

" d i v i n e k i n g o f t h e N o r t h , b e s i d e s t h o s e w h o b e l o n g t o t h e m ' ( ? ).

"[And the divine A u k h e m u b e i n g s o f t h e g o d P e n - h e s e b ( ? ) s h a l l

"say un t o me ,] `Who wi ll p loug h ( 2 5 ) them for thee?' [And I

" r e p l y ] , ` T h e d i v i n e c h i e f s w h o d w e l l a m o n g t h e g o d s o f h e a v e n

"and the gods of earth . T h e t r e a d i n g d o w n [ o f t h e e a r t h ] s h a l l

" b e d o n e f o r m e b y t h e c o w - g o d d e s s H a p i u w h o d w e l l e t h i n

" t h e c i t y o f S a u , (26) and the harvest shal l be reaped f or me

" b y S u t i , t h e l o r d o f h e a v e n a n d o f e a r t h ' . Hail, ye who turn

" b a c k ( ? ) t h e b l o s s o m s u p o n y o u r s e l v e s , y e w h o s e t r a n s g r e s s i o n s

" a r e d o n e a w a y w i t h , w h o s e f a c e s a r e h o l y , ( 2 7 ) b e h o l d , I

"am with the divine beings of Set at the mountain of Bakhau,

"and I sit down along with the spiritual bodies who are per-

f e c t ( 2 8 ) o n t h e s i d e o f t h e L a k e o f O s i r i s t o r e j o i c e ( ? ) [ m y ]

" h e a r t . S h a l l n o t I m a k e t h e o v e r s e e r o f t h e p a l a c e , t h e c h a n -

" c e l l o r - i n - c h i e f , N u , t r i u m p h a n t , t o k n o w l i f e ? "



THE CHAPTER OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHU 3 5 3

CHAPTER CXC. '

[ F r o m t h e P a p y r u s o f N u ( B r i t . Mus . No . 10,471, sheet 16) . ]

V i g n e t t e : This Chapter is without a Vignette in the Papyrus of Nu .

T e x t : ( i) THE BOOK OF MAKING PERFECT THE KHUWITHIN

R A , OF MAKING HIM TO GAIN THE MASTERY BEFORE TEM, OFMAGNIFYING HIM BEFORE OSIRIS, OF MAKING HIM (2) TO BE

POWERFUL BEFORE THE GOVERNOR OF AMENTET, AND OF CAUS-

ING HIM TO BE MIGHTY BEFORE THE COMPANY OF THE GODS .

R u b r i c : THIS BOOK SHALL BE RECITED ON THE [FIRST] DAY OF THE

MONTH, ON THE FESTIVAL OF THE SIX, ON THE FESTIVAL OF UAK, ON THE

FESTIVAL OF THOTH, (3) ON THE BIRTHDAY OF OSIRIS, ON THE FESTIVAL OF

SEKRI, AND ON THE FESTIVAL OF THE NIGHT OF HAKER . [ I T W I L L E NA B L E

A MAN TO PASS THROUGH] THE HIDDEN PLACES OF THE TUAT, AND TO

PENETRATE THE SECRET HABITATIONS OF NETER-KHERT, TO BREAKTHROUGH (4) MOUNTAINS, AND TO OPEN UP A -\\ 'AV THROUGH THE SE-

CRET VALLEYS WHICH ARE UNKNOWN. THIS CHAPTER SHALL PRESERVE

(OR EMBALM) THE KHU, IT SHALL MAKE BROAD HIS STEPS, IT SHALL GIVE

HIM [POWER TO] WALK, IT SHALL DESTROY THE (5) DEAFNESS OF HIS

FACE, AND IT SHALL ENABLE HIM TO HAKE A WAY FOR HIS FACE WITH

THE GOD. WHEN THOU RECITEST [THIS CHAPTER] THOU SH ALT NOT LET

ANY MAN WHATSOEVER SEE THEE EXCEPT HIM THAT IS INDEED DEAR TO

THY HEART AND THE PRIEST WHO READETH THE SERVICE KHER HEB),

(6) THOU SHALT NOT LET ANY OTHER PERSON SEE [THEE], AND NO SER-

VANT SHALL COME OUTSIDE [THE CHAMBER WHEREIN THOU ART] . THOU

SHALT RECITE [THIS CHAPTER] INSIDE A CHAMBER [LINED] WITH CLOTH

DECORATED ( L I I ER A L L Y , SHOT) WITH STARS THROUGHOUT . THE SOUL OF

EVERY KHU (I. E., THE DECEASED) FOR (7) WHOM THIS BOOK H ATH BEEN

RECITED SHALL COME FORTH AMONG THE LIVING, HE HIMSELF SHALL

COME FORTH BY DAY, AND HE SHALL GAIN THE MASTERY AMONG THE

GODS AND SHALL NOT BE (8) REPULSED BY THEM, AND THESE GODS SHALL

REVOLVE ROUND ABOUT HIII, AND THEY SHALL ACKNOWLEDGE ( L I T ER A L L Y ,

RECOGNIZE) HIM, AND INDEED HE SHALL BE AS THE DIVINE ONE AMONG

THEM. AND HE SHALL MAKE THEE TO KNOW THE TRANSFORMATIONS

t . T h i s C h a p t e r m a y b e m e r e l y t h e R u b r i c o f t h e p r e c e d i n g C h a p t er i n t h e

Papyrus of Nu to which a title has been given ; it is only printe d here fo r

t h e s a k e o f c o n v e n ie n c e .

23



3 54 THE CHAPTERS OF COMING FORTH BY DAY.

WHICH SHALL COME TO HIM IN THE LIGHT . (g) THIS BOOK IS INDEED A

VERY GREAT MYSTERY ; AND THOU SHALT NEVER ALLOW THOSE WHO

DWELL IN THE PAPYRUS SWAMPS OF THE DELTA (I. E., IGNORANT FOLK)

OR ANY PERSON WHATSOEVER TO SEE IT .

NOTE .

The Introduction to Chapter XCIX printed on pp. 5o3-507 of the

v o l u m e o f h i e r o g l y p h i c t e x t e x is t s i n o n e p a p y r u s o n l y ; c e r t a i n p a s s a g e s

i n i t m a y b e t r a n s l a t e d r e a d i l y , b u t o t h e r s a r e f u l l o f d i f f i c u l t y , a n d I h a v e

n o t v e n t u r e d t o o f f e r a r e n d e r i n g o f i t .

ERRATAP l a t e I I I, f o r 9 , o o o r e a d 9 , g o o ; p . CLX, 1 . 25, for IVtI' read X IIIth ; a n d

delete "in which period . . . . upon it" ; p . 27, 1 . 17 , f o r A n i r e a d N u ;

P . 5 9 , 1 . 2 2, f o r S a - m e r - f r e a d A n - m a u t - f ; p . 6 2 , 1 . i o , f o r N e p h t h y s r e a d

Hapi ; p . 8 o , 1 . zi, for CXVIII read CXLVIII ; pp . zo3, 204, for Usr-maat

read Heq-maat ; p . z o 6 , 1 . ig, for CXXIX read CXXVIII ; p . 3o8, 1 . zz, for

IV read V .



WORKS ON EGYPTOLOGYAND

Documents

The Egyptian Book of the Dead 1898